Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using ABC to allocate costs and compute profit Suppose Pacific’s direct labor rate was $310 per hour, the documentation cost was $34 per page, the information technology support cost was $200 per application, and training costs were $110 per direct labor hour. The Crockett engagement used the following resources last month:
|
Cost Driver
|
Crockett
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
150
|
|
Pages
|
320
|
|
Applications used
|
75
|
Requirements
1. Compute the cost assigned to the Crockett engagement, using the ABC system.
2. Compute the operating income from the Crockett engagement, using the ABC system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Just in time characteristics Consider the following characteristics of either a JIT production system or a traditional production system.
a. Products are produced in large batches.
b. Large stocks of finished goods protect against lost sales if customer demand is higher than expected.
c. Suppliers make frequent deliveries of small quantities of raw materials.
d. Employees do a variety of jobs, including maintenance and setups as well as operating machines.
e. Machines are grouped into self contained production cells or production lines.
f. Machines are grouped according to function. For example, all cutting machines are located in one area.
g. The final operation in the production sequence “pulls” parts from the preceding operation.
h. Each employee is responsible for inspecting his or her own work.
i. Management works with suppliers to ensure defect free raw materials.
Requirement
1. Indicate whether each is characteristic of a JIT production system or a traditional production system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording JIT costing journal entries Quality Products uses a JIT system to manufacture trading pins for the Hard Rock Café. The standard cost per pin is $2 for raw materials and $3 for conversion costs. Last month Quality recorded the following data:
|
Number of pins completed
|
4,000 pins
|
Raw material purchases
|
$ 9,500
|
|
Number of pins sold
|
3,300 pins
|
Conversion costs
|
$ 14,000
|
Requirement
1. Use JIT costing to prepare journal entries for the month, including the entry to close the Conversion costs account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product costing in an activity based costing system Fortunado, Inc., uses activity based costing to account for its chrome bumper manufacturing process. Company managers have identified four manufacturing activities: materials handling, machine setup, insertion of parts, and finishing. The budgeted activity costs for 2012 and their allocation bases are as follows:
|
|
Total
|
|
|
Activity
|
Budgeted Cost
|
Allocation Base
|
|
Materials handling
|
$ 9,000
|
Number of parts
|
|
Machine setup
|
3,900
|
Number of setups
|
|
Insertion of parts
|
42,000
|
Number of parts
|
|
Finishing
|
82,000
|
Finishing direct labor hours
|
|
Total
|
$ 136,900
|
|
Fortunado expects to produce 500 chrome bumpers during the year. The bumpers are expected to use 4,000 parts, require 10 setups, and consume 1,000 hours of finishing time.
Requirements
1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.
2. Compute the indirect manufacturing cost of each bumper.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product costing in an activity based costing system Turbo Champs, Corp., uses activity based costing to account for its motorcycle manufacturing process. Company managers have identified three supporting manufacturing activities: inspection, machine setup, and machine maintenance. The budgeted activity costs for 2012 and their allocation bases are as follows:
|
|
Total
|
|
|
Activity
|
Budgeted Cost
|
Allocation Base
|
|
Inspection
|
$6,000
|
Number of inspections
|
|
Machine setup
|
32,000
|
Number of setups
|
|
Machine maintenance Total
|
5,000
|
Maintenance hours
|
|
|
$43,000
|
|
Turbo Champs expects to produce 20 custom built motorcycles for the year. The motorcycles are expected to require 100 inspections, 20 setups, and 100 maintenance hours.
Requirements
1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.
2. Compute the indirect manufacturing cost of each motorcycle.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product costing in an activity based costing system Elton Company manufactures wheel rims. The controller budgeted the following ABC allocation rates for 2012:
|
Activity
|
Allocation Base
|
Cost
Allocation Rate
|
|
Materials handling
|
Number of parts
|
$4.00
|
per part
|
|
Machine setup
|
Number of setups
|
500.00
|
per setup
|
|
Insertion of parts
|
Number of parts
|
23.00
|
per part
|
|
Finishing
|
Finishing hours
|
50.00
|
per hour
|
The number of parts is now a feasible allocation base because Elton recently purchased bar coding technology. Elton produces two wheel rim models: standard and deluxe. Budgeted data for 2012 are as follows:
|
|
Standard
|
Deluxe
|
|
Parts per rim
|
6.0
|
9.0
|
|
Setups per 500 rims
|
17.0
|
17.0
|
|
Finishing hours per rim
|
5.0
|
6.5
|
|
Total direct labor hours per rim
|
6.0
|
7.0
|
The company expects to produce 500 units of each model during the year.
Requirements
1. Compute the total budgeted indirect manufacturing cost for 2012.
2. Compute the ABC indirect manufacturing cost per unit of each model. Carry each cost to the nearest cent.
3. Prior to 2012, Elton used a direct labor hour single allocation base system. Compute the (single) allocation rate based on direct labor hours for 2012. Use this rate to determine the indirect manufacturing cost per wheel rim for each model, to the nearest cent.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elton’s managers have decided to use the same indirect manufacturing costs per wheel rim that they computed in 2012. In addition to the unit indirect manufacturing costs, the following data are budgeted for the company’s standard and deluxe models for 2013:
|
|
Standard
|
Deluxe
|
|
Sales price
|
800.00
|
940.00
|
|
Direct materials
|
31.00
|
50.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
45.00
|
56.00
|
Because of limited machine hour capacity, Elton can produce either 2,000 standard rims or 2,000 deluxe rims.
Requirements
1. If Elton’s managers rely on the ABC unit cost data computed in, which model will they produce? Carry each cost to the nearest cent. (Ignore operating expenses for this calculation.)
2. If the managers rely on the single allocation base cost data, which model will they produce?
3. Which course of action will yield more income for Elton?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Activity based management and target cost Controller Michael Bender is surprised by the increase in cost of the deluxe model under ABC. Market research shows that for the deluxe rim to provide a reasonable profit, Elton will have to meet a target manufacturing cost of $656 per rim. A value engineering study by Elton’s employees suggests that modifications to the finishing process could cut finishing cost from $50 to $40 per hour and reduce the finishing direct labor hours per deluxe rim from 6.5 hours to 6 hours. Direct materials would remain unchanged at $50 per rim, as would direct labor at $56 per rim. The materials handling, machine setup, and insertion of parts activity costs also would remain the same.
Requirement
1. Would implementing the value engineering recommendation enable Elton to achieve its target cost for the deluxe rim?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording manufacturing costs in a JIT costing system Dubuc produces electronic calculators. Suppose Dubuc’s standard cost per calculator is $27 for materials and $63 for conversion costs. The following data apply to August production:
|
Materials purchased
|
$6,700
|
|
|
Conversion costs incurred
|
14,000
|
|
|
Number of calculators produced
|
|
200 calculators
|
|
Number of calculators sold
|
|
195 calculators
|
Requirements
1. Prepare summary journal entries for August using JIT costing, including the entry to close the Conversion costs account.
2. The beginning balance of Finished goods inventory was $1,700. Use a T account to find the ending balance of Finished goods inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying quality costs Delance & Co. makes electronic components. Chris Delance, the president, recently instructed vice president Jim Bruegger to develop a total quality control program. “If we don’t at least match the quality improvements our competitors are making,” he told Bruegger, “we’ll soon be out of business.” Bruegger began by listing various “costs of quality” that Delance incurs. The first six items that came to mind were:
a. Costs incurred by Delance customer representatives traveling to customer sites to repair
defective products, $15,000.
b. Lost profits from lost sales due to reputation for less than perfect products, $60,000.
c. Costs of inspecting components in one of Delance’s production processes, $25,000.
d. Salaries of engineers who are redesigning components to withstand electrical overloads, $80,000.
e. Costs of reworking defective components after discovery by company inspectors, $40,000.
f. Costs of electronic components returned by customers, $55,000.
Requirement
1. Classify each item as a prevention cost, an appraisal cost, an internal failure cost, or an external failure cost. Then, determine the total cost of quality by category.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying quality costs and using these costs to make decisions Clarke, Inc., manufactures door panels. Suppose Clarke is considering spending the following amounts on a new total quality management (TQM) program:
|
Strength testing one item from each batch of panels
|
$62,000
|
|
Training employees in TQM
|
25,000
|
|
Training suppliers in TQM
|
38,000
|
|
Identifying suppliers who commit to on time delivery of
|
|
|
perfect quality materials
|
56,000
|
Clarke expects the new program would save costs through the following:
|
Avoid lost profits from lost sales due to disappointed customers
|
$94,000
|
|
Avoid rework and spoilage
|
60,000
|
|
Avoid inspection of raw materials
|
55,000
|
|
Avoid warranty costs
|
20,000
|
Requirements
1. Classify each cost as a prevention cost, an appraisal cost, an internal failure cost, or an external failure cost.
2. Should Clarke implement the new quality program? Give your reason.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying quality costs and using these costs to make decisions Kane manufactures high quality speakers. Suppose Kane is considering spending the following amounts on a new quality program:
|
Additional 20 minutes of testing for each speaker
|
$620,000
|
|
Negotiating with and training suppliers to obtain higher quality
|
|
|
materials and on time delivery
|
410,000
|
|
Redesigning the speakers to make them easier to manufacture
|
1,350,000
|
Kane expects this quality program to save costs, as follows:
|
Reduce warranty repair costs
|
$ 225,000
|
|
Avoid inspection of raw materials
|
540,000
|
|
Avoid rework because of fewer defective units
|
800,000
|
It also expects this program to avoid lost profits from the following:
|
Lost sales due to disappointed customers
|
$ 940,000
|
|
Lost production time due to rework
|
278,000
|
Requirements
1. Classify each of these costs into one of the four categories of quality costs (prevention, appraisal, internal failure, external failure).
2. Should Kane implement the quality program? Give your reasons.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive accounting for manufacturing transactions School Stars produces stars for elementary teachers to reward their students. School Stars’ trial balance on June 1 follows:
|
SCHOOL STARS
Trial Balance
June 1, 2012
|
|
|
Balance
|
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
17,000$
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
170,000
|
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
6,200
|
|
|
Work in process
|
43,000
|
|
|
Finished goods
|
21,300
|
|
|
Plant assets
|
250,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
71,000$
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
133,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
|
3,300
|
|
Common stock
|
|
144,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
156,200
|
|
Sales revenue
|
—
|
—
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
—
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
—
|
|
|
Marketing and general expenses
|
—
|
|
|
Total
|
507,500$
|
507,500$
|
June 1 balances in the subsidiary ledgers were as follows:
• Materials subledger: $4,300 paper and $1,900 indirect materials
• Work in process subledger: Job 120 $43,000; $0 for Job 121
• Finished goods subledger: $9,300 Large Stars and $12,000 Small Stars
June transactions are summarized as follows:
a. Collections on account, $155,000.
b. Marketing and general expenses incurred and paid, $22,000.
c. Payments on account, $37,000.
d. Materials purchases on credit: Paper, $26,600; indirect materials, $4,200.
e. Materials used in production (requisitioned):
• Job 120: Paper, $900
• Job 121: Paper, $7,850
• Indirect materials, $1,600
f. Wages incurred and assigned during June, $43,000. Labor time records for the month: Job 120, $4,800; Job 121, $18,500; indirect labor, $19,700.
g. Wages paid in June include the balance in the Wages payable account at May 31 and $39,900 of wages incurred during June.
h. Depreciation on plant and equipment, $2,700.
i. Manufacturing overhead was allocated at the predetermined rate of 90% of direct labor cost.
j. Jobs completed during the month: Job 120, 600,000 Large Stars at total cost of $53,020.
k. Credit sales on account: all of Job 120 for $133,000.
l. Closed the Manufacturing overhead account to Cost of goods sold.
Requirements
1. Journalize the transactions for the company. School uses a perpetual inventory system.
2. Open T accounts for the general ledger, the Materials ledger, the Work in process ledger, and the finished goods ledger. Insert each account balance as given, and use the reference Bal. Post the journal entries to the T accounts using the transaction letters as a reference.
3. Prepare a trial balance at June 30, 2012.
4. Use the Work in process inventory T account to prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the month of June.
5. Prepare an income statement for the month of June. To calculate cost of goods sold, you may want to review. (Hint: In transaction l, you closed any under/over allocated manufacturing overhead to Cost of goods sold. In the income statement, show this correction as an adjustment to Cost of goods sold. If manufacturing overhead is under allocated, the adjustment will increase Cost of goods sold.
If overhead is over allocated, the adjustment will decrease Cost of goods sold.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for manufacturing overhead Superior Woods manufactures jewelry boxes. The primary materials (wood, brass, and glass) and direct labor are traced directly to the products. Manufacturing overhead costs are allocated based on machine hours. Data for 2012 follow:
|
|
Estimated (Budget)
|
Actual
|
|
Machine hours
|
28,000 hours
|
32,400 hours
|
|
Maintenance labor (repairs to equipment)
|
$16,000
|
$26,500
|
|
Plant supervisor’s salary
|
46,000
|
47,000
|
|
Screws, nails, and glue
|
23,000
|
46,000
|
|
Plant utilities
|
42,000
|
93,850
|
|
Freight out
|
35,000
|
47,500
|
|
Depreciation on plant and
|
|
|
|
equipment
|
83,000
|
82,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
46,000
|
59,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate.
2. Post actual and allocated manufacturing overhead to the Manufacturing overhead T account.
3. Close the under or over allocated overhead to Cost of goods sold.
4. The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate usually turns out to be inaccurate. Why don’t accountants just use the actual manufacturing overhead rate?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job order costing in a service company Skylark Design, Inc., is a Web site design and consulting firm. The firm uses a job order costing system in which each client is a different job. Skylark Design traces direct labor, licensing costs, and travel costs directly to each job. It allocates indirect costs to jobs based on a predetermined indirect cost allocation rate, computed as a percentage of direct labor costs.
At the beginning of 2013, managing partner Judi Jacquin prepared the following budget estimates:
|
Direct labor hours (professional)
|
hours8,000
|
|
Direct labor costs (professional)
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Support staff salaries
|
664,000
|
|
Computer leases
|
47,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
23,000
|
|
Office rent
|
66,000
|
In November 2013, Skylark Design served several clients. Records for two clients appear here:
|
|
Food Coop
|
Martin
Chocolates
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
900 hours
|
100 hours
|
|
Software licensing costs
|
$3,500
|
$100
|
|
Travel costs
|
11,000
|
—
|
Requirements
1. Compute Skylark Design’s direct labor rate and its predetermined indirect cost allocation rate for 2012.
2. Compute the total cost of each job.
3. If Jacquin wants to earn profits equal to 50% of sales revenue, how much (what fee) should she charge each of these two clients?
4. Why does Skylark Design assign costs to jobs?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for manufacturing overhead This problem continues the Draper Consulting, Inc., situation Draper Consulting uses a job order costing system in which each client is a different job. Draper traces direct labor, daily per diem, and travel costs directly to each job. It allocates indirect costs to jobs based on a predetermined indirect cost allocation rate, computed as a percentage of direct labor costs. At the beginning of 2013, the controller prepared the following budget:
|
Direct labor hours (professional)
|
5,500 hours
|
|
Direct labor costs (professional)
|
$990,000
|
|
Support staff salaries
|
105,000
|
|
Computer leases
|
48,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
15,000
|
|
Office rent
|
30,000
|
In November 2013, Draper served several clients. Records for two clients appear here:
|
|
Tommy’s
|
Marcia’s
|
|
|
Trains
|
Cookies
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
730
|
300 hours
|
|
Meal—per diem
|
$2,600
|
$600
|
|
Travel costs
|
11,000
|
0
|
Requirements
1. Compute Draper’s predetermined indirect cost allocation rate for 2012.
2. Compute the total cost of each job.
3. If Draper wants to earn profits equal to 25% of sales revenue, how much (what fee) should it charge each of these two clients?
4. Why does Draper assign costs to jobs?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nature’s Own Garden manufactures organic fruit preserves sold primarily through health food stores and on the Web. The company closes for two weeks each December to enable employees to spend time with their families over the holiday season. Nature’s Own Garden’s manufacturing overhead is mostly straight line depreciation on its plant, and air conditioning costs for keeping the berries cool during the summer months. The company uses direct labor hours as the manufacturing overhead allocation base. President Cynthia Ortega has just approved new accounting software and is telling controller Jack Strong about her decision. “I think this new software will be great,” Ortega says. “It will save you time in preparing all those reports.” “Yes, and having so much more information just a click away will help us make better decisions and help control costs,” replies Strong. “We need to consider how we can use the new system to improve our business practices.” “And I know just where to start,” says Ortega. “You complain each year about having to predict the weather months in advance for estimating air conditioning costs to include in the calculation of the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate, when professional meteorologists can’t even get tomorrow’s forecast right! I think we should calculate the predetermined overhead rate on a monthly basis.” Controller Strong is not so sure this is a good idea.
Requirements
1. What are the advantages and disadvantages of Ortega’s proposal?
2. Should Nature’s Own Garden compute its predetermined manufacturing overhead rate on an annual basis or monthly basis? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Farley, Inc., is a manufacturer that produces customized computer components for several well known computer assembly companies. Farley’s latest contract with CompWest.com calls for arley to deliver sound cards that simulate surround sound from two speakers. Farley spent several hundred thousand dollars to design the sound card to meet CompWest.com’s specifications. Farley’s president, Bryon Wilson, has stipulated a pricing policy that requires the bid price for a new job to be based on Farley’s estimated costs to design, manufacture, distribute, and provide customer service for the job, plus a profit margin. Upon reviewing the contract figures, Farley’s controller, Paul York, was startled to find that the cost estimates developed by Farley’s cost accountant, Tony Hayes, for the CompWest.com bid were based on only the manufacturing costs. York is upset with Hayes. He is not sure what to do next.
Requirements
1. How did using manufacturing cost only, instead of using all costs associated with the CompWest.com job, affect the amount of Farley’s bid for the job?
2. Identify the parties involved in Paul York’s dilemma. What are his alternatives? How would each party be affected by each alternative? What should York do next?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jerry never imagined he’d be sitting there in Washington being grilled mercilessly by a panel of congressmen. But a young government auditor picked up on his scheme last year. His company produced hi tech navigation devices that were sold to both military and civilian clients. The military contracts were “cost plus,” meaning that payments were calculated based on actual production costs plus a profit markup. The civilian contracts were bid out in a very competitive market, and every dollar counted. Jerry knew that because all the jobs were done in the same factory, he could manipulate the allocation of overhead costs in a way that would shift costs away from the civilian contracts and into the military “cost plus” work. That way, the company would collect more from the government and be able to shave its bids down on civilian work. He never thought anyone would discover the alterations he had made in the factory workers’ time sheets, but one of his accountants had noticed and tipped off the government auditor. Now as the congressman from Michigan rakes him over the coals, Jerry is trying to figure out his chances of dodging jail time.
Requirements
1. Based on what you have read above, what was Jerry’s company using as a cost driver to allocate overhead to the various jobs?
2. Name two ways that reducing costs on the civilian contracts would benefit the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Calculating conversion costs and unit cost Spring Fresh produces premium bottled water. Spring Fresh purchases artesian water, stores the water in large tanks, and then runs the water through two processes: filtration and bottling. During February, the filtration process incurred the following costs in processing 150,000 liters:
|
Wages of workers operating the filtration equipment
|
$25,950
|
|
Manufacturing overhead allocated to filtration
|
20,050
|
|
Water
|
80,000
|
Spring Fresh had no beginning Work in process inventory in the Filtration Department in February.
Requirements
1. Compute the February conversion costs in the Filtration Department.
2. The Filtration Department completely processed 150,000 liters in February. What was the filtration cost per liter?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Drawing a timeline, computing equivalent units, and assigning cost to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in Crafty Paint prepares and packages paint products. Crafty Paint has two departments: (1) Blending and (2) Packaging. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the blending process (dyes) and at the end of the packaging process (cans). Conversion costs are added evenly throughout each process. Data from the month of May for the Blending Department are as follows:
|
Gallons:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
0
|
|
Started production
|
9,000
|
|
Completed and transferred out to Packaging in May
|
4,000
|
|
Ending work in process inventory (30% of the way through
|
|
|
blending process)
|
5,000
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
$ 0
|
|
Costs added during May:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
6,750
|
|
Direct labor
|
1,300
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
2,000
|
|
Total costs added during May
|
$10,050
|
Requirements
1. Fill in the timeline for the Blending Department.
2. Use the timeline to help you compute the Blending Department’s equivalent units for direct materials and for conversion costs.
3. Compute the total costs of the units (gallons)
a. completed and transferred out to the Packaging Department.
b. in the Blending Department ending Work in process inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Drawing a timeline, computing equivalent units, and assigning cost to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in Samson Winery in Pleasant Valley, New York, has two departments: Fermenting and Packaging. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the fermenting process (grapes) and at the end of the packaging process (bottles). Conversion costs are added evenly throughout each process. Data from the month of March for the Fermenting Department are as follows:
|
Gallons:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
0
|
|
Started production
|
9,100 gallons
|
|
Completed and transferred out to Packaging in March
|
7,900 gallons
|
|
Ending work in process inventory (80% of the way through
|
|
|
fermenting process)
|
1,200 gallons
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
$ 0
|
|
Costs added during March:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
9,828
|
|
Direct labor
|
3,500
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
3,588
|
|
Total costs added during March
|
$16,916
|
Requirements
1. Draw a timeline for the Fermenting Department.
2. Use the timeline to help you compute the equivalent units for direct materials and for conversion costs.
3. Compute the total costs of the units (gallons)
a. completed and transferred out to the Packaging Department.
b. in the Fermenting Department ending Work in process inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing equivalent units, computing cost per equivalent unit; assigning costs; journalizing; second department, weighted average method Cool Spring Company produces premium bottled water. In the second department, the Bottling Department, conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the bottling process, but packaging materials are not added until the end of the process.
Costs in beginning Work in process inventory include transferred in costs of $1,700, direct labor of $700, and manufacturing overhead of $330. February data for the Bottling Department follow:
|
COOL SPRING COMPANY Work in process inventory—Bottling Month Ended February 28, 2013
|
| |
Physical Units
|
Dollars
|
|
Physical
|
Dollars
|
|
Beginning inventory, January 31 (40% complete)
|
12,000
|
$ 2,730
|
Transferred out
|
Units
|
$ ?
|
|
Production started:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Transferred in
|
163,000
|
134,800
|
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
30,400
|
|
|
|
|
Conversion costs:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
|
33,100
|
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
|
|
16,300
|
|
|
|
Total to account for
|
|
175,000
|
$217,330
|
|
|
|
Ending inventory, February 28 (70% complete)
|
|
23,000
|
$ ?
|
|
|
Requirements
1. Compute the Bottling Department equivalent units for the month of February. Use the weighted average method.
2. Compute the cost per equivalent unit for February.
3. Assign the costs to units completed and transferred out and to ending Work in process inventory.
4. Prepare the journal entry to record the cost of units completed and transferred out.
5. Post all transactions to the Work in process inventory—Bottling Department T account. What is the ending balance?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in Amy Electronics makes CD players in three processes: assembly, programming, and packaging. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the assembly process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. The Assembly Department had no Work in process inventory on October 31. In mid November, Amy Electronics started production on 125,000 CD players. Of this number, 95,800 CD players were assembled during November and transferred out to the Programming Department. The November 30 Work in process inventory in the Assembly Department was 25% of the way through the assembly process. Direct materials costing $437,500 were placed in production in Assembly during November, and Direct labor of $200,800 and Manufacturing overhead of $134,275 were assigned to that department. Requirements
1. Compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the Assembly Department for November.
2. Assign total costs in the Assembly Department to (a) units completed and transferred to Programming during November and (b) units still in process at November 30.
3. Prepare a T account for Work in process inventory—Assembly to show its activity during November, including the November 30 balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in Reed Paper, Co., produces the paper used by wallpaper manufacturers. Reed’s fourstage process includes mixing, cooking, rolling, and cutting. During March, the Mixing Department started and completed mixing for 4,520 rolls of paper. The department started but did not finish the mixing for an additional 500 rolls, which were 20% complete with respect to both direct materials and conversion work at the end of March. Direct materials and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the mixing process. The Mixing Department incurred the following costs during March:
|
Work in process inventory—Mixing
|
|
Bal, Mar 1
|
0
|
|
Direct materials
|
5,775
|
|
Direct labor
|
620
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
6,310
|
Requirements
1. Compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the Mixing Department for March.
2. Show that the sum of (a) cost of goods transferred out of the Mixing Department and (b) ending Work in process inventory—Mixing equals the total cost accumulated in the department during March.
3. Journalize all transactions affecting the company’s mixing process during March, including those already posted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing equivalent units for a second department with beginning work in process inventory; preparing a production cost report and recording transactions on the basis of the report’s information; weighted average method Christine Carpet manufactures broadloom carpet in seven processes: spinning, dyeing, plying, spooling, tufting, latexing, and shearing. In the Dyeing Department, direct materials (dye) are added at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. Christine uses weighted average process costing. Information for November 2012 follows:
|
Units:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
90 rolls
|
|
Transferred in from Spinning Department during November
|
540 rolls
|
|
Completed during November
|
510 rolls
|
|
Ending work in process (80% complete as to
|
|
|
conversion work)
|
120 rolls
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process (transferred in cost, $4,900;
|
|
|
materials cost, $1,390; conversion costs, $4,900)
|
$ 11,190
|
|
Transferred in from Spinning Department during November
|
22,190
|
|
Materials cost added during November
|
11,210
|
|
Conversion costs added during November (manufacturing
|
|
|
wages, $8,225; manufacturing overhead, $43,839)
|
52,064
|
Requirements
1. Prepare a timeline for Christine’s Dyeing Department.
2. Use the timeline to help you compute the equivalent units, cost per equivalent unit, and total costs to account for in Christine’s Dyeing Department for November.
3. Prepare the November production cost report for Christine’s Dyeing Department. 4. Journalize all transactions affecting Christine’s Dyeing Department during November, including the entries that have already been posted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing equivalent units for a second department with beginning work in process inventory; assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; weighted average method WaterBound uses three processes to manufacture lifts for personal watercraft: forming a lift’s parts from galvanized steel, assembling the lift, and testing the completed lifts. The lifts are transferred to finished goods before shipment to marinas across the country. WaterBound’s Testing Department requires no direct materials. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the testing process. Other information follows:
|
Units:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process
|
2,000 units
|
|
Transferred in from the Assembling Dept. during the period
|
7,000 units
|
|
Completed during the period
|
4,000 units
|
|
Ending work in process (40% complete as to
|
|
|
conversion work)
|
5,000 units
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process (transferred in cost, $93,000;
|
|
|
conversion costs, $18,000)
|
$ 111,000
|
|
Transferred in from the Assembling Dept. during the period
|
672,000
|
|
Conversion costs added during the period
|
54,000
|
The cost transferred into Finished goods inventory is the cost of the lifts transferred out of the Testing Department. WaterBound uses weighted average process costing.
Requirements
1. Draw a timeline for the Testing Department.
2. Use the timeline to compute the number of equivalent units of work performed by the Testing Department during the period.
3. Compute WaterBound’s transferred in and conversion costs per equivalent unit. Use the unit costs to assign total costs to (a) units completed and transferred out of Testing and (b) units in Testing’s ending Work in process inventory.
4. Compute the cost per unit for lifts completed and transferred out to Finished goods inventory. Why would management be interested in this cost?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in Beth Electronics makes CD players in three processes: assembly, programming, and packaging. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the assembly process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. The Assembly Department had no work in process inventory on March 31. In mid April, Beth Electronics started production on 115,000 CD players. Of this number, 99,000 CD players were assembled during April and transferred out to the Programming Department. The April 30 work in process inventory in the Assembly Department was 45% of the way through the assembly process. Direct materials costing $345,000 were placed in production in Assembly during April, and direct labor of $150,000 and manufacturing overhead of $62,400 were assigned to that department.
Requirements
1. Compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the Assembly Department for April.
2. Assign total costs in the Assembly Department to (a) units completed and transferred to Programming during April and (b) units still in process at April 30.
3. Prepare a T account for Work in process inventory—Assembly to show its activity during April, including the April 30 balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in Smith Paper, Co., produces the paper used by wallpaper manufacturers. Smith’s four stage process includes mixing, cooking, rolling, and cutting. During September, the Mixing Department started and completed mixing for 4,405 rolls of paper. The department started but did not finish the mixing for an additional 600 rolls, which were 20% complete with respect to both direct materials and conversion work at the end of September. Direct materials and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the mixing process. The Mixing Department incurred the following costs during September:
|
Work in process inventory–Mixing
|
|
Bal, Sep 1
|
0
|
|
Direct materials
|
5,430
|
|
Direct labor
|
550
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
5,785
|
Requirements
1. Compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the Mixing Department for September.
2. Show that the sum of (a) cost of goods transferred out of the Mixing Department and (b) ending Work in process inventory—Mixing equals the total cost accumulated in the department during September.
3. Journalize all transactions affecting the company’s mixing process during September, including those already posted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing equivalent units for a second department with beginning work in process inventory; preparing a production cost report and recording transactions on the basis of the report’s information; weighted average method Carol Carpet manufactures broadloom carpet in seven processes: spinning, dyeing, plying, spooling, tufting, latexing, and shearing. In the Dyeing Department, direct materials (dye) are added at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. Carol uses weighted average process costing. Information for July 2012 follows:
|
Units
|
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
65rolls
|
|
Transferred in from Spinning Department during July
|
570rolls
|
|
Completed during July
|
520rolls
|
|
Ending work in process (80% complete as to
|
|
|
conversion work)
|
115rolls
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Beginning work in process (transferred in cost, $3,900;
|
|
|
materials cost, $1,625; conversion costs, $5,555)
|
$ 11,080
|
|
Transferred in from Spinning Department during July
|
19,595
|
|
Materials cost added during July
|
9,805
|
|
Conversion costs added during July (manufacturing
|
|
|
wages, $9,450; manufacturing overhead, $43,135)
|
52,585
|
Requirements
1. Prepare a timeline for Carol’s Dyeing Department.
2. Use the timeline to help you compute the equivalent units, cost per equivalent unit, and total costs to account for in Carol’s Dyeing Department for July.
3. Prepare the July production cost report for Carol’s Dyeing Department.
4. Journalize all transactions affecting Carol’s Dyeing Department during July, including the entries that have already been posted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Two of Compute It’s production activities are kitting (assembling the raw materials needed for each computer in one kit) and boxing the completed products for shipment to customers. Assume that Compute It spends $12,000,000 a month on kitting and $22,000,000 a month on boxing. Compute It allocates the following:
?Kitting costs based on the number of parts used in the computer
?Boxing costs based on the cubic feet of space the computer requires
Suppose Compute It estimates it will use 400,000,000 parts a month and ship products with a total volume of 20,000,000 cubic feet. Assume that each desktop computer requires 125 parts and has a volume of 10 cubic feet. What is the activity cost allocation rate?
|
|
Kitting
|
Boxing
|
|
a.
|
$0.03/part
|
$0.05/cubic foot
|
|
b.
|
$0.60/part
|
$0.06/cubic foot
|
|
c.
|
$0.03/part
|
$1.10/cubic foot
|
|
d.
|
$33.33/part
|
$0.91/cubic foot
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What are the kitting and boxing costs assigned to one desktop computer?
|
|
Kitting
|
Boxing
|
|
a.
|
$ 3.75
|
$ 11.00
|
|
b.
|
$ 0.30
|
$137.50
|
|
c.
|
$11.00
|
$ 3.75
|
|
d.
|
$ 4.05
|
$148.50
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for materials and labor Seattle Enterprises produces LCD touch screen products. The company reports the following information at December 31, 2012:
|
Materials inventory
|
Work in process inventory
|
Finished goods inventory
|
|
47,000
|
31,400
|
28,000
|
123,000
|
123,000
|
109,000
|
| |
|
62,000
|
|
|
|
| |
|
53,900
|
|
|
|
|
Wages payable
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
|
|
| |
74,000
|
3,400
|
53,900
|
|
|
| |
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
| |
|
36,500
|
|
|
|
Seattle began operations on January 30, 2012.
Requirements
1. What is the cost of direct materials used? The cost of indirect materials used?
2. What is the cost of direct labor? The cost of indirect labor?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for overhead Teak Outdoor Furniture manufactures wood patio furniture. The company reports the following costs for June 2012:
|
Wood
|
$ 250,000
|
|
Nails, glue, and stain
|
26,000
|
|
Depreciation on saws
|
5,500
|
|
Indirect manufacturing labor
|
38,000
|
|
Depreciation on delivery truck
|
2,300
|
|
Assembly line workers’ wages
|
57,000
|
Requirement
1. What is the balance in the Manufacturing overhead account before overhead is applied to jobs?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Distinguishing between job order costing and process costing Consider the following incomplete statements.
a. _____ is used by companies that produce small quantities of many different products.
b. Georgia Pacific pulverizes wood into pulp to manufacture cardboard. The company uses a _____ system.
c. To record costs of manufacturing thousands of identical files, the file manufacturer will use a _____ system.
d. Companies that produce large numbers of identical products use _____ systems for product costing.
e. The computer repair service that visits your home and repairs your computer uses a _____ system.
f. Apple assembles electronic parts and software to manufacture millions of iPods. Apple uses a ___________ system.
g. Textbook publishers produce titles of a particular book in batches. Textbook publishers use a __________ system.
h. A company that bottles milk into one gallon containers uses a ________ system.
A company that makes large quantities of one type of tankless hot water heater uses a __________ system.
i. A particular governmental agency takes bids for specific items it utilizes. Each item requires a separate bid. The agency uses a ___________ system.
Requirement
1. Complete each of the statements with the term job order costing or the term process costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for job costs Sloan Trailers’ job cost records yielded the following information:
|
Job No.
|
|
Date
|
|
Total Cost of Job
|
|
Started
|
Finished
|
Sold
|
at September 30
|
|
1
|
August 21
|
September 16
|
September 17
|
$3,100
|
|
2
|
August 29
|
September 21
|
September 26
|
13,000
|
|
3
|
September 3
|
October 11
|
October 13
|
6,900
|
|
4
|
September 7
|
September 29
|
October 1
|
4,400
|
Requirement
1. Use the dates in the table to identify the status of each job. Compute Sloan’s cost of (a) Work in process inventory at September 30, (b) Finished goods inventory at September 30, and (c) Cost of goods sold for September.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job order costing journal entries Consider the following transactions for Judy’s Sofas:
a. Incurred and paid Web site expenses, $2,900.
b. Incurred manufacturing wages of $15,000, 60% of which was direct labor and 40%
of which was indirect labor.
c. Purchased materials on account, $24,000.
d. Used in production: direct materials, $9,500; indirect materials, $4,500.
e. Recorded manufacturing overhead: depreciation on plant, $10,000; plant insurance, $1,300; plant property tax, $4,200 (credit Property tax payable).
f. Allocated manufacturing overhead to jobs, 250% of direct labor costs.
g. Completed production, $38,000.
h. Sold inventory on account, $20,000; cost of goods sold, $10,000.
i. Journalized the closing of the manufacturing overhead account.
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions in Judy’s general journal.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying job order costing journal entries Consider the following:
|
Materials inventory
|
Work in process inventory
|
Finished goods inventory
|
Accounts payable
|
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
(b)
|
(f)
|
(f)
|
(g)
|
|
| |
|
(c)
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
(e)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wages payable
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
Cost of goods sold
|
Prepaid insurance
|
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
(b)
|
(f)
|
(f)
|
(g)
|
|
| |
|
(c)
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
(e)
|
|
|
|
|
Requirement
1. Describe the letter transactions in the above accounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating manufacturing overhead Selected cost data for Antique Print, Co., are as follows:
|
Estimated manufacturing overhead cost for the year
|
$ 115,000
|
|
Estimated direct labor cost for the year
|
71,875
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead cost for the year
|
119,000
|
|
Actual direct labor cost for the year
|
73,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate per direct labor dollar.
2. Prepare the journal entry to allocate overhead cost for the year.
3. Use a T account to determine the amount of underallocated or overallocated manufacturing overhead.
4. Prepare the journal entry to close the balance of the Manufacturing overhead account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating manufacturing overhead Brooks Foundry uses a predetermined manufacturing overhead rate to allocate overhead to individual jobs, based on the machine hours required. At the beginning of 2012, the company expected to incur the following:
|
Manufacturing overhead costs
|
$ 840,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
1,550,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
70,000 hours
|
At the end of 2012, the company had actually incurred:
|
Direct labor cost
|
$1,160,000
|
|
Depreciation on manufacturing property, plant,
|
|
|
and equipment
|
600,000
|
|
Property taxes on plant
|
40,000
|
|
Sales salaries
|
26,500
|
|
Delivery drivers’ wages
|
23,500
|
|
Plant janitor’s wages
|
17,000
|
|
Machine hours
|
hours67,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute Brooks’ predetermined manufacturing overhead rate.
2. Prepare the journal entry to allocate manufacturing overhead.
3. Post the manufacturing overhead transactions to the Manufacturing overhead T account. Is manufacturing overhead underallocated or overallocated? By how much?
4. Close the Manufacturing overhead account to Cost of goods sold. Does your entry increase or decrease cost of goods sold?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating manufacturing overhead Depreciation on manufacturing property, plant, and equipment was actually $550,000, not the $600,000 she originally reported. Unadjusted balances at the end of 2012 include:
|
Finished goods inventory
|
$ 131,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
580,000
|
Requirements
1. Use a T account to determine whether manufacturing overhead is under allocated or over allocated, and by how much.
2. Prepare the journal entry to close out the under allocated or over allocated manufacturing overhead.
3. What is the adjusted ending balance of Cost of goods sold?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating manufacturing overhead The manufacturing records for Krazy Kayaks at the end of the 2012 fiscal year show the following information about manufacturing overhead:
|
Overhead allocated to production
|
$ 405,900
|
|
Actual manufacturing overhead costs
|
$ 428,000
|
|
Overhead allocation rate for the year
|
$41 per machine hour
|
Requirements
1. How many machine hours did Krazy Kayaks use in 2012?
2. Was manufacturing overhead over or under allocated for the year and by how much?
3. Prepare the journal entry to close out the over or under allocated overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job order costing in a service company Martin Realtors, a real estate consulting firm, specializes in advising companies on potential new plant sites. The company uses a job order costing system with a predetermined indirect cost allocation rate, computed as a percentage of direct labor costs. At the beginning of 2012, managing partner Andrew Martin prepared the following budget for the year:
|
Direct labor hours (professionals)
|
19,600 hours
|
|
Direct labor costs (professionals)
|
$ 2,450,000
|
|
Office rent
|
370,000
|
|
Support staff salaries
|
1,282,500
|
|
Utilities
|
430,000
|
Peters Manufacturing, Inc., is inviting several consultants to bid for work. Andrew Martin estimates that this job will require about 240 direct labor hours.
Requirements
1. Compute Martin Realtors’ (a) hourly direct labor cost rate and (b) indirect cost allocation rate.
2. Compute the predicted cost of the Peters Manufacturing job.
3. If Martin wants to earn a profit that equals 45% of the job’s cost, how much should he bid for the Peters Manufacturing job?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing cost data Bluebird Manufacturing makes carrying cases for portable electronic devices. Its costing records yield the following information:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
Manufacturing
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Date
|
|
Cost of Job
|
Costs Added
|
|
Started
|
Finished
|
Sold
|
at October 31
|
in November
|
|
1
|
10/3
|
10/12
|
10/13
|
$1,900
|
|
|
2
|
10/3
|
10/30
|
11/1
|
1,800
|
|
|
3
|
10/17
|
11/24
|
11/27
|
400
|
$1,500
|
|
4
|
10/29
|
11/29
|
12/3
|
800
|
1,200
|
|
5
|
11/8
|
11/12
|
11/14
|
|
550
|
|
6
|
11/23
|
12/6
|
12/9
|
|
700
|
Requirements
1. Which type of costing system is Bluebird using? What piece of data did you base your answer on?
2. Use the dates in the table to identify the status of each job. Compute Bluebird’s account balances at October 31 for Work in process inventory, Finished goods inventory, and Cost of goods sold. Compute, by job, account balances at November 30 for Work in process inventory, Finished goods inventory, and Cost of goods sold.
3. Prepare journal entries to record the transfer of completed units from Work in process to Finished goods for October and November.
4. Record the sale of Job 3 for $2,100.
5. What is the gross profit for Job 3? What other costs must this gross profit cover?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for construction transactions Quaint Construction, Inc., is a home builder in Arizona. Quaint uses a job order costing system in which each house is a job. Because it constructs houses, the company uses an account titled Construction overhead. The company applies overhead based on estimated direct labor costs. For the year, it estimated construction overhead of $1,100,000 and total direct labor cost of $2,750,000. The following events occurred during August:
a. Purchased materials on account, $400,000.
b. Requisitioned direct materials and used direct labor in construction. Record the materials requisitioned.
|
|
Direct materials
|
Direct labor
|
|
House 402
|
$ 54,000
|
$42,000
|
|
House 403
|
68,000
|
35,000
|
|
House 404
|
63,000
|
57,000
|
|
House 405
|
85,000
|
53,000
|
c. The company incurred total wages of $200,000. Use the data from item b to assign the wages.
d. Depreciation of construction equipment, $6,200.
e. Other overhead costs incurred on houses 402 through 405:
|
Indirect labor
|
$13,000
|
|
Equipment rentals paid in cash
|
37,000
|
|
Worker liability insurance expired
|
3,000
|
f. Allocated overhead to jobs.
g. Houses completed: 402, 404.
h. House sold: 404 for $250,000.
Requirements
1. Calculate Quaint’s construction overhead application rate for the year.
2. Prepare journal entries to record the events in the general journal.
3. Open T accounts for Work in process inventory and Finished goods inventory. Post the appropriate entries to these accounts, identifying each entry by letter. Determine the ending account balances, assuming that the beginning balances were zero.
4. Add the costs of the unfinished houses, and show that this total amount equals the ending balance in the Work in process inventory account.
5. Add the cost of the completed house that has not yet been sold, and show that this equals the ending balance in Finished goods inventory.
6. Compute gross profit on the house that was sold. What costs must gross profit cover for Quaint Construction?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive accounting for manufacturing transactions Howie Stars produces stars for elementary teachers to reward their students. Howie Stars’ trial balance on June 1 follows:
|
HOWIE STARS
Trial Balance
June 1, 2012
|
|
|
Balance
|
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 14,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
155,000
|
|
|
Inventories:
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
5,700
|
|
|
Work in process
|
39,400
|
|
|
Finished goods
|
20,400
|
|
|
Plant assets
|
200,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
$ 72,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
127,000
|
|
Wages payable
|
|
1,700
|
|
Common stock
|
|
142,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
91,800
|
|
Sales revenue
|
—
|
—
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
—
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
—
|
|
|
Marketing and general expenses
|
—
|
|
|
Total
|
$434,500
|
$434,500
|
a. June 1 balances in the subsidiary ledgers were as follows:
b. Materials subledger: Paper, $4,700; indirect materials, $1,000
c. Work in process subledger: Job 120, $39,400; $0 for Job 121
d. Finished goods subledger: Large Stars, $9,400; Small Stars, $11,000
June transactions are summarized as follows:
Collections on account, $152,000.
- Marketing and general expenses incurred and paid, $28,000.
- Payments on account, $36,000.
- Materials purchases on credit: Paper, $22,900; indirect materials, $3,800.
- Materials used in production (requisitioned):
• Job 120: paper, $850
• Job 121: paper, $7,650
• Indirect materials, $1,000
e. Wages incurred and assigned during June, $35,000. Labor time records for the month: Job 120, $3,500; Job 121, $16,600; indirect labor, $14,900.
f. Wages paid in June include the balance in the Wages payable account at May 31 and $32,200 of wages incurred during June.
g. Depreciation on plant and equipment, $2,600.
h. Manufacturing overhead was allocated at the predetermined rate of 50% of direct labor cost.
i. Jobs completed during the month: Job 120, 300,000 Large Stars at total cost of $45,500.
j. Credit sales on account: all of Job 120 for $111,000.
k. Closed the Manufacturing overhead account to Cost of goods sold.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Requirements
1. Journalize the transactions for the company. Howie uses a perpetual inventory system.
2. Open T accounts for the general ledger, the Materials ledger, the Work in process ledger, and the finished goods ledger. Insert each account balance as given, and use the reference Bal. Post the journal entries to the T accounts using the transaction letters as a reference.
3. Prepare a trial balance at June 30, 2012.
4. Use the Work in process inventory T account to prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the month of June.
5. Prepare an income statement for the month of June. To calculate cost of goods sold, you may want to review (Hint: In transaction l, you closed any under/over allocated manufacturing overhead to Cost of goods sold. In the income statement, show this correction as an adjustment to Cost of goods sold.
If manufacturing overhead is under allocated, the adjustment will increase Cost of goods sold. If overhead is over allocated, the adjustment will decrease Cost of goods sold.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting manufacturing overhead White Woods manufactures jewelry boxes. The primary materials (wood, brass, and glass) and direct labor are traced directly to the products. Manufacturing overhead costs are allocated based on machine hours. Data for 2012 follow:
|
|
Estimated (Budget)
|
Actual
|
|
Machine hours
|
25,000 hours
|
32,100 hours
|
|
Maintenance labor (repairs to equipment)
|
$12,000
|
$28,500
|
|
Plant supervisor’s salary
|
47,000
|
48,000
|
|
Screws, nails, and glue
|
24,000
|
45,000
|
|
Plant utilities
|
41,000
|
96,850
|
|
Freight out
|
37,000
|
46,500
|
|
Depreciation on plant and
|
|
|
|
equipment
|
87,000
|
83,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
43,000
|
54,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate.
2. Post actual and allocated manufacturing overhead to the Manufacturing overhead T account.
3. Close the under or overallocated overhead to Cost of goods sold.
4. The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate usually turns out to be inaccurate. Why don’t accountants just use the actual manufacturing overhead rate?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job order costing in a service company Crow Design, Inc., is aWeb site design and consulting firm. The firm uses a job order costing system in which each client is a different job. Crow Design traces direct labor, licensing costs, and travel costs directly to each job. It allocates indirect costs to jobs based on a predetermined indirect cost allocation rate, computed as a percentage of direct labor costs.At the beginning of 2012, managing partner Sally Simone prepared the following budget estimates:
|
Direct labor hours (professional)
|
6,250 hours
|
|
Direct labor costs (professional)
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Support staff salaries
|
765,000
|
|
Computer leases
|
46,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
27,000
|
|
Office rent
|
62,000
|
In November 2012, Crow Design served several clients. Records for two clients appear here:
|
|
Mesilla
|
|
Delicious Treats
|
Chocolates
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
700 hours
|
100 hours
|
|
Software licensing costs
|
$4,000
|
$400
|
|
Travel costs
|
8,000
|
—
|
Requirements
1. Compute Crow Design’s direct labor rate and its predetermined indirect cost allocation rate for 2012.
2. Compute the total cost of each job.
3. If Simone wants to earn profits equal to 50% of service revenue, how much (what fee) should she charge each of these two clients?
4. Why does Crow Design assign costs to jobs?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing cost data Stratton Manufacturing makes carrying cases for portable electronic devices. Its costing records yield the following information:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
Manufacturing
|
|
Job No.
|
|
Date
|
|
Cost of Job
|
Costs Added
|
|
Started
|
Finished
|
Sold
|
at October 31
|
in November
|
|
1
|
10/3
|
10/12
|
10/13
|
$1,000
|
|
|
2
|
10/3
|
10/30
|
11/1
|
1,100
|
|
|
3
|
10/17
|
11/24
|
11/27
|
700
|
$1,400
|
|
4
|
10/29
|
11/29
|
12/3
|
300
|
1,500
|
|
5
|
11/8
|
11/12
|
11/14
|
|
650
|
|
6
|
11/23
|
12/6
|
12/9
|
|
500
|
Requirements
1. Which type of costing system is Stratton using? What piece of data did you base your answer on?
2. Use the dates in the table to identify the status of each job. Compute Stratton’s account balances at October 31 for Work in process inventory, Finished goods inventory, and Cost of goods sold. Compute, by job, account balances at November 30 for Work in process inventory, Finished goods inventory, and Cost of goods sold.
3. Prepare journal entries to record the transfer of completed units from work in process to finished goods for October and November.
4. Record the sale of Job 3 for $2,200.
5. What is the gross profit for Job 3? What other costs must this gross profit cover?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for construction transactions Cottage Construction, Inc., is a home builder in Arizona. Cottage uses a job order costing system in which each house is a job. Because it constructs houses, the company uses an account titled Construction overhead. The company applies overhead based on estimated direct labor costs. For the year, it estimated construction overhead of $1,050,000 and total direct labor cost of $3,500,000. The following events occurred during August:
a. Purchased materials on account, $460,000.
b. Requisitioned direct materials and used direct labor in construction. Record the materials requisitioned.
|
|
Direct materials
|
Direct labor
|
|
House 402
|
$50,000
|
$45,000
|
|
House 403
|
69,000
|
30,000
|
|
House 404
|
66,000
|
56,000
|
|
House 405
|
88,000
|
55,000
|
c. The company incurred total wages of $210,000. Use the data from item b to assign the wages.
d. Depreciation of construction equipment, $6,000.
e. Other overhead costs incurred on houses 402 through 405:
|
Indirect labor
|
$24,000
|
|
Equipment rentals paid in cash
|
36,000
|
|
Worker liability insurance expired
|
8,000
|
f. Allocated overhead to jobs.
g. Houses completed: 402, 404.
h. House sold: 404 for $200,000.
Requirements
1. Calculate Cottage’s construction overhead application rate for the year.
2. Record the events in the general journal.
3. Open T accounts for Work in process inventory and Finished goods inventory. Post the appropriate entries to these accounts, identifying each entry by letter. Determine the ending account balances, assuming that the beginning balances were zero.
4. Add the costs of the unfinished houses, and show that this total amount equals the ending balance in the Work in process inventory account.
5. Add the cost of the completed house that has not yet been sold, and show that this equals the ending balance in Finished goods inventory.
6. Compute gross profit on the house that was sold. What costs must gross profit cover for Cottage Construction?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing and using a job cost record True Technology, Co., manufactures CDs and DVDs for computer software and entertainment companies. True uses job order costing and has a perpetual inventory system.
On November 2, True began production of 5,500 DVDs, Job 423, for Leopard Pictures for $1.60 sales price per DVD. True promised to deliver the DVDs to Leopard by November 5. True incurred the following costs:
|
11/2
|
Labor Time Record No.
|
Description
|
Amount
|
|
11/3
|
655
|
10 hours @ $18
|
$ 180
|
|
Date
|
656
|
20 hours @ $14
|
280
|
|
|
Materials
|
|
|
|
|
Requisition
|
|
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Description
|
Amount
|
|
11/2
|
63
|
31 lbs. polycarbonate plastic @ $12
|
$372
|
|
11/2
|
64
|
25 lbs. acrylic plastic @ $29
|
725
|
|
11/3
|
74
|
3 lbs. refined aluminum @ $48
|
144
|
Leopard Pictures provides the movie file for True to burn onto the DVDs at a cost of $0.45 per DVD. True Technology allocates manufacturing overhead to jobs based on the relation between estimated overhead of $550,000 and estimated direct labor costs of $500,000. Job 423 was completed and shipped on November 3.
Requirements
1. Prepare a job cost record similar to Exhibit 17 6 for Job 423. Calculate the predetermined overhead rate, then allocate manufacturing overhead to the job.
2. Journalize in summary form the requisition of direct materials (including the movie files) and the assignment of direct labor and manufacturing overhead to Job 423.
3. Journalize completion of the job and the sale of the 5,500 DVDs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO Effects) You are the vice president of finance of Mickiewicz Corporation, a retail company that prepared two different schedules of gross margin for the first quarter ended March 31, 2012. These schedules appear below.
| |
Sales ($5 per unit)
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
Gross Margin
|
|
Schedule 1
|
$150,000
|
$124,900
|
$25,100
|
|
Schedule 2
|
150,000
|
129,600
|
20,400
|
The computation of cost of goods sold in each schedule is based on the following data.
| |
Units
|
Cost per Unit
|
Total Cost
|
|
Beginning inventory, January 1
|
10,000
|
$4.00
|
$40,000
|
|
Purchase, January 10
|
8,000
|
4.2
|
33,600
|
|
Purchase, January 30
|
6,000
|
4.25
|
25,500
|
|
Purchase, February 11
|
9,000
|
4.3
|
38,700
|
|
Purchase, March 17
|
12,000
|
4.4
|
52,800
|
Peggy Fleming, the president of the corporation, cannot understand how two different gross margins can be computed from the same set of data. As the vice president of finance, you have explained to Ms. Fleming that the two schedules are based on different assumptions concerning the flow of inventory costs, i.e., FIFO and LIFO. Schedules 1 and 2 were not necessarily prepared in this sequence of cost flow assumptions.
Instructions
Prepare two separate schedules computing cost of goods sold and supporting schedules showing the composition of the ending inventory under both cost flow assumptions (assume periodic system).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO—Periodic) Tom Brady Shop began operations on January 2, 2012. The following stock record card for footballs was taken from the records at the end of the year.
|
Date
|
Voucher
|
Terms
|
Units Received
|
Unit Invoice Cost
|
Gross Invoice Amount
|
|
15 Jan
|
10624
|
Net 30
|
50
|
$20
|
$1,000
|
|
15 Mar
|
11437
|
1/5, net 30
|
65
|
16
|
1,040
|
|
20 Jun
|
21332
|
1/10, net 30
|
90
|
15
|
1,350
|
|
12 Sep
|
27644
|
1/10, net 30
|
84
|
12
|
1,008
|
|
24 Nov
|
31269
|
1/10, net 30
|
76
|
11
|
836
|
| |
Totals
|
|
365
|
|
$5,234
|
A physical inventory on December 31, 2012, reveals that 110 footballs were in stock. The bookkeeper informs you that all the discounts were taken. Assume that Tom Brady Shop uses the invoice price less discount for recording purchases.
Instructions
(a) Compute the December 31, 2012, inventory using the FIFO method.
(b) Compute the 2012 cost of goods sold using the LIFO method.
(c) What method would you recommend to the owner to minimize income taxes in 2012, using the inventory information for footballs as a guide?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(LIFO Effect) The following example was provided to encourage the use of the LIFO method. In a nutshell, LIFO subtracts inflation from inventory costs, deducts it from taxable income, and records it in a LIFO reserve account on the books. The LIFO benefit grows as inflation widens the gap between current year and past year (minus inflation) inventory costs. This gap is:
| |
With LIFO
|
Without LIFO
|
|
Revenues
|
$3,200,000
|
$3,200,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
2,800,000
|
2,800,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
150,000
|
150,000
|
|
Operating income
|
250,000
|
250,000
|
|
LIFO adjustment
|
40,000
|
0
|
|
Taxable income
|
$210,000
|
$250,000
|
|
Income taxes @ 36%
|
$75,600
|
$90,000
|
|
Cash flow
|
$174,400
|
$160,000
|
|
Extra cash
|
$14,400
|
0
|
|
Increased cash flow
|
9%
|
0%
|
Instructions
(a) Explain what is meant by the LIFO reserve account.
(b) How does LIFO subtract inflation from inventory costs?
(c) Explain how the cash flow of $174,400 in this example was computed. Explain why this amount may not be correct.
(d) Why does a company that uses LIFO have extra cash? Explain whether this situation will always exist.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Alternative Inventory Methods—Comprehensive) Belanna Corporation began operations on December 1, 2012. The only inventory transaction in 2012 was the purchase of inventory on December 10, 2012, at a cost of $20 per unit. None of this inventory was sold in 2012. Relevant information is as follows.
|
Ending inventory units
|
|
|
|
31 Dec 12
|
|
100
|
|
December 31, 2013, by purchase date
|
|
|
|
2 Dec 13
|
100
|
|
|
20 Jul 13
|
30
|
130
|
During the year, the following purchases and sales were made.
|
Purchases
|
|
Sales
|
|
|
15 Mar
|
300 units at $24
|
10 Apr
|
200
|
|
20 Jul
|
300 units at 25
|
20 Aug
|
300
|
|
4 Sep
|
200 units at 28
|
18 Nov
|
170
|
|
2 Dec
|
100 units at 30
|
12 Dec
|
200
|
The company uses the periodic inventory method.
Instructions
(a) Determine ending inventory under (1) specific identification, (2) FIFO, (3) LIFO, and (4) average cost. (Round unit cost to four decimal places.)
(b) Determine ending inventory using dollar value LIFO. Assume that the December 2, 2013, purchase cost is the current cost of inventory. (Hint: The beginning inventory is the base layer priced at $20 per unit.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Dollar Value LIFO) Presented below is information related to Martin Company.
|
Date
|
Ending Inventory (End of Year Prices)
|
Price Index
|
|
31 Dec 09
|
$80,000
|
100
|
|
31 Dec 10
|
111,300
|
105
|
|
31 Dec 11
|
108,000
|
116
|
|
31 Dec 12
|
122,200
|
120
|
|
31 Dec 13
|
147,000
|
125
|
|
31 Dec 14
|
176,900
|
|
Instructions
Use the dollar value LIFO method to compute the ending inventory for Choctaw Company for 2009 through 2013.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Various Inventory Issues) The following independent situations relate to inventory accounting.
1. Kim Co. purchased goods with a list price of $175,000, subject to trade discounts of 20% and 10%, with no cash discounts allowable. How much should Kim Co. record as the cost of these goods?
2. Keillor Company’s inventory of $1,100,000 at December 31, 2012, was based on a physical count of goods priced at cost and before any year end adjustments relating to the following items.
(a) Goods shipped from a vendor f.o.b. shipping point on December 24, 2012, at an invoice cost of $69,000 to Keillor Company were received on January 4, 2013.
(b) The physical count included $29,000 of goods billed to Sakic Corp. f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2012. The carrier picked up these goods on January 3, 2013.
What amount should Keillor report as inventory on its balance sheet?
3. Zimmerman Corp. had 1,500 units of part M.O. on hand May 1, 2012, costing $21 each. Purchases of part M.O. during May were as follows.
| |
Units
|
Units Cost
|
|
9 May
|
2,000
|
$22.00
|
|
17
|
3,500
|
23
|
|
26
|
1,000
|
24
|
A physical count on May 31, 2012, shows 2,000 units of part M.O. on hand. Using the FIFO method, what is the cost of part M.O. inventory at May 31, 2012? Using the LIFO method, what is the inventory cost? Using the average cost method, what is the inventory cost?
4. Ashbrook Company adopted the dollar value LIFO method on January 1, 2012 (using internal price indexes and multiple pools). The following data are available for inventory pool A for the 2 years following adoption of LIFO.
|
Inventory
|
At Base Year Cost
|
At Current Year Cost
|
|
1/1/2012
|
$200,000
|
$200,000
|
|
12/31/2012
|
240,000
|
264,000
|
|
12/31/2013
|
256,000
|
286,720
|
Computing an internal price index and using the dollar value LIFO method, at what amount should the inventory be reported at December 31, 2013?
5. Donovan Inc., a retail store chain, had the following information in its general ledger for the year 2013.
|
Merchandise purchased for resale
|
$909,400
|
|
Interest on notes payable to vendors
|
8,700
|
|
Purchase returns
|
16,500
|
|
Freight in
|
22,000
|
|
Freight out
|
17,100
|
|
Cash discounts on purchases
|
6,800
|
What is Donovan’s inventoriable cost for 2013?
Instructions
Answer each of the preceding questions about inventories, and explain your answers.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventory Adjustments) Dimitri Company, a manufacturer of small tools, provided the following information from its accounting records for the year ended December 31, 2012.
|
Inventory at December 31, 2012 (based on physical count of goods in Dimitri’s plant, at cost, on December 31, 2012)
|
$1,520,000
|
|
Accounts payable at December 31, 2012
|
1,200,000
|
|
Net sales (sales less sales returns)
|
8,150,000
|
Additional information is as follows.
1. Included in the physical count were tools billed to a customer f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2012. These tools had a cost of $31,000 and were billed at $40,000. The shipment was on Dimitri’s loading dock waiting to be picked up by the common carrier.
2. Goods were in transit from a vendor to Dimitri on December 31, 2012. The invoice cost was $76,000, and the goods were shipped f.o.b. shipping point on December 29, 2012.
3. Work in process inventory costing $30,000 was sent to an outside processor for plating on December 30, 2012.
4. Tools returned by customers and held pending inspection in the returned goods area on December 31, 2012, were not included in the physical count. On January 8, 2013, the tools costing $32,000 were inspected and returned to inventory. Credit memos totaling $47,000 were issued to the customers on the same date.
5. Tools shipped to a customer f.o.b. destination on December 26, 2012, were in transit at December 31, 2012, and had a cost of $26,000. Upon notification of receipt by the customer on January 2, 2013, Dimitri issued a sales invoice for $42,000.
6. Goods, with an invoice cost of $27,000, received from a vendor at 5:00 p.m. on December 31, 2012, were recorded on a receiving report dated January 2, 2013. The goods were not included in the physical count, but the invoice was included in accounts payable at December 31, 2012.
7. Goods received from a vendor on December 26, 2012, were included in the physical count. However, the related $56,000 vendor invoice was not included in accounts payable at December 31, 2012, because the accounts payable copy of the receiving report was lost.
8. On January 3, 2013, a monthly freight bill in the amount of $8,000 was received. The bill specifically related to merchandise purchased in December 2012, one half of which was still in the inventory at December 31, 2012. The freight charges were not included in either the inventory or in accounts payable at December 31, 2012.
Instructions
Using the format shown below, prepare a schedule of adjustments as of December 31, 2012, to the initial amounts per Dimitri’s accounting records. Show separately the effect, if any, of each of the eight transactions on the December 31, 2012, amounts. If the transactions would have no effect on the initial amount shown, enter NONE.
| |
Inventory
|
Accounts Payable
|
Net Sales
|
|
Initial amounts
|
$1,520,000
|
$1,200,000
|
$8,150,000
|
|
Adjustments—increase
|
|
|
|
|
(decrease)
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
|
|
|
|
5
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
|
|
|
|
7
|
|
|
|
|
8
|
|
|
|
|
Total adjustments
|
|
|
|
|
Adjusted amounts
|
$
|
$
|
$
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Purchases Recorded Gross and Net) Some of the transactions of Torres Company during August are listed below. Torres uses the periodic inventory method.
August 10 Purchased merchandise on account, $12,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
13 Returned part of the purchase of August 10, $1,200, and received credit on account.
15 Purchased merchandise on account, $16,000, terms 1/10, n/60.
25 Purchased merchandise on account, $20,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
28 Paid invoice of August 15 in full.
Instructions
(a) Assuming that purchases are recorded at gross amounts and that discounts are to be recorded when taken:
(1) Prepare general journal entries to record the transactions.
(2) Describe how the various items would be shown in the financial statements.
(b) Assuming that purchases are recorded at net amounts and that discounts lost are treated as financial expenses:
(1) Prepare general journal entries to enter the transactions.
(2) Prepare the adjusting entry necessary on August 31 if financial statements are to be prepared at that time.
(3) Describe how the various items would be shown in the financial statements.
(c) Which of the two methods do you prefer and why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Compute FIFO, LIFO, and Average Cost) Hull Company’s record of transactions concerning part X for the month of April was as follows.
|
Purchases
|
Sales
|
|
1 Apr
|
(balance on hand)
|
100 @ $5.00
|
5 Apr
|
300
|
|
4
|
|
400 @ 5.10
|
12
|
200
|
|
11
|
|
300 @ 5.30
|
27
|
800
|
|
18
|
|
200 @ 5.35
|
28
|
150
|
|
26
|
|
600 @ 5.60
|
|
|
|
30
|
|
200 @ 5.80
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the inventory at April 30 on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. Carry unit costs to the nearest cent.
(1) First in, first out (FIFO).
(2) Last in, first out (LIFO).
(3) Average cost.
(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, what amount would be shown as ending inventory in (1), (2), and (3) above? Carry average unit costs to four decimal places.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Compute FIFO, LIFO, and Average Cost) Some of the information found on a detail inventory card for Slatkin Inc. for the first month of operations is as follows.
| |
Received
|
|
|
|
Date
|
No. of Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Issued, No. of Units
|
Balance, No. of Units
|
|
2 Jan
|
1,200
|
$3.00
|
|
1,200
|
|
7
|
|
|
700
|
500
|
|
10
|
600
|
3.2
|
|
1,100
|
|
13
|
|
|
500
|
600
|
|
18
|
1,000
|
3.3
|
300
|
1,300
|
|
20
|
|
|
1,100
|
200
|
|
23
|
1,300
|
3.4
|
|
1,500
|
|
26
|
|
|
800
|
700
|
|
28
|
1,600
|
3.5
|
|
2,300
|
|
31
|
|
|
1,300
|
1,000
|
Instructions
(a) From these data compute the ending inventory on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. Carry unit costs to the nearest cent and ending inventory to the nearest dollar.
(1) First in, first out (FIFO).
(2) Last in, first out (LIFO).
(3) Average cost.
(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, would the amounts shown as ending inventory in (1), (2), and (3) above be the same? Explain and compute. (Round average unit costs to four decimal places.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Compute FIFO, LIFO, Average Cost—Periodic and Perpetual) Ehlo Company is a multiproduct firm. Presented below is information concerning one of its products, the Hawkeye.
|
Date
|
Transaction
|
Quantity
|
Price/Cost
|
|
1 Jan
|
Beginning inventory
|
1,000
|
$12
|
|
4 Feb
|
Purchase
|
2,000
|
18
|
|
20 Feb
|
Sale
|
2,500
|
30
|
|
2 Apr
|
Purchase
|
3,000
|
23
|
|
4 Nov
|
Sale
|
2,200
|
33
|
Instructions
Compute cost of goods sold, assuming Ehlo uses:
(a) Periodic system, FIFO cost flow.
(b) Perpetual system, FIFO cost flow.
(c) Periodic system, LIFO cost flow.
(d) Perpetual system, LIFO cost flow.
(e) Periodic system, weighted average cost flow.
(f) Perpetual system, moving average cost flow.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Financial Statement Effects of FIFO and LIFO) The management of Tritt Company has asked its accounting department to describe the effect upon the company’s financial position and its income statements of accounting for inventories on the LIFO rather than the FIFO basis during 2012 and 2013. The accounting department is to assume that the change to LIFO would have been effective on January 1, 2012, and that the initial LIFO base would have been the inventory value on December 31, 2011. Presented below are the company’s financial statements and other data for the years 2012 and 2013 when the FIFO method was employed.
| |
Financial Position as of
|
| |
12/31/2011
|
12/31/2012
|
12/31/2013
|
|
Cash
|
$90,000
|
$130,000
|
$154,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
80,000
|
100,000
|
120,000
|
|
Inventory
|
120,000
|
140,000
|
176,000
|
|
Other assets
|
160,000
|
170,000
|
200,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$450,000
|
$540,000
|
$650,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$40,000
|
$60,000
|
$80,000
|
|
Other liabilities
|
70,000
|
80,000
|
110,000
|
|
Common stock
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
140,000
|
200,000
|
260,000
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$450,000
|
$540,000
|
$650,000
|
| |
Income for Years Ended
|
| |
12/31/2012
|
12/31/2013
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$900,000
|
$1,350,000
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
505,000
|
756,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
205,000
|
304,000
|
| |
710,000
|
1,060,000
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
190,000
|
290,000
|
|
Income taxes (40%)
|
76,000
|
116,000
|
|
Net income
|
$114,000
|
$174,000
|
Other data:
1. Inventory on hand at December 31, 2011, consisted of 40,000 units valued at $3.00 each.
2. Sales (all units sold at the same price in a given year):
2012—150,000 units @ $6.00 each 2013—180,000 units @ $7.50 each
3. Purchases (all units purchased at the same price in given year):
2012—150,000 units @ $3.50 each 2013—180,000 units @ $4.40 each
4. Income taxes at the effective rate of 40% are paid on December 31 each year.
Instructions
Name the account(s) presented in the financial statements that would have different amounts for 2013 if LIFO rather than FIFO had been used, and state the new amount for each account that is named. Show computations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Internal Indexes—Dollar Value LIFO) On January 1, 2012, Bonanza Wholesalers Inc. adopted the dollar value LIFO inventory method for income tax and external financial reporting purposes. However, Bonanza continued to use the FIFO inventory method for internal accounting and management purposes. In applying the LIFO method, Bonanza uses internal conversion price indexes and the multiple pools approach under which substantially identical inventory items are grouped into LIFO inventory pools. The following data were available for inventory pool no. 1, which comprises products A and B, for the 2 years following the adoption of LIFO.
| |
FIFO Basis per Records
|
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
Inventory, 1/1/12
|
|
|
|
|
Product A
|
10,000
|
$30
|
$300,000
|
|
Product B
|
9,000
|
25
|
225,000
|
| |
|
|
$525,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/12
|
|
|
|
|
Product A
|
17,000
|
36
|
$612,000
|
|
Product B
|
9,000
|
26
|
234,000
|
| |
|
|
$846,000
|
|
Inventory, 12/31/13
|
|
|
|
|
Product A
|
13,000
|
40
|
$520,000
|
|
Product B
|
10,000
|
32
|
320,000
|
| |
|
|
$840,000
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a schedule to compute the internal conversion price indexes for 2012 and 2013. Round indexes to two decimal places.
(b) Prepare a schedule to compute the inventory amounts at December 31, 2012 and 2013, using the dollar value LIFO inventory method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Skippy Scooters manufactures motor scooters. The company has automated production, so it allocates manufacturing overhead based on machine hours. Skippy expects to incur $240,000 of manufacturing overhead costs and to use 4,000 machine hours during 2011. At the end of 2010, Skippy reported the following inventories:
|
Materials inventory
|
$20,000
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
17,000
|
|
Finished goods inventory
|
11,000
|
During January 2011, Skippy actually used 300 machine hours and recorded the following transactions:
a. Purchased materials on account, $31,000
b. Used direct materials, $39,000
c. Manufacturing wages incurred totaled $40,000, of which 90% was direct labor and 10% was indirect labor
d. Used indirect materials, $3,000
e. Incurred other manufacturing overhead, $13,000 on account
f. Allocated manufacturing overhead for January 2011
g. Cost of completed motor scooters, $100,000
h. Sold scooters on account, $175,000; cost of scooters sold, $95,000
Requirements
1. Compute Skippy’s predetermined manufacturing overhead rate for 2011.
2. Journalize the transactions in the general journal.
3. Enter the beginning balances and then post the transactions to the following accounts: Materials inventory, Work in process inventory, Finished goods inventory, Wages payable, Manufacturing overhead, and Cost of goods sold.
4. Close the ending balance of Manufacturing overhead. Post your entry to the T accounts.
5. What are the ending balances in the three inventory accounts and in Cost of goods sold?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Would an advertising agency use job or process costing? What about a cell phone manufacturer?
a. Advertising agency—process costing; Cell phone manufacturer—process costing
b. Advertising agency—job order costing; Cell phone manufacturer—job order costing
c. Advertising agency—process costing; Cell phone manufacturer—job order costing
d. Advertising agency—job order costing; Cell phone manufacturer—process costing
2. When a manufacturing company uses direct materials, it assigns the cost by debiting
a. Direct materials.
b. Work in process inventory.
c. Manufacturing overhead.
d. Materials inventory.
3. When a manufacturing company uses indirect materials, it assigns the cost by debiting
a. Work in process inventory.
b. Indirect materials.
c. Materials inventory.
d. Manufacturing overhead.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
a. allocates manufacturing overhead based on machine hours.
b. estimated 12,000,000 machine hours and $93,000,000 of manufacturing overhead costs.
c. Actually used 16,000,000 machine hours and incurred the following actual costs:
|
Indirect labor
|
$11,000,000
|
|
Depreciation on plant
|
48,000,000
|
|
Machinery repair
|
11,000,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
75,000,000
|
|
Plant supplies
|
6,000,000
|
|
Plant utilities
|
7,000,000
|
|
Advertising
|
35,000,000
|
|
Sales commissions
|
27,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
What entry would Gell make to close the manufacturing overhead account?
|
a.
|
Manufacturing overhead Cost of goods sold
|
10,000,000
|
10,000,000
|
|
b.
|
Manufacturing overhead Cost of goods sold
|
41,000,000
|
41,000,000
|
|
c.
|
Cost of goods sold Manufacturing overhead
|
41,000,000
|
41,000,000
|
|
d.
|
Cost of goods sold Manufacturing overhead
|
10,000,000
|
10,000,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for materials Rite Packs manufactures backpacks. Its plant records include the following materials related transactions:
|
Purchases of canvas (on account)
|
$ 71,000
|
|
Purchases of sewing machine lubricating oil (on account)
|
1,100
|
|
Materials requisitions:
|
|
|
Canvas
|
64,000
|
|
Sewing machine lubricating oil
|
250
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions.
2. Post these transactions to the Materials inventory account.
3. If the company had $34,000 of Materials inventory at the beginning of the period, what is the ending balance of Materials inventory?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for materials Consider the following T accounts:
|
Materials inventory
|
|
Work in process inventory
|
|
Bal
|
50
|
|
Bal
|
15
|
|
|
Purchases
|
205
|
Used
|
Direct materials
|
|
Cost of goods
|
|
Bal
|
35
|
|
Direct labor
|
285
|
manufactured
|
| |
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
135
|
|
| |
|
|
Bal
|
45
|
|
Requirement
1. Use the T accounts to determine direct materials used and indirect materials used.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for labor Creative Crystal, Ltd., reports the following labor related transactions at its plant in Portland, Oregon.
|
Plant janitor’s wages
|
$ 570
|
|
Plant furnace operator’s wages
|
880
|
|
Glass blower’s wages
|
78,000
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the entry for the incurrence and assignment of these wages.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Amsterdam Company uses a periodic inventory system. For April, when the company sold 600 units, the following information is available.
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
April 1 inventory
|
250
|
$10
|
$2,500
|
|
April 15 purchase
|
400
|
12
|
4,800
|
|
April 23 purchase
|
350
|
13
|
4,550
|
| |
1,000
|
|
$11,850
|
Compute the April 30 inventory and the April cost of goods sold using the average cost method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Arna, Inc. uses the dollar value LIFO method of computing its inventory. Data for the past 3 years follow.
|
Year Ended December 31
|
Inventory at Current Year Cost
|
Price Index
|
|
2011
|
$19,750
|
100
|
|
2012
|
22,140
|
108
|
|
2013
|
25,935
|
114
|
Instructions
Compute the value of the 2012 and 2013 inventories using the dollar value LIFO method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventoriable Costs) In your audit of Garza Company, you find that a physical inventory on December 31, 2012, showed merchandise with a cost of $441,000 was on hand at that date. You also discover the following items were all excluded from the $441,000.
1. Merchandise of $61,000 which is held by Garza on consignment. The consignor is the Bontemps Company.
2. Merchandise costing $33,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. destination to a customer on December 31, 2012. The customer was expected to receive the merchandise on January 6, 2013.
3. Merchandise costing $46,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. shipping point to a customer on December 29, 2012. The customer was scheduled to receive the merchandise on January 2, 2013.
4. Merchandise costing $73,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. destination on December 30, 2012, and received by Garza on January 4, 2013.
5. Merchandise costing $51,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2012, and received by Garza on January 5, 2013.
Instructions
Based on the above information, calculate the amount that should appear on Garza’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012, for inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventoriable Costs) Assume that in an annual audit of Webber Inc. at December 31, 2012, you find the following transactions near the closing date.
1. A special machine, fabricated to order for a customer, was finished and specifically segregated in the back part of the shipping room on December 31, 2012. The customer was billed on that date and the machine excluded from inventory although it was shipped on January 4, 2013.
2. Merchandise costing $2,800 was received on January 3, 2013, and the related purchase invoice recorded January 5. The invoice showed the shipment was made on December 29, 2012, f.o.b. destination.
3. A packing case containing a product costing $3,400 was standing in the shipping room when the physical inventory was taken. It was not included in the inventory because it was marked “Hold for shipping instructions.” Your investigation revealed that the customer’s order was dated December 18, 2012, but that the case was shipped and the customer billed on January 10, 2013. The product was a stock item of your client.
4. Merchandise costing $720 was received on December 28, 2012, and the invoice was not recorded. You located it in the hands of the purchasing agent; it was marked “on consignment.”
5. Merchandise received on January 6, 2013, costing $680 was entered in the purchases journal on January 7, 2013. The invoice showed shipment was made f.o.b. supplier’s warehouse on December 31, 2012. Because it was not on hand at December 31, it was not included in inventory.
Instructions
Assuming that each of the amounts is material, state whether the merchandise should be included in the client’s inventory, and give your reason for your decision on each item.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventoriable Costs—Perpetual) Bradford Machine Company maintains a general ledger account for each class of inventory, debiting such accounts for increases during the period and crediting them for decreases. The transactions below relate to the Raw Materials inventory account, which is debited for materials purchased and credited for materials requisitioned for use.
1. An invoice for $8,100, terms f.o.b. destination, was received and entered January 2, 2013. The receiving report shows that the materials were received December 28, 2012.
2. Materials costing $7,300 were returned to the supplier on December 29, 2012, and were shipped f.o.b. shipping point. The return was entered on that date, even though the materials are not expected to reach the supplier’s place of business until January 6, 2013.
3. Materials costing $28,000, shipped f.o.b. destination, were not entered by December 31, 2012, “because they were in a railroad car on the company’s siding on that date and had not been unloaded.”
4. An invoice for $7,500, terms f.o.b. shipping point, was received and entered December 30, 2012. The receiving report shows that the materials were received January 4, 2013, and the bill of lading shows that they were shipped January 2, 2013.
5. Materials costing $19,800 were received December 30, 2012, but no entry was made for them because “they were ordered with a specified delivery of no earlier than January 10, 2013.”
Instructions
Prepare correcting general journal entries required at December 31, 2012, assuming that the books have not been closed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventoriable Costs—Error Adjustments) Werth Company asks you to review its December 31, 2012, inventory values and prepare the necessary adjustments to the books. The following information is given to you.
1. Werth uses the periodic method of recording inventory. A physical count reveals $234,890 of inventory on hand at December 31, 2012.
2. Not included in the physical count of inventory is $10,420 of merchandise purchased on December 15 from Browser. This merchandise was shipped f.o.b. shipping point on December 29 and arrived in January. The invoice arrived and was recorded on December 31.
3. Included in inventory is merchandise sold to Bubbey on December 30, f.o.b. destination. This merchandise was shipped after it was counted. The invoice was prepared and recorded as a sale on account for $12,800 on December 31. The merchandise cost $7,350, and Bubbey received it on January 3.
4. Included in inventory was merchandise received from Dudley on December 31 with an invoice price of $15,630. The merchandise was shipped f.o.b. destination. The invoice, which has not yet arrived, has not been recorded.
5. Not included in inventory is $8,540 of merchandise purchased from Minsky Industries. This merchandise was received on December 31 after the inventory had been counted. The invoice was received and recorded on December 30.
6. Included in inventory was $10,438 of inventory held by Werth on consignment from Jackel Industries.
7. Included in inventory is merchandise sold to Sims f.o.b. shipping point. This merchandise was shipped after it was counted. The invoice was prepared and recorded as a sale for $18,900 on December 31. The cost of this merchandise was $11,520, and Sims received the merchandise on January 5.
8. Excluded from inventory was a carton labeled “Please accept for credit.” This carton contains merchandise costing $1,500 which had been sold to a customer for $2,600. No entry had been made to the books to reflect the return, but none of the returned merchandise seemed damaged.
Instructions
(a) Determine the proper inventory balance for Werth Company at December 31, 2012.
(b) Prepare any correcting entries to adjust inventory to its proper amount at December 31, 2012. Assume the books have not been closed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Determining Merchandise Amounts—Periodic) Two or more items are omitted in each of the following tabulations of income statement data. Fill in the amounts that are missing.
| |
2011
|
2012
|
2013
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$290,000
|
$ ?
|
$410,000
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
6,000
|
13,000
|
?
|
|
Net sales
|
?
|
347,000
|
?
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
20,000
|
32,000
|
?
|
|
Ending inventory
|
?
|
?
|
?
|
|
Purchases
|
?
|
260,000
|
298,000
|
|
Purchase returns and allowances
|
5,000
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
|
Freight in
|
8,000
|
9,000
|
12,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
238,000
|
?
|
303,000
|
|
Gross profit on sales
|
46,000
|
91,000
|
97,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Purchases Recorded Net) Presented below are transactions related to Guillen, Inc. May 10 Purchased goods billed at $20,000 subject to cash discount terms of 2/10, n/60.
11 Purchased goods billed at $15,000 subject to terms of 1/15, n/30.
19 Paid invoice of May 10.
24 Purchased goods billed at $11,500 subject to cash discount terms of 2/10, n/30.
Instructions
(a) Prepare general journal entries for the transactions above under the assumption that purchases are to be recorded at net amounts after cash discounts and that discounts lost are to be treated as financial expense.
(b) Assuming no purchase or payment transactions other than those given above, prepare the adjusting entry required on May 31 if financial statements are to be prepared as of that date.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventory Errors—Periodic) Thomason Company makes the following errors during the current year. (In all cases, assume ending inventory in the following year is correctly stated.)
1. Both ending inventory and purchases and related accounts payable are understated. (Assume this purchase was recorded and paid for in the following year.)
2. Ending inventory is overstated, but purchases and related accounts payable are recorded correctly.
3. Ending inventory is correct, but a purchase on account was not recorded. (Assume this purchase was recorded and paid for in the following year.)
Instructions
Indicate the effect of each of these errors on working capital, current ratio (assume that the current ratio is greater than 1), retained earnings, and net income for the current year and the subsequent year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventory Errors) At December 31, 2012, Dwight Corporation reported current assets of $390,000 and current liabilities of $200,000. The following items may have been recorded incorrectly. Dwight uses the periodic method.
1. Goods purchased costing $22,000 were shipped f.o.b. shipping point by a supplier on December 28. Dwight received and recorded the invoice on December 29, 2012, but the goods were not included in Dwight’s physical count of inventory because they were not received until January 4, 2013.
2. Goods purchased costing $20,000 were shipped f.o.b. destination by a supplier on December 26. Dwight received and recorded the invoice on December 31, but the goods were not included in Dwight’s 2012 physical count of inventory because they were not received until January 2, 2013.
3. Goods held on consignment from Kishi Company were included in Dwight’s December 31, 2012, physical count of inventory at $13,000.
4. Freight in of $3,000 was debited to advertising expense on December 28, 2012.
Instructions
(a) Compute the current ratio based on Dwight’s balance sheet.
(b) Recompute the current ratio after corrections are made.
(c) By what amount will income (before taxes) be adjusted up or down as a result of the corrections?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Inventory Errors) The net income per books of Adamson Company was determined without knowledge of the errors indicated below.
|
Year
|
Net Income per Books
|
Error in Ending Inventory
|
|
2008
|
$50,000
|
Overstated
|
$5,000
|
|
2009
|
52,000
|
Overstated
|
9,000
|
|
2010
|
54,000
|
Understated
|
11,000
|
|
2011
|
56,000
|
No error
|
|
|
2012
|
58,000
|
Understated
|
2,000
|
|
2013
|
60,000
|
Overstated
|
10,000
|
Instructions
Prepare a worksheet to show the adjusted net income figure for each of the 6 years after taking into account the inventory errors.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO, LIFO, Average Cost Inventory) Esplanade Company was formed on December 1, 2011. The following information is available from Esplanade’s inventory records for Product BAP.
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
|
January 1, 2012 (beginning inventory)
|
600
|
$8.00
|
|
Purchases:
|
|
|
|
5 Jan 12
|
1,100
|
9
|
|
25 Jan 12
|
1,300
|
10
|
|
16 Feb 12
|
800
|
11
|
|
26 Mar 12
|
600
|
12
|
A physical inventory on March 31, 2012, shows 1,500 units on hand.
Instructions
Prepare schedules to compute the ending inventory at March 31, 2012, under each of the following inventory methods.
(a) FIFO.
(b) LIFO.
(c) Weighted average.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Compute FIFO, LIFO, Average Cost—Periodic) Presented below is information related to radios for the Couples Company for the month of July.
|
Date
|
Transaction
|
Units In
|
Unit Cost
|
Total
|
Units Sold
|
Selling Price
|
Total
|
|
1 Jul
|
Balance
|
100
|
$4.10
|
$410
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
Purchase
|
800
|
4.3
|
3,440
|
|
|
|
|
7
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
300
|
$7.00
|
$2,100
|
|
10
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
300
|
7.3
|
2,190
|
|
12
|
Purchase
|
400
|
4.51
|
1,804
|
|
|
|
|
15
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
200
|
7.4
|
1,480
|
|
18
|
Purchase
|
300
|
4.6
|
1,380
|
|
|
|
|
22
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
400
|
7.4
|
2,960
|
|
25
|
Purchase
|
500
|
4.58
|
2,290
|
|
|
|
|
30
|
Sale
|
|
|
|
200
|
7.5
|
1,500
|
| |
Totals
|
2,100
|
|
$9,324
|
1,400
|
|
$10,230
|
Instructions
(a) Assuming that the periodic inventory method is used, compute the inventory cost at July 31 under each of the following cost flow assumptions.
(1) FIFO.
(2) LIFO.
(3) Weighted average.
(b) Answer the following questions.
(1) Which of the methods used above will yield the lowest figure for gross profit for the income statement? Explain why.
(2) Which of the methods used above will yield the lowest figure for ending inventory for the balance sheet? Explain why.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO—Periodic and Perpetual) The following is a record of Cannondale Company’s transactions for Boston Teapots for the month of May 2012.
|
1 May
|
Balance 400 units @ $20
|
|
12
|
Purchase 600 units @ $25
|
|
28
|
Purchase 400 units @ $30
|
|
10 May
|
Sale 300 units @ $38
|
|
20
|
Sale 590 units @ $38
|
Instructions
(a) Assuming that perpetual inventories are not maintained and that a physical count at the end of the month shows 510 units on hand, what is the cost of the ending inventory using (1) FIFO and (2) LIFO?
(b) Assuming that perpetual records are maintained and they tie into the general ledger, calculate the ending inventory using (1) FIFO and (2) LIFO.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO and LIFO, Income Statement Presentation) The board of directors of Oksana Corporation is considering whether or not it should instruct the accounting department to change from a first in, firstout (FIFO) basis of pricing inventories to a last in, first out (LIFO) basis. The following information is available.
|
Sales
|
20,000 units @
|
$50
|
|
Inventory, January 1
|
6,000 units @
|
20
|
|
Purchases
|
6,000 units @
|
22
|
| |
10,000 units @
|
25
|
| |
7,000 units @
|
30
|
|
Inventory, December 31
|
9,000 units @
|
?
|
|
Operating expenses
|
$200,000
|
|
Instructions
Prepare a condensed income statement for the year on both bases for comparative purposes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What is a product financing arrangement? How should product financing arrangements be reported in the financial statements?
2. Where, if at all, should the following items be classified on a balance sheet?
(a) Goods out on approval to customers.
(b) Goods in transit that were recently purchased f.o.b. destination.
(c) Land held by a realty firm for sale.
(d) Raw materials.
(e) Goods received on consignment.
(f) Manufacturing supplies
3. At the balance sheet date, Clarkson Company held title to goods in transit amounting to $214,000. This amount was omitted from the purchases figure for the year and also from the ending inventory. What is the effect of this omission on the net income for the year as calculated when the books are closed? What is the effect on the company’s financial position as shown in its balance sheet? Is materiality a factor in determining whether an adjustment for this item should be made?
4. Define “cost” as applied to the valuation of inventories.
5. Distinguish between product costs and period costs as they relate to inventory.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Ford Motor Co. is considering alternate methods of accounting for the cash discounts it takes when paying suppliers promptly. One method suggested was to report these discounts as financial income when payments are made. Comment on the propriety of this approach.
2. Zonker Inc. purchases 500 units of an item at an invoice cost of $30,000. What is the cost per unit? If the goods are shipped f.o.b. shipping point and the freight bill was $1,500, what is the cost per unit if Zonker Inc. pays the freight charges? If these items were bought on 2/10, n/30 terms and the invoice and the freight bill were paid within the 10 day period, what would be the cost per unit?
3. Specific identification is sometimes said to be the ideal method of assigning cost to inventory and to cost of goods sold. Briefly indicate the arguments for and against this method of inventory valuation.
4. FIFO, weighted average, and LIFO methods are often used instead of specific identification for inventory valuation purposes. Compare these methods with the specific identification method, discussing the theoretical propriety of each method in the determination of income and asset valuation.
5. How might a company obtain a price index in order to apply dollar value LIFO?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Describe the LIFO double extension method. Using the following information, compute the index at December 31, 2012, applying the double extension method to a LIFO pool consisting of 25,500 units of product A and 10,350 units of product B. The base year cost of product A is $10.20 and of product B is $37.00. The price at December 31, 2012, for product A is $21.00 and for product B is $45.60. (Round to two decimal places.)
2. As compared with the FIFO method of costing inventories, does the LIFO method result in a larger or smaller net income in a period of rising prices? What is the comparative effect on net income in a period of falling prices?
3. What is the dollar value method of LIFO inventory valuation? What advantage does the dollar value method have over the specific goods approach of LIFO inventory valuation? Why will the traditional LIFO inventory costing method and the dollar value LIFO inventory costing method produce different inventory valuations if the composition of the inventory base changes?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Included in the December 31 trial balance of Rivera Company are the following assets.
|
Cash
|
$ 190,000
|
Work in process
|
$200,000
|
|
Equipment (net)
|
1,100,000
|
Receivables (net)
|
400,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
41,000
|
Patents
|
110,000
|
|
Raw materials
|
335,000
|
Finished goods
|
170,000
|
Prepare the current assets section of the December 31 balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Matlock Company uses a perpetual inventory system. Its beginning inventory consists of 50 units that cost $34 each. During June, the company purchased 150 units at $34 each, returned 6 units for credit, and sold 125 units at $50 each. Journalize the June transactions.
2. Stallman Company took a physical inventory on December 31 and determined that goods costing $200,000 were on hand. Not included in the physical count were $25,000 of goods purchased from Pelzer Corporation, f.o.b. shipping point, and $22,000 of goods sold to Alvarez Company for $30,000, f.o.b. destination. Both the Pelzer purchase and the Alvarez sale were in transit at year end. What amount should Stallman report as its December 31 inventory?
3. Bienvenu Enterprises reported cost of goods sold for 2012 of $1,400,000 and retained earnings of $5,200,000 at December 31, 2012. Bienvenu later discovered that its ending inventories at December 31, 2011 and 2012, were overstated by $110,000 and $35,000, respectively. Determine the corrected amounts for 2012 cost of goods sold and December 31, 2012, retained earnings.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Journalize Various Accounts Receivable Transactions) The balance sheet of Starsky Company at December 31, 2012, includes the following.
|
Notes receivable
|
$36,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
182,100
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
17,300
|
200,800
|
Transactions in 2012 include the following.
1. Accounts receivable of $138,000 were collected including accounts of $60,000 on which 2% sales discounts were allowed.
2. $5,300 was received in payment of an account which was written off the books as worthless in 2012.
3. Customer accounts of $17,500 were written off during the year.
4. At year end, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts was estimated to need a balance of $20,000. This estimate is based on an analysis of aged accounts receivable.
Instructions
Prepare all journal entries necessary to reflect the transactions above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Income Effects of Receivables Transactions) Sandburg Company requires additional cash for its business. Sandburg has decided to use its accounts receivable to raise the additional cash and has asked you to determine the income statement effects of the following contemplated transactions.
1. On July 1, 2012, Sandburg assigned $400,000 of accounts receivable to Keller Finance Company. Sandburg received an advance from Keller of 80% of the assigned accounts receivable less a commission of 3% on the advance. Prior to December 31, 2012, Sandburg collected $220,000 on the assigned accounts receivable, and remitted $232,720 to Keller, $12,720 of which represented interest on the advance from Keller.
2. On December 1, 2012, Sandburg sold $300,000 of net accounts receivable to Wunsch Company for $270,000. The receivables were sold outright on a without recourse basis.
3. On December 31, 2012, an advance of $120,000 was received from First Bank by pledging $160,000 of Sandburg’s accounts receivable. Sandburg’s first payment to First Bank is due on January 30, 2013.
Instructions
Prepare a schedule showing the income statement effects for the year ended December 31, 2012, as a result of the above facts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Petty Cash, Bank Reconciliation) Bill Jovi is reviewing the cash accounting for Nottleman, Inc., a local mailing service. Jovi’s review will focus on the petty cash account and the bank reconciliation for the month ended May 31, 2012. He has collected the following information from Nottleman’s bookkeeper for this task.
Petty Cash
1. The petty cash fund was established on May 10, 2012, in the amount of $250.
2. Expenditures from the fund by the custodian as of May 31, 2012, were evidenced by approved receipts for the following.
|
Postage expense
|
$33.00
|
|
Mailing labels and other supplies
|
65.00
|
|
I.O.U. from employees
|
30.00
|
|
Shipping charges
|
57.45
|
|
Newspaper advertising
|
22.80
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
15.35
|
On May 31, 2012, the petty cash fund was replenished and increased to $300; currency and coin in the fund at that time totaled $26.40.
Bank Reconciliation
|
THIRD NATIONAL BANK BANK STATEMENT
|
| |
Disbursements
|
Receipts
|
Balance
|
|
Balance, May 1, 2012
|
|
|
$8,769
|
|
Deposits
|
|
$28,000
|
|
|
Note payment direct from customer (interest of $30)
|
|
930
|
|
|
Checks cleared during May
|
$31,150
|
|
|
|
Bank service charges
|
27
|
|
|
|
Balance, May 31, 2012
|
|
|
6,522
|
|
Nottleman’s Cash Account
|
|
|
Balance, May 1, 2012
|
$8,850
|
|
Deposits during May 2012
|
31,000
|
|
Checks written during May 2012
|
31,835
|
Deposits in transit are determined to be $3,000, and checks outstanding at May 31 total $850. Cash on hand (besides petty cash) at May 31, 2012, is $246.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions related to the petty cash fund for May.
(b) Prepare a bank reconciliation dated May 31, 2012, proceeding to a correct cash balance, and prepare the journal entries necessary to make the books correct and complete.
(c) What amount of cash should be reported in the May 31, 2012, balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bank Reconciliation and Adjusting Entries) The cash account of Aguilar Co. showed a ledger balance of $3,969.85 on June 30, 2012. The bank statement as of that date showed a balance of $4,150. Upon comparing the statement with the cash records, the following facts were determined.
1. There were bank service charges for June of $25.
2. A bank memo stated that Bao Dai’s note for $1,200 and interest of $36 had been collected on June 29, and the bank had made a charge of $5.50 on the collection. (No entry had been made on Aguilar’s books when Bao Dai’s note was sent to the bank for collection.)
3. Receipts for June 30 for $3,390 were not deposited until July 2.
4. Checks outstanding on June 30 totaled $2,136.05.
5. The bank had charged the Aguilar Co.’s account for a customer’s uncollectible check amounting to $253.20 on June 29.
6. A customer’s check for $90 had been entered as $60 in the cash receipts journal by Aguilar on June 15.
7. Check no. 742 in the amount of $491 had been entered in the cash journal as $419, and check no. 747 in the amount of $58.20 had been entered as $582. Both checks had been issued to pay for purchases of equipment.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation dated June 30, 2012, proceeding to a correct cash balance.
(b) Prepare any entries necessary to make the books correct and complete.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bank Reconciliation and Adjusting Entries) Presented below is information related to Haselhof Inc.
Balance per books at October 31, $41,847.85; receipts $173,523.91; disbursements $164,893.54. Balance per bank statement November 30, $56,274.20.
The following checks were outstanding at November 30.
|
1224
|
$1,635.29
|
|
1230
|
2,468.30
|
|
1232
|
2,125.15
|
|
1233
|
482.17
|
Included with the November bank statement and not recorded by the company were a bank debit memo for $27.40 covering bank charges for the month, a debit memo for $372.13 for a customer’s check returned and marked NSF, and a credit memo for $1,400 representing bond interest collected by the bank in the name of Haselhof Inc. Cash on hand at November 30 recorded and awaiting deposit amounted to $1,915.40.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation (to the correct balance) at November 30, for Haselh of Inc. from the information above.
(b) Prepare any journal entries required to adjust the cash account at November 30.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Loan Impairment Entries) On January 1, 2012, Botosan Company issued a $1,200,000, 5 year, zero interest bearing note to National Organization Bank. The note was issued to yield 8% annual interest. Unfortunately, during 2013 Botosan fell into financial trouble due to increased competition. After reviewing all available evidence on December 31, 2013, National Organization Bank decided that the loan was impaired. Botosan will probably pay back only $800,000 of the principal at maturity.
Instructions
(a) Prepare journal entries for both Botosan Company and National Organization Bank to record the issuance of the note on January 1, 2012. (Round to the nearest $10.)
(b) Assuming that both Botosan Company and National Organization Bank use the effective interest method to amortize the discount, prepare the amortization schedule for the note.
(c) Under what circumstances can National Organization Bank consider Botosan’s note to be impaired?
(d) Compute the loss National Organization Bank will suffer from Botosan’s financial distress on December 31, 2013. What journal entries should be made to record this loss?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Various Receivable Accounting Issues) Kimmel Company uses the net method of accounting for sales discounts. Kimmel also offers trade discounts to various groups of buyers.
On August 1, 2012, Kimmel sold some accounts receivable on a without recourse basis. Kimmel incurred a finance charge.
Kimmel also has some notes receivable bearing an appropriate rate of interest. The principal and total interest are due at maturity. The notes were received on October 1, 2012, and mature on September 30, 2014.
Kimmel’s operating cycle is less than one year.
Instructions
(a) (1) Using the net method, how should Kimmel account for the sales discounts at the date of sale?
What is the rationale for the amount recorded as sales under the net method?
(2) Using the net method, what is the effect on Kimmel’s sales revenues and net income when customers do not take the sales discounts?
(b) What is the effect of trade discounts on sales revenues and accounts receivable? Why?
(c) How should Kimmel account for the accounts receivable factored on August 1, 2012? Why?
(d) How should Kimmel account for the note receivable and the related interest on December 31, 2012? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bad Debt Reporting Issues) Clark Pierce conducts a wholesale merchandising business that sells approximately 5,000 items per month with a total monthly average sales value of $250,000. Its annual bad debt rate has been approximately 1½% of sales. In recent discussions with his bookkeeper, Mr. Pierce has become confused by all the alternatives apparently available in handling the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts balance. The following information has been presented to Pierce.
1. An allowance can be set up (a) on the basis of a percentage of sales or (b) on the basis of a valuation of all past due or otherwise questionable accounts receivable. Those considered uncollectible can be charged to such allowance at the close of the accounting period, or specific items can be charged off directly against (1) Gross Sales or to (2) Bad Debt Expense in the year in which they are determined to be uncollectible.
2. Collection agency and legal fees, and so on, incurred in connection with the attempted recovery of bad debts can be charged to (a) Bad Debt Expense, (b) Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, (c) Legal Expense, or (d) Administrative Expense.
3. Debts previously written off in whole or in part but currently recovered can be credited to (a) Other Revenue, (b) Bad Debt Expense, or (c) Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
Instructions
Which of the foregoing methods would you recommend to Mr. Pierce in regard to (1) allowances and charge offs, (2) collection expenses, and (3) recoveries? State briefly and clearly the reasons supporting your recommendations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Basic Note and Accounts Receivable Transactions)
Part 1
On July 1, 2012, Wallace Company, a calendar year company, sold special order merchandise on credit and received in return an interest bearing note receivable from the customer. Wallace Company will receive interest at the prevailing rate for a note of this type. Both the principal and interest are due in one lump sum on June 30, 2013.
Instructions
When should Wallace Company report interest revenue from the note receivable? Discuss the rationale for your answer.
Part 2
On December 31, 2012, Wallace Company had significant amounts of accounts receivable as a result of credit sales to its customers. Wallace uses the allowance method based on credit sales to estimate bad debts. Past experience indicates that 2% of credit sales normally will not be collected. This pattern is expected to continue.
Instructions
(a) Discuss the rationale for using the allowance method based on credit sales to estimate bad debts.
Contrast this method with the allowance method based on the balance in the trade receivables accounts.
(b) How should Wallace Company report the allowance for doubtful accounts on its balance sheet at December 31, 2012? Also, describe the alternatives, if any, for presentation of bad debt expense in Wallace Company’s 2012 income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bad Debt Reporting Issues) Valasquez Company sells office equipment and supplies to many organizations in the city and surrounding area on contract terms of 2/10, n/30. In the past, over 75% of the credit customers have taken advantage of the discount by paying within 10 days of the invoice date.
The number of customers taking the full 30 days to pay has increased within the last year. Current indications are that less than 60% of the customers are now taking the discount. Bad debts as a percentage of gross credit sales have risen from the 1.5% provided in past years to about 4% in the current year.
The controller has responded to a request for more information on the deterioration in collections of accounts receivable with the report reproduced below.
|
VALASQUEZ COMPANY FINANCE COMMITTEE REPORT—ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE COLLECTIONS MAY 31, 2013
|
|
The fact that some credit accounts will prove uncollectible is normal. Annual bad debt write offs have been 1.5% of gross credit sales over the past five years. During the last fiscal year, this percentage increased to slightly less than 4%. The current Accounts Receivable balance is $1,600,000. The condition of this balance in terms of age and probability of collection is as follows.
|
|
Proportion of Total
|
Age Categories
|
Probability of Collection
|
|
68%
|
not yet due
|
99%
|
|
15%
|
less than 30 days past due
|
961⁄2%
|
|
8%
|
30 to 60 days past due
|
95%
|
|
5%
|
61 to 120 days past due
|
91%
|
|
21⁄2%
|
121 to 180 days past due
|
70%
|
|
11⁄2%
|
over 180 days past due
|
20%
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a credit balance of $43,300 on June 1, 2012. Valasquez Company has provided for a monthly bad debt expense accrual during the current fiscal year based on the assumption that 4% of gross credit sales will be uncollectible. Total gross credit sales for the 2012–2013 fi scal year amounted to $4,000,000. Write offs of bad accounts during the year totaled $145,000.
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare an accounts receivable aging schedule for Valasquez Company using the age categories identified in the controller’s report to the finance committee showing:
(1) The amount of accounts receivable outstanding for each age category and in total.
(2) The estimated amount that is uncollectible for each category and in total.
(b) Compute the amount of the year end adjustment necessary to bring Allowance for Doubtful Accounts to the balance indicated by the age analysis. Then prepare the necessary journal entry to adjust the accounting records.
(c) In a recessionary environment with tight credit and high interest rates:
(1) Identify steps Valasquez Company might consider to improve the accounts receivable situation.
(2) Then evaluate each step identified in terms of the risks and costs involved.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corrs Wholesalers Co. sells industrial equipment for a standard 3 year note receivable. Revenue is recognized at time of sale. Each note is secured by a lien on the equipment and has a face amount equal to the equipment’s list price. Each note’s stated interest rate is below the customer’s market rate at date of sale. All notes are to be collected in three equal annual installments beginning one year after sale. Some of the notes are subsequently sold to a bank with recourse, some are subsequently sold without recourse, and some are retained by Corrs. At year end, Corrs evaluates all outstanding notes receivable and provides for estimated losses arising from defaults.
Instructions
(a) What is the appropriate valuation basis for Corrs’s notes receivable at the date it sells equipment?
(b) How should Corrs account for the sale, without recourse, of a February 1, 2012, note receivable sold on May 1, 2012? Why is it appropriate to account for it in this way?
(c) At December 31, 2012, how should Corrs measure and account for the impact of estimated losses resulting from notes receivable that it
(1) Retained and did not sell?
(2) Sold to bank with recourse?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Zero Interest Bearing Note Receivable) On September 30, 2011, Rolen Machinery Co. sold a machine and accepted the customer’s zero interest bearing note. Rolen normally makes sales on a cash basis. Since the machine was unique, its sales price was not determinable using Rolen’s normal pricing practices. After receiving the first of two equal annual installments on September 30, 2012, Rolen immediately sold the note with recourse. On October 9, 2013, Rolen received notice that the note was dishonored, and it paid all amounts due. At all times prior to default, the note was reasonably expected to be paid in full.
Instructions
(a) (1) How should Rolen determine the sales price of the machine?
(2) How should Rolen report the effects of the zero interest bearing note on its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011? Why is this accounting presentation appropriate?
(b) What are the effects of the sale of the note receivable with recourse on Rolen’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, and its balance sheet at December 31, 2012?
(c) How should Rolen account for the effects of the note being dishonored?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Reporting of Notes Receivable, Interest, and Sale of Receivables) On July 1, 2012, Moresan Company sold special order merchandise on credit and received in return an interest bearing note receivable from the customer. Moresan will receive interest at the prevailing rate for a note of this type. Both the principal and interest are due in one lump sum on June 30, 2013.
On September 1, 2012, Moresan sold special order merchandise on credit and received in return a zero interest bearing note receivable from the customer. The prevailing rate of interest for a note of this type is determinable. The note receivable is due in one lump sum on August 31, 2014.
Moresan also has significant amounts of trade accounts receivable as a result of credit sales to its customers. On October 1, 2012, some trade accounts receivable were assigned to Indigo Finance Company on a non notification (Moresan handles collections) basis for an advance of 75% of their amount at an interest charge of 8% on the balance outstanding.
On November 1, 2012, other trade accounts receivable were sold on a without recourse basis. The factor withheld 5% of the trade accounts receivable factored as protection against sales returns and allowances and charged a finance charge of 3%.
Instructions
(a) How should Moresan determine the interest revenue for 2012 on the:
(1) Interest bearing note receivable? Why?
(2) Zero interest bearing note receivable? Why?
(b) How should Moresan report the interest bearing note receivable and the zero interest earing note receivable on its balance sheet at December 31, 2012?
(c) How should Moresan account for subsequent collections on the trade accounts receivable assigned on October 1, 2012, and the payments to Indigo Finance? Why?
(d) How should Moresan account for the trade accounts receivable factored on November 1, 2012? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Receivables Management) As the manager of the accounts receivable department for Beavis Leather Goods, Ltd., you recently noticed that Kelly Collins, your accounts receivable clerk who is paid $1,200 per month, has been wearing unusually tasteful and expensive clothing. (This is Beavis’s first year in business.) This morning, Collins drove up to work in a brand new Lexus.
Naturally suspicious by nature, you decide to test the accuracy of the accounts receivable balance of $192,000 as shown in the ledger. The following information is available for your first year (precisely 9 months ended September 30, 2012) in business.
|
1
|
Collections from customers
|
$188,000
|
|
2
|
Merchandise purchased
|
360,000
|
|
3
|
Ending merchandise inventory
|
90,000
|
|
4
|
Goods are marked to sell at 40% above cost.
|
|
Instructions
Assuming all sales were made on account, compute the ending accounts receivable balance that should appear in the ledger, noting any apparent shortage. Then, draft a memo dated October 3, 2012, to Mark Price, the branch manager, explaining the facts in this situation. Remember that this problem is serious, and you do not want to make hasty accusations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative Analysis Case
The Coca Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc.
Instructions
(a) What were the cash and cash equivalents reported by Coca Cola and PepsiCo at the end of 2009? What does each company classify as cash equivalents?
(b) What were the accounts receivable (net) for Coca Cola and PepsiCo at the end of 2009? Which company reports the greater allowance for doubtful accounts receivable (amount and percentage of gross receivable) at the end of 2009?
(c) Assuming that all “net operating revenues” (Coca Cola) and all “net sales” (PepsiCo) were net credit sales, compute the accounts receivable turnover ratio for 2009 for Coca Cola and PepsiCo; also compute the days outstanding for receivables. What is your evaluation of the difference?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statement Analysis Cases
Case I Occidental Petroleum Corporation
Occidental Petroleum Corporation reported the following information in a recent annual report.
|
Occidental Petroleum Corporation Consolidated Balance Sheets (in millions)
|
|
Assets at December 31,
|
Current year
|
Prior year
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$683
|
$146
|
|
Trade receivables, net of allowances
|
804
|
608
|
|
Receivables from joint ventures, partnerships, and other
|
330
|
321
|
|
Inventories
|
510
|
491
|
|
Prepaid expenses and other
|
147
|
307
|
|
Total current assets
|
2,474
|
1,873
|
|
Long term receivables, net
|
264
|
275
|
Instructions
(a) What items other than coin and currency may be included in “cash”?
(b) What items may be included in “cash equivalents”?
(c) What are compensating balance arrangements, and how should they be reported in financial statements?
(d) What are the possible differences between cash equivalents and short term (temporary) investments?
(e) Assuming that the sale agreement meets the criteria for sale accounting, cash proceeds were $345 million, the carrying value of the receivables sold was $360 million, and the fair value of the recourse liability was $15 million, what was the effect on income from the sale of receivables?
(f) Briefly discuss the impact of the transaction in (e) on Occidental’s liquidity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case: Microsoft Corporation
Microsoft is the leading developer of software in the world. To continue to be successful Microsoft must generate new products, which requires significant amounts of cash. Shown below is the current asset and current liability information from Microsoft’s June 30, 2009, balance sheet (in millions). Following the Microsoft data is the current asset and current liability information for Oracle (in millions), another major software developer.
|
Microsoft Corporation Balance Sheets (partial)
As of June 30 (in millions)
|
|
Current assets
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash and equivalents
|
$6,076
|
$10,339
|
|
Short term investments
|
25,371
|
13,323
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
11,192
|
13,589
|
|
Other
|
6,641
|
5,991
|
|
Total current assets
|
$49,280
|
$43,242
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$27,034
|
$29,886
|
|
Oracle Balance Sheets (partial) As of May 31 (in millions)
|
|
Current assets
|
2009
|
2008
|
|
Cash and equivalents
|
$8,995
|
$8,262
|
|
Short term investments
|
3,629
|
2,781
|
|
Receivables
|
4,430
|
5,127
|
|
Other current assets
|
1,527
|
1,933
|
|
Total current assets
|
$18,581
|
$18,103
|
|
Current liabilities
|
$9,149
|
$10,029
|
Part 1 (Cash and Cash Equivalents)
Instructions
(a) What is the definition of a cash equivalent? Give some examples of cash equivalents. How do cash equivalents differ from other types of short term investments?
(b) Calculate (1) the current ratio and (2) working capital for each company for 2009 and discuss your results.
(c) Is it possible to have too many liquid assets?
Part 2 (Accounts Receivables)
Microsoft provided the following disclosure related to its accounts receivable.
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. The allowance for doubtful accounts reflects our best estimate of probable losses inherent in the accounts receivable balance. We determine the allowance based on known troubled accounts, historical experience, and other currently available evidence. Activity in the allowance for doubtful accounts is as follows:
|
|
(in millions)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year Ended June 30
|
Balance at beginning of period
|
Charged to costs and expenses
|
Write offs and other
|
Balance at end of period
|
|
2007
|
$142
|
$64
|
($89)
|
$117
|
|
2008
|
117
|
88
|
52
|
153
|
|
2009
|
153
|
360
|
62
|
451
|
Instructions
(a) Compute Microsoft’s accounts receivable turnover ratio for 2009 and discuss your results. Microsoft had sales revenue of $58,437 million in 2009.
(b) Reconstruct the summary journal entries for 2009 based on the information in the disclosure.
(c) Briefly discuss how the accounting for bad debts affects the analysis in Part 2 (a).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting, Analysis, and Principles
The Flatiron Pub provides catering services to local businesses. The following information was available for The Flatiron for the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2012.
| |
31 Dec 11
|
31 Dec 12
|
|
Cash
|
$2,000
|
$1,685
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
46,000
|
?
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
550
|
?
|
|
Other current assets
|
8,500
|
7,925
|
|
Current liabilities
|
37,000
|
44,600
|
|
Total credit sales
|
205,000
|
255,000
|
|
Collections on accounts receivable
|
190,000
|
228,000
|
Flatiron management is preparing for a meeting with its bank concerning renewal of a loan and has collected the following information related to the above balances.
1. The cash reported at December 31, 2012, refl ects the following items: petty cash $1,575 and postage stamps $110. The Other current assets balance at December 31, 2012, includes the checking account balance of $4,000.
2. On November 30, 2012, Flatiron agreed to accept a 6 month, $5,000 note bearing 12% interest, payable at maturity, from a major client in settlement of a $5,000 bill. The above balances do not reflect this transaction.
3. Flatiron factored some accounts receivable at the end of 2012. It transferred accounts totaling $10,000 to Final Factor, Inc. with recourse. Final Factor will receive the collections from Flatiron’s customers and will retain 2% of the balances. Final Factor assesses Flatiron a finance charge of 3% on this transfer. The fair value of the recourse liability is $400. However, management has determined that the amount due from the factor and the fair value of the resource obligation have not been recorded, and neither are included in the balances above.
4. Flatiron charged off uncollectible accounts with balances of $1,600. On the basis of the latest available information, the 2012 provision for bad debts is estimated to be 2.5% of accounts receivable.
Accounting
(a) Based on the above transactions, determine the balance for (1) Accounts Receivable and
(2) Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at December 31, 2012.
(b) Prepare the current assets section of The Flatiron’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Analysis
(a) Compute Flatiron’s current ratio and accounts receivable turnover ratio for December 31, 2012. Use these measures to analyze Flatiron’s liquidity. The accounts receivable turnover ratio in 2011 was 4.37.
(b) Discuss how the analysis you did above of Flatiron’s liquidity would be affected if Flatiron had transferred the receivables in a secured borrowing transaction.
Principles
What is the conceptual basis for recording bad debt expense based on the percentage of receivables at December 31, 2012?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BRIDGE TO THE PROFESSION
Professional Research: FASB Codification
As the new staff person in your company’s treasury department, you have been asked to conduct research related to a proposed transfer of receivables. Your supervisor wants the authoritative sources for the following items that are discussed in the securitization agreement.
Instructions
Prepare responses to the following. Provide Codification references for your responses.
(a) Identify relevant Codification section that addresses transfers of receivables.
(b) What are the objectives for reporting transfers of receivables?
(c) Provide definitions for the following:
(1) Transfer.
(2) Recourse.
(3) Collateral.
(d) Provide other examples (besides recourse and collateral) that qualify as continuing involvement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Briefly describe the impairment evaluation process and assessment of receivables on an individual or collective basis.
2. What are some steps taken by both the FASB and IASB to move to fair value measurement for financial instruments? In what ways have some of the approaches differed?
3. On December 31, 2012, Firth Company borrowed $62,092 from Paris Bank, signing a 5 year, $100,000 zero internet bearing note. The note was issued to yield 10% interest. Unfortunately, during 2012, Firth began to experience financial diffi culty. As a result, at December 31, 2012, Paris Bank determined that it was probable that it would collect only $75,000 at maturity. The market rate of interest on loans of this nature is now 11%.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the entry (if any) to record the impairment of the loan on December 31, 2014, by Paris Bank.
(b) Prepare the entry on March 31, 2015, if Paris learns that Firth will be able to repay the loan under the original terms.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Determining Cash Balance) The controller for Weinstein Co. is attempting to determine the amount of cash and cash equivalents to be reported on its December 31, 2012, balance sheet. The following information is provided.
1. Commercial savings account of $600,000 and a commercial checking account balance of $800,000 are held at First National Bank of Olathe.
2. Money market fund account held at Volonte Co. (a mutual fund organization) permits Weinstein to write checks on this balance, $5,000,000.
3. Travel advances of $180,000 for executive travel for the first quarter of next year (employee to reimburse through salary reduction).
4. A separate cash fund in the amount of $1,500,000 is restricted for the retirement of long term debt.
5. Petty cash fund of $1,000.
6. An I.O.U. from Marianne Koch, a company customer, in the amount of $150,000.
7. A bank overdraft of $110,000 has occurred at one of the banks the company uses to deposit its cash receipts. At the present time, the company has no deposits at this bank.
8. The company has two certificates of deposit, each totaling $500,000. These CDs have a maturity of 120 days.
9. Weinstein has received a check that is dated January 12, 2013, in the amount of $125,000.
10. Weinstein has agreed to maintain a cash balance of $500,000 at all times at First National Bank of Olathe to ensure future credit availability.
11. Weinstein has purchased $2,100,000 of commercial paper of Sergio Leone Co. which is due in 60 days.
12. Currency and coin on hand amounted to $7,700.
Instructions
(a) Compute the amount of cash and cash equivalents to be reported on Weinstein Co.’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
(b) Indicate the proper reporting for items that are not reported as cash on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Determine Cash Balance) Presented below are a number of independent situations.
Instructions
For each individual situation, determine the amount that should be reported as cash. If the item(s) is not reported as cash, explain the rationale.
1. Checking account balance $925,000; certificate of deposit $1,400,000; cash advance to subsidiary of $980,000; utility deposit paid to gas company $180.
2. Checking account balance $500,000; an overdraft in special checking account at same bank as normal checking account of $17,000; cash held in a bond sinking fund $200,000; petty cash fund $300; coins and currency on hand $1,350.
3. Checking account balance $590,000; postdated check from a customer $11,000; cash restricted due to maintaining compensating balance requirement of $100,000; certified check from customer $9,800; postage stamps on hand $620.
4. Checking account balance at bank $42,000; money market balance at mutual fund (has checking privileges) $48,000; NSF check received from customer $800.
5. Checking account balance $700,000; cash restricted for future plant expansion $500,000; short term Treasury bills $180,000; cash advance received from customer $900 (not included in checking account balance); cash advance of $7,000 to company executive, payable on demand; refundable deposit of $26,000 paid to federal government to guarantee performance on construction contract.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Determine Ending Accounts Receivable) Your accounts receivable clerk, Mary Herman, to whom you pay a salary of $1,500 per month, has just purchased a new Audi. You decided to test the accuracy of the accounts receivable balance of $117,000 as shown in the ledger. The following information is available for your first year in business.
|
(1) Collections from customers
|
$198,000
|
|
(2) Merchandise purchased
|
320,000
|
|
(3) Ending merchandise inventory
|
70,000
|
|
(4) Goods are marked to sell at 40% above cost
|
|
Instructions
Compute an estimate of the ending balance of accounts receivable from customers that should appear in the ledger and any apparent shortages. Assume that all sales are made on account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Recording Bad Debts) Sandel Company reports the following financial information before adjustments.
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$160,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$2,000
|
|
Sales Revenue (all on credit)
|
|
800,000
|
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
50,000
|
|
Instructions
Prepare the journal entry to record bad debt expense assuming Sandel Company estimates bad debts at (a) 1% of net sales and (b) 5% of accounts receivable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Computing Bad Debts and Preparing Journal Entries) The trial balance before adjustment of Estefan Inc. shows the following balances.
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$80,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
1,750
|
|
|
Sales, Net Revenue (all on credit)
|
|
$580,000
|
Instructions
Give the entry for estimated bad debts assuming that the allowance is to provide for doubtful accounts on the basis of (a) 4% of gross accounts receivable and (b) 1% of net sales.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bad Debts—Aging) Puckett, Inc. includes the following account among its trade receivables.
|
1 Jan
|
Balance forward
|
700
|
28 Jan
|
Cash (#1710)
|
1,100
|
|
20 Jan
|
Invoice #1710
|
1,100
|
2 Apr
|
Cash (#2116)
|
1,350
|
|
14 Mar
|
Invoice #2116
|
1,350
|
10 Apr
|
Cash (1/1 Balance)
|
255
|
|
12 Apr
|
Invoice #2412
|
1,710
|
30 Apr
|
Cash (#2412)
|
1,000
|
|
5 Sep
|
Invoice #3614
|
490
|
20 Sep
|
Cash (#3614 and part of #2412)
|
890
|
|
17 Oct
|
Invoice #4912
|
860
|
|
|
|
|
18 Nov
|
Invoice #5681
|
2,000
|
31 Oct
|
Cash (#4912)
|
860
|
|
20 Dec
|
Invoice #6347
|
800
|
1 Dec
|
Cash (#5681)
|
1,250
|
| |
|
|
29 Dec
|
Cash (#6347)
|
800
|
Instructions
Age the balance and specify any items that apparently require particular attention at year end.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Journalizing Various Receivable Transactions) Presented below is information related to Sanford Corp.
|
1 Jul
|
Sanford Corp. sold to Legler Co. merchandise having a sales price of $10,000 with terms 2/10, net/60. Sanford records its sales and receivables net.
|
|
5
|
Accounts receivable of $12,000 (gross) are factored with Rothchild Credit Corp. without recourse at a financing charge of 9%. Cash is received for the proceeds; collections are handled by the fi nance company. (These accounts were all past the discount period.)
|
|
9
|
Specific accounts receivable of $9,000 (gross) are pledged to Rather Credit Corp. as security for a loan of $6,000 at a finance charge of 6% of the amount of the loan. The finance company will make the collections. (All the accounts receivable are past the discount period.)
|
|
Dec. 29
|
Legler Co. notifies Sanford that it is bankrupt and will pay only 10% of its account. Give the entry to write off the uncollectible balance using the allowance method. (Note: First record the increase in the receivable on July 11 when the discount period passed.)
|
Instructions
Prepare all necessary entries in general journal form for Sanford Corp.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Assigning Accounts Receivable) On April 1, 2012, Prince Company assigns $500,000 of its accounts receivable to the Third National Bank as collateral for a $300,000 loan due July 1, 2012. The assignment agreement calls for Prince Company to continue to collect the receivables. Third National Bank assesses a finance charge of 2% of the accounts receivable, and interest on the loan is 10% (a realistic rate of interest for a note of this type).
Instructions
(a) Prepare the April 1, 2012, journal entry for Prince Company.
(b) Prepare the journal entry for Prince’s collection of $350,000 of the accounts receivable during the period from April 1, 2012, through June 30, 2012.
(c) On July 1, 2012, Prince paid Third National all that was due from the loan it secured on April 1, 2012.
Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Journalizing Various Receivable Transactions) The trial balance before adjustment for Sinatra Company shows the following balances.
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$82,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
1,750
|
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
$430,000
|
Instructions
Using the data above, give the journal entries required to record each of the following cases. (Each situation is independent.)
1. To obtain additional cash, Sinatra factors without recourse $20,000 of accounts receivable with Stills Finance. The finance charge is 10% of the amount factored.
2. To obtain a one year loan of $55,000, Sinatra assigns $65,000 of specific receivable accounts to Ruddin Financial. The finance charge is 8% of the loan; the cash is received and the accounts turned over to Ruddin Financial.
3. The company wants to maintain Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at 5% of gross accounts receivable.
4. The company wishes to increase the allowance account by 1½% of net sales.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer of Receivables without Recourse) SEK Corp. factors $400,000 of accounts receivable with Mays Finance Corporation on a without recourse basis on July 1, 2012. The receivables records are transferred to Mays Finance, which will receive the collections. Mays Finance assesses a finance charge of 1½% of the amount of accounts receivable and retains an amount equal to 4% of accounts receivable to cover sales discounts, returns, and allowances. The transaction is to be recorded as a sale.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entry on July 1, 2012, for SEK Corp. to record the sale of receivables without recourse.
(b) Prepare the journal entry on July 1, 2012, for Mays Finance Corporation to record the purchase of receivables without recourse.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 1, 2012, Rentoul Inc. made two sales.
1. It sold land having a fair value of $900,000 in exchange for a 4 year zero interest bearing promissory note in the face amount of $1,416,163. The land is carried on Rentoul’s books at a cost of $590,000.
2. It rendered services in exchange for a 3%, 8 year promissory note having a face value of $400,000 (interest payable annually).
Rentoul Inc. recently had to pay 8% interest for money that it borrowed from British National Bank. The customers in these two transactions have credit ratings that require them to borrow money at 12% interest.
Instructions
Record the two journal entries that should be recorded by Rentoul Inc. for the sales transactions above that took place on July 1, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Petty Cash) McMann, Inc. decided to establish a petty cash fund to help ensure internal control over its small cash expenditures. The following information is available for the month of April.
1. On April 1, it established a petty cash fund in the amount of $200.
2. A summary of the petty cash expenditures made by the petty cash custodian as of April 10 is as follows.
|
Delivery charges paid on merchandise purchased
|
$60
|
|
Supplies purchased and used
|
25
|
|
Postage expense
|
40
|
|
I.O.U. from employees
|
17
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
36
|
The petty cash fund was replenished on April 10. The balance in the fund was $12.
3. The petty cash fund balance was increased $100 to $300 on April 20.
Instructions
Prepare the journal entries to record transactions related to petty cash for the month of April.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Petty Cash) The petty cash fund of Teasdale’s Auto Repair Service, a sole proprietorship, contains the following.
|
1
|
Coins and currency
|
|
$10.20
|
|
2
|
Postage stamps
|
|
7.9
|
|
3
|
An I.O.U. from Richie Cunningham, an employee, for cash advance
|
|
40
|
|
4
|
Check payable to Teasdale’s Auto Repair from Pottsie Weber, an employee, marked NSF
|
|
34
|
|
5
|
Vouchers for the following:
|
|
|
| |
Stamps
|
$20.00
|
|
| |
Two Rose Bowl tickets for Nick Teasdale
|
170
|
|
| |
Printer cartridge
|
14.35
|
204.35
|
| |
|
|
$296.45
|
The general ledger account Petty Cash has a balance of $300.
Instructions
Prepare the journal entry to record the reimbursement of the petty cash fund.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bank Reconciliation and Adjusting Entries) Kipling Company deposits all receipts and makes all payments by check. The following information is available from the cash records.
|
June 30 Bank Reconciliation
|
|
|
|
Balance per bank
|
$7,000
|
|
|
Add: Deposits in transit
|
1,540
|
|
|
Deduct: Outstanding checks
|
2,000
|
|
|
Balance per books
|
$6,540
|
|
| |
|
|
|
Month of July Results
|
|
|
| |
Per Bank
|
Per Books
|
|
Balance July 31
|
$8,650
|
$9,250
|
|
July deposits
|
4,500
|
5,810
|
|
July checks
|
4,000
|
3,100
|
|
July note collected (not included in July deposits)
|
1,500
|
—
|
|
July bank service charge
|
15
|
—
|
|
July NSF check from a customer, returned by the bank (recorded by bank as a charge)
|
335
|
—
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation going from balance per bank and balance per book to correct cash balance.
(b) Prepare the general journal entry or entries to correct the Cash account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bank Reconciliation and Adjusting Entries) Aragon Company has just received the August 31, 2012, bank statement, which is summarized below.
|
County National Bank
|
Disbursements
|
Receipts
|
Balance
|
|
Balance, August 1
|
|
|
$9,369
|
|
Deposits during August
|
|
$32,200
|
41,569
|
|
Note collected for depositor, including $40 interest
|
|
1,040
|
42,609
|
|
Checks cleared during August
|
$34,500
|
|
8,109
|
|
Bank service charges
|
20
|
|
8,089
|
|
Balance, August 31
|
|
|
8,089
|
The general ledger Cash account contained the following entries for the month of August.
|
Cash
|
|
Balance, August 1
|
10,050
|
Disbursements in August
|
35,403
|
|
Receipts during August
|
35,000
|
|
|
Deposits in transit at August 31 are $3,800, and checks outstanding at August 31 total $1,550. Cash on hand at August 31 is $310. The bookkeeper improperly entered one check in the books at $146.50 which was written for $164.50 for supplies (expense); it cleared the bank during the month of August.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation dated August 31, 2012, proceeding to a correct balance.
(b) Prepare any entries necessary to make the books correct and complete.
(c) What amount of cash should be reported in the August 31 balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Impairments) On December 31, 2012, Conchita Martinez Company signed a $1,000,000 note to Sauk City Bank. The market interest rate at that time was 12%. The stated interest rate on the note was 10%, payable annually. The note matures in 5 years. Unfortunately, because of lower sales, Conchita Martinez’s financial situation worsened. On December 31, 2014, Sauk City Bank determined that it was probable that the company would pay back only $600,000 of the principal at maturity. However, it was considered likely that interest would continue to be paid, based on the $1,000,000 loan.
Instructions
(a) Determine the amount of cash Conchita Martinez received from the loan on December 31, 2012.
(b) Prepare a note amortization schedule for Sauk City Bank up to December 31, 2014.
(c) Determine the loss on impairment that Sauk City Bank should recognize on December 31, 2014.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Determine Proper Cash Balance) Francis Equipment Co. closes its books regularly on December 31, but at the end of 2012 it held its cash book open so that a more favorable balance sheet could be prepared for credit purposes. Cash receipts and disbursements for the first 10 days of January were recorded as December transactions. The information is given below.
1. January cash receipts recorded in the December cash book totaled $45,640, of which $28,000 represents cash sales, and $17,640 represents collections on account for which cash discounts of $360 were given.
2. January cash disbursements recorded in the December check register liquidated accounts payable of $22,450 on which discounts of $250 were taken.
3. The ledger has not been closed for 2012.
4. The amount shown as inventory was determined by physical count on December 31, 2012. The company uses the periodic method of inventory.
Instructions
(a) Prepare any entries you consider necessary to correct Francis’s accounts at December 31.
(b) To what extent was Francis Equipment Co. able to show a more favorable balance sheet at December 31 by holding its cash book open? (Compute working capital and the current ratio.) Assume that the balance sheet that was prepared by the company showed the following amounts:
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$39,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
42,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
67,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$45,000
|
|
Other current liabilities
|
|
14,200
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bad Debt Reporting) Presented below are a series of unrelated situations.
1. Halen Company’s unadjusted trial balance at December 31, 2012, included the following accounts.
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
$4,000
|
|
|
Net sales
|
|
$1,200,000
|
Halen Company estimates its bad debt expense to be 1½% of net sales. Determine its bad debt expense for 2012.
2. An analysis and aging of Stuart Corp. accounts receivable at December 31, 2012, disclosed the following.
|
Amounts estimated to be uncollectible
|
$ 180,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
1,750,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts (per books)
|
125,000
|
What is the net realizable value of Stuart’s receivables at December 31, 2012?
3. Shore Co. provides for doubtful accounts based on 3% of credit sales. The following data are available for 2012.
|
Credit sales during 2012
|
$2,400,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts 1/1/12
|
17,000
|
|
Collection of accounts written off in prior years (customer credit was reestablished)
|
8,000
|
|
Customer accounts written off as uncollectible during 2012
|
30,000
|
What is the balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at December 31, 2012?
4. At the end of its first year of operations, December 31, 2012, Darden Inc. reported the following information.
|
Accounts receivable, net of allowance for doubtful accounts
|
$950,000
|
|
Customer accounts written off as uncollectible during 2012
|
24,000
|
|
Bad debt expense for 2012
|
84,000
|
What should be the balance in accounts receivable at December 31, 2012, before subtracting the allowance for doubtful accounts?
5. The following accounts were taken from Bullock Inc.’s trial balance at December 31, 2012.
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Net credit sales
|
|
$750,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
$14,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
310,000
|
|
If doubtful accounts are 3% of accounts receivable, determine the bad debt expense to be reported for 2012.
Instructions
Answer the questions relating to each of the five independent situations as requested.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bad Debt Reporting—Aging) Manilow Corporation operates in an industry that has a high rate of bad debts. Before any year end adjustments, the balance in Manilow’s Accounts Receivable account was $555,000 and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a credit balance of $40,000. The year end balance reported in the balance sheet for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts will be based on the aging schedule shown below.
|
Days Account Outstanding
|
Amount
|
Probability of Collection
|
|
Less than 16 days
|
$300,000
|
.98
|
|
Between 16 and 30 days
|
100,000
|
.90
|
|
Between 31 and 45 days
|
80,000
|
.85
|
|
Between 46 and 60 days
|
40,000
|
.80
|
|
Between 61 and 75 days
|
20,000
|
.55
|
|
Over 75 days
|
15,000
|
.00
|
Instructions
(a) What is the appropriate balance for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at year end?
(b) Show how accounts receivable would be presented on the balance sheet.
(c) What is the dollar effect of the year end bad debt adjustment on the before tax income?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bad Debt Reporting) From inception of operations to December 31, 2012, Fortner Corporation provided for uncollectible accounts receivable under the allowance method: provisions were made monthly at 2% of credit sales; bad debts written off were charged to the allowance account; recoveries of bad debts previously written off were credited to the allowance account; and no year end adjustments to the allowance account were made. Fortner’s usual credit terms are net 30 days.
The balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts was $130,000 at January 1, 2012. During 2012, credit sales totaled $9,000,000, interim provisions for doubtful accounts were made at 2% of credit sales, $90,000 of bad debts were written off, and recoveries of accounts previously written off amounted to $15,000.
Fortner installed a computer system in November 2012, and an aging of accounts receivable was prepared for the first time as of December 31, 2012. A summary of the aging is as follows.
|
Classification by Month of Sale
|
Balance in Each Category
|
Estimated % Uncollectible
|
|
November–December 2012
|
$1,080,000
|
2%
|
|
July–October
|
650,000
|
10%
|
|
January–June
|
420,000
|
25%
|
|
Prior to 1/1/12
|
150,000
|
80%
|
| |
$2,300,000
|
|
Based on the review of collectibility of the account balances in the “prior to 1/1/12” aging category, additional receivables totaling $60,000 were written off as of December 31, 2012. The 80% uncollectible estimate applies to the remaining $90,000 in the category. Effective with the year ended December 31, 2012, Fortner adopted a different method for estimating the allowance for doubtful accounts at the amount indicated by the year end aging analysis of accounts receivable.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a schedule analyzing the changes in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts for the year ended December 31, 2012. Show supporting computations in good form.
(b) Prepare the journal entry for the year end adjustment to the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts balance as of December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
When the financial controller of Bakers Company set the budget for the year ahead, it was expected that monthly output of cake packages would be 12,000 units. In March the output was increased to 14,000 per month following negotiation with a chain of corner shops. The following table reports the original budget and the actual outcome for the month of March.
|
|
Original budget
|
Actual for March
|
|
Cake packages output
|
12,000
|
14,000
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Direct materials
|
48,000
|
53,000
|
|
Direct labour
|
24,000
|
29,000
|
|
Variable overhead
|
6,000
|
7,200
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
4,000
|
4,500
|
|
Total production costs
|
82,000
|
93,700
|
Required
(1) Prepare a statement showing a flexible budget and variances.
(2) Make a recommendation on the most significant variance for investigation, and suggest two possible causes to investigate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The financial controller of the local town council set a budget for street cleaning in one estate as shown in the first column below. In the month of April the cleaning supervisor cut back on 20 miles of cleaning to save costs. The actual costs for April are shown in the second column below.
|
|
Original budget
|
Actual for April
|
|
Miles of streets cleaned per week
|
400
|
380
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Cleaning materials (variable)
|
1,600
|
1,550
|
|
Fuel for vehicle (variable)
|
6,000
|
5,800
|
|
Direct labour (fixed)
|
1,500
|
1,550
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
|
Total production costs
|
10,100
|
9,900
|
Required
(1) Prepare a statement showing a flexible budget and variances.
(2) Write a short comment to the financial controller on the effectiveness of the cleaning supervisor’s attempt to reduce costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Seats Ltd (‘Seats’) manufactures seats for installation in buses. It obtains its raw materials from Comfort Ltd (‘Comfort’), a wholly owned subsidiary which sells only to Seats. The raw materials of foam and covering are cut to shape by Comfort and sold to Seats in packages ready for assembly. Seats could obtain raw materials from suppliers other than Comfort but would pay a price 10% higher than that charged by Comfort. One third of the output of Seats is bought by Buses Ltd (‘Buses’), a company which produces buses. Buses has at present significant unutilised production capacity and could produce and sell more buses if the price of buses could be reduced. To achieve this, Buses would require Seats to reduce its selling prices and has asked Seats to quote a lower price. Buses has indicated its willingness to increase its total purchases from Seats to one of the following options:
|
|
If the price charged by Seats is:
|
Then Buses will buy a total of:
|
|
Option I
|
£24 per seat
|
35,000 seats
|
|
Option II
|
£23 per seat
|
45,000 seats
|
|
Option III
|
£22 per seat
|
60,000 seats
|
The total volume includes in each case the number of seats currently being purchased by Buses from Seats. The directors of Seats are prepared to offer a lower price to Buses subject to the following restrictions:
1 Other existing customers must be guaranteed to receive their present level of supplies at present day prices.
2 There can be no expansion of the productive capacity of either Seats or Comfort.
Sales and production volumes are always equal. The following budgets for the year to 30 June Year 9 were prepared before Buses made the request for a price reduction:
|
Comfort
|
Seats
|
|
Sales in units
|
50,000
|
75,000
|
|
Unutilised productive capacity
|
20%
|
25%
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Unit selling price
|
8.00
|
25.00
|
|
Unit cost of production
|
|
|
|
Materials
|
2.00
|
8.00
|
|
Labour
|
1.50
|
7.00
|
|
Variable overhead
|
1.00
|
5.00
|
|
Fixed overhead per annum
|
60,000
|
110,000
|
Required
Write a report to the directors of Seats Ltd:
(a) advising on the effect of each of the options proposed by Buses; and
(b) containing a statement comparing the original budgeted profits of Comfort and Seats with the profits which would arise if Seats group were to adopt the most advantageous option.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been appointed financial controller of Constructabus plc, a coach building company, which specialises in two types of bus, a standard double deck vehicle and a luxury coach model. The chassis and engine are bought in and the framework of each bus is built on the assembly floor. All the fixtures and fittings are added in the finishing shed to meet customers’ specifications.
The head of the accounts department has provided you with the following information for the year ended 31 August Year 8:
|
|
Standard bus
|
Luxury coach
|
|
Sales in units
|
100
|
120
|
|
Total sales value
|
£3,075,000
|
£4,020,000
|
|
Production in units
|
90
|
80
|
|
Stock of finished units at 31 August Year 8
|
20
|
30
|
|
Labour hours per unit:
|
|
|
|
Assembly floor
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
|
Finishing shed
|
1,000
|
1,500
|
|
Direct materials cost per unit
|
£4,000
|
£4,000
|
|
Total variable selling costs
|
£150,000
|
£144,000
|
|
Departmental Costs:
|
Assembly floor
|
Finishing shed
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Labour
|
1,300,000
|
1,260,000
|
|
Variable overhead
|
520,000
|
210,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
200,000
|
180,000
|
Further information:
1 Stocks are valued at variable cost of production for management accounting purposes. Work in progress may be ignored. At 1 September Year 7, stock values were £25,000 per standard bus and £21,500 per luxury coach.
2 The assembly floor has achieved full working capacity during the year but the finishing shed was 25% under utilized. The head of the accounts department has prepared the following budget for the year ending 31 August Year 9:
|
|
Standard Bus
|
Luxury coach
|
|
Sales in units
|
60
|
150
|
|
Total sales value Production in units
|
£1,845,000 60
|
£5,475,000 145
|
|
Direct materials costs Total variable selling costs
|
£240,000 £105,000
|
£725,000 £180,000
|
|
Departmental Costs:
|
Assembly floor £
|
Finishing shed £
|
|
Labour Variable overhead Fixed overhead
|
1,590,000 795,000 200,000
|
1,665,000 277,500 220,000
|
Further information:
1 Labour hours per unit are assumed to be the same as for the year ended 31 August Year 8.
2 Due to changing patterns in public transport, the budget has recognised that demand for standard buses has fallen by 40% but that sales of the luxury coaches will expand by 25%.
Required:
Prepare a report for the board which provides:
(a) a statement of budgeted profit for each product for the year ending 31 August Year 9;
(b) a comparison of this budget with the actual results for each product for the year ended 31 August Year 8; and
(c) comments on your analysis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been approached by James Johnstone for advice on budgeting techniques. Mr Johnstone has recently inherited a majority shareholding in, and been appointed managing director of, Nicholas Knitwear Ltd (‘NK”). NK is a small, long established family firm which manufactures knitwear for sale to several department stores. It also owns and operates three retail outlets in tourist areas which sell NK products and other gift items. NK is profitable, but Mr Johnstone is concerned that no one seems to know exactly how profitable it could be or should be. The quarterly management accounts report this year”s actual figures compared with last year”s actual figures, with no comment on the differences. Mr Johnstone realises that NK should have budgets against which annual performance can be measured, but has no idea as to how to proceed. Write a report to Mr Johnstone advising him on appropriate budgeting techniques for NK.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Define the terms ‘standard cost’ and ‘variance’.
- Explain the purpose of using standard costs.
- Describe the problems of choosing the level of output for standards.
- Explain how the control process uses standard costs and variances.
- Calculate and interpret variances for product costs and sales margins.
- Combine calculation of all variances in a case study.
- Explain how variances may be investigated.
- Use flexible budgeting to calculate variances in a case study.
- Discuss the usefulness of variance analysis.
- Understand the broader views that exist regarding variance analysis.
- Describe and discuss research into the use of standard costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Give three reasons for regarding variance reports as a useful tool of management.
2. It was budgeted that to produce 20,000 concrete building blocks in one month would require 100,000 kg of material. In the month of May, only 16,000 blocks were produced, using 80,080 kg of material. The standard cost of materials is £3 per kg. What is the materials usage variance?
3. The standard cost of direct labour in the month of August is £36,000. There is a direct labour rate variance of £6,000 adverse and a direct labour efficiency variance of £2,500 favourable. What is the actual cost of direct labour in the month?
4. Fixed overhead for the month of October has been budgeted at £16,000 with an expectation of 8,000 units of production. The actual fixed overhead cost is £17,500 and the actual production is 7,000 units. What is the variance?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The monthly budget of Plastics Ltd, manufacturers of specialist containers, was prepared on the following specification:
|
Production and sales
|
30,000 units
|
|
Selling price
|
£70 per unit
|
|
Direct materials input
|
5 kg per unit at a cost of £1.20 per kg
|
|
Direct labour input
|
2 hours per unit at a rate of £4 per hour
|
|
Variable overhead
|
£2 per direct labour hour
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
£90,000 per month
|
The following actual results were recorded for the month of May Year 8:
|
Stock of finished goods at start of month
|
8,000 units
|
|
Sales
|
40,000 units
|
|
Production
|
42,800 units
|
|
Stock of finished goods at end of month
|
10,800 units
|
Actual costs incurred were:
|
|
£
|
|
Direct material
|
267,220 (213,776 kg at £1.25 per kg)
|
|
Direct labour
|
356,577
|
|
Variable overhead
|
165,243
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
95,000
|
Further information
(a) Throughout May the price paid for direct materials was £1.25 per kg. Direct material is used as soon as it arrives on site. No stocks of materials were held at the start or end of May.
(b) The labour rate paid throughout the month was £4.10 per hour.
(c) The selling price of finished goods was £70 per unit throughout the month.
(d) Stocks of finished goods are valued at standard cost of production.
Required
(a) Calculate the budgeted profit for May Year 8, based on the actual sales volume achieved.
(b) Calculate the cost variances for the month of May.
(c) Explain how cost variances may be used to identify responsibility for cost control within the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carry pack Ltd manufactures and sells plastic cases for portable computers. Production each month equals sales orders received. The following monthly budget was prepared at the start of Year 6, to apply throughout the year:
|
|
Units
|
£
|
£
|
|
Sales (@ £50 per unit):
|
12,000
|
|
600,000
|
|
Production:
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
Production costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
132,000
|
|
|
Direct labour
|
|
108,000
|
|
|
Variable overheads
|
|
72,000
|
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
|
48,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
360,000
|
|
Budgeted profit
|
|
|
240,000
|
Further information
(a) Budgeted direct materials used per month were set at 26,400 kg.
(b) Budgeted direct labour hours per month were set at 36,000 hours.
The following actual report was produced for the month of April Year 6:
|
|
Units
|
£
|
£
|
|
Sales (@ £50 per unit):
|
12,300
|
|
615,000
|
|
Production:
|
12,300
|
|
|
|
Production costs:
|
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
|
136,220
|
|
|
Direct labour
|
|
129,200
|
|
|
Variable overheads
|
|
72,200
|
|
|
Fixed overheads
|
|
49,400
|
|
|
|
|
|
387,020
|
|
Actual profit
|
|
|
227,980
|
Further information
(a) Actual direct materials used during April were 27,800 kg.
(b) Actual direct labour hours worked during April were 38,000 hours.
Required
(1) Prepare an explanation, using variances, of the difference between the budgeted profit and the actual profit for the month of April.
(2) Comment on possible causes for the variances you have calculated.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has the following total cost data available for two levels of production of one type of product:
|
|
4,000 units
|
8,000 units
|
|
Purchasing costs
|
£112,000
|
£140,000
|
|
Supervision
|
£25,000
|
£41,000
|
|
Power
|
£12,000
|
£15,500
|
The current supervisor can cover production levels up to and including 5,000 units. For higher levels of production, an assistant supervisor costing £16,000 is also required. For power, a flat fee is payable that will cover all power costs sufficient to produce up to and including 6,000 units. For production above this level there is an additional variable charge per unit.
Calculate the total flexed budget cost allowance for the production of 7,500 units.
State four factors that should be considered before the cause of a variance is investigated.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following report has been prepared for the production department of Cabinets Ltd in respect of the month of May Year 4:
|
|
Actual costs or
quantities recorded
|
Variance
£
|
|
Direct materials price
|
£2.80 per kg
|
2,240 favourable
|
|
Direct materials usage
|
11,200 kg
|
4,800 adverse
|
|
Direct labour rate
|
£9 per hour
|
5,600 adverse
|
|
Direct labour efficiency
|
3.5 hours per unit
|
6,400 adverse
|
|
Fixed overhead expenditure
|
£39,000
|
3,000 adverse
|
The department manufactures storage cabinets. When the budget was prepared, it was expected that 1,800 units would be produced in the month but, due to a machine breakdown, only 1,600 units were produced.
Required
(a) Reconstruct the original budget, giving as much information as may be derived from the data presented above.
(b) Provide an interpretation of the performance of the production department during the month of May Year 4.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fixit Ltd is a manufacturing company which produces a fixed budget for planning purposes. Set out below is the fixed monthly budget of production costs, together with the actual results observed for the month of July Year 7.
|
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
|
Units produced
|
5,000
|
5,500
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
20,000
|
22,764
|
|
Direct labour
|
60,000
|
75,900
|
|
Variable production overhead
|
14,000
|
14,950
|
|
Fixed production overhead
|
10,000
|
9,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
4,000
|
4,000
|
In preparing the fixed budget, the following standards were adopted:
|
Direct material
|
10 kg of materials per unit produced.
|
|
Direct labour
|
2 hours per unit produced.
|
|
Variable production overhead
|
A cost rate per direct labour hour was calculated.
|
|
Fixed production overhead
|
A cost rate per unit was calculated.
|
|
Depreciation
|
Straight line method is used for all assets.
|
The following additional information is available concerning the actual output:
(a) the actual usage of materials in July was 54,200 kg; and
(b) the nationally agreed wage rate increased to £6.60 per hour at the start of July.
Required
(a) Prepare a flexible budget in respect of Fixit Ltd for the month of July Year 7.
(b) Analyse and comment on cost variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Concrete Products Ltd manufactures heavy paving slabs for sale to local authorities and garden paving slabs for domestic use.
The board of directors meets early in each month to review the company’s performance during the previous month. In advance of each meeting, the directors are presented with a computer print out summarising the activity of the previous month. The computer print out in respect of the month of December Year 8 is set out below:
|
|
Heavy paving
|
Garden paving
|
|
|
Actual tonnes
|
Budget tonnes
|
Actual tonnes
|
Budget tonnes
|
|
Sales volume
|
29,000
|
27,500
|
10,500
|
8,500
|
|
Production volume
|
29,000
|
27,500
|
10,500
|
8,500
|
|
|
£000s
|
£000s
|
£000s
|
£000s
|
|
Revenue
|
720
|
690
|
430
|
300
|
|
Variable cost of sales
|
280
|
270
|
170
|
127
|
|
Contribution
|
440
|
420
|
260
|
173
|
Further information
(a) The actual fixed costs incurred during the month equalled the budgeted fixed costs of £310,000.
(b) Stocks are valued at standard cost.
You have recently been appointed a director of Concrete Products Ltd. At an earlier meeting with the finance director you received an explanation of the basis for the company’s monthly budget and you are satisfied that the budget has been prepared on a realistic basis.
Required
(1) Prepare, from the information contained in the computer print out, your analysis and comments on the company’s performance during the month of December Year 8, as background for the board meeting.
(2) List, with reasons, three questions you would ask at the meeting in order to give you a fuller understanding of the company’s performance during the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nu Line Ltd purchases manufactured machine tools for conversion to specialist use. The converted tools are sold to the textile industry. The following information relates to the month of July Year 3.
|
|
Budget
(units)
|
Actual
(units)
|
|
Purchases of machine tools
|
180
|
180
|
|
Completed production
|
180
|
140
|
|
Sales
|
130
|
150
|
|
Stock of finished goods at 1 July Year 3
|
15
|
15
|
|
Stock of finished goods at 31 July Year 3
|
65
|
5
|
There was no stock of purchased machine tools or work in progress at either the start or the end of the month. Finished goods are valued at full standard cost of production. The standard cost of one completed production unit is:
|
|
£
|
|
Purchased machine tool
|
600
|
|
Direct labour
|
300
|
|
Fixed production overhead Variable production overhead
|
200 100 1,200
|
The fixed production overhead per unit was determined by reference to the budgeted volume of production per month.
A standard selling price of £2,000 per completed unit was specified in the budget and was achieved in practice.
Actual costs incurred during the month were as follows:
|
|
£
|
|
Invoiced price of machine tools purchased
|
86,800
|
|
Direct wages paid
|
47,500
|
|
Fixed production overhead
|
35,000
|
|
Variable production overhead
|
13,000
|
Required
(1) Prepare a statement of the budgeted profit and the actual profit for the month of July.
(2) Using variances, reconcile the budgeted profit with the actual profit.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What is the theoretical justification of the allowance method as contrasted with the direct write off method of accounting for bad debts?
2. Indicate how well the percentage of sales method and the aging method accomplish the objectives of the allowance method of accounting for bad debts.
3. Of what merit is the contention that the allowance method lacks the objectivity of the direct write off method? Discuss in terms of accounting’s measurement function.1
4. Explain how the accounting for bad debts can be used for earnings management.
5. Because of calamitous earthquake losses, Bernstein Company, one of your client’s oldest and largest customers, suddenly and unexpectedly became bankrupt. Approximately 30% of your client’s total sales have been made to Bernstein Company during each of the past several years. The amount due from Bernstein Company—none of which is collectible—equals 22% of total accounts receivable, an amount that is considerably in excess of what was determined to be an adequate provision for doubtful accounts at the close of the preceding year. How would your client record the write off of the Bernstein Company receivable if it is using the allowance method of accounting for bad debts? Justify your suggested treatment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What is the normal procedure for handling the collection of accounts receivable previously written off using the direct write off method? The allowance method?
2. On January 1, 2012, Lombard Co. sells property for which it had paid $690,000 to Sargent Company, receiving in return Sargent’s zero interest bearing note for $1,000,000 payable in 5 years. What entry would Lombard make to record the sale, assuming that Lombard frequently sells similar items of property for a cash sales price of $640,000?
3. What is “imputed interest”? In what situations is it necessary to impute an interest rate for notes receivable? What are the considerations in imputing an appropriate interest rate?
4. What is the fair value option? Where do companies that elect the fair value option report unrealized holding gains and losses?
5. Indicate three reasons why a company might sell its receivables to another company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horizon Outfitters Company includes in its trial balance for December 31 an item for Accounts Receivable $789,000. This balance consists of the following items:
|
Due from regular customers
|
$523,000
|
|
Refund receivable on prior year’s income taxes (an established claim)
|
15,500
|
|
Travel advance to employees
|
22,000
|
|
Loan to wholly owned subsidiary
|
45,500
|
|
Advances to creditors for goods ordered
|
61,000
|
|
Accounts receivable assigned as security for loans payable
|
75,000
|
|
Notes receivable past due plus interest on these notes
|
47,000
|
|
Total
|
$789,000
|
Illustrate how these items should be shown in the balance sheet as of December 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kraft Enterprises owns the following assets at December 31, 2012.
|
Cash in bank—savings account
|
68,000
|
Checking account balance
|
17,000
|
|
Cash on hand
|
9,300
|
Postdated checks
|
750
|
|
Cash refund due from IRS
|
31,400
|
Certificates of deposit (180 day)
|
90,000
|
What amount should be reported as cash?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Restin Co. uses the gross method to record sales made on credit. On June 1, 2012, it made sales of $50,000 with terms 3/15, n/45. On June 12, 2012, Restin received full payment for the June 1 sale.
Prepare the required journal entries for Restin Co.
2. Use the information from BE7 2, assuming Restin Co. uses the net method to account for cash discounts.
Prepare the required journal entries for Restin Co.
3. Wilton, Inc. had net sales in 2012 of $1,400,000. At December 31, 2012, before adjusting entries, the balances in selected accounts were: Accounts Receivable $250,000 debit, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $2,400 credit. If Wilton estimates that 2% of its net sales will prove to be uncollectible, prepare the December 31, 2012, journal entry to record bad debt expense.
4. Use the information presented in BE7 4 for Wilton, Inc.
(a) Instead of estimating the uncollectibles at 2% of net sales, assume that 10% of accounts receivable will prove to be uncollectible. Prepare the entry to record bad debt expense.
(b) Instead of estimating uncollectibles at 2% of net sales, assume Wilton prepares an aging schedule that estimates total uncollectible accounts at $24,600. Prepare the entry to record bad debt expense.
5. Milner Family Importers sold goods to Tung Decorators for $30,000 on November 1, 2012, accepting Tung’s $30,000, 6 month, 6% note. Prepare Milner’s November 1 entry, December 31 annual adjusting entry, and May 1 entry for the collection of the note and interest.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Dold Acrobats lent $16,529 to Donaldson, Inc., accepting Donaldson’s 2 year, $20,000, zero interestbearing note. The implied interest rate is 10%. Prepare Dold’s journal entries for the initial transaction, recognition of interest each year, and the collection of $20,000 at maturity.
2. On October 1, 2012, Chung, Inc. assigns $1,000,000 of its accounts receivable to Seneca National Bank as collateral for a $750,000 note. The bank assesses a finance charge of 2% of the receivables assigned and interest on the note of 9%. Prepare the October 1 journal entries for both Chung and Seneca.
3. Wood Incorporated factored $150,000 of accounts receivable with Engram Factors Inc. on a without recourse basis. Engram assesses a 2% finance charge of the amount of accounts receivable and retains an amount equal to 6% of accounts receivable for possible adjustments. Prepare the journal entry for Wood Incorporated and Engram Factors to record the factoring of the accounts receivable to Engram.
4. Use the information in BE7 9 for Wood. Assume that the receivables are sold with recourse. Prepare the journal entry for Wood to record the sale, assuming that the recourse liability has a fair value of $7,500.
5. Arness Woodcrafters sells $250,000 of receivables to Commercial Factors, Inc. on a with recourse basis. Commercial assesses a finance charge of 5% and retains an amount equal to 4% of accounts receivable. Arness estimates the fair value of the recourse liability to be $8,000. Prepare the journal entry for Arness to record the sale.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Assume that one of your classmates states that a company’s books should be ongoing and therefore not closed until that business is terminated. Write a half page memo to this classmate explaining the concept of the closing process by drawing analogies between (1) a scoreboard for an athletic event and the revenue and expense accounts of a business or (2) a sports team’s record book and the capital account.
2. CAccess Motley Fool’s discussion of the current ratio.
Required
1. What level for the current ratio is generally regarded as sufficient to meet near term operating needs?
2. Once you have calculated the current ratio for a company, what should you compare it against?
3. What are the implications for a company that has a current ratio that is too high?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Select a company that you can visit in person or interview on the telephone. Call ahead to the company to arrange a time when you can interview an employee (preferably an accountant) who helps prepare the annual financial statements. Inquire about the following aspects of its accounting cycle:
1. Does the company prepare interim financial statements? What time period(s) is used for interim statements?
2. Does the company use the cash or accrual basis of accounting?
3. Does the company use a work sheet in preparing financial statements? Why or why not?
4. Does the company use a spreadsheet program? If so, which software program is used?
5. How long does it take after the end of its reporting period to complete annual statements?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nokia is a leading global manufacturer of mobile devices and services. The following selected information is available from Nokia’s financial statements.
|
(Euro million)
|
Current Year
|
Prior Year
|
|
Current assets
|
23,613
|
24,470
|
|
Current liabilities
|
15,188
|
20,355
|
Required
1. Compute Nokia’s current ratio for both the current year and the prior year.
2. Comment on any change from the prior year to the current year for the current ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Describe merchandising activities and identify income components for a merchandising company.
2. Identify and explain the inventory asset and cost flows of a merchandising company.
3. Compute the acid test ratio and explain its use to assess liquidity.
4. Compute the gross margin ratio and explain its use to assess profitability.
5. Analyze and record transactions for merchandise purchases using a perpetual system.
6. Analyze and record transactions for merchandise sales using a perpetual system.
7. Prepare adjustments and close accounts for a merchandising company.
8. Define and prepare multiple step and single step income statements.
9. Record and compare merchandising transactions using both periodic and perpetual inventory systems.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(AACSB) Analysis
To earn money to pay some college expenses, you ran a lawn mowing business during the summer. Before heading to college at the end of August, you wanted to find out how much money you earned for the summer. Fortunately, you kept good accounting records. During the summer, you charged customers a total of $5,000 for cutting lawns (which includes $500 still owed to you by one of your biggest customers). You paid out $1,000 for gasoline, lawn mower repairs, and other expenses, including $100 for a lawn mower tune up that you haven’t paid for yet. You decided to prepare an income statement to see how you did. Because you couldn’t decide whether you should prepare a cash basis statement or an accrual statement, you prepared both. What was your income under each approach? Which method (cash basis or accrual) more accurately reflects the income that you earned during the summer? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TEAM BUILDING SKILLS (AACSB)
Taking Stock of Ratios
Your class has been told that each group of three students will receive a share of stock in one of three companies in the same industry. But there’s a catch: each group has to decide which of the companies it wants to own stock in. To reach this decision, your team will use ratio analysis to compare the three companies. Each team member will analyze one of the companies using the ratios presented in this chapter. Then, you’ll get together, compare your results, and choose a company. Here are the details of the project:
1. The team selects a group of three companies in the same industry. Here are just a few examples:
- Auto manufacturers. Ford, General Motors, Toyota
- Airlines. Southwest, United Airlines, American Airlines
- Drug companies. GlaxoSmithKline, Eli Lilly & Co., Bristol Myers Squibb
- Specialty retailers. Bed Bath & Beyond, Pottery Barn, Pier 1 Imports
- Computers. Hewlett Packard, Gateway, Apple Computer
2. Every team member gets a copy of one company’s most recent annual report (which includes its financial statements) from the company’s Web site (investor section).
3. Every member calculates the following ratios for the company for the last two years: gross profit margin, net profit margin, inventory turnover (if applicable), return on assets, current ratio, debt to equity, and interest coverage.
4. Get together as a group and compare your results. Decide as a group which company you want to own stock in.
- Write a report indicating the company that your team selected and explain your choice. Attach the following items to your team report:
- A brief explanation of each ratio (how to calculate it and what it means)
- Detailed calculations showing how each ratio was determined
- A chart comparing the ratios for the three companies
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A project is planned to last for three years. Net cash inflows are forecast as £12,000 per year for three years, assumed to arise on the final day of the relevant year. Working capital of £3,000 will be required on the first day of business. The cost of capital is 6 per cent per year. In the calculation shown in Table 12.2 the working capital has to be available at the start of Year 1 (i.e. end of Year 0) but is returned at the end of the project (i.e. end of Year 3).
Table 12.2
Cash flows including working capital requirements
|
End of year
|
Year 0
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
Year 3
|
|
Cash inflows (£)
|
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
|
Working capital (£)
|
(3,000)
|
|
|
3,000
|
|
Net flows (£)
|
(3,000)
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
15,000
|
|
Discount factor 5%
|
1.000
|
(1 + 0.05)
|
(1 + 0.05)2
|
(1 + 0.05)3
|
|
Net flows (£)
|
(3,000)
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
15,000
|
|
Discount factor
|
1.000
|
(1.05)
|
(1.1025)
|
(1.1576)
|
|
Net flows (£)
|
(3,000)
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
15,000
|
|
Discount factor
|
1.000
|
(1.05)
|
(1.1025)
|
(1.1576)
|
|
Discounted net flows (£)
|
(3,000)
|
11,429
|
10,884
|
12,958
|
|
Present value
|
£32,271
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Office Cleaners Co earns cash flows from contract cleaning. The directors have forecast cash flows of £10,000 per year at today’s prices. The required cost of capital is
Table 12.3
Calculation of present value, discounting at today’s prices
|
Present value
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
|
Year 2
|
|
Year 3
|
|
|
=
|
10,000
|
+
|
10,000
|
+
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
(1 + r)
|
|
(1 + r)2
|
|
(1 + r)3
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
|
Year 2
|
|
Year 3
|
|
|
=
|
10,000
|
+
|
10,000
|
+
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
(1 + 0.04)
|
|
(1 + 0.04)2
|
|
(1 + 0.04)3
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
|
Year 2
|
|
Year 3
|
|
|
=
|
10,000
|
+
|
10,000
|
+
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
(1.040)
|
|
(1.0816)
|
|
(1.1249)
|
|
|
=
|
Year 1
|
|
Year 2
|
|
Year 3
|
|
|
|
9,615
|
+
|
9,245
|
+
|
8,890
|
|
|
=
|
£27,750
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
per cent. Assume cash flows arise on the final day of each year. The calculation of the present value is shown in Table 12.3. Now assume there is a forecast of 5 per cent inflation each year for the next three years. If the cash flows are adjusted for the effect of inflation then the discount rate must also be adjusted.
The discount rate is adjusted using the formula (1 ??i)(1 ??r) where i ??the rate of inflation and r ??the inflation free cost of capital.
In this example the calculation is (1 ??i)(1 ??r) ??(1.05)(1.04) ??1.092
The discounting of the inflation adjusted cash flows is shown in Table 12.4.
Table 12.4
Calculation of present value, with adjustment for inflation
|
Present value
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
|
Year 2
|
|
Year 3
|
|
|
=
|
10,500 (1 + r)
|
+
|
11,025 (1 + r)2
|
+
|
11,576 (1 + r)3
|
|
|
=
|
10,500 (1 + 0.092)
|
+
|
11,025 (1 + 0.092)2
|
+
|
11,576 (1 + 0.092)3
|
|
|
=
|
10,500 (1.092)
|
+
|
11,025 (1.1925)
|
+
|
11,576 (1.3022)
|
|
|
=
|
9,615
|
+
|
9,245
|
+
|
8,890
|
|
|
=
|
£27,750
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Foresight Ltd plans an investment in fixed assets costing £120m. The project will have a three year life, with the predicted cash flows as:
|
Year 1
|
£55m
|
|
Year 2
|
£71m
|
|
Year 3
|
£45m
|
Finance for inventories and debtors amounting to £75m will be required at the start of the project. Trade credit will provide £45m of this amount. All working capital will be recovered at the end of year 3. The expected scrap value of fixed assets at the end of year 3 is £15m. The cost of capital is 10 per cent. Taxation is to be ignored.
Required
(a) Calculate the net present value of the project.
(b) Show that the project can pay interest at 10 per cent per annum on the capital invested and return a surplus equivalent to the net present value calculated in (a).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The table below summarises data that have been extracted from the cost accounting records of SV Limited. The data show the cost and the inflation index relevant to the period in which the costs were incurred.
|
Output level
|
Total cost
|
Inflation index
|
|
3,000 units
|
£9,167
|
1.03
|
|
4,000 units
|
£11,760
|
1.05
|
The uninflated variable cost per unit of output to be used when predicting future costs is closest to:
A £2.30.
B £2.59.
C £2.80.
D £2.97.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company has only $700,000 available for investment during the coming year. It has identified the following four investment opportunities, all of which are divisible, and have the same life.
|
Investment
|
Capital required
$
|
Net present value
$
|
|
J
|
400,000
|
650,000
|
|
K
|
250,000
|
450,000
|
|
L
|
300,000
|
480,000
|
|
M
|
350,000
|
550,000
|
Calculate the correct rank order for these investments (best first).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The directors of Advanced plc are currently considering an investment in new production machinery to replace existing machinery. The new machinery would produce goods more efficiently, leading to increased sales volume. The investment required will be £1,150,000 payable at the start of the project. The alternative course of action would be to continue using the existing machinery for a further five years, at the end of which time it would have to be replaced.
The following forecasts of sales and production volumes have been made:
|
Sales (in units)
|
|
Year
|
Using existing
machinery
|
Using new
machinery
|
|
1
|
400,000
|
560,000
|
|
2
|
450,000
|
630,000
|
|
3
|
500,000
|
700,000
|
|
4
|
600,000
|
840,000
|
|
5
|
750,000
|
1,050,000
|
|
Production (in units)
|
|
|
Year
|
Using existing
machinery
|
Using new
machinery
|
|
1
|
420,000
|
564,000
|
|
2
|
435,000
|
637,000
|
|
3
|
505,000
|
695,000
|
|
4
|
610,000
|
840,000
|
|
5
|
730,000
|
1,044,000
|
Further information
(a) The new machinery will reduce production costs from their present level of £7.50 per unit to £6.20 per unit. These production costs exclude depreciation.
(b) The increased sales volume will be achieved by reducing unit selling prices from their present level of £10.00 per unit to £8.50 per unit.
(c) The new machinery will have a scrap value of £150,000 after five years.
(d) The existing machinery will have a scrap value of £30,000 at the start of Year 1. Its scrap value will be £20,000 at the end of Year 5.
(e) The cost of capital to the company, in money terms, is presently 12% per annum.
Required
(1) Prepare a report to the directors of Advanced plc on the proposed investment decision.
(2) List any further matters which the directors should consider before making their decision.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The board of directors of Kirkside Glassware Ltd is considering the following proposed investment projects:
|
Project
|
Nature
|
|
A
|
Establishment of a staff training scheme
|
|
B
|
Major improvements to the electrical system
|
|
C
|
Installation of a computer
|
|
D
|
Development of a new product
|
|
E
|
Purchase of a warehouse space, presently leased
|
It is estimated that each product will provide benefits in terms of reduced cash outflows, measured over the coming five years. The outlays and cash flow benefits, net of taxation, are set out below:
|
End of
year
|
Project
A
£
|
Project
B
£
|
Project
C
£
|
Project
D
£
|
Project
E
£
|
End of
year
|
|
Outlay
|
–
|
(40,000)
|
(70,000)
|
(180,000)
|
(100,000)
|
(200,000)
|
|
Cash flow benefits:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
|
16,000
|
27,000
|
66,000
|
–
|
145,000
|
|
|
2
|
16,000
|
27,000
|
66,000
|
–
|
145,000
|
|
|
3
|
16,000
|
27,000
|
66,000
|
73,000
|
–
|
|
|
4
|
16,000
|
27,000
|
66,000
|
73,000
|
–
|
|
|
5
|
16,000
|
27,000
|
66,000
|
73,000
|
–
|
|
Internal rate of return
|
|
28.65%
|
26.82%
|
24.32%
|
22.05%
|
28.79%
|
Each project has two separate phases of equal cost and providing equal cash flow benefits. The board is willing to consider adopting the first phase of any project without the second, if this appears necessary. Any project or phase not undertaken immediately may be postponed indefinitely. Capital available for investment is limited to £300,000. The board aims, as far as possible, to maximise the net present value of projects undertaken. The company requires a return of 10 per cent per annum based on the net cash flows of any project.
Required
Prepare a report to the board of directors:
(a) setting out a decision rule which could be applied in ranking the investment projects; and
(b) listing other factors which the board of directors might wish to consider when selecting projects for implementation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under examination conditions there would be 45 minutes allocated to this question. A restaurant company is considering further investment in order to increase its seating capacity. The company prepares its accounts to 31 December each year and, if accepted, the proposed investment would be made on 1 January Year 9 and will become operational immediately. Based on the actual results for the year to date, the latest forecast income statement for the company for the year to 31 December Year 8 is as follows:
|
|
£000
|
£000
|
|
Food sales
|
180
|
|
|
Drink sales
|
150
|
|
|
|
|
330
|
|
Food costs
|
125
|
|
|
Drink costs
|
70
|
|
|
Staff costs
|
55
|
|
|
Other costs*
|
45
|
|
|
|
|
295
|
|
Profit
|
|
35
|
The proposed investment At present the restaurant is not able to exploit the growing demand from customers because it does not have sufficient seating capacity. The restaurant is considering the investment of £40,000 on 1 January Year 9. It is expected that this will increase the seating capacity of the restaurant by 30% compared to the present level. The lease of the current business premises ends at the end of Year 12. At that time the £40,000 investment will have no residual value. Of this total investment, £30,000 will qualify for 100% tax depreciation in Year 9 and the remainder will qualify for 20% tax depreciation per year, commencing in Year 9, calculated on a reducing balance basis. Any balancing tax charge will be made or allowance will be available at the end of Year 12.
Sales
It is expected that the additional sales of food and drink will be proportional to the seating capacity increase and that the mix of food sales and drink sales will not change.
Costs
It is expected that apart from the effects of inflation (see below):
1. Food costs and drink costs will continue to be the same percentages of food sales and drink sales as they are in the forecast income statement shown above.
2. Staff costs are step costs and are expected to increase by 20% from their forecast value for 2008 if there is any capacity increase.
3. The variable element of other costs is expected to increase in proportion to the capacity increase; the fixed cost element is expected to increase by £10,000 if there is any capacity increase.
Inflation
Cost inflation is predicted to be 4% per annum for each of the years Year 9 to Year 12 whereas selling prices are only expected to increase by 3% per annum during the same period.
Taxation
The company pays tax on its profits at 20%. This is payable one year after the profit is earned.
Cost of capital
The company’s post tax money cost of capital for evaluating this investment is 8% per annum.
Required:
(a) Prepare calculations to show whether the investment is worthwhile assuming that the 30% increase in seating capacity is fully utilised and recommend whether the investment should proceed.
(b) Calculate and interpret the Internal Rate of Return (IRR) of the proposed investment.
(c) Calculate the sensitivity of your recommendation to changes in the percentage capacity Utilization.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The sales budget for the BeeSee Company for the first six months of the year is:
|
|
£
|
|
January
|
12,000
|
|
February
|
13,000
|
|
March
|
14,000
|
|
April
|
13,500
|
|
May
|
12,600
|
|
June
|
11,100
|
There are no debtors at the start of January. One month’s credit is allowed to customers. What is the budgeted cash received in each month?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Garden Ornament Company manufactures two types of garden ornament: a duck and a heron. The information presented in Tables T1 to T5 has been prepared, as a result of discussions by line managers, for the purposes of preparing a master budget for Year 6.
Sales and production volumes and direct costs
(T1)
|
|
Ducks
|
Herons
|
|
Unit sales for the year
|
8,000
|
15,000
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Unit selling price
|
30
|
45
|
|
Unit variable cost:
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
14
|
16
|
|
Direct labour
|
12
|
13
|
Direct labour costs are based on an average cost of £15,000 per person per year.
Other costs
(T2)
|
Production heat and light
|
£8,000 for the year
|
|
Production fixed overheads
|
£4,000 for the year
|
|
Partners’ salaries
|
£55,000 for the year
|
|
Rent of premises
|
£11,000 for the year
|
|
Office staff salaries
|
£48,450 for the year
|
|
Marketing and distribution
|
18 per cent of sales
|
Working capital targets
(T3)
|
Debtors at end of year
|
Half of one month’s sales.
|
|
Trade creditors for materials
|
One month’s purchases.
|
|
Stock of raw materials
|
Enough for 60 per cent of next month’s production.
|
|
Stock of finished goods
|
No stock held, as goods are made to order and delivered to the customer on completion.
|
Sales and purchases are planned to be spread evenly over the year.
Capital budget plans
(T4)
Purchase one new moulding machine at £70,000, at the start of the year.
Depreciate all machinery for a full year at 20% per annum on a straight line basis.
Balance sheet at 31 December Year 5
(T5)
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Equipment at cost
|
|
190,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
40,000
|
|
Net book value
|
|
150,000
|
|
Stock of raw materials:
|
|
|
|
For 400 ducks @ £14 each
|
5,600
|
|
|
For 750 herons @ £16 each
|
12,000
|
|
|
Trade debtors
|
32,000
|
|
|
Cash
|
2,500
|
|
|
|
52,100
|
|
|
Trade creditors
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
|
22,100
|
|
|
|
172,100
|
|
Partners’ capital
|
|
172,100
|
Required
Prepare a master budget and all supporting budgets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tools Ltd is a new business which has been formed to buy standard machine tool units and adapt them to the specific needs of customers.
The business will acquire fixed assets costing £100,000 and a stock of 500 standard tool units on the first day of business. The fixed assets are expected to have a five year life with no residual value at the end of that time.
Sales are forecast as follows:
|
|
Year 1
|
|
Year 2
|
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2 Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
Quarter 1
|
|
Modified tool units
|
4,050
|
4,200
|
4,350
|
3,900
|
4,050
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
The selling price of each unit will be £90.
The cost of production of each unit is specified as follows:
|
|
£
|
|
Cost of standard unit purchased Direct labour
|
24 30
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
10
|
|
|
64
|
The fixed overhead per unit includes an allocation of depreciation. The annual depreciation is calculated on a straight line basis and is allocated on the basis of a cost per unit to be produced during the year. Suppliers of standard tool units will allow one month’s credit. Customers are expected to take two months’ credit. Wages will be paid as they are incurred in production. Fixed overhead costs will be paid as they are incurred. The stock of finished goods at the end of each quarter will be sufficient to satisfy 10% of the planned sales of the following quarter. The stock of standard tool units will be held constant at 500 units. It may be assumed that the year is divided into quarters of equal length and that sales, production and purchases are spread evenly throughout any quarter.
Required
Produce, for each quarter of the first year of trading:
(a) the sales budget;
(b) the production budget; and
(c) the cash budget.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following budgeted accounting statements were submitted to the board of directors of Alpha Ltd on 1 October Year 4:
|
Budgeted profit and loss account for the year to 30 September Year 5
|
|
|
£
|
£
|
|
Sales
|
|
15,600,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
|
10,452,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
5,148,000
|
|
Fixed overheads:
|
|
|
|
Selling and advertising
|
1,500,000
|
|
|
General administration
|
1,094,500
|
|
|
|
|
2,594,500
|
|
Operating profit
|
|
2,553,500
|
|
Interest payable on medium term loan
|
135,000
|
|
|
Royalties payable on sales
|
780,000
|
|
|
|
|
915,000
|
|
Net profit
|
|
1,638,500
|
|
Budgeted balance sheet at 30 September Year 5,
with comparative figures at 1 October Year 4
|
|
|
30 September Year 5
£
|
1 October Year 4
£
|
|
Fixed assets at cost
|
2,300,000
|
1,800,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
585,000
|
450,000
|
|
|
1,715,000
|
1,350,000
|
|
Trading stock
|
3,200,000
|
4,000,000
|
|
Trade debtors
|
2,600,000
|
2,200,000
|
|
Cash in bank
|
1,854,750
|
–
|
|
Total assets
|
9,369,750
|
7,550,000
|
|
Share capital
|
4,400,000
|
4,400,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
3,313,500
|
1,675,000
|
|
|
7,713,500
|
6,075,000
|
|
Medium term loan
|
1,000,000
|
1,000,000
|
|
Trade creditors
|
656,250
|
475,000
|
|
|
9,369,750
|
7,550,000
|
At 31 March Year 5 the following information was available in respect of the first six months of the trading year:
(a) Sales were 20% below the budgeted level, assuming an even spread of sales throughout the year.
(b) The gross profit percentage was two percentage points below the budgeted percentage.
(c) Actual advertising expenditure of £100,000 was 50% below the budgeted amount. All other selling expenses were in line with the budget.
(d) General administration costs were 10% below the budgeted level.
(e) Trading stock at 31 March was £200,000 higher than the budgeted level. It was assumed in the budget that stock would decrease at a uniform rate throughout the year.
(f ) Trade debtors at 31 March were equivalent to two months’ actual sales, assuming sales were spread evenly throughout the six months.
(g) Trade creditors at 31 March were equivalent to one month’s actual cost of goods sold, assuming costs were spread evenly throughout the six months.
(h) On 1 January Year 5 the rate of interest charged on the medium term loan was increased to 16% per annum.
The budget for the second six months was revised to take account of the following predictions:
(a) Revenue during the second six months would continue at the level achieved during the first six months.
(b) Cost control measures would be implemented to restore the gross profit percentage to the budgeted level.
(c) Advertising, selling and general administration costs would be maintained at the levels achieved in the first six months.
(d) Trading stocks would be reduced to the level originally budgeted at 30 September.
(e) Trade debtors would be reduced to the equivalent of one month’s sales.
(f ) Trade creditors would be maintained at the equivalent of one month’s cost of goods sold.
(g) Interest on the medium term loan would remain at 16% per annum.
The directors of the company wish to know what change in the cash in bank will arise when the revised budget for the second six months is compared with the consequences of continuing the pattern in the first six months. Taxation has been ignored.
Required
(1) Prepare an accounting statement for the six months to 31 March Year 5 comparing the actual results with the original budget.
(2) Prepare a revised budget for the second six months and compare this with the actual results which would have been achieved if the pattern of the first six months had continued.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Today’s task is to review the first stage of budget preparation in a major hospital dealing with a wide range of medical conditions, including accident and emergency services. (There are indications within the case study of how to allocate the time on the presumption that one hour is available in total, but the times may be adjusted proportionately for a different overall length.)
Before the activity starts, obtain and look through the annual report and accounts of a hospital trust and a regional health authority, looking for discussion of the budgetary process and the way in which budgets are presented in the annual report. Half of the group should form the budget committee, deciding among themselves the role of each individual within the hospital but having regard to the need to keep a balance between medical services, medical support staff and administration. The other half of the group should take the role of speciality team leaders presenting their budgets (speciality being the term used to describe one particular specialist aspect of hospital treatment, e.g. children’s specialisms (paediatrics) women’s health (obstetrics and gynaecology), or dealing with older persons (geriatrics)). Initially the group should work together for 20 minutes to write a vision statement and a set of corporate objectives. The budget committee should then hold a separate meeting lasting 10 minutes to decide: (a) what questions they will ask of the speciality team leaders when they present their budget plans, and (b) where the sources of conflict are most likely to be found. In the meantime, each speciality team leader should set out a brief statement of objectives for that speciality team and a note of the main line items which would appear in the budget, indicating where conflict with other teams within the hospital is most likely to arise as a result of the budgeting process. The budget committee should then interview each speciality manager (5 minutes each), with the other speciality managers attending as observers. After all interviews have been held, the budget committee should prepare a brief report dealing with the effectiveness and limitations of the budgetary process as experienced in the exercise. The speciality managers should work together to produce a report on their perceptions of the effectiveness and limitations of the budgetary process (15 minutes).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following two events occurred for Tanger Co. on October 31, 2011, the end of its fiscal year.
a. Tanger rents a building from its owner for $3,200 per month. By prearrangement, the company delayed paying October’s rent until November 5. On this date, the company paid the rent for both October and November.
b. Tanger rents space in a building it owns to a tenant for $750 per month. By prearrangement, the tenant delayed paying the October rent until November 8. On this date, the tenant paid the rent for both October and November.
Required
1. Prepare adjusting entries that the company must record for these events as of October 31.
2. Assuming Tanger does not use reversing entries, prepare journal entries to record Tanger’s payment of rent on November 5 and the collection of rent on November 8 from Tanger’s tenant.
3. Assuming that the company uses reversing entries, prepare reversing entries on November 1 and the journal entries to record Tanger’s payment of rent on November 5 and the collection of rent on November 8 from Tanger’s tenant.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hinson Company records prepaid assets and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. The following information was used to prepare adjusting entries for the company as of August 31, the end of the company’s fiscal year.
a. The company has earned $5,000 in service fees that were not yet recorded at period end.
b. The expired portion of prepaid insurance is $2,700.
c. The company has earned $1,900 of its Unearned Service Fees account balance.
d. Depreciation expense for office equipment is $2,300.
e. Employees have earned but have not been paid salaries of $2,400.
Prepare any necessary reversing entries for the accounting adjustments a through e assuming that the company uses reversing entries in its accounting system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Argosy Company began the current period with a $14,000 credit balance in the D. Argosy, Capital account. At the end of the period, the company’s adjusted account balances include the following temporary accounts with normal balances.
|
Service fees earned
|
$35,000
|
Interest revenue
|
$3,500
|
|
Salaries expense
|
19,000
|
D. Argosy, Withdrawals
|
6,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
4,000
|
Utilities expense
|
2,300
|
After closing the revenue and expense accounts, what will be the balance of the Income Summary account? After all closing entries are journalized and posted, what will be the balance of the D. Argosy, Capital account?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are Nintendo’s revenue and expense accounts for a recent calendar year (yen in millions). Prepare the company’s closing entries for its revenues and its expenses.
|
Net sales
|
¥1,838,622
|
|
Cost of sales
|
1,044,981
|
|
Advertising expense
|
117,308
|
|
Other expense, net
|
397,244
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are taken from the unadjusted trial balance of the Madison Company at December 31, 2011. Each account carries a normal balance and the accounts are shown here in alphabetical order.
|
Accounts Payable
|
$ 2
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 6
|
T. Madison,Withdrawals
|
$2
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
4
|
Revenue
|
25
|
Unearned Revenue
|
4
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equip
|
5
|
Salaries Expense
|
6
|
Utilities Expense
|
4
|
|
Cash
|
7
|
Supplies
|
8
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
13
|
T. Madison, Capital
|
14
|
|
|
1. Use the data above to prepare a worksheet. Enter the accounts in proper order and enter their balances in the correct debit or credit column.
2. Use the following adjustment information to complete the worksheet.
a. Depreciation on equipment, $1
b. Accrued salaries, $2
c. The $4 of unearned revenue has been earned
d. Supplies available at December 31, 2011, $5
e. Expired insurance, $5
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the blank space beside each numbered balance sheet item, enter the letter of its balance sheet classification. If the item should not appear on the balance sheet, enter a Z in the blank.
A. Current assets
B. Long term investments
C. Plant assets
D. Intangible assets
E. Current liabilities
F. Long term liabilities
G. Equity
11. Depreciation expense—Building
12. Prepaid rent
13. Interest receivable
14. Taxes payable
15. Automobiles
16. Notes payable (due in 3 years)
17. Accounts payable
18. Prepaid insurance
19. Owner, Capital
20. Unearned services revenue
1. Office equipment
2. Office supplies
3. Buildings
4. Store supplies
5. Accumulated depreciation—Trucks
6. Land (used in operations)
7. Repairs expense
8. Cash
9. Current portion of long term note payable
10. Long term investment in stock
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On April 1, 2011, Jennifer Stafford created a new travel agency, See It Now Travel. The following transactions occurred during the company’s first month.
April 1 Stafford invested $20,000 cash and computer equipment worth $40,000 in the company.
2 The company rented furnished office space by paying $1,700 cash for the first month’s (April) rent.
3 The company purchased $1,100 of office supplies for cash.
10 The company paid $3,600 cash for the premium on a 12 month insurance policy. Coverage begins on April 11.
14 The company paid $1,800 cash for two weeks’ salaries earned by employees.
24 The company collected $7,900 cash on commissions from airlines on tickets obtained for customers.
28 The company paid $1,800 cash for two weeks’ salaries earned by employees.
29 The company paid $250 cash for minor repairs to the company’s computer.
30 The company paid $650 cash for this month’s telephone bill.
30 Stafford withdrew $1,500 cash from the company for personal use.
|
101
|
Cash
|
405
|
Commissions Earned
|
|
106
|
Accounts Receivable
|
612
|
Depreciation Expense — Computer Equip.
|
|
124
|
Office Supplies
|
622
|
Salaries Expense
|
|
128
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
637
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
167
|
Computer Equipment
|
640
|
Rent Expense
|
|
168
|
Accumulated Depreciation — Computer Equip.
|
650
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
|
209
|
Salaries Payable
|
684
|
Repairs Expense
|
|
301
|
J. Stafford, Capital
|
688
|
Telephone Expense
|
|
302
|
J. Stafford, Withdrawals
|
901
|
Income Summary
|
Required
1. Use the balance column format to set up each ledger account listed in its chart of accounts.
2. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions for April and post them to the ledger accounts. The company records prepaid and unearned items in balance sheet accounts.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of April 30.
4. Use the following information to journalize and post adjusting entries for the month:
a. Two thirds of one month’s insurance coverage has expired.
b. At the end of the month, $700 of office supplies are still available.
c. This month’s depreciation on the computer equipment is $600.
d. Employees earned $320 of unpaid and unrecorded salaries as of month end.
e. The company earned $1,650 of commissions that are not yet billed at month end.
5. Prepare the income statement and the statement of owner’s equity for the month of April and the balance sheet at April 30, 2011.
6. Prepare journal entries to close the temporary accounts and post these entries to the ledger.
7. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance of Kobe Repairs on December 31, 2011, follows.
|
|
KOBE REPAIRS
Adjusted Trial Balance
December 31,2011
|
|
|
|
No.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$13,000
|
|
|
124
|
Office supplies
|
1,200
|
|
|
128
|
Prepaid insurance
|
1,950
|
|
|
167
|
Equipment
|
48,000
|
|
|
168
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$4,000
|
|
201
|
Accounts payable
|
|
12,000
|
|
210
|
Wages payable
|
|
500
|
|
301
|
S. Kobe, Capital
|
|
40,000
|
|
302
|
S. Kobe, Withdrawals
|
15,000
|
|
|
401
|
Repair fees earned
|
|
77,750
|
|
612
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
4,000
|
|
|
623
|
Wages expense
|
36,500
|
|
|
637
|
Insurance expense
|
700
|
|
|
640
|
Rent expense
|
9,600
|
|
|
650
|
Office supplies expense
|
2,600
|
|
|
690
|
Utilities expense
|
1,700
|
|
| |
Totals
|
$134,250
|
$134,250
|
Required
1. Prepare an income statement and a statement of owner’s equity for the year 2011, and a classified balance sheet at December 31, 2011. There are no owner investments in 2011.
2. Enter the adjusted trial balance in the first two columns of a six column table. Use columns three and four for closing entry information and the last two columns for a post closing trial balance. Insert an Income Summary account as the last item in the trial balance.
3. Enter closing entry information in the six column table and prepare journal entries for it.
4. Assume for this part only that
a. None of the $700 insurance expense had expired during the year. Instead, assume it is a prepayment of the next period’s insurance protection.
b. There are no earned and unpaid wages at the end of the year.
Describe the financial statement changes that would result from these two assumptions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance for Sharp Construction as of December 31, 2011, follows.
|
No.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$4,000
|
|
|
104
|
Short term investments
|
22,000
|
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
7,100
|
|
|
128
|
Prepaid insurance
|
6,000
|
|
|
167
|
Equipment
|
39,000
|
|
|
168
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$20,000
|
|
173
|
Building
|
130,000
|
|
|
174
|
Accumulated depreciation—Building
|
|
55,000
|
|
183
|
Land
|
45,000
|
|
|
201
|
Accounts payable
|
|
15,500
|
|
203
|
Interest payable
|
|
1,500
|
|
208
|
Rent payable
|
|
2,500
|
|
210
|
Wages payable
|
|
1,500
|
|
213
|
Property taxes payable
|
|
800
|
|
233
|
Unearned professional fees
|
|
6,500
|
|
251
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
66,000
|
|
301
|
J. Sharp, Capital
|
|
82,700
|
|
302
|
J. Sharp, Withdrawals
|
12,000
|
|
|
401
|
Professional fees earned
|
|
96,000
|
|
406
|
Rent earned
|
|
13,000
|
|
407
|
Dividends earned
|
|
1,900
|
|
409
|
Interest earned
|
|
1,000
|
|
606
|
Depreciation expense—Building
|
10,000
|
|
|
612
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
5,000
|
|
|
623
|
Wages expense
|
31,000
|
|
|
633
|
Interest expense
|
4,100
|
|
|
637
|
Insurance expense
|
9,000
|
|
|
640
|
Rent expense
|
12,400
|
|
|
652
|
Supplies expense
|
6,400
|
|
|
682
|
Postage expense
|
3,200
|
|
|
683
|
Property taxes expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
684
|
Repairs expense
|
7,900
|
|
|
688
|
Telephone expense
|
2,200
|
|
|
690
|
Utilities expense
|
3,600
|
|
| |
Totals
|
$363,900
|
$363,900
|
J. Sharp invested $50,000 cash in the business during year 2011 (the December 31, 2010, credit balance of the J. Sharp, Capital account was $32,700). Sharp Construction is required to make a $6,600 payment on its long term notes payable during 2012.
Required
1. Prepare the income statement and the statement of owner’s equity for the calendar year 2011 and the classified balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
2. Prepare the necessary closing entries at December 31, 2011.
3. Use the information in the financial statements to compute these ratios:
(a) return on assets (total assets at December 31, 2010, was $200,000),
(b) debt ratio,
(c) profit margin ratio (use total revenues as the denominator),
(d) current ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following unadjusted trial balance is for Adams Construction Co. as of the end of its 2011 fiscal year.
The June 30, 2010, credit balance of the owner’s capital account was $52,660, and the owner invested $25,000 cash in the company during the 2011 fiscal year.
|
ADAMS CONSTRUCTION CO.
Unadjusted Trial Balance
June 30,2011
|
|
No.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$17,500
|
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
8,900
|
|
|
128
|
Prepaid insurance
|
6,200
|
|
|
167
|
Equipment
|
131,000
|
|
|
168
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$25,250
|
|
201
|
Accounts payable
|
|
5,800
|
|
203
|
Interest payable
|
|
0
|
|
208
|
Rent payable
|
|
0
|
|
210
|
Wages payable
|
|
0
|
|
213
|
Property taxes payable
|
|
0
|
|
251
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
24,000
|
|
301
|
S. Adams, Capital
|
|
77,660
|
|
302
|
S. Adams, Withdrawals
|
30,000
|
|
|
401
|
Construction fees earned
|
|
134,000
|
|
612
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
0
|
|
|
623
|
Wages expense
|
45,860
|
|
|
633
|
Interest expense
|
2,640
|
|
|
637
|
Insurance expense
|
0
|
|
|
640
|
Rent expense
|
13,200
|
|
|
652
|
Supplies expense
|
0
|
|
|
683
|
Property taxes expense
|
4,600
|
|
|
684
|
Repairs expense
|
2,810
|
|
|
690
|
Utilities expense
|
4,000
|
|
| |
Totals
|
$266,710
|
$266,710
|
| |
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Prepare a 10 column work sheet for fiscal year 2011, starting with the unadjusted trial balance and including adjustments based on these additional facts.
a. The supplies available at the end of fiscal year 2011 had a cost of $3,200.
b. The cost of expired insurance for the fiscal year is $3,900.
c. Annual depreciation on equipment is $8,500.
d. The June utilities expense of $550 is not included in the unadjusted trial balance because the bill arrived after the trial balance was prepared. The $550 amount owed needs to be recorded.
e. The company’s employees have earned $1,600 of accrued wages at fiscal year end.
f. The rent expense incurred and not yet paid or recorded at fiscal year end is $200.
g. Additional property taxes of $900 have been assessed for this fiscal year but have not been paid or recorded in the accounts.
h. The long term note payable bears interest at 12% per year. The unadjusted Interest Expense account equals the amount paid for the first 11 months of the 2011 fiscal year. The $240 accrued interest for June has not yet been paid or recorded. (The company is required to make a $5,000 payment toward the note payable during the 2012 fiscal year.)
2. Enter adjusting and closing information in the work sheet; then journalize the adjusting and closing entries.
3. Prepare the income statement and the statement of owner’s equity for the year ended June 30 and the classified balance sheet at June 30, 2011.
4. Analyze the following separate errors and describe how each would affect the 10 column work sheet.
Explain whether the error is likely to be discovered in completing the work sheet and, if not, the effect of the error on the financial statements.
a. Assume that the adjustment for supplies used consisted of a credit to Supplies and a debit to
Supplies Expense for $3,200, when the correct amount was $5,700.
b. When the adjusted trial balance in the work sheet is completed, assume that the $17,500 Cash balance is incorrectly entered in the Credit column.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following six column table for Bullseye Ranges includes the unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011.
|
BULLSEYE RANGES
December 31,2011
|
|
|
Unadjusted
Trial Balance
|
Adjustments
|
Adjusted
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$13,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
5,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
130,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—
|
|
$25,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unearned member fees
|
|
14,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
T. Allen, Capital
|
|
58,250
|
|
|
|
|
|
T. Allen, Withdrawals
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Member fees earned
|
|
53,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
28,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,750
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals
|
$200,250
|
$200,250
|
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Complete the six column table by entering adjustments that reflect the following information.
a. As of December 31, 2011, employees had earned $900 of unpaid and unrecorded salaries. The next payday is January 4, at which time $1,600 of salaries will be paid.
b. The cost of supplies still available at December 31, 2011, is $2,700.
c. The notes payable requires an interest payment to be made every three months. The amount of unrecorded accrued interest at December 31, 2011, is $1,250. The next interest payment, at an amount of $1,500, is due on January 15, 2012.
d. Analysis of the unearned member fees account shows $5,600 remaining unearned at December 31, 2011.
e. In addition to the member fees included in the revenue account balance, the company has earned another $9,100 in unrecorded fees that will be collected on January 31, 2012. The company is also expected to collect $8,000 on that same day for new fees earned in January 2012.
f. Depreciation expense for the year is $12,500.
2. Prepare journal entries for the adjustments entered in the six column table for part 1.
3. Prepare journal entries to reverse the effects of the adjusting entries that involve accruals.
4. Prepare journal entries to record the cash payments and cash collections described for January.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following six column table for Bullseye Ranges includes the unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011.
|
BULLSEYE RANGES
December 31,2011
|
|
|
Unadjusted
Trial Balance
|
Adjustments
|
Adjusted
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$13,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
5,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
130,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—
|
|
$25,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unearned member fees
|
|
14,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
T. Allen, Capital
|
|
58,250
|
|
|
|
|
|
T. Allen, Withdrawals
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Member fees earned
|
|
53,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
28,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,750
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals
|
$200,250
|
$200,250
|
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Complete the six column table by entering adjustments that reflect the following information.
a. As of December 31, 2011, employees had earned $900 of unpaid and unrecorded salaries. The next payday is January 4, at which time $1,600 of salaries will be paid.
b. The cost of supplies still available at December 31, 2011, is $2,700.
c. The notes payable requires an interest payment to be made every three months. The amount of unrecorded accrued interest at December 31, 2011, is $1,250. The next interest payment, at an amount of $1,500, is due on January 15, 2012.
d. Analysis of the unearned member fees account shows $5,600 remaining unearned at December 31, 2011.
e. In addition to the member fees included in the revenue account balance, the company has earned another $9,100 in unrecorded fees that will be collected on January 31, 2012. The company is also expected to collect $8,000 on that same day for new fees earned in January 2012.
f. Depreciation expense for the year is $12,500.
2. Prepare journal entries for the adjustments entered in the six column table for part 1.
3. Prepare journal entries to reverse the effects of the adjusting entries that involve accruals.
4. Prepare journal entries to record the cash payments and cash collections described for January.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the blank space beside each numbered balance sheet item, enter the letter of its balance sheet classification.
If the item should not appear on the balance sheet, enter a Z in the blank.
A. Current assets
B. Long term investments
C. Plant assets
D. Intangible assets
E. Current liabilities
F. Long term liabilities
G. Equity
1. Machinery
2. Prepaid insurance
3. Current portion of long term note payable
4. Interest receivable
5. Rent receivable
6. Land (used in operations)
7. Copyrights
8. Rent revenue
9. Depreciation expense—Trucks
10. Long term investment in stock
11. Office supplies
12. Interest payable
13. Owner, Capital
14. Notes receivable (due in 120 days)
15. Accumulated depreciation—Trucks
16. Salaries payable
17. Commissions earned
18. Income taxes payable
19. Office equipment
20. Notes payable (due in
15 years)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 1, 2011, Lucinda Fogle created a new self storage business, KeepSafe Co. The following transactions occurred during the company’s first month.
July 1 Fogle invested $20,000 cash and buildings worth $120,000 in the company.
2 The company rented equipment by paying $1,800 cash for the first month’s (July) rent.
5 The company purchased $2,300 of office supplies for cash.
10 The company paid $5,400 cash for the premium on a 12 month insurance policy. Coverage begins on July 11.
14 The company paid an employee $900 cash for two weeks’ salary earned.
24 The company collected $8,800 cash for storage fees from customers.
28 The company paid $900 cash for two weeks’ salary earned by an employee.
29 The company paid $850 cash for minor repairs to a leaking roof.
30 The company paid $300 cash for this month’s telephone bill.
31 Fogle withdrew $1,600 cash from the company for personal use.
The company’s chart of accounts follows:
|
101
|
Cash
|
401
|
Storage Fees Earned
|
|
106
|
Accounts Receivable
|
606
|
Depreciation Expense—Buildings
|
|
124
|
Office Supplies
|
622
|
Salaries Expense
|
|
128
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
637
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
173
|
Buildings
|
640
|
Rent Expense
|
|
174
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
650
|
Office Supplies Expense
|
|
209
|
Salaries Payable
|
684
|
Repairs Expense
|
|
301
|
L. Fogle, Capital
|
688
|
Telephone Expense
|
|
302
|
L. Fogle, Withdrawals
|
901
|
Income Summary
|
Required
1. Use the balance column format to set up each ledger account listed in its chart of accounts.
2. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions for July and post them to the ledger accounts. Record prepaid and unearned items in balance sheet accounts.
3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance as of July 31.
4. Use the following information to journalize and post adjusting entries for the month:
a. Two thirds of one month’s insurance coverage has expired.
b. At the end of the month, $1,550 of office supplies are still available.
c. This month’s depreciation on the buildings is $1,200.
d. An employee earned $180 of unpaid and unrecorded salary as of month end.
e. The company earned $950 of storage fees that are not yet billed at month end.
5. Prepare the income statement and the statement of owner’s equity for the month of July and the balance sheet at July 31, 2011.
6. Prepare journal entries to close the temporary accounts and post these entries to the ledger.
7. Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Heel To Toe Shoes’ adjusted trial balance on December 31, 2011, follows.
|
HEEL TO TOE SHOES
Adjusted Trial Balance
December 31,2011
|
|
No.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$13,450
|
|
|
125
|
Store supplies
|
4,140
|
|
|
128
|
Prepaid insurance
|
2,200
|
|
|
167
|
Equipment
|
33,000
|
|
|
168
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$9,000
|
|
201
|
Accounts payable
|
|
1,000
|
|
210
|
Wages payable
|
|
3,200
|
|
301
|
P. Holt, Capital
|
|
31,650
|
|
302
|
P. Holt, Withdrawals
|
16,000
|
|
|
401
|
Repair fees earned
|
|
62,000
|
|
612
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
3,000
|
|
|
623
|
Wages expense
|
28,400
|
|
|
637
|
Insurance expense
|
1,100
|
|
|
640
|
Rent expense
|
2,400
|
|
|
651
|
Store supplies expense
|
1,300
|
|
|
690
|
Utilities expense
|
1,860
|
|
| |
Totals
|
$106,850
|
$106,850
|
| |
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Prepare an income statement and a statement of owner’s equity for the year 2011, and a classified balance sheet at December 31, 2011. There are no owner investments in 2011.
2. Enter the adjusted trial balance in the first two columns of a six column table. Use the middle two columns for closing entry information and the last two columns for a post closing trial balance. Insert an Income Summary account (No. 901) as the last item in the trial balance.
3. Enter closing entry information in the six column table and prepare journal entries for it.
4. Assume for this part only that
a. None of the $1,100 insurance expense had expired during the year. Instead, assume it is a prepayment of the next period’s insurance protection.
b. There are no earned and unpaid wages at the end of the year. Describe the financial statement changes that would result from these two assumptions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance for Giovanni Co. as of December 31, 2011, follows.
|
GIOVANNI COMPANY
Adjusted Trial Balance
December 31,2011
|
|
No.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$6,400
|
|
|
104
|
Short term investments
|
10,200
|
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
3,600
|
|
|
128
|
Prepaid insurance
|
800
|
|
|
167
|
Equipment
|
18,000
|
|
|
168
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$3,000
|
|
173
|
Building
|
90,000
|
|
|
174
|
Accumulated depreciation—Building
|
|
9,000
|
|
183
|
Land
|
28,500
|
|
|
201
|
Accounts payable
|
|
2,500
|
|
203
|
Interest payable
|
|
1,400
|
|
208
|
Rent payable
|
|
200
|
|
210
|
Wages payable
|
|
1,180
|
|
213
|
Property taxes payable
|
|
2,330
|
|
233
|
Unearned professional fees
|
|
650
|
|
251
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
32,000
|
|
301
|
J. Giovanni, Capital
|
|
91,800
|
|
302
|
J. Giovanni, Withdrawals
|
6,000
|
|
|
401
|
Professional fees earned
|
|
47,000
|
|
406
|
Rent earned
|
|
3,600
|
|
407
|
Dividends earned
|
|
500
|
|
409
|
Interest earned
|
|
1,120
|
|
606
|
Depreciation expense—Building
|
2,000
|
|
|
612
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
1,000
|
|
|
623
|
Wages expense
|
17,500
|
|
|
633
|
Interest expense
|
1,200
|
|
|
637
|
Insurance expense
|
1,425
|
|
|
640
|
Rent expense
|
1,800
|
|
|
652
|
Supplies expense
|
900
|
|
|
682
|
Postage expense
|
310
|
|
|
683
|
Property taxes expense
|
3,825
|
|
|
684
|
Repairs expense
|
579
|
|
|
688
|
Telephone expense
|
421
|
|
|
690
|
Utilities expense
|
1,820
|
|
| |
Totals
|
196,280
|
$196,280
|
| |
|
|
|
|
J. Giovanni invested $30,000 cash in the business during year 2011 (the December 31, 2010, credit balance of the J. Giovanni, Capital account was $61,800). Giovanni Company is required to make a $6,400 payment on its long term notes payable during 2012.
Required
1. Prepare the income statement and the statement of owner’s equity for the calendar year 2011 and the classified balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
2. Prepare the necessary closing entries at December 31, 2011.
3. Use the information in the financial statements to calculate these ratios:
(a) return on assets (total assets at December 31, 2010, were $150,000),
(b) debt ratio,
(c) profit margin ratio (use total revenues as the denominator),
(d) current ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following six column table for Solutions Co. includes the unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011.
|
December 31,2011
|
|
|
Unadjusted
Trial Balance
|
Adjustments
|
Adjusted
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$9,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
6,600
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Machinery
|
40,100
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Machinery
|
|
$15,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unearned rental fees
|
|
5,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
G. Clay, Capital
|
|
13,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
G. Clay, Withdrawals
|
10,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rental fees earned
|
|
37,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Machinery
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
23,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
0
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals
|
$91,200
|
$91,200
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Complete the six column table by entering adjustments that reflect the following information:
a. As of December 31, 2011, employees had earned $420 of unpaid and unrecorded wages. The next payday is January 4, at which time $1,250 in wages will be paid.
b. The cost of supplies still available at December 31, 2011, is $2,450.
c. The notes payable requires an interest payment to be made every three months. The amount of unrecorded accrued interest at December 31, 2011, is $500. The next interest payment, at an amount of $600, is due on January 15, 2012.
d. Analysis of the unearned rental fees shows that $3,100 remains unearned at December 31, 2011.
e. In addition to the machinery rental fees included in the revenue account balance, the company has earned another $2,350 in unrecorded fees that will be collected on January 31, 2012. The company is also expected to collect $4,400 on that same day for new fees earned in January 2012.
f. Depreciation expense for the year is $3,800.
2. Prepare journal entries for the adjustments entered in the six column table for part 1.
3. Prepare journal entries to reverse the effects of the adjusting entries that involve accruals.
4. Prepare journal entries to record the cash payments and cash collections described for January.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Key figures for the recent two years of Research In Motion and Apple follow.
|
Current assets
|
$5,813
|
$4,842
|
$31,555
|
$30,006
|
|
Current liabilities
|
2,432
|
2,115
|
11,506
|
11,361
|
Refer to Research In Motion’s financial statements in Appendix A to answer the following.
Required
1. For the fiscal year ended February 27, 2010, what amount is credited to Income Summary to summarize its revenues earned?
2. For the fiscal year ended February 27, 2010, what amount is debited to Income Summary to summarize its expenses incurred?
3. For the fiscal year ended February 27, 2010, what is the balance of its Income Summary account before it is closed?
4. In its statement of cash flows for the year ended February 27, 2010, what amount of cash is paid in dividends to common stockholders?
5. Access RIM’s annual report for fiscal years ending after February 27, 2010, the SEC’s EDGAR database. How has the amount of net income closed to Income Summary changed in the fiscal years ending after February 27, 2010? How has the amount of cash paid as dividends changed in the fiscal years ending after February 27, 2010?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Key figures for the recent two years of Research In Motion and Apple follow.
|
Current assets
|
$5,813
|
$4,842
|
$31,555
|
$30,006
|
|
Current liabilities
|
2,432
|
2,115
|
11,506
|
11,361
|
Required
1. Compute the current ratio for both years for both companies.
2. Which company has the better ability to pay short term obligations according to the current ratio?
3. Analyze and comment on each company’s current ratios for the past two years.
4. How do RIM’s and Apple’s current ratios compare to their industry (assumed) average ratio of 2.4?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 20, 2011, Tamira Nelson, the accountant for Picton Enterprises, is feeling pressure to complete the annual financial statements. The company president has said he needs up to date financial statements to share with the bank on January 21 at a dinner meeting that has been called to discuss Picton’s obtaining loan financing for a special building project. Tamira knows that she will not be able to gather all the needed information in the next 24 hours to prepare the entire set of adjusting entries. Those entries must be posted before the financial statements accurately portray the company’s performance and financial position for the fiscal period ended December 31, 2010. Tamira ultimately decides to estimate several expense accruals at the last minute. When deciding on estimates for the expenses, she uses low estimates because she does not want to make the financial statements look worse than they are. Tamira finishes the financial statements before the deadline and gives them to the president without mentioning that several account balances are estimates that she provided.
Required
1. Identify several courses of action that Tamira could have taken instead of the one she took.
2. If you were in Tamira’s situation, what would you have done? Briefly justify your response.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following entries, enter the letter of the explanation that most closely describes it in the space beside each entry. (You can use letters more than once.)
A. To record payment of a prepaid expense.
B. To record this period’s use of a prepaid expense.
C. To record this period’s depreciation expense.
D. To record receipt of unearned revenue.
E. To record this period’s earning of prior unearned revenue.
F. To record an accrued expense.
G. To record payment of an accrued expense.
H. To record an accrued revenue.
I. To record receipt of accrued revenue.
|
1.
|
Unearned Professional Fees
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
Professional Fees Earned
|
|
6,000
|
|
2.
|
Interest Receivable
|
3,500
|
|
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
3,500
|
|
3.
|
Salaries Payable
|
9,000
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
9,000
|
|
4.
|
Depreciation Expense
|
8,000
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
8,000
|
|
5.
|
Cash
|
9,000
|
|
|
|
Unearned Professional Fees
|
|
9,000
|
|
6.
|
Insurance Expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
4,000
|
|
7.
|
Interest Expense
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
5,000
|
|
8.
|
Cash
|
1,500
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable (from services)
|
|
1,500
|
|
9.
|
Salaries Expense
|
7,000
|
|
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
7,000
|
|
10.
|
Cash
|
1,000
|
|
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
|
1,000
|
|
11.
|
Prepaid Rent
|
3,000
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
3,000
|
|
12.
|
Rent Expense
|
7,500
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
7,500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following is the unadjusted trial balance for Alcorn Institute as of December 31, 2011, which initially records prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. The Institute provides one on one training to individuals who pay tuition directly to the business and offers extension training to groups in off site locations. Shown after the trial balance are items a through h that require adjusting entries as of December 31, 2011.
|
ALCORN INSTITUTE Unadjusted Trial Balance December 31, 2011
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 50,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
0
|
|
|
Teaching supplies
|
60,000
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
18,000
|
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
2,600
|
|
|
Professional library
|
10,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Professional library
|
|
$ 1,500
|
|
Equipment
|
30,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
16,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
12,200
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
0
|
|
Unearned training fees
|
|
27,600
|
|
M. Alcorn, Capital
|
|
68,500
|
|
M. Alcorn, Withdrawals
|
20,000
|
|
|
Tuition fees earned
|
|
105,000
|
|
Training fees earned
|
|
62,000
|
|
Depreciation expense—Professional library
|
0
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
0
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
43,200
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
0
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
28,600
|
|
|
Teaching supplies expense
|
0
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
18,000
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
12,400
|
|
|
Totals
|
$ 292,800
|
$292,800
|
Additional Information Items
a. An analysis of the Institute’s insurance policies shows that $6,400 of coverage has expired.
b. An inventory count shows that teaching supplies costing $2,500 are available at year end 2011.
c. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $4,000.
d. Annual depreciation on the professional library is $2,000.
e. On November 1, the Institute agreed to do a special four month course (starting immediately) for a client. The contract calls for a $4,600 monthly fee, and the client paid the first two months’ fees in advance. When the cash was received, the Unearned Training Fees account was credited. The last two month’s fees will be recorded when collected in 2012.
f. On October 15, the Institute agreed to teach a four month class (beginning immediately) to an individual for $2,200 tuition per month payable at the end of the class. The class started on October 15, but no payment has yet been received. (Alcorn’s accruals are applied to the nearest half month; for example, October recognizes one half month accrual.)
g. The Institute’s only employee is paid weekly. As of the end of the year, three days’ salaries have accrued at the rate of $180 per day.
h. The balance in the Prepaid Rent account represents rent for December.
Required
1. Prepare T accounts (representing the ledger) with balances from the unadjusted trial balance.
2. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries for items a through h, and post them to the T accounts. Assume that adjusting entries are made only at year end.
3. Update balances in the T accounts for the adjusting entries and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
4. Prepare the company’s income statement and statement of owner’s equity for the year 2011, and prepare its balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A six column table for Daxu Consulting Company follows. The first two columns contain the unadjusted trial balance for the company as of December 31, 2011, and the last two columns contain the adjusted trial balance as of the same date.
|
|
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
Adjustments
|
Trial Balance
|
|
Cash
|
$48,000
|
|
|
$48,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
70,000
|
|
|
76,660
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
30,000
|
|
|
7,000
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
13,200
|
|
|
8,600
|
|
|
Office equipment
|
150,000
|
|
|
150,000
|
|
|
Accum depreciation —
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office equip
|
|
$30,000
|
|
|
$40,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
36,000
|
|
|
42,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
1,600
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
11,200
|
|
Unearned consulting fees
|
|
30,000
|
|
|
17,800
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
80,000
|
|
|
80,000
|
|
J Winner, Capital
|
|
70,200
|
|
|
70,200
|
|
J Winner, Withdrawals
|
10,000
|
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
Consulting fees earned
|
|
264,000
|
|
|
28,420
|
|
Depreciation expense —
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office equip
|
0
|
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
115,000
|
|
|
126,800
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
6,400
|
|
|
8,000
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
0
|
|
|
4,600
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
24,000
|
|
|
24,000
|
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
0
|
|
|
23,000
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
43,000
|
|
|
49,000
|
|
|
Totals
|
$510,200
|
$510,200
|
|
$545,660
|
$545,660
|
Required
1. Analyze the differences between the unadjusted and adjusted trial balances to determine the eight adjustments that likely were made. Show the results of your analysis by inserting these adjustment amounts in the table’s two middle columns. Label each adjustment with a letter a through h and provide a short description of it at the bottom of the table.
2. Use the information in the adjusted trial balance to prepare this company’s (a) income statement and its statement of owner’s equity for the year ended December 31, 2011 (note: D. Chen, Capital at December 31, 2010, was $70,200, and the current year withdrawals were $10,000), and (b) the balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance for Lightning Courier as of December 31, 2011, follows.
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 48,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
110,000
|
|
|
Interest receivable
|
6,000
|
|
|
Notes receivable (due in 90 days)
|
200,000
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
12,000
|
|
|
Trucks
|
124,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Trucks
|
|
$ 48,000
|
|
Equipment
|
260,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
190,000
|
|
Land
|
90,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
124,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
22,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
30,000
|
|
Unearned delivery fees
|
|
110,000
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
190,000
|
|
J. Hallam, Capital
|
|
115,000
|
|
J. Hallam, Withdrawals
|
40,000
|
|
|
Delivery fees earned
|
|
580,000
|
|
Interest earned
|
|
24,000
|
|
Depreciation expense—Trucks
|
24,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
46,000
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
64,000
|
|
|
Wages expense
|
290,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
25,000
|
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
33,000
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
26,400
|
|
|
Repairs expense—Trucks
|
34,600
|
|
|
Totals
|
$1,433,000
|
$1,433,000
|
Required
1. Use the information in the adjusted trial balance to prepare
(a) the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011,
(b) the statement of owner’s equity for the year ended December 31, 2011,
(c) the balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
2. Calculate the profit margin for year 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quake Co. had the following transactions in the last two months of its fiscal year ended May 31.
Apr. 1 Paid $3,450 cash to an accounting firm for future consulting services.
1 Paid $2,700 cash for 12 months of insurance through March 31 of the next year.
30 Received $7,500 cash for future services to be provided to a customer.
May 1 Paid $3,450 cash for future newspaper advertising.
23 Received $9,450 cash for future services to be provided to a customer.
31 Of the consulting services paid for on April 1, $1,500 worth has been received.
31 A portion of the insurance paid for on April 1 has expired. No adjustment was made in April to Prepaid Insurance.
31 Services worth $3,600 are not yet provided to the customer who paid on April 30.
31 Of the advertising paid for on May 1, $1,050 worth is not yet used.
31 The company has performed $4,500 of services that the customer paid for on May 23.
Required
1. Prepare entries for these transactions under the method that records prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. Also prepare adjusting entries at the end of the year.
2. Prepare entries for these transactions under the method that records prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in income statement accounts. Also prepare adjusting entries at the end of the year.
3. Explain why the alternative sets of entries in parts 1 and 2 do not result in different financial statement amounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Key figures for the recent two years of both Research In Motion and Apple follow.
|
|
Research In Motion
|
Apple
|
|
($ millions)
|
Current Year
|
Prior Year
|
Current Year
|
Prior Year
|
|
Net income
|
$ 2,457
|
$ 1,893
|
$ 8,235
|
$ 6,119
|
|
Net sales
|
14,953
|
11,065
|
42,905
|
37,491
|
|
Current assets
|
5,813
|
4,842
|
31,555
|
30,006
|
|
Current liabilities
|
2,432
|
2,115
|
11,506
|
11,361
|
Required
1. Compute profit margins for (a) Research In Motion and (b) Apple for the two years of data shown.
2. Which company is more successful on the basis of profit margin? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jackie Bergez works for Sea Biscuit Co. She and Bob Welch, her manager, are preparing adjusting entries for annual financial statements. Bergez computes depreciation and records it as
|
Depreciation Expense —Equipment
|
123,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
123,000
|
Welch agrees with her computation but says the credit entry should be directly to the Equipment account.
Welch argues that while accumulated depreciation is technically correct, “it is less hassle not to use a contra account and just credit the Equipment account directly. And besides, the balance sheet shows the same amount for total assets under either method.”
Required
1. How should depreciation be recorded? Do you support Bergez or Welch?
2. Evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of Welch’s reasons for preferring his method.
3. Indicate whether the situation Bergez faces is an ethical problem. Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The class should be divided into teams. Teams are to select an industry (such as automobile manufacturing, airlines, defense contractors), and each team member is to select a different company in that industry. Each team member is to acquire the annual report of the company selected. Annual reports can be downloaded from company Websites or from the SEC’s EDGAR database.
Required
1. Use the annual report to compute the return on assets, debt ratio, and profit margin.
2. Communicate with team members via a meeting, e mail, or telephone to discuss the meaning of the ratios, how different companies compare to each other, and the industry norm. The team must prepare a single memo reporting the ratios for each company and identifying the conclusions or consensus of opinion reached during the team’s discussion. The memo is to be copied and distributed to the instructor and all classmates.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Four types of adjustments are described in the chapter:
(1) prepaid expenses,
(2) unearned revenues,
(3) accrued expenses,
(4) accrued revenues.
Required
1. Form learning teams of four (or more) members. Each team member must select one of the four adjustments as an area of expertise (each team must have at least one expert in each area).
2. Form expert teams from the individuals who have selected the same area of expertise. Expert teams are to discuss and write a report that each expert will present to his or her learning team addressing the following:
a. Description of the adjustment and why it’s necessary.
b. Example of a transaction or event, with dates and amounts, that requires adjustment.
c. Adjusting entry(ies) for the example in requirement b.
d. Status of the affected account(s) before and after the adjustment in requirement c.
e. Effects on financial statements of not making the adjustment.
3. Each expert should return to his or her learning team. In rotation, each member should present his or her expert team’s report to the learning team. Team discussion is encouraged.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partial work sheet of Midtown Repair Company at December 31, 2011, follows.
|
|
Adjusted Trial
Balance
|
Income
Statement
|
Balance Sheet and Statement of
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
95,600
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes receivable (current)
|
50,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
16,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
170,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation — Equipment
|
|
57,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
52,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
63,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
C. Trout, Capital
|
|
178,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
C. Trout, Withdrawals
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Repair services revenue
|
|
180,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest revenue
|
|
7,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
28,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Wages expense
|
85,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
48,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
5,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Totals
|
538,800
|
538,800
|
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Complete the work sheet by extending the adjusted trial balance totals to the appropriate financial statement columns.
2. Prepare closing entries for Midtown Repair Company.
3. Set up the Income Summary and the C. Trout, Capital account in the general ledger (in balance column format) and post the closing entries to these accounts.
4. Determine the balance of the C. Trout, Capital account to be reported on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet.
5. Prepare an income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and classified balance sheet (in report form) as of December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. G. Venda, owner of Venda Services, withdrew $25,000 from the business during the current year. The entry to close the withdrawals account at the end of the year is:
|
a.
|
G. Venda, Withdrawals
|
25,000
|
|
|
|
G. Venda, Capital
|
|
25,000
|
|
b.
|
Income Summary
|
25,000
|
|
|
|
G. Venda, Capital
|
|
25,000
|
|
c.
|
G. Venda,Withdrawals
|
25,000
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
25,000
|
|
d.
|
G. Venda, Capital
|
25,000
|
|
|
|
Salary Expense
|
|
25,000
|
|
e.
|
G. Venda, Capital
|
25,000
|
|
|
|
G. Venda, Withdrawals
|
|
25,000
|
2. The following information is available for the R. Kandamil Company before closing the accounts. After all of the closing entries are made, what will be the balance in the R. Kandamil, Capital account?
|
Total revenues
|
$300,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
195,000
|
|
R. Kandamil, Capital
|
100,000
|
|
R. Kandamil, Withdrawals
|
45,000
|
a. $360,000
d. $150,000
b. $250,000
c. $160,000
e. $60,000
3. Which of the following errors would cause the balance sheet and statement of owner’s equity columns of a work sheet to be out of balance?
a. Entering a revenue amount in the balance sheet and statement of owner’s equity debit column.
b. Entering a liability amount in the balance sheet and statement of owner’s equity credit column.
c. Entering an expense account in the balance sheet and statement of owner’s equity debit column.
d. Entering an asset account in the income statement debit column.
e. Entering a liability amount in the income statement credit column.
4. The temporary account used only in the closing process to hold the amounts of revenues and expenses before the net difference is added or subtracted from the owner’s capital account is called the
a. Closing account.
b. Nominal account.
c. Income Summary account.
d. Balance Column account.
e. Contra account.
5. Based on the following information from Repicor Company’s balance sheet, what is Repicor Company’s current ratio?
|
Current assets
|
$ 75,000
|
|
Investments
|
30,000
|
|
Plant assets
|
300,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
50,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
60,000
|
|
D. Repicor, Capital
|
295,000
|
a. 2.10
d. 0.95
b. 1.50
c. 1.00
e. 0.67
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute Jamar Company’s current ratio using the following information.
|
Accounts receivable
|
$15,000
|
Long term notes payable
|
$20,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
10,000
|
Office supplies
|
1,800
|
|
Buildings
|
42,000
|
Prepaid insurance
|
2,500
|
|
Cash
|
6,000
|
Unearned services revenue
|
4,000
|
2. The following are common categories on a classified balance sheet.
A. Current assets
B. Long term investments
C. Plant assets
D. Intangible assets
E. Current liabilities
F. Long term liabilities
For each of the following items, select the letter that identifies the balance sheet category where the item typically would appear.
1. Trademarks
2. Accounts receivable
3. Land not currently used in operations
4. Notes payable (due in three years)
5. Cash
6. Wages payable
7. Store equipment
8. Accounts payable
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following selected information is taken from the work sheet for Wayman Company as of December 31, 2011. Using this information, determine the amount for K. Wayman, Capital, that should be reported on its December 31, 2011, balance sheet.
|
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet and
Statement of
Owner’s Equity
|
|
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
K. Wayman, Capital
|
|
|
|
65,000
|
|
K.Wayman, Withdrawals
|
|
|
32,000
|
|
|
Total
|
|
115,000
|
174,000
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer each of the following questions related to international accounting standards.
a. Explain how the closing process is different between accounting under IFRS versus U.S. GAAP.
b. What basic principle do U.S. GAAP and IFRS rely upon in recording the initial acquisition value for nearly all assets?
|
General Ledger
|
|
M. Mallon, Capital
|
|
Acct. No. 301
|
|
Date
|
PR
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Mar. 31
|
G2
|
|
|
42,000
|
|
M. Mallon, Withdrawals
|
|
Acct. No. 302
|
|
Date
|
PR
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Mar. 31
|
G2
|
|
|
25,000
|
|
Services Revenue
|
|
Acct. No. 401
|
|
Date
|
PR
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Mar. 31
|
G2
|
|
|
74,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
Acct. No. 603
|
|
Date
|
PR
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Mar. 31
|
G2
|
|
|
17,000
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
|
Acct. No. 622
|
|
Date
|
PR
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Mar. 31
|
G2
|
|
|
21,000
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
Acct. No. 637
|
|
Date
|
PR
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Mar. 31
|
G2
|
|
|
4,500
|
|
Rent Expense
|
|
Acct. No. 640
|
|
Date
|
PR
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
Mar. 31
|
G2
|
|
|
9,600
|
|
Income Summary
|
|
Acct. No. 901
|
|
Date
|
PR
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Balance
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance for Sundance Marketing Co. follows. Complete the four right most columns of the table by first entering information for the four closing entries (keyed 1 through 4) and second by completing the post closing trial balance.
|
|
|
Adjusted
Trial Balance
|
Closing Entry
Information
|
Post Closing
Trial Balance
|
|
No.
|
Account Title
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$8,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
106
|
Accounts receivable
|
24,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
153
|
Equipment
|
41,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
154
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$16,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
193
|
Franchise
|
30,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
201
|
Accounts payable
|
|
14,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
209
|
Salaries payable
|
|
3,200
|
|
|
|
|
|
233
|
Unearned fees
|
|
2,600
|
|
|
|
|
|
301
|
H. Sundance, Capital
|
|
64,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
302
|
H. Sundance, Withdrawals
|
14,400
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
401
|
Marketing fees earned
|
|
79,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
611
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
11,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
622
|
Salaries expense
|
31,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
640
|
Rent expense
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
677
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
7,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
901
|
Income summary
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Totals
|
$179,800
|
$179,800
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following adjusted trial balance contains the accounts and balances of Showers Company as of December 31, 2011, the end of its fiscal year.
(1) Prepare the December 31, 2011, closing entries for Showers Company.
(2) Prepare the December 31, 2011, post closing trial balance for Showers Company.
|
No.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
101
|
Cash
|
$18,000
|
|
|
126
|
Supplies
|
12,000
|
|
|
128
|
Prepaid insurance
|
2,000
|
|
|
167
|
Equipment
|
23,000
|
|
|
168
|
Accumulated depreciation — Equipment
|
|
$6,500
|
|
301
|
R. Showers, Capital
|
|
46,600
|
|
302
|
R. Showers, Withdrawals
|
6,000
|
|
|
404
|
Services revenue
|
|
36,000
|
|
612
|
Depreciation expense — Equipment
|
2,000
|
|
|
622
|
Salaries expense
|
21,000
|
|
|
637
|
Insurance expense
|
1,500
|
|
|
640
|
Rent expense
|
2,400
|
|
|
652
|
Supplies expense
|
1,200
|
|
| |
Totals
|
$89,100
|
$89,100
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following adjusted trial balance of Webb Trucking Company to prepare the
(1) income statement
(2) statement of owner’s equity, for the year ended December 31, 2011. The K. Webb, Capital, account balance is $161,000 at December 31, 2010.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$7,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
16,500
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
2,000
|
|
|
Trucks
|
170,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation — Trucks
|
|
$35,000
|
|
Land
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
11,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
3,000
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
52,000
|
|
K. Webb, Capital
|
|
161,000
|
|
K. Webb, Withdrawals
|
19,000
|
|
|
Trucking fees earned
|
|
128,000
|
|
Depreciation expense — Trucks
|
22,500
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
60,000
|
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
7,000
|
|
|
Repairs expense — Trucks
|
11,000
|
|
|
Totals
|
$390,000
|
$390,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following adjusted trial balance of Webb Trucking Company to prepare the
(1) income statement
(2) statement of owner’s equity, for the year ended December 31, 2011. The K. Webb, Capital, account balance is $161,000 at December 31, 2010.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$7,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
16,500
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
2,000
|
|
|
Trucks
|
170,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation — Trucks
|
|
$35,000
|
|
Land
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
11,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
3,000
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
52,000
|
|
K. Webb, Capital
|
|
161,000
|
|
K. Webb, Withdrawals
|
19,000
|
|
|
Trucking fees earned
|
|
128,000
|
|
Depreciation expense — Trucks
|
22,500
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
60,000
|
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
7,000
|
|
|
Repairs expense — Trucks
|
11,000
|
|
|
Totals
|
$390,000
|
$390,000
|
Prepare Webb Trucking Company’s classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
These 16 accounts are from the Adjusted Trial Balance columns of a company’s 10 column work sheet. In the blank space beside each account, write the letter of the appropriate financial statement column (A, B, C, or D) to which a normal account balance is extended.
A. Debit column for the Income Statement columns.
B. Credit column for the Income Statement columns.
C. Debit column for the Balance Sheet and Statement of Owner’s Equity columns.
D. Credit column for the Balance Sheet and Statement of Owner’s Equity columns.
1. Office Supplies
2. Accounts Payable
3. Owner, Capital
4. Wages Payable
5. Machinery
6. Interest Receivable
7. Interest Expense
8. Owner, Withdrawals
9. Service Fees Revenue
10. Insurance Expense
11. Accumulated Depreciation
12. Interest Revenue
13. Accounts Receivable
14. Rent Expense
15. Depreciation Expense
16. Cash
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
These partially completed Income Statement columns from a 10 column work sheet are for Welch’s Red Sail Rental Company.
(1) Use the information to determine the amount that should be entered on the net income line of the work sheet.
(2) Prepare the company’s closing entries. The owner, L. Welch, did not make any withdrawals this period.
|
Account Title
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Rent earned
|
|
102,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
45,300
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
6,400
|
|
|
Dock rental expense
|
15,000
|
|
|
Boat supplies expense
|
3,200
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Boats
|
19,500
|
|
|
Totals
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
|
|
Totals
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following adjusted trial balance to answer questions 1–3.
|
CHOI COMPANY
Adjusted Trial Balance
December 31
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 3,050
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
400
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
830
|
|
|
Supplies
|
80
|
|
|
Equipment
|
217,200
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$ 29,100
|
|
Wages payable
|
|
880
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
3,600
|
|
Unearned rent
|
|
460
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
150,000
|
|
M Choi, Capital
|
|
40,340
|
|
M Choi, Withdrawals
|
21,000
|
|
|
Rent earned
|
|
57,500
|
|
Wages expense
|
25,000
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
1,900
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
3,200
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
250
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
5,970
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,000
|
|
|
Totals
|
$281,880
|
$281,880
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A company forgot to record accrued and unpaid employee wages of $350,000 at period end. This oversight would
a. Understate net income by $350,000.
b. Overstate net income by $350,000.
c. Have no effect on net income.
d. Overstate assets by $350,000.
e. Understate assets by $350,000.
2. Prior to recording adjusting entries, the Supplies account has a $450 debit balance. A physical count of supplies shows $125 of unused supplies still available. The required adjusting entry is:
a. Debit Supplies $125; Credit Supplies Expense $125.
b. Debit Supplies $325; Credit Supplies Expense $325.
c. Debit Supplies Expense $325; Credit Supplies $325.
d. Debit Supplies Expense $325; Credit Supplies $125.
e. Debit Supplies Expense $125; Credit Supplies $125.
3. On May 1, 2011, a two year insurance policy was purchased for $24,000 with coverage to begin immediately. What is the amount of insurance expense that appears on the company’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011?
a. $4,000
b. $8,000
c. $12,000
d. $20,000
e. $24,000
4. On November 1, 2011, Stockton Co. receives $3,600 cash from Hans Co. for consulting services to be provided evenly over the period November 1, 2011, to April 30, 2012—at which time Stockton credited $3,600 to Unearned Consulting Fees. The adjusting entry on December 31, 2011 (Stockton’s year end) would include a
a. Debit to Unearned Consulting Fees for $1,200.
b. Debit to Unearned Consulting Fees for $2,400.
c. Credit to Consulting Fees Earned for $2,400.
d. Debit to Consulting Fees Earned for $1,200.
e. Credit to Cash for $3,600.
5. If a company had $15,000 in net income for the year, and its sales were $300,000 for the same year, what is its profit margin?
a. 20%
b. 2,000%
c. $285,000
d. $315,000
e. 5%
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the year, Lyle Co. recorded prepayments of expenses in asset accounts, and cash receipts of unearned revenues in liability accounts. At the end of its annual accounting period, the company must make three adjusting entries:
(1) accrue salaries expense,
(2) adjust the Unearned Services Revenue account to recognize earned revenue,
(3) record services revenue earned for which cash will be received the following period. For each of these adjusting entries (1), (2), and (3), indicate the account from a through i to be debited and the account to be credited.
a. Prepaid Salaries
b. Salaries Expense
c. Services Revenue
d. Salaries Payable
e. Equipment
g. Unearned Services Revenue
f. Cash
h. Accounts Receivable
i. Accounts Payable
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Yang Company reported net income of $37,925 and net sales of $390,000 for the current year. Calculate the company’s profit margin and interpret the result. Assume that its competitors earn an average profit margin of 15%.
2. Diego Consulting initially records prepaid and unearned items in income statement accounts. Given this company’s accounting practices, which of the following applies to the preparation of adjusting entries at the end of its first accounting period?
a. Earned but unbilled (and unrecorded) consulting fees are recorded with a debit to Unearned Consulting Fees and a credit to Consulting Fees Earned.
b. Unpaid salaries are recorded with a debit to Prepaid Salaries and a credit to Salaries Expense.
c. The cost of unused office supplies is recorded with a debit to Supplies Expense and a credit to Office Supplies.
d. Unearned fees (on which cash was received in advance earlier in the period) are recorded with a debit to Consulting Fees Earned and a credit to Unearned Consulting Fees.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the blank space beside each adjusting entry, enter the letter of the explanation A through F that most closely describes the entry.
A. To record this period’s depreciation expense.
B. To record accrued salaries expense.
C. To record this period’s use of a prepaid expense.
D. To record accrued interest revenue.
E. To record accrued interest expense.
F. To record the earning of previously unearned income.
|
1.
|
Salaries Expense
|
13,280
|
|
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
13,280
|
|
2.
|
Interest Expense
|
2,208
|
|
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
2,208
|
|
3.
|
Insurance Expense
|
3,180
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
3,180
|
|
4.
|
Unearned Professional Fees
|
19,250
|
|
|
|
Professional Fees Earned
|
|
19,250
|
|
5.
|
Interest Receivable
|
3,300
|
|
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
3,300
|
|
6.
|
Depreciation Expense
|
38,217
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
38,217
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following separate cases, prepare adjusting entries required of financial statements for the year ended (date of ) December 31, 2011. (Assume that prepaid expenses are initially recorded in asset accounts and that fees collected in advance of work are initially recorded as liabilities.)
a. One third of the work related to $30,000 cash received in advance is performed this period.
b. Wages of $9,000 are earned by workers but not paid as of December 31, 2011.
c. Depreciation on the company’s equipment for 2011 is $19,127.
d. The Office Supplies account had a $480 debit balance on December 31, 2010. During 2011, $5,349 of office supplies are purchased. A physical count of supplies at December 31, 2011, shows $587 of supplies available.
e. The Prepaid Insurance account had a $5,000 balance on December 31, 2010. An analysis of insurance policies shows that $2,200 of unexpired insurance benefits remain at December 31, 2011.
f. The company has earned (but not recorded) $750 of interest from investments in CDs for the year ended December 31, 2011. The interest revenue will be received on January 10, 2012.
g. The company has a bank loan and has incurred (but not recorded) interest expense of $3,500 for the year ended December 31, 2011. The company must pay the interest on January 2, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare adjusting journal entries for the year ended (date of) December 31, 2011, for each of these separate situations. Assume that prepaid expenses are initially recorded in asset accounts. Also assume that fees collected in advance of work are initially recorded as liabilities.
a. Depreciation on the company’s equipment for 2011 is computed to be $16,000.
b. The Prepaid Insurance account had a $7,000 debit balance at December 31, 2011, before adjusting for the costs of any expired coverage. An analysis of the company’s insurance policies showed that $1,040 of unexpired insurance coverage remains.
c. The Office Supplies account had a $300 debit balance on December 31, 2010; and $2,680 of office supplies were purchased during the year. The December 31, 2011, physical count showed $354 of supplies available.
d. One half of the work related to $10,000 of cash received in advance was performed this period.
e. The Prepaid Insurance account had a $5,600 debit balance at December 31, 2011, before adjusting for the costs of any expired coverage. An analysis of insurance policies showed that $4,600 of coverage had expired.
f. Wage expenses of $4,000 have been incurred but are not paid as of December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following three separate situations require adjusting journal entries to prepare financial statements as of April 30. For each situation, present both the April 30 adjusting entry and the subsequent entry during May to record the payment of the accrued expenses.
a. On April 1, the company retained an attorney for a flat monthly fee of $2,500. This amount is paid to the attorney on the 12th day of the following month in which it was earned.
b. A $780,000 note payable requires 9.6% annual interest, or $6,240 to be paid at the 20th day of each month. The interest was last paid on April 20 and the next payment is due on May 20. As of April 30, $2,080 of interest expense has accrued.
c. Total weekly salaries expense for all employees is $9,000. This amount is paid at the end of the day on Friday of each five day workweek. April 30 falls on Tuesday of this year, which means that the employees had worked two days since the last payday. The next payday is May 3.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Determine the missing amounts in each of these four separate situations a through d.
|
|
A
|
B
|
C
|
D
|
|
Supplies available—prior year end
|
$ 300
|
$1,600
|
$1,360
|
?
|
|
Supplies purchased during the current year
|
2,100
|
5,400
|
?
|
$6,000
|
|
Supplies available—current year end
|
750
|
?
|
1,840
|
800
|
|
Supplies expense for the current year
|
?
|
1,300
|
9,600
|
6,575
|
2. Pablo Management has five part time employees, each of whom earns $100 per day. They are normally paid on Fridays for work completed Monday through Friday of the same week. They were paid in full on Friday, December 28, 2011. The next week, the five employees worked only four days because New Year’s Day was an unpaid holiday. Show (a) the adjusting entry that would be recorded on Monday, December 31, 2011, and (b) the journal entry that would be made to record payment of the employees’ wages on Friday, January 4, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are two income statements for Kendall Co. for the year ended December 31. The left column is prepared before any adjusting entries are recorded, and the right column includes the effects of adjusting entries. The company records cash receipts and payments related to unearned and prepaid items in balance sheet accounts. Analyze the statements and prepare the eight adjusting entries that likely were recorded. (Note: 30% of the $6,000 adjustment for Fees Earned has been earned but not billed, and the other 70% has been earned by performing services that were paid for in advance.)
|
KENDALL CO. Income Statements For Year Ended December 31
|
Unadjusted
|
Adjusted
|
|
Revenues
|
|
|
|
Fees earned
|
$24,000
|
$30,000
|
|
Commissions earned
|
42,500
|
42,500
|
|
Total revenues
|
66,500
|
72,500
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Computers
|
0
|
1,500
|
|
Depreciation expense—Office furniture
|
0
|
1,750
|
|
Salaries expense
|
12,500
|
14,950
|
|
Insurance expense
|
0
|
1,300
|
|
Rent expense
|
4,500
|
4,500
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
0
|
480
|
|
Advertising expense
|
3,000
|
3,000
|
|
Utilities expense
|
1,250
|
1,320
|
|
Total expenses
|
21,250
|
28,800
|
|
Net income
|
$45,250
|
$43,700
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On March 1, 2009, a company paid a $16,200 premium on a 36 month insurance policy for coverage beginning on that date. Refer to that policy and fill in the blanks in the following table.
|
Balance Sheet Prepaid Insurance Asset Using
|
Insurance Expense Using
|
|
|
Accrual Basis
|
Cash Basis
|
|
Accrual Basis
|
Cash Basis
|
|
Dec. 31,2009
|
$
|
$
|
2009
|
$
|
$
|
|
Dec. 31,2010
|
|
|
2010
|
|
|
|
Dec. 31, 2011
|
|
|
2011
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2012
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total
|
$
|
$
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following information to compute profit margin for each separate company a through e.
|
|
Net Income
|
Net Sales
|
|
a.
|
$ 5,390
|
$ 44,830
|
|
b.
|
87,644
|
398,954
|
|
c.
|
93,385
|
257,082
|
|
d.
|
$55,234
|
$1,458,999
|
|
e.
|
70,158
|
435,925
|
Which of the five companies is the most profitable according to the profit margin ratio? Interpret that company’s profit margin ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Corbel Company experienced the following events and transactions during July.
July 1 Received $2,000 cash in advance of performing work for Beth Oker.
6 Received $8,400 cash in advance of performing work for Lisa Poe.
12 Completed the job for Oker.
18 Received $7,500 cash in advance of performing work for Henry Coe.
27 Completed the job for Poe.
31 None of the work for Coe has been performed.
a. Prepare journal entries (including any adjusting entries as of the end of the month) to record these events using the procedure of initially crediting the Unearned Fees account when payment is received from a customer in advance of performing services.
b. Prepare journal entries (including any adjusting entries as of the end of the month) to record these events using the procedure of initially crediting the Fees Earned account when payment is received from a customer in advance of performing services.
c. Under each method, determine the amount of earned fees reported on the income statement for July and the amount of unearned fees reported on the balance sheet as of July 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
adidas AG reports the following balance sheet accounts for the year ended December 31, 2009 (euros in millions). Prepare the balance sheet for this company as of December 31, 2009, following usual IFRS practices.
|
Tangible and other assets
|
€1,410
|
Intangible assets
|
€2,980
|
|
Total equity
|
3,776
|
Total current liabilities
|
2,836
|
|
Receivables and financial assets
|
1,753
|
Inventories
|
1,471
|
|
Total noncurrent liabilities
|
2,263
|
Total liabilities
|
5,099
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
775
|
Other current assets
|
486
|
|
Total current assets
|
4,485
|
Total noncurrent assets
|
4,390
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Meyer Co. follows the practice of recording prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. The company’s annual accounting period ends on December 31, 2011. The following information concerns the adjusting entries to be recorded as of that date.
a. The Office Supplies account started the year with a $3,000 balance. During 2011, the company purchased supplies for $12,400, which was added to the Office Supplies account. The inventory of supplies available at December 31, 2011, totaled $2,640.
b. An analysis of the company’s insurance policies provided the following facts.
|
Policy
|
Date of Purchase
|
Months of Coverage
|
Cost
|
|
A
|
1 Apr 10
|
24
|
$15,840
|
|
B
|
1 Apr 11
|
36
|
13,068
|
|
C
|
1 Aug 11
|
12
|
2,700
|
The total premium for each policy was paid in full (for all months) at the purchase date, and the Prepaid Insurance account was debited for the full cost. (Year end adjusting entries for Prepaid Insurance were properly recorded in all prior years.)
c. The company has 15 employees, who earn a total of $2,100 in salaries each working day. They are paid each Monday for their work in the five day workweek ending on the previous Friday. Assume that December 31, 2011, is a Tuesday, and all 15 employees worked the first two days of that week. Because New Year’s Day is a paid holiday, they will be paid salaries for five full days on Monday, January 6, 2012.
d. The company purchased a building on January 1, 2011. It cost $855,000 and is expected to have a $45,000 salvage value at the end of its predicted 30 year life. Annual depreciation is $27,000.
e. Since the company is not large enough to occupy the entire building it owns, it rented space to a tenant at $2,400 per month, starting on November 1, 2011. The rent was paid on time on November 1, and the amount received was credited to the Rent Earned account. However, the tenant has not paid the December rent. The company has worked out an agreement with the tenant, who has promised to pay both December and January rent in full on January 15. The tenant has agreed not to fall behind again.
f. On November 1, the company rented space to another tenant for $2,175 per month. The tenant paid five months’ rent in advance on that date. The payment was recorded with a credit to the Unearned Rent account.
Required
1. Use the information to prepare adjusting entries as of December 31, 2011.
2. Prepare journal entries to record the first subsequent cash transaction in 2012 for parts c and e.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following entries, enter the letter of the explanation that most closely describes it in the space beside each entry. (You can use letters more than once.)
A. To record receipt of unearned revenue.
B. To record this period’s earning of prior unearned revenue.
C. To record payment of an accrued expense.
D. To record receipt of an accrued revenue.
E. To record an accrued expense.
F. To record an accrued revenue.
G. To record this period’s use of a prepaid expense.
H. To record payment of a prepaid expense.
I. To record this period’s depreciation expense.
|
1.
|
Rent Expense
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
2,000
|
|
2.
|
Interest Expense
|
1,000
|
|
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
1,000
|
|
3.
|
Depreciation Expense
|
4,000
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
4,000
|
|
4.
|
Unearned Professional Fees
|
3,000
|
|
|
|
Professional Fees Earned
|
|
3,000
|
|
5.
|
Insurance Expense
|
4,200
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
4,200
|
|
6.
|
Salaries Payable
|
1,400
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
1,400
|
|
7.
|
Prepaid Rent
|
4,500
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
4,500
|
|
8.
|
Salaries Expense
|
6,000
|
|
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
6,000
|
|
9.
|
Interest Receivable
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
|
5,000
|
|
10.
|
Cash
|
9,000
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable (from consulting)
|
|
9,000
|
|
11.
|
Cash
|
7,500
|
|
|
|
Unearned Professional Fees
|
|
7,500
|
|
12.
|
Cash
|
2,000
|
|
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
|
2,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Watson Technical Institute (WTI), a school owned by Tom Watson, provides training to individuals who pay tuition directly to the school. WTI also offers training to groups in off site locations. Its unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011, follows. WTI initially records prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. Descriptions of items a through h that require adjusting entries on
December 31, 2011, follow.
Additional Information Items
a. An analysis of WTI’s insurance policies shows that $3,000 of coverage has expired.
b. An inventory count shows that teaching supplies costing $2,600 are available at year end 2011.
c. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $12,000.
d. Annual depreciation on the professional library is $6,000.
e. On November 1, WTI agreed to do a special six month course (starting immediately) for a client. The contract calls for a monthly fee of $2,200, and the client paid the first five months’ fees in advance.
When the cash was received, the Unearned Training Fees account was credited. The fee for the sixth month will be recorded when it is collected in 2012.
f. On October 15, WTI agreed to teach a four month class (beginning immediately) for an individual for $3,000 tuition per month payable at the end of the class. The class started on October 15, but no payment has yet been received. (WTI’s accruals are applied to the nearest half month; for example, October recognizes one half month accrual.)
g. WTI’s two employees are paid weekly. As of the end of the year, two days’ salaries have accrued at the rate of $100 per day for each employee.
h. The balance in the Prepaid Rent account represents rent for December.
|
WATSON TECHNICAL INSTITUTE
Unadjusted Trial Balance
December 31,2011
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 26,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
0
|
|
|
Teaching supplies
|
10,000
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
15,000
|
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
2,000
|
|
|
Professional library
|
30,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Professional library
|
|
$ 9,000
|
|
Equipment
|
70,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
16,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
36,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
0
|
|
Unearned training fees
|
|
11,000
|
|
T. Watson, Capital
|
|
63,600
|
|
T. Watson, Withdrawals
|
40,000
|
|
|
Tuition fees earned
|
|
102,000
|
|
Training fees earned
|
|
38,000
|
|
Depreciation expense —Professional library
|
0
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
0
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
48,000
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
0
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
22,000
|
|
|
Teaching supplies expense
|
0
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
7,000
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
5,600
|
|
|
Totals
|
$ 275,600
|
$ 275,600
|
Required
1. Prepare T accounts (representing the ledger) with balances from the unadjusted trial balance.
2. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries for items a through h and post them to the T accounts. Assume that adjusting entries are made only at year end.
3. Update balances in the T accounts for the adjusting entries and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
4. Prepare Watson Technical Institute’s income statement and statement of owner’s equity for the year 2011 and prepare its balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A six column table for JJW Company follows. The first two columns contain the unadjusted trial balance for the company as of July 31, 2011. The last two columns contain the adjusted trial balance as of the same date.
Required
1. Analyze the differences between the unadjusted and adjusted trial balances to determine the eight adjustments that likely were made. Show the results of your analysis by inserting these adjustment amounts in the table’s two middle columns. Label each adjustment with a letter a through h and provide a short description of it at the bottom of the table.
2. Use the information in the adjusted trial balance to prepare the company’s (a) income statement and its statement of owner’s equity for the year ended July 31, 2011 (note: J. Winner, Capital at July 31, 2010, was $28,420, and the current year withdrawals were $10,000), and (b) the balance sheet as of July 31, 2011.
|
|
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
Trial Balance
|
Adjustments
|
Trial Balance
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$27,000
|
|
|
$27,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
12,000
|
|
|
22,460
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
18,000
|
|
|
3,000
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
7,320
|
|
|
4,880
|
|
|
Office equipment
|
92,000
|
|
|
92,000
|
|
|
Accum depreciation —
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office equip
|
|
$12,000
|
|
|
$18,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
9,300
|
|
|
10,200
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
800
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
0
|
|
|
6,600
|
|
Unearned consulting fees
|
|
16,000
|
|
|
14,300
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
44,000
|
|
|
44,000
|
|
J Winner, Capital
|
|
28,420
|
|
|
28,420
|
|
J Winner, Withdrawals
|
10,000
|
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
Consulting fees earned
|
|
156,000
|
|
|
168,160
|
|
Depreciation expense —
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Office equip
|
0
|
|
|
6,000
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
71,000
|
|
|
77,600
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,400
|
|
|
2,200
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
0
|
|
|
2,440
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
13,200
|
|
|
13,200
|
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
0
|
|
|
15,000
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
13,800
|
|
|
14,700
|
|
|
Totals
|
$265,720
|
$265,720
|
|
$290,480
|
$290,480
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance for Calla hay Company as of December 31, 2011, follows.
|
Cash
|
$ 22,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
44,000
|
|
|
Interest receivable
|
10,000
|
|
|
Notes receivable (due in 90 days)
|
160,000
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
8,000
|
|
|
Automobiles
|
160,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Automobiles
|
|
$ 42,000
|
|
Equipment
|
130,000
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
10,000
|
|
Land
|
70,000
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
88,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
12,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
11,000
|
|
Unearned fees
|
|
22,000
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
130,000
|
|
J Callahay, Capital
|
|
247,800
|
|
J Callahay, Withdrawals
|
38,000
|
|
|
Fees earned
|
|
420,000
|
|
Interest earned
|
|
16,000
|
|
Depreciation expense — Automobiles
|
18,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense — Equipment
|
10,000
|
|
|
Salaries expense
|
180,000
|
|
|
Wages expense
|
32,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
24,000
|
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
26,000
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
50,000
|
|
|
Repairs expense — Automobiles
|
16,800
|
|
|
Totals
|
$998,800
|
$998,800
|
Required
1. Use the information in the adjusted trial balance to prepare
(a) the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011;
(b) the statement of owner’s equity for the year ended December 31, 2011;
(c) the balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
2. Calculate the profit margin for year 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nomo Co. follows the practice of recording prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. The company’s annual accounting period ends on October 31, 2011. The following information concerns the adjusting entries that need to be recorded as of that date.
a. The Office Supplies account started the fiscal year with a $500 balance. During the fiscal year, the company purchased supplies for $3,650, which was added to the Office Supplies account. The supplies available at October 31, 2011, totaled $700.
b. An analysis of the company’s insurance policies provided the following facts.
|
Policy
|
Date of Purchase
|
Months of
Coverage
|
Cost
|
|
A
|
April 1, 2010
|
24
|
$3,000
|
|
B
|
April 1, 2011
|
36
|
3,600
|
|
C
|
August 1, 2011
|
12
|
660
|
The total premium for each policy was paid in full (for all months) at the purchase date, and the Prepaid Insurance account was debited for the full cost. (Year end adjusting entries for Prepaid Insurance were properly recorded in all prior fiscal years.)
c. The company has four employees, who earn a total of $800 for each workday. They are paid each Monday for their work in the five day workweek ending on the previous Friday. Assume that October 31, 2011, is a Monday, and all four employees worked the first day of that week. They will be paid salaries for five full days on Monday, November 7, 2011.
d. The company purchased a building on November 1, 2010, that cost $155,000 and is expected to have a $20,000 salvage value at the end of its predicted 25 year life. Annual depreciation is $5,400.
e. Since the company does not occupy the entire building it owns, it rented space to a tenant at $600 per month, starting on September 1, 2011. The rent was paid on time on September 1, and the amount received was credited to the Rent Earned account. However, the October rent has not been paid. The company has worked out an agreement with the tenant, who has promised to pay both October and
November rent in full on November 15. The tenant has agreed not to fall behind again.
f. On September 1, the company rented space to another tenant for $525 per month. The tenant paid five months’ rent in advance on that date. The payment was recorded with a credit to the Unearned Rent account.
Required
1. Use the information to prepare adjusting entries as of October 31, 2011.
2. Prepare journal entries to record the first subsequent cash transaction in November 2011 for parts c and e.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Responsibility centers; research; writing) Organizational spending on out sourced contact centers (previously referred to as call centers) continues to increase. Contact centers are critical to organizational success because these units often have primary responsibility for interactions with customers. In some companies, the con tact centers are established primarily for customer support; in other companies (especially in the financial services sector), these centers not only provide customer support but also sell additional services to customers who call. Use library, Web, or interview research to gather information on contact centers.
a. Contact centers often have a large responsibility for customer relationship management (CRM). What is CRM, and why is it so important to companies?
b. List five well known companies that use such centers and indicate the primary purpose of those contact centers.
c. For each company identified in (b), do you think that its contact center would primarily be considered a cost or a profit center? Discuss the rationale for your answers.
d. For each company in (b), list three possible methods of allocating the costs of con tact centers to operating departments. Discuss the rationale for your answers.
e. Although outsourced contact centers (especially those that are offshore) may create cost reductions, what other measurements might be useful in gauging contact center performance and customer satisfaction?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Revenue variances) Cardiff Sports sells footballs and shoulder pads. For 2010, company management budgeted the following:
|
|
Footballs
|
Shoulder Pads
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$1,200,000
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Unit sales price
|
$60
|
$45
|
At the end of 2010, management was told that actual sales of footballs were 21,000 units and the sales price variance was $63,000 unfavorable. Sales of shoulder pads generated $1,680,000 of revenue, with an unfavorable sales volume variance of $360,000.
a. Compute the budgeted sales volume for each product.
b. Compute the sales volume variance for footballs.
c. Compute the sales price variance for shoulder pads.
d. What conditions might have contributed to the revenue variances?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Revenue variances) Kessla Taub manages the marketing department at Electronic Village. Company management has been concerned about the sales of three products and has informed Taub that, regardless of other sales, her performance in 2010 will be evaluated on whether she has met the sales budget for the following items:
|
|
Sales Price per Unit
|
Budgeted Unit Sales
|
|
HD radio tuners
|
$120
|
1,600
|
|
Satellite radios
|
$ 68
|
2,100
|
|
MP3 car decks
|
$ 60
|
1,050
|
Actual sales for these three products, generated in 2010, were as follows:
|
|
Sales Price per Unit
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
HD radio tuners
|
$115
|
$195,500
|
|
Satellite radios
|
70
|
141,400
|
|
MP3 car decks
|
55
|
228,250
|
a. For 2010, compute the sales price variances by product.
b. For 2010, compute the sales volume variances by product.
c. Assuming that the variances computed in (a) and (b) are controllable by Taub, discuss what actions she may have taken to cause actual results to deviate from budgeted results.
d. What problems might be caused by the manner in which Taub was evaluated during 2010?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Revenue variances) Folsom Fashions sells a line of women’s dresses. Folsom’s performance report for November 2010 is shown below. The company uses a flexible budget to analyze its performance and measure the effect on operating income of the various factors affecting the difference between budgeted and actual operating results.
|
|
Actual
|
Budget
|
|
Dresses sold
|
5,000
|
6,000
|
|
Sales
|
$ 235,000
|
$300,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
(145,000)
|
(180,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 90,000
|
$120,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
(84,000)
|
(80,000)
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 6,000
|
$ 40,000
|
a. Compute the sales price variance and the sales volume variance for November 2010.
b. Determine the impact of the sales volume variance on Folsom’s contribution margin for the month of November 2010.
c. What additional information is needed for Folsom to calculate the dollar impact of a change in the market share on operating income for November 2010? What would be the overall benefit to Folsom’s sales managers of having such information?
d. Explain why performance evaluation at Folsom Fashions is limited if the company’s evaluation of management is based solely on sales price and volume variances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Direct method) Management of Shreveport Community Hospital has decided to allocate the budgeted costs of its three support departments (administration, public relations, and maintenance) to its three operating programs (surgery, in patient care, and out patient services). Budgeted information for 2010 follows.
|
Budgeted costs
|
|
|
Administration
|
$5,400,000
|
|
Public relations
|
1,100,000
|
|
Maintenance & janitorial
|
1,700,000
|
|
Allocation bases
|
|
|
Administration
|
Dollars of assets employed
|
|
Public relations
|
Number of employees
|
|
Maintenance & janitorial
|
Hours of equipment operation
|
|
|
EXPECTED UTILIZATIONS
|
|
|
Dollars of Assets
|
Number of
|
Hours of
|
|
|
Employed
|
Employees
|
Equipment Operation
|
|
Administration
|
1,480,180
|
8
|
2,040
|
|
Public relations
|
900,200
|
14
|
940
|
|
Maintenance & janitorial
|
1,651,360
|
10
|
3,060
|
|
Surgery
|
3,948,500
|
20
|
24,850
|
|
In patient care
|
2,458,500
|
36
|
28,400
|
|
Out patient services
|
1,043,000
|
44
|
17,750
|
Using the direct method, allocate the expected support department costs to the operating areas.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Step method) Leyh Management Co. classifies its operations into three departments: commercial sales, residential sales, and property management. The owner, Ellen Leyh, wants to know the full cost of operating each department. Direct departmental costs and several allocation bases associated with each follow:
|
|
AVAILABLE ALLOCATION BASES
|
|
|
|
Number of
|
|
|
|
|
Direct Costs
|
Employees/ Salespersons
|
Assets Employed
|
Revenue
|
|
Administration
|
$ 1,500,000
|
20
|
$2,480,000
|
n/a
|
|
Accounting
|
990,000
|
15
|
1,364,000
|
n/a
|
|
Promotion
|
720,000
|
12
|
720,000
|
n/a
|
|
Commercial sales
|
10,490,000
|
45
|
900,000
|
$10,000,000
|
|
Residential sales
|
9,179,000
|
210
|
1,440,000
|
18,000,000
|
|
Property management
|
398,400
|
18
|
540,000
|
2,000,000
|
The support departments are shown in a benefits provided ranking. Leyh has selected the following allocation bases for each department: number of employees/salespersons for administration, dollars of assets employed for accounting, and dollars of revenue for promotion.
a. Use the step method to allocate the support department costs to the revenue generating departments.
b. Which department is apparently the most profitable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Comprehensive support department allocations) Wakowski Company’s annual budget for its three support departments (administration, legal/accounting, and maintenance/engineering) and its two production departments (processing and finishing) is as follows:
|
|
|
ANNUAL BUDGET ($000 omitted)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Legal/
|
Maintenance/
|
|
|
|
|
|
Administration
|
Accounting
|
Engineering
|
Processing
|
Finishing
|
Total
|
|
Direct labor
|
$1,400
|
$1,000
|
$1,800
|
$5,600
|
$4,000
|
$13,800
|
|
Direct material
|
140
|
400
|
180
|
800
|
2,400
|
3,920
|
|
Insurance
|
350
|
100
|
150
|
600
|
440
|
1,640
|
|
Depreciation
|
180
|
140
|
160
|
400
|
300
|
1,180
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
60
|
40
|
80
|
120
|
60
|
360
|
|
Total
|
$2,130
|
$1,680
|
$2,370
|
$7,520
|
$7,200
|
$20,900
|
|
|
|
ANNUAL BUDGET ($000 omitted)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Legal/
|
Maintenance/
|
|
|
|
|
|
Administration
|
Accounting
|
Engineering
|
Processing
|
Finishing
|
Total
|
|
Number of
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
employees
|
80
|
40
|
60
|
400
|
300
|
890
|
|
Sq. ft. of floor
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
space
|
800
|
600
|
400
|
1,600
|
2,000
|
5,400
|
|
Maint./eng. hours
|
30
|
40
|
30
|
136
|
204
|
440
|
a. Prepare a cost distribution that allocates support department costs using the step method. Assume the benefits provided ranking is the order in which the departments are listed. The allocation bases for the support department are (1) administration: number of employees, (2) legal/accounting: floor space, and (3) maintenance/engineering: number of hours. Calculate the factory overhead (OH) rates using 400,000 direct labor hours in processing and 300,000 direct labor hours in finishing. Round OH rates to the nearest $0.10.
b. Calculate the factory overhead rates per direct labor hour using the direct method. Round OH rates to the nearest $0.10.
c. Calculate the factory overhead rates per direct labor hour using the algebraic method. Round percentages to three decimal points. Round OH rates to the nearest $0.10.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Effect of support department allocations on reporting and evaluation; writing) Kensington Corporation is a diversified manufacturing company with corporate headquarters in Easton, Massachusetts. The three operating divisions are Kennedy Division, Consumer Products Division, and Outer space Products Division. Much of Kennedy Division’s manufacturing activity is related to work performed for the government space program under negotiated contracts.
Kensington Corporation headquarters provides general administrative support and computer services to each of the three operating divisions. The computer services are provided through a computer time sharing arrangement. The central processing unit (CPU) is located in Boston, and the divisions have remote terminals connected to the CPU by telephone lines. One standard from the Cost Accounting Standards Board provides that the cost of general administration may be allocated to negotiated defense contracts. Furthermore, the standards provide that, in situations in which computer services are provided by corporate headquarters, the actual costs (fixed and variable) of operating the computer department may be allocated to the Kennedy Division based on a reasonable measure of computer usage.
The general manager of each of the three divisions is evaluated based on the division’s before tax performance. The November 2010 performance evaluation reports (in millions of dollars) for each division follow.
|
|
|
Consumer
|
Outer space
|
|
|
Kennedy
|
Products
|
Products
|
|
|
Division
|
Division
|
Division
|
|
Sales
|
$ 46
|
$ 30
|
$110
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
(26)
|
(14)
|
(76)
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 20
|
$ 16
|
$ 34
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
|
|
|
|
Division selling and administration costs
|
$ 10
|
$ 10
|
$ 16
|
|
Corporate general administration costs
|
2
|
0
|
0
|
|
Corporate computing
|
2
|
0
|
0
|
|
Total
|
$ 14
|
$ 10
|
$ 16
|
|
Profit before taxes
|
$ 6
|
$ 6
|
$ 18
|
Without a charge for computing services, the operating divisions might not make the most cost effective use of the computer systems resources. Outline and discuss a method for charging the operating divisions for use of computer services that would promote cost consciousness by the operating divisions and operating efficiency by the computer systems services.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer prices) In each of the following cases, the Speaker Division can sell all of its production of audio speakers externally or some internally to the Sound System Division and the remainder to outside customers. The Speaker Division’s production capacity is 400,000 units annually. The data related to each independent case are as follows:
|
|
Case 1
|
Case 2
|
|
Speaker Division
|
|
|
|
Selling price to outside customers
|
$ 80
|
$ 65
|
|
Production costs per unit
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
32
|
22
|
|
Direct labor
|
12
|
10
|
|
Variable overhead
|
4
|
3
|
|
Fixed overhead (based on capacity)
|
1
|
1
|
|
Other variable selling and delivery costs per unit*
|
6
|
3
|
|
Sound System Division
|
|
|
|
Number of speakers needed annually
|
40,000
|
40,000
|
|
Current unit price being paid to outside supplier
|
$ 70
|
$ 57
|
a. For each case, determine the upper and lower limits for a transfer price for speakers.
b. For each case, determine a transfer price for the Speaker Division that will provide a $12 contribution margin per unit.
c. Using the information developed for (b), determine a dual transfer price for Case 1 assuming that Sound System will acquire the speakers from the Speaker Division at $12 below Sound System’s purchase price from outside suppliers.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer price) Ludmilla Corp. has two divisions: Engine and Mobile Systems. The Engine Division produces engines used by both the Mobile Systems Division and a variety of external industrial customers. External sales orders are generally produced in 50 unit lots. Using this typical lot size, the cost per engine is as follows:
|
Variable production cost
|
$4,200
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
1,800
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
600
|
|
Fixed selling expense
|
840
|
|
Fixed administrative expense
|
1,280
|
|
Total unit cost
|
$8,720
|
An engine’s external selling price is $10,464, providing the Engine Division with a normal profit margin of 20 percent. Because a significant number of sales are being made internally, Engine Division managers have decided that the external selling price should be used to transfer all engines to Mobile Systems.
When the Mobile Systems Division manager learned of the new transfer price, she became very upset because it would have a major negative impact on her division’s profit. Mobile Systems has asked for a lower transfer price from the Engine Division so that it earns a profit margin of only 15 percent. Mobile Systems’ manager has asked corporate management whether the division can buy engines externally. Faye Ryan, Ludmilla’s president, has gathered the following information on transfer prices to help the two divisional managers negotiate an equitable transfer price:
|
Current external sales price
|
$10,464
|
|
Total variable production cost plus a 20% profit margin ($4,200 _ 1.2)
|
5,040
|
|
Total production cost plus a 20% profit margin ($6,000 _ 1.2)
|
7,200
|
|
Bid price from external supplier (if motors are purchased in 50 unit lots)
|
9,280
|
a. Discuss advantages and disadvantages of each of these transfer prices to both the selling and buying divisions and to Ludmilla Corp.
b. If the Engine Division could sell all of its production externally at $10,464, what is the appropriate transfer price and why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer pricing journal entries) Worldly Traveler’s Roll Em On Division makes computer bags. The bags are sold to another internal division, SkyWheels, for inclusion in a luggage set and to external buyers. During the month just ended, SkyWheels acquired 4,000 bags from the Roll Em On Division, whose standard unit costs follow.
|
Direct material
|
$40
|
|
Direct labor
|
12
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
16
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
24
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
8
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
12
|
SkyWheels can acquire comparable bags externally for $160 each. Give the entries for each division and for Roll Em On (assuming that no bags acquired by SkyWheels have been sold) for the past month if the transfer is to be recorded
a. at SkyWheels’ external purchase price and no selling expenses were incurred on, or allocated to, internal transfers.
b. at a negotiated price of total variable cost plus 15 percent of full production cost.
c. by Roll Em On Division at SkyWheels’ external price, and by SkyWheels at Roll Em On’s variable production cost.
d. at Roll Em On’s absorption cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Internal vs. external sale) The president of Charlottetown Inc. has given the managers of the company’s three decentralized divisions (O’Leary, Alberton, and Summer side) the authority to decide whether to sell externally or internally at a transfer price the division managers determine. Market conditions are such that internal or external sales will not affect market or transfer prices. Intermediate markets will always be available for the divisions to purchase their manufacturing needs or sell their product. Division managers attempt to maximize their contribution margin at the current level of operating assets for their divisions.
The Alberton Division manager is considering the following two alternative orders:
- Summer side Division needs 1,500 units of a motor that Alberton Division can supply. To manufacture these motors, Alberton would purchase components from O’Leary Division at a transfer price of $600 per unit; O’Leary’s variable cost for these components is $300 per unit. Alberton Division would further process these components at a variable cost of $500 per unit.
If Summer side cannot obtain the motors from Alberton, it will purchase the motors from Montague Company for $1,500 per unit. Montague Company would also purchase 1,500 components from O’Leary at a price of $400 for each motor; O’Leary’s variable cost for these components is $200 per unit.
- New London Company wants to buy 1,750 similar motors from the Alberton Division for $1,250 per unit. Alberton would again purchase components from O’Leary Division, in this case at a transfer price of $500 per unit; O’Leary’s variable cost for these components is $250 per unit. Alberton Division would further process these components at a variable cost of $400 per unit.
Alberton Division’s plant capacity is limited, and therefore the company can accept either the New London contract or the Summer side order but not both. The president of Charlottetown Inc. and the manager of Alberton Division agree that it would not be beneficial in the short or long run to increase capacity.
a. If the Alberton Division manager wants to maximize the short run contribution margin, determine whether Alberton Division should (1) sell motors to Summer side Division at the prevailing market price or (2) accept New London Company’s con tract. Support your answer with appropriate calculations.
b. Without prejudice to your answer to (a), assume that Alberton Division decides to accept the New London contract. Determine whether this decision is in the best interest of Charlottetown Inc. Support your answer with appropriate calculations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Interdivisional transfers; deciding on alternatives) Eekaydo Inc. is organized on a divisional basis with considerable vertical integration. Mary Sue Oehlke is the new controller of the CarryOn! Division of Eekaydo.
CarryOn! Division makes a variety of leather products, including a portfolio. Product sales have been steady, and the marketing department expects continued strong demand. Oehlke is looking for ways the CarryOn! Division can contain its costs and thus boost its earnings from future sales. She discovered that CarryOn! Division has always purchased its leather from HIDE, another part of Eekay do. HIDE has been providing the 3 square feet of tanned leather needed for each portfolio for $9 per square foot.
Oehlke wondered whether it might be possible to purchase CarryOn!’s leather needs at comparable quality from an external supplier at a lower price. Top management at Eekaydo reluctantly agreed to allow the CarryOn! Division to consider purchasing outside the company.
CarryOn! Division management has issued an RFP (request for proposal) for the leather needed for 100,000 portfolios during the coming year. The two best supplier bids are $8 and $7 per square foot from Koenig and Thompson, respectively. Oehlke has been informed that another subsidiary of Eekaydo, Barrows Chemical, supplies Thompson the chemicals that are an essential ingredient of Thompson’s tanning process. Barrows Chemical charges Thompson $2 for enough chemicals to prepare 3 square feet of leather. Barrows’ profit margin is 30 percent.
HIDE Division wants to continue supplying CarryOn!’s leather needs at the same price per square foot as in the past. Tom Reed, HIDE’s controller, believes the sales are necessary to maintain HIDE’s healthy profit margin of 40 percent of sales.
As Eekaydo’s finance vice president, you have called a meeting of the controllers of CarryOn! and HIDE. Oehlke is eager to accept Thompson’s $7 bid. She points out that CarryOn!’s earnings will show a significant increase if the division can buy from Thompson.
Reed, however, wants Eekaydo to keep the business within the company and suggests that you require CarryOn! to purchase its needs from HIDE. He emphasizes that HIDE’s profit margin should not be lost from the company.
From whom should the CarryOn! Division buy the leather? Consider both CarryOn!’s desire to minimize its costs and Eekaydo’s corporate goal of maximizing profit on a companywide basis.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, 2011, Santana Rey launched a computer services company called Business Solutions, which provides consulting services, computer system installations, and custom program development. Rey adopts the calendar year for reporting purposes and expects to prepare the company’s first set of financial statements on December 31, 2011. The company’s initial chart of accounts follows.
|
Account
|
No.
|
Account
|
No.
|
|
Cash
|
101
|
S Rey, Capital
|
301
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
106
|
S Rey, Withdrawals
|
302
|
|
Computer Supplies
|
126
|
Computer Services Revenue
|
403
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
128
|
Wages Expense
|
623
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
131
|
Advertising Expense
|
655
|
|
Office Equipment
|
163
|
Mileage Expense
|
676
|
|
Computer Equipment
|
167
|
Miscellaneous Expenses
|
677
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
201
|
Repairs Expense—Computer
|
684
|
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record each of the following transactions for Business Solutions.
Oct. 1 S. Rey invested $45,000 cash, a $20,000 computer system, and $8,000 of office equipment in the company.
2 The company paid $3,300 cash for four months’ rent.
3 The company purchased $1,420 of computer supplies on credit from Harris Office Products.
5 The company paid $2,220 cash for one year’s premium on a property and liability insurance policy.
6 The company billed Easy Leasing $4,800 for services performed in installing a new Web server.
8 The company paid $1,420 cash for the computer supplies purchased from Harris Office Products on October 3.
10 The company hired Lyn Addie as a part time assistant for $125 per day, as needed.
12 The company billed Easy Leasing another $1,400 for services performed.
15 The company received $4,800 cash from Easy Leasing as partial payment on its account.
17 The company paid $805 cash to repair computer equipment that was damaged when moving it.
20 The company paid $1,728 cash for advertisements published in the local newspaper.
22 The company received $1,400 cash from Easy Leasing on its account.
28 The company billed IFM Company $5,208 for services performed.
31 The company paid $875 cash for Lyn Addie’s wages for seven days’ work.
31 S. Rey withdrew $3,600 cash from the company for personal use.
Nov. 1 The company reimbursed S. Rey in cash for business automobile mileage allowance (Rey logged 1,000 miles at $0.32 per mile).
2 The company received $4,633 cash from Liu Corporation for computer services performed.
5 The company purchased computer supplies for $1,125 cash from Harris Office Products.
8 The company billed Gomez Co. $5,668 for services performed.
13 The company received notification from Alex’s Engineering Co. that Business Solutions’ bid of $3,950 for an upcoming project is accepted.
18 The company received $2,208 cash from IFM Company as partial payment of the October 28 bill.
22 The company donated $250 cash to the United Way in the company’s name.
24 The company completed work for Alex’s Engineering Co. and sent it a bill for $3,950.
25 The company sent another bill to IFM Company for the past due amount of $3,000.
28 The company reimbursed S. Rey in cash for business automobile mileage (1,200 miles at $0.32 per mile).
30 The company paid $1,750 cash for Lyn Addie’s wages for 14 days’ work.
30 S. Rey withdrew $2,000 cash from the company for personal use.
2. Open ledger accounts (in balance column format) and post the journal entries from part 1 to them.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of November.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to Research In Motion’s financial statements in Appendix A for the following questions.
Required
1. What amount of total liabilities does it report for each of the fiscal years ended February 28, 2009, and February 27, 2010?
2. What amount of total assets does it report for each of the fiscal years ended February 28, 2009, and February 27, 2010?
3. Compute its debt ratio for each of the fiscal years ended February 28, 2009, and February 27, 2010.
4. In which fiscal year did it employ more financial leverage (February 28, 2009, or February 27, 2010)? Explain.
5. Access its financial statements (10 K report) for a fiscal year ending after February 27, 2010, from the SEC’s EDGAR database. Recompute its debt ratio for any subsequent year’s data and compare it with the debt ratio for 2009 and 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Key comparative figures for Research In Motion and Apple follow.
|
|
Research In Motion
|
Apple
|
|
($ millions)
|
Current Year
|
Prior Year
|
Current Year
|
Prior Year
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$ 2,602
|
$ 2,227
|
$15,861
|
$13,874
|
|
Total assets
|
10,204
|
8,101
|
47,501
|
36,171
|
1. What is the debt ratio for Research In Motion in the current year and for the prior year?
2. What is the debt ratio for Apple in the current year and for the prior year?
3. Which of the two companies has the higher degree of financial leverage? What does this imply?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The expanded accounting equation consists of assets, liabilities, capital, withdrawals, revenues, and expenses. It can be used to reveal insights into changes in a company’s financial position.
Required
1. Form learning teams of six (or more) members. Each team member must select one of the six components and each team must have at least one expert on each component:
(a) assets,
(b) liabilities,
(c) capital,
(d) withdrawals,
(e) revenues,
( f ) expenses.
2. Form expert teams of individuals who selected the same component in part 1. Expert teams are to draft a report that each expert will present to his or her learning team addressing the following:
a. Identify for its component the (i) increase and decrease side of the account and (ii) normal balance side of the account.
b. Describe a transaction, with amounts, that increases its component.
c. Using the transaction and amounts in (b), verify the equality of the accounting equation and then explain any effects on the income statement and statement of cash flows.
d. Describe a transaction, with amounts, that decreases its component.
e. Using the transaction and amounts in (d ), verify the equality of the accounting equation and then explain any effects on the income statement and statement of cash flows.
3. Each expert should return to his/her learning team. In rotation, each member presents his/her expert team’s report to the learning team. Team discussion is encouraged.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lisa Langely is a young entrepreneur who operates Langely Music Services, offering singing lessons and instruction on musical instruments. Langely wishes to expand but needs a $15,000 loan. The bank requests Langely to prepare a balance sheet and key financial ratios. Langely has not kept formal records but is able to provide the following accounts and their amounts as of December 31, 2011.
|
Cash
|
$ 1,800
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$4,800
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 750
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
4,700
|
Store Supplies
|
3,300
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
1,100
|
Unearned Lesson Fees
|
7,800
|
Total Equity
|
31,450
|
|
Annual net income
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011, for Langely Music Services. (Report only the total equity amount on the balance sheet.)
2. Compute Langely’s debt ratio and its return on assets. Assume average assets equal its ending balance.
3. Do you believe the prospects of a $15,000 bank loan are good? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nokia is a leading global manufacturer of mobile devices and services, and it competes to some extent with both Research In Motion and Apple. Key financial ratios for the current fiscal year follow.
|
Key Figure
|
Nokia
|
Research In Motion
|
Apple
|
|
Return on assets
|
0.7%
|
26.8%
|
19.7%
|
|
Debt ratio
|
58.7%
|
25.5%
|
33.4%
|
Required
1. Which company is most profitable according to its return on assets?
2. Which company is most risky according to the debt ratio?
3. Which company deserves increased investment based on a joint analysis of return on assets and the debt ratio? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Jordan Air has the following information in its unadjusted and adjusted trial balances. What are the adjusting entries that Jordan Air likely recorded?
|
|
Unadjusted
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
$6,200
|
$ 0
|
$5,900
|
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
|
|
$1,400
|
2. What accounts are taken from the adjusted trial balance to prepare an income statement?
3. In preparing financial statements from an adjusted trial balance, what statement is usually prepared second?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Stakeholders; cost management; writing) Laura Thompson, newly appointed controller of Allied Networking Services Inc. (ANSI), a rapidly growing company, has just been asked to serve as lead facilitator of a team charged with designing a cost management system (CMS) at ANSI. Also serving on the team are Tom Weiss, company president; Susan Turner, vice president of finance; and George Wipple, vice president of marketing.
At the team’s organizational meeting, Weiss suggested that the performance measurements to be built into the CMS should have a primary focus on ANSI’s ultimate goal. Thompson advised the team that it would therefore be necessary for the team to gain consensus on the issue of an appropriate goal on which to focus the emphasis for the CMS’s primary measurements.
When the team members pressed Weiss for what he thought ANSI’s goal should be, he indicated that he believed that maximization of company profits was the most reason able choice. At this, Wipple chimed in that because sales are the lifeblood of the company, the team should think about making customer satisfaction ANSI’s ultimate goal.
Turner, who had been silently listening to the discussion, was prompted by Thompson to give her opinion on the issue. Turner said that much of the professional literature advocates maximization of shareholder wealth as the ultimate goal of business. She did not see why it should not be the same at ANSI. After all, the stockholders provide the financial capital, take the ultimate risk, and are responsible for organizing the company. Therefore, she asserted, the primary emphasis of measurements in the CMS should focus on whether or not stockholder wealth is being maximized.
A heated debate ensued. Wipple said, “Look, without customers, the company has no reason for existence—how profitable is a company without customers, and how well off would its managers and stockholders be without revenues?” To this, Turner replied, “Without stockholder funds, you have no company!” Weiss responded, “Unless we manage ANSI profitably, there’ll be no company to provide customers with products and services or to provide a basis for stockholder wealth!” The team decided to reconvene after everyone had a chance to assess what had been said.
a. Should the CMS design team be deciding the company’s ultimate goal? If not, who should make such a decision?
b. What do you believe should be the ultimate goal for a business? Defend your answer.
c. Can one group of stakeholders effectively be served at the expense of the other stakeholders? Discuss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CMS; MIS; ethics; writing) The value of an oil and gas company is tied to two fundamental facts. The first is the amount of oil and gas the company is presently producing. This amount, along with unit prices, determines the revenue and cash inflow that the company generates. The second circumstance is the level of oil and gas reserves controlled by the company. Over the long run, the reserve level is a constraint on the amount and cost of current oil and gas production. Accordingly, the capital markets evaluate the performance of oil and gas companies as much on management of reserves as on management of current production. Because investors use information about reserves to value oil and gas companies, the SEC has developed rules for classifying and reporting reserves.
In a series of several announcements in early 2004, Shell Oil (Royal Dutch/Shell Group of Cos.) downgraded its proven oil and gas reserves by more than 20 percent, or about 4.5 billion barrels. Most of the misstatements of reserves, which were revealed to the public in 2004, had been booked in the years 1997–2000. Following the 2004 disclosures, regulatory bodies, including the SEC and the U.S. Justice Department, opened inquiries into the misreporting of reserves to determine if there had been violations of reporting rules or other laws.
a. Assume that the misreporting of reserves by Shell resulted from the MIS’s generation of unintentional but inaccurate information. From a cost management perspective, how might the CMS, built on inaccurate data, have caused managers to take actions that were not in the company’s best long run interests? What actions could managers have taken to ensure the reliability of the data?
b. Assume that Shell intentionally misreported reserves. Discuss how the CMS, if not properly designed, could have contributed to the misreporting.
c. Discuss the ethics of manipulating financial and fundamental data for the purpose of managing (misleading) perceptions of investors and other interested users of company information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CMS design; writing) New England Bottling was founded in the late 1800s and was owned by the same family until 1960 when the firm went public. Throughout its life as a public firm, the company has been continuously profitable and recorded slow, but steady, growth. Historically, the company has maintained a steady focus on cost control as the key to profit generation. However, since about 2000 the company has struggled to significantly increase profits. In 1980, the firm bottled merely five brands of product and sold its output through four large wholesalers. Today, the firm bottles 40 brands of product, and product life averages only four years. Consequently, the firm is constantly adding and deleting brands in its product line. Further, to market the 40 brands of product, the company sells to dozens of wholesalers, brokers, and large retail chains. The company uses multiple pricing models to accommodate the various outlets.
a. Discuss how the changes in the operating environment of New England Bottling could negatively affect its ability to generate profit.
b. The firm’s cost management system has not evolved with the changing complexity of the business environment. Discuss how gap analysis could be used to update the cost management system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Wayne Litcomb is the president and chief operating officer of Litcomb Electronics. He founded the company and has led it to its prominent place in the electronics field. He has manufacturing plants or retail outlets in 40 states. Litcomb is finding, however, that he cannot “keep track” of things the way he did in the past. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of decentralizing the firm’s decision making activities among the various local and regional managers. Also discuss what functions Litcomb might want to be performed centrally and why he would choose these functions.
- Why are responsibility reports prepared? Is it appropriate for a single responsibility report to be prepared for a division of a major company? Why or why not?
- What is sub optimization, and what factors contribute to it in a decentralized firm?
- Why are support department costs often allocated to operating departments? Is such an allocation process always useful from a decision making standpoint? How might support department cost allocation create a feeling of cost responsibility among managers of operating departments?
- “The four criteria for selecting an allocation base for support department costs should be applied equally.” Discuss the merits of this statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Compare and contrast the direct, step, and algebraic methods of allocating support department costs. What are the advantages and disadvantages of each method?
- When the algebraic method of allocating support department costs is used, total costs for each support department increase from what they were prior to the allocation. Why does this occur, and how are the additional costs treated?
- What are transfer prices, and why do companies use them? How could the use of transfer prices improve or impair goal congruence?
- What problems might be encountered when attempting to implement a cost based transfer pricing system? A market based transfer pricing system?
- What type of transfer price would you recommend be used in each of the following selling and buying responsibility centers: cost, revenue, profit, and investment? How and why would such prices be set?
- What is dual pricing? What is the intended effect of dual pricing on the performance of each division affected by the dual price?
- How can support departments use transfer prices, and what advantages do transfer prices have over cost allocation methods?
- Explain why the determination of transfer prices is more complex in a multinational, rather than in a domestic, setting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Responsibility centers) For each of the following organizational units, indicate whether the unit would most likely be classified as a cost center (C), a revenue center (R), a profit center (P), or an investment center (I):
a. Laundry of a large bed and breakfast
b. Corporate owned local outlet of a fast food restaurant
c. Wildlife management department in a national or state park
d. Local public television station’s fund raising telethon staffed by volunteers
e. City ticket office of an airline
f. Cafeteria of a for profit hospital
g. Fine jewelry counter in a local department store
h. University owned bookstore
i. Long term parking lot at a regional airport
j. Beijing office of an international public accounting firm
k. Sales representative for a college textbook publisher
l. Bloodmobile of a local hospital
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Direct method) Prosperous Bank has three support areas (administration, human resources, and accounting) and three revenue generating areas (checking accounts, savings accounts, and loans). Monthly direct costs and the interdepartmental support structure are shown in the following benefits provided ranking:
|
|
|
PERCENTAGE OF SERVICE USED BY
|
|
Direct
|
|
|
Human
|
|
|
|
|
|
Department
|
Costs
|
Admin.
|
Resources
|
Accounting
|
Checking
|
Savings
|
Loans
|
|
Administration
|
$540,000
|
|
10
|
10
|
30
|
40
|
10
|
|
Human
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
resources
|
360,000
|
10
|
|
10
|
30
|
20
|
30
|
|
Accounting
|
300,000
|
10
|
10
|
|
40
|
20
|
20
|
|
Checking
|
630,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Savings
|
337,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans
|
675,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compute the total cost for each revenue generating area of the bank using the direct method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Step method) Prosperous Bank has three support areas (administration, human resources, and accounting) and three revenue generating areas (checking accounts, savings accounts, and loans). Monthly direct costs and the interdepartmental support structure are shown in the following benefits provided ranking:
|
|
|
PERCENTAGE OF SERVICE USED BY
|
|
Direct
|
|
|
Human
|
|
|
|
|
|
Department
|
Costs
|
Admin.
|
Resources
|
Accounting
|
Checking
|
Savings
|
Loans
|
|
Administration
|
$540,000
|
|
10
|
10
|
30
|
40
|
10
|
|
Human
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
resources
|
360,000
|
10
|
|
10
|
30
|
20
|
30
|
|
Accounting
|
300,000
|
10
|
10
|
|
40
|
20
|
20
|
|
Checking
|
630,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Savings
|
337,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans
|
675,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compute total cost for each revenue generating area if Prosperous Bank uses the step method of cost allocation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Step method) Leander Mfg. has three support departments (human resources, administration, and maintenance) and two revenue generating departments (assembly and finishing). The company uses the step method to allocate support department costs to operating departments. In October 2010, human resources incurred $360,000 of costs, administration incurred $558,000, and maintenance incurred $170,000.Proportions of services provided to other departments for October 2010 follow.
|
|
Human Resources
|
Administration
|
Maintenance
|
|
Human resources
|
|
10%
|
5%
|
|
Administration
|
10%
|
|
15
|
|
Maintenance
|
15
|
10
|
|
|
Assembly
|
40
|
50
|
45
|
|
Finishing
|
35
|
30
|
35
|
a. Assuming that the departments are listed in a benefits provided ranking, what amount of cost should be assigned from human resources to each of the other departments? From administration? From maintenance?
b. What total support department cost was assigned to assembly in October? To finishing?
c. Explain why the cost allocation is affected by the order in which costs are assigned.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Algebraic method Prosperous Bank has three support areas (administration, human resources, and accounting) and three revenue generating areas (checking accounts, savings accounts, and loans). Monthly direct costs and the interdepartmental support structure are shown in the following benefits provided ranking:
|
|
|
PERCENTAGE OF SERVICE USED BY
|
|
Direct
|
|
|
Human
|
|
|
|
|
|
Department
|
Costs
|
Admin.
|
Resources
|
Accounting
|
Checking
|
Savings
|
Loans
|
|
Administration
|
$540,000
|
|
10
|
10
|
30
|
40
|
10
|
|
Human
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
resources
|
360,000
|
10
|
|
10
|
30
|
20
|
30
|
|
Accounting
|
300,000
|
10
|
10
|
|
40
|
20
|
20
|
|
Checking
|
630,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Savings
|
337,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Loans
|
675,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Compute the total cost for each revenue generating area using the algebraic method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Algebraic method) The following chart indicates the percentage of support department services used by other departments. Service departments are designated S1, S2, and S3; operating departments are designated RP1 and RP2.
|
|
|
SERVICES USED
|
|
|
|
Department
|
S1
|
S2
|
S3
|
RP1
|
RP2
|
|
S1
|
n/a
|
10%
|
20%
|
30%
|
40%
|
|
S2
|
40%
|
n/a
|
30
|
20
|
10
|
|
S3
|
20
|
30
|
n/a
|
40
|
10
|
Direct costs of the period were $170,000, $360,000, and $600,000 for S1, S2, and S3,respectively. Allocate the support department costs to the operating departments using the algebraic method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer pricing in support departments) Indicate whether each of the following statements constitutes a potential advantage (A), disadvantage (D), or neither (N) of using transfer prices for support department costs.
a. Can put all support departments on an equal footing
b. Can cause certain services to be under or over utilized
c. Can make a support department into a profit center
d. Can increase resource waste
e. Can make users and providers more cost conscious
f. Can increase communication about which additional services are needed and which ones can be reduced or eliminated
g. Can reduce goal congruence
h. Can require additional organizational data and employee time
i. Can increase disagreements among departments
j. Can improve ability to evaluate performance
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer pricing) Qvat Division, a subsidiary of Imogene Ltd., manufactures a product with the following costs:
|
Direct material
|
$15.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
26.25
|
|
Variable overhead
|
12.75
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
18.00
|
|
Total
|
$72.00
|
Some of the chips are sold externally for $162; others are transferred internally to the Kwak Division. Qvat Division’s plant manager wants to establish a reasonable transfer price for chips transferred to Kwak. The purchasing manager of Kwak Division has informed the plant manager that comparable chips can be purchased externally in a price range from $112.50 to $172.50.
a. Determine the upper and lower limits for the transfer price between Qvat Division and Kwak Division.
b. If Qvat Division is presently selling all the chips it can produce to external buyers, what minimum price should be set for transfers to Kwak Division?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer pricing) Elba Division of Haimes Industries manufactures product #54B89. Three fourths of the production is transferred to the Crete Division of Haimes Industries; the remainder is sold externally for $67 per unit. The following information is available about product #54B89:
|
Total production annually
|
1,200,000 units
|
|
Variable production costs
|
$40
|
|
Variable selling costs (includes $4 per unit in advertising cost)
|
$16
|
|
Fixed overhead (allocated on the basis of units of production)
|
$1,800,000
|
|
Fixed selling costs
|
$2,400,000
|
a. Determine the transfer price under each of the following methods:
(1) total variable cost
(2) full production cost
(3) total variable production cost plus allocated fixed selling costs
(4) market price
b. What transfer price do you think Elba Division should use to “sell” the units to Crete Division?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer pricing) Peyvandi Co., a profit center of California Enterprises, manufactures Product BP3751 9S to sell internally to other company divisions as well as externally. One unit of Product BP3751 9S sells for $72. Production and selling costs for a unit of Product BP3751 9S follow.
|
Direct material
|
$ 9.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
11.40
|
|
Variable overhead
|
4.80
|
|
Fixed overhead (based on production of 1,400,000 sets)
|
16.50
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
3.00
|
Andersen Co., another division of California Enterprises, wants to purchase 50,000 units of Product BP3751 9S from Peyvandi Co. during the next year. No selling costs are incurred on internal sales.
a. All the units of Product BP3751 9S that can be produced by Peyvandi Enterprises can be sold externally. What should the minimum transfer price be? Explain.
b. Assume that Peyvandi Co. is experiencing a slight slowdown in external demand and will be able to sell only 1,200,000 units of Product BP3751 9S externally next year at the $72 selling price. What should be the minimum selling price to Andersen Co. under these conditions? Explain.
c. Assume that Joe Dhir, the manager of Andersen Co., offers to pay Peyvandi Co.’s production cost plus 25 percent for each unit of Product BP3751 9S. Dhir receives an invoice for $2,606,250 but was planning on only $1,575,000. How were these amounts determined? What created the confusion? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer pricing; management motivation; writing) Great Taste Food Stores operates 20 large supermarkets in the East. Each store is evaluated as a profit center, and store managers have complete control over their purchases and inventory policy. Company policy is that transfers between stores will be made at cost if a store runs short of an item and another store has a sufficient supply.
During a recent period of rapid increases in food prices, company managers noticed that inter store transfers had decreased sharply. Store managers indicated that it was almost impossible to find another store with sufficient inventory to make a transfer when one store ran short of inventory. However, more in depth checking revealed that many of the other stores did actually have the inventory items on hand.
a. Why would the store managers be reluctant to make the inter store transfers?
b. How could the transfer pricing policy be changed to avoid this type of situation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transfer pricing) Walsdorf Company’s information technology department is developing a support department transfer price based on minutes of computer time. For 2010, its expected capacity was 700,000 minutes, and theoretical capacity was 1,000,000 minutes. Costs of the IT department for 2010 were expected to total $665,000.
a. What is the IT transfer price based on expected capacity?
b. What is the IT transfer price based on full capacity?
c. Actual operating costs of the IT department for 2010 were $689,400, and actual capacity usage was 730,000 minutes. What were the total variances from budget if the IT department used a transfer price based on expected capacity? On full capacity? What are some possible causes of that variance?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Responsibility accounting reports) Hippolito Inc. manufactures industrial tools and has annual sales of approximately $3.5 million with no evidence of cyclical demand. R&D is very important to Hippolito because its market share expands only in response to product innovation.
The company controller has designed and implemented a new annual budget sys tem divided into 12 equal segments for use for monthly performance evaluations. The vice president of operations was upset upon receiving the following responsibility re port for the Machining Department for October 2010:
|
MACHINING DEPARTMENT
|
|
|
Responsibility Report
|
|
|
For the Month Ended October 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
Budget
|
Actual
|
Variance
|
|
Volume in units
|
3,000
|
3,185
|
185 F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Variable manufacturing costs
|
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$ 27,000
|
$ 28,028
|
$1,028 U
|
|
Direct labor
|
28,500
|
30,098
|
1,598 U
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
33,300
|
35,035
|
1,735 U
|
|
Total
|
$ 88,800
|
$ 93,161
|
$4,361 U
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing costs
|
|
|
|
|
Indirect labor
|
$ 3,300
|
$ 3,334
|
$ 34 U
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,500
|
1,500
|
0
|
|
Property tax
|
300
|
300
|
0
|
|
Insurance
|
240
|
240
|
0
|
|
Other
|
930
|
1,027
|
97 U
|
|
Total
|
$ 6,270
|
$ 6,401
|
$ 131U
|
|
Corporate costs
|
|
|
|
|
Research and development
|
$ 2,400
|
$ 3,728
|
$1,328 U
|
|
Selling and administration
|
3,600
|
4,075
|
475 U
|
|
Total
|
$ 6,000
|
$ 7,803
|
$1,803 U
|
|
Total costs
|
$101,070
|
$107,365
|
$6,295 U
|
a. Identify the weaknesses in the responsibility report for the Machining Department.
b. Prepare a revised responsibility report for the Machining Department that reduces or eliminates the weaknesses indicated in part (a).
c. Deviations in excess of 5 percent of budget are considered material and worthy of investigation. Should any of the Machining Department’s variances be investigated? Regardless of materiality, is there any area that the vice president of operations might wish to discuss with the manager of the Machining Department?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Responsibility report; performance evaluation) Swimmingly Corp. buys raw fish, cooks and processes it, and then cans it in single portion containers. The canned fish is sold to several wholesalers, who specialize in providing food to school lunch programs in the northwest United States and western Canada. All processing is conducted in the firm’s highly automated plant in Portland, Oregon. AmirRigera, the production manager, is evaluated on the basis of a comparison of actual costs to standard costs. Only variable costs that Rigera controls are included in the comparison. Fish cost is noncontrollable. Standard costs per pound of fish for 2010follow.
|
Direct labor
|
$0.25
|
|
Repairs
|
0.05
|
|
Maintenance
|
0.30
|
|
Indirect labor
|
0.05
|
|
Power
|
0.10
|
For 2010, Swimmingly Corp. purchased 2.5 million pounds of fish and canned 1.5 million pounds. There were no beginning or ending inventories of raw, in process, or canned fish for the year. Actual 2010 costs were:
|
Direct labor
|
$300,000
|
|
Repairs
|
80,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
325,000
|
|
Indirect labor
|
77,500
|
|
Power
|
157,500
|
a. Prepare a responsibility report for Rigera for 2010.
b. As his supervisor, evaluate Rigera’s performance based on the report in (a).
c. Rigera believes his 2010 performance is so good that he should be considered for immediate promotion to vice president of production operations. Do you agree? Discuss the rationale for your answer.
d. Do you believe that all of the costs shown on Rigera’s responsibility report are truly under his control? Discuss the rationale for your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Profit center performance) The accounting department at Kerrville College has decided to offer a three day ethics workshop for local CPAs in March 2010. Rose Morris, a tenured professor, will supervise the seminar’s planning process and has sub mitted the following budget to the departmental chairperson:
|
Revenues ($900 per participant)
|
|
$90,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
Speakers ($2,500 each)
|
$15,000
|
|
|
Rent on facilities
|
3,600
|
|
|
Advertising
|
4,000
|
|
|
Meals and lodging
|
33,390
|
|
|
Departmental overhead allocation
|
23,560
|
(79,550)
|
|
Profit
|
|
$10,450
|
The $3,600 facilities rent is a fixed rental, which is to be paid to a local hotel for the use of a meeting room. Advertising is also a fixed cost. Meal expense is budgeted at $10 per person per meal (a total of nine meals to be provided for each participant and each speaker); lodging is budgeted at the rate of $75 per participant and speaker per night. Departmental overhead includes a $10 charge per participant and speaker for supplies as well as a general allocation of 25 percent of revenues for use of departmental secretarial and production resources. The budget was approved and Morris proceeded with the seminar.
a. Recast the budget in a segment margin income statement format.
b. The seminar’s actual financial results were as follows:
|
Revenues (120 participants)
|
|
$102,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
Speakers ($2,950 each)
|
$17,700
|
|
|
Rent on facilities
|
4,200
|
|
|
Advertising
|
4,900
|
|
|
Meals and lodging
|
41,391
|
|
|
Departmental overhead allocation
|
26,760
|
(94,951)
|
|
Profit
|
|
$ 7,049
|
Because signups were below expectations, the seminar fee was reduced from $900 to $850 and advertising expense was increased. In budgeting for the speakers, Morris neglected to include airfare, which averaged $450 per speaker. With the increased attendance, a larger meeting room had to be rented from the local hotel. Actual lodging costs were as budgeted, but meals were 15 percent more expensive because of the gratuity. Recast the actual results in a segment margin income format.
c. Identify and discuss the factors that are primarily responsible for the difference between the budgeted and the actual profit on the ethics seminar.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing operating activities cash flow—direct method The accounting records of Fuzzy Dice Auto Parts reveal the following:
|
Payment of salaries and wages
|
$ 31,000
|
Net income
|
$ 21,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
13,000
|
Payment of income tax
|
11,000
|
|
Payment of interest
|
16,000
|
Collection of dividend revenue
|
6,000
|
|
Payment of dividends
|
6,000
|
Payment to suppliers
|
54,000
|
|
Collections from customers
|
117,000
|
|
|
Requirement
1. Compute cash flows from operating activities using the direct method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying activity categories of transactions—direct method Selected accounts of Printing Networks, Inc., show the following:
|
Accounts receivable
|
|
Beginning balance Service revenue
|
9,100 40,000
|
Cash collections
|
38,000
|
|
Ending balance
|
11,100
|
|
|
|
Land
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning balance
|
87,000
|
|
|
|
Acquisition
|
14,000
|
|
|
|
Ending balance
|
101,000
|
|
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
|
|
|
Payments
|
73,000
|
Beginning balance
|
274,000
|
|
|
|
Issuance for cash
|
84,000
|
|
|
|
Ending balance
|
285,000
|
Requirement
1. For each account, identify the item or items that should appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by the direct method. Also state each item’s amount and where to report the item.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—direct method The income statement and additional data of Best Corporation follow:
|
BEST CORPORATION
Income Statement
Year Ended June 30, 2012
|
|
Revenues:
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$ 231,000
|
|
|
Dividend revenue
|
8,000
|
$ 239,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$ 102,000
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
48,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
28,000
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
13,000
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
11,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,000
|
205,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 34,000
|
Additional data follow:
- Collections from customers are $15,500 more than sales.
- Dividend revenue, interest expense, and income tax expense equal their cash amounts.
- Payments to suppliers are the sum of cost of goods sold plus advertising expense.
- Payments to employees are $1,000 more than salary expense.
- Acquisition of plant assets is $102,000.
- Cash receipts from sale of land total $24,000.
- Cash receipts from issuance of common stock total $32,000.
- Payment of long term note payable is $17,000.
- Payment of dividends is $10,500.
- Cash balance, June 30, 2011, was $25,000; June 30, 2012 was $28,000.
Requirement
1. Prepare Best Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2012. Use the direct method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing cash flow items—direct method Superb Mobile Homes reported the following in its financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012:
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
|
Net sales
|
$25,118
|
$21,115
|
|
Cost of sales
|
18,088
|
15,432
|
|
Depreciation
|
273
|
232
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
4,411
|
4,283
|
|
Income tax expense
|
536
|
481
|
|
Net income
|
$1,810
|
$687
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$15
|
$13
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
799
|
619
|
|
Inventories
|
3,489
|
2,839
|
|
Property and equipment, net
|
4,346
|
3,436
|
|
Accounts payable
|
1,544
|
1,364
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
941
|
853
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
479
|
468
|
|
Common stock
|
671
|
443
|
|
Retained earnings
|
5,014
|
3,779
|
Requirement
1. Determine the following for Superb Mobile Homes during 2012:
- Collections from customers.
- Payments for inventory.
- Payments of operating expenses.
- Acquisitions of property and equipment (no sales of property during 2012).
- Borrowing, with Superb paying no long term liabilities.
- Cash receipt from issuance of common stock.
Payment of cash dividends.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—direct method MPG, Inc., accountants have developed the following data from the company’s accounting records for the year ended April 30, 2012:
- Purchase of plant assets, $59,400.
- Cash receipt from issuance of notes payable, $46,100.
- Payments of notes payable, $44,000.
- Cash receipt from sale of plant assets, $24,500.
- Cash receipt of dividends, $4,800.
- Payments to suppliers, $374,300.
- Interest expense and payments, $12,000.
- Payments of salaries, $88,000.
- Income tax expense and payments, $37,000.
- Depreciation expense, $59,900.
- Collections from customers, $605,500.
- Payment of cash dividends, $49,400.
- Cash receipt from issuance of common stock, $64,900.
- Cash balance: April 30, 2011, $40,000; April 30, 2012, $121,700.
Requirement
1. Prepare MPG’s statement of cash flows for the year ended April 30, 2012. Use the direct method for cash flows from operating activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—direct method To prepare the statement of cash flows, accountants for E Mobile, Inc., have summarized 2012 activity in the Cash account as follows:
|
cash
|
|
Beginning balance
|
87,200
|
Payments of operating expenses
|
46,800
|
|
Issuance of common stock
|
60,200
|
Payments of salaries and wages
|
64,500
|
|
Receipts of interest revenue
|
16,100
|
Payment of note payable
|
79,000
|
|
Collections from customers
|
308,400
|
Payment of income tax
|
7,500
|
|
|
|
Payments on accounts payable
|
101,600
|
|
|
|
Payments of dividends
|
1,400
|
|
|
|
Payments of interest
|
21,700
|
|
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
49,500
|
|
Ending balance
|
99,900
|
|
|
Requirement
1. Prepare E Mobile’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the direct method to report operating activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—direct method KSG, Inc., accountants have developed the following data from the company’s accounting records for the year ended June 30, 2012:
- Purchase of plant assets, $57,400.
- Cash receipt from issuance of notes payable, $48,100.
- Payments of notes payable, $45,000.
- Cash receipt from sale of plant assets, $23,500.
- Cash receipt of dividends, $4,300.
- Payments to suppliers, $371,300.
- Interest expense and payments, $13,500.
- Payments of salaries, $92,000.
- Income tax expense and payments, $38,000.
- Depreciation expense, $56,000.
- Collections from customers, $607,000.
- Payment of cash dividends, $45,400.
- Cash receipt from issuance of common stock, $65,900.
- Cash balance: June 30, 2011, $39,300; June 30, 2012, $125,500.
Requirement
1. Prepare KSG’s statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2012. Use the direct method for cash flows from operating activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method The 2012 comparative balance sheet and income statement of Appleton Group, Inc., follow. Appleton had no noncash investing and financing transactions during 2012.
|
APPLETON GROUP, INC. Comparative Balance Sheet December 31, 2012 and 2011
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 9,300
|
$ 15,300
|
$ (6,000)
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
42,000
|
43,200
|
(1,200)
|
|
Inventories
|
97,100
|
93,700
|
3,400
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
41,100
|
16,000
|
25,100
|
|
Equipment, net
|
101,200
|
94,300
|
6,900
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 290,700
|
$ 262,500
|
$ 28,200
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 25,600
|
$ 26,600
|
$ (1,000)
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
24,000
|
22,800
|
1,200
|
|
Long term liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
46,000
|
62,000
|
(16,000)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
140,300
|
131,400
|
8,900
|
|
Retained earnings
|
54,800
|
19,700
|
35,100
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ 290,700
|
$ 262,500
|
28,200
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
APPLETON GROUP, INC.
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Revenues:
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$ 439,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
|
11,800
|
|
|
|
|
Total revenues
|
|
$ 450,800
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$ 205,500
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
76,500
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
15,500
|
|
|
Other operating expense
|
49,500
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
24,300
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
16,300
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
387,600
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 63,200
|
Requirement
1. Prepare the spreadsheet for the 2012 statement of cash flows. Format cash flows from operating activities by the indirect method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method The 2012 comparative balance sheet and income statement of Attleboro Group, Inc. follow. Attleboro had no noncash investing and financing transactions during 2012.
|
ATTLEBORO GROUP, INC.
|
|
Comparative Balance Sheet
|
|
December 31, 2012 and 2011
|
|
|
|
|
Increase
|
|
|
2012
|
2011
|
(Decrease)
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 11,800
|
$15,200
|
$ (3,400)
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
42,200
|
43,900
|
(1,700)
|
|
Inventories
|
96,800
|
93,500
|
3,300
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
39,800
|
14,000
|
25,800
|
|
Equipment, net
|
101,100
|
93,800
|
7,300
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 291,700
|
$ 260,400
|
$31,300
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 25,100
|
$26,300
|
$ (1,200)
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
24,200
|
22,500
|
1,700
|
|
Long term liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
51,000
|
64,000
|
(13,000)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
136,600
|
128,300
|
8,300
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
19,300
|
35,500
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ 291,700
|
$ 260,400
|
$ 31,300
|
|
ATTLEBORO GROUP, INC.
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Revenues:
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$ 441,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
|
11,300
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total revenues
|
|
$ 452,300
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$ 205,300
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
76,500
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
15,100
|
|
|
Other operating expense
|
49,600
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
24,700
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
16,700
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
387,900
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 64,400
|
Requirement
1. Prepare the spreadsheet for the 2012 statement of cash flows. Format cash flows from operating activities by the indirect method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost management and strategy) As a financial analyst, you have just been handed the 2010 financial report of Firm A, a large, global pharmaceutical company. Firm A competes in both traditional pharmaceutical products and in evolving biotechnology products. The following data (in billions) on Firm A and the pharmaceutical industry are available:
|
|
Firm A
|
Industry Average
|
|
Sales
|
$2.00
|
$0.960
|
|
Net income
|
0.54
|
0.096
|
|
Advertising
|
0.04
|
0.160
|
|
Research and development
|
0.16
|
0.240
|
|
New investment in facilities
|
0.20
|
0.240
|
Given these data, evaluate the cost management performance of Firm A.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost management and organizational culture; research; writing) Use Internet resources to gather information on any two firms in the same industry. The following examples are possible pairs to compare.
- Continental Airlines and Southwest Airlines
- ChevronTexaco and Shell
- Nordstrom’s and Wal Mart
- Oracle and Microsoft
- Hewlett Packard and Dell Computer
In your discussion, address the following questions:
a. Compare and contrast the organizational cultures of the firms.
b. Compare and contrast the operating performance of the firms.
c. Which of each pair is the better operating performer? Discuss the criteria used to make this determination.
d. Do you believe that organizational culture has any relationship to the differences in operations? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Elements of management control system; ethics; writing) In recent years, many firms have been forced to restate the earnings that they previously reported in their public financial reports. A number of these restatements have been linked to attempts by top management to manipulate the reported accounting information for the purpose of achieving higher compensation. For example, some firms accelerated the recognition of revenue (in a manner not consistent with GAAP) so that the profit on those sales could be reported in an earlier, rather than a more appropriate later, period. These reporting anomalies often required manual intervention in the normal reporting policies of the firms.
a. Discuss which elements in the management control system might cause the manipulative behavior described.
b. Is the described behavior ethical? Discuss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Elements of management control system; ethics; research; writing) The use of stock options to compensate executives has become much more common in recent years. The increased use of options to compensate executives is based on efforts of boards of directors to align the interests of managers and stockholders. Prior to the implementation of FAS 123R, firms would often report the stock options expense only in a footnote—the expense did not flow through the income statement.
a. Discuss why managers would desire to report the expense of stock options in the foot notes of the financial statements rather than in the body of the income statement.
b. Discuss whether the practice of reporting stock option expense only in the foot notes was unethical or misleading.
c. Research the topic “backdating stock options.” Discuss the motivation for backdating options and whether this is an ethical practice.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Management control systems) In many organizations, the operating budget is the primary control tool. The use of a budget to control activities is more appropriate in some circumstances than in others, and always a key criterion in evaluating the efficacy of a control is whether that control is helping to implement the firm’s strategy. Consider the following activities and circumstances, and discuss whether use of a bud get as a primary control is appropriate:
a. research and development department of a mature manufacturing firm
b. marketing expense of a start up technology company
c. travel expense for the sales force of an insurance company
d. energy costs for a public utility company
e. costs of environmental remediation for a chemical manufacturer
f. production costs in a car manufacturing company
g. operational costs of classroom buildings in a public university
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Information and cost management) The price of a product or service is a function of the total costs of producing that product or service. In turn, the total cost of producing a product or service is the aggregate of costs incurred throughout the supply chain.
Higher education is one industry that has been characterized by rapidly rising costs and rapidly rising prices. Study the supply chain of your college or university and prepare a table identifying specific ways in which an improved system of communications with suppliers and customers could result in specific cost savings for the institution, its suppliers, or its customers (students). Organize your table in three columns as follows:
Specific Information to Be Obtained Information Source Specific Cost to Be Reduced
|
Specific Information to
|
Information
|
Specific Cost to Be
|
|
Be Obtained
|
Source
|
Reduced
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost management and strategy; writing) You are the product manager at a silicone chip manufacturer. One of your products is a commodity chip that the electronics industry widely uses in cell phones, printers, digital cameras, and computers. As product manager, you have full profit responsibility for the commodity chip.
The commodity chip is a “cash cow” for your company and enjoys an enviable market share in the industry. Because your company’s chip has approximately the same features and functionality as chips available from competitors, market competition for this product is primarily based on price.
Because of your success in managing the commodity chip, you were recently promoted to product manager of ZX chip, the most innovative chip your company has ever developed because of its data processing speed, miniature size, and incredible functionality. The ZX chip has just completed final testing and will be ready to be presented to the market in two weeks.
You were successful in managing the commodity chip because you kept unit production cost low by achieving high volume and efficient production. Identify and dis cuss the key variables you will try to manage to make the ZX chip as successful as the commodity chip. Discuss whether your efforts to manage costs will be similar to or different from your efforts to manage costs of the commodity chip.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Alternative cost management strategies; writing) In 1993, Procter & Gamble (P&G) management tried to control costs by eliminating many of its brands’ coupons while increasing print advertising. Only a miniscule portion of the hundreds of billions of coupons distributed annually by P&G were ever redeemed by customers. Eliminating coupons allowed P&G to reduce its prices on most brands. After testing a market in the northeastern United States, P&G found that it lost 16 percent of its market share because competitors did not follow P&G in this move. Instead, competitors countered P&G’s decrease in price promotions by increasing their price promotions. Although price promotions had been unprofitable, discontinuing them while competitors did not was even more unprofitable for the company. P&G probably anticipated losing some market share in exchange for more profitability and equity for its brands but not to the degree that occurred. Advertising was expected to reverse the damage to penetration.
a. What costs and benefits did P&G likely consider in its discontinuance of coupons?
b. What was P&G’s apparent strategy in deciding to lower prices? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost management and customer service; writing) Companies some times experience difficult financial times —often so drastic that bankruptcy is declared. If a firm does not invest sufficient resources in its growth, then at some point it will experience diminishing revenues as its product revenues decline. Alternatively, if a firm invests too heavily in growth, costs can spiral out of control. Commonly, companies striving to maintain profitability vacillate between a focus on cost management or cost reduction and a focus on revenue growth. Often cost reduction is achieved by tactics such as across the board cost cutting. Seldom do companies maintain a balance of focus on cost management and revenue generation; however, one company, Alcoa, has taken a more strategic approach to both revenue growth and cost management. Even while in the middle of an effort to reduce costs by $1 billion per year, the company was focused on generating significant revenue growth. To achieve growth, the company breaks down its current revenue streams into five categories, including sales from existing customers and sales won from competitors’ customers. By segmenting its revenue streams, the company can better evaluate the profitability of obtaining additional sales from different streams and focus on cost management and revenue growth simultaneously. The underlying idea is that growth in costs should occur only where there is a significant opportunity to increase profitability. Further, the company believes that cost management and revenue generation must be managed jointly so that managers understand how cost cutting affects customer value and revenue growth.
a. When are across the board spending cuts a rational approach to cost management?
b. How can a cost management system help avoid adverse effects from cost cutting?
c. Why is it necessary for managers to focus attention on both generating new revenue and managing costs to be successful?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost management and profitability) Ohio Steel produces steel products for a variety of customers. One division of the company is the Garage Door Division, created in the late 1940s. Since that time, this division’s principal products have been galvanized steel components used in garage door installations. The division has been continuously profitable since 1950, and, in 2010, it generated $20 million of profits on $500 million of sales.
However, over the past 10 years, divisional growth has been slow; profitability has become stagnant, and few new products have been developed, although the garage door components market has matured. Company president Kendra Lawson has asked her senior staff to evaluate operations of the Garage Door Division and to recommend changes that would improve its operations. The staff uncovered the following facts:
- Tonya Calley, age 53, has been division president for the past 15 years. Her compensation package includes an annual salary of $375, 000 plus a cash bonus based on achievement of the budgeted level of annual profit.
- Growth in sales in the residential metal products industry has averaged 12 percent annually over the past decade. Most of the growth has occurred in ornamental products used in residential privacy fencing.
- Nationally, the division’s market share in the overall residential metal products industry has dropped from 12 percent to 7 percent during the past 10 years and has dropped from 40 percent to 25 percent for garage door components.
- The division maintains its own information systems, which are essentially the same systems that were in place 15 years ago; however, some of the manual systems have been computerized (e.g., payroll, accounts payable, accounting).
- The division has no customer service department. A small sales staff solicits and takes orders by phone from national distribution chains.
- The major intra division communication tool is the annual operating budget. No formal statements have been prepared in the division regarding strategies, mission, values, goals and objectives, or identifying core competencies.
Given this information, identify the major problems in the Garage Door Division and develop recommendations to address the problems you have identified.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost management and profitability) After graduating last year from an Ivy League university, Joe Tyler was hired as a stock analyst. Wanting to make his mark on the industry, Tyler issued a scathing report on a major discount department store retailer, Smart Mart. The basis of his attack was a comparative analysis between Smart Mart and Tracy’s Department Store, an upscale, full service department store. Some of the information cited in Tyler’s report follows.
|
Items as Percent of Sales
|
Smart Mart
|
Tracy’s
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
65%
|
55%
|
|
Gross margin
|
35
|
45
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
27
|
33
|
|
Profit
|
8
|
12
|
Based on the comparative analysis, Tyler issued to his clients a “sell” recommendation for Smart Mart and a “buy” recommendation for Tracy’s. The gist of Tyler’s rationale for the recommendations was that Tracy’s Department Store was outperforming Smart Mart in the crucial area of cost management as evidenced by both a higher profit as a percent of sales and a higher gross margin as a percent of sales.
a. Evaluate Tyler’s recommendations given the limited evidence available.
b. Because the two firms contrasted by Tyler have different strategies, what performance criteria would you use to evaluate their competitiveness in the industry?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying transactions on the statement of cash flows—indirect method Consider the following transactions:
|
a. Cash
|
72,000
|
|
g. Land
|
22,000
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
72,000
|
Cash
|
|
22,000
|
|
b. Treasury stock
|
16,500
|
|
h. Cash
|
9,600
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
16,500
|
Equipment
|
|
9,600
|
|
c. Cash
|
88,000
|
|
i. Bonds payable
|
51,000
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
88,000
|
Cash
|
|
51,000
|
|
d. Land
|
103,000
|
|
j. Building
|
137,000
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
103,000
|
Note payable, long term
|
|
137,000
|
|
e. Depreciation expense
|
6,800
|
|
k. Loss on disposal of equipment
|
1,800
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
|
6,800
|
Equipment, net
|
|
1,800
|
|
f. Dividends payable
|
19,500
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
19,500
|
|
|
|
Requirement
1. Indicate whether each transaction would result in an operating activity, an investing activity, or a financing activity for an indirect method statement of cash flows and the accompanying schedule of noncash investing and financing activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing operating acitivites cash flow—indirect method The records of McKnight Color Engraving reveal the following:
|
Net income
|
$ 38,000
|
Depreciation
|
$ 4,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
51,000
|
Decrease in current liabilities
|
28,000
|
|
Loss on sale of land
|
5,000
|
Increase in current assets
|
|
|
Acquisition of land
|
39,000
|
other than cash
|
14,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute cash flows from operating activities by the indirect method.
2. Evaluate the operating cash flow of McKnight Color Engraving. Give the reason for your evaluation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing operating activities cash flow—indirect method The accounting records of DVD Sales, Inc., include the following accounts:
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
Inventory
|
|
|
|
Jul 1
|
5500
|
Jul 1
|
21,000
|
Jul 1
|
22,000
|
|
|
| |
????
|
|
????
|
|
????
|
|
|
|
Jul 31
|
3000
|
Jul 31
|
17,000
|
Jul 31
|
25,500
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
Accumulated depr.—equipment
|
Retained earnings
|
|
Jul 1
|
14,500
|
Jul 1
|
55,000
|
|
|
Jul 1
|
65,000
|
| |
????
|
Depr
|
3,000
|
Dividend
|
19,000
|
Net Inc
|
65,000
|
|
Jul 31
|
19,500
|
Jul 31
|
58,000
|
|
|
Jul 31
|
111,000
|
Requirement
1. Compute DVD’s net cash provided by (used for) operating activities during July. Use the indirect method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method The income statement of Minerals Plus, Inc., follows:
|
MINERALS PLUS, INC.
Income Statement
Year Ended September 30, 2012
|
|
Revenues:
|
|
|
|
Service revenue
|
|
$ 235,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$ 97,000
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
57,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
26,000
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
4,000
|
184,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 51,000
|
Additional data follow:
a. Acquisition of plant assets is $118,000. Of this amount, $100,000 is paid in cash and $18,000 by signing a note payable.
b. Cash receipt from sale of land totals $28,000. There was no gain or loss.
c. Cash receipts from issuance of common stock total $29,000.
d. Payment of note payable is $18,000.
e. Payment of dividends is $8,000.
f. From the balance sheet:
| |
September 30,
|
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current Assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 30,000
|
$ 8,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
41,000
|
59,000
|
|
Inventory
|
97,000
|
93,000
|
|
Current Liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 30,000
|
$ 17,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
11,000
|
24,000
|
| |
|
|
|
Requirement
1. Prepare Minerals Plus’s statement of cash flows for the year ended September 30, 2012, using the indirect method. Include a separate section for noncash investing and financing activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing the cash effect of acquiring assets McKnight Exercise Equipment, Inc., reported the following financial statements for 2012:
|
MCKNIGHT EXERCISE EQUIPMENT, INC.
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$ 714,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$ 347,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
52,000
|
|
|
Other expenses
|
205,000
|
604,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 110,000
|
|
MCKNIGHT EXERCISE EQUIPMENT, INC. Comparative Balance Sheet December 31, 2012 and 2011
|
|
Assets
|
2012
|
2011
|
Liabilities
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current:
|
|
|
Current:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 19,000
|
$ 18,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 73,000
|
$ 72,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
54,000
|
49,000
|
Salary payable
|
2,000
|
5,000
|
|
Inventory
|
81,000
|
89,000
|
Long term notes payable
|
59,000
|
66,000
|
|
Long term investments
|
95,000
|
77,000
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Plant assets, net
|
221,000
|
183,000
|
Common stock
|
47,000
|
34,000
|
| |
|
|
Retained earnings
|
289,000
|
239,000
|
| |
|
|
Total liabilities and
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$470,000
|
$416,000
|
stockholders’ equity
|
$470,000
|
$416,000
|
Requirement
1. Compute the amount of McKnight Exercise’s acquisition of plant assets. McKnight Exercise sold no plant assets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying and reporting noncash transactions Dirtbikes, Inc., identified the following selected transactions that occurred during 2012:
|
a.
|
Issued 1,250 shares of $2 par common stock for cash of $26,000.
|
|
b.
|
Issued 5,500 shares of $2 par common stock for a building valued at $101,000.
|
|
c.
|
Purchased new company truck with FMV of $28,000. Financed it 100% with a long term note.
|
|
d.
|
Paid short term notes of $23,000 by issuing 2,400 shares of $2 par common stock.
|
|
e.
|
Paid long term note of $10,500 to Bank of Tallahassee. Issued new long term note of $21,000 to Bank of Trust.
|
Requirement
1. Identify any noncash transactions that occurred during the year and show how they would be reported in the noncash section of the cash flow statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Purpose of the statement and preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method Classic Reserve Rare Coins (CRRC) was formed on January 1, 2012. Additional data for the year follows:
a. On January 1, 2012, CRRC issued common stock for $425,000.
b. Early in January, CRRC made the following cash payments:
1. For store fixtures, $54,000.
2. For inventory, $270,000.
3. For rent expense on a store building, $10,000.
c. Later in the year, CRRC purchased inventory on account for $243,000. Before year end, CRRC paid $163,000 of this account payable.
d. During 2012, CRRC sold 2,100 units of inventory for $350 each. Before year end, the company collected 80% of this amount. Cost of goods sold for the year was $260,000, and ending inventory totaled $253,000.
e. The store employs three people. The combined annual payroll is $94,000,
of which CRRC still owes $4,000 at year end.
f. At the end of the year, CRRC paid income tax of $23,000.
g. Late in 2012, CRRC paid cash dividends of $41,000.
h. For equipment, CRRC uses the straight line depreciation method, over five years, with zero residual value.
Requirements
1. What is the purpose of the cash flow statement?
2. Prepare CRRC’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Use the single step format, with all revenues listed together and all expenses listed together.
3. Prepare CRRC’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
4. Prepare CRRC’s statement of cash flows using the indirect method for the year ended December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method Accountants for Johnson, Inc., have assembled the following data for the year ended December 31, 2012:
| |
December 31,
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current Accounts:
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 92,100
|
$ 17,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
64,500
|
69,200
|
|
Inventories
|
87,000
|
80,000
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
57,900
|
56,200
|
|
Income tax payable
|
14,400
|
17,100
|
|
Transaction Data for 2012:
|
|
|
|
|
Issuance of common stock
|
|
Payment of note payable
|
$48,100
|
|
for cash
|
$ 40,000
|
Payment of cash dividends
|
54,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
25,000
|
Issuance of note payable
|
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
75,000
|
to borrow cash
|
67,000
|
|
Acquisition of land by issuing
|
|
Gain on sale of building
|
5,500
|
|
long term note payable
|
122,000
|
Net income
|
70,500
|
|
Cost basis of building sold
|
53,000
|
|
|
Requirement
1. Prepare Johnson’s statement of cash flows using the indirect method. Include an accompanying schedule of noncash investing and financing activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method, evaluating cash flows, and measuring free cash flows The comparative balance sheet of Jackson Educational Supply at December 31, 2012, reported the following:
| |
December 31,
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 88,200
|
$ 22,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
14,400
|
21,700
|
|
Inventories
|
63,600
|
60,400
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
28,600
|
27,100
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
10,600
|
11,200
|
Jackson’s transactions during 2012 included the following:
|
Payment of cash dividend
|
$17,200
|
Depreciation expense
|
$16,700
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
54,400
|
Purchase of building
|
100,000
|
|
Issuance of long term note payable
|
|
Net income
|
59,600
|
|
to borrow cash
|
50,000
|
Issuance of common stock for cash
|
106,000
|
Requirements
1. Prepare the statement of cash flows of Jackson Educational Supply for the year ended December 31, 2012. Use the indirect method to report cash flows from operating activities.
2. Evaluate Jackson’s cash flows for the year. Mention all three categories of cash flows and give the reason for your evaluation.
3. If Jackson plans similar activity for 2013, what is its expected free cash flow?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method with noncash transactions The 2012 comparative balance sheet and income statement of Rolling Hills, Inc., follow:
|
ROLLING HILLS, INC. Comparative Balance Sheet December 31, 2012 and 2011
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 26,400
|
$ 15,900
|
$ 10,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
26,700
|
25,500
|
1,200
|
|
Inventories
|
79,800
|
91,700
|
(11,900)
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
34,600
|
11,000
|
23,600
|
|
Equipment, net
|
103,900
|
89,700
|
14,200
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 271,400
|
$ 233,800
|
$ 37,600
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 35,500
|
$ 30,600
|
$ 4,900
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
28,600
|
30,700
|
(2,100)
|
|
Long term liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
78,000
|
101,000
|
(23,000)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
88,800
|
64,900
|
23,900
|
|
Retained earnings
|
40,500
|
6,600
|
33,900
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ 271,400
|
$ 233,800
|
$ 37,600
|
|
ROLLING HILLS, INC.
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Revenues:
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$ 436,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
|
8,000
|
|
Total revenues
|
|
444,000
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$ 202,200
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
78,400
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
14,400
|
|
|
Other operating expense
|
10,200
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
21,900
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
19,100
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
346,200
|
|
Net income
|
|
$97,800
|
Additionally, Rolling Hills purchased land of $23,600 by financing it 100% with long term notes payable during 2012. During the year, there were no sales of land or equipment, no additional issuances of notes payable, no retirements of stock, and no treasury stock transactions.
Requirements
1. Prepare the 2012 statement of cash flows, formatting operating activities by the indirect method.
2. How will what you learned in this problem help you evaluate an investment?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Purpose of the statement and preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method National Reserve Rare Coins (NRRC) was formed on January 1, 2012. Additional data for the year follows:
a. On January 1, 2012, NRRC issued common stock for $525,000.
b. Early in January, NRRC made the following cash payments:
1. For store fixtures, $55,000.
2. For inventory, $320,000.
3. For rent expense on a store building, $17,000.
c. Later in the year, NRRC purchased inventory on account for $244,000.
Before year end, NRRC paid $164,000 of this account payable.
d. During 2012, NRRC sold 2,500 units of inventory for $400 each. Before year end, the company collected 85% of this amount. Cost of goods sold for the year was $320,000, and ending inventory totaled $244,000.
e. The store employs three people. The combined annual payroll is $80,000, of which NRRC still owes $3,000 at year end.
f. At the end of the year, NRRC paid income tax of $20,000.
g. Late in 2012, NRRC paid cash dividends of $39,000.
h. For equipment, NRRC uses the straight line depreciation method, over five years, with zero residual value.
Requirements
1. What is the purpose of the cash flow statement?
2. Prepare NRRC’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Use the single step format, with all revenues listed together and all expenses listed together.
3. Prepare NRRC’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
4. Prepare NRRC’s statement of cash flows using the indirect method for the year ended December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method Accountants for Smithson, Inc., have assembled the following data for the year ended December 31, 2012:
|
|
December 31,
|
|
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current Accounts:
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 106,100
|
$ 26,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
64,300
|
68,900
|
|
Inventories
|
80,000
|
75,000
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
57,700
|
56,100
|
|
Income tax payable
|
14,500
|
17,000
|
|
Transaction Data for 2012:
|
|
|
|
|
Issuance of common stock
|
|
Payment of note payable
|
$46,100
|
|
for cash
|
$ 45,000
|
Payment of cash dividends
|
52,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
18,000
|
Issuance of note payable
|
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
70,000
|
to borrow cash
|
68,000
|
|
Acquisition of land by issuing
|
|
Gain on sale of building
|
3,500
|
|
long term note payable
|
113,000
|
Net income
|
68,500
|
|
|
|
Cost basis of building sold
|
$50,000
|
Requirement
1. Prepare Smithson’s statement of cash flows using the indirect method. Include an accompanying schedule of noncash investing and financing activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method, evaluating cash flows, and measuring free cash flows The comparative balance sheet of Morgensen Educational Supply at December 31, 2012, reported the following:
| |
December 31,
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 89,600
|
$ 24,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
14,500
|
21,900
|
|
Inventories
|
62,800
|
60,000
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
30,100
|
27,600
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
11,100
|
11,600
|
Morgensen’s transactions during 2012 included the following:
|
Payment of cash dividend
|
$14,200
|
Depreciation expense
|
$17,300
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
55,200
|
Purchase of building
|
103,000
|
|
Issuance of long term note payable
|
|
Net income
|
57,600
|
|
to borrow cash
|
45,000
|
Issuance of common stock for cash
|
111,000
|
Requirements
1. Prepare the statement of cash flows of Morgensen Educational Supply for the year ended December 31, 2012. Use the indirect method to report cash flows from operating activities.
2. Evaluate Morgensen’s cash flows for the year. Mention all three categories of cash flows and give the reason for your evaluation.
3. If Morgensen plans similar activity for 2013, what is its expected free cash flow?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method with noncash transactions The 2012 comparative balance sheet and income statement of All Wired, Inc., follow:
|
ALL WIRED, INC. Comparative Balance Sheet December 31, 2012 and 2011
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 26,700
|
$ 15,600
|
$ 11,100
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
26,500
|
25,300
|
1,200
|
|
Inventories
|
79,900
|
91,900
|
(12,000)
|
|
Plant assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Land
|
35,500
|
11,000
|
24,500
|
|
Equipment, net
|
102,900
|
90,700
|
12,200
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 271,500
|
$ 234,500
|
$ 37,000
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 35,600
|
$ 30,500
|
$ 5,100
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
28,900
|
30,600
|
(1,700)
|
|
Long term liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Notes payable
|
77,000
|
103,000
|
(26,000)
|
|
Stockholders’ equity:
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
88,200
|
64,300
|
23,900
|
|
Retained earnings
|
41,800
|
6,100
|
35,700
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ 271,500
|
$ 234,500
|
$ 37,000
|
|
ALL WIRED, INC.
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Revenues:
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$ 438,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
|
8,500
|
|
Total revenues
|
|
446,500
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$ 209,200
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
72,400
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
14,500
|
|
|
Other operating expense
|
10,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
21,500
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
19,400
|
|
|
Total expenses
|
|
347,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$99,500
|
Additionally, All Wired purchased land of $24,500 by financing it 100% with longterm notes payable during 2012. During the year, there were no sales of land or equipment, no additional issuances of notes payable, no retirements of stock, and no treasury stock transactions.
Requirements
1. Prepare the 2012 statement of cash flows, formatting operating activities by the indirect method.
2. How will what you learned in this problem help you evaluate an investment?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the statement of cash flows—indirect method This exercise continues the Lawlor Lawn Service, Inc., Refer to the comparative balance sheet for Lawlor Lawn Service.
|
DRAPER CONSULTING, INC. Comparative Balance Sheet December 31, 2013 and 2012
|
|
Assets
|
2013
|
2012
|
|
Cash
|
$ 514,936
|
$ 16,350
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
37,500
|
1,750
|
|
Supplies
|
2,200
|
200
|
|
Equipment
|
16,000
|
1,800
|
|
Furniture
|
5,700
|
4,200
|
|
Building
|
125,000
|
0
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(2,753)
|
(100)
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 698,583
|
$ 24,200
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 10,000
|
$ 4,650
|
|
Salary payable
|
4,100
|
685
|
|
Unearned service revenue
|
0
|
700
|
|
Interest payable
|
10,667
|
0
|
|
Notes payable
|
40,000
|
0
|
|
Bonds payable
|
400,000
|
0
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
(36,184)
|
0
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
130,000
|
18,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
140,000
|
165
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ 698,583
|
$ 24,200
|
Requirement
1. Prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Theater by Design and Showcase Cinemas are asking you to recommend their stock to your clients. Because Theater by Design and Showcase earn about the same net income and have similar financial positions, your decision depends on their cash flow statements, summarized as follows:
|
|
Theater by Design
|
Showcase Cinemas
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
|
$ 30,000
|
|
$ 70,000
|
|
Cash provided by (used for) investing activities:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Purchase of plant assets
|
$(20,000)
|
|
$(100,000)
|
|
|
Sale of plant assets
|
40,000
|
20,000
|
10,000
|
(90,000)
|
|
Cash provided by (used for) financing activities:
|
|
|
|
|
Issuance of common stock
|
|
—
|
|
30,000
|
|
Paying off long term debt Net increase in cash
|
|
(40,000)
|
|
—
|
|
$ 10,000
|
$ 10,000
|
Requirement
1. Based on their cash flows, which company looks better? Give your reasons.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Moss Exports is having a bad year. Net income is only $60,000. Also, two important overseas customers are falling behind in their payments to Moss, and Moss’s accounts receivable are ballooning. The company desperately needs a loan. The Moss Exports board of directors is considering ways to put the best face on the company’s financial statements. Moss’s bank closely examines cash flow from operations. Daniel Peavey, Moss’s controller, suggests reclassifying the receivables from the slow paying clients as long term. He explains to the board that removing the $80,000 rise in accounts receivable from current assets will increase net cash provided by operations. This approach may help Moss get the loan.
Requirements
1. Using only the amounts given, compute net cash provided by operations, both without and with the reclassification of the receivables. Which reporting makes Moss look better?
2. Under what condition would the reclassification of the receivables be ethical? Unethical?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing operating activities using the direct method Happy Tot’s Learning Center has assembled the following data for the year ended June 30, 2012:
|
Payments to suppliers
|
$ 117,000
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
42,000
|
|
Payments to employees
|
72,000
|
|
Payment of note payable
|
25,000
|
|
Payment of dividends
|
7,000
|
|
Cash receipt from issuance of stock
|
18,000
|
|
Collections from customers
|
190,000
|
|
Cash receipt from sale of land
|
60,000
|
Requirement
1. Prepare the operating activities section of the business’s statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2012, using the direct method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing the direct method statement of cash flows Rouse Toy Company reported the following comparative balance sheet:
|
ROUSE TOY COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2012 and 2011
|
|
Assets
|
2012
|
2011
|
Liabilities
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current:
|
|
Current:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 17,000
|
$ 11,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 43,000
|
$ 38,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
59,000
|
49,000
|
Salary payable
|
24,500
|
19,000
|
|
Inventory
|
78,000
|
84,000
|
Accrued liabilities
|
5,000
|
13,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
3,100
|
2,100
|
Long term notes payable
|
60,000
|
70,000
|
|
Long term investments
|
75,000
|
85,000
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Plant assets, net
|
227,000
|
189,000
|
Common stock
|
42,000
|
39,000
|
|
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
284,600
|
241,100
|
|
Total assets
|
$459,100
|
$420,100
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$459,100
|
$420,100
|
Requirement
1. Compute the following for Rouse Toy Company:
a. Collections from customers during 2012. Sales totaled $143,000.
b. Payments for inventory during 2012. Cost of goods sold was $80,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying activity categories—direct method Consider the following transactions:
|
a. Collection of accounts receivable.
|
i. Purchase of treasury stock.
|
|
b. Issuance of note payable to borrow cash.
|
j. Issuance of common stock for cash.
|
|
c. Depreciation.
|
k. Payment of account payable.
|
|
d. Issuance of preferred stock for cash.
|
l. Acquisition of building by
|
| |
issuance of common stock.
|
|
e. Payment of cash dividend.
|
m. Purchase of equipment.
|
|
f. Sale of land.
|
n. Payment of wages to employees.
|
|
g. Acquisition of equipment
|
|
|
by issuance of note payable.
|
o. Collection of cash interest.
|
|
h. Payment of note payable.
|
p. Sale of building
|
Requirement
1. Identify each of the transactions as a(n)
Operating activity (O)
Investing activity (I)
Financing activity (F)
Noncash investing and financing activity (NIF)
Transaction that is not reported on the statement of cash flows (N)
For each cash flow, indicate whether the item increases (+) or decreases (–) cash. The direct method is used for cash flows from operating activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a detailed income statement The following information was taken from the records of Clarkson Motorsports, Inc., at November 30, 2012:
|
Selling expenses
|
$ 125,000
|
Common stock, $10 par, 21,000
|
|
|
General expenses
|
134,000
|
shares authorized and issued
|
$ 210,000
|
|
Income from discontinued operations
|
5,000
|
Preferred stock, $4, no par
|
|
|
Retained earnings, beginning
|
90,000
|
6,000 shares issued
|
240,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
430,000
|
Income tax expense:
|
|
|
Treasury stock, common
|
|
Continuing operations
|
70,000
|
|
(1,000 shares)
|
11,000
|
Income from discontinued
|
|
|
Net sales revenue
|
834,000
|
operations
|
2,000
|
Requirement
1. Prepare a multi step income statement for Clarkson Motorsports for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. Include earnings per share.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a corrected combined statement of income and retained earnings Jim Heller, accountant for Complete Home Finance, was injured in a boating accident. Another employee prepared the accompanying income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.
|
COMPLETE HOME FINANCE
Income Statement
Year ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Revenue and gains:
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
$ 362,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
|
93,000
|
|
Total revenues and gains
|
|
455,000
|
|
Expenses and losses:
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
102,000
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
70,000
|
|
|
General expenses
|
63,500
|
|
|
Sales returns
|
12,000
|
|
|
Sales discounts
|
5,500
|
|
|
Dividends
|
17,000
|
|
|
Income tax expense
|
34,000
|
|
|
Total expenses and losses
|
|
304,000
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
$ 151,000
|
|
Other gains and losses
|
|
|
|
Gain on discontinued operations
|
|
4,500
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 155,500
|
|
Earnings per share
|
|
$3.11
|
The individual amounts listed on the income statement are correct. However, some accounts are reported incorrectly, and two items do not belong on the income statement at all. Also, income tax has not been applied to all appropriate figures. The income tax rate on discontinued operations was 40%. Complete Home Finance issued 55,000 shares of common stock in 2012 and held 5,000 shares as treasury stock during 2012. Retained earnings at December 31, 2011, was $167,000.
Requirement
1. Prepare a corrected combined statement of income and retained earnings for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, including earnings per share. Prepare the income statement in single step format.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing stockholders’ equity transactions Dearborn Manufacturing, Co., completed the following transactions during 2012:
|
16Jan
|
Declared a cash dividend on the 6%, $95 par preferred stock (1,000 shares outstanding).
|
|
|
Declared a $0.55 per share dividend on the 90,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
|
|
|
The date of record is January 31, and the payment due date is February 15.
|
|
15Feb
|
Paid the cash dividends.
|
|
10Jun
|
Split common stock 2 for 1. Before the split, Dearborn had 90,000 shares of $10 par
|
|
|
common stock outstanding.
|
|
30Jul
|
Distributed a 30% stock dividend on the common stock. The market value of the
|
|
|
common stock was $12 per share.
|
|
26Oct
|
Purchased 3,000 shares of treasury stock at $10 per share.
|
|
8Nov
|
Sold 1,500 shares of treasury stock for $11 per share.
|
|
30Nov
|
Sold 700 shares of treasury stock for $7 per share.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in Dearborn’s general journal.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing dividend and treasury stock transactions, and preparing stockholders’ equity The balance sheet of Franklin Foods, at December 31, 2011, reported 110,000 shares of no par common stock authorized, with 30,000 shares issued and a Common stock balance of $180,000. Retained earnings had a balance of $120,000. During 2012, the company completed the following selected transactions:
|
Mar 15
|
Purchased 8,000 shares of treasury stock at $6 per share.
|
|
Apr 30
|
Distributed a 5% stock dividend on the outstanding shares of common stock.
|
|
|
The market value of common stock was $8 per share.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Earned net income of $109,000 during the year. Closed net income to Retained earnings.
|
Requirements
1. Record the transactions in the general journal. Explanations are not required.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Franklin Foods’ balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing dividend and treasury stock transactions, preparing a statement of retained earnings, and preparing stockholders’ equity The balance sheet of MacMillan Management Consulting, Inc., at December 31, 2011, reported the following stockholders’ equity:
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
Common stock, $12 par, 100,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
20,000 shares issued
|
$ 240,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
330,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
570,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
159,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 729,000
|
During 2012, MacMillan completed the following selected transactions:
|
6Feb
|
Distributed a 15% stock dividend on the common stock. The market value of MacMillan’s
|
|
|
stock was $26 per share.
|
|
29Jul
|
Purchased 1,800 shares of treasury stock at $26 per share.
|
|
27Nov
|
Declared a $0.30 per share cash dividend on the 21,200 shares of common stock
|
|
|
outstanding. The date of record is December 17, 2012, and the payment date is January 7, 2013.
|
|
31Dec
|
Closed the $82,000 net income to Retained earnings.
|
Requirements
1. Record the transactions in the general journal.
2. Prepare the retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.
3. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing EPS and reporting a retained earnings restriction The capital structure of Hillstride, Inc., at December 31, 2011, included 26,000 shares of $2 preferred stock and 42,000 shares of common stock. Common stock outstanding during 2012 totaled 42,000 shares. Income from continuing operations during 2012 was $118,000. The company discontinued a segment of the business at a gain of $28,000 and also had an extraordinary gain of $18,000. The Hillstride board of directors restricts $97,000 of retained earnings for contingencies. Retained earnings at December 31, 2011, was $97,000, and the company declared preferred dividends of $52,000 during 2012.
Requirements
1. Compute Hillstride’s earnings per share for 2012. Start with income from continuing operations. Income and loss amounts are net of income tax.
2. Show two ways of reporting Hillstride’s retained earnings restriction.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a detailed income statement The following information was taken from the records of Daughtry Motorsports, Inc., at November 30, 2012:
|
Selling expenses
|
$ 120,000
|
Common stock, $10 par, 21,300
|
|
|
General expenses
|
128,000
|
shares authorized and issued
|
$ 213,000
|
|
Income from discontinued operations
|
4,000
|
Preferred stock, $5, no par
|
|
|
Retained earnings, beginning
|
86,000
|
3,000 shares issued
|
150,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
434,000
|
Income tax expense:
|
69,000
|
|
Treasury stock, common
|
|
Continuing operations
|
|
|
(1,300 shares)
|
14,300
|
Income from discontinued
|
|
|
Net sales revenue
|
839,000
|
operations
|
1,600
|
Requirement
1. Prepare a multi step income statement for Daughtry Motorsports for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. Include earnings per share.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for the purchase and sale of treasury stock This problem continues the Draper Consulting, Inc., In October, Draper has the following transactions related to its common shares:
|
Oct 1
|
Draper repurchased 200 of its common shares for $50 per share.
|
|
Oct 10
|
Draper reissued 90 of its treasury common shares for $65 per share.
|
|
Oct 20
|
Draper reissued 100 of its treasury common shares for $60 per share.
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the entry related to the transactions.
2. Calculate the balance in the T accounts affected by the transactions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valley Mills Construction, Inc., had the following stockholders’ equity on June 30, 2013:
|
Common stock, no par, 100,000 shares issued
|
$250,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
190,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$440,000
|
In the past, Valley Mills has paid an annual cash dividend of $0.25 per share. Despite the large retained earnings balance, the board of directors wished to conserve cash for expansion. The board delayed the payment of cash dividends and in July distributed a 10% stock dividend. During August, the company’s cash position improved. The board then declared and paid a cash dividend of $0.25 per share in September. Suppose you owned 1,000 shares of Valley Mills common stock, acquired three years ago, prior to the 10% stock dividend. The market price of the stock was $22 per share before any of these dividends.
Requirements
1. What amount of cash dividends did you receive last year—before the stock dividend? What amount of cash dividends will you receive after the stock dividend?
2. How does the stock dividend affect your proportionate ownership in Valley Mills Construction? Explain.
3. Immediately after the stock dividend was distributed, the market value of Valley Mills stock decreased from $22 per share to $20 per share. Does this decrease represent a loss to you? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounting issues have arisen at T Shirts Plus, Inc.:
Requirements
1. Corporations sometimes purchase their own stock. When asked why they do so, T Shirts Plus management responds that the stock is undervalued. What advantage would T Shirts Plus gain by buying and selling its own undervalued stock?
2. T Shirts Plus earned a significant profit in the year ended December 31, 2012, because land that it held was purchased by the State of Nebraska for a new highway. The company proposes to treat the sale of land as operating revenue. Why do you think the company is proposing this plan? Is this disclosure appropriate?
3. The treasurer of T Shirts Plus wants to report a large loss as an extraordinary item because the company produced too much product and cannot sell it. (Under the rules of the lower of cost or market, this situation, in which the net realizable value of inventory is less than the book value, would trigger a write down of inventory.) Why do you think the treasurer wants to report the loss as extraordinary? Would that be acceptable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is a true case. General Electric (GE), like many other large corporations, is scrutinized by financial analysts who develop quarterly forecast EPS figures for the company. The companies are under intense pressure to meet or exceed these EPS forecasts. But when earnings fall short, some companies resort to accounting tricks. A few years ago, GE found itself facing this problem. In one case, it “sold” six locomotive engines to a financial institution at year end with the idea that the financial institution would resell them to GE’s regular railroad customers in the first quarter of the following year. GE booked the revenue at year end, which helped it hit its forecast EPS numbers. Later, upon investigation by the SEC, the transaction was found to be a “sham,” or phony transaction, because the financial institutions were not taking over full ownership of the engines. In early 2009, GE was fined $50,000,000 for misrepresenting its financial results.
Requirements
1. What are the criteria for recording a sale of goods?
2. Why do company managers feel pressure to meet or exceed EPS forecasts of outside analysts?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Obtain the annual reports (or annual report data) of five well known companies. You can get the reports either from the companies’ Web sites, your college library, or by mailing a request directly to the company (allow two weeks for delivery). Or you can visit the Web and search the SEC EDGAR database, which includes the financial reports of most well known companies.
Requirements
1. After selecting five companies, examine their income statements to search for the following items:
a. Income from continuing operations
b. Discontinued operations
c. Extraordinary gains and losses
d. Net income or net loss
e. Earnings per share data
2. Study the companies’ balance sheets to see
a. what classes of stock each company has issued.
b. which item carries a larger balance—the Common stock account or Paid in capital in excess of par (also labeled Additional paid in capital).
c. the percentage of each company’s total stockholders’ equity made up of retained earnings.
d. whether the company has Treasury stock. If so, how many shares and how much is the cost?
3. Examine each company’s statement of stockholders’ equity for evidence of
a. cash dividends.
b. stock dividends. (Some companies use the term stock split to refer to a large stock dividend.)
c. treasury stock purchases and sales.
4. As directed by your instructor, either write a report or present your findings to your class. You may not be able to understand everything you find, but neither can the Wall Street analysts! You will be amazed at how much you have learned.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Adams Corporation reported the following income statement and comparative balance sheet for 2014 and 2013, along with transaction data for 2014:
|
ADAMS CORPORATION
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2014
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$662,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
560,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
$102,000
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
|
Salary expense
|
$46,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
10,000
|
|
|
Rent expense
|
2,000
|
58,000
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
|
|
Income from operations
|
|
$ 44,000
|
|
Other items:
|
|
|
|
Loss on sale of equipment
|
|
(2,000)
|
|
Income before income tax
|
|
$ 42,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
|
(16,000)
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 26,000
|
|
ADAMS CORPORATION Balance Sheet December 31, 2014 and 2013
|
| |
2014
|
2013
|
Liabilities
|
2014
|
2013
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Current:
|
|
|
|
Current:
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 35,000
|
$ 26,000
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
$ 22,000
|
$ 3,000
|
Accrued liabilities
|
7,000
|
9,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
22,000
|
23,000
|
Income tax payable
|
10,000
|
10,000
|
|
Inventory
|
35,000
|
34,000
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 52,000
|
$ 45,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$ 79,000
|
$ 60,000
|
Bonds payable
|
84,000
|
53,000
|
|
Equipment, net
|
126,000
|
72,000
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
| |
|
|
Common stock
|
52,000
|
20,000
|
| |
|
|
Retained earnings
|
27,000
|
19,000
|
| |
|
|
Treasury stock
|
(10,000)
|
(5,000)
|
|
Total assets
|
$205,000
|
$132,000
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$205,000
|
$132,000
|
|
Transaction Data for 2014:
|
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
$140,000
|
|
Payment of dividends
|
18,000
|
|
Issuance of common stock to retire bonds payable
|
13,000
|
|
Issuance of bonds payable to borrow cash
|
44,000
|
|
Cash receipt from issuance of common stock
|
19,000
|
|
Cash receipt from sale of equipment (book value, $76,000)
|
74,000
|
|
Purchase of treasury stock
|
5,000
|
Requirement
1. Prepare Adams Corporation’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2014. Format operating cash flows by the indirect method. Follow the four steps outlined below.
STEP 1. Lay out the format of the statement of cash flows.
STEP 2. From the comparative balance sheet, compute the change in cash during the year.
STEP 3. From the income statement, take net income, depreciation, and the loss on sale of equipment to the statement of cash flows.
STEP 4. Complete the statement of cash flows. Account for the year-to-year change in each balance sheet account. Prepare a T-account to show the transaction activity in each long-term balance-sheet account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Plant assets account of Star Media shows the following:
|
Plant assets, net
|
|
Beg
|
80,000
|
Depr
|
34,000
|
|
Purchase
|
428,000
|
|
|
|
End
|
432,000
|
Sale
|
42,000
|
Star Media sold plant assets at an $11,000 loss. Where on the statement of cash flows should Star Media report the sale of plant assets? How much should the business report for the sale?
a. Financing cash flows—cash receipt of $42,000
b. Investing cash flows—cash receipt of $53,000
c. Investing cash flows—cash receipt of $31,000
d. Investing cash flows—cash receipt of $42,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing cash flows from operating activities—indirect method OMD Equipment, Inc., reported the following data for 2012:
|
Income statement
|
|
|
Net income
|
$ 44,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
8,000
|
|
Balance sheet
|
|
|
Increase in Accounts receivable
|
7,000
|
|
Decrease in Accounts payable
|
4,000
|
Requirement
1. Compute OMD’s net cash provided by operating activities—indirect method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing cash flows from operating activities—indirect method One Way Cellular accountants have assembled the following data for the year ended September 30, 2012:
|
Cash receipt from sale of land
|
$ 34,000
|
Net income
|
$ 55,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
20,000
|
Purchase of equipment
|
39,000
|
|
Payment of dividends
|
6,100
|
Decrease in current liabilities
|
19,000
|
|
Cash receipt from issuance of
|
|
Increase in current assets
|
|
|
common stock
|
30,000
|
other than cash
|
14,000
|
Requirement
1. Prepare the operating activities section using the indirect method for One Way Cellular’s statement of cash flows for the year ended September 30, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing investing and financing cash flows Kyler Media Corporation had the following income statement and balance sheet for 2012:
|
KYLER MEDIA CORPORATION
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Service revenue
|
$80,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
5,600
|
|
Other expenses
|
49,000
|
|
Net income
|
$25,400
|
|
KYLER MEDIA CORPORATION Comparative Balance Sheet December 31, 2012 and 2011
|
| |
|
|
Liabilities
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current:
|
2012
|
2011
|
Current:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 4,800
|
$ 3,800
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 9,000
|
$ 4,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
9,600
|
4,100
|
Long term notes payable
|
9,000
|
15,000
|
|
Equipment, net
|
78,000
|
67,000
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Common stock
|
22,000
|
17,000
|
| |
|
|
Retained earnings
|
52,400
|
38,900
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 92,400
|
$ 74,900
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$ 92,400
|
$ 74,900
|
Requirement
1. Compute for Kyler Media Corporation during 2012 the
a. acquisition of equipment. The business sold no equipment during the year.
b. payment of a long term note payable. During the year, the business issued a $5,300 note payable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing cash flows from operating activities—indirect method OMD Equipment, Inc., reported the following data for 2012:
|
Income statement
|
|
|
Net income
|
$ 44,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
8,000
|
|
Balance sheet
|
|
|
Increase in Accounts receivable
|
7,000
|
|
Decrease in Accounts payable
|
4,000
|
Requirement
1. Compute OMD’s net cash provided by operating activities—indirect method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing investing and financing cash flows Kyler Media Corporation had the following income statement and balance sheet for 2012:
|
KYLER MEDIA CORPORATION
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Service revenue
|
$80,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
5,600
|
|
Other expenses
|
49,000
|
|
Net income
|
$25,400
|
|
KYLER MEDIA CORPORATION Comparative Balance Sheet December 31, 2012 and 2011
|
|
Assets
|
2012
|
2011
|
Liabilities
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current:
|
|
|
Current:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$4,800
|
$3,800
|
Accounts payable
|
$9,000
|
$4,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
9,600
|
4,100
|
Long term notes payable
|
9,000
|
15,000
|
|
Equipment, net
|
78,000
|
67,000
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
| |
|
|
Common stock
|
22,000
|
17,000
|
| |
|
|
Retained earnings
|
52,400
|
38,900
|
|
Total assets
|
$92,400
|
$74,900
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$92,400
|
$74,900
|
Requirement
1. Compute for Kyler Media Corporation during 2012 the
a. acquisition of equipment. The business sold no equipment during the year.
b. payment of a long term note payable. During the year, the business issued a $5,300 note payable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying items on the indirect statement of cash flows The cash flow statement categorizes like transactions for optimal reporting.
Requirement
1. Identify each of the following transactions as one of the following:
- Operating activity (O)
- Investing activity (I)
- Financing activity (F)
- Noncash investing and financing activity (NIF)
- Transaction that is not reported on the statement of cash flows (N)
For each cash flow, indicate whether the item increases (+) or decreases (–) cash.
The indirect method is used to report cash flows from operating activities.
|
a. Loss on sale of land.
|
i. Cash sale of land.
|
|
b. Acquisition of equipment
|
j. Issuance of long term note
|
|
by issuance of note payable.
|
payable to borrow cash.
|
|
c. Payment of long term debt.
|
k. Depreciation.
|
|
d. Acquisition of building by
|
l. Purchase of treasury stock.
|
|
issuance of common stock.
|
|
|
e. Increase in salary payable.
|
m. Issuance of common stock.
|
|
f. Decrease in inventory.
|
n. Increase in accounts payable.
|
|
g. Increase in prepaid expenses.
|
o. Net income.
|
|
h. Decrease in accrued liabilities.
|
p. Payment of cash dividend.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for a stock split Decorator Plus Imports recently reported the following stockholders’ equity (adapted except par value per share):
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
Common stock, $1 par, 480,000,000 shares
|
|
|
authorized, 114,000,000 shares issued
|
$ 114,000,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par
|
140,000,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
$ 254,000,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
650,000,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 904,000,000
|
Suppose Decorator Plus split its common stock 2 for 1 in order to decrease the market price per share of its stock. The company’s stock was trading at $20 per share immediately before the split.
Requirements
1. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Decorator Plus Imports’ balance sheet after the stock split.
2. Were the account balances changed or unchanged after the stock split?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a corporate income statement RAR Corporation’s accounting records include the following items, listed in no particular order, at December 31, 2012:
|
Other gains (losses)
|
$ (15,000)
|
Extraordinary loss
|
$7,000
|
|
Net sales revenue
|
177,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
73,000
|
|
Gain on discontinued operations
|
12,000
|
Operating expenses
|
55,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
21,000
|
|
|
Income tax of 30% applies to all items.
Requirement
1. Prepare RAR’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Omit earnings per share.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing a stock dividend and reporting stockholders’ equity The stockholders’ equity of Pondside Occupational Therapy, Inc., on December 31,2011, follows:
|
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
|
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
Common stock, $1 par, 1,250 shares authorized,
|
|
|
530 issued
|
$ 530
|
|
Paid–in capital in excess of par—common
|
2,120
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
2,650
|
|
Retained earnings
|
121,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 123,650
|
On April 30, 2012, the market price of Pondside’s common stock was $11 per share and the company distributed a 10% stock dividend.
Requirements
1. Journalize the distribution of the stock dividend.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet after the stock dividend.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reporting stockholders’ equity after a stock split Snake Golf Club, Corp., had the following stockholders’ equity at December 31, 2011:
|
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
|
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
Common stock, $1.00 par, 650 shares authorized,
|
|
|
290 issued
|
$290
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
580
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
870
|
|
Retained earnings
|
2,900
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$3,770
|
On June 30, 2012, Snake split its common stock 2 for 1.
Requirements
1. Make the memorandum entry to record the stock split.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet immediately after the split.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing treasury stock transactions Stock transactions for Careful Driving School, Inc., follow:
|
Mar 4
|
Issued 22,000 shares of $1 par common stock at $18 per share.
|
|
May 22
|
Purchased 1,400 shares of treasury stock—common at $11 per share.
|
|
Sep 22
|
Sold 500 shares of treasury stock—common at $24 per share.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing treasury stock transactions and reporting stockholders’ equity Southern Amusements Corporation had the following stockholders’ equity on November 30:
|
STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
|
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
Common stock, $5 par, 1,300 shares authorized,
|
|
|
900 shares issued
|
$4,500
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
13,500
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
18,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
57,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$75,000
|
On December 30, Southern purchased 275 shares of treasury stock at $14 per share.
Requirements
1. Journalize the purchase of the treasury stock.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet at December 31.
3. How many shares of common stock are outstanding after the purchase of treasury stock?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a multi step income statement Click Photographic Supplies, Inc.’s accounting records include the following for 2012:
|
Income tax saving—extraordinary loss
|
$8,000
|
Sales revenue
|
$ 480,000
|
|
Income tax saving—loss
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
|
on discontinued operations
|
14,000
|
(including income taxes)
|
130,000
|
|
Extraordinary loss
|
20,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
205,000
|
|
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
35,000
|
Requirement
1. Prepare Click’s multi step income statement for 2012. Omit earnings per share.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing EPS Altar, Corp., earned net income of $118,000 for 2012. Altar’s books include the following figures:
|
Preferred stock, 3%, $50 par, 1,000 shares issued
|
|
|
and outstanding
|
$ 50,000
|
|
Common stock, $2 par, 53,000 issued
|
106,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
460,000
|
|
Treasury stock, common, 1,200 at cost
|
24,000
|
Requirement
1. Compute Altar’s EPS for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing stockholders’ equity transactions Summerborn Manufacturing, Co., completed the following transactions during 2012:
|
16Jan
|
Declared a cash dividend on the 5%, $100 par preferred stock
|
|
|
(900 shares outstanding). Declared a $0.30 per share dividend on the
|
|
|
80,000 shares of common stock outstanding. The date of record is January 31,
|
|
|
and the payment due date is February 15.
|
|
15Feb
|
Paid the cash dividends.
|
|
10Jun
|
Split common stock 2 for 1. Before the split, Summerborn had 80,000 shares
|
|
|
of $6 par common stock outstanding.
|
|
30Jul
|
Distributed a 50% stock dividend on the common stock. The market value
|
|
|
of the common stock was $9 per share.
|
|
26Oct
|
Purchased 1,000 shares of treasury stock at $13 per share.
|
|
8Nov
|
Sold 500 shares of treasury stock for $15 per share.
|
|
30Nov
|
Sold 300 shares of treasury stock for $8 per share.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in Summerborn’s general journal.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing dividend and treasury stock transactions, and preparing stockholders’ equity The balance sheet of Lennox Health Foods, at December 31, 2011, reported 120,000 shares of no par common stock authorized, with 25,000 shares issued and a Common stock balance of $190,000. Retained earnings had a balance of $115,000. During 2012, the company completed the following selected transactions:
|
Mar 15
|
Purchased 9,000 shares of treasury stock at $8 per share.
|
|
Apr 30
|
Distributed a 10% stock dividend on the outstanding shares of common stock.
|
|
|
The market value of common stock was $9 per share.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Earned net income of $110,000 during the year. Closed net income to Retained earnings.
|
Requirements
1. Record the transactions in the general journal. Explanations are not required.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Lennox Health Foods’ balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing EPS and reporting a retained earnings restriction The capital structure of Blacksmith, Inc., at December 31, 2011, included 18,000 shares of $1 preferred stock and 38,000 shares of common stock. Common stock outstanding during 2012 totaled 38,000 shares. Income from continuing operations during 2012 was $108,000. The company discontinued a segment of the business at a gain of $26,000 and also had an extraordinary gain of $12,000. The Blacksmith board of directors restricts $99,000 of retained earnings for contingencies. Retained earnings at December 31, 2011, was $99,000, and the company declared preferred dividends of $18,000 during 2012.
Requirements
1. Compute Blacksmith’s earnings per share for 2012. Start with income from continuing operations. All income and loss amounts are net of income tax.
2. Show two ways of reporting Blacksmith’s retained earnings restriction.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet The following summaries for Maryland Service, Inc., and Grapone, Co., provide the information needed to prepare the stockholders’ equity section of each company’s balance sheet. The two companies are independent.
Maryland Service, Inc.: Maryland is authorized to issue 44,000 shares of $1 par common stock. All the stock was issued at $11 per share. The company incurred net losses of $47,000 in 2009 and $15,000 in 2010. It earned net income of $32,000 in 2011 and $178,000 in 2012. The company declared no dividends during the four year period.
Grapone, Co.: Grapone’s charter authorizes the issuance of 70,000 shares of 5%, $14 par preferred stock and 470,000 shares of no par common stock. Grapone issued 1,400 shares of the preferred stock at $14 per share. It issued 130,000 shares of the common stock for $260,000. The company’s retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2012 was $60,000. Net income for 2012 was $98,000, and the company declared the specified preferred dividend for 2012. Preferred dividends for 2011 were in arrears.
Requirement
1. For each company, prepare the stockholders’ equity section of its balance sheet at December 31, 2012. Show the computation of all amounts. Entries are not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a corporate balance sheet, and measuring profitability The following accounts and December 31, 2012, balances of Georgia Optical Corporation are arranged in no particular order.
|
Retained earnings
|
$ 99,000
|
Common stock, $4 par
|
|
|
Inventory
|
106,000
|
125,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net
|
277,000
|
25,000 shares issued
|
$ 100,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
14,000
|
Dividends payable
|
6,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
61,000
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
160,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
15,000
|
Accounts payable
|
33,000
|
|
Long term note payable
|
103,000
|
Preferred stock, 5%, $14 par,
|
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
107,000
|
50,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
Cash
|
49,000
|
7,000 shares issued
|
98,000
|
|
Total assets, Dec 31, 2011
|
$505,000
|
|
Common equity, Dec 31, 2011
|
305,000
|
|
Net income, 2012
|
45,000
|
|
Interest expense, 2012
|
3,500
|
Requirements
1. Prepare the company’s classified balance sheet in account format at December 31, 2012.
2. Compute Georgia Optical’s rate of return on total assets and rate of return on common stockholders’ equity for the year ended December 31, 2012.
3. Do these rates of return suggest strength or weakness? Give your reasoning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and recording a corporation’s income tax The accounting records of Reflection Glass Corporation provide income statement data for 2012.
|
Total revenue
|
$910,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
670,000
|
|
Income before tax
|
$240,000
|
Total expenses include depreciation of $54,000 computed on the straight line method. In calculating taxable income on the tax return, Reflection Glass uses the modified accelerated cost recovery system (MACRS). MACRS depreciation was $75,000 for 2012. The corporate income tax rate is 36%.
Requirements
1. Compute taxable income for the year. For this computation, substitute MACRS depreciation in place of straight line depreciation.
2. Journalize the corporation’s income tax for 2012.
3. Show how to report the two income tax liabilities on Reflection’s classified balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lena Kay and Kathy Lauder have a patent on a new line of cosmetics. They need additional capital to market the products, and they plan to incorporate the business. They are considering the capital structure for the corporation. Their primary goal is to raise as much capital as possible without giving up control of the business. Kay and Lauder plan to invest the patent (an intangible asset, which will be transferred to the company’s ownership in lieu of cash) in the company and receive 100,000 shares of the corporation’s common stock. They have been offered $100,000 for the patent, which provides an indication of the “fair value” of the patent. The corporation’s plans for a charter include an authorization to issue 5,000 shares of preferred stock and 500,000 shares of $1 par common stock. Kay and Lauder are uncertain about the most desirable features for the preferred stock. Prior to incorporating, they are discussing their plans with two investment groups. The corporation can obtain capital from outside investors under either of the following plans:
Plan 1. Group 1 will invest $150,000 to acquire 1,500 shares of 6%, $100 par nonvoting, noncumulative preferred stock.
Plan 2. Group 2 will invest $100,000 to acquire 1,000 shares of $5, no par preferred stock and $70,000 to acquire 70,000 shares of common stock. Each preferred share receives 50 votes on matters that come before the stockholders.
Requirements
Assume that the corporation has been chartered (approved) by the state.
1. Journalize the issuance of common stock to Kay and Lauder. Explanations are not required.
2. Journalize the issuance of stock to the outsiders under both plans. Explanations are not required.
3. Net income for the first year is $180,000 and total dividends are $30,000. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the corporation’s balance sheet under both plans.
4. Recommend one of the plans to Kay and Lauder. Give your reasons.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stan Sewell paid $50,000 for a franchise that entitled him to market software programs in the countries of the European Union. Sewell intended to sell individual franchises for the major language groups of Western Europe—German, French, English, Spanish, and Italian. Naturally, investors considering buying a franchise from Sewell asked to see the financial statements of his business.
Believing the value of the franchise to be $500,000, Sewell sought to capitalize his own franchise at $500,000. The law firm of St. Charles & LaDue helped Sewell form a corporation chartered to issue 500,000 shares of common stock with par value of $1 per share. Attorneys suggested the following chain of transactions:
a. Sewell’s cousin, Bob, borrows $500,000 from a bank and purchases the franchise from Sewell.
b. Sewell pays the corporation $500,000 to acquire all its stock.
c. The corporation buys the franchise from Cousin Bob.
d. Cousin Bob repays the $500,000 loan to the bank.
In the final analysis, Cousin Bob is debt free and out of the picture. Sewell owns all the corporation’s stock, and the corporation owns the franchise. The corporation’s balance sheet lists a franchise acquired at a cost of $500,000. This balance sheet is Sewell’s most valuable marketing tool.
Requirements
1. What is unethical about this situation?
2. Who can be harmed? How can they be harmed? What role does accounting play?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elaine Jackson just had a visit from her cousin Phil. He wanted to apologize. Last year he had regaled her with stories about a small company he had discovered that had just invented a high tech converter to allow cars to run on water. It was still all hush hush. The stock was trading for just one penny a share. He had put all his savings into it, and he wanted to share the tip with her. She ponied up $8,000 that she had been saving for two years. Later, when her money was long gone, she realized she had been the victim of a classic “pump and dump” scheme whereby unscrupulous promoters bought up “penny stocks,” started a rumor about big profits, and when enough suckers bought in and the stock price shot up, the promoters bailed out and made a profit. Phil had just gotten out of prison and he felt terrible about what he had done. Elaine had learned an expensive lesson.
Requirements
1. Does the current market price of a share of stock give any indication of the value or success of a company?
2. What sort of information should an investor look for before deciding to invest in stock of a company?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Competitive pressures are the norm in business. Lexus automobiles (made in Japan) have cut into the sales of Mercedes Benz (a German company), General Motors’ Cadillac Division, and Ford’s Lincoln Division. Dell, Gateway (now owned by Acer, Inc.), and Compaq computers (now owned by Hewlett Packard) have siphoned business away from IBM. Foreign steelmakers have reduced the once massive U.S. steel industry to a fraction of its former size. Indeed, corporate downsizing has occurred on a massive scale. During the past few years, companies mentioned here have pared down their plant and equipment, laid off employees, or restructured operations.
Requirements
1. Identify all the stakeholders of a corporation and the stake each group has in the company. A stakeholder is a person or a group who has an interest (that is, a stake) in the success of the organization.
2. Identify several areas of deficiency that may indicate a corporation’s need for downsizing. How can downsizing help to solve this problem? Discuss how each measure can indicate the need for downsizing.
3. Debate the downsizing issue. One group of students takes the perspective of the company and its stockholders, and another group of students takes the perspective of other stakeholders of the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was taken from the ledger of Calenergy Corporation at December 31, 2014.
|
Common stock, no par,
|
|
Discontinued operations,
|
|
|
45,000 shares issued
|
$180,000
|
income
|
$20,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
620,000
|
Prior period adjustment—
|
|
|
Extraordinary gain
|
26,000
|
credit to Retained earnings
|
5,000
|
|
Loss due to lawsuit
|
11,000
|
Gain on sale of plant assets
|
21,000
|
|
General expenses
|
62,000
|
Income tax expense (saving):
|
|
|
Preferred stock 8%
|
50,000
|
Continuing operations
|
32,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
108,000
|
Discontinued operations
|
8,000
|
|
Retained earnings, beginning,
|
|
Extraordinary gain
|
10,000
|
|
as originally reported
|
103,000
|
Treasury stock, common
|
|
|
Dividends
|
14,000
|
(5,000 shares)
|
25,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
380,000
|
|
|
Requirement
1. Prepare a multi step income statement and a statement of retained earnings for Calenergy Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2014. Include the EPS presentation and show your computations. Calenergy had no changes in its stock accounts during the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A company’s own stock that it has issued and repurchased is called
a. outstanding stock.
b. dividend stock.
c. issued stock.
d. treasury stock.
2. Assume that a company paid $6 per share to purchase 1,100 of its $3 par common as treasury stock. The purchase of treasury stock
a. increased total equity by $3,300.
b. decreased total equity by $3,300.
c. decreased total equity by $6,600.
d. increased total equity by $6,600.
3. Assume that the bank requires ABC, Co., to maintain at least $125,000 in Retained earnings. The $125,000 would be shown as
a. a ratio of the $125,000 restriction divided by total Retained earnings.
b. a current liability.
c. a restriction to Retained earnings.
d. a long term liability.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marks and Spencer plc
Instructions
Refer to M&S’s financial statements and the accompanying notes to answer the following questions.
(a) What alternative formats could M&S have adopted for its statement of financial position? Which format did it adopt?
(b) Identify the various techniques of disclosure M&S might have used to disclose additional pertinent financial information. Which technique does it use in its financials?
(c) In what classifi cations are M&S’s investments reported? What valuation basis does M&S use to report its investments? How much working capital did M&S have on 3 April 2010? On 28 March 2009?
(d) What were M&S’s cash flows from its operating, investing, and financing activities for 2010? What were its trends in net cash provided by operating activities over the period 2009 to 2010? Explain why the change in accounts payable and in accrued and other liabilities is added to net income to arrive at net cash provided by operating activities.
(e) Compute M&S’s: (1) current cash debt coverage ratio, (2) cash debt coverage ratio, and (3) free cash flow for 2010. What do these ratios indicate about M&S’s financial conditions?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Issuing stock and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet The charter for KCAS TV, Inc., authorizes the company to issue 100,000 shares of $4, no par preferred stock and 500,000 shares of common stock with $1 par value. During its start up phase, KCAS completed the following transactions:
|
Sep 6
|
Issued 275 shares of common stock to the promoters who organized the corporation,
|
|
|
receiving cash of $8,250.
|
|
12
|
Issued 400 shares of preferred stock for cash of $20,000.
|
|
14
|
Issued 1,600 shares of common stock in exchange for land valued at $18,000.
|
|
30
|
Closed net income of $32,000 into Retained earnings.
|
Requirements
1. Record the transactions in the general journal.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the KCAS TV balance sheet at September 30, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet The charter of Evergreen Capital Corporation authorizes the issuance of 900 shares of preferred stock and 1,250 shares of common stock. During a two month period, Evergreen completed these stock issuance transactions:
|
Mar 23
|
Issued 230 shares of $4 par common stock for cash of $15 per share.
|
|
Apr 12
|
Received inventory valued at $23,000 and equipment with a market value of
|
|
|
$20,000 for 320 shares of the $4 par common stock.
|
|
17
|
Issued 900 shares of 5%, $20 par preferred stock for $20 per share.
|
Requirements
1. Record the transactions in the general journal.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the Evergreen balance sheet for the transactions given in this exercise. Retained earnings has a balance of $79,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dividing dividends between preferred and common stock Northern Communications has the following stockholders’ equity:
|
NORTHERN COMMUNICATIONS
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Paid in Capital:
|
|
|
Preferred stock, 6%, $11 par, 150,000 shares authorized
|
|
|
20,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
$ 220,000
|
|
Common stock, $3 par, 575,000 shares authorized
|
|
|
400,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
1,200,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
1,000,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
2,420,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
190,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$2,610,000
|
Requirements
1. First, determine whether preferred stock is cumulative or noncumulative.
2. Compute the amount of dividends to preferred and to common for 2011 and 2012 if total dividends are $12,200 in 2011 and $55,000 in 2012.
3. What is the average price at which each preferred share sold for? What is the average price at which each common share sold for?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing dividends on preferred and common stock The following elements of stockholders’ equity are adapted from the balance sheet of Sandler Marketing, Corp.
|
SANDLER MARKETING, CORP.
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Preferred stock, 7% cumulative, $2 par,
|
|
|
|
75,000 shares authorized, issued and outstanding
|
$150,000
|
|
|
Common stock, $0.10 par, 10,250,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
|
9,500,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
950,000
|
|
Sandler paid no preferred dividends in 2011.
Requirement
1. Compute the dividends to the preferred and common shareholders for 2012 if total dividends are $195,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Book value per share of common stock The balance sheet of Mark Todd Wireless, Inc., reported the following:
|
Preferred stock, 9%, $20 par, 1,300 shares authorized, issued
|
|
|
and outstanding
|
$26,000
|
|
Common stock, no par value, 12,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
5,300 shares issued
|
200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
50,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$276,000
|
Assume that Todd has paid preferred dividends for the current year and all prior years (no dividends in arrears).
Requirement
1. Compute the book value per share of the common stock.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Book value per share of common stock, and preferred dividends in arrearsThe balance sheet of Moe Taylor, Inc., reported the following:
|
Preferred stock, 7%, $30 par, 1,000 shares authorized, issued
|
|
|
and outstanding
|
$30,000
|
|
Common stock, no par value, 11,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
5,600 shares issued
|
226,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
80,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$336,000
|
Requirement
1. Compute the book value per share of Taylor’s preferred and common stock if three years’ preferred dividends (including dividends for the current year) are in arrears.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluating profitability Lofty Exploration Company reported these figures for 2012 and 2011:
|
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Income Statement—partial:
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
12,400,000
|
17,400,000
|
|
Net Income
|
17,900,000
|
19,100,000
|
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Balance Sheet—partial:
|
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 328,000,000
|
$ 318,000,000
|
|
Preferred stock, $2, no par, 150,000 shares
|
|
|
|
authorized, issued and outstanding
|
$ 2,400,000
|
$ 2,400,000
|
|
Common stockholders’ equity
|
178,000,000
|
171,000,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
4,000,000
|
3,000,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 184,400,000
|
$ 176,400,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute rate of return on total assets and rate of return on common stockholders’ equity for 2012.
2. Do these rates of return suggest strength or weakness? Give your reason.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Organizing a corporation and issuing stock Jay and Mike are opening a paint store. There are no competing paint stores in the area. Their fundamental decision is how to organize the business. They anticipate profits of $300,000 the first year, with the ability to sell franchises in the future. Although they have enough to start the business now as a partnership, cash flow will be an issue as they grow. They feel the corporate form of operation will be best for the long term. They seek your advice.
Requirements
1. What is the main advantage they gain by selecting a corporate form of business now?
2. Would you recommend they initially issue preferred or common stock? Why?
3. If they decide to issue $2 par common stock and anticipate an initial market price of $30 per share, how many shares will they need to issue to raise $1,800,000?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sources of equity, stock issuance, and dividends Terrific Comfort Specialists, Inc., reported the following stockholders’ equity on its balance sheet at June 30, 2012:
|
TERRIFIC COMFORT SPECIALISTS, INC.
Stockholders’ Equity
June 30, 2012
|
|
Paid in Capital:
|
|
|
Preferred stock, 5%, ? par, 650,000 shares authorized, 280,000 shares issued
|
$ 1,400,000
|
|
Common stock, par value $1 per share, 5,000,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
1,350,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
1,350,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
2,400,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
5,150,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
12,300,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 17,450,000
|
Requirements
1. Identify the different issues of stock that Terrific has outstanding.
2. What is the par value per share of Terrific’s preferred stock?
3. Make two summary journal entries to record issuance of all the Terrific stock for cash. Explanations are not required.
4. No preferred dividends are in arrears. Journalize the declaration of a $600,000 dividend at June 30, 2012. Use separate Dividends payable accounts for preferred and common. An explanation is not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet The balance sheet of Buzzcraft, Inc., reported the following:
|
Preferred stock, $7 par, 5%,
|
|
|
1,000 shares authorized and issued
|
$ 7,000
|
|
Common stock, $1.50 par value, 43,000 shares authorized;
|
|
|
11,000 shares issued
|
16,500
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
224,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
247,500
|
|
Retained earnings
|
80,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 327,500
|
Preferred dividends are in arrears for two years, including the current year. On the balance sheet date, the market value of the Buzzcraft common stock was $28 per share.
Requirements
1. Is the preferred stock cumulative or noncumulative? How can you tell?
2. What is the total paid in capital of the company?
3. What was the total market value of the common stock?
4. Compute the book value per share of the common stock.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing corporate transactions and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet B Mobile Wireless needed additional capital to expand, so the business incorporated. The charter from the state of Georgia authorizes B Mobile to issue 70,000 shares of 5%, $100 par preferred stock, and 110,000 shares of no par common stock. B Mobile completed the following transactions:
|
Oct 2
|
Issued 19,000 shares of common stock for equipment with a market value of $110,000.
|
|
6
|
Issued 800 shares of preferred stock to acquire a patent with a market value of $80,000.
|
|
9
|
Issued 15,000 shares of common stock for cash of $90,000.
|
Requirements
1. Record the transactions in the general journal.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the B Mobile balance sheet at October 31. The ending balance of Retained earnings is $92,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Issuing stock and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet Lincoln Priest, Inc., was organized in 2011. At December 31, 2011, the Lincoln Priest balance sheet reported the following stockholders’ equity:
|
LINCOLN PRIEST, INC.
Stockholders’ Equity
December 31, 2011
|
|
Paid in Capital:
|
|
|
Preferred stock, 7%, $40 par, 110,000 shares authorized, none issued
|
$ 0
|
|
Common stock, $1 par, 520,000 shares authorized, 61,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
61,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
41,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
102,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
29,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 131,000
|
Requirements
1. During 2012, the company completed the following selected transactions.
Journalize each transaction. Explanations are not required.
a. Issued for cash 1,300 shares of preferred stock at par value.
b. Issued for cash 2,400 shares of common stock at a price of $5 per share.
c. Net income for the year was $74,000, and the company declared no dividends. Make the closing entry for net income.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the Lincoln Priest balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet and Retained earnings The following summaries for Miller Service, Inc., and Griffin, Co., provide the information needed to prepare the stockholders’ equity section of each company’s balance sheet. The two companies are independent.
Miller Service, Inc.: Miller is authorized to issue 46,000 shares of $1 par common stock. All the stock was issued at $12 per share. The company incurred net losses of $44,000 in 2009 and $10,000 in 2010. It earned net income of $29,000 in 2011 and $181,000 in 2012. The company declared no dividends during the four year period.
Griffin, Co.: Griffin’s charter authorizes the issuance of 30,000 shares of 6%, $12 par preferred stock and 520,000 shares of no par common stock. Griffin issued 1,100 shares of the preferred stock at $12 per share. It issued 110,000 shares of the common stock for $220,000. The company’s retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2012 was $140,000. Net income for 2012 was $90,000, and the company declared the specified preferred dividend for 2012. Preferred dividends for 2011 were in arrears.
Requirement
1. For each company, prepare the stockholders’ equity section of its balance sheet at December 31, 2012. Show the computation of all amounts. Entries are not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a corporate balance sheet and measuring profitability The following accounts and December 31, 2012, balances of New Jersey Optical Corporation are arranged in no particular order.
|
Retained earnings
|
$ 151,500
|
Common stock, $4 par
|
|
|
Inventory
|
103,000
|
125,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net
|
285,000
|
24,000 shares issued
|
$ 96,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
13,000
|
Dividends payable
|
4,000
|
|
Goodwill
|
64,000
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
140,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities payable
|
17,000
|
Accounts payable
|
32,000
|
|
Long term note payable
|
101,000
|
Preferred stock, 5%, $13 par,
|
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
107,000
|
50,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
Cash
|
41,000
|
5,500 shares issued
|
71,500
|
|
Total assets, Dec 31, 2011
|
$501,000
|
|
Common equity, Dec 31, 2011
|
307,000
|
|
Net income, 2012
|
47,000
|
|
Interest expense, 2012
|
3,000
|
Requirements
1. Prepare the company’s classified balance sheet in account format at December 31, 2012.
2. Compute New Jersey Optical’s rate of return on total assets and rate of return on common stockholders’ equity for the year ended December 31, 2012.
3. Do these rates of return suggest strength or weakness? Give your reasoning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Organizing a corporation and issuing stock Ben and Eric are opening a comic book store. There are no competing comic book stores in the area. Their fundamental decision is how to organize the business. They anticipate profits of $350,000 the first year, with the ability to sell franchises in the future. Although they have enough to start the business now as a partnership, cash flow will be an issue as they grow. They feel the corporate form of operation will be best for the long term. They seek your advice.
Requirements
1. What is the main advantage they gain by selecting a corporate form of business now?
2. Would you recommend they initially issue preferred or common stock? Why?
3. If they decide to issue $1 par common stock and anticipate an initial market price of $80 per share, how many shares will they need to issue to raise $4,000,000?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sources of equity, stock issuance, and dividends Tree Comfort Specialists, Inc., reported the following stockholders’ equity on its balance sheet at April 30, 2012.
|
TREE COMFORT SPECIALISTS, INC.
Stockholders’ Equity
April 30, 2012
|
|
Paid in Capital:
|
|
|
Preferred stock, 6%, ? par, 675,000 shares authorized, 240,000 shares issued
|
$ 1,200,000
|
|
Common stock, par value $1 per share, 9,000,000 shares authorized,
|
|
|
1,330,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
1,330,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
2,600,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
5,130,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
11,900,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 17,030,000
|
Requirements
1. Identify the different issues of stock that Tree has outstanding.
2. What is the par value per share of Tree’s preferred stock?
3. Make two summary journal entries to record issuance of all the Tree stock for cash. Explanations are not required.
4. No preferred dividends are in arrears. Journalize the declaration of a $300,000 dividend at April 30, 2012. Use separate Dividends payable accounts for preferred and common. An explanation is not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet The balance sheet of Ballcraft, Inc., reported the following:
|
Preferred stock, $8 par, 5%,
|
|
|
4,000 shares authorized and issued
|
$32,000
|
|
Common stock, $2.50 par value, 41,000 shares authorized;
|
|
|
16,000 shares issued
|
40,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
225,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
297,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
40,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$337,000
|
Preferred dividends are in arrears for two years, including the current year. On the balance sheet date, the market value of the Ballcraft common stock was $31 per share.
Requirements
1. Is the preferred stock cumulative or noncumulative? How can you tell?
2. What is the total paid in capital of the company?
3. What was the total market value of the common stock?
4. Compute the book value per share of the common stock.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing corporate transactions and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet Cell Wireless needed additional capital to expand, so the business incorporated. The charter from the state of Georgia authorizes Cell to issue 40,000 shares of 10%, $50 par preferred stock and 100,000 shares of no par common stock. Cell completed the following transactions:
|
Jan 2
|
Issued 21,000 shares of common stock for equipment with a market value of $140,000.
|
|
6
|
Issued 600 shares of preferred stock to acquire a patent with a market value of $30,000.
|
|
9
|
Issued 11,000 shares of common stock for cash of $66,000.
|
Requirements
1. Record the transactions in the general journal.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the Cell balance sheet at January 31. The ending balance of Retained earnings is $93,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Issuing stock and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet Lurvey Priest, Inc., was organized in 2011. At December 31, 2011, the Lurvey Priest balance sheet reported the following stockholders’ equity:
|
LURVEY PRIEST, INC.
Stockholders’ Equity
December 31, 2011
|
|
Paid in Capital:
|
|
|
Preferred stock, 4%, $55 par, 140,000 shares authorized, none issued
|
$ 0
|
|
Common stock, $2 par, 540,000 shares authorized, 62,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
124,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
42,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
$ 166,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
28,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$ 194,000
|
Requirements
1. During 2012, the company completed the following selected transactions. Journalize each transaction. Explanations are not required.
a. Issued for cash 1,500 shares of preferred stock at par value.
b. Issued for cash 2,000 shares of common stock at a price of $7 per share.
c. Net income for the year was $78,000, and the company declared no dividends. Make the closing entry for net income.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the Lurvey Priest balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows and a Balance Sheet) Chekov Corporation’s balance sheet at the end of 2011 included the following items.
|
Current assets
|
$235,000
|
Current liabilities
|
$150,000
|
|
Land
|
30,000
|
Bonds payable
|
100,000
|
|
Buildings
|
120,000
|
Common stock
|
180,000
|
|
Equipment
|
90,000
|
Retained earnings
|
44,000
|
|
Accum. depr.—buildings
|
30,000
|
Total
|
$474,000
|
|
Accum. depr.—equipment
|
11,000
|
|
|
|
Patents
|
40,000
|
|
|
|
Total
|
$474,000
|
|
|
The following information is available for 2012.
1. Net income was $55,000.
2. Equipment (cost $20,000 and accumulated depreciation $8,000) was sold for $9,000.
3. Depreciation expense was $4,000 on the building and $9,000 on equipment.
4. Patent amortization was $2,500.
5. Current assets other than cash increased by $25,000. Current liabilities increased by $13,000.
6. An addition to the building was completed at a cost of $27,000.
7. A long term investment in stock was purchased for $16,000.
8. Bonds payable of $50,000 were issued.
9. Cash dividends of $25,000 were declared and paid.
10. Treasury stock was purchased at a cost of $11,000.
Instructions
(Show only totals for current assets and current liabilities.)
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012.
(b) Prepare a balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows, Analysis) The comparative balance sheets of Menachem Corporation at the beginning and end of the year 2012 appear below.
|
MENACHEM CORPORATION BALANCE SHEETS
|
|
Assets
|
Dec. 31, 2012
|
Jan. 1, 2012
|
Inc./Dec.
|
|
Cash
|
$22,000
|
$13,000
|
$ 9,000 Inc.
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
106,000
|
88,000
|
18,000 Inc.
|
|
Equipment
|
37,000
|
22,000
|
15,000 Inc.
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
17,000
|
11,000
|
6,000 Inc.
|
|
Total
|
$148,000
|
$112,000
|
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$20,000
|
$15,000
|
5,000 Inc.
|
|
Common stock
|
100,000
|
80,000
|
20,000 Inc.
|
|
Retained earnings
|
28,000
|
17,000
|
11,000 Inc.
|
|
Total
|
$148,000
|
$112,000
|
|
Net income of $34,000 was reported, and dividends of $23,000 were paid in 2012. New equipment was purchased and none was sold.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year 2012.
(b) Compute the current ratio (current assets 4 current liabilities) as of January 1, 2012, and December 31, 2012, and compute free cash flow for the year 2012.
(c) In light of the analysis in (b), comment on Menachem’s liquidity and financial flexibility.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Classified Balance Sheet, Periodic Inventory) Presented below is a list of accounts in alphabetical order.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Land
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
Land for Future Plant Site
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
Loss from Flood
|
|
Advances to Employees
|
Notes Payable (due next year)
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
Patents
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
Payroll Taxes Payable
|
|
Bond Sinking Fund
|
Pension Obligations
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
Petty Cash
|
|
Buildings
|
Preferred Stock
|
|
Cash in Bank
|
Premium on Bonds Payable
|
|
Cash on Hand
|
Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock
|
|
Cash Surrender Value of Life Insurance
|
Prepaid Rent
|
|
Commission Expense
|
Purchases
|
|
Common Stock
|
Purchase Returns and Allowances
|
|
Copyrights
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
Debt Investments (trading)
|
Sales
|
|
Dividends Payable
|
Sales Discounts
|
|
Equipment
|
Salaries and Wages Expense (sales)
|
|
Gain on Sale of Equipment
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
Transportation in
|
|
Inventory—Beginning
|
Treasury Stock (at cost)
|
|
Inventory—Ending
|
Unearned Subscriptions Revenue
|
Instructions
Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form. (No monetary amounts are to be shown.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Balance Sheet Preparation) Presented below are a number of balance sheet items for Montoya, Inc., for the current year, 2012.
|
Goodwill
|
$ 125,000
|
Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
$ 292,000
|
|
Payroll taxes payable
|
177,591
|
Inventory
|
239,800
|
|
Bonds payable
|
300,000
|
Rent payable (short term)
|
45,000
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
15,000
|
Income tax payable
|
98,362
|
|
Cash
|
360,000
|
Rent payable (long term)
|
480,000
|
|
Land
|
480,000
|
Common stock, $1 par value
|
200,000
|
|
Notes receivable
|
445,700
|
Preferred stock, $10 par value
|
150,000
|
|
Notes payable (to banks)
|
265,000
|
Prepaid expenses
|
87,920
|
|
Accounts payable
|
490,000
|
Equipment
|
1,470,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
?
|
Equity investments (trading)
|
121,000
|
|
Income taxes receivable
|
97,630
|
Accumulated depreciation—buildings
|
270,200
|
|
Unsecured notes payable (long term)
|
1,600,000
|
Buildings
|
1,640,000
|
Instructions
Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form. Common stock authorized was 400,000 shares, and preferred stock authorized was 20,000 shares. Assume that notes receivable and notes payable are short term, unless stated otherwise. Cost and fair value of equity investments (trading) are the same.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Balance Sheet Adjustment and Preparation) The adjusted trial balance of Eastwood Company and other related information for the year 2012 are presented on the next page.
|
EASTWOOD COMPANY ADJUSTED TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$41,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
163,500
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$8,700
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
5,900
|
|
|
Inventory
|
208,500
|
|
|
Equity Investments (long term)
|
339,000
|
|
|
Land
|
85,000
|
|
|
Construction in Process (building)
|
124,000
|
|
|
Patents
|
36,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
400,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
240,000
|
|
Discount on Bonds Payable
|
20,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
148,000
|
|
Accrued Expenses
|
|
49,200
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
94,000
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
|
200,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
500,000
|
|
Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock
|
|
45,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
138,000
|
| |
$1,422,900
|
$1,422,900
|
Additional information:
1. The LIFO method of inventory value is used.
2. The cost and fair value of the long term investments that consist of stocks and bonds is the same.
3. The amount of the Construction in Progress account represents the costs expended to date on a building in the process of construction. (The company rents factory space at the present time.) The land on which the building is being constructed cost $85,000, as shown in the trial balance.
4. The patents were purchased by the company at a cost of $40,000 and are being amortized on a straight line basis.
5. Of the discount on bonds payable, $2,000 will be amortized in 2013.
6. The notes payable represent bank loans that are secured by long term investments carried at $120,000. These bank loans are due in 2013.
7. The bonds payable bear interest at 8% payable every December 31, and are due January 1, 2023.
8. 600,000 shares of common stock of a par value of $1 were authorized, of which 500,000 shares were issued and outstanding.
Instructions
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2012, so that all important information is fully disclosed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Balance Sheet Adjustment and Preparation) Presented below is the balance sheet of Sargent Corporation for the current year, 2012.
|
SARGENT CORPORATION BALANCE SHEET DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Current assets
|
$485,000
|
Current liabilities
|
$380,000
|
|
Investments
|
640,000
|
Long term liabilities
|
1,000,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
1,720,000
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
1,770,000
|
|
Intangible assets
|
305,000
|
|
$3,150,000
|
| |
$3,150,000
|
|
|
The following information is presented.
1. The current assets section includes: cash $150,000, accounts receivable $170,000 less $10,000 for allowance for doubtful accounts, inventories $180,000, and unearned revenue $5,000. Inventories are stated on the lower of FIFO cost or market.
2. The investments section includes: the cash surrender value of a life insurance contract $40,000; investments in common stock, short term (trading) $80,000 and long term (available for sale) $270,000; and bond sinking fund $250,000. The cost and fair value of investments in common stock are the same.
3. Property, plant, and equipment includes: buildings $1,040,000 less accumulated depreciation $360,000; equipment $450,000 less accumulated depreciation $180,000; land $500,000; and land held for future use $270,000.
4. Intangible assets include: a franchise $165,000; goodwill $100,000; and discount on bonds payable $40,000.
5. Current liabilities include: accounts payable $140,000; notes payable—short term $80,000 and long term $120,000; and taxes payable $40,000.
6. Long term liabilities are composed solely of 7% bonds payable due 2020.
7. Stockholders’ equity has: preferred stock, no par value, authorized 200,000 shares, issued 70,000 shares for $450,000; and common stock, $1.00 par value, authorized 400,000 shares, issued 100,000 shares at an average price of $10. In addition, the corporation has retained earnings of $320,000.
Instructions
Prepare a balance sheet in good form, adjusting the amounts in each balance sheet classification as affected by the information given above.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows and a Balance Sheet) Lansbury Inc. had the balance sheet shown on the next page at December 31, 2011.
|
LANSBURY INC. BALANCE SHEET DECEMBER 31, 2011
|
|
Cash
|
$20,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$30,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
21,200
|
Notes payable (long term)
|
41,000
|
|
Investments
|
32,000
|
Common stock
|
100,000
|
|
Plant assets (net)
|
81,000
|
Retained earnings
|
23,200
|
|
Land
|
40,000
|
|
$194,200
|
| |
$194,200
|
|
|
During 2012, the following occurred.
1. Lansbury Inc. sold part of its investment portfolio for $15,000. This transaction resulted in a gain of $3,400 for the firm. The company classifies its investments as available for sale.
2. A tract of land was purchased for $18,000 cash.
3. Long term notes payable in the amount of $16,000 were retired before maturity by paying $16,000 cash.
4. An additional $20,000 in common stock was issued at par.
5. Dividends of $8,200 were declared and paid to stockholders.
6. Net income for 2012 was $32,000 after allowing for depreciation of $11,000.
7. Land was purchased through the issuance of $30,000 in bonds.
8. At December 31, 2012, Cash was $32,000, Accounts Receivable was $41,600, and Accounts Payable remained at $30,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012.
(b) Prepare an unclassified balance sheet as it would appear at December 31, 2012.
(c) How might the statement of cash flows help the user of the financial statements? Compute two cash flow ratios.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows and Balance Sheet) Aero Inc. had the following balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
|
AERO INC. BALANCE SHEET DECEMBER 31, 2011
|
|
Cash
|
$20,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$30,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
21,200
|
Bonds payable
|
41,000
|
|
Investments
|
32,000
|
Common stock
|
100,000
|
|
Plant assets (net)
|
81,000
|
Retained earnings
|
23,200
|
|
Land
|
40,000
|
|
$194,200
|
| |
$194,200
|
|
|
During 2012, the following occurred.
1. Aero liquidated its available for sale investment portfolio at a loss of $5,000.
2. A tract of land was purchased for $38,000.
3. An additional $30,000 in common stock was issued at par.
4. Dividends totaling $10,000 were declared and paid to stockholders.
5. Net income for 2012 was $35,000, including $12,000 in depreciation expense.
6. Land was purchased through the issuance of $30,000 in additional bonds.
7. At December 31, 2012, Cash was $70,200, Accounts Receivable was $42,000, and Accounts Payable was $40,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year 2012 for Aero.
(b) Prepare the balance sheet as it would appear at December 31, 2012.
(c) Compute Aero’s free cash flow and the current cash debt coverage ratio for 2012.
(d) Use the analysis of Aero to illustrate how information in the balance sheet and statement of cash flows helps the user of the financial statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Reporting the Financial Effects of Varied Transactions) In an examination of Arenes Corporation as of December 31, 2012, you have learned that the following situations exist. No entries have been made in the accounting records for these items.
1. The corporation erected its present factory building in 1997. Depreciation was calculated by the straight line method, using an estimated life of 35 years. Early in 2012, the board of directors conducted a careful survey and estimated that the factory building had a remaining useful life of 25 years as of January 1, 2012.
2. An additional assessment of 2011 income taxes was levied and paid in 2012.
3. When calculating the accrual for officers’ salaries at December 31, 2012, it was discovered that the accrual for officers’ salaries for December 31, 2011, had been overstated.
4. On December 15, 2012, Arenes Corporation declared a cash dividend on its common stock outstanding, payable February 1, 2013, to the common stockholders of record December 31, 2012. Concepts for Analysis 293
Instructions
Describe fully how each of the items above should be reported in the financial statements of Arenes Corporation for the year 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Current Asset and Liability Classification) Below are the titles of a number of debit and credit accounts as they might appear on the balance sheet of Hayduke Corporation as of October 31, 2012.
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Interest Receivable on U.S. Government
|
Preferred Stock
|
|
Securities
|
11% First Mortgage Bonds, due in 2017
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
Preferred Cash Dividend, payable Nov. 1, 2012
|
|
Petty Cash Fund
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Receivable
|
|
Debt Investments (trading)
|
Federal Income Taxes Payable
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
Customers’ Advances (on contracts to be completed next year)
|
|
Unamortized Bond Discount
|
Premium on Bonds Redeemable in 2012
|
|
Cash in Bank
|
Officers’ 2012 Bonus Accrued
|
|
Land
|
Accrued Payroll
|
|
Inventory of Operating Parts and Supplies
|
Notes Payable
|
|
Inventory of Raw Materials
|
Interest Expense
|
|
Patents
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
Cash and U.S. Government Bonds Set Aside for Property Additions
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Investment in Subsidiary
|
Paid in Capital in Excess of Par
|
|
Accounts Receivable:
|
Accrued Interest on Notes Payable
|
|
U.S. Government Contracts
|
8% First Mortgage Bonds, to be redeemed in 2012 out of current assets
|
|
Regular
|
|
|
Installments—Due Next Year
|
|
|
Installments—Due After Next year
|
|
|
Goodwill
|
|
|
Inventory of Finished Goods
|
|
|
Inventory of Work in Process
|
|
|
Deficit
|
|
Instructions
Select the current asset and current liability items from among these debits and credits. If there appear to be certain borderline cases that you are unable to classify without further information, mention them and explain your difficulty, or give your reasons for making questionable classifications, if any.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Identifying Balance Sheet Deficiencies) The assets of Fonzarelli Corporation are presented on the next page (000s omitted).
|
FONZARELLI CORPORATION BALANCE SHEET (PARTIAL) DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$100,000
|
|
Unclaimed payroll checks
|
|
27,500
|
|
Debt investments (trading) (fair value $30,000) at cost
|
|
37,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (less bad debt reserve)
|
|
75,000
|
|
Inventory—at lower of cost (determined by the next in, first out method) or market
|
|
240,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
479,500
|
|
Tangible assets
|
|
|
|
Land (less accumulated depreciation)
|
|
80,000
|
|
Buildings and equipment
|
$800,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
250,000
|
550,000
|
|
Net tangible assets
|
|
630,000
|
|
Long term investments
|
|
|
|
Stocks and bonds
|
|
100,000
|
|
Treasury stock
|
|
70,000
|
|
Total long term investments
|
|
170,000
|
|
Other assets
|
|
|
|
Discount on bonds payable
|
|
19,400
|
|
Sinking fund
|
|
975,000
|
|
Total other assets
|
|
994,400
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$2,273,900
|
Instructions
Indicate the deficiencies, if any, in the foregoing presentation of Fonzarelli Corporation’s assets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Presentation of Property, Plant, and Equipment) Carol Keene, corporate cotroller for Dumaine Industries, is trying to decide how to present “Property, plant, and equipment” in the balance sheet. She realizes that the statement of cash flows will show that the company made a significant investment in purchasing new equipment this year, but overall she knows the company’s plant assets are rather old. She feels that she can disclose one figure titled “Property, plant, and equipment, net of depreciation,” and the result will be a low figure. However, it will not disclose the age of the assets. If she chooses to show the cost less accumulated depreciation, the age of the assets will be apparent. She proposes the following.
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net of depreciation
|
$10,000,000
|
|
rather than
|
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
$50,000,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
40,000,000
|
|
Net book value
|
$10,000,000
|
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
(a) What are the ethical issues involved?
(b) What should Keene do?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash Flow Analysis) The partner in charge of the Kappeler Corporation audit comes by your desk and leaves a letter he has started to the CEO and a copy of the cash flow statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Because he must leave on an emergency, he asks you to finish the letter by explaining:
(1) the disparity between net income and cash flow; (2) the importance of operating cash flow; (3) the renewable source(s) of cash flow; and (4) possible suggestions to improve the cash position.
|
KAPPELER CORPORATION STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Cash flows from operating activities
|
|
|
|
Net income
|
|
$100,000
|
|
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
|
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
$10,000
|
|
|
Amortization expense
|
1,000
|
|
|
Loss on sale of fi xed assets
|
5,000
|
|
|
Increase in accounts receivable (net)
|
40,000
|
|
|
Increase in inventory
|
35,000
|
|
|
Decrease in accounts payable
|
41,000
|
100,000
|
|
Net cash provided by operating activities
|
|
–0–
|
|
Cash flows from investing activities
|
|
|
|
Sale of plant assets
|
25,000
|
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
100,000
|
|
|
Purchase of land
|
200,000
|
|
|
Net cash used by investing activities
|
|
275,000
|
|
Cash flows from financing activities
|
|
|
|
Payment of dividends
|
10,000
|
|
|
Redemption of bonds
|
100,000
|
|
|
Net cash used by financing activities
|
|
110,000
|
|
Net decrease in cash
|
|
385,000
|
|
Cash balance, January 1, 2012
|
|
400,000
|
|
Cash balance, December 31, 2012
|
|
$15,000
|
Date
President Kappeler, CEO
Kappeler Corporation
125 Wall Street
Middleton, Kansas 67458
Dear Mr. Kappeler:
I have good news and bad news about the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012.
The good news is that net income of $100,000 is close to what we predicted in the strategic plan last year, indicating strong performance this year. The bad news is that the cash balance is seriously low. Enclosed is the Statement of Cash Flows, which best illustrates how both of these situations occurred simultaneously . …
Instructions
Complete the letter to the CEO, including the four components requested by your boss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Financial Reporting Problem
The Procter & Gamble Company (P&G)
Instructions
Refer to P&G’s financial statements and the accompanying notes to answer the following questions.
(a) What alternative formats could P&G have adopted for its balance sheet? Which format did it adopt?
(b) Identify the various techniques of disclosure P&G might have used to disclose additional pertinent financial information. Which technique does it use in its financials?
(c) In what classifications are P&G’s investments reported? What valuation basis does P&G use to report its investments? How much working capital did P&G have on June 30, 2009? On June 30, 2008?
(d) What were P&G’s cash flows from its operating, investing, and financing activities for 2009?
What were its trends in net cash provided by operating activities over the period 2007 to 2009? Explain why the change in accounts payable and in accrued and other liabilities is added to net income to arrive at net cash provided by operating activities.
(e) Compute P&G’s (1) current cash debt coverage ratio, (2) cash debt coverage ratio, and (3) free cash flow for 2009. What do these ratios indicate about P&G’s financial condition?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative Analysis Case
The Coca Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc.
Instructions
(a) What format(s) did these companies use to present their balance sheets?
(b) How much working capital did each of these companies have at the end of 2009? Speculate as to their rationale for the amount of working capital they maintain.
(c) What is the most significant difference in the asset structure of the two companies? What causes this difference?
(d) What are the companies’ annual and 5 year (2005–2009) growth rates in total assets and long term debt?
(e) What were these two companies’ trends in net cash provided by operating activities over the period 2007 to 2009?
(f) Compute both companies’ (1) current cash debt coverage ratio, (2) cash debt coverage ratio, and (3) free cash flow. What do these ratios indicate about the financial condition of the two companies?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statement Analysis Cases
Case: Uniroyal Technology Corporation
Uniroyal Technology Corporation (UTC), with corporate offices in Sarasota, Florida, is organized into three operating segments. The high performance plastics segment is responsible for research, development, and manufacture of a wide variety of products, including orthopedic braces, graffiti resistant seats for buses and airplanes, and a static resistant plastic used in the central processing units of microcomputers. The coated fabrics segment manufactures products such as automobile seating, door and instrument panels, and specialty items such as waterproof seats for personal watercraft and stain resistant, easy cleaning upholstery fabrics. The foams and adhesives segment develops and manufactures products used in commercial roofing applications. The following items relate to operations in a recent year.
1. Serious pressure was placed on profitability by sharply increasing raw material prices. Some raw materials increased in price 50% during the past year. Cost containment programs were instituted and product prices were increased whenever possible, which resulted in profit margins actually improving over the course of the year.
2. The company entered into a revolving credit agreement, under which UTC may borrow the lesser of $15,000,000 or 80% of eligible accounts receivable. At the end of the year, approximately $4,000,000 was outstanding under this agreement. The company plans to use this line of credit in the upcoming year to fi nance operations and expansion.
Instructions
(a) Should investors be informed of raw materials price increases, such as described in item 1? Does the fact that the company successfully met the challenge of higher prices affect the answer? Explain.
(b) How should the information in item 2 be presented in the financial statements of UTC?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case: Deere & Company
Presented below is the SEC mandated disclosure of contractual obligations provided by Deere & Company in a recent annual report. Deere & Company reported current assets of $27,208 and total current liabilities of $15,922 at year end. All dollars are in millions.
Aggregate Contractual Obligations
The payment schedule for the company’s contractual obligations at year end in millions of dollars is as follows:
| |
Total
|
Less than 1 year
|
2&3 years
|
4&5 years
|
More than 5 years
|
|
Debt
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment operations
|
$2,061
|
$130
|
$321
|
|
$1,610
|
|
Financial Services
|
19,598
|
8,515
|
7,025
|
$3,003
|
1,055
|
|
Total
|
21,659
|
8,645
|
7,346
|
3,003
|
2,665
|
|
Interest on debt
|
3,857
|
941
|
1,102
|
557
|
1,257
|
|
Purchase obligations
|
3,212
|
3,172
|
26
|
9
|
5
|
|
Operating leases
|
358
|
100
|
120
|
58
|
80
|
|
Capital leases
|
29
|
3
|
6
|
4
|
16
|
|
Total
|
$29,115
|
$12,861
|
$8,600
|
$3,631
|
$4,023
|
Instructions
(a) Compute Deere & Company’s working capital and current ratio (current assets 4 current liabilities) with and without the contractual obligations reported in the schedule.
(b) Briefly discuss how the information provided in the contractual obligation disclosure would be useful in evaluating Deere & Company for loans: (1) due in one year, (2) due in five years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case: Amazon.com
The incredible growth of Amazon.com has put fear into the hearts of traditional retailers. Amazon’s stock price has soared to amazing levels. However, it is often pointed out in the financial press that it took the company several years to report its first profit. The following financial information is taken from Amazon’s recent annual report.
|
($ in millions)
|
Current Year
|
Prior Year
|
|
Current assets
|
$3,373
|
$2,929
|
|
Total assets
|
4,363
|
3,696
|
|
Current liabilities
|
2,532
|
1,899
|
|
Total liabilities
|
3,932
|
3,450
|
|
Cash provided by operations
|
702
|
733
|
|
Capital expenditures
|
216
|
204
|
|
Dividends paid
|
0
|
0
|
|
Net income(loss)
|
190
|
359
|
|
Sales
|
10,711
|
8,490
|
Instructions
(a) Calculate free cash flow for Amazon for the current and prior years, and discuss its ability to finance expansion from internally generated cash. Thus far Amazon has avoided purchasing large warehouses. Instead, it has used those of others. It is possible, however, that
in order to increase customer satisfaction the company may have to build its own warehouses. If this happens, how might your impression of its ability to finance expansion change?
(b) Discuss any potential implications of the change in Amazon’s cash provided by operations from the prior year to the current year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Professional Simulation
The professional simulation for this chapter asks you to address questions related to the balance sheet.
Your client, Lance Livestrong, is preparing for a meeting with investors. He would like to provide appropriate information about his company’s financial position. Lance has provided the following accounts and balances at December 31, 2012, for Lance Livestrong Company.
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
38,500
|
|
|
Inventory
|
65,300
|
|
|
Equipment (net)
|
104,000
|
|
|
Patents
|
25,000
|
|
|
Notes and Accounts Payable
|
|
$57,000
|
|
Long Term Liabilities
|
|
100,000
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
125,800
|
| |
$282,800
|
$282,800
|
Except for the following items, all adjustments have been recorded in the accounts.
1. Cash includes $200 petty cash and $20,000 in a fund designated for plant expansion in 2015.
2. The net accounts receivable is comprised of (a) accounts receivable $52,000 and (b) allowance for doubtful accounts $13,500.
3. Equipment had a cost of $132,000 and accumulated depreciation of $28,000.
4. Notes and Accounts Payable is comprised of the following: Accounts Payable $32,000; Income Taxes
Payable $8,000; Notes Payable $17,000, due June 30, 2013.
5. Long term liabilities are 10 year bonds paying interest at 9%, maturing June 30, 2020.
6. Stockholders’ equity is comprised of Common Stock ($1 par) $50,000; Additional Paid in Capital $55,000; and Retained Earnings $20,800.
Prepare a corrected classified balance sheet for Lance Live strong Company at December 31, 2012.
Live strong received a call from a concerned investor about the likelihood that Live strong Company would declare bankruptcy. Compute the Altman Z score and interpret it for Live strong in responding to this investor. Sales for 2012 was $210,000; earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT) for 2012 is $14,000. The market value (MV) of equity for Live strong is $225,000. Live strong is proud of his reporting and disclosure practices. He provides the three primary financial statements along with a president’s letter describing the company’s accomplishments for the past year.
He is wondering whether he is required by GAAP to provide any disclosure about his accounting policies. Use the FASB Codification database to provide the authoritative guidance related to accounting policy disclosures. (Provide text strings used in the search.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Where can authoritative IFRS guidance be found related to the statement of financial position (balance sheet) and the statement of cash flows?
2. Briefly describe some of the similarities and differences between GAAP and IFRS with respect to statement of financial position (balance sheet) reporting.
3. Briefly describe the convergence efforts related to financial statement presentation.
4. Rainmaker Company prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS. In 2012, Rainmaker recorded the following revaluation adjustments related to its buildings and land: The company’s building increased in value by $200,000; its land declined by $35,000. How will these revaluation adjustments affect Rainmaker’s balance sheet? Will the reporting differ under GAAP? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Avon Rubber plc
Consolidated Income Statement for the Year Ended 30 September
| |
2009
|
2008
|
|
Continuing operations
|
|
|
|
Revenue
|
91,688
|
54,606
|
|
Cost of sales
|
68,148
|
44,476
|
|
Gross profit
|
23,540
|
10,130
|
|
Distribution costs
|
4,676
|
3,445
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
16,881
|
20,496
|
|
Other operating income
|
120
|
1,225
|
|
Operating profit/(loss) from continuing operations
|
2,103
|
12,586
|
|
Operating profit/(loss) is analysed as:
|
|
|
|
Before depreciation, amortization and exceptional items
|
8,595
|
686
|
|
Depreciation and amortization
|
3,957
|
3,419
|
|
Operating profit/(loss) before exceptional items
|
4,638
|
4,105
|
|
Exceptional operating items
|
2,535
|
8,481
|
|
Finance income
|
33
|
27
|
|
Finance costs
|
1,539
|
1,015
|
|
Other finance income
|
394
|
1,183
|
|
Profit/(loss) before taxation
|
991
|
12,391
|
|
Taxation
|
1,699
|
1,259
|
|
Profit/(loss) for the year from continuing operations
|
708
|
11,132
|
|
Discontinued operations
|
|
|
|
Profit/(loss) for the year from discontinued operations
|
566
|
8,337
|
|
Loss for the year
|
142
|
19,469
|
|
Earnings/(loss) per share
|
|
|
|
Basic
|
(0.6)p
|
(68.4)p
|
|
Diluted
|
(0.6)p
|
(68.4)p
|
|
Earnings/(loss) per share from continuing operations
|
|
|
|
Basic
|
(2.6)p
|
(39.1)p
|
|
Diluted
|
(2.6)p
|
(39.1)p
|
Instructions
(a) Review the Avon Rubber income statement and identify at least three differences between the IFRS income statement and an income statement of a U.S. company as presented in the chapter.
(b) Identify any irregular items reported by Avon Rubber. Is the reporting of these irregular items in Avon’s income statement similar to reporting of these items in U.S. companies’ income statements? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Refer to the definition of assets on page 216. Discuss how a leased building might qualify as an asset of the lessee (tenant) under this definition.
2. Kathleen Battle says, “Retained earnings should be reported as an asset, since it is earnings which are reinvested in the business.” How would you respond to Battle?
3. The creditors of Chester Company agree to accept promissory notes for the amount of its indebtedness with a proviso that two thirds of the annual profits must be applied to their liquidation. How should these notes be reported on the balance sheet of the issuing company? Give a reason for your answer.
4. What is the purpose of a statement of cash flows? How does it differ from a balance sheet and an income statement?
5. The net income for the year for Genesis, Inc. is $750,000, but the statement of cash flows reports that the cash provided by operating activities is $640,000. What might account for the difference?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Harding Corporation has the following accounts included in its December 31, 2012, trial balance:
Accounts Receivable $110,000; Inventory $290,000; Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $8,000; Patents $72,000; Prepaid Insurance $9,500; Accounts Payable $77,000; Cash $30,000. Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet, listing the accounts in proper sequence.
2. Koch Corporation’s adjusted trial balance contained the following asset accounts at December 31, 2012: Cash $7,000; Land $40,000; Patents $12,500; Accounts Receivable $90,000; Prepaid Insurance $5,200; Inventory $30,000; Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $4,000; Equity Investments (trading) $11,000. Prepare the current assets section of the balance sheet, listing the accounts in proper sequence.
3. Included in Outkast Company’s December 31, 2012, trial balance are the following accounts: Prepaid Rent $5,200; Debt Investments $56,000; Unearned Fees $17,000; Land (held for investment) $39,000; Notes Receivable (long term) $42,000. Prepare the long term investments section of the balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Lowell Company’s December 31, 2012, trial balance includes the following accounts: Inventory $120,000; Buildings $207,000; Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment $19,000; Equipment $190,000; Land (held for investment) $46,000; Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings $45,000; Land $71,000; Timberland $70,000. Prepare the property, plant, and equipment section of the balance sheet.
2. Crane Corporation has the following accounts included in its December 31, 2012, trial balance:
Equity Investments (trading) $21,000; Goodwill $150,000; Prepaid Insurance $12,000; Patents $220,000; Franchises $130,000. Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet.
3. Patrick Corporation’s adjusted trial balance contained the following asset accounts at December 31, 2012: Prepaid Rent $12,000; Goodwill $50,000; Franchise Fees Receivable $2,000; Franchises $47,000; Patents $33,000; Trademarks $10,000. Prepare the intangible assets section of the balance sheet.
4. Thomas Corporation’s adjusted trial balance contained the following liability accounts at December 31, 2012: Bonds Payable (due in 3 years) $100,000; Accounts Payable $72,000; Notes Payable (due in 90 days) $22,500; Salaries and Wages Payable $4,000; Income Taxes Payable $7,000. Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet.
5. Included in Adams Company’s December 31, 2012, trial balance are the following accounts:
Accounts Payable $220,000; Pension Asset/Liability $375,000; Discount on Bonds Payable $29,000; Unearned Revenue $41,000; Bonds Payable $400,000; Salaries and Wages Payable $27,000; Interest Payable $12,000; Income Taxes Payable $29,000.
Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Keyser Beverage Company reported the following items in the most recent year.
|
Net income
|
$40,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
5,000
|
|
Increase in accounts receivable
|
10,000
|
|
Increase in accounts payable
|
7,000
|
|
Purchase of equipment (capital expenditure)
|
8,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
4,000
|
|
Issue of notes payable
|
20,000
|
Compute net cash provided by operating activities, the net change in cash during the year, and free cash flow.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Ames Company reported 2012 net income of $151,000. During 2012, accounts receivable increased by $13,000 and accounts payable increased by $9,500. Depreciation expense was $44,000. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows.
2. Martinez Corporation engaged in the following cash transactions during 2012.
|
Sale of land and building
|
$191,000
|
|
Purchase of treasury stock
|
40,000
|
|
Purchase of land
|
37,000
|
|
Payment of cash dividend
|
95,000
|
|
Purchase of equipment
|
53,000
|
|
Issuance of common stock
|
147,000
|
|
Retirement of bonds
|
100,000
|
Compute the net cash provided (used) by investing activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Balance Sheet Classifications) Presented below are a number of balance sheet accounts of Cunningham, Inc.
(a) Investment in Preferred Stock.
(b) Treasury Stock.
(c) Common Stock.
(d) Dividends Payable.
(e) Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment.
(f) Construction in Process.
(g) Petty Cash.
(h) Interest Payable.
(i) Deficit.
(j) Equity Investments (trading).
(k) Income Tax Payable.
(l) Unearned Subscription Revenue.
(m) Work in Process.
(n) Vacation Wages Payable.
Instructions
For each of the accounts above, indicate the proper balance sheet classification. In the case of borderline items, indicate the additional information that would be required to determine the proper classification.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Classification of Balance Sheet Accounts) Assume that Masters Enterprises uses the following headings on its balance sheet.
(a) Current assets.
(b) Investments.
(c) Property, plant, and equipment.
(d) Intangible assets.
(e) Other assets.
(f) Current liabilities.
(g) Long term liabilities.
(h) Capital stock.
(i) Paid in capital in excess of par.
(j) Retained earnings.
Instructions
Indicate by letter how each of the following usually should be classified. If an item should appear in a note to the financial statements, use the letter “N” to indicate this fact. If an item need not be reported at all on the balance sheet, use the letter “X.”
1. Prepaid insurance.
2. Stock owned in affiliated companies.
3. Unearned subscriptions revenue.
4. Advances to suppliers.
5. Unearned rent revenue.
6. Preferred stock.
7. Additional paid in capital on preferred stock.
8. Copyrights.
9. Petty cash fund.
10. Sales tax payable.
11. Accrued interest on notes receivable.
12. Twenty year issue of bonds payable that will mature within the next year. (No sinking fund exists, and refunding is not planned.)
13. Machinery retired from use and held for sale.
14. Fully depreciated machine still in use.
15. Accrued interest on bonds payable.
16. Salaries that company budget shows will be paid to employees within the next year.
17. Discount on bonds payable. (Assume related to bonds payable in No. 12.)
18. Accumulated depreciation—buildings.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Classified Balance Sheet) Assume that Gulistan Inc. has the following accounts at the end of the current year.
1. Common Stock.
2. Discount on Bonds Payable.
3. Treasury Stock (at cost).
4. Notes Payable (short term).
5. Raw Materials.
6. Preferred Stock Investments (long term).
7. Unearned Rent Revenue.
8. Work in Process.
9. Copyrights.
10. Buildings.
11. Notes Receivable (short term).
12. Cash.
13. Salaries and Wages Payable.
14. Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings.
15. Cash Restricted for Plant Expansion.
16. Land Held for Future Plant Site.
17. Allowance for Doubtful Accounts—Accounts Receivable.
18. Retained Earnings.
19. Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock.
20. Unearned Subscriptions Revenue.
21. Receivables—Officers (due in one year).
22. Finished Goods.
23. Accounts Receivable.
24. Bonds Payable (due in 4 years).
Instructions
Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form. (No monetary amounts are necessary.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Corrected Balance Sheet) Bruno Company has decided to expand its operations. The bookkeeper recently completed the balance sheet presented on the next page in order to obtain additional funds for expansion.
|
BRUNO COMPANY BALANCE SHEET DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
Cash
|
$260,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
340,000
|
|
Inventories (lower of average cost or market)
|
401,000
|
|
Equity investments (trading)—at cost (fair value $120,000)
|
140,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
|
|
Buildings (net)
|
570,000
|
|
Office equipment (net)
|
160,000
|
|
Land held for future use
|
175,000
|
|
Intangible assets
|
|
|
Goodwill
|
80,000
|
|
Cash surrender value of life insurance
|
90,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
12,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
135,000
|
|
Notes payable (due next year)
|
125,000
|
|
Pension obligation
|
82,000
|
|
Rent payable
|
49,000
|
|
Premium on bonds payable
|
53,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
500,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
Common stock, $1.00 par, authorized
|
|
|
400,000 shares, issued 290,000
|
290,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
180,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
?
|
Instructions
Prepare a revised balance sheet given the available information. Assume that the accumulated depreciation balance for the buildings is $160,000 and for the office equipment, $105,000. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a balance of $17,000. The pension obligation is considered a long term liability.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Corrections of a Balance Sheet) The bookkeeper for Garfield Company has prepared the following balance sheet as of July 31, 2012.
|
GARFIELD COMPANY BALANCE SHEET AS OF JULY 31, 2012
|
|
Cash
|
$69,000
|
Notes and accounts payable
|
$44,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
40,500
|
Long term liabilities
|
75,000
|
|
Inventory
|
60,000
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
155,500
|
|
Equipment (net)
|
84,000
|
|
$274,500
|
|
Patents
|
21,000
|
|
|
| |
$274,500
|
|
|
The following additional information is provided.
1. Cash includes $1,200 in a petty cash fund and $12,000 in a bond sinking fund.
2. The net accounts receivable balance is comprised of the following three items: (a) accounts receivable—debit balances $52,000; (b) accounts receivable—credit balances $8,000; (c) allowance for doubtful accounts $3,500.
3. Merchandise inventory costing $5,300 was shipped out on consignment on July 31, 2012. The ending inventory balance does not include the consigned goods. Receivables in the amount of $5,300 were recognized on these consigned goods.
4. Equipment had a cost of $112,000 and an accumulated depreciation balance of $28,000.
5. Taxes payable of $9,000 were accrued on July 31. Garfield Company, however, had set up a cash fund to meet this obligation. This cash fund was not included in the cash balance, but was offset against the taxes payable amount.
Instructions
Prepare a corrected classified balance sheet as of July 31, 2012, from the available information, adjusting the account balances using the additional information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Current Assets Section of the Balance Sheet) Presented below are selected accounts of Aramis Company at December 31, 2012.
|
Finished Goods
|
$52,000
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Unearned Revenue
|
90,000
|
Notes Receivable
|
40,000
|
|
Equipment
|
253,000
|
Accounts Receivable
|
161,000
|
|
Work in Process
|
34,000
|
Raw Materials
|
187,000
|
|
Cash
|
42,000
|
Supplies Expense
|
60,000
|
|
Equity Investments (short term)
|
31,000
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
12,000
|
|
Customer Advances
|
36,000
|
Licenses
|
18,000
|
|
Cash Restricted for Plant Expansion
|
50,000
|
Additional Paid in Capital
|
88,000
|
| |
|
Treasury Stock
|
22,000
|
The following additional information is available.
1. Inventories are valued at lower of cost or market using LIFO.
2. Equipment is recorded at cost. Accumulated depreciation, computed on a straight line basis, is $50,600.
3. The short term investments have a fair value of $29,000. (Assume they are trading securities.)
4. The notes receivable are due April 30, 2014, with interest receivable every April 30. The notes bear interest at 6%. (Hint: Accrue interest due on December 31, 2012.)
5. The allowance for doubtful accounts applies to the accounts receivable. Accounts receivable of $50,000 are pledged as collateral on a bank loan.
6. Licenses are recorded net of accumulated amortization of $14,000.
7. Treasury stock is recorded at cost.
Instructions
Prepare the current assets section of Aramis Company’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet, with appropriate disclosures.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Current vs. Long term Liabilities) Pascal Corporation is preparing its December 31, 2012, balance sheet. The following items may be reported as either a current or long term liability.
1. On December 15, 2012, Pascal declared a cash dividend of $2.00 per share to stockholders of record on December 31. The dividend is payable on January 15, 2013. Pascal has issued 1,000,000 shares of common stock, of which 50,000 shares are held in treasury.
2. At December 31, bonds payable of $100,000,000 are outstanding. The bonds pay 10% interest every September 30 and mature in installments of $25,000,000 every September 30, beginning September 30, 2013.
3. At December 31, 2011, customer advances were $12,000,000. During 2012, Pascal collected $30,000,000 of customer advances, and advances of $25,000,000 were earned.
Instructions
For each item above, indicate the dollar amounts to be reported as a current liability and as a long term liability, if any.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Current Assets and Current Liabilities) The current assets and current liabilities sections of the balance sheet of Agincourt Company appear as follows.
|
AGINCOURT COMPANY BALANCE SHEET (PARTIAL) DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Cash
|
|
$40,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$61,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$89,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
67,000
|
|
Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
7,000
|
82,000
|
|
$128,000
|
|
Inventory
|
|
171,000
|
|
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
|
9,000
|
|
|
| |
|
$302,000
|
|
|
The following errors in the corporation’s accounting have been discovered:
1. January 2013 cash disbursements entered as of December 2012 included payments of accounts payable in the amount of $35,000, on which a cash discount of 2% was taken.
2. The inventory included $27,000 of merchandise that had been received at December 31 but for which no purchase invoices had been received or entered. Of this amount, $10,000 had been received on consignment; the remainder was purchased f.o.b. destination, terms 2/10, n/30.
3. Sales for the first four days in January 2013 in the amount of $30,000 were entered in the sales book as of December 31, 2012. Of these, $21,500 were sales on account and the remainder were cash sales.
4. Cash, not including cash sales, collected in January 2013 and entered as of December 31, 2012, totaled $35,324. Of this amount, $23,324 was received on account after cash discounts of 2% had been deducted; the remainder represented the proceeds of a bank loan.
Instructions
(a) Restate the current assets and current liabilities sections of the balance sheet in accordance with good accounting practice. (Assume that both accounts receivable and accounts payable are recorded gross.)
(b) State the net effect of your adjustments on Agincourt Company’s retained earnings balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Current Liabilities) Mary Pierce is the controller of Arnold Corporation and is responsible for the preparation of the year end financial statements. The following transactions occurred during the year.
(a) On December 20, 2012, an employee filed a legal action against Arnold for $100,000 for wrongful dismissal. Management believes the action to be frivolous and without merit. The likelihood of payment to the employee is remote.
(b) Bonuses to key employees based on net income for 2012 are estimated to be $150,000.
(c) On December 1, 2012, the company borrowed $900,000 at 8% per year. Interest is paid quarterly.
(d) Credit sales for the year amounted to $10,000,000. Arnold’s expense provision for doubtful accounts is estimated to be 2% of credit sales.
(e) On December 15, 2012, the company declared a $2.00 per share dividend on the 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding, to be paid on January 5, 2013.
(f) During the year, customer advances of $160,000 were received; $50,000 of this amount was earned by December 31, 2012.
Instructions
For each item above, indicate the dollar amount to be reported as a current liability. If a liability is not reported, explain why.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Balance Sheet Preparation) Presented below is the adjusted trial balance of Abbey Corporation at December 31, 2012.
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$ ?
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,200
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
1,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
48,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$9,000
|
|
Trademarks
|
950
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
500
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
2,000
|
|
Bonds Payable (due 2017)
|
|
9,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
20,000
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
10,000
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
9,000
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
1,400
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
1,200
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
900
|
|
|
Total
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
Additional information:
1. Net loss for the year was $2,500.
2. No dividends were declared during 2012.
Instructions
Prepare a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Balance Sheet) Presented below is the trial balance of Vivaldi Corporation at December 31, 2012.
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash
|
$197,000
|
|
|
Sales
|
|
$7,900,000
|
|
Debt Investments (trading) (cost, $145,000)
|
153,000
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
4,800,000
|
|
|
Debt Investments (long term)
|
299,000
|
|
|
Equity Investments (long term)
|
277,000
|
|
|
Notes Payable (short term)
|
|
90,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
455,000
|
|
Selling Expenses
|
2,000,000
|
|
|
Investment Revenue
|
|
63,000
|
|
Land
|
260,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
1,040,000
|
|
|
Dividends Payable
|
|
136,000
|
|
Accrued Liabilities
|
|
96,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
435,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
|
352,000
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
25,000
|
|
Administrative Expenses
|
900,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
211,000
|
|
|
Inventory
|
597,000
|
|
|
Extraordinary Gain
|
|
80,000
|
|
Notes Payable (long term)
|
|
900,000
|
|
Equipment
|
600,000
|
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
|
1,000,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
60,000
|
|
Franchises
|
160,000
|
|
|
Common Stock ($5 par)
|
|
1,000,000
|
|
Treasury Stock
|
191,000
|
|
|
Patents
|
195,000
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
78,000
|
|
Paid in Capital in Excess of Par
|
|
80,000
|
|
Totals
|
$12,315,000
|
$12,315,000
|
Instructions
Prepare a balance sheet at December 31, 2012, for Vivaldi Corporation. Ignore income taxes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Statement of Cash Flows—Classifications) The major classifications of activities reported in the statement of cash flows are operating, investing, and financing. Classify each of the transactions listed below as:
1. Operating activity—add to net income.
2. Operating activity—deduct from net income.
3. Investing activity.
4. Financing activity.
5. Reported as significant noncash activity.
The transactions are as follows.
(a) Issuance of capital stock.
(b) Purchase of land and building.
(c) Redemption of bonds.
(d) Sale of equipment.
(e) Depreciation of machinery.
(f) Amortization of patent.
(g) Issuance of bonds for plant assets.
(h) Payment of cash dividends.
(i) Exchange of furniture for office equipment.
(j) Purchase of treasury stock.
(k) Loss on sale of equipment.
(l) Increase in accounts receivable during the year.
(m) Decrease in accounts payable during the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows) The comparative balance sheets of Connecticut Inc. at the beginning and the end of the year 2012 appear on the next page.
|
CONNECTICUT INC. BALANCE SHEETS
|
|
Assets
|
Dec. 31, 2012
|
Jan. 1, 2012
|
Inc./Dec.
|
|
Cash
|
$45,000
|
$13,000
|
$32,000 Inc.
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
91,000
|
88,000
|
3,000 Inc.
|
|
Equipment
|
39,000
|
22,000
|
17,000 Inc.
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
17,000
|
11,000
|
6,000 Inc.
|
|
Total
|
$158,000
|
$112,000
|
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$20,000
|
$15,000
|
5,000 Inc.
|
|
Common stock
|
100,000
|
80,000
|
20,000 Inc.
|
|
Retained earnings
|
38,000
|
17,000
|
21,000 Inc.
|
|
Total
|
$158,000
|
$112,000
|
|
Net income of $34,000 was reported, and dividends of $13,000 were paid in 2012. New equipment was purchased and none was sold.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows) A comparative balance sheet for Orozco Corporation is presented below.
| |
31 Dec
|
|
|
Assets
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
$63,000
|
$22,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
82,000
|
66,000
|
|
Inventory
|
180,000
|
189,000
|
|
Land
|
71,000
|
110,000
|
|
Equipment
|
270,000
|
200,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
69,000
|
42,000
|
|
Total
|
$597,000
|
$545,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$34,000
|
$47,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
150,000
|
200,000
|
|
Common stock ($1 par)
|
214,000
|
164,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
199,000
|
134,000
|
|
Total
|
$597,000
|
$545,000
|
Additional information:
1. Net income for 2012 was $105,000.
2. Cash dividends of $40,000 were declared and paid.
3. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were retired through issuance of common stock.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012 for Orozco Corporation.
(b) Determine Orozco Corporation’s current cash debt coverage ratio, cash debt coverage ratio, and free cash flow. Comment on its liquidity and financial flexibility.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Change in Accounting Principle) Zehms Company began operations in 2010 and adopted weighted average pricing for inventory. In 2012, in accordance with other companies in its industry, Zehms changed its inventory pricing to FIFO. The pretax income data is reported below.
|
Year
|
Weighted Average
|
FIFO
|
|
2010
|
$370,000
|
$395,000
|
|
2011
|
390,000
|
420,000
|
|
2012
|
410,000
|
460,000
|
Instructions
(a) What is Zehms’s net income in 2012? Assume a 35% tax rate in all years.
(b) Compute the cumulative effect of the change in accounting principle from weighted average to FIFO inventory pricing.
(c) Show comparative income statements for Zehms Company, beginning with income before income tax, as presented on the 2012 income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Various Reporting Formats) The following information was taken from the records of Gibson Inc. for the year 2012: income tax applicable to income from continuing operations $119,000; income tax applicable to loss on discontinued operations $25,500; income tax applicable to extraordinary gain $32,300; income tax applicable to extraordinary loss $20,400; and unrealized holding gain on available for sale securities $15,000.
|
Extraordinary gain
|
$ 95,000
|
Cash dividends declared
|
$ 150,000
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
75,000
|
Retained earnings January 1, 2012
|
600,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
240,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
850,000
|
|
Rent revenue
|
40,000
|
Selling expenses
|
300,000
|
|
Extraordinary loss
|
60,000
|
Sales revenue
|
1,700,000
|
Shares outstanding during 2012 were 100,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a single step income statement for 2012.
(b) Prepare a retained earnings statement for 2012.
(c) Show how comprehensive income is reported using the second income statement format.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Single Step Income, Retained Earnings, Periodic Inventory) Presented below is the trial balance of Thompson Corporation at December 31, 2012.
|
THOMPSON CORPORATION TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
| |
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Purchase Discounts
|
|
$10,000
|
|
Cash
|
$189,700
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
105,000
|
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
18,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
160,000
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
18,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
1,100,000
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
110,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
49,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
28,000
|
|
Sales Discounts
|
14,500
|
|
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
17,500
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
70,000
|
|
Selling Expenses
|
232,000
|
|
|
Administrative Expenses
|
99,000
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
300,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
53,900
|
|
|
Cash Dividends
|
45,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
5,000
|
|
Supplies
|
14,000
|
|
|
Freight in
|
20,000
|
|
|
Land
|
70,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
140,000
|
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
|
100,000
|
|
Gain on Sale of Land
|
|
30,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
|
19,600
|
|
Inventory
|
89,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
98,000
|
|
|
Purchases
|
610,000
|
|
|
Totals
|
$1,907,600
|
$1,907,600
|
A physical count of inventory on December 31 resulted in an inventory amount of $64,000; thus, cost of goods sold for 2012 is $645,000.
Instructions
Prepare a single step income statement and a retained earnings statement. Assume that the only changes in retained earnings during the current year were from net income and dividends. Thirty thousand shares of common stock were outstanding the entire year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Multiple and Single Step Income, Retained Earnings) The following account balances were included in the trial balance of Twain Corporation at June 30, 2012.
|
Sales revenue
|
$1,578,500
|
Depreciation expense (office furniture and equipment)
|
$7,250
|
|
Sales discounts
|
31,150
|
Property tax expense
|
7,320
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
896,770
|
Bad debt expense (selling)
|
4,850
|
|
Salaries and wages expense (sales)
|
56,260
|
Maintenance and repairs expense (administration)
|
9,130
|
|
Sales commissions
|
97,600
|
Office expense
|
6,000
|
|
Travel expense (salespersons)
|
28,930
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
62,300
|
|
Freight out
|
21,400
|
Dividends received
|
38,000
|
|
Entertainment expense
|
14,820
|
Interest expense
|
18,000
|
|
Telephone and Internet expense (sales)
|
9,030
|
Income tax expense
|
102,000
|
|
Depreciation expense (sales equipment)
|
4,980
|
Depreciation understatement due to error—2009 (net of tax)
|
17,700
|
|
Maintenance and repairs expense (sales)
|
6,200
|
Dividends declared on preferred stock
|
9,000
|
|
Miscellaneous selling expenses
|
4,715
|
Dividends declared on common stock
|
37,000
|
|
Office supplies used
|
3,450
|
|
|
|
Telephone and Internet expense (administration)
|
2,820
|
|
|
The Retained Earnings account had a balance of $337,000 at July 1, 2011. There are 80,000 shares of common stock outstanding.
Instructions
(a) Using the multiple step form, prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ended June 30, 2012.
(b) Using the single step form, prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ended June 30, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Irregular Items) Presented below is a combined single step income and retained earnings statement for Nerwin Company for 2012.
| |
|
(000 omitted)
|
|
Net sales
|
|
$640,000
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$500,000
|
|
|
Selling, general, and administrative expenses
|
66,000
|
|
|
Other, net
|
17,000
|
583,000
|
|
Income before income tax
|
|
57,000
|
|
Income tax
|
|
19,400
|
|
Net income
|
|
37,600
|
|
Retained earnings at beginning of period, as previously reported
|
141,000
|
|
|
Adjustment required for correction of error
|
7,000
|
|
|
Retained earnings at beginning of period, as restated
|
|
134,000
|
|
Dividends on common stock
|
|
12,200
|
|
Retained earnings at end of period
|
|
$159,400
|
Additional facts are as follows.
1. “Selling, general, and administrative expenses” for 2012 included a charge of $8,500,000 that was usual but infrequently occurring.
2. “Other, net” for 2012 included an extraordinary item (charge) of $6,000,000. If the extraordinary item (charge) had not occurred, income taxes for 2012 would have been $21,400,000 instead of $19,400,000.
3. “Adjustment required for correction of an error” was a result of a change in estimate (useful life of certain assets reduced to 8 years and a catch up adjustment made).
4. Nerwin Company disclosed earnings per common share for net income in the notes to the financial statements.
Instructions
Determine from these additional facts whether the presentation of the facts in the Nerwin Company income and retained earnings statement is appropriate. If the presentation is not appropriate, describe the appropriate presentation and discuss its theoretical rationale. (Do not prepare a revised statement.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retained Earnings Statement, Prior Period Adjustment) Below is the Retained Earnings account for the year 2012 for Acadian Corp.
|
Retained earnings, January 1, 2012
|
|
$257,600
|
|
Add:
|
|
|
|
Gain on sale of investments (net of tax)
|
$41,200
|
|
|
Net income
|
84,500
|
|
|
Refund on litigation with government, related to the year 2009 (net of tax)
|
21,600
|
|
|
Recognition of income earned in 2011, but omitted from income statement in that year (net of tax)
|
25,400
|
172,700
|
| |
|
430,300
|
|
Deduct:
|
|
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations (net of tax)
|
35,000
|
|
|
Write off of goodwill (net of tax)
|
60,000
|
|
|
Cumulative effect on income of prior years in changing from
|
|
|
|
LIFO to FIFO inventory valuation in 2012 (net of tax)
|
23,200
|
|
|
Cash dividends declared
|
32,000
|
150,200
|
|
Retained earnings, December 31, 2012
|
|
$280,100
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a corrected retained earnings statement. Acadian Corp. normally sells investments of the type mentioned above. FIFO inventory was used in 2012 to compute net income.
(b) State where the items that do not appear in the corrected retained earnings statement should be shown.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Income Statement, Irregular Items) Wade Corp. has 150,000 shares of common stock outstanding. In 2012, the company reports income from continuing operations before income tax of $1,210,000. Additional transactions not considered in the $1,210,000 are as follows.
1. In 2012, Wade Corp. sold equipment for $40,000. The machine had originally cost $80,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $30,000. The gain or loss is considered ordinary.
2. The company discontinued operations of one of its subsidiaries during the current year at a loss of $190,000 before taxes. Assume that this transaction meets the criteria for discontinued operations. The loss from operations of the discontinued subsidiary was $90,000 before taxes; the loss from disposal of the subsidiary was $100,000 before taxes.
3. An internal audit discovered that amortization of intangible assets was understated by $35,000 (net of tax) in a prior period. The amount was charged against retained earnings.
4. The company had a gain of $125,000 on the condemnation of much of its property. The gain is taxed at a total effective rate of 40%. Assume that the transaction meets the requirements of an extraordinary item.
Instructions
Analyze the above information and prepare an income statement for the year 2012, starting with income from continuing operations before income tax. Compute earnings per share as it should be shown on the face of the income statement. (Assume a total effective tax rate of 38% on all items, unless otherwise indicated.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Identification of Income Statement Deficiencies) O’Malley Corporation was incorporated and began business on January 1, 2012. It has been successful and now requires a bank loan for additional working capital to finance expansion. The bank has requested an audited income statement for the year 2012. The accountant for O’Malley Corporation provides you with the following income statement which O’Malley plans to submit to the bank.
|
O’MALLEY CORPORATION INCOME STATEMENT
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
$850,000
|
|
Dividends
|
|
32,300
|
|
Gain on recovery of insurance proceeds from earthquake loss (extraordinary)
|
|
38,500
|
| |
|
920,800
|
|
Less:
|
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$101,100
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
510,000
|
|
|
Advertising expense
|
13,700
|
|
|
Loss on obsolescence of inventories
|
34,000
|
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
48,600
|
|
|
Administrative expense
|
73,400
|
780,800
|
|
Income before income tax
|
|
140,000
|
|
Income tax
|
|
56,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$84,000
|
Instructions
Indicate the deficiencies in the income statement presented above. Assume that the corporation desires a single step income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Income Reporting Deficiencies) The following represents a recent income statement for Boeing Company.
| |
($ in millions)
|
|
Sales
|
$21,924
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
20,773
|
|
Income from operations
|
1,151
|
|
Other income
|
122
|
|
Interest expense
|
130
|
|
Earnings before income taxes
|
1,143
|
|
Income taxes
|
287
|
|
Net income
|
$856
|
It includes only five separate numbers (two of which are in billions of dollars), two subtotals, and the net earnings figure.
Instructions
(a) Indicate the deficiencies in the income statement.
(b) What recommendations would you make to Boeing to improve the usefulness of its income statement?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Extraordinary Items) Derek Lee, vice president of finance for Atlanta Company, has recently been asked to discuss with the company’s division controllers the proper accounting for extraordinary items. Derek Lee prepared the factual situations presented below as a basis for discussion.
1. An earthquake destroys one of the oil refineries owned by a large multinational oil company. Earthquakes are rare in this geographical location.
2. A publicly held company has incurred a substantial loss in the unsuccessful registration of a bond issue.
3. A large portion of a cigarette manufacturer’s tobacco crops are destroyed by a hailstorm. Severe damage from hailstorms is rare in this locality.
4. A large diversified company sells a block of shares from its portfolio of securities acquired for investment purposes.
5. A company that operates a chain of warehouses sells the excess land surrounding one of its warehouses. When the company buys property to establish a new warehouse, it usually buys more land than it expects to use for the warehouse with the expectation that the land will appreciate in value. Twice during the past 5 years the company sold excess land.
6. A company experiences a material loss in the repurchase of a large bond issue that has been outstanding for 3 years. The company regularly repurchases bonds of this nature.
7. A railroad experiences an unusual flood loss to part of its track system. Flood losses normally occur every 3 or 4 years.
8. A machine tool company sells the only land it owns. The land was acquired 10 years ago for future expansion, but shortly thereafter the company abandoned all plans for expansion but decided to hold the land for appreciation.
Instructions
Determine whether the foregoing items should be classified as extraordinary items. Present a rationale for your position.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Earnings Management) Bobek Inc. has recently reported steadily increasing income. The company reported income of $20,000 in 2009, $25,000 in 2010, and $30,000 in 2011. A number of market analysts have recommended that investors buy the stock because they expect the steady growth in income to continue. Bobek is approaching the end of its fiscal year in 2012, and it again appears to be a good year.
However, it has not yet recorded warranty expense.
Based on prior experience, this year’s warranty expense should be around $5,000, but some managers have approached the controller to suggest a larger, more conservative warranty expense should be recorded this year. Income before warranty expense is $43,000. Specifically, by recording a $7,000 warranty accrual this year, Bobek could report an increase in income for this year and still be in a position to cover its warranty costs in future years.
Instructions
(a) What is earnings management?
(b) Assume income before warranty expense is $43,000 for both 2012 and 2013 and that total warranty expense over the 2 year period is $10,000. What is the effect of the proposed accounting in 2012? In 2013?
(c) What is the appropriate accounting in this situation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Earnings Management) Charlie Brown, controller for the Kelly Corporation, is preparing the company’s income statement at year end. He notes that the company lost a considerable sum on the sale of some equipment it had decided to replace. Since the company has sold equipment routinely in the past, Brown knows the losses cannot be reported as extraordinary. He also does not want to highlight it as a material loss since he feels that will reflect poorly on him and the company. He reasons that if the company had recorded more depreciation during the assets’ lives, the losses would not be so great. Since depreciation is included among the company’s operating expenses, he wants to report the losses along with the company’s expenses, where he hopes it will not be noticed.
Instructions
(a) What are the ethical issues involved?
(b) What should Brown do?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Income Reporting Items) Simpson Corp. is an entertainment firm that derives approximately 30% of its income from the Casino Knights Division, which manages gambling facilities. As auditor for Simpson Corp., you have recently overheard the following discussion between the controller and financial vice president.
Vice President: If we sell the Casino Knights Division, it seems ridiculous to segregate the results of the sale in the income statement. Separate categories tend to be absurd and confusing to the stockholders. I believe that we should simply report the gain on the sale as other income or expense without detail.
Controller: Professional pronouncements would require that we disclose this information separately in the income statement. If a sale of this type is considered unusual and infrequent, it must be reported as an extraordinary item.
Vice President: What about the walkout we had last month when employees were upset about their commission income? Would this situation not also be an extraordinary item?
Controller: I am not sure whether this item would be reported as extraordinary or not.
Vice President: Oh well, it doesn’t make any difference because the net effect of all these items is immaterial, so no disclosure is necessary.
Instructions
(a) On the basis of the foregoing discussion, answer the following questions: Who is correct about handling the sale? What would be the correct income statement presentation for the sale of the Casino Knights Division?
(b) How should the walkout by the employees be reported?
(c) What do you think about the vice president’s observation on materiality?
(d) What are the earnings per share implications of these topics?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Identification of Income Statement Weaknesses) The following financial statement was prepared by employees of Walters Corporation.
|
WALTERS CORPORATION INCOME STATEMENT YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Revenues
|
|
|
Gross sales, including sales taxes
|
$1,044,300
|
|
Less: Returns, allowances, and cash discounts
|
56,200
|
|
Net sales
|
988,100
|
|
Dividends, interest, and purchase discounts
|
30,250
|
|
Recoveries of accounts written off in prior years
|
13,850
|
|
Total revenues
|
1,032,200
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold, including sales taxes
|
465,900
|
|
Salaries and related payroll expenses
|
60,500
|
|
Rent
|
19,100
|
|
Freight in and freight out
|
3,400
|
|
Bad debt expense
|
27,800
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
576,700
|
|
Income before extraordinary items
|
455,500
|
|
Extraordinary items
|
|
|
Loss on discontinued styles
|
71,500
|
|
Loss on sale of marketable securities
|
39,050
|
|
Loss on sale of warehouse
|
86,350
|
|
Total extraordinary items
|
196,900
|
|
Net income
|
$258,600
|
|
Net income per share of common stock
|
$2.30
|
New styles and rapidly changing consumer preferences resulted in a $71,500 loss on the disposal of discontinued styles and related accessories.
The corporation sold an investment in marketable securities at a loss of $39,050. The corporation normally sells securities of this nature.
The corporation sold one of its warehouses at an $86,350 loss.
Instructions
Identify and discuss the weaknesses in classification and disclosure in the single step income statement above. You should explain why these treatments are weaknesses and what the proper presentation of the items would be in accordance with GAAP.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparative Analysis Case
The Coca Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc.
Instructions
Go to the book’s companion website and use information found there to answer the following questions related to The Coca Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc.
(a) What type of income format(s) is used by these two companies? Identify any differences in income statement format between these two companies.
(b) What are the gross profits, operating profits, and net incomes for these two companies over the 3 year period 2007–2009? Which company has had better financial results over this period of time?
(c) Identify the irregular items reported by these two companies in their income statements over the 3 year period 2007–2009. Do these irregular items appear to be significant? Financial Statement Analysis Cases
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case: Bankruptcy Prediction
The Z score bankruptcy prediction model uses balance sheet and income information to arrive at a Z Score, which can be used to predict financial distress:
Z=Working capital/Total assets X 1.2 + Retained earnings / Total assets X 1.4 + EBIT / Total assets X 3.3 + Sales / Total assets X .99 + MV equity / Total liabilities X 0.6
EBIT is earnings before interest and taxes. MV Equity is the market value of common equity, which can be determined by multiplying stock price by shares outstanding.
Following extensive testing, it has been shown that companies with Z scores above 3.0 are unlikely to fail; those with Z scores below 1.81 are very likely to fail. While the original model was developed for publicly held manufacturing companies, the model has been modified to apply to companies in various industries, emerging companies, and companies not traded in public markets.
Instructions
(a) Use information in the financial statements of a company like Walgreens or Deere & Co. to compute the Z score for the past 2 years.
(b) Interpret your result. Where does the company fall in the financial distress range?
(c) The Z score uses EBIT as one of its elements. Why do you think this income measure is used?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case: Dresser Industries
Dresser Industries provides products and services to oil and natural gas exploration, production, transmission and processing companies. A recent income statement is reproduced below. Dollar amounts are in millions.
|
Sales
|
$2,697.00
|
|
Service revenues
|
1,933.90
|
|
Share of earnings of unconsolidated affi liates
|
92.4
|
|
Total revenues
|
4,723.30
|
|
Cost of sales
|
1,722.70
|
|
Cost of services
|
1,799.90
|
|
Total costs of sales and services
|
3,522.60
|
|
Gross earnings
|
1,200.70
|
|
Selling, engineering, administrative and general expenses
|
919.8
|
|
Special charges
|
70
|
|
Other income (deductions)
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
47.4
|
|
Interest earned
|
19.1
|
|
Other, net
|
4.8
|
|
Earnings before income taxes and other items below
|
187.4
|
|
Income taxes
|
79.4
|
|
Minority interest
|
10.3
|
|
Earnings from continuing operations
|
97.7
|
|
Discontinued operations
|
35.3
|
|
Earnings before extraordinary items
|
62.4
|
|
Extraordinary items
|
6.3
|
|
Net earnings
|
$56.10
|
Instructions
Assume that 177,636,000 shares of stock were issued and outstanding. Prepare the per share portion of the income statement. Remember to begin with “Earnings from continuing operations.”
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case: P/E Ratios
One of the more closely watched ratios by investors is the price/earnings or P/E ratio. By dividing price per share by earnings per share, analysts get insight into the value the market attaches to a company’s earnings. More specifically, a high P/E ratio (in comparison to companies in the same industry) may suggest the stock is overpriced. Also, there is some evidence that companies with low P/E ratios are underpriced and tend to outperform the market. However, the ratio can be misleading.
P/E ratios are sometimes misleading because the E (earnings) is subject to a number of assumptions and estimates that could result in overstated earnings and a lower P/E. Some analysts conduct “revenue analysis” to evaluate the quality of an earnings number. Revenues are less subject to management estimates and all earnings must begin with revenues. These analysts also compute the price to sales ratio (PSR 5 price per share 4 sales per share) to assess whether a company is performing well compared to similar companies. If a company has a price to sales ratio significantly higher than its competitors, investors may be betting on a stock that has yet to prove itself.
Instructions
(a) Identify some of the estimates or assumptions that could result in overstated earnings.
(b) Compute the P/E ratio and the PSR for Tootsie Roll and Hershey for 2009.
(c) Use these data to compare the quality of each company’s earnings.
Accounting, Analysis, and Principles
Counting Crows Inc. provided the following information for the year 2012.
|
Retained earnings, January 1, 2012
|
$ 600,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
240,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
300,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
1,900,000
|
|
Cash dividends declared
|
80,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
850,000
|
|
Extraordinary gain
|
95,000
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
75,000
|
|
Rent revenue
|
40,000
|
|
Unrealized holding gain on available for sale securities
|
17,000
|
|
Income tax applicable to continuing operations
|
187,000
|
|
Income tax benefit applicable to loss on discontinued operations
|
25,500
|
|
Income tax applicable to extraordinary gain
|
32,300
|
|
Income tax applicable to unrealized holding gain on available for sale securities
|
2,000
|
Accounting
Prepare (a) a single step income statement for 2012, (b) a retained earnings statement for 2012, and (c) a statement of comprehensive income using the second income statement format. Shares outstanding during 2012 were 100,000.
Analysis
Explain how a multiple step income statement format can provide useful information to a financial statement user.
Principles
In a recent meeting with its auditor, Counting Crows’ management argued that the company should be able to prepare a pro forma income statement with some one time administrative expenses reported similar to extraordinary items and discontinued operations. Is such reporting consistent with the qualitative characteristics of accounting information as discussed in the conceptual framework? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Professional Simulation
In this simulation, you are asked to compute various income amounts. Assume a tax rate of 30% and 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding during the year. Prepare responses to all parts. Jude Law Corporation provides you with the following pretax information for the period.
|
Sales revenue
|
$3,200,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,920,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
10,000
|
|
Loss from abandonment of plant assets
|
40,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
340,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
280,000
|
|
Cumulative effect on prior years of change from FIFO to average cost for inventory costing purposes
|
|
|
Loss from earthquake
|
50,000
|
|
Gain on disposal of a component of
|
40,000
|
|
Jude Law Corporation’s business
|
90,000
|
Explain the proper accounting treatment for loss on abandonment of plant assets, gain on disposal of a component of a business, and change in inventory costing methods. Compute the following five items.
(a) Gross profit.
(b) Income from continuing operations before income tax.
(c) Income from continuing operations.
(d) Net income.
(e) Earnings per share.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is information related to Viel Company at December 31, 2012, the end of its first year of operations.
|
Sales revenue
|
$310,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
140,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
50,000
|
|
Gain on sale of plant assets
|
30,000
|
|
Unrealized gain on non trading equity securities
|
10,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
6,000
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
12,000
|
|
Allocation to non controlling interest
|
40,000
|
|
Dividends declared and paid
|
5,000
|
Instructions
Compute the following:
(a) income from operations, (b) net income, (c) net income attributable to Viel Company controlling shareholders, (d) comprehensive income, and (e) retained earnings balance at December 31, 2012. (Ignore income taxes.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BRIDGE TO THE PROFESSION
Professional Research
Recording transactions in the accounting system requires knowledge of the important characteristics of the elements of financial statements, such as assets and liabilities. In addition, accountants must understand the inherent uncertainty in accounting measures and distinctions between related accounting concepts that are important in evaluating the effects of transactions on the financial statements.
Instructions
When you have accessed the documents, you can use the search tool in your Internet browser.
(a) The three essential characteristics of assets.
(b) The three essential characteristics of liabilities.
(c) Uncertainty and its effect on financial statements.
(d) The difference between realization and recognition.
Professional Simulation
In this simulation, you are asked to address questions regarding the accounting information system. Prepare responses to all parts.
Nalezny Advertising Agency was founded by Casey Hayward in January 2009. Presented below are both the adjusted and unadjusted trial balances as of December 31, 2012.
|
Nalezny Advertising Agency Trial Balance December 31, 2012
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$11,000
|
|
$11,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
20,000
|
|
21,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
8,400
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
60,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$28,000
|
|
$35,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
5,000
|
|
5,000
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
7,000
|
|
5,600
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
1,300
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
10,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
4,800
|
|
4,800
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
58,600
|
|
61,500
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
10,000
|
|
$123,200
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
11,300
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
7,000
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
$113,400
|
|
3,400
|
|
| |
4,000
|
$113,400
|
4,000
|
$123,200
|
Journalize the annual adjusting entries that were made. (Omit explanations.)
Prepare an income statement for the year ending December 31, 2012, and an unclassified balance sheet at December 31.
Describe the remaining steps in the accounting cycle to be completed by Nalezny for 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
5. Discuss the appropriate treatment in the financial statements of each of the following.
(a) An amount of $113,000 realized in excess of the cash surrender value of an insurance policy on the life of one of the founders of the company who died during the year.
(b) A profit sharing bonus to employees computed as a percentage of net income.
(c) Additional depreciation on factory machinery because of an error in computing depreciation for the previous year.
(d) Rent received from subletting a portion of the office space.
(e) A patent infringement suit, brought 2 years ago against the company by another company, was settled this year by a cash payment of $725,000.
(f) A reduction in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts balance, because the account appears to be considerably in excess of the probable loss from uncollectible receivables.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Indicate where the following items would ordinarily appear on the financial statements of Boleyn, Inc. for the year 2012.
(a) The service life of certain equipment was changed from 8 to 5 years. If a 5 year life had been used previously, additional depreciation of $425,000 would have been charged.
(b) In 2012, a flood destroyed a warehouse that had a book value of $1,600,000. Floods are rare in this locality.
(c) In 2012, the company wrote off $1,000,000 of inventory that was considered obsolete.
(d) An income tax refund related to the 2009 tax year was received.
(e) In 2009, a supply warehouse with an expected useful life of 7 years was erroneously expensed.
(f) Boleyn, Inc. changed from weighted average to FIFO inventory pricing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Santo Corporation has eight expense accounts in its general ledger which could be classified as selling expenses. Should Santo report these eight expenses separately in its income statement or simply report one total amount for selling expenses?
2. Cooper Investments reported an unusual gain from the sale of certain assets in its 2012 income statement. How does intraperiod tax allocation affect the reporting of this unusual gain?
3. What effect does intraperiod tax allocation have on reported net income?
4. Neumann Company computed earnings per share as follows.
Net income/ Common shares outstanding at year end
Neumann has a simple capital structure. What possible errors might the company have made in the computation? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Qualls Corporation reported 2012 earnings per share of $7.21. In 2013, Qualls reported earnings per share as follows.
|
On income before extraordinary item
|
$6.40
|
|
On extraordinary item
|
1.88
|
|
On net income
|
$8.28
|
Is the increase in earnings per share from $7.21 to $8.28 a favorable trend?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Generally accepted accounting principles usually require the use of accrual accounting to “fairly present” income. If the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting will “clearly reflect” taxable income, why does this method not usually also “fairly present” income?
2. State some of the more serious problems encountered in seeking to achieve the ideal measurement of periodic net income. Explain what accountants do as a practical alternative.
3. What is meant by the terms elements and items as they relate to the income statement? Why might items have to be disclosed in the income statement?
4. What are the three ways that other comprehensive income may be displayed (reported)?
5. How should the disposal of a component of a business be disclosed in the income statement?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Starr Co. had sales revenue of $540,000 in 2012. Other items recorded during the year were:
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$330,000
|
|
Salaries and wages expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
25,000
|
|
Increase in value of company reputation
|
15,000
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
10,000
|
|
Unrealized gain on value of patents
|
20,000
|
Prepare a single step income statement for Starr for 2012. Starr has 100,000 shares of stock outstanding.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Using the information provided in BE4 2, prepare a condensed multiple step income statement for Brisky Corporation.
2. Finley Corporation had income from continuing operations of $10,600,000 in 2012. During 2012, it disposed of its restaurant division at an after tax loss of $189,000. Prior to disposal, the division operated at a loss of $315,000 (net of tax) in 2012. Finley had 10,000,000 shares of common stock outstanding during 2012.
Prepare a partial income statement for Finley beginning with income from continuing operations.
3. Stacy Corporation had income before income taxes for 2012 of $6,300,000. In addition, it suffered an unusual and infrequent pretax loss of $770,000 from a volcano eruption. The corporation’s tax rate is 30%.
Prepare a partial income statement for Stacy beginning with income before income taxes. The corporation had 5,000,000 shares of common stock outstanding during 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. During 2012, Williamson Company changed from FIFO to weighted average inventory pricing. Pretax income in 2011 and 2010 (Williamson’s first year of operations) under FIFO was $160,000 and $180,000, respectively. Pretax income using weighted average pricing in the prior years would have been $145,000 in 2011 and $170,000 in 2010. In 2012, Williamson Company reported pretax income (using weighted average pricing) of $180,000. Show comparative income statements for Williamson Company, beginning with “Income before income tax,” as presented on the 2012 income statement. (The tax rate in all years is 30%.)
2. Vandross Company has recorded bad debt expense in the past at a rate of 1½% of net sales. In 2012, Vandross decides to increase its estimate to 2%. If the new rate had been used in prior years, cumulative bad debt expense would have been $380,000 instead of $285,000. In 2012, bad debt expense will be $120,000 instead of $90,000. If Vandross’s tax rate is 30%, what amount should it report as the cumulative effect of changing the estimated bad debt rate?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. In 2012, Hollis Corporation reported net income of $1,000,000. It declared and paid preferred stock dividends of $250,000. During 2012, Hollis had a weighted average of 190,000 common shares outstanding.
Compute Hollis’s 2012 earnings per share.
2. Portman Corporation has retained earnings of $675,000 at January 1, 2012. Net income during 2012 was $1,400,000, and cash dividends declared and paid during 2012 totaled $75,000.
Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.
3. Using the information from BE4 9, prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.
Assume an error was discovered: land costing $80,000 (net of tax) was charged to maintenance and repairs expense in 2009.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Computation of Net Income) Presented below are changes in all the account balances of Jackson Furniture Co. during the current year, except for retained earnings.
| |
Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Increase (Decrease)
|
|
Cash
|
$69,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
($51,000)
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net)
|
45,000
|
Bonds Payable
|
82,000
|
|
Inventory
|
127,000
|
Common Stock
|
125,000
|
|
Investments
|
47,000
|
Paid in Capital in Excess of Par–Common Stock
|
13,000
|
Instructions
Compute the net income for the current year, assuming that there were no entries in the Retained Earnings account except for net income and a dividend declaration of $24,000 which was paid in the current year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Income Statement Items) Presented below are certain account balances of Wade Products Co.
|
Rent revenue
|
$ 6,500
|
Sales discounts
|
$ 7,800
|
|
Interest expense
|
12,700
|
Selling expenses
|
99,400
|
|
Beginning retained earnings
|
114,400
|
Sales revenue
|
400,000
|
|
Ending retained earnings
|
134,000
|
Income tax expense
|
26,600
|
|
Dividend revenue
|
71,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
184,400
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
12,400
|
Administrative expenses
|
82,500
|
Instructions
From the foregoing, compute the following: (a) total net revenue, (b) net income, (c) dividends declared during the current year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Single Step Income Statement) The financial records of Dunbar Inc. were destroyed by fire at the end of 2012. Fortunately, the controller had kept certain statistical data related to the income statement as presented below.
1. The beginning merchandise inventory was $92,000 and decreased 20% during the current year.
2. Sales discounts amount to $17,000.
3. 30,000 shares of common stock were outstanding for the entire year.
4. Interest expense was $20,000.
5. The income tax rate is 30%.
6. Cost of goods sold amounts to $500,000.
7. Administrative expenses are 18% of cost of goods sold but only 8% of gross sales.
8. Four fifths of the operating expenses relate to sales activities.
Instructions
From the foregoing, information, prepare an income statement for the year 2012 in single step form.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Multiple Step and Single Step) Two accountants for the firm of Allen and Wright are arguing about the merits of presenting an income statement in a multiple step versus a single step format. The discussion involves the following 2012 information related to Webster Company ($000 omitted).
|
Administrative expense
|
|
|
Officers’ salaries
|
$ 4,900
|
|
Depreciation of office furniture and equipment
|
3,960
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
63,570
|
|
Rent revenue
|
17,230
|
|
Selling expense
|
|
|
Transportation out
|
2,690
|
|
Sales commissions
|
7,980
|
|
Depreciation of sales equipment
|
6,480
|
|
Sales revenue
|
96,500
|
|
Income tax expense
|
7,580
|
|
Interest expense
|
1,860
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement for the year 2012 using the multiple step form. Common shares outstanding for 2012 total 40,550 (000 omitted).
(b) Prepare an income statement for the year 2012 using the single step form.
(c) Which one do you prefer? Discuss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Multiple Step and Extraordinary Items) The following balances were taken from the books of Parnevik Corp. on December 31, 2012.
|
Interest revenue
|
$ 86,000
|
Accumulated depreciation—buildings
|
$ 28,000
|
|
Cash
|
51,000
|
Notes receivable
|
155,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
1,280,000
|
Selling expenses
|
194,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
150,000
|
Accounts payable
|
170,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
20,000
|
Bonds payable
|
100,000
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
150,000
|
Office expenses
|
97,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
7,000
|
Accrued liabilities
|
32,000
|
|
Sales discounts
|
45,000
|
Interest expense
|
60,000
|
|
Land
|
100,000
|
Notes payable
|
100,000
|
|
Equipment
|
200,000
|
Loss from earthquake damage
(extraordinary item)
|
120,000
|
|
Buildings
|
140,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
621,000
|
Common stock
|
500,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
40,000
|
Retained earnings
|
21,000
|
Assume the total effective tax rate on all items is 34%.
Instructions
Prepare a multiple step income statement; 100,000 shares of common stock were outstanding during the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Multiple Step and Single Step) The accountant of Weatherspoon Shoe Co. has compiled the following information from the company’s records as a basis for an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.
|
Rent revenue
|
$ 29,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
18,000
|
|
Market appreciation on land above cost
|
31,000
|
|
Salaries and wages expense (sales)
|
114,800
|
|
Supplies (sales)
|
17,600
|
|
Income tax
|
30,600
|
|
Salaries and wages expense (administrative)
|
135,900
|
|
Other administrative expenses
|
51,700
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
516,000
|
|
Net sales
|
980,000
|
|
Depreciation on plant assets (70% selling, 30% administrative)
|
65,000
|
|
Cash dividends declared
|
16,000
|
There were 20,000 shares of common stock outstanding during the year.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement.
(b) Prepare a single step income statement.
(c) Which format do you prefer? Discuss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Earnings per Share) The stockholders’ equity section of Sosa Corporation appears below as of December 31, 2012.
|
6% preferred stock, $50 par value, authorized 100,000 shares, outstanding 90,000 shares
|
|
$4,500,000
|
|
Common stock, $1 par, authorized and issued 10 million shares
|
|
10,000,000
|
|
Additional paid in capital
|
|
20,500,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
$134,000,000
|
|
|
Net income
|
33,000,000
|
167,000,000
|
| |
|
$202,000,000
|
Net income for 2012 reflects a total effective tax rate of 34%. Included in the net income figure is a loss of $12,000,000 (before tax) as a result of a major casualty, which should be classified as an extraordinary item. Preferred stock dividends of $270,000 were declared and paid in 2012. Dividends of $1,000,000 were declared and paid to common stockholders in 2012.
Instructions
Compute earnings per share data as it should appear on the income statement of Sosa Corporation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Condensed Income Statement—Periodic Inventory Method) Presented below are selected ledger accounts of Woods Corporation at December 31, 2012.
|
Cash
|
$ 185,000
|
Salaries and wages expense (sales)
|
$284,000
|
|
Inventory
|
535,000
|
Salaries and wages expense (Office)
|
346,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
4,175,000
|
Purchase returns
|
15,000
|
|
Unearned revenue
|
117,000
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
79,000
|
|
Purchases
|
2,786,000
|
Transportation in
|
72,000
|
|
Sales discounts
|
34,000
|
Accounts receivable
|
142,500
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
27,000
|
Sales commissions
|
83,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
69,000
|
Telephone expense (sales)
|
17,000
|
|
Accounting and legal services
|
33,000
|
Utilities expense (Office)
|
32,000
|
|
Insurance expense (Office)
|
24,000
|
Miscellaneous Office expenses
|
8,000
|
|
Advertising
|
54,000
|
Rent revenue
|
240,000
|
|
Transportation out
|
93,000
|
Extraordinary loss (before tax)
|
60,000
|
|
Depreciation expense (office equipment)
|
48,000
|
Interest expense
|
176,000
|
|
Depreciation expense (sales equipment)
|
36,000
|
Common stock ($10 par)
|
900,000
|
Woods’s effective tax rate on all items is 34%. A physical inventory indicates that the ending inventory is $686,000.
Instructions
Prepare a condensed 2012 income statement for Woods Corporation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retained Earnings Statement) McEntire Corporation began operations on January 1, 2009. During its first 3 years of operations, McEntire reported net income and declared dividends as follows.
| |
Net income
|
Dividends declared
|
|
2009
|
$40,000
|
$ –0–
|
|
2010
|
125,000
|
50,000
|
|
2011
|
160,000
|
50,000
|
The following information relates to 2012.
|
Income before income tax
|
$220,000
|
|
Prior period adjustment: understatement of 2010 depreciation expense (before taxes)
|
$ 25,000
|
|
Cumulative decrease in income from change in inventory methods (before taxes)
|
$ 45,000
|
|
Dividends declared (of this amount, $25,000 will be paid on January 15, 2013)
|
$100,000
|
|
Effective tax rate
|
40%
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a 2012 retained earnings statement for McEntire Corporation.
(b) Assume McEntire restricted retained earnings in the amount of $70,000 on December 31, 2012. After this action, what would McEntire report as total retained earnings in its December 31, 2012, balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Earnings per Share) At December 31, 2011, Schroeder Corporation had the following stock outstanding.
|
8% cumulative preferred stock, $100 par, 107,500 shares
|
$10,750,000
|
|
Common stock, $5 par, 4,000,000 shares
|
20,000,000
|
During 2012, Schroeder did not issue any additional common stock. The following also occurred during 2012.
|
Income from continuing operations before taxes
|
$21,650,000
|
|
Discontinued operations (loss before taxes)
|
3,225,000
|
|
Preferred dividends declared
|
860,000
|
|
Common dividends declared
|
2,200,000
|
|
Effective tax rate
|
35%
|
Instructions
Compute earnings per share data as it should appear in the 2012 income statement of Schroeder Corporation. (Round to two decimal places.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harmony Resorts Inc. owns and manages resort properties. On January 15, 2008, one of its properties was found to be adjacent to a toxic chemical disposal site. As a result of the negative publicity, this property’s bookings dropped 40% during 2008. On December 31, 2008, the accounts of the company showed the following details regarding the impaired property:
|
Land
|
$ 30,000,000
|
|
Buildings and improvements (net)
|
120,000,000
|
|
Equipment (net)
|
25,000,000
|
|
Total
|
$175,000,000
|
Management decides that closing the resort is the only option. As a result, it is estimated that the buildings and improvements will be written off completely. The land can be sold for other uses for $17 million, while the equipment can be disposed of for $6 million, net of disposal costs.
a. Provide the journal entry to record the asset impairment on December 31, 2008.
b. Provide the note disclosure for the impairment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kiwi Juice Company has been suffering a downturn in its juice business due to adverse publicity regarding the caffeine content of its drink products. As a result, the company has been required to restructure operations. The board of directors approved and communicated a plan on July 1, 2008, calling for the following actions:
1. Close a juice plant on October 15, 2008. Closing, equipment relocation, and employee relocation costs are expected to be $600,000 during October.
2. Eliminate 300 plant positions. A severance will be paid to the terminated employees equal to 400% of their estimated monthly earnings payable in four quarterly installments on October 15, 2008; January 15, 2009; April 15, 2009; and July 15, 2009.
3. Terminate a juice supply contract, activating a $150,000 cancellation penalty, payable upon notice of termination. The notice will be formally delivered to the supplier on August 15, 2008. The 300 employees earn an average of $14 per hour. The average employee works 180 hours per month.
a. Determine the total restructuring charge for 2008.
b. Provide the journal entry for the restructuring charge on July 1, 2008. (Note: Use Restructuring Obligation as the liability account, since the charges involve more than just employee terminations.)
c. Provide the journal entry for the October 15, 2008, employee severance payment.
d. Provide the balance sheet disclosure for December 31, 2008.
e. Provide a note disclosure for December 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
TransCo Inc. has suffered losses due to increased competition in its service market from low cost independent truckers. As a result, on December 31, 2008, the board of directors of the company approved and communicated a restructuring plan that calls for selling 50 tractor trailers out of a fleet of 400. In addition, the plan calls for the elimination of 50 driver positions and 15 staff support positions. The market price for used tractor trailers is depressed due to general overcapacity in the transportation industry. As a result, the market value of tractor trailers is estimated to be only 60% of the book value of these assets. It is not believed that the impairment in fixed assets is recoverable. The cost and accumulated depreciation of the total tractor trailer fleet on December 31 are $48 million and $14 million, respectively. The restructuring plan will provide a severance to the drivers and staff totaling $12,000 per employee, payable on March 14, 2009, which is the expected employee termination date.
a. Provide the journal entries on December 31, 2008, for the fixed asset impairment and the employee severance costs.
b. Provide the balance sheet and note disclosure on December 31, 2008.
c. Provide the journal entry for March 14, 2009.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the year ended December 31, 2002, Delta Air Lines, provided the following note to its financial statements:
On September 22, 2001, the Air Transportation Safety and System Stabilization Act (Stabilization Act) became effective. The Stabilization Act is intended to preserve the viability of the U.S. air transportation system following the terrorist attacks on September 11, 2001 by, among other things, (1) providing for payments from the U.S. Government totaling $5 billion to compensate U.S. air carriers for losses incurred from September 11, 2001, through December 31, 2001, as a result of the September 11 terrorist attacks and (2) permitting the Secretary of Transportation to sell insurance to U.S. air carriers.
Our allocated portion of compensation under the Stabilization Act was $668 million. Due to uncertainties regarding the U.S. government’s calculation of compensation, we recognized $634 million of this amount in our 2001 Consolidated Statement of Operations. We recognized the remaining $34 million of compensation in our 2002 Consolidated Statement of Operations. We received $112 million and $556 million in cash for the years ended December 31, 2002 and 2001, respectively, under the Stabilization Act. Do you believe that the income related to the Stabilization Act should be reported as an extraordinary item on the income statement of Delta Air Lines?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below are three separate historical incidents giving rise to losses for three different companies.
a. In 1980, Weyerhaeuser, a major wood products company, lost $36 million in timber, logs, and building equipment as a result of the volcanic eruption of Mount St. Helens in the state of Washington.
b. In 2001, Dow Jones & Company, Inc., the publisher of The Wall Street Journal, suffered $1.7 million in losses due to damage in its headquarters building as a result of the 9/11 terrorist incident.
c. In 2005, Northrop Grumman Corporation, a major defense contractor, reported significant losses in its shipbuilding yards along the Gulf Coast as a result of Hurricane Katrina.
The losses were sufficient to cut its projected earnings in half for the year. In each case, identify whether the loss should be reported as extraordinary.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that the amount of each of the following items is material to the financial statements. Classify each item as either normally recurring (NR) or extraordinary (E).
a. Restructuring charge related to employee termination benefits.
b. Loss on sale of fixed assets.
c. Uninsured flood loss. (Flood insurance is unavailable because of periodic flooding in the area.)
d. Interest revenue on notes receivable.
e. Loss on disposal of equipment considered to be obsolete because of development of new technology.
f. Uninsured loss on building due to hurricane damage. The firm was organized in 1920 and had not previously incurred hurricane damage.
g. Uncollectible accounts expense.
h. Gain on sale of land condemned for public use.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wind Surfer Inc. produces and distributes equipment for sailboats. On the basis of the following data for the current fiscal year ended June 30, 2008, prepare a multiple step income statement for Wind Surfer, including an analysis of earnings per share in the form illustrated in this chapter. There were 20,000 shares of $150 par common stock outstanding throughout the year.
|
Administrative expenses
|
$ 104,000
|
|
Cost of merchandise sold
|
467,500
|
|
Gain on condemnation of land (extraordinary item)
|
58,000
|
|
Income tax applicable to gain on condemnation of land
|
23,200
|
|
Income tax reduction applicable to loss from discontinued operations
|
32,000
|
|
Income tax applicable to income from continuing operations
|
93,200
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
80,000
|
|
Loss from fixed asset impairment
|
120,000
|
|
Restructuring charge
|
50,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,100,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
125,500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transactions, Financial Statements—Service Company) Listed below are the transactions of Yasunari Kawabata, D.D.S., for the month of September.
|
Sept. 1
|
Kawabata begins practice as a dentist and invests $20,000 cash.
|
|
2
|
Purchases dental equipment on account from Green Jacket Co. for $17,280.
|
|
4
|
Pays rent for office space, $680 for the month.
|
|
4
|
Employs a receptionist, Michael Bradley.
|
|
5
|
Purchases dental supplies for cash, $942.
|
|
8
|
Receives cash of $1,690 from patients for services performed.
|
|
10
|
Pays miscellaneous office expenses, $430.
|
|
14
|
Bills patients $5,820 for services performed.
|
|
18
|
Pays Green Jacket Co. on account, $3,600.
|
|
19
|
Withdraws $3,000 cash from the business for personal use.
|
|
20
|
Receives $980 from patients on account.
|
|
25
|
Bills patients $2,110 for services performed.
|
|
30
|
Pays the following expenses in cash: Salaries and wages $1,800; miscellaneous office expenses $85.
|
|
30
|
Dental supplies used during September, $330.
|
Instructions
(a) Enter the transactions shown above in appropriate general ledger accounts (use T accounts). Use the following ledger accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accumulated Depreciation—
Equipment, Accounts Payable, Owner’s Capital, Service Revenue, Rent Expense, Office Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, Supplies Expense, Depreciation Expense, and Income Summary. Allow 10 lines for the Cash and Income Summary accounts, and 5 lines for each of the other accounts needed. Record depreciation using a 5 year life on the equipment, the straight line method, and no salvage value. Do not use a drawing account.
(b) Prepare a trial balance.
(c) Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and an unclassified balance sheet.
(d) Close the ledger.
(e) Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries and Financial Statements) Mason Advertising Agency was founded in January 2008. Presented below are adjusted and unadjusted trial balances as of December 31, 2012.
|
MASON ADVERTISING AGENCY TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$11,000
|
|
$11,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
20,000
|
|
23,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
8,400
|
|
3,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,350
|
|
2,500
|
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
60,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$28,000
|
|
$33,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
5,000
|
|
5,000
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
150
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
5,000
|
|
5,000
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
7,000
|
|
5,600
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
–0–
|
|
1,300
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
10,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
3,500
|
|
3,500
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
58,600
|
|
63,500
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
10,000
|
|
11,300
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
|
850
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
350
|
|
500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
5,400
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
4,000
|
|
4,000
|
|
| |
$117,100
|
$117,100
|
$127,050
|
$127,050
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the annual adjusting entries that were made. (Omit explanations.)
(b) Prepare an income statement and a statement of retained earnings for the year ending December 31, 2012, and an unclassified balance sheet at December 31.
(c) Answer the following questions.
(1) If the note has been outstanding 3 months, what is the annual interest rate on that note?
(2) If the company paid $12,500 in salaries and wages in 2012, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable on December 31, 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries) A review of the ledger of Baylor Company at December 31, 2012, produces the following data pertaining to the preparation of annual adjusting entries.
1. Salaries and Wages Payable $0. There are eight employees. Salaries and wages are paid every Friday for the current week. Five employees receive $700 each per week, and three employees earn $600 each per week. December 31 is a Tuesday. Employees do not work weekends. All employees worked the last 2 days of December.
2. Unearned Rent Revenue $429,000. The company began subleasing office space in its new building on November 1. Each tenant is required to make a $5,000 security deposit that is not refundable until occupancy is terminated. At December 31, the company had the following rental contracts that are paid in full for the entire term of the lease.
|
Date
|
Term (in months)
|
Monthly Rent
|
Number of Leases
|
|
Nov. 1
|
6
|
$6,000
|
5
|
|
Dec. 1
|
6
|
$8,500
|
4
|
3. Prepaid Advertising $13,200. This balance consists of payments on two advertising contracts. The contracts provide for monthly advertising in two trade magazines. The terms of the contracts are as shown below.
|
Contract
|
Date
|
Amount
|
Number of Magazine Issues
|
|
A650
|
May 1
|
$6,000
|
12
|
|
B974
|
Oct. 1
|
7,200
|
24
|
The first advertisement runs in the month in which the contract is signed.
4. Payable $60,000. This balance consists of a note for one year at an annual interest rate of 12%, dated June 1.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries at December 31, 2012. (Show all computations).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Financial Statements, Adjusting and Closing Entries) The trial balance of Bellemy Fashion Center contained the following accounts at November 30, the end of the company’s fiscal year.
|
BELLEMY FASHION CENTER TRIAL BALANCE NOVEMBER 30, 2012
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$28,700
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
33,700
|
|
|
Inventory
|
45,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
5,500
|
|
|
Equipment
|
133,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$24,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
51,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
48,500
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
90,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
8,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
757,200
|
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
4,200
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
495,400
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
140,000
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
26,400
|
|
|
Utilities Expenses
|
14,000
|
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs Expense
|
12,100
|
|
|
Freight out
|
16,700
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
24,000
|
|
| |
$978,700
|
$978,700
|
Adjustment data:
1. Supplies on hand totaled $1,500.
2. Depreciation is $15,000 on the equipment.
3. Interest of $11,000 is accrued on notes payable at November 30.
Other data:
1. Salaries expense is 70% selling and 30% administrative.
2. Rent expense and utilities expense are 80% selling and 20% administrative.
3. $30,000 of notes payable are due for payment next year.
4. Maintenance and repairs expense is 100% administrative.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the adjusting entries.
(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(c) Prepare a multiple step income statement and retained earnings statement for the year and a classified balance sheet as of November 30, 2012.
(d) Journalize the closing entries.
(e) Prepare a post closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries) The accounts listed below appeared in the December 31 trial balance of the Savard Theater.
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Equipment
|
$192,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
90,000
|
|
Admissions Revenue
|
|
380,000
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
13,680
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
57,600
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
1,400
|
|
Instructions
(a) From the account balances listed above and the information given below, prepare the annual adjusting entries necessary on December 31. (Omit explanations.)
(1) The equipment has an estimated life of 16 years and a salvage value of $24,000 at the end of that time. (Use straight line method.)
(2) The note payable is a 90 day note given to the bank October 20 and bearing interest at 8%. (Use 360 days for denominator.)
(3) In December, 2,000 coupon admission books were sold at $30 each. They could be used for admission any time after January 1.
(4) Advertising expense paid in advance and included in Advertising Expense $1,100.
(5) Salaries and wages accrued but unpaid $4,700.
(b) What amounts should be shown for each of the following on the income statement for the year?
(1) Interest expense.
(2) Admissions revenue.
(3) Advertising expense.
(4) Salaries and wages expense.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries and Financial Statements) Presented below are the trial balance and the other information related to Yorkis Perez, a consulting engineer.
|
YORKIS PEREZ, CONSULTING ENGINEER TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$29,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
49,600
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$750
|
|
Inventory
|
1,960
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
1,100
|
|
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
6,250
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
7,200
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
35,010
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
100,000
|
|
Rent Expense
|
9,750
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
30,500
|
|
|
Utilities Expenses
|
1,080
|
|
|
Office Expense
|
720
|
|
| |
$149,210
|
$149,210
|
1. Fees received in advance from clients $6,000.
2. Services performed for clients that were not recorded by December 31, $4,900.
3. Bad debt expense for the year is $1,430.
4. Insurance expired during the year $480.
5. Equipment is being depreciated at 10% per year.
6. Yorkis Perez gave the bank a 90 day, 10% note for $7,200 on December 1, 2012.
7. Rent of the building is $750 per month. The rent for 2012 has been paid, as has that for January 2013.
8. Office salaries and wages earned but unpaid December 31, 2012, $2,510.
Instructions
(a) From the trial balance and other information given, prepare annual adjusting entries as of December 31, 2012. (Omit explanations.)
(b) Prepare an income statement for 2012, a statement of owner’s equity, and a classified balance sheet. Yorkis Perez withdrew $17,000 cash for personal use during the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries and Financial Statements) Vedula Advertising Agency was founded by Murali Vedula in January 2007. Presented on the next page are both the adjusted and unadjusted trial balances as of December 31, 2012.
|
VEDULA ADVERTISING AGENCY TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
| |
Unadjusted
|
|
Adjusted
|
|
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$11,000
|
|
$11,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
16,000
|
|
19,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
9,400
|
|
6,500
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
3,350
|
|
1,790
|
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
60,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$25,000
|
|
$30,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
8,000
|
|
8,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
2,000
|
|
2,000
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
0
|
|
560
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
5,000
|
|
3,100
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
0
|
|
820
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
20,000
|
|
20,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
5,500
|
|
5,500
|
|
Dividends
|
10,000
|
|
10,000
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
57,600
|
|
63,000
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
9,000
|
|
9,820
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
|
1,560
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
|
|
560
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
2,900
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
4,350
|
|
4,350
|
|
| |
$123,100
|
$123,100
|
$132,980
|
$132,980
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the annual adjusting entries that were made.
(b) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, and a classified balance sheet at December 31.
(c) Identify which accounts should be closed on December 31.
(d) If the note has been outstanding 10 months, what is the annual interest rate on that note?
(e) If the company paid $10,500 in salaries and wages in 2012, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable on December 31, 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting and Closing) Presented below is the trial balance of the Crestwood Golf Club, Inc. as of December 31. The books are closed annually on December 31.
|
CRESTWOOD GOLF CLUB, INC. TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$15,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
13,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$1,100
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
9,000
|
|
|
Land
|
350,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
120,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
|
38,400
|
|
Equipment
|
150,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
70,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
400,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
82,000
|
|
Dues Revenue
|
|
200,000
|
|
Green Fees Revenue
|
|
5,900
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
17,600
|
|
Utilities Expenses
|
54,000
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
80,000
|
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs Expense
|
24,000
|
|
| |
$815,000
|
$815,000
|
Instructions
(a) Enter the balances in ledger accounts. Allow five lines for each account.
(b) From the trial balance and the information given below, prepare annual adjusting entries and post to the ledger accounts. (Omit explanations.)
(1) The buildings have an estimated life of 30 years with no salvage value (straight line method).
(2) The equipment is depreciated at 10% per year.
(3) Insurance expired during the year $3,500.
(4) The rent revenue represents the amount received for 11 months for dining facilities. The December rent has not yet been received.
(5) It is estimated that 12% of the accounts receivable will be uncollectible.
(6) Salaries and wages earned but not paid by December 31, $3,600.
(7) Dues received in advance from members $8,900.
(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(d) Prepare closing entries and post.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting and Closing) Presented below is the December 31 trial balance of New York Boutique.
|
NEW YORK BOUTIQUE TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$18,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
32,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$700
|
|
Inventory, December 31
|
80,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
5,100
|
|
|
Equipment
|
84,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
35,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
28,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
80,600
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
10,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
600,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
408,000
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense (sales)
|
50,000
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
6,700
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense (administrative)
|
65,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
5,000
|
|
| |
$754,300
|
$754,300
|
Instructions
(a) Construct T accounts and enter the balances shown.
(b) Prepare adjusting journal entries for the following and post to the T accounts. (Omit explanations.) Open additional T accounts as necessary. (The books are closed yearly on December 31.)
(1) Bad debt expense is estimated to be $1,400.
(2) Equipment is depreciated based on a 7 year life (no salvage value).
(3) Insurance expired during the year $2,550.
(4) Interest accrued on notes payable $3,360.
(5) Sales salaries and wages earned but not paid $2,400.
(6) Advertising paid in advance $700.
(7) Office supplies on hand $1,500, charged to Supplies Expense when purchased.
(c) Prepare closing entries and post to the accounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash and Accrual Basis) On January 1, 2012, Norma Smith and Grant Wood formed a computer sales and service enterprise in Soapsville, Arkansas, by investing $90,000 cash. The new company, Arkansas Sales and Service, has the following transactions during January.
1. Pays $6,000 in advance for 3 months’ rent of office, showroom, and repair space.
2. Purchases 40 personal computers at a cost of $1,500 each, 6 graphics computers at a cost of $2,500 each, and 25 printers at a cost of $300 each, paying cash upon delivery.
3. Sales, repair, and office employees earn $12,600 in salaries and wages during January, of which $3,000 was still payable at the end of January.
4. Sells 30 personal computers at $2,550 each, 4 graphics computers for $3,600 each, and 15 printers for $500 each; $75,000 is received in cash in January, and $23,400 is sold on a deferred payment basis.
5. Other operating expenses of $8,400 are incurred and paid for during January; $2,000 of incurred expenses are payable at January 31.
Instructions
(a) Using the transaction data above, prepare (1) a cash basis income statement and (2) an accrual basis income statement for the month of January.
(b) Using the transaction data above, prepare (1) a cash basis balance sheet and (2) an accrual basis balance sheet as of January 31, 2012.
(c) Identify the items in the cash basis financial statements that make cash basis accounting inconsistent with the theory underlying the elements of financial statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Worksheet, Balance Sheet, Adjusting and Closing Entries) Cooke Company has a fiscal year ending on September 30. Selected data from the September 30 worksheet are presented below.
|
COOKE COMPANY Worksheet For The Month Ended September 30, 2012
|
| |
Trial Balance
|
|
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
37,400
|
|
37,400
|
|
|
Supplies
|
18,600
|
|
4,200
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
31,900
|
|
3,900
|
|
|
Land
|
80,000
|
|
80,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
120,000
|
|
120,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
36,200
|
|
42,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
14,600
|
|
14,600
|
|
Unearned Admissions Revenue
|
|
2,700
|
|
700
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
|
50,000
|
|
50,000
|
|
Owner”s Capital
|
|
109,700
|
|
109,700
|
|
Owner”s Drawings
|
14,000
|
|
14,000
|
|
|
Admissions Revenue
|
|
278,500
|
|
280,500
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
109,000
|
|
109,000
|
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs Expense
|
30,500
|
|
30,500
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
9,400
|
|
9,400
|
|
|
Utilities Expenses
|
16,900
|
|
16,900
|
|
|
Property Tax Expense
|
18,000
|
|
21,000
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
6,000
|
|
12,000
|
|
|
Totals
|
491,700
|
491,700
|
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
|
28,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
14,400
|
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
|
|
6,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
5,800
|
|
|
Property Taxes Payable
|
|
|
|
3,000
|
|
Totals
|
|
|
506,500
|
506,500
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare a complete worksheet.
(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet. (Note: $10,000 of the mortgage payable is due for payment in the next fiscal year.)
(c) Journalize the adjusting entries using the worksheet as a basis.
(d) Journalize the closing entries using the worksheet as a basis.
(e) Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statement Analysis Case
Kellogg Company
Kellogg Company has its headquarters in Battle Creek, Michigan. The company manufactures and sells ready to eat breakfast cereals and convenience foods including cookies, toaster pastries, and cereal bars.
Selected data from Kellogg Company’s 2009 annual report follows (dollar amounts in millions).
|
|
2009
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Sales
|
$12,575.00
|
$12,822.00
|
$11,776.00
|
|
Gross profit %
|
42.87
|
41.86
|
43.98
|
|
Operating profit
|
2,001.00
|
1,953.00
|
1,868.00
|
|
Net cash flow less capital expenditures
|
1,266.00
|
806.00
|
1,031.00
|
|
Net earnings
|
1,208.00
|
1,146.00
|
1,102.00
|
In its annual reports, Kellogg Company has indicated that it plans to achieve sustainability of its operating results with operating principles that emphasize profit rich, sustainable sales growth, as well as cash flow and return on invested capital. Kellogg believes its steady earnings growth, strong cash flow, and continued investment during a multi year period demonstrates the strength and flexibility of its business model.
Instructions
(a) Compute the percentage change in sales, operating profit, net cash flow less capital expenditures, and net earnings from year to year for the years presented.
(b) Evaluate Kellogg’s performance. Which trend seems most favorable? Which trend seems least favorable? What are the implications of these trends for Kellogg’s sustainable performance objectives? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting, Analysis, and Principles
The Amato Theater is nearing the end of the year and is preparing for a meeting with its bankers to discuss the renewal of a loan. The accounts listed below appeared in the December 31, 2012, trial balance.
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid Advertising
|
$6,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
192,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$60,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
90,000
|
|
Unearned Ticket Revenue
|
|
17,500
|
|
Ticket Revenue
|
|
360,000
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
18,680
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
67,600
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
1,400
|
|
Additional information is available as follows.
1. The equipment has an estimated useful life of 16 years and a salvage value of $40,000 at the end of that time. Amato uses the straight line method for depreciation.
2. The note payable is a one year note given to the bank January 31 and bearing interest at 10%. Interest is calculated on a monthly basis.
3. Late in December 2012, the theater sold 350 coupon ticket books at $50 each. One hundred fifty of these ticket books can be used only for admission any time after January 1, 2013. The cash received was recorded as Unearned Ticket Revenue.
4. Advertising paid in advance was $6,000 and was debited to Prepaid Advertising. The company has used $2,500 of the advertising as of December 31, 2012.
5. Salaries and wages accrued but unpaid at December 31, 2012, were $3,500.
Accounting
Prepare any adjusting journal entries necessary for the year ended December 31, 2012.
Analysis
Determine Amato’s income before and after recording the adjusting entries. Use your analysis to explain why Amato’s bankers should be willing to wait for Amato to complete its year end adjustment process before making a decision on the loan renewal.
Principles
Although Amato’s bankers are willing to wait for the adjustment process to be completed before they receive financial information, they would like to receive financial reports more frequently than annually or even quarterly. What trade offs, in terms of relevance and faithful representation, are inherent in preparing financial statements for shorter accounting time periods?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The statement of members’ equity for Aztec Mines, LLC, is shown at the top of the following page.
|
Aztec Mines, LLC
|
|
Statement of Members’ Equity
|
|
For the Years Ended December 31, 2007 and 2008
|
|
|
Utah
|
Aztec
|
|
|
|
|
Properties,
|
Holdings,
|
Cleveland
|
|
|
|
LLC,
|
Ltd.,
|
Porter,
|
Total
|
|
|
Member
|
Member
|
Member
|
Members’
|
|
|
Equity
|
Equity
|
Equity
|
Equity
|
|
Members’ equity, January 1, 2007
|
$460,000
|
$310,000
|
|
$ 770,000
|
|
Net income
|
70,000
|
210,000
|
|
280,000
|
|
Members’ equity, December 31, 2007
|
$530,000
|
$520,000
|
|
$1,050,000
|
|
Porter contribution
|
5,000
|
15,000
|
$267,500
|
287,500
|
|
Net income
|
78,400
|
254,800
|
58,800
|
392,000
|
|
Less member withdrawals
|
(32,000)
|
(48,000)
|
(50,000)
|
(130,000)
|
|
Members’ equity, December 31, 2008
|
$581,400
|
$741,800
|
$276,300
|
$1,599,500
|
a. What was the income sharing ratio in 2007?
b. What was the income sharing ratio in 2008?
c. How much cash did Cleveland Porter contribute to Aztec Mines, LLC, for his interest?
d. Why do the member equity accounts of Utah Properties, LLC, and Aztec Holdings, Ltd., have positive entries for Cleveland Porter’s contribution?
e. What percentage interest of Aztec Mines did Cleveland Porter acquire?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gilley, Hughes, and Moussa are members of City Signs, LLC, sharing income and losses in the ratio of 2:2:1, respectively. The members decide to liquidate the limited liability company (LLC). The members’ equity prior to liquidation and asset realization on March 1, 2008, are as follows:
|
Gilley
|
$ 19,000
|
|
Hughes
|
54,000
|
|
Moussa
|
32,000
|
|
Total
|
$105,000
|
In winding up operations during the month of March, noncash assets with a book value of $126,000 are sold for $146,000, and liabilities of $35,000 are satisfied. Prior to realization, City Signs has a cash balance of $14,000.
a. Prepare a statement of LLC liquidation.
b. Provide the journal entry for the final cash distribution to members.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting firm of Deloitte & Touche is the largest international accounting firm in the world as ranked by total revenues. For the last two years, Deloitte & Touche reported the following for its U.S. operations:
|
|
2005
|
2004
|
|
Revenues (in millions)
|
$ 7,814
|
$ 6,876
|
|
Number of professional staff (including partners)
|
26,401
|
22,841
|
a. For 2004 and 2005, determine the revenue per professional staff. Round to the nearest thousand dollars.
b. Interpret the trend between the two years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Crystal Clean Services, LLC, provides cleaning services for office buildings. The firm has 10 members in the LLC, which did not change between 2007 and 2008. During 2008, the business expanded into four new cities. The following revenue and employee information is provided:
|
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Revenues (in thousands)
|
$38,000
|
$32,500
|
|
Number of employees (excluding members)
|
380
|
260
|
a. For 2007 and 2008, determine the revenue per employee.
b. Interpret the trend between the two years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 1, 2007, Crystal Polles and Doug Kovac form a partnership. Polles agrees to invest $16,500 in cash and merchandise inventory valued at $43,500. Kovac invests certain business assets at valuations agreed upon, transfers business liabilities, and contributes sufficient cash to bring his total capital to $50,000. Details regarding the book values of the business assets and liabilities, and the agreed valuations, follow:
|
|
Kovoc’s Ledger
|
Agreed Upon
|
|
|
Balance
|
Valuation
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$22,600
|
$19,100
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
1,100
|
1,400
|
|
Equipment
|
86,400
|
53,300
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
29,300
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
14,000
|
14,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
The partnership agreement includes the following provisions regarding the division of net income: interest on original investments at 10%, salary allowances of $20,000 and $25,000, respectively, and the remainder equally.
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries to record the investments of Polles and Kovac in the partnership accounts.
2. Prepare a balance sheet as of May 1, 2007, the date of formation of the partnership of Polles and Kovac.
3. After adjustments and the closing of revenue and expense accounts at April 30, 2008, the end of the first full year of operations, the income summary account has a credit balance of $74,000, and the drawing accounts have debit balances of $22,000 (Polles) and $28,000 (Kovac). Journalize the entries to close the income summary account and the drawing accounts at April 30.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Peter Sato and May Koening, attorneys at law, contains the following accounts and balances after adjustments have been recorded on December 31, 2008:
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
30,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
38,900
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,900
|
|
|
Land
|
25,000
|
|
|
Building
|
130,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
|
69,200
|
|
Office Equipment
|
39,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
|
21,500
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
2,100
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
2,000
|
|
Peter Sato, Capital
|
|
95,000
|
|
Peter Sato, Drawing
|
50,000
|
|
|
May Koening, Capital
|
|
65,000
|
|
May Koening, Drawing
|
70,000
|
|
|
Professional Fees
|
|
297,450
|
|
Salary Expense
|
132,300
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Building
|
10,500
|
|
|
Property Tax Expense
|
7,000
|
|
|
Heating and Lighting Expense
|
6,300
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
2,850
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Office Equipment
|
2,800
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
5,700
|
|
|
|
552,250
|
552,250
|
The balance in Koening’s capital account includes an additional investment of $8,000 made on August 10, 2008.
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for 2008, indicating the division of net income. The articles of partnership provide for salary allowances of $40,000 to Sato and $50,000 to Koening, allowances of 10% on each partner’s capital balance at the beginning of the fiscal year, and equal division of the remaining net income or net loss.
2. Prepare a statement of partners’ equity for 2008.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of the end of 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prad Kumar and Carol Grigg have operated a successful firm for many years, sharing net income and net losses equally. Sara Culver is to be admitted to the partnership on May 1 of the current year, in accordance with the following agreement:
a. Assets and liabilities of the old partnership are to be valued at their book values as of April 30, except for the following:
i. Accounts receivable amounting to $2,400 are to be written off, and the allowance for doubtful accounts is to be increased to 5% of the remaining accounts.
ii. Merchandise inventory is to be valued at $60,000.
iii. Equipment is to be valued at $240,080.
b. Culver is to purchase $55,000 of the ownership interest of Grigg for $60,000 cash and to contribute another $25,000 cash to the partnership for a total ownership equity of $80,000.
c. The income sharing ratio of Kumar, Grigg, and Culver is to be 2:1:1.
The post closing trial balance of Kumar and Grigg as of April 30 is as follows:
|
Kumar and Grigg
|
|
Post Closing Trial Balance
|
|
April 30, 2008
|
|
|
Debit Balances
|
Credit Balances
|
|
Cash
|
6,800
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
34,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
900
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
63,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,100
|
|
|
Equipment
|
180,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
80,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
12,000
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
20,000
|
|
Prad Kumar, Capital
|
|
100,000
|
|
Carol Grigg, Capital
|
|
73,000
|
|
|
285,900
|
285,900
|
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries as of April 30 to record the revaluations, using a temporary account entitled Asset Revaluations. The balance in the accumulated depreciation account is to be eliminated.
2. Journalize the additional entries to record the remaining transactions relating to the formation of the new partnership. Assume that all transactions occur on May 1.
3. Present a balance sheet for the new partnership as of May 1, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After the accounts are closed on July 3, 2008, prior to liquidating the partnership, the capital accounts of Ann Daniels, Harold Burton, and Carla Ramariz are $27,000, $4,500, and $32,000, respectively. Cash and noncash assets total $9,500 and $84,000, respectively.
Amounts owed to creditors total $30,000. The partners share income and losses in the ratio of 2:1:1. Between July 3 and July 29, the noncash assets are sold for $54,000, the partner with the capital deficiency pays his deficiency to the partnership, and the liabilities are paid.
Instructions
1. Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation, indicating (a) the sale of assets and division of loss, (b) the payment of liabilities, (c) the receipt of the deficiency (from the appropriate partner), and (d) the distribution of cash.
2. If the partner with the capital deficiency declares bankruptcy and is unable to pay the deficiency, explain how the deficiency would be divided between the partners.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, 2008, the firm of Allen, Dee, and Ito decided to liquidate their partnership. The partners have capital balances of $55,000, $75,000, and $12,000, respectively. The cash balance is $13,000, the book values of noncash assets total $179,000, and liabilities total $50,000. The partners share income and losses in the ratio of 2:2:1.
Instructions
Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation, covering the period October 1 through October 30 for each of the following independent assumptions:
1. All of the noncash assets are sold for $224,000 in cash, the creditors are paid, and the remaining cash is distributed to the partners.
2. All of the noncash assets are sold for $109,000 in cash, the creditors are paid, the partner with the debit capital balance pays the amount owed to the firm, and the remaining cash is distributed to the partners.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On November 1, 2007, E. Hoffman and Mark Torres form a partnership. Hoffman agrees to invest $9,000 cash and merchandise inventory valued at $16,000. Torres invests certain business assets at valuations agreed upon, transfers business liabilities, and contributes sufficient cash to bring his total capital to $90,000. Details regarding the book values of the business assets and liabilities, and the agreed valuations, follow:
|
|
Torres’ Ledger
|
Agreed Upon
|
|
|
Balance
|
Valuation
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$23,500
|
$22,000
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
600
|
900
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
25,600
|
31,000
|
|
Equipment
|
40,000
|
38,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
14,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
7,300
|
7,300
|
|
Notes Payable
|
3,400
|
3,400
|
The partnership agreement includes the following provisions regarding the division of net income: interest of 10% on original investments, salary allowances of $48,000 and $21,000, respectively, and the remainder equally.
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries to record the investments of Hoffman and Torres in the partnership accounts.
2. Prepare a balance sheet as of November 1, 2007, the date of formation of the partnership of Hoffman and Torres.
3. After adjustments and the closing of revenue and expense accounts at October 31, 2008, the end of the first full year of operations, the income summary account has a credit balance of $95,500, and the drawing accounts have debit balances of $20,000 (Hoffman) and $12,000 (Torres). Journalize the entries to close the income summary account and the drawing accounts at October 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Phil LaRue and Russ Small have decided to form a partnership. They have agreed that LaRue is to invest $16,000 and that Small is to invest $24,000. LaRue is to devote full time to the business, and Small is to devote one half time. The following plans for the division of income are being considered:
a. Equal division.
b. In the ratio of original investments.
c. In the ratio of time devoted to the business.
d. Interest of 10% on original investments and the remainder in the ratio of 3:2.
e. Interest of 10% on original investments, salary allowances of $30,000 to LaRu and $15,000 to Small, and the remainder equally.
f. Plan (e), except that LaRue is also to be allowed a bonus equal to 20% of the amount by which net income exceeds the salary allowances.
Instructions
For each plan, determine the division of the net income under each of the following assumptions: (1) net income of $135,000 and (2) net income of $60,000. Present the data in tabular form, using the following columnar headings:
|
|
$135,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Plan
|
LaRue
|
Small
|
LaRue
|
Small
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Dan Warrick and Ron Murphy, attorneys at law, contains the following accounts and balances after adjustments have been recorded on December 31, 2008:
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
12,500
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
31,800
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,400
|
|
|
Land
|
140,000
|
|
|
Building
|
110,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Building
|
|
46,900
|
|
Office Equipment
|
46,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
|
19,200
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
1,600
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
4,000
|
|
Dan Warrick, Capital
|
|
95,000
|
|
Dan Warrick, Drawing
|
45,000
|
|
|
Ron Murphy, Capital
|
|
140,000
|
|
Ron Murphy, Drawing
|
50,000
|
|
|
Professional Fees
|
|
465,000
|
|
Salary Expense
|
305,800
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Building
|
6,800
|
|
|
Property Tax Expense
|
2,400
|
|
|
Heating and Lighting Expense
|
9,400
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense—Office Equipment
|
4,200
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
4,300
|
|
|
|
771,700
|
771,700
|
The balance in Murphy’s capital account includes an additional investment of $20,000 made on April 5, 2008.
Instructions
1. Prepare an income statement for the current fiscal year, indicating the division of net income.
The articles of partnership provide for salary allowances of $40,000 to Warrick and $50,000 to Murphy, allowances of 12% on each partner’s capital balance at the beginning of the fiscal year, and equal division of the remaining net income or net loss.
2. Prepare a statement of partners’ equity for 2008.
3. Prepare a balance sheet as of the end of 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adrian Knox and Lisa Oaks have operated a successful firm for many years, sharing net income and net losses equally. Todd Aguero is to be admitted to the partnership on June 1 of the current year, in accordance with the following agreement:
a. Assets and liabilities of the old partnership are to be valued at their book values as of May 31, except for the following:
Accounts receivable amounting to $2,500 are to be written off, and the allowance for doubtful accounts is to be increased to 5% of the remaining accounts.
Merchandise inventory is to be valued at $98,000.
Equipment is to be valued at $124,000.
b. Aguero is to purchase $30,000 of the ownership interest of Oaks for $37,500 cash and to contribute $40,000 cash to the partnership for a total ownership equity of $70,000.
c. The income sharing ratio of Knox, Oaks, and Aguero is to be 2:1:1.
The post closing trial balance of Knox and Oaks as of May 31 follows.
|
Knox and Oaks
|
|
Post Closing Trial Balance
|
|
May 31, 2008
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Cash
|
12,300
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
26,500
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
400
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
89,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,200
|
|
|
Equipment
|
126,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
34,200
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
34,400
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
30,000
|
|
Adrian Knox, Capital
|
|
85,000
|
|
Lisa Oaks, Capital
|
|
74,000
|
|
|
258,000
|
258,000
|
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries as of May 31 to record the revaluations, using a temporary account entitled Asset Revaluations. The balance in the accumulated depreciation account is to be eliminated.
2. Journalize the additional entries to record the remaining transactions relating to the formation of the new partnership. Assume that all transactions occur on June 1.
3. Present a balance sheet for the new partnership as of June 1, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After the accounts are closed on September 10, 2008, prior to liquidating the partnership, the capital accounts of Mark Nichols, Donna Newby, and Janice Patel are $32,200, $5,400, and $28,400, respectively. Cash and noncash assets total $4,300 and $73,700, respectively. Amounts owed to creditors total $12,000. The partners share income and losses in the ratio of 1:1:2. Between September 10 and September 30, the noncash assets are sold for $47,300, the partner with the capital deficiency pays his or her deficiency to the partnership, and the liabilities are paid.
Instructions
1. Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation, indicating (a) the sale of assets and division of loss, (b) the payment of liabilities, (c) the receipt of the deficiency (from the appropriate partner), and (d) the distribution of cash.
2. If the partner with the capital deficiency declares bankruptcy and is unable to pay the deficiency, explain how the deficiency would be divided between the partners.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
John Wise and Raul Sanchez decide to form a partnership. Wise will contribute $300,000 to the partnership, while Sanchez will contribute only $30,000. However, Sanchez will be responsible for running the day to day operations of the partnership, which are anticipated to require about 45 hours per week. In contrast, Wise will only work five hours per week for the partnership. The two partners are attempting to determine a formula for dividing partnership net income. Wise believes the partners should divide income in the ratio of 7:3, favoring Wise, since Wise provides the majority of the capital. Sanchez believes the income should be divided 7:3, favoring Sanchez, since Sanchez provides the majority of effort in running the partnership business.
How would you advise the partners in developing a method for dividing income?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table shows key operating statistics for the four largest public accounting firms:
|
|
|
|
|
Revenue Split
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Management
|
|
|
U.S. Net
|
|
No. of
|
Accounting
|
|
Advisory
|
|
|
Revenues
|
No. of
|
Professional
|
And
|
|
Services
|
|
|
(in millions)
|
Partners
|
Staff
|
Auditing
|
Tax
|
(MAS)
|
|
Deloitte & Touche
|
$6,876
|
2,568
|
20,273
|
40%
|
26%
|
34%
|
|
Ernst & Young
|
5,511
|
2,000
|
16,489
|
67
|
30
|
3
|
|
PricewaterhouseCoopers
|
5,189
|
2,200
|
21,210
|
65
|
30
|
5
|
|
KPMG LLP
|
4,115
|
1,585
|
11,866
|
72
|
28
|
0
|
|
|
|
Source: The 2005 Accounting Today Top 100 Firms.
|
a. Determine the revenue per partner and revenue per professional staff for each firm.
Round to the nearest dollar.
b. Interpret the differences between the firms in terms of your answer in (a) and the table information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partnership of Willis and Diaz, CPAs, has 200 partners and 1,500 staff professionals. Each partner shares equally in partnership income. Assume that the average income for partners in CPA firms across the country is $260,000 per year, and the average income for staff professionals is $75,000 per year. The partnership income statement for the year is as follows:
|
Revenues
|
|
$200,000,000
|
|
Staff professional salaries
|
$120,000,000
|
|
|
Nonprofessional salaries
|
18,000,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
1,000,000
|
|
|
Travel
|
2,000,000
|
|
|
Litigation losses
|
15,000,000
|
156,000,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 44,000,000
|
The total partnership capital balance is $20,000,000 for 200 partners or $100,000 per partner.
a. Evaluate the financial performance of the partnership from a partner’s perspective. That is, if you were a partner in this firm, would you be satisfied or dissatisfied with partnership performance? Support your answer.
b. What are some explanations for the partnership’s performance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were selected from the records of Botanica Greenhouses Inc. for the current fiscal year ended August 31:
|
Administrative expenses
|
$ 82,200
|
|
Cost of merchandise sold
|
750,000
|
|
Fixed asset impairment
|
115,000
|
|
Gain on condemnation of land
|
25,000
|
|
Income tax:
|
|
|
Applicable to continuing operations
|
27,200
|
|
Applicable to gain on condemnation of land
|
10,000
|
|
Applicable to loss on discontinued operations (reduction)
|
24,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
15,200
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
60,200
|
|
Restructuring charge
|
40,000
|
|
Sales
|
1,252,500
|
|
Selling expenses
|
182,100
|
Instructions
Prepare a multiple step income statement, concluding with a section for earnings per share in the form illustrated in this chapter. There were 10,000 shares of common stock (no preferred) outstanding throughout the year. Assume that the gain on condemnation of land is an extraordinary item.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalize the entries to record the following selected transactions of Lone Star Leather Co.:
|
Apr. 15.
|
Paid the first installment of the estimated income tax for the current fiscal year
|
| |
ending December 31, $90,000. No entry had been made to record the liability.
|
|
June 15.
|
Paid the second installment of $90,000.
|
|
Sept. 15.
|
Paid the third installment of $90,000.
|
|
Dec. 31.
|
Recorded the estimated income tax liability for the year just ended and the
|
| |
deferred income tax liability, based on the transactions above and the following
|
| |
data:
|
|
Income tax rate
|
40%
|
|
Income before income tax
|
$950,000
|
|
Taxable income according to tax return
|
$800,000
|
|
Jan. 15.
|
Paid the fourth installment of $50,000.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Laser Pulse Communications Inc. spent $90 million expanding its fiber optic communication network between Chicago and Los Angeles during 2006. The fiber optic network was assumed to have a 10 year life, with a $10 million salvage value, when it was put into service on January 1, 2007. The network is depreciated using the straight line method. At the end of 2008, the expected traffic volume on the fiber optic network was only 60% of what was originally expected. The reduced traffic volume caused the fair market value of the asset to be estimated at $50 million on December 31, 2008. The loss is not expected to be recoverable.
a. Determine the book value of the network on December 31, 2008, prior to the impairment adjustment.
b. Provide the journal entry to record the fixed asset impairment on December 31, 2008.
c. Provide the balance sheet disclosure for fixed assets on December 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) A manufacturing company is considering its pricing policy for next year. It has already carried out some market research into the expected levels of demand for one of its products at different selling prices, with the following results:
|
Selling price per unit
|
Annual demand (units)
|
|
$100
|
50,000
|
|
$120
|
45,000
|
|
$130
|
40,000
|
|
$150
|
25,000
|
|
$160
|
10,000
|
|
$170
|
5,000
|
This product is manufactured in batches of 100 units, and analysis has shown that the total production cost depends on the number of units as well as the number of batches produced each year. This analysis has produced the following formula for total cost:
Z ??70x ??80y ??$240,000
Where Z represents the total production cost
x represents the number of units produced; and
y represents the number of batches of production.
Required:
(i) Prepare calculations to identify which of the above six selling prices per unit will result in the highest annual profit from this product.
(ii) Explain why your chosen selling price might not result in the highest possible annual profit from this product.
(b) The company is also launching a new product to the market next year and is currently considering its pricing strategy for this new product. The product will be unlike any other product that is currently available and will considerably improve the efficiency with which garages can service motor vehicles. This unique position in the market place is expected to remain for only six months before one of the company’s competitors develops a similar product. The prototype required a substantial amount of time to develop and as a result the company is keen to recover its considerable research and development costs as soon as possible. The company has now developed its manufacturing process for this product and as a result the time taken to produce each unit is much less than was required for the first few units. This time reduction is expected to continue for a short period of time once mass production has started, but from then a constant time requirement per unit is anticipated.
Required:
(i) Explain the alternative pricing strategies that may be adopted when launching a new product.
(ii) Recommend a pricing strategy to the company for its new product and explain how the adoption of your chosen strategy would affect the sales revenue, costs and profits of this product over its life cycle.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Leisure Furniture Ltd produces furniture for hotels and public houses using specific designs prepared by firms of interior design consultants. Business is brisk and the market is highly competitive with a number of rival companies tendering for work. The company’s pricing policy, based on marginal costing (variable costing) techniques, is generating high sales. The main activity of Home Furniture Ltd is the production of a limited range of standard lounge suites for household use. The company also offers a service constructing furniture to customers’ designs. This work is undertaken to utilise any spare capacity. The main customers of the company are the major chains of furniture retailers. Due to recession, consumer spending on household durables has decreased recently and, as a result, the company is experiencing a significant reduction in orders for its standard lounge suites. The market is unlikely to improve within the next year. The company’s pricing policy is to add a percentage mark up to total cost.
Required
Explain why different pricing policies may be appropriate in different circumstances, illustrating your answer by reference to Leisure Furniture Ltd and Home Furniture Ltd.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In groups of three, take the role of finance director, production director and sales director in a company manufacturing pressure die castings, gravity die castings and sand castings. The three types of casting are manufactured in different locations but each is no more than 20 miles from either of the other locations. All castings are brought to central premises for finishing treatment. The costs of materials are around 56 per cent of final sales price and the costs of labour are around 30 per cent of sales price.
The finance director has been asked to explain to the production director and the sales director the effect of measuring profit using variable costing rather than absorption costing. It is important to keep separate the profit on each of the three product types. The finance director should provide a short explanation and the production director and sales director should ask questions about anything which is unclear or omitted from the explanation. After the discussion is completed (say, 30 minutes in all), the group should make a presentation to the class outlining the nature of their discussion and the conclusion reached as to how profit for each product should be measured.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information about the payroll for the week ended December 30 was obtained from the records of Greenfield Co.:
|
Salaries:
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
Sales salaries
|
$320,000
|
Income tax withheld
|
$109,760
|
|
Warehouse salaries
|
84,500
|
Social security tax withheld
|
28,560
|
|
Office salaries
|
155,500
|
Medicare tax withheld
|
8,400
|
|
|
$560,000
|
U.S. savings bonds
|
16,400
|
|
|
|
Group insurance
|
24,690
|
|
|
|
|
$187,810
|
|
Tax rates assumed:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Social security, 6% on first $100,000 of employee annual earnings
|
|
|
|
Medicare, 1.5%
|
|
|
|
State unemployment (employer only), 3.8%
|
|
|
|
Federal unemployment (employer only), 0.8%
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
Instructions
1. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on December 31, journalize the following entries:
a. December 30, to record the payroll.
b. December 30, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on December 31. Of the total payroll for the last week of the year, $15,000 is subject to unemployment compensation taxes.
2. Assuming that the payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 4 of the following fiscal year, journalize the following entries:
a. December 30, to record the payroll.
b. January 4, to record the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll to be paid on January 4.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bristol Distribution Company began business on January 2, 2007. Salaries were paid to employees on the last day of each month, and social security tax, Medicare tax, and federal income tax were withheld in the required amounts. An employee who is hired in the middle of the month receives half the monthly salary for that month. All required payroll tax reports were filed, and the correct amount of payroll taxes was remitted by the company for the calendar year. Early in 2008, before the Wage and Tax Statements (Form W 2) could be prepared for distribution to employees and for filing with the Social Security Administration, the employees’ earnings records were inadvertently destroyed.
None of the employees resigned or were discharged during the year, and there were no changes in salary rates. The social security tax was withheld at the rate of 6.0% on the first $100,000 of salary and Medicare tax at the rate of 1.5% on salary. Data on dates of employment, salary rates, and employees’ income taxes withheld, which are summarized as follows, were obtained from personnel records and payroll records.
|
|
|
|
Monthly
|
|
|
Date First
|
Monthly
|
Income Tax
|
|
Employee
|
Employed
|
Salary
|
Withheld
|
|
Arnold
|
June 2
|
$6,400
|
$1,408
|
|
Charles
|
Jan. 2
|
8,600
|
2,064
|
|
Gillam
|
Mar. 1
|
5,000
|
950
|
|
Nelson
|
Jan. 2
|
3,800
|
684
|
|
Quinn
|
Nov. 15
|
4,400
|
814
|
|
Ramirez
|
Apr. 15
|
3,200
|
560
|
|
Wu
|
Jan. 16
|
9,200
|
2,300
|
Instructions
1. Calculate the amounts to be reported on each employee’s Wage and Tax Statement (Form W 2) for 2007, arranging the data in the following form:
|
|
Gross
|
Federal Income
|
Social Security
|
Medicare Tax
|
|
Employee
|
Earnings
|
Tax Withheld
|
Tax Withheld
|
Withheld
|
2. Calculate the following employer payroll taxes for the year: (a) social security; (b) Medicare; (c) state unemployment compensation at 3.8% on the first $9,000 of each employee’s earnings; (d) federal unemployment compensation at 0.8% on the first $9,000 of each employee’s earnings; (e) total.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data for Iris Publishing Co. relate to the payroll for the week ended December 7, 2008:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated
|
|
|
Hours
|
Hourly
|
Weekly
|
Federal
|
U.S. Savings
|
Earnings,
|
|
Employee
|
Worked
|
Rate
|
Salary
|
Income Tax
|
Bonds
|
Nov. 30
|
|
A
|
38
|
$16
|
|
$109.44
|
|
$ 29,184
|
|
B
|
44
|
25
|
|
241.50
|
$20
|
47,400
|
|
C
|
46
|
30
|
|
338.10
|
20
|
70,800
|
|
D
|
40
|
12
|
|
81.60
|
35
|
30,700
|
|
E
|
30
|
10
|
|
36.00
|
10
|
14,400
|
|
F
|
|
|
$1,100.00
|
242.00
|
|
4,400
|
|
G
|
41
|
24
|
|
199.20
|
|
41,500
|
|
H
|
|
|
2,200.00
|
550.00
|
90
|
105,600
|
|
I
|
48
|
18
|
|
187.20
|
10
|
43,200
|
Employees F and H are office staff, and all of the other employees are sales personnel. All sales personnel are paid 11⁄2 times the regular rate for all hours in excess of 40 hours per week. The social security tax rate is 6.0% on the first $100,000 of each employee’s annual earnings, and Medicare tax is 1.5% of each employee’s annual earnings. The next payroll check to be used is No. 981.
Instructions
1. Prepare a payroll register for Iris Publishing Co. for the week ended December 7, 2008. Use the following columns for the payroll register: Total Hours Worked, Regular Hours, Overtime Hours, Social Security Tax, Medicare Tax, Federal Income Tax, U.S. Savings Bonds, Total Deductions, Net Pay, Ck. No., Salaries Expense, and Office Salaries Expense.
2. Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounts, with the balances indicated, appear in the ledger of Yosemite Outdoor Equipment Company on December 1 of the current year:
|
211
|
Salaries Payable
|
—
|
218
|
Bond Deductions Payable
|
$ 2,000
|
|
212
|
Social Security Tax Payable
|
$5,888
|
219
|
Medical Insurance Payable
|
2,400
|
|
213
|
Medicare Tax Payable
|
1,550
|
611
|
Sales Salaries Expense
|
685,900
|
|
214
|
Employees Federal Income Tax Payable
|
9,555
|
711
|
Officers Salaries Expense
|
326,400
|
|
215
|
Employees State Income Tax Payable
|
9,297
|
712
|
Office Salaries Expense
|
124,000
|
|
216
|
State Unemployment Tax Payable
|
1,000
|
719
|
Payroll Tax Expense
|
88,858
|
|
217
|
Federal Unemployment Tax Payable
|
280
|
|
|
|
The following transactions relating to payroll, payroll deductions, and payroll taxes occurred during December:
|
Dec. 1.
|
Issued Check No. 728 to Pico Insurance Company for $2,400, in payment of the
|
| |
semiannual premium on the group medical insurance policy.
|
|
2
|
Issued Check No. 729 to First National Bank for $16,993, in payment for $5,888
|
| |
of social security tax, $1,550 of Medicare tax, and $9,555 of employees’ federal
|
| |
income tax due.
|
|
3
|
Issued Check No. 730 for $2,000 to First National Bank to purchase U.S. savings
|
| |
bonds for employees.
|
|
14
|
Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll
|
| |
record follows:
|
|
Salary distribution:
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
$31,000
|
|
|
Officers
|
14,800
|
|
|
Office
|
5,600
|
$51,400
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
$ 2,827
|
|
|
Medicare tax
|
771
|
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
9,149
|
|
|
State income tax withheld
|
2,313
|
|
|
Savings bond deductions
|
1,000
|
|
|
Medical insurance deductions
|
400
|
16,460
|
|
Net amount
|
|
$34,940
|
|
Dec. 14.
|
Issued Check No. 738 in payment of the net amount of the biweekly payroll.
|
|
14
|
Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December
|
| |
14: social security tax, $2,827; Medicare tax, $771; state unemployment tax, $250;
|
| |
federal unemployment tax, $55.
|
|
17
|
Issued Check No. 744 to First National Bank for $16,345, in payment for $5,654
|
| |
of social security tax, $1,542 of Medicare tax, and $9,149 of employees’ federal
|
| |
income tax due.
|
|
28
|
Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll
|
| |
record follows:
|
|
Salary distribution:
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
$31,500
|
|
|
Officers
|
15,000
|
|
|
Office
|
5,500
|
$52,000
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
$ 2,808
|
|
|
Medicare tax
|
780
|
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
9,256
|
|
|
State income tax withheld
|
2,340
|
|
|
Savings bond deductions
|
1,000
|
16,184
|
|
Net amount
|
|
$35,816
|
|
28
|
Issued Check No. 782 for the net amount of the biweekly payroll.
|
|
28
|
Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December
|
| |
28: social security tax, $2,808; Medicare tax, $780; state unemployment tax, $120;
|
| |
federal unemployment tax, $30.
|
|
30
|
Issued Check No. 791 for $13,950 to First National Bank, in payment of employees’
|
| |
state income tax due on December 31.
|
|
30
|
Issued Check No. 792 to First National Bank for $2,000 to purchase U.S. savings
|
| |
bonds for employees.
|
|
31
|
Paid $55,700 to the employee pension plan. The annual pension cost is $65,000.
|
| |
(Record both the payment and the unfunded pension liability.)
|
Instructions
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Journalize the following adjusting entries on December 31:
a. Salaries accrued: sales salaries, $3,150; officers salaries, $1,500; office salaries, $550. The payroll taxes are immaterial and are not accrued.
b. Vacation pay, $13,200.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Daisy Dairy Co. began business on January 2, 2007. Salaries were paid to employees on the last day of each month, and social security tax, Medicare tax, and federal income tax were withheld in the required amounts. An employee who is hired in the middle of the month receives half the monthly salary for that month. All required payroll tax reports were filed, and the correct amount of payroll taxes was remitted by the company for the calendar year.
Early in 2008, before the Wage and Tax Statements (Form W 2) could be prepared for distribution to employees and for filing with the Social Security Administration, the employees’ earnings records were inadvertently destroyed.
None of the employees resigned or were discharged during the year, and there were no changes in salary rates. The social security tax was withheld at the rate of 6.0% on the first $100,000 of salary and Medicare tax at the rate of 1.5% on salary. Data on dates of employment, salary rates, and employees’ income taxes withheld, which are summarized as follows, were obtained from personnel records and payroll records.
|
|
|
|
Monthly
|
|
|
|
|
Income
|
|
|
Date First
|
Monthly
|
Tax
|
|
Employee
|
Employed
|
Salary
|
Withheld
|
|
Alvarez
|
Jan. 16
|
$9,600
|
$2,400
|
|
Collins
|
Nov. 1
|
2,500
|
375
|
|
Felix
|
Jan. 2
|
3,000
|
480
|
|
Lydall
|
July 16
|
4,400
|
792
|
|
Penn
|
Jan. 2
|
8,800
|
2,112
|
|
Song
|
May 1
|
5,100
|
918
|
|
Walker
|
Feb. 16
|
2,000
|
240
|
Instructions
1. Calculate the amounts to be reported on each employee’s Wage and Tax Statement (Form W 2) for 2007, arranging the data in the following form:
|
|
Gross
|
Federal Income
|
Social Security
|
Medicare Tax
|
|
Employee
|
Earnings
|
Tax Withheld
|
Tax Withheld
|
Withheld
|
2. Calculate the following employer payroll taxes for the year: (a) social security; (b) Medicare; (c) state unemployment compensation at 4.8% on the first $7,000 of each employee’s earnings; (d) federal unemployment compensation at 0.8% on the first $7,000 of each employee’s earnings; (e) total.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data for Center Pointe Co. relate to the payroll for the week ended December 7, 2008:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated
|
|
|
Hours
|
Hourly
|
Weekly
|
Federal
|
U.S. Savings
|
Earnings,
|
|
Employee
|
Worked
|
Rate
|
Salary
|
Income Tax
|
Bonds
|
Nov. 30
|
|
M
|
52
|
$36.00
|
|
$480.24
|
$50
|
$ 82,600
|
|
N
|
|
|
$1,200.00
|
258.00
|
|
57,600
|
|
O
|
38
|
16.00
|
|
115.52
|
25
|
29,184
|
|
P
|
44
|
18.50
|
|
178.71
|
|
38,700
|
|
Q
|
40
|
20.00
|
|
168.00
|
15
|
40,500
|
|
R
|
|
|
2,400.00
|
576.00
|
100
|
115,200
|
|
S
|
32
|
22.00
|
|
105.60
|
|
12,600
|
|
T
|
46
|
28.00
|
|
301.84
|
40
|
64,200
|
|
U
|
40
|
18.00
|
|
144.00
|
20
|
35,600
|
Employees N and R are office staff, and all of the other employees are sales personnel. All sales personnel are paid 11⁄2 times the regular rate for all hours in excess of 40 hours per week. The social security tax rate is 6.0% on the first $100,000 of each employee’s annual earnings, and Medicare tax is 1.5% of each employee’s annual earnings. The next payroll check to be used is No. 818.
Instructions
1. Prepare a payroll register for Center Pointe Co. for the week ended December 7, 2008. Use the following columns for the payroll register: Total Hours Worked, Regular Hours, Overtime Hours, Social Security Tax, Medicare Tax, Federal Income Tax, U.S. Savings Bonds, Total Deductions, Net Pay, Ck. No., Salaries Expense, and Office Salaries Expense.
2. Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following accounts, with the balances indicated, appear in the ledger of Bonnie’s Gifts Co. on December 1 of the current year:
|
211
|
Salaries Payable
|
—
|
218
|
Bond Deductions Payable
|
$3,000
|
|
212
|
Social Security Tax Payable
|
$8,032
|
219
|
Medical Insurance Payable
|
24,000
|
|
213
|
Medicare Tax Payable
|
2,114
|
611
|
Operations Salaries Expense
|
850,000
|
|
214
|
Employees Federal Income Tax Payable
|
13,035
|
711
|
Officers Salaries Expense
|
560,000
|
|
215
|
Employees State Income Tax Payable
|
12,682
|
712
|
Office Salaries Expense
|
140,000
|
|
216
|
State Unemployment Tax Payable
|
1,400
|
719
|
Payroll Tax Expense
|
121,506
|
|
217
|
Federal Unemployment Tax Payable
|
400
|
|
|
|
The following transactions relating to payroll, payroll deductions, and payroll taxes occurred during December:
|
Dec. 2.
|
Issued Check No. 728 for $3,000 to First National Bank to purchase U.S. savings
|
| |
bonds for employees.
|
|
3
|
Issued Check No. 729 to First National Bank for $23,181, in payment of $8,032
|
| |
of social security tax, $2,114 of Medicare tax, and $13,035 of employees’ federal
|
| |
income tax due.
|
|
14
|
Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll
|
| |
record follows:
|
|
Salary distribution:
|
|
|
|
Operations
|
$38,500
|
|
|
Officers
|
25,500
|
|
|
Office
|
6,200
|
$70,200
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
$ 3,931
|
|
|
Medicare tax
|
1,053
|
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
12,496
|
|
|
State income tax withheld
|
3,159
|
|
|
Savings bond deductions
|
1,500
|
|
|
Medical insurance deductions
|
4,000
|
26,139
|
|
Net amount
|
|
$44,061
|
|
14
|
Issued Check No. 738 in payment of the net amount of the biweekly payroll.
|
|
14
|
Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December
|
| |
14: social security tax, $3,931; Medicare tax, $1,053; state unemployment tax,
|
| |
$290; federal unemployment tax, $84.
|
|
17
|
Issued Check No. 744 to First National Bank for $22,464, in payment of $7,862
|
| |
of social security tax, $2,106 of Medicare tax, and $12,496 of employees’ federal
|
| |
income tax due.
|
|
18
|
Issued Check No. 750 to Pico Insurance Company for $24,000, in payment of
|
| |
the semiannual premium on the group medical insurance policy.
|
|
28
|
Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll
|
| |
record follows:
|
|
Salary distribution:
|
|
|
|
Operations
|
$39,000
|
|
|
Officers
|
26,000
|
|
|
Office
|
6,400
|
$71,400
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
$ 3,856
|
|
|
Medicare tax
|
1,071
|
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
12,709
|
|
|
State income tax withheld
|
3,213
|
|
|
Savings bond deductions
|
1,500
|
22,349
|
|
Net amount
|
|
$49,051
|
|
28
|
Issued Check No. 782 in payment of the net amount of the biweekly payroll.
|
|
Dec. 28.
|
Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes on employees’ earnings of December
|
| |
28: social security tax, $3,856; Medicare tax, $1,071; state unemployment tax,
|
| |
$155; federal unemployment tax, $38.
|
|
30
|
Issued Check No. 791 to First National Bank for $3,000 to purchase U.S. savings
|
| |
bonds for employees.
|
|
30
|
Issued Check No. 792 for $19,054 to First National Bank in payment of employees’
|
| |
state income tax due on December 31.
|
|
31
|
Paid $43,000 to the employee pension plan. The annual pension cost is $45,000.
|
| |
(Record both the payment and unfunded pension liability.)
|
Instructions
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Journalize the following adjusting entries on December 31:
a. Salaries accrued: operations salaries, $3,900; officers salaries, $2,600; office salaries, $640. The payroll taxes are immaterial and are not accrued.
b. Vacation pay, $12,650.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions completed by Hirata Company during its first fiscal year ending December 31 were as follows:
|
Jan. 2.
|
Issued a check to establish a petty cash fund of $1,400.
|
|
Mar. 1.
|
Replenished the petty cash fund, based on the following summary of petty cash
|
| |
receipts: office supplies, $678; miscellaneous selling expense, $389; miscellaneous
|
| |
administrative expense, $245.
|
|
Apr. 5.
|
Purchased $12,000 of merchandise on account, terms 1/10, n/30. The perpetual
|
| |
inventory system is used to account for inventory.
|
|
May 5.
|
Paid the invoice of April 5 after the discount period had passed.
|
|
10
|
Received cash from daily cash sales for $7,755. The amount indicated by the
|
| |
cash register was $7,775.
|
|
June 2.
|
Received a 60 day, 8.4% note for $60,000 on the Stevens account.
|
|
Aug. 1.
|
Received amount owed on June 2 note, plus interest at the maturity date.
|
|
3
|
Received $2,300 on the Jacobs account and wrote off the remainder owed on a
|
| |
$2,500 accounts receivable balance. (The allowance method is used in accounting
|
| |
for uncollectible receivables.)
|
|
28
|
Reinstated the Jacobs account written off on August 3 and received $200 cash in
|
| |
full payment.
|
|
Sept.
|
Purchased land by issuing a $250,000, 90 day note to Ace Development Co.,
|
| |
which discounted it at 8%.
|
|
Oct. 2.
|
Sold office equipment in exchange for $55,000 cash plus receipt of a $25,000,
|
| |
120 day, 6% note. The equipment had cost $96,000 and had accumulated depreciation
|
| |
of $10,000 as of October 1.
|
|
Nov. 30
|
Journalized the monthly payroll for November, based on the following data:
|
|
Salaries
|
Deductions
|
|
Sales salaries
|
$58,200
|
Income tax withheld
|
$15,804
|
|
Office salaries
|
29,600
|
Social security tax
|
|
|
|
$87,800
|
withheld
|
5,120
|
|
|
|
Medicare tax withheld
|
1,317
|
|
Unemployment tax rates:
|
|
|
State unemployment
|
3.8%
|
|
Federal unemployment
|
0.8%
|
|
Amount subject to unemployment taxes:
|
|
|
State unemployment
|
$2,000
|
|
Federal unemployment
|
2,000
|
|
Nov. 30.
|
Journalized the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll.
|
|
Dec. 1.
|
Journalized the payment of the September 2 note at maturity.
|
|
30
|
The pension cost for the year was $65,000, of which $57,450 was paid to the
|
|
|
pension plan trustee.
|
Instructions
1. Journalize the selected transactions.
2. Based on the following data, prepare a bank reconciliation for December of the current year:
|
a.
|
Balance according to the bank statement at December 31, $123,200.
|
|
b.
|
Balance according to the ledger at December 31, $108,680.
|
|
c.
|
Checks outstanding at December 31, $27,450.
|
|
d.
|
Deposit in transit, not recorded by bank, $12,450.
|
|
e.
|
Bank debit memorandum for service charges, $280.
|
|
f.
|
A check for $330 in payment of an invoice was incorrectly recorded in the accounts
|
| |
as $130.
|
3. Based on the bank reconciliation prepared in (2), journalize the entry or entries to be made by Hirata Company.
4. Based on the following selected data, journalize the adjusting entries as of December 31 of the current year:
|
a
|
Estimated uncollectible accounts at December 31, $6,490, based on an aging of accounts
|
| |
receivable. The balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at December 31
|
| |
was $600 (debit).
|
|
b.
|
The physical inventory on December 31 indicated an inventory shrinkage of $1,320.
|
|
c.
|
Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $9,850.
|
|
d.
|
Office supplies used during the year, $1,580.
|
|
e.
|
Depreciation is computed as follows:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
|
|
|
Residual
|
Acquisition
|
Useful Life
|
Method
|
|
Asset
|
Cost
|
Value
|
Date
|
in Years
|
Used
|
|
Buildings
|
$380,000
|
$ 0
|
January 2
|
50
|
Straight line
|
|
Office Equip.
|
90,000
|
14,000
|
October 2
|
5
|
Straight line
|
|
Store Equip.
|
45,000
|
10,000
|
January 3
|
8
|
Double declining balance
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(at twice the
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
straight line rate)
|
|
f.
|
A patent costing $18,600 when acquired on January 2 has a remaining legal life of nine
|
| |
years and is expected to have value for six years.
|
|
g.
|
The cost of mineral rights was $185,000. Of the estimated deposit of 333,000 tons of
|
| |
ore, 22,500 tons were mined during the year.
|
|
h.
|
Vacation pay expense for December, $4,400.
|
|
i.
|
A product warranty was granted beginning December 1 and covering a one year
|
| |
period. The estimated cost is 2.5% of sales, which totaled $796,000 in December.
|
|
j.
|
Interest was accrued on the note receivable received on October 2.
|
5. Based on the following information and the post closing trial balance shown on the following page, prepare a balance sheet in report form at December 31 of the current year. The merchandise inventory is stated at cost by the LIFO method.
|
The product warranty payable is a current liability.
|
|
|
Vacation pay payable:
|
|
|
Current liability
|
$3,000
|
|
Long term liability
|
1,400
|
|
The unfunded pension liability is a long term liability.
|
|
|
Notes payable: Current liability
|
$25,000
|
|
Long term liability
|
75,000
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
|
Balances
|
Balances
|
|
Petty Cash
|
1,400
|
|
|
Cash
|
108,200
|
|
|
Notes Receivable
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
202,300
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
6,490
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
140,600
|
|
|
Interest Receivable
|
375
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
19,700
|
|
|
Office Supplies
|
7,100
|
|
|
Land
|
245,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
380,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
|
7,600
|
|
Office Equipment
|
90,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment
|
|
3,800
|
|
Store Equipment
|
45,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment
|
|
11,250
|
|
Mineral Rights
|
185,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depletion
|
|
12,500
|
|
Patents
|
15,500
|
|
|
Social Security Tax Payable
|
|
9,910
|
|
Medicare Tax Payable
|
|
2,700
|
|
Employees Federal Income Tax Payable
|
|
15,887
|
|
State Unemployment Tax Payable
|
|
42
|
|
Federal Unemployment Tax Payable
|
|
9
|
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
90,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
125,300
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
3,000
|
|
Product Warranty Payable
|
|
19,900
|
|
Vacation Pay Payable
|
|
4,400
|
|
Unfunded Pension Liability
|
|
7,550
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
100,000
|
|
J. Goll, Capital
|
|
1,044,837
|
|
|
1,465,175
|
1,465,175
|
6. On February 7 of the following year, the merchandise inventory was destroyed by fire. Based on the following data obtained from the accounting records, estimate the cost of the merchandise destroyed:
|
Jan. 1 Merchandise inventory
|
$140,600
|
|
Jan. 1–Feb. 7 Purchases (net)
|
38,000
|
|
Jan. 1–Feb. 7 Sales (net)
|
68,000
|
|
Estimated gross profit rate
|
40%
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Connor Lang was discussing summer employment with Jarrod McIntyre, president of Azalea Landscaping Service:
Jarrod: I’m glad that you’re thinking about joining us for the summer. We could certainly
use the help.
Connor: Sounds good. I enjoy outdoor work, and I could use the money to help with next
year’s school expenses.
Jarrod: I’ve got a plan that can help you out on that. As you know, I’ll pay you $12 per hour,
but in addition, I’d like to pay you with cash. Since you’re only working for the summer,
it really doesn’t make sense for me to go to the trouble of formally putting you on
our payroll system. In fact, I do some jobs for my clients on a strictly cash basis, so it
would be easy to just pay you that way.
Connor: Well, that’s a bit unusual, but I guess money is money.
Jarrod: Yeah, not only that, it’s tax free!
Connor: What do you mean?
Jarrod: Didn’t you know? Any money that you receive in cash is not reported to the IRS on
a W 2 form; therefore, the IRS doesn’t know about the income—hence, it’s the same as
tax free earnings.
a. Why does Jarrod McIntyre want to conduct business transactions using cash (not check or credit card)?
b. How should Connor respond to Jarrod’s suggestion?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Radcliffe, Sonders, and Towers, who share in income and losses in the ratio of 2:3:5, decided to discontinue operations as of April 30 and liquidate their partnership. After the accounts were closed on April 30, the following trial balance was prepared:
|
Cash
|
5,900
|
|
|
Noncash Assets
|
109,900
|
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
26,800
|
|
Radcliffe, Capital
|
|
14,600
|
|
Sonders, Capital
|
|
27,900
|
|
Towers, Capital
|
|
46,500
|
|
|
115,800
|
115,800
|
Between May 1 and May 18, the noncash assets were sold for $27,400, and the liabilities were paid.
Instructions
1. Assuming that the partner with the capital deficiency pays the entire amount owed to the partnership, prepare a statement of partnership liquidation.
2. Journalize the entries to record (a) the sale of the assets, (b) the division of loss on the sale of the assets, (c) the payment of the liabilities, (d) the receipt of the deficiency, and (e) the distribution of cash to the partners.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lamar Kline and Kevin Lambert decide to form a partnership by combining the assets of their separate businesses. Kline contributes the following assets to the partnership: cash, $10,000; accounts receivable with a face amount of $123,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $7,300; merchandise inventory with a cost of $85,000; and equipment with a cost of $140,000 and accumulated depreciation of $90,000.
The partners agree that $5,000 of the accounts receivable are completely worthless and are not to be accepted by the partnership, that $8,100 is a reasonable allowance for the uncollectibility of the remaining accounts, that the merchandise inventory is to be recorded at the current market price of $74,300, and that the equipment is to be valued at $67,000.
Journalize the partnership’s entry to record Kline’s investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ron Maples and Mei Cui form a partnership by combining assets of their former businesses. The following balance sheet information is provided by Maples, sole proprietorship:
|
Cash
|
|
$ 30,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$65,000
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
3,200
|
61,800
|
|
Land
|
|
120,000
|
|
Equipment
|
$60,000
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation—equipment
|
36,000
|
24,000
|
|
Total assets
|
|
$235,800
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
$ 18,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
|
45,000
|
|
Ron Maples, capital
|
|
172,800
|
|
Total liabilities and owner’s equity
|
|
$235,800
|
|
|
|
Maples obtained appraised values for the land and equipment as follows:
|
|
Land
|
$165,000
|
|
Equipment
|
10,000
|
| |
|
|
|
An analysis of the accounts receivable indicated that the allowance for doubtful accounts should be increased to $5,000. Journalize the partnership’s entry for Maples’s investment.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sixty year old Jan Howard retired from her computer consulting business in Boston and moved to Florida. There she met 27 year old Tami Galyon, who had just graduated from Eldon Community College with an associate degree in computer science. Jan and Tami formed a partnership called H&G Computer Consultants. Jan contributed $25,000 for startup costs and devoted one half time to the business. Tami devoted full time to the business. The monthly drawings were $1,500 for Jan and $3,000 for Tami.
At the end of the first year of operations, the two partners disagreed on the division of net income. Jan reasoned that the division should be equal. Although she devoted only one half time to the business, she contributed all of the startup funds. Tami reasoned that the income sharing ratio should be 2:1 in her favor because she devoted full time to the business and her monthly drawings were twice those of Jan.
Can you identify any flaws in the partners’ reasoning regarding the income sharing ratio?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Media Properties, LLC, has three members: KXT Radio Partners, Rachel Sizemore, and Daily Sun Newspaper, LLC. On January 1, 2008, the three members had equity of $240,000, $40,000, and $160,000, respectively. KXT Radio Partners contributed an additional $50,000 to Media Properties, LLC, on June 1, 2008. Rachel Sizemore received an annual salary allowance of $139,800 during 2008. The members’ equity accounts are also credited with 8% interest on each member’s January 1 capital balance. Any remaining income is to be shared in the ratio of 4:3:3 among the three members. The net income for Media Properties, LLC, for 2008 was $570,000. The salary and interest allowances were distributed to the members.
a. Determine the division of income among the three members.
b. Prepare the journal entry to close the net income and withdrawals to the individual member equity accounts.
c. Prepare a statement of members’ equity for 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Health Source Medical, LLC, consists of two doctors, Dobbs and Fox, who share in all income and losses according to a 2:3 income sharing ratio. Dr. Lindsey Kopp has been asked to join the LLC. Prior to admitting Kopp, the assets of Health Source were revalued to reflect their current market values. The revaluation resulted in medical equipment being increased by $20,000. Prior to the revaluation, the equity balances for Dobbs and Fox were $300,000 and $325,000, respectively.
a. Provide the journal entry for the asset revaluation.
b. Provide the journal entry for the bonus under the following independent situations:
1. Kopp purchased a 30% interest in Health Source Medical, LLC, for $310,000.
2. Kopp purchased a 25% interest in Health Source Medical, LLC, for $175,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The partnership of Angel Investor Associates began operations on January 1, 2008, with contributions from two partners as follows:
|
Jan Strous
|
$36,000
|
|
Lisa Lankford
|
84,000
|
The following additional partner transactions took place during the year:
1. In early January, Sarah Rogers is admitted to the partnership by contributing $30,000 cash for a 20% interest.
2. Net income of $140,000 was earned in 2008. In addition, Jan Strous received a salary allowance of $25,000 for the year. The three partners agree to an income sharing ratio equal to their capital balances after admitting Rogers.
3. The partners’ withdrawals are equal to half of the increase in their capital balances resulting from income remaining after salary allowances.
Prepare a statement of partnership equity for the year ended December 31, 2008.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Glenn Powell is to retire from the partnership of Powell and Associates as of March 31, the end of the current fiscal year. After closing the accounts, the capital balances of the partners are as follows: Glenn Powell, $260,000; Tammie Sawyer, $125,000; and Joe Patel, $140,000.
They have shared net income and net losses in the ratio of 3:2:2. The partners agree that the merchandise inventory should be increased by $30,000, and the allowance for doubtful accounts should be increased by $6,200. Powell agrees to accept a note for $165,000 in partial settlement of his ownership equity. The remainder of his claim is to be paid in cash.
Sawyer and Patel are to share equally in the net income or net loss of the new partnership. Journalize the entries to record (a) the adjustment of the assets to bring them into agreement with current market prices and (b) the withdrawal of Powell from the partnership.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
XYZ Ltd processes and purifies a basic chemical which is then broken down by reaction to give three separate products. Explain the approaches to joint cost allocation using the following information:
|
Product
|
Units produced
|
Final market value
per unit (£)
|
Costs beyond
split off point (£)
|
|
A
|
3,000
|
5.00
|
4,000
|
|
B
|
1,000
|
4.00
|
1,800
|
|
C
|
2,000
|
3.00
|
2,400
|
Joint costs incurred up to the split off point are £2,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a continuous flow process, the following information was collected in relation to production during the month of May:
|
|
Units
|
|
Work in progress at start of month (60% complete)
|
50,000
|
|
New units introduced for processing
|
80,000
|
|
Completed units transferred to store
|
100,000
|
|
Work in progress at end of month (20% complete)
|
30,000
|
Opening work in progress was valued at cost of £42,000. Costs incurred during the month were £140,000.
Required
Calculate the value of finished output and work in progress using the weighted average method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Clay Products Ltd produces handmade decorative vases. A process costing system is used. All materials are introduced at the start of the process. Labour costs are incurred uniformly throughout the production process. The following information is available for the month of July:
|
Work in progress at 1 July (60% complete)
|
2,000 units
|
|
Work in progress at 31 July (30% complete)
|
1,200 units
|
The value of work in progress at 1 July is as follows:
|
|
£
|
|
Direct materials cost
|
1,700
|
|
Direct labour costs
|
1,900
|
|
|
3,600
|
During the month of July, 7,000 vases were transferred to finished goods stock. Materials introduced cost £14,700. Labour costs incurred were £12,820.
Required
Using the method of weighted averages, prepare a process cost statement for the month of July showing unit costs, the value of finished goods and the value of work in progress at the end of the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refinery Ltd buys crude oil which is refined, producing liquefied gas, oil and grease. The cost of crude oil refined in the past year was £105,000 and the refining department incurred processing costs of £45,000. The output and sales for the three products during that year were as follows:
|
Product
|
Units of output
|
Sales value
£
|
Additional
processing costs
£
|
|
Liquefied gas
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
12,000
|
|
Refined oil
|
500,000
|
230,000
|
60,000
|
|
Grease
|
5,000
|
8,000
|
–
|
The company could have sold the products at the split off point directly to other processors at a unit selling price of 50p, 35p and £1.60 respectively.
Required
(1) Compute the net profit earned for each product using two suitable methods of joint cost allocation.
(2) Determine whether it would have been more or less profitable for the company to have sold certain products at split off without further processing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures paint from two sequential processes (P1 and P2). Details for P1 for a period were as follows:
|
Input materials
|
20,000 litres costing £114,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
£176,000
|
|
Opening work in progress
|
nil
|
|
Transferred to P2
|
15,000 litres
|
|
Normal loss
|
5% of input
|
|
Abnormal loss
|
500 litres
|
|
Closing work in progress
|
3,500 litres (complete in respect of materials, 60% converted)
|
The company uses the weighted average method of process costing. All losses occur at the end of the process. Prepare the P1 Process Account for the period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Under examination conditions this question would be allocated approximately 18 minutes. NLM uses a common process to manufacture three joint products: X, Y and Z. The costs of operating the common process total $75,400 each month. This includes $6,800 of apportioned head office costs. The remaining costs are specific to the common process and would be avoided if it were discontinued. Common costs are apportioned to the joint products on the basis of their respective output volumes.
The normal monthly output from the common process is:
X 4,000 litres
Y 5,000 litres
Z 4,500 litres
There are a number of manufacturers of products that are identical to products X, Y and Z and as a result there is a competitive market in which these products can be bought and sold at the following prices:
X $5.00 per litre
Y $4.50 per litre
Z $5.50 per litre
Currently NLM uses the output from the common process as input to three separate processes where X, Y and Z are converted into SX, SY and SZ. The specific costs of these further processes (which are avoidable if the further process is discontinued) are as follows:
X to SX $1.25 per litre plus $1,850 per month
Y to SY $1.80 per litre plus $800 per month
Z to SZ $1.55 per litre plus $2,400 per month
The market selling prices of the further processed products are:
SX $6.75 per litre
SY $7.50 per litre
SZ $7.20 per litre
Required:
(a) Advise NLM as to which (if any) of the further processes should continue to be operated.
State any relevant assumptions.
(b) Advise NLM whether they should continue to operate the common process. State any relevant assumptions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chemicals Ltd owns a supply of North Sea gas liquids, and is developing its downstream activities. It is producing two main products, propane and butane, and there is a by product, arcone. There are four manufacturing processes involved where the gas passes through Modules 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Production information for April Year 2 is as follows:
1,000 tonnes of liquid A and 600 tonnes of liquid B were issued to Module 1.
Liquid C is issued to Module 2 at the rate of 1 tonne per 4 tonnes of production from Module 1.
Liquid D is added to Module 4 at the rate of 1 tonne per 3 tonnes of output from Module 2.
Arcone arises in Module 1 and represents 25% of the good output of that process. The remaining output of Module 1 passes to Module 2. Of the Module 2 output 75% passes to Module 3 and 25% passes to Module 4. The output of Module 3 is propane and the output of Module 4 is butane.
Materials costs are:
|
|
£
|
|
Liquid A
|
60 per tonne
|
|
Liquid B
|
40 per tonne
|
|
Liquid C
|
75 per tonne
|
|
Liquid D
|
120 per tonne
|
The labour and overhead costs during the month were:
|
|
£
|
|
Module 1
|
22,400
|
|
Module 2
|
38,750
|
|
Module 3
|
12,000
|
|
Module 4
|
10,000
|
The company is considering selling the products at the undernoted prices:
|
|
£
|
|
Propane
|
130 per tonne
|
|
Butane
|
150 per tonne
|
|
Arcone
|
100 per tonne
|
Required
(1) Draw a diagram of the various processes described.
(2) Ascertain the percentage profit on selling price per tonne of each of these products.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the management team of a tree growing business. Your team consists of the financial adviser, the plant grower and the sales representative. The business has been growing small hedging conifers from seedlings to three years of age and then selling the plants through mail order in bundles of 25 small bare rooted plants. A garden centre has offered to buy plants in pots for sale in its retail outlets provided the plants are between five and six years old and are symmetrical in shape. If the plants are grown to five years of age, they will be too old to be sold as bare rooted plants, but could be sold for use as shelter belts in parkland or country estates. Your team has arranged a meeting to discuss the cost implications of the alternative courses of action. Each person should come to the meeting with a list of costs and benefits. The purpose of the meeting is to set out a list of factors to be investigated further for precise costing. Take five minutes for individual preparation, 10 minutes for a group discussion and then give feedback from your meeting to the rest of the class.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Divide your group into two teams. One team is the business advisory service of the local enterprise council which offers start up funding for new ventures. The other team is a group of textile science researchers from the local university. The scientists have developed a new form of medical dressing for burns. The dressing is produced by a continuous flow process and can be cut to lengths specified by the customer. The main customers are hospitals. The health trusts which operate the hospitals will pay a price based on cost plus a percentage for profit. The scientists do not know how to work out the cost in a continuous flow process. For five minutes the team acting as the business advisers should prepare a short list of key rules in process costing. At the same time, the team acting as the scientists should prepare a list of key questions to ask about process costing. Both teams should then meet and discuss their prepared lists and questions (10 minutes). Finally, one person should report to the rest of the class on the problems of explaining and understanding process costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Montrose Glass Products Ltd manufactures three ranges of high quality paper weights – Basic, Standard and Deluxe. Its accountant has prepared a draft budget for Year 7:
|
|
Basic
£000s
|
Standard
£000s
|
Deluxe
£000s
|
Total
£000s
|
|
Revenue
|
45
|
35
|
40
|
120
|
|
Material
|
15
|
10
|
10
|
35
|
|
Labour
|
20
|
15
|
5
|
40
|
|
Variable overhead
|
5
|
12
|
5
|
22
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
9
|
5
|
6
|
20
|
|
|
49
|
42
|
26
|
117
|
|
Profit/(loss)
|
(4)
|
(7)
|
14
|
3
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed overheads are allocated to each product line on the basis of direct labour hours. The directors are concerned about the viability of the company and are currently considering the cessation of both Basic and Standard ranges, since both are apparently making losses.
Required
(a) If the directors close down only the manufacture of Basic paperweights, what is the effect on total profit?
(b) If the directors close down only the manufacture of Standard paperweights, what is the effect on total profit?
(c) What is the best decision with regard to keeping profit as high as possible?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chris Gibson Kitchenware Limited sells kitchen appliances to department stores. Product costs are ascertained using an absorption costing system from which the following statement has been prepared in respect of the business’s three product lines.
|
|
Dishwashers
£000s
|
Fridges
£000s
|
Ovens
£000s
|
Total
£000s
|
|
Sales
|
180
|
330
|
270
|
780
|
|
Less total costs
|
(200)
|
(250)
|
(220)
|
(670)
|
|
Profit/(loss)
|
(20)
|
8
|
50
|
110
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
It has been estimated that costs are 60 per cent variable and 40 per cent fixed.
Required
(a) Restate the table distinguishing variable and fixed costs.
(b) Advise whether dishwashers should be dropped from the product range in order to improve profitability.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A retail company has a number of individual retail outlets in different towns. Each outlet has its own manager who can make decisions about the individual retail outlet, provided these decisions are within the parameters of the overall company policy. The performance of each individual manager is measured based on the profits of the retail outlet that he or she manages.
Company policy
It is company policy that each of the retail outlets should stock the following categories of items for sale to customers:
1. newspapers and magazines
2. fresh fruit and vegetables
3. tinned food items
4. frozen food items
Company policy also requires that no single category occupy more than 40% or less than 15% of the total display space available. In addition, at their own discretion, managers are permitted to use up to 10% of the total display space available for other products that meet other localised needs.
The KL retail outlet
The following weekly sales and cost data relate to the KL retail outlet, one of the outlets owned by the company:
|
|
Sales
$000
|
Purchase costs
$000
|
Display space
%
|
|
Newspapers and magazines
|
150
|
105
|
25
|
|
Fresh fruit and vegetables
|
130
|
75
|
20
|
|
Tinned food items
|
400
|
240
|
30
|
|
Frozen food items
|
200
|
90
|
15
|
|
Other products
|
150
|
100
|
10
|
| |
|
|
|
|
The total display space available is 800 square metres.
For each category of items for sale:
1.sales revenue is directly proportional to the floor area occupied;
2. purchase costs are directly proportional to sales revenue.
In addition to the purchase costs of the items sold, the retail outlet incurs other costs that total $280,000 per week.
Required:
(a) Demonstrate, using the above information and appropriate calculations, how the manager of the KL retail outlet should allocate the space available between the different categories of items for sale to customers in order to maximise his weekly profit.
(b) You have recently joined the retail company as its Assistant Management Accountant and, as your first project, you have been asked to compare the profitability of a number of the retail outlets. One of those within your comparison is the KL retail outlet. You have visited the KL retail outlet and have investigated the costs that are being incurred in addition to the purchase costs of the items sold. You have confirmed that typically the retail outlet incurs other costs that total $280,000 per week. Further analysis has shown that these include staff salary costs (excluding any profit related bonus earned by the manager), staff training costs, rent, light and heat, power, equipment depreciation, point of sale software costs, stationery, telephone, inventory storage and handling costs, marketing costs and head office charges.
You have discussed these other costs with the manager of the retail outlet. The manager of the retail outlet does not think that gross profit should be used as the basis for allocating space to items. He has suggested that some of the other costs be attributed to the product category to which they relate rather than ignored when making the space allocation decision.
Required:
Prepare a report, addressed to the manager of the KL retail outlet that explains
(i) the principles of Direct Product Profitability (DPP);
(ii) how these principles may be applied to his retail outlet; and
(iii) how their application may improve the profits of his retail outlet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table shows the number of patients treated and the total costs for a hospital for each of the past four months:
|
Month
|
Patients
|
Total Cost
$
|
|
1
|
5,000
|
37,500
|
|
2
|
8,400
|
45,660
|
|
3
|
8,300
|
45,050
|
|
4
|
5,900
|
39,420
|
Applying the high low method to the above information, an equation that could be used to forecast total cost ($) from the number of patients to be treated (where x ??number of patients to be treated) is:
A 22,900 ??2.40x
B 24,300 ??2.50x
C 25,000 ??2.50x
D 25,500 ??2.40x
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dairy products Ltd has recently developed sales of cream in aerosol dispensers which are sold alongside the company’s traditional products of cartons of cream and packets of cheese. The company is now considering the sale of cream cheese in aerosol dispensers. It is company policy that any new product must be capable of generating sufficient profit to cover all costs, including estimated initial marketing and advertising expenditure of £1,000,000. Current weekly production, with unit costs and selling prices, is as follows:
|
|
Units of
output
|
Variable cost
(£)
|
Fixed cost
(£)
|
Selling price
(£)
|
|
Cartons of cream
|
400,000
|
0.45
|
0.15
|
0.75
|
|
Aerosol cans of cream
|
96,000
|
0.50
|
0.25
|
1.05
|
|
Packets of cheese
|
280,000
|
1.00
|
0.20
|
1.30
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Sales volume is equal to production volume. A 50 week trading year is assumed. Rates of absorption of fixed costs are based on current levels of output. In order to produce cream cheese in aerosol dispensers, the aerosol machine would require modification at a cost of £400,000 which is to be recovered through sales within one year. Additional annual fixed costs of £500,000 would be incurred in manufacturing the new product. Variable cost of production would be 50 pence per can. Initial research has estimated demand as follows:
|
Price per can
(£)
|
Maximum weekly
demand (cans)
|
|
1.50
|
60,000
|
|
1.40
|
80,000
|
|
1.15
|
100,000
|
There is adequate capacity on the aerosol machine, but the factory is operating near capacity in other areas. The new product would have to be produced by reducing production elsewhere and two alternatives have been identified:
(a) reduce production of cream cartons by 20 per cent per annum; or
(b) reduce production of packet cheese by 25 per cent per annum.
The directors consider that the new product must cover any loss of profit caused by this reduction in volume. They are also aware that market research has shown growing customer dissatisfaction because of wastage with cream sold in cartons.
Required
Prepare a memorandum to the board of directors of Dairy products Ltd showing the outcome of the alternative courses of action open to the company and make a recommendation on the most profitable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are employed as the accountant for Cars Ltd, a local garage which has a bodyshop. The bodyshop manager, Mr George, has contacted you saying that one of the company’s present customers has offered the company a one year contract for additional work. The customer requires a discount of 10 per cent to be allowed on the total invoice value. Mr George provides you with the following information:
1 Additional capital expenditure will be:
|
|
£
|
|
Video conferencing facility
|
10,000
|
|
Additional storage trolleys
|
5,000
|
|
Computerised estimated system
|
10,000
|
The customer insists on installation of the video conferencing facility which will not be usable for any other contract. The storage trolleys and estimating system may be used on other work after the end of this particular contract.
2 Additional staff will be required. Three full time skilled technicians earning £8.00 per hour will each work 39 hours per week on the new contract. They are each allowed 6 weeks per year paid holidays and 2 weeks paid training. Labour efficiency is 95 per cent measured as the ratio of sold hours/hours attended. Training time and holiday time are charged to direct costs of the department. For each technician the new contract will leave some unsold hours available for any other jobs coming into the bodyshop. One full time car cleaner will be required earning £10,500 per annum.
3 The customer has said that the potential increase in sales due to chargeable hours from this contract could be 4,500 hours at a rate of £20.00 per hour before discount. In addition the increase in sales of car parts is calculated on the basis of £40.00 per hour with an average gross profit of 15 per cent before discount. The increase in paint sales is calculated on the basis of £3.50 per hour with an average gross profit of 40 per cent before discount.
4 Additional annual overheads will be as follows:
|
|
£
|
|
Variable costs
|
5,500
|
|
Fixed costs
|
6,500
|
5 Depreciation is calculated on a straight line basis as follows:
|
|
%
|
|
Storage trolleys
|
20
|
|
Computers
|
25
|
Mr George has asked your opinion on the acceptability of the customer’s proposal.
Required:
Write a memo to Mr George:
(a) assessing the financial aspects of the proposal; and
(b) commenting briefly on other considerations relevant to the decision making process.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cans plc is developing a new form of ‘crinkly can” for soft drinks. The crinkly can has grooves in the side which match the size of the fingers of a hand. The company”s research and development department employs 50 people full time and accounts for 2 per cent of the company”s costs. The design manager thinks that it may be important in future to develop special designs for particular commercial customers, even if this involves relatively small production runs and a higher price to the customer for each can. He said ‘Our profit margins are not yet satisfactory. I would like to maintain our existing level of sales of the standard can at the standard price, but also take advantage of our design skills and sell additional cans of the new style cans in smaller batches but at a higher price.” Explain the further information you would need in order to report on the benefits and problems for creating higher contribution margins and higher profit margins on the basis of the design manager”s proposals.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A ferry company knows that many of its customers are taking their cars to the continent by ferry but are returning by train through the Channel Tunnel. The company is considering whether or not to make a special offer of ‘return journey for the price of a single journey’ for a period of one month. It is predicted that this will attract 200 additional customers in the month but will lose the return fare portion of journeys by 50 existing customers. The net gain in fare revenue in the month is estimated as £3,750. Additional staff will be required to manage car flow at the port, but these staff can be transferred from other work to cover the additional activity during the month. It is estimated that the time they spend on this exercise will be worth £800 of their salary bill. The additional customers will spend money in the bar and restaurants during the ferry crossing. It is estimated that the additional gross profit will be £4,000 in the month. One additional catering employee will be hired from an agency at a cost of £600 for the month. Fixed overhead costs of £8,000 for the month will not be affected by the special offer. For the purposes of cost recording the fixed overhead will be apportioned over all journeys to give a cost per journey of £60.
The relevant benefits and costs are:
|
|
£
|
|
Relevant benefits
|
|
|
Incremental revenue from fares
|
3,750
|
|
Incremental revenue from catering Relevant costs
|
4,000
|
|
Incremental wages Net incremental benefit
|
(600) 7,150
|
Note that time spent on this activity by car parking staff is not relevant because their salaries would be paid in any event. Also the allocation of fixed overheads is not relevant because these do not change as a result of the proposed course of action.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An outdoor pursuits centre is planning for the year ahead. There is a possibility that the government will give additional funds to the education budget under an ‘active and healthy’ policy. There is also a possibility that this money will be diverted for other use and as a result the local councils will cut back on funds for outside activities. Normal conditions will mean that neither of these extremes occurs.
|
|
Condition
|
Predicted demand (pupil days)
|
Probability
|
|
Worst possible
|
Councils cuts back funds for activities
|
5,000
|
.4
|
|
Most likely
|
Normal
|
6,000
|
.3
|
|
Best possible
|
Schools ‘active and healthy’ programme
|
8,000
|
.3
|
The outdoor pursuits centre is facing three possible levels of surplus (fees minus costs) per pupil day. If new safety regulations are implemented from the start of the year, more staff will be required, thus reducing the estimated surplus per day. If the long term weather forecast is poor, bookings will be lower.
|
|
Condition
|
Predicted
|
Probability
|
|
|
|
surplus per
|
|
|
|
|
pupil day
|
|
|
Worst possible
|
New safety regulations and
|
£1.00
|
.2
|
|
|
poor weather forecast
|
|
|
|
Most likely
|
New safety regulations and
|
£1.50
|
.2
|
|
|
reasonable weather
|
|
|
|
Best possible
|
Safety regulations delayed and
|
£2.50
|
.6
|
|
|
reasonable weather
|
|
|
Required
(1) Evaluate the cost of all options, based on combining probabilities.
(2) Draw a decision tree for the choice: ‘keeping open the outdoor centre versus closing down’.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A souvenir shop makes the following forecast for one year’s sales and costs.
|
Forecast
|
£
|
|
sales
|
80,000
|
|
variable costs of souvenirs purchased
|
(26,000)
|
|
fixed labour costs
|
(30,000)
|
|
other fixed costs
|
(5,000)
|
|
Profit
|
19,000
|
Required
Prepare tables showing the sensitivity of the profit forecast to each of the following:
(a) a 1 per cent change in sales and variable costs,
(b) a 1 per cent change only in the materials cost of souvenirs purchased,
(c) a 1 per cent change only the labour costs, and
(d) a 1 per cent change only in the other fixed costs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The directors of Hightown United Football Club Ltd are preparing for a meeting with their bank manager to discuss the availability of funds to be used to buy new players. The following information is available:
1 The Hightown United stadium is divided into three separate spectator areas:
|
|
Spectator entry fee per person (£)
|
Attendance norm
|
|
Ground
|
3.00
|
70% of crowd
|
|
Enclosure
|
4.00
|
20% of crowd
|
|
Stand
|
5.00
|
10% of crowd
|
2 Other income:
Sponsorship: £100,000 fixed fee plus 5 per cent of gross takings for each match.
Advertising: £150,000 per year.
Programmes and refreshments: 70 pence per spectator.
3 Cost of holding a match: Manning turnstiles: 15 pence per spectator. Police presence: £200 per 1,000 spectators.
Advertising and crowd entertainment: £1,000 per match.
If a match is cancelled, turnstile manning and police costs are not incurred but the cost of advertising and crowd entertainments will be paid in advance and will not be recoverable.
4 Other annual running costs:
|
|
£
|
|
Staff salaries
|
900,000
|
|
Rates and ground costs
|
200,000
|
|
Travel
|
150,000
|
|
Other
|
300,000
|
5 Expected attendances:
|
|
Home games
|
Spectators per game
|
|
League
|
20
|
16,000
|
|
Cup
|
4
|
12,000
|
|
European trophy
|
2
|
25,000
|
The number of games predicted for the Cup and European Trophy matches is based on average past performance. At worst the team might play only one home game in each competition. The bank manager has asked that the following information be provided for the meeting:
1 A statement showing the budgeted surplus expected to be generated during the forthcoming season.
2 A calculation of the percentage fall in average attendances which could be tolerated before reaching a break even point.
3 A calculation of the percentage increase which would have to be applied to spectator charges to maintain the budgeted surplus if all expenses were 10% higher than budget but advertising revenue and the fixed sponsorship fee did not increase.
Required
Prepare a report for the directors, containing the information requested by the bank manager and identifying any limitations of the analysis carried out.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In a general engineering works the following routine has been followed for several years to arrive at an estimate of the price for a contract. The process of estimating is started by referring to a job cost card for some previous similar job and evaluating the actual material and direct labour hours used on that job at current prices and rates. Production overheads are calculated and applied as a percentage of direct wages. The percentage is derived from figures appearing in the accounts of the previous year, using the total production overhead cost divided by the total direct wages cost. One third is added to the total production overhead cost to cover administrative charges and profit. You have been asked to draft a short report to management outlining, with reasons, the changes which you consider desirable in order to improve the process of estimating a price for a contract.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been asked for advice by the owner of a small business who has previously estimated overhead costs as a percentage of direct labour cost. This method has produced quite reasonable results because the products have all been of similar sales value and have required similar labour inputs. The business has now changed and will in future concentrate on two products. Product X is a high volume item of relatively low sales value and requires relatively little labour input per item. It is largely produced by automatic processes. Product Y is a low volume item of relatively high sales value and requires considerably more labour input by especially skilled workers. It is largely produced by manual craft processes. What advice would you give to the owner of the business about allocation of overhead costs comprising?
1. the owner’s salary for administrative work?
2. rent paid on the production facilities?
3. depreciation of production machinery?
Compare the effect of having one overhead recovery rate for all three costs in aggregate, and the effect of identifying the factors which ‘drive’ each cost in relation to the production process.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As a group you are the senior teaching staff of a school where each subject department is regarded as a cost centre. The direct costs of each cost centre are teachers’ salaries, textbooks and worksheets for pupils. The overhead costs of the school administration are charged to each cost centre as a fixed percentage of teachers’ salaries in the cost centre. The languages department argues that this is unfair to them as they have a higher ratio of teachers to pupils due to the need for developing spoken language skills. The art department objects to the percentage charge because it includes accommodation costs without recognising that they are housed in portacabins where the roof leaks. The maths department says that they should not have to share the costs of expensive technical equipment when all they need for effective teaching is a piece of chalk. One member of staff has read about ‘cost drivers’ and the teachers have decided that they would like to meet the school accountant to put forward some ideas about using them. So far they have made a list of the main overhead costs as:
1. heating and lighting
2. head teacher, deputy heads and office staff salaries
3. cleaning
4. maintenance
5. library
6. computing services for staff
7. computing labs for pupils
8. insurance of buildings and contents.
Allocate among your group the roles of staff in the languages department, art department and maths department. Discuss cost drivers for each of the overhead costs listed and attempt to arrive at an agreement on cost drivers to be presented to the school accountant. What are the problems of agreeing the drivers? What are the benefits?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Two bus companies are competing for passengers on the most popular routes in a major city. The long established company has strong customer loyalty, provides weekend and evening services as well as frequent day time services and covers the cost of unprofitable routes from the profits on popular routes. The incoming company has larger resources from which to support a price war and can be selective in running only at peak times on the most popular routes. There are fears that if the incomer wins the bus war, the quality of service provision will diminish in the evenings and at weekends and on unprofitable routes. As a group allocate the roles of: (1) passenger representatives, (2) the financial controller’s department of the long established company, (3) members of the city council’s transport committee, (4) representatives of the police force. In the separate roles discuss the areas where cost savings might be achieved by the long established company to make it competitive on price. Then come together and negotiate a support package for the company which focuses on improving the financial performance of the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bookcases Ltd produces packs of book shelves for self assembly. The budgeted selling price and costs are as follows:
|
Budget for one unit:
|
£
|
|
Selling price
|
60
|
|
Direct materials
|
36
|
|
Direct labour
|
5
|
|
Variable production overhead Total variable cost
|
3 44
|
The fixed production overhead cost for one month is budgeted as £40,000. The budgeted production volume is 5,000 units per month. In the month of February sales are lower than expected. At the start of March there are 200 unsold units in stock. Production is maintained at 5,000 units in the month of March.
Required
Calculate the profit for March under (a) absorption costing and (b) marginal costing for each of the following situations:
(1) Situation A: sales in March are 4,700 units
(2) Situation B: sales in March are 5,100 units
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Playtime Ltd produces jigsaws for sale in model shops. The following information relates to the sales and costs of producing the jigsaws.
Selling price per unit is £20 Variable cost per unit is £10
Fixed costs of the period are £800 Volumes of production and sales are as follows for periods 1, 2 and 3.
|
|
Period 1 units
|
Period 2 units
|
Period 3 units
|
|
Produced
|
250
|
200
|
180
|
|
Sold
|
210
|
210
|
210
|
|
Held in stock at end of period
|
40
|
30
|
nil
|
Required
(a) Using absorption costing, what is the profit of Period 2?
(b) Using marginal costing what is the profit of Period 2?
(c) Compare the profit of Period 1 under absorption costing with that calculated under marginal costing and explain the difference.
(d) Using absorption costing, calculate the value of closing stock at the end of Period 1.
(e) Using marginal costing, calculate the value of closing stock at the end of Period 1.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Resistor Ltd manufactures electrical units. All units are identical. The following information relates to June and July Year 5.
(a) Budgeted costs and selling prices were:
|
|
June
£
|
July
£
|
|
Variable manufacturing cost per unit
|
2.00
|
2.20
|
|
Total fixed manufacturing costs (based on budgeted
|
40,000
|
44,000
|
|
output of 25,000 units per month)
|
|
|
|
Total fixed marketing cost (based on budgeted sales
|
14,000
|
15,400
|
|
of 25,000 units per month)
|
|
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
5.00
|
5.50
|
| |
|
|
|
(b) Actual production and sales recorded were:
|
|
Units
|
Units
|
|
Production
|
24,000
|
24,000
|
|
Sales
|
21,000
|
26,500
|
(c) There was no stock of finished goods at the start of June Year 5. There was no wastage or loss of finished goods during either June or July Year 5.
(d) Actual costs incurred corresponded to those budgeted for each month.
Required
Calculate the relative effects on the monthly operating profits of applying:
(a) absorption costing;
(b) marginal costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The table below sets out data for the Mobile Phone Manufacturing Company for the four quarters of Year 1.
|
|
£
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
120
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
70
|
|
Fixed overhead production cost for each quarter
|
20,000
|
|
|
Qtr 1
units
|
Qtr 2
units
|
Qtr 3
units
|
Qtr 4
units
|
Total
|
|
|
Planned production
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
4,000
|
|
|
Actual production
|
1,000
|
1,000
|
900
|
1,100
|
4,000
|
|
|
Actual sales
|
900
|
1,100
|
900
|
1,100
|
4,000
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The fixed overhead production cost for each month is based on budgeted production of 1,000 units per quarter. The fixed overhead is absorbed into products on the basis of a predetermined overhead rate of £20 per unit. Actual production fluctuates in quarters 3 and 4 due to labour problems. Actual sales fluctuate each quarter due to seasonal factors but the company meets its target for production and sales over the year as a whole.
Required
Prepare a statement of quarterly profit for each of the four quarters of Year 1 using:
(a) absorption costing; and
(b) marginal costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The board of directors of Performance Ltd appointed a new manager to the Southern division of the company at the start of year 6. The expectation was that the manager would improve the gross profit as a percentage of sales, as compared with the results for year 4 and year 5. Relevant information in respect of the Southern division for each year is as follows:
1. Sales and costs of the division were as follows:
|
|
Year 4
|
Year 5
|
Year 6
|
|
Sales
|
10,000 units
|
11,000 units
|
12,000 units
|
|
Production
|
9,000 units
|
10,000 units
|
15,000 units
|
|
Variable cost of production
|
£5.00 per unit
|
£6.00 per unit
|
£7.00 per unit
|
|
Variable cost of selling
|
£2.00 per unit
|
£2.20 per unit
|
£2.40 per unit
|
|
Total fixed costs of production per annum
|
£210,000
|
£230,000
|
£390,000
|
2. Selling prices each year were based on full unit cost plus a percentage mark up on cost:
Year 4: Full unit cost plus 25 per cent of cost
Year 5: Full unit cost plus 24 per cent of cost
Year 6: Full unit cost plus 20 per cent of cost
3. There were 4,000 units of finished goods in stock at the start of Year 4. These were valued using costs identical to those incurred during Year 4.
4. The company policy is to value inventories (stocks) on a FIFO basis.
In year 4 and year 5 the company followed its previous practice of valuing inventories (stocks) at variable cost of production for management accounting purposes. The new manager of Southern division has insisted quite strongly that the inventories (stocks) should be valued on a full absorption costing basis, for consistency with external reporting standards.
Required
Prepare a report to the board of directors of Performance Ltd showing how the profit performance of the Southern division in Year 6 compares with that of Year 5 and Year 4 respectively.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As a group you are planning a garden renovation service to take advantage of the current popularity of television programmes dealing with garden design. Within the group, allocate the following roles:
1. design skills
2. labouring and building skills
3.business planning skills
4. marketing skills.
As a team discuss the approach you would take to estimating the cost of a job for quoting to an intending customer. Discuss also the proposal in a gardening advice magazine that those starting out in a new business should seek only to recover variable costs until their reputation is established. Report back to the rest of the class on:
1.the costs to be recorded;
2.the extent to which team members agree or disagree on costs to be included;
3. your views on the suggestion that only variable costs should be recovered initially.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following transactions relate to a dairy, converting milk to cheese, for the month of May:
|
1 May
|
Bought 600 drums of milk from supplier, invoiced price being £90,000.
|
|
1 May
|
Bought cartons, cost £6,000 paid in cash.
|
|
2 May
|
Returned to supplier one drum damaged in transit, £150.
|
|
3 May
|
500 drums of milk issued to cheesemaking department, cost £75,000.
|
|
4 May
|
Issued two thirds of cartons to cheesemaking department, £4,000.
|
|
14 May
|
Paid cheesemakers’ wages, £3,000.
|
|
14 May
|
Paid wages for cleaning and hygiene, £600.
|
|
16 May
|
Paid rent, rates and electricity in respect of dairy, £8,000, in cash.
|
|
28 May
|
Paid cheesemakers’ wages, £3,000.
|
|
28 May
|
Paid wages for cleaning and hygiene, £600.
|
|
30 May
|
progress at end of month.
|
| |
|
|
Required
Prepare a calculation of the cost of production transferred to finished goods at the end of May.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Restoration Ltd buys basic furniture units and creates period layouts in clients’ homes. The following transactions relate to jobs 801, 802 and 803 in the month of May. Prepare job cost records for each job.
|
1 May
|
G
|
Bought 70 furniture units on credit from supplier, invoiced price being £204,000. The furniture units acquired consisted of two different grades. 50 units were of standard size at a total cost of £140,000 and 20 units were of king size at a total cost of £64,000.
|
|
1 May
|
♣
|
Bought stain, varnish and paint at a cost of £30,000 paid in cash. The stain cost £12,000 while the varnish cost £14,000 and the paint £4,000.
|
|
2 May
|
⊗
|
Returned to supplier one furniture unit damaged in transit, £2,800. The furniture unit returned was of standard size.
|
|
3 May
|
†
|
Furniture units issued to Finishing department. 40 standard size units were issued, together with 14 king size units. There were three separate jobs: references 801, 802 and 803. The standard size units were all for job 801 (Riverside Hotel); 10 king size units were for job 802 (Mountain Lodge); and the remaining 4 king size units were for job 803 (Hydeaway House).
|
|
4 May
|
ø
|
Issued stain, varnish and paint to Finishing department, £22,500.
|
|
14 May
|
|
Paid Finishing department employees’ wages £10,000. Wages were paid to 8 printing employees, each earning the same amount.
|
|
14 May
|
|
Paid security wages £350. Security wages were paid to one part time security officer.
|
|
16 May
|
‡
|
Paid rent, rates and electricity in respect of Finishing department, £18,000 in cash. Payment for rent was £9,000, rates £5,000 and electricity £4,000.
|
|
28 May
|
|
Paid Finishing department employees’ wages £10,000. Wages were paid to the same 8 employees as on 14 May.
|
|
28 May
|
|
Paid security wages £350. Security wages were paid to the same security officer as on 14 May.
|
|
30 May
|
♥
|
Employee records show that: 4 Finishing department employees worked all month on job 801; 2 Finishing department employees worked on job 802; and 2 Finishing department employees worked on job 803.
|
|
30 May
|
|
It is company policy to allocate production overheads in proportion to labour costs of each job.
|
|
30 May
|
#
|
Transferred all finished goods to finished goods stock. There remained no unfinished work in progress.
|
|
30 May
|
≈
|
Riverside Hotel and Mountain Lodge took delivery of their goods. Hydeaway House will take delivery on 10 June.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Resistor Ltd manufactures electrical units. All units are identical. The following information relates to June and July Year 5.
(a) Budgeted costs and selling prices were:
|
|
June
£
|
July
£
|
|
Variable manufacturing cost per unit
|
2.00
|
2.20
|
|
Total fixed manufacturing costs (based on budgeted
|
40,000
|
44,000
|
|
output of 25,000 units per month)
|
|
|
|
Total fixed marketing cost (based on budgeted sales
|
14,000
|
15,400
|
|
of 25,000 units per month)
|
|
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
5.00
|
5.50
|
(b) Actual production and sales recorded were:
|
|
Units
|
Units
|
|
Production
|
24,000
|
24,000
|
|
Sales
|
21,000
|
26,500
|
(c) There was no stock of finished goods at the start of June Year 5. There was no wastage or loss of finished goods during either June or July Year 5.
(d) Actual costs incurred corresponded to those budgeted for each month.
Required
Calculate the relative effects on the monthly operating profits of applying the undernoted techniques:
(a) absorption costing;
(b) variable costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Frames Ltd produces wooden window frames to order for the building industry. The size of frame depends on the specification in the contract. For the purposes of providing job cost estimates the size of frame is ignored and the job cost estimate is based on the type of frame produced, being either single glazing or double glazing. The standard specification is as follows:
|
|
Single glazing
£
|
Double glazing
£
|
|
Direct materials per unit
|
90.00
|
130.00
|
|
Direct labour per unit
|
|
|
|
6.5 hours at £5.00 per hour
|
32.50
|
|
|
8.0 hours at £5.00 per hour
|
|
40.00
|
|
Variable production overhead charged at £6 per hour
|
39.00
|
48.00
|
| |
|
|
|
Fixed overhead is estimated at £160,000 per month for single glazing and £100,000 per month for double glazing. Estimated production per month for single glazing is 4,000 units and for double glazing is 2,000 units per month.
Required
Prepare a job cost estimate for a customer who intends to order 500 single glazed and 200 double glazed units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Insulation Ltd has been established to manufacture insulation material for use in houses. At present, one machine is installed for production of insulation material. A further similar machine can be purchased if required. The first customer is willing to place orders in three different sizes at the following selling prices:
|
Order size
|
Selling price per package
£
|
|
430 packages per day
|
25.20
|
|
880 packages per day
|
25.00
|
|
1,350 packages per day
|
24.80
|
The customer will enter into an initial contract of 30 days’ duration and will uplift completed packages on a daily basis from the premises of Insulation Ltd.
The following assumptions have been made in respect of Insulation Ltd:
(a) In view of the competitive market the selling prices are not negotiable.
(b) Direct materials will cost £23.75 per package irrespective of the order size.
(c) The output of one machine will be 350 packages per shift.
(d) A maximum of three shifts will be available on a machine within one day. The depreciation charge for a machine will be £100 per day, irrespective of the number of shifts worked.
(e) Labour costs to operate a machine will be £100 for the first shift, £120 for the second shift and £160 for the third shift of the day. If labour is required for a shift, then the full shift must be paid for regardless of the number of packages produced.
(f) The total cost of supervising the employees for each of the first two shifts in any day will be £20 per machine. The supervision cost of the third shift will be £40 per machine.
(g) Other fixed overhead costs will be £280 per day if one machine is used. Buying and using an additional machine would result in a further £100 of fixed costs per day.
(h) Production and sales volume will be equal regardless of order size.
(i) The company does not expect to obtain other work during the term of the initial contract.
Required
Prepare a report for the production director of Insulation Ltd giving:
(1) For each order size, details of the overall profitability per day and net profit per package.
(2) An explanation of the differing amounts of profit per package.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
As a group, you are planning to establish a partnership supplying examination advice and tuition to school pupils in their homes. Each course of lessons will be regarded as a single ‘job’. Courses may vary in length and in target ability level, depending on the requirements of the pupil to be tutored. Divide the group to take on three different roles. One role is that of a tutor who is also a member of the partnership, sharing equally the profits of the business. The second role is that of the accountancy adviser to the partnership. The third role is that of a parent making enquiries about the price charged and the justification for that price. Each member of the group should take on one of the three roles and separately make a note of:
(a) the expected costs of a job (in terms of types of cost);
(b) how you would justify the costs (if supplying the service); and
(c) how you would question the costs (if receiving the service).
Then all members of the group should come together, compare answers and finally prepare a joint report on the problems of job costing in a service business.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following transactions relate to a dairy, converting milk to cheese, for the month of May. Prepare ledger accounts which record the transactions.
|
1 May
|
Bought 600 drums of milk from supplier on credit, invoiced price being £90,000
|
|
1 May
|
Bought cartons, cost £6,000 paid in cash
|
|
2 May
|
Returned to supplier one drum damaged in transit, £150
|
|
3 May
|
500 drums of milk issued to cheesemaking department, cost £75,000
|
|
4 May
|
Issued two thirds of cartons to cheesemaking department, £4,000
|
|
14 May
|
Paid cheesemakers’ wages £3,000
|
|
14 May
|
Paid wages for cleaning and hygiene £600
|
|
16 May
|
Paid rent, rates and electricity in respect of printing, £8,000, in cash
|
|
28 May
|
Paid cheesemakers’ wages £3,000
|
|
28 May
|
Paid wages for cleaning and hygiene £600
|
|
31 May
|
Transferred all production of cheese in cartons to finished goods inventory.
|
|
31 May
|
No work in progress at end of month.
|
|
31 May
|
Finished goods stock value at £6,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following statement shows a note of information relating to materials inventory during the month of May. Prepare the materials inventory control account in the general ledger.
| |
|
£
|
|
1 May
|
Purchased direct materials on credit, for various jobs:
|
|
|
Job 901
|
1,300
|
|
Job 902
|
1,100
|
|
Job 903
|
900
|
|
2 May
|
Returned materials which failed quality inspection
|
|
|
Job 901
|
200
|
|
Job 902
|
300
|
|
5 May
|
Paid cash for indirect materials to be used during May and June
|
4,200
|
|
31 May
|
Job records for May showed the following information:
|
|
|
Job 901 All materials transferred to work in progress (1,300 –200)
|
1,100
|
|
Job 902 Start of work delayed. 75% of materials transferred to
|
600
|
|
work in progress 75% of (1,100 – 300)
|
|
|
Job 903 Start of work delayed. 50% of materials transferred to
|
450
|
|
work in progress 50% of 900
|
|
|
31 May
|
Records show two thirds of indirect materials used in production
|
2,800
|
|
31 May
|
Inventory at end of month:
|
|
|
For Job 901
|
nil
|
|
For Job 902
|
200
|
|
For Job 903
|
450
|
|
Indirect materials
|
1,400
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bridge Builders Ltd undertook a contract to build a pedestrian footbridge for a fixed price of £400,000 during the period from May Year 1 to July Year 2. This table sets out transactions up to the company’s year end in December, Year 1.
|
Transactions during Year 1:
|
£000s
|
|
May
|
Materials purchased and delivered to site
|
91
|
|
May
|
Equipment delivered to site
|
14
|
|
July
|
Architect’s fee
|
7
|
|
June–Dec
|
Materials issued from store
|
76
|
|
May–Dec
|
Wages paid on site
|
71
|
|
Sept
|
Payment to subcontractors
|
10
|
|
May–Dec
|
Direct costs
|
22
|
|
Dec
|
Head office charges
|
6
|
|
At the end of Year 1
|
|
|
Dec
|
Value of equipment remaining on site
|
9
|
|
Dec
|
Value of material remaining on site
|
15
|
|
Dec
|
Sales value of work certified
|
280
|
|
Dec
|
Amount due to subcontractors
|
3
|
|
Dec
|
Direct costs incurred but not yet paid
|
3
|
Required:
(a) Prepare relevant ledger account records.
(b) Prepare a statement of contract profit for Year 1.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Builders Ltd has undertaken to refurbish the Black Swan Hotel. The contract price was agreed at £480,000 based on estimated total costs of £440,000. The contract work began on 1 January Year 8. The accounting year of Builders Ltd ended on 31 August Year 8 at which date the contract was not completed. The following information provides the full contract estimate and the payments up to 31 August:
|
|
Original estimate for full contract
£
|
Actual cash paid
up to 31 August
£
|
|
Subcontractors’ costs:
|
|
|
|
Substructure
|
21,910
|
20,050
|
|
Superstructure
|
140,660
|
135,200
|
|
External works
|
111,256
|
95,000
|
|
Main contractors’ costs:
|
|
|
|
Materials –
|
|
|
|
Internal finishing
|
22,800
|
23,370
|
|
Fittings and furnishings
|
9,300
|
10,000
|
|
Utilities
|
42,400
|
31,800
|
|
Direct labour and overheads –
|
|
|
|
Internal finishing
|
23,100
|
17,325
|
|
Fittings and furnishings
|
9,100
|
6,916
|
|
Utilities
|
39,100
|
30,107
|
|
Administration overhead
|
20,374
|
15,402
|
|
|
440,000
|
385,170
|
Further information:
1 The substructure was completed on 31 July but a subcontractor’s invoice for £2,500 in respect of the final work done was not paid until 4 September.
2 The superstructure was also completed on 31 July and subcontractors were paid in full during August.
3 External works were 80% completed at 31 August. There was a delay in March due to adverse weather affecting the pebble dashing, which cost £3,500 to remove and restore.
4 Cash paid for materials for internal finishing covered the cost of all paint and wallpaper necessary to complete the contract. The actual paint and wallpaper unused at 31 August was valued at £4,000.
5 All fittings and furnishings required for the contract had been bought and paid for before 31 August. Only 70% by value had been installed by 31 August.
6 Materials costs of utilities were 80% complete in respect to estimates.
7 Labour hours worked up to 31 August on internal finishing, fittings and furnishings and services were 70% of the estimated total.
8 Administration overhead is allocated as a percentage of total sales value.
9 It is company policy to credit to management profit and loss account not more than 75% of the profit earned in any period.
10 It is estimated that the main contractor’s material and labour costs for the remainder of the contract will be incurred at the same rate as was experienced up to 31 August.
11 An independent surveyor estimated the contract value of work done up to 31 August at £400,000.
12 On 31 August the customer paid £380,000 on account of work completed.
Required
Prepare a report for the directors of Builders Ltd containing:
1 The profit on the contract for the accounting year ended 31 August Year 8 in a form which highlights variances from the initial estimate.
2 An estimate of the actual profit to be achieved on the contract as a whole.
3 Brief comments on the contract outcome.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Process costing; joint cost allocation; by product) Get Ahead pro vides personal training services for, and sells apparel products to, its clients. Get Ahead also generates a limited amount of revenue from the sale of protein drinks. The net realizable value from drink sales is accounted for as a reduction in the joint cost assigned to the Personal Training Services and Apparel Products. Protein drinks sell for $2.50 per bottle. The costs associated with making and packaging the drinks are $1.00 per bottle.
The following information is available for 2010 on apparel products, which are purchased by Get Ahead:
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 35,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
21,500
|
|
Purchases
|
181,350
|
Joint cost is to be allocated to Personal Training Services and Apparel Products based on approximated net realizable values. For 2010, total revenues were $753,000 from Personal Training Services and $289,000 from Apparel. The following joint costs were incurred:
|
Rent
|
$36,000
|
|
Insurance
|
43,750
|
|
Utilities
|
3,000
|
Separate costs were as follows:
|
|
Personal Training
|
Apparel
|
|
Labor
|
$231,000
|
$33,250
|
|
Supplies
|
151,300
|
700
|
|
Equipment depreciation
|
165,000
|
1,200
|
|
Administration
|
103,000
|
3,700
|
For the year, 2,500 bottles of protein drinks were sold.
a. What is the total net realizable value of protein drinks used to reduce the joint cost assigned to Personal Training and Apparel?
b. What is the joint cost to be allocated to Personal Training and Apparel?
c. What is the approximated pre tax realizable value of each main product or service for 2010?
d. How much joint cost is allocated to each main product or service?
e. Determine the net income produced by each main product or service.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Joint cost allocation; by product) Tangy Fresh produces orange juice and orange marmalade from a joint process. Second stage processing of the marmalade creates an orange pulp by product that can be sold for $0.05 per gallon. Expenses to distribute pulp total $90.
In May 2010, 140,000 pounds of oranges costing $44,200 were processed in Department 1, with labor and overhead costs of $33,800 incurred. Department 1processing resulted in 56,000 gallons of output, of which 40 percent was transferred to Department 2 to become orange juice and 60 percent was transferred to Department 3. Of the input going to Department 3, 20 percent resulted in pulp and 80percent resulted in marmalade. Joint cost is allocated to orange juice and marmalade on the basis of approximated net realizable values at split off .
The orange juice in Department 2 was processed at a total cost of $9,620; the marmalade in Department 3 was processed at a total cost of $6,450. The net realizable value of pulp is accounted for as a reduction in the separate processing costs in Department 3. Selling prices per gallon are $5.25 and $3.45 for orange juice and marmalade, respectively.
a. Diagram Tangy Fresh’s process.
b. How many gallons leaving Department 1 were sent to Department 2 for further processing? To Department 3?
c. How many gallons left Department 3 as pulp? As marmalade?
d. What is the net realizable value of pulp?
e. What is the total approximated net realizable value of the orange juice? The marmalade?
f. What amount of joint cost is assigned to each main product?
g. If 85 percent of the final output of each main product was sold during May and Tangy Fresh had no beginning inventory of either product, what is the value of the ending inventory of orange juice and marmalade?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Joint cost allocation; ending inventory valuation; by product) During March 2010, the first month of operations, Oink Oink’s Pork Co. had the operating statistics shown in the following table.
|
|
Weight in
|
Sales Value at
|
Pounds
|
|
|
Products
|
Pounds
|
Split Off
|
Produced
|
Pounds Sold
|
|
Tenderloin
|
8,600
|
$132,000
|
6,440
|
5,440
|
|
Roast
|
13,400
|
86,000
|
16,740
|
14,140
|
|
Ham
|
10,800
|
22,400
|
8,640
|
7,640
|
|
Hooves
|
4,600
|
4,600
|
9,200
|
8,000
|
Costs of the joint process were direct material, $40,000; direct labor, $23,400; and over head, $10,000. The company’s main products are pork tenderloin, roast pork, and ham; pork hooves are a by product of the process. The company recognizes the net realizable value of by product inventory at split off by reducing total joint cost. Neither the main products nor the by product requires any additional processing or disposal costs, although management could consider additional processing.
a. Calculate the ending inventory values of each joint product based on (1) relative sales value and (2) pounds. (Round to nearest whole percentage.)
b. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each allocation base for (1) financial statement purposes and (2) decisions about the desirability of processing the joint products beyond the split off point.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Joint cost allocation; scrap) DD’s Linens produces terrycloth products for hotels. The company buys fabric in 60 inch wide bolts. In the first process, the fabric is set up, cut, and separated into pieces. Setup can be for either robes and beach towels, or bath towels, hand towels, and washcloths.
During July, the company set up and cut 6,000 robes and 12,000 beach towels. Because of the irregular pattern of the robes, the process produces scrap that is sold to various prisons and hospitals for rags at $0.45 per pound. July production and cost data for DD’s Linens are as follows:
|
Fabric used, 25,000 feet at $1.50 per foot
|
$37,500
|
|
Labor, joint process
|
$12,000
|
|
Overhead, joint process
|
$11,000
|
|
Pounds of scrap produced
|
3,600
|
DD’s Linens assigns the joint processing cost to the robes and beach towels based on approximated net realizable value at split off. Other data gathered include these:
|
|
Per Robe
|
Per Beach Towel
|
|
Final selling prices
|
$20.00
|
$7.00
|
|
Costs after split off
|
6.80
|
1.60
|
The selling price of the scrap is treated as a reduction of joint cost.
a. Determine the joint cost to be allocated to the joint products for July.
b. How much joint cost is allocated to the robes in July? To the beach towels? Prepare the journal entry necessary at the split off point.
c. What amount of cost for robes is transferred to Finished Goods Inventory for July? What amount of cost for beach towels is transferred to Finished Goods Inventory for July?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Joint cost allocation; by products) Buchan’s Junction Manufacturing Corporation uses a joint production process that produces three products at the split off point. Joint production costs during March were $720,000. The company uses the sales value method for allocating joint costs. March production information was as follows:
|
|
|
PRODUCT
|
|
|
|
Alpha
|
Beta
|
Gamma
|
|
Units produced
|
2,500
|
5,000
|
7,500
|
|
Units sold
|
2,000
|
6,000
|
7,000
|
|
Sales prices:
|
|
|
|
|
At the split off point
|
$100
|
$80
|
$20
|
|
After further processing
|
$150
|
$115
|
$30
|
|
Costs to process after split off point
|
$150,000
|
$150,000
|
$100,000
|
a. Compute the amount of joint costs allocated to each product assuming that joint cost allocation is based on sales value at the split off point.
b. Assume that all three products are main products and that they can be sold at the split off point or processed further, whichever is economically beneficial to the company. Compute the total cost of product Beta in March if joint cost allocation is based on sales value at split off .
c. Assume that product Gamma is treated as a by product and that the company accounts for the by product at net realizable value as a reduction of joint cost. Products Beta and Gamma must be processed further before they can be sold. Compute the total cost of production of products Alpha and Beta in March if joint cost allocation is based on net realizable values. (Round proportions to the nearest whole percentage.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Scrap; ethics; writing; research) Some waste, scrap, and by product materials have little value. In fact, for many meat and poultry producers, animal waste represents a significant liability because it is considered hazardous and requires significant disposal costs. Some companies, such as Smithfield Foods Inc. (the largest hog processor in the United States), gather the animal waste in “lagoons” and allow it to be used as “liquid fertilizer.”
a. Review “Smithfield Foods: A Corporate Profile” as the environmental policies at the company’s Web site. Discuss the ethical and legal implications of disposing of industrial waste in this manner.
b. What actions can people take to reduce this type of disposal?
c. Ethically, what obligation does the vendor/manufacturer of potentially toxic pollutants have to the consumer of the company’s products?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(NFP joint cost) Debra’s Diabetes Foundation was started by a family whose mother had died after suffering for many years with diabetes. A lecture that cost the foundation $360,000 was held on the fourth Tuesday in March, which is American Diabetes Alert Day. Advertisements were placed in all local newspapers and were broad cast on local media channels. During the lecture, information was provided about the causes, symptoms, and treatment of diabetes, about help available for caregivers, and about the foundation and its mission. In addition to requesting contributions, members of the foundation asked attendees to take a quiz about diabetes, volunteer to distribute pamphlets about the disease to local businesses, write letters to their insurance companies about additional coverage availability, and participate in the Medicare Advocacy Program to gather information and identify problems encountered by beneficiaries and providers.
a. Did the lecture meet the audience criterion? Why or why not?
b. Did the lecture include a call for action? Explain.
c. Assume that 65 percent of the lecture time was related to the disease, 25 percent of the lecture was related to the foundation, and 10 percent was related to fund raising. Allocate the joint cost to the three activities.
d. Assume that the topics discussed at the lecture were not in specific order and, often, discussion was in response to questions that were asked by the attendees. How else might the joint cost be allocated among program, management, and fund raising activities?
e. Debra’s Diabetes Foundation hired a consultant to help with the lecture. The consultant was paid $40,000 but has been informed that, if the lecture raises between$400,001 and $500,000, the fee would increase to $50,000; if the lecture raises over$500,000, the consultant would be paid $70,000.The consultant’s fee was not included in the $360,000 joint cost. The Foundation was excited to find that the lecture raised$540,000. The time allocation given in (c) was representative of the time spent on topics during the lecture. How much of the $430,000 ($360,000 + $70,000) should be allocated to the three activities?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(NFP joint cost; joint revenues; decision making; writing) Throughout your college career, you have been employed on a part time basis by the Center for Entrepreneurship of your business college. The Center for Entrepreneurship provides executive training and consulting for a fee to individuals and organizations located throughout the state. For 2010, the condensed income statement that follows summarizes the operating results of the center.
|
Fees
|
$ 2,625,000
|
|
Faculty and staff salaries
|
(1,050,000)
|
|
Facilities cost
|
(550,000)
|
|
Training materials
|
(375,000)
|
|
Marketing and promotions
|
(400,000)
|
|
Other costs of operations
|
(500,000)
|
|
Net operating loss
|
$ (250,000)
|
Given that the center operated at a loss in 2010, the dean of the business college has asked the director to provide a justification for not closing the center. As the dean stated, “We’re charged with a fundamental obligation of being good stewards of the state’s resources. We cannot justify spending net resources to subsidize educational programs to corporations and other profit oriented organizations.”
The center director has made the dean’s comments known to all employees and faculty of the center and all are concerned about losing their employment should the center be closed.
Having just completed a chapter in your accounting course addressing joint products, you become curious as to whether the preceding income statement fairly reflects the value of all outputs of the center. Particularly, you believe that the center plays a crucial role in the generation of contributions made to the college by alumni and friends of the business college and university.
a. Discuss how the existence of joint products of the Center for Entrepreneurship would potentially modify the preceding income statement.
b. Discuss how you could use the concepts of joint products and joint cost allocation to demonstrate to the dean that the Center for Entrepreneurship is not consuming “net resources” of the state or college and that the center should continue its operations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to Research In Motion’s financial statements for the following questions.
Required
1. What amount of total liabilities does it report for each of the fiscal years ended February 28, 2009, andFebruary 27, 2010?
2. What amount of total assets does it report for each of the fiscal years ended February 28, 2009, and February 27, 2010?
3. Compute its debt ratio for each of the fiscal years ended February 28, 2009, and February 27, 2010.
4. In which fiscal year did it employ more financial leverage (February 28, 2009, or February 27, 2010)? Explain.
5. Access its financial statements (10 K report) for a fiscal year ending after February 27, 2010, the SEC’s EDGAR database. Recomputed its debt ratio for any subsequent year’s data and compare it with the debt ratio for 2009 and 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Key comparative figures for Research In Motion and Apple follow.
| |
Research In Motion
|
Apple
|
|
($ millions)
|
Current Year
|
Prior Year
|
Current Year
|
Prior Year
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$ 2,602
|
$ 2,227
|
$15,861
|
$13,874
|
|
Total assets
|
10,204
|
8,101
|
47,501
|
36,171
|
1. What is the debt ratio for Research In Motion in the current year and for the prior year?
2. What is the debt ratio for Apple in the current year and for the prior year?
3. Which of the two companies has the higher degree of financial leverage? What does this imply?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Form expert teams of individuals who selected the same component in part 1. Expert teams are to draft a report that each expert will present to his or her learning team addressing the following:
a. Identify for its component the (i) increase and decrease side of the account and (ii) normal balance side of the account.
b. Describe a transaction, with amounts, that increases its component.
c. Using the transaction and amounts in (b), verify the equality of the accounting equation and then explain any effects on the income statement and statement of cash flows.
d. Describe a transaction, with amounts, that decreases its component.
e. Using the transaction and amounts in (d ), verify the equality of the accounting equation and then explain any effects on the income statement and statement of cash flows.
2. Each expert should return to his/her learning team. In rotation, each member presents his/her expert team’s report to the learning team. Team discussion is encouraged.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lisa Langely is a young entrepreneur who operates Langely Music Services, offering singing lessons and instruction on musical instruments. Langely wishes to expand but needs a $15,000 loan. The bank requests Langely to prepare a balance sheet and key financial ratios. Langely has not kept formal records but is able to provide the following accounts and their amounts as of December 31, 2011.
|
Cash
|
$ 1,800
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$4,800
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$ 750
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
4,700
|
Store Supplies
|
3,300
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
1,100
|
Unearned Lesson Fees
|
7,800
|
Total Equity
|
31,450
|
|
Annual net income
|
20,000
|
|
|
|
|
Required
1. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011, for Langely Music Services. (Report only the total equity amount on the balance sheet.)
2. Compute Langely’s debt ratio and its return on assets. Assume average assets equal its ending balance.
3. Do you believe the prospects of a $15,000 bank loan are good? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Obtain a recent copy of the most prominent newspaper distributed in your area. Research the classified section and prepare a report answering the following questions (attach relevant classified clippings to your report). Alternatively, you may want to search the Web for the re quired information. One suitable is Career One Stop. For documentation, you should print copies of accessed.
1. Identify the number of listings for accounting positions and the various accounting job titles.
2. Identify the number of listings for other job titles, with examples, that require or prefer accounting knowledge/experience but are not specifically accounting positions.
3. Specify the salary range for the accounting and accounting related positions if provided.
4. Indicate the job that appeals to you, the reason for its appeal, and its requirements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nokia is a leading global manufacturer of mobile devices and services, and it competes to some extent with both Research In Motion and Apple. Key financial ratios for the current fiscal year follow.
|
Key Figure
|
Nokia
|
Research In Motion
|
Apple
|
|
Return on assets
|
0.7%
|
26.8%
|
19.7%
|
|
Debt ratio
|
58.7%
|
25.5%
|
33.4%
|
Required
1. Which company is most profitable according to its return on assets?
2. Which company is most risky according to the debt ratio?
3. Which company deserves increased investment based on a joint analysis of return on assets and the debt ratio? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Music Mart records $1,000 of accrued salaries on December 31. Five days later, on January 5 (the next payday), salaries of $7,000 are paid. What is the January 5 entry?
2. Jordan Air has the following information in its unadjusted and adjusted trial balances. What are the adjusting entries that Jordan Air likely recorded?
|
|
Unadjusted
|
Adjusted
|
|
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
$6,200
|
$ 0
|
$5,900
|
|
|
Salaries payable
|
|
|
|
$1,400
|
3. What accounts are taken from the adjusted trial balance to prepare an income statement?
4. In preparing financial statements from an adjusted trial balance, what statement is usually prepared second?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following adjusted trial balance to answer.
|
CHOI COMPANY Adjusted Trial Balance December 31
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$ 3,050
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
400
|
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
830
|
|
|
Supplies
|
80
|
|
|
Equipment
|
217,200
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$ 29,100
|
|
Wages payable
|
|
880
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
3,600
|
|
Unearned rent
|
|
460
|
|
Long term notes payable
|
|
150,000
|
|
M Choi, Capital
|
|
40,340
|
|
M Choi, Withdrawals
|
21,000
|
|
|
Rent earned
|
|
57,500
|
|
Wages expense
|
25,000
|
|
|
Utilities expense
|
1,900
|
|
|
Insurance expense
|
3,200
|
|
|
Supplies expense
|
250
|
|
|
Depreciation expense—Equipment
|
5,970
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,000
|
|
|
Totals
|
$281,880
|
$281,880
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- What is an accrued revenue? Give an example.
- If a company initially records prepaid expenses with debits to expense accounts, what type of account is debited in the adjusting entries for those prepaid expenses?
- Review the balance sheet of Research In Motion Identify one asset account that requires adjustment before annual financial statements can be prepared. What would be the effect on the income statement if this asset account were not adjusted?
- Review the balance sheet of Nokia Identify the amount for property, plant, and equipment. What adjusting entry is necessary (no numbers required) for this account when preparing financial statements?
- Refer to Palm’s balance sheet If it made an adjustment for unpaid wages at year end, where would the accrued wages be reported on its balance sheet?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
a. Eager Co. receives $20,000 cash in advance for 4 months of legal services on October 1, 2011, and records it by debiting Cash and crediting Unearned Revenue both for $20,000. It is now December 31, 2011, and Eager has provided legal services as planned. What adjusting entry should Eager make to account for the work performed from October 1 through December 31, 2011?
b. Rutherford Co. started a new publication called Contest News. Its subscribers pay $48 to receive 12 issues. With every new subscriber, Rutherford debits Cash and credits Unearned Subscription Revenue for the amounts received. The company has 100 new subscribers as of July 1, 2011. It sends Contest News to each of these subscribers every month from July through December. Assuming no changes in subscribers, prepare the journal entry that Rutherford must make as of December 31, 2011, to adjust the Subscription Revenue account and the Unearned Subscription Revenue account.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A private college has two teaching departments: languages and science. The college also has a library and a staff refectory, both of which provide services to the teaching departments. The library staff also eat in the refectory. The college administrator feels that the benefits of the staff refectory are best measured in proportion to the number of staff in each department. The benefits of the library are best measured in proportion to the number of students in each department. The overhead costs of each department, and other relevant details, are as follows:
|
|
Languages
|
Science
|
Library
|
Refectory
|
Total
|
|
Overhead costs allocated (£)
|
20,000
|
15,000
|
12,000
|
10,000
|
57,000
|
|
Number of staff
|
4
|
4
|
2
|
2
|
|
|
Number of students
|
400
|
300
|
–
|
–
|
|
Required
(1) Prepare a cost apportionment of overhead costs using the step method.
(2) Use a computer based spreadsheet to calculate the apportionment of overheads using the repeated distribution method.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) The following information relates to the budget for the year ahead.
|
Production overhead cost budget
|
|
|
£
|
|
Machinery costs
|
285,000
|
|
Set up costs
|
235,000
|
|
Purchasing costs
|
300,000
|
|
Total production overheads
|
820,000
|
The following table shows the total budgeted activities of the company (it manufactures many different types of products) and the details relating to the manufacture of two product lines:
S and T.
|
Data
|
Total
|
Product S
|
Product T
|
|
Machine hours
|
95,000
|
2 per unit
|
1 per unit
|
|
Number of production runs
|
235
|
20
|
5
|
|
Purchase orders
|
5,000
|
100
|
100
|
|
Production quantities of S & T
|
|
5,000 units
|
20,000 units
|
Calculate, using activity based costing, the production overhead costs that would be attributed to one unit of Product S and one unit of Product T.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Processing beyond split off and cost allocations) All A Buzz makes three products from a joint production process using honey. Joint cost for the process in 2010 is $123,200.
|
|
|
Per Unit
|
Incremental
|
|
|
|
Units of
|
Selling Price
|
Processing
|
Final Sales
|
|
Product
|
Output
|
at Split Off
|
Cost
|
Price
|
|
Honey butter
|
10,000
|
4.00
|
$3.00
|
$ 6.00
|
|
Honey jam
|
20,000
|
6.40
|
4.00
|
14.00
|
|
Honey syrup
|
1,000
|
3.00
|
0.40
|
3.60
|
Each container of honey butter, jam, and syrup, respectively, contains 16 ounces, 8 ounces, and 3 ounces of product.
a. Determine which products should be processed beyond the split off point.
b. Assume honey syrup should be treated as a by product. Allocate the joint cost based on units produced, weight, and sales value at split off. Use the net realizable value method in accounting for the by product. (Round to nearest whole percentage.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Processing beyond split off ) Washington Cannery makes three products from a single joint process. For 2010, the cannery processed all three products beyond split off . The following data were generated for the year:
|
Joint Product
|
Incremental Separate Cost
|
Total Revenue
|
|
Candied apples
|
$26,000
|
$680,000
|
|
Apple jelly
|
38,000
|
765,000
|
|
Apple jam
|
15,000
|
289,000
|
Analysis of 2010 market data reveals that candied apples, apple jelly, and apple jam could have been sold at split off for $670,000, $730,000, and $260,000, respectively.
a. Based on hindsight, evaluate management’s production decisions in 2010.
b. How much additional profit could the company have generated in 2010 if it had made optimal decisions at split off ?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Sell or process further) In a joint process, Sylvia’s Styles produces precut fabrics for three products: dresses, jackets, and blouses. Joint cost is allocated on the basis of relative sales value at split off . The company can choose to process each of the products further rather than sell the fabric at split off. Information related to these products follows.
|
|
Dresses
|
Jackets
|
Blouses
|
Total
|
|
Number of units produced
|
10,000
|
16,000
|
6,000
|
32,000
|
|
Joint cost allocated
|
$174,000
|
?
|
?
|
$360,000
|
|
Sales values at split off point
|
?
|
?
|
$80,000
|
$600,000
|
|
Additional costs of processing further
|
$26,000
|
$20,000
|
$78,000
|
$124,000
|
|
Sales values after all processing
|
$300,000
|
$268,000
|
$210,000
|
$778,000
|
a. What amount of joint cost should be allocated to jackets and blouses?
b. What are the sales values at the split off point for dresses and jackets?
c. Should any of the products be processed beyond the split off point? Show computations.
d. If 4,000 jackets are processed further and sold at the regular selling price, what is the gross profit on the sale?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Retail organization joint cost) English Realty separates its activities into two operating divisions: Rentals and Sales. In March 2010, the firm spent $21,000 for general company promotions (as opposed to advertisements for specific proper ties). The corporate controller has decided to allocate general promotion costs to the two operating divisions. She is considering whether to base her allocations on the (1) expected increase in divisional revenue from the promotions or (2) expected increase in divisional profit from the promotions (before allocated promotion costs). General promotions had the following effects on the two divisions:
|
|
Rentals
|
Sales
|
|
Increase in divisional revenue
|
$350,000
|
$700,000
|
|
Increase in profit (before allocated promotion costs)
|
56,000
|
24,000
|
a. Allocate the total promotion cost to the two divisions using change in revenue.
b. Allocate the total promotion cost to the two divisions using change in profit before joint cost allocation.
c. Which of the two approaches is more appropriate? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Joint cost allocation; by products) Ring Corporation, which began operations in 2010, produces gasoline and a gasoline by product. The following information is available pertaining to 2010 sales and production:
|
Total production costs to split off point
|
$240,000
|
|
Gasoline sales
|
540,000
|
|
By product sales
|
60,000
|
|
Gasoline inventory, 12/31/2010
|
30,000
|
|
Additional by product costs:
|
|
|
Marketing
|
$20,000
|
|
Production
|
30,000
|
Ring Corp. accounts for the by product at the time of production. Compute Ring’s cost of sales for gasoline and for the by product for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Service organization joint cost) Abrula Archery provides archery training for children and adults. During 2010, the camp had the following operating data:
|
|
Children
|
Adults
|
|
Training hours taught
|
4,000
|
2,000
|
|
Hourly tuition
|
$35
|
$65
|
Direct instructional costs for 2010 were $120,000; overhead costs for the two programs were $55,500. Camp owners want to know the cost of each program.
a. Determine each program’s cost using a physical measure base.
b. Determine each program’s cost using the sales value at split off method.
c. Make a case for the allocation method in (a) and (b).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(By product/scrap; net realizable value vs. realized value) Indicate whether each item that follows is associated with (1) the realized value approach or (2) the net realizable value approach.
a. Is easier to apply
b. Is used to reduce the cost of main products in the period the by product is produced
c. Presents proceeds from sale of the by product as other revenue or other income
d. Ignores value of by product/scrap until it is sold
e. Has the advantage of better timing
f. Should be used when the by product’s net realizable value is large
g. Is less conservative
h. Is the most clerically efficient
i. Credits either cost of goods sold of main products or the joint cost when the by product inventory is recorded
j. Is appropriate if the by product’s net realizable value is small
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(By product and cost allocation) Macon Farms raises peaches that, at harvest, are separated into three grades: premium, good, and fair. Joint cost is allocated to products based on bushels of output. The $337,500 joint cost for one harvest yielded the following output quantities.
|
Product
|
Output in Bushels
|
|
Premium
|
14,520
|
|
Good
|
38,940
|
|
Fair
|
12,540
|
The joint process also created a by product that had a total net realizable value of $45,000. The company records the by product inventory at the time of production. Allocate the joint cost to the joint products using bushels of output.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(By product; net realizable value method) Weinberg Canning produces fillet, smoked salmon, and salmon remnants in a single process. The same amount of disposal cost is incurred whether a product is sold at split off or after further processing. In October 2010, the joint cost of the production process was $142,000.
|
Product
|
Pounds Produced
|
Separate Cost
|
Final Selling Price
|
|
Fillet
|
18,000
|
$3.00
|
$16.00
|
|
Smoked
|
20,000
|
5.20
|
13.00
|
|
Remnants
|
2,000
|
0.30
|
1.50
|
a. The remnants are considered a by product of the process and are sold to cat food processors. Allocate the joint cost based on approximated net realizable value at split off. Use the net realizable value method to account for the by product.
b. Determine the value of ending Finished Goods Inventory, assuming that 4,000 pounds of salmon fillets, 2,400 pounds of smoked salmon, and 350 pounds of salmon remnants were sold. (Round cost per pound to the nearest penny.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Accounting for by product) The Bishop’s Falls Lumber Corporation harvests lumber and prepares it for sale to wholesalers of lumber and wood products. The main product is finished lumber, which is sold to wholesale construction suppliers. A by product of the process’s is wood pellets, which are sold to wholesalers of wood pellet stoves. During December 2010, the manufacturing process incurred $664,000 in total costs; 160,000 board feet of lumber were produced and sold along with 40,000 pounds of pellets. The finished lumber sold for $10 per board foot and the pellets sold for $4 per 100 pound bag. There were no beginning or ending inventories.
a. Compute the December 2010 gross margin for Bishop’s Falls Lumber Corporation assuming that by product revenues reduce joint production costs.
b. How would your answer change if by products are accounted for as revenue when sold?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Accounting for by product) Potato skins are generated as a by product in making potato chips and frozen hash browns at Zeena Foods. The skins are sold to restaurants for use in appetizers. Processing and disposal costs associated with by product sales are $0.06 per pound of potato skins. During May 2010, Zeena Foods produced and sold 135,000 pounds of potato skins for $20,250. In addition, the joint cost for producing potato chips and hash browns was $82,000; separate costs of production were $48,000. In May, 90 percent of all joint production was sold for $319,000. Nonfactory operating expenses for May were $47,850.
a. Prepare an income statement for Zeena Foods assuming that by product sales are shown as Other Revenue and the processing and disposal costs for the by product are shown as additional cost of goods sold of the joint products.
b. Prepare an income statement for Zeena Foods assuming that the net realizable value of the by product is shown as Other Income.
c. Prepare an income statement for Zeena Foods assuming that the net realizable value of the by product is subtracted from the joint cost of the main products.
d. Would the presentation in (a), (b), or (c) be most helpful to managers? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Accounting for scrap) Mosbee Designs uses a job order costing system to account for the various architectural services offered to commercial clients. For each major job, architectural models of the completed structures are built for client presentations. At the completion of a job, models not wanted by clients are sold to an arts and crafts retailer. Mosbee Designs uses the realized value method of accounting for model sales. The sales value of each model is credited to the cost of the specific job for which the model was built. During 2010, the model for the Hedge Fund Extraordinaire building was sold for $3,500.
a. Using the realized value approach, give the entry to record the sale.
b. Independent of your answer to (a), assume that the sales value of the models is not credited to specific jobs. Give the entry to account for the sale of the Hedge Fund Extraordinaire model.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(NFP program and support cost allocation) Memphis Jazz Company is pre paring a pamphlet that will provide information on the types of jazz, jazz terminology, and biographies of some of the better known jazz musicians. In addition, the pamphlet will include a request for funding to support the jazz company. The company has tax exempt status and operates on a not for profit basis.
The 10 page pamphlet cost $261,000 to design and print. Only 200,000 copies of the pamphlet were printed because the company director will be leaving and the pamphlet will soon be redesigned. One page of the pamphlet is devoted to fund solicitation; however, 98 percent of the design time was spent on developing and writing the jazz information.
a. If space is used as the allocation measure, how much of the pamphlet’s cost should be assigned to program activities? To fund raising activities?
b. If design time is used as the allocation measure, how much of the pamphlet’s cost should be assigned to program activities? To fund raising activities?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Joint costs; journal entries) Natural Beauty Corp. uses a joint process to make two main products: Forever perfume and Fantasy lotion. Production is organized in two sequential departments: Combining and Heating. The products do not become separate until they have been through the heating process. After heating, the perfume is removed from the vats and bottled without further processing. The residue remaining in the vats is then blended with aloe and lanolin to become the lotion.
The following costs were incurred in the Combining Department during October 2010: direct material, $42,000; direct labor, $11,340; and applied manufacturing overhead, $6,375. Prior to separation of the joint products, October costs in the Heating Department were direct material, $9,150; direct labor, $3,225; and applied manufacturing overhead, $4,860. After split off, the Heating Department incurred separate costs for each product line as follows: bottles in which to package the Forever perfume, $3,180; and direct material, direct labor, and applied manufacturing over head of $2,940, $4,680, and $6,195, respectively, for Fantasy lotion.
Neither department had beginning Work in Process Inventory balances, and all work that started in October was completed in that month. Joint costs are allocated to perfume and lotion using approximated net realizable values at split off. For October, the approximated net realizable values at split off were $238,365 for perfume and $79,455for lotion.
a. Determine the joint cost allocated to, and the total cost of, Forever perfume and Fantasy lotion.
b. Prepare journal entries for the Combining and Heating Departments for October 2010.
c. Post the entries to the accounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Physical measure joint cost allocation) Illinois Soybeans operates a processing plant in which soybeans are crushed to create soybean oil and soybean meal. The company purchases soybeans by the bushel (60 pounds). From each bushel, the normal yield is 11 pounds of soybean oil, 44 pounds of soybean meal, and 5 pounds of waste. For March, Illinois Soybeans purchased and processed 5,000,000 bushels of soybeans. The yield in March on the soybeans was equal to the normal yield. The following costs were incurred for the month:
|
Soybeans
|
$47,500,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
2,300,000
|
At the end of March there was no in process or raw material in inventory. Also, there was no beginning Finished Goods Inventory. For the month, 60 percent of the soybean oil and 75 percent of the soybean meal was sold.
a. Allocate the joint cost to the joint products on the basis of pounds of product produced.
b. Calculate the cost of goods sold for March.
c. Calculate the cost of Finished Goods Inventory at the end of March.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Physical measure joint cost allocation) Powisett Farms Dairy began operations at the start of May 2010. Powisett Farms operates a fleet of trucks to gather whole milk from local farmers. The whole milk is then separated into two joint products: skim milk and cream. Both products are sold at the split off point to dairy wholesalers. For May, the firm incurred the following joint costs:
|
Whole milk purchase cost
|
$400,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
180,000
|
|
Overhead costs
|
292,000
|
|
Total product cost
|
$872,000
|
During May, the firm processed 2,000,000 gallons of whole milk, producing 1,555,500 gallons of skim milk and 274,500 gallons of cream. The remaining gallons of the whole milk were lost during processing. There was no Raw Material or Work in Process Inventory at the end of May.
After the joint process, the skim milk and cream were separately processed at costs, respectively, of $67,660 and $83,310. Of the products produced, Powisett Farms Dairy sold 1,550,000 gallons of skim milk for $1,472,500 and 274,000 gallons of cream for $282,220 to wholesalers.
a. Powisett uses a physical measure (gallon) to allocate joint costs. Allocate the joint cost to production.
b. Calculate ending Finished Goods Inventory cost, Cost of Goods Sold, and gross margin for May.
c. A manager at Powisett Farms Dairy noted that the milk fat content of whole milk can vary greatly from farmer to farmer. Because milk fat content determines the relative yields of skim milk and cream from whole milk, the ratio of joint products can be partly determined based on the milk fat content of purchased whole milk. How could Powisett Farms Dairy use information about milk fat content in the whole milk it purchases to optimize the profit realized on its joint products?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Monetary measure joint cost allocation) Illinois Soybeans operates a processing plant in which soybeans are crushed to create soybean oil and soybean meal. The company purchases soybeans by the bushel (60 pounds). From each bushel, the normal yield is 11 pounds of soybean oil, 44 pounds of soybean meal, and 5 pounds of waste. For March, Illinois Soybeans purchased and processed 5,000,000 bushels of soybeans. The yield in March on the soybeans was equal to the normal yield. The following costs were incurred for the month:
|
Soybeans
|
$47,500,000
|
|
Conversion costs
|
2,300,000
|
At the end of March there was no in process or raw material in inventory. Also, there was no beginning Finished Goods Inventory. For the month, 60 percent of the soybean oil and 75 percent of the soybean meal was sold.
a. Assume the net realizable values of the joint products are as follows:
|
Soybean oil
|
$0.50 per pound
|
|
Soybean meal
|
$0.20 per pound
|
Allocate the joint cost incurred in March on the basis of net realizable value.
b. Calculate the cost of goods sold for March using the answer to (a).
c. Calculate the cost of Finished Goods Inventory at the end of March based on the answer to (a).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Monetary measure joint cost allocation) Powisett Farms Dairy began operations at the start of May 2010. Powisett Farms operates a fleet of trucks to gather whole milk from local farmers. The whole milk is then separated into two joint products: skim milk and cream. Both products are sold at the split off point to dairy wholesalers. For May, the firm incurred the following joint costs:
|
Whole milk purchase cost
|
$400,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
180,000
|
|
Overhead costs
|
292,000
|
|
Total product cost
|
$872,000
|
During May, the firm processed 2,000,000 gallons of whole milk, producing 1,555,500 gallons of skim milk and 274,500 gallons of cream. The remaining gallons of the whole milk were lost during processing. There was no Raw Material or Work in Process Inventory at the end of May.
After the joint process, the skim milk and cream were separately processed at costs, respectively, of $67,660 and $83,310. Of the products produced, Powisett Farms Dairy sold 1,550,000 gallons of skim milk for $1,472,500 and 274,000 gallons of cream for $282,220 to wholesalers.
a. Calculate the sales price per gallon for skim milk and cream.
b. Using relative sales value, allocate the joint cost to the joint production.
c. Calculate ending Finished Goods Inventory cost, Cost of Goods Sold, and the gross margin for the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Joint cost allocation; by product; income determination) Stephenville Bank & Trust offers two primary financial services: commercial checking and credit cards. The bank also generates some revenue from selling identity fraud insurance as a by product of its two main services. The monthly joint cost for conducting the two primary services is $800,000 and includes expenses for facilities, legal sup port, equipment, record keeping, and administration. The joint cost is allocated on the basis of total revenues generated from each primary service.
The following table presents the results of operations and revenues for June:
|
Service
|
Number of Accounts
|
Total Revenues
|
|
Commercial checking
|
12,000
|
$1,914,000
|
|
Credit cards
|
28,000
|
1,386,000
|
|
Identity theft insurance
|
10,000
|
80,000
|
To account for revenues from the identity theft insurance, management reduces Cost of Services Rendered for primary services. The commissions are accounted for on a realized value basis as the policies are received.
For June, separate costs for commercial checking accounts and credit cards were $850,000 and $380,000, respectively.
a. Allocate the joint cost.
b. Determine the income for each primary service and the company’s overall gross margin for June.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Joint products; by product) Fredericksburg Vegetable is a fruit packing business. The firm buys peaches by the truckload in season and separates them into three categories: premium, good, and fair. Premium peaches can be sold as is to supermarket chains and to specialty gift stores. Good peaches are sliced and canned in light syrup and sold to supermarkets. Fair peaches are considered a by product and are sold to Altas Company, which processes the peaches into jelly.
Fredericksburg Vegetable has two processing departments: (1) Cleaning and Sorting (joint cost) and (2) Cutting and Canning (separate costs). During the month, the company paid $15,000 for one truckload of fruit and $700 for labor to sort the fruit into categories. Fredericksburg Vegetable uses a predetermined overhead rate of 40 percent of direct labor cost. The following yield, costs, and final sales value resulted from the month’s truckload of fruit.
|
|
Premium
|
Good
|
Fair
|
|
Yield in pecks
|
1,500
|
2,000
|
500
|
|
Cutting and canning costs
|
$0
|
$2,000
|
$0
|
|
Total packaging and delivery costs
|
$1,500
|
$2,200
|
$500
|
|
Total final sales value
|
$30,000
|
$15,000
|
$4,500
|
a. Determine the joint cost.
b. Diagram Fredericksburg Vegetable’s process.
c. Allocate joint cost using the approximated net realizable value at split off method, assuming that the by product is recorded when realized and is shown as Other Income on the income statement.
d. Using the allocations from (c), prepare the necessary entries assuming that the by product is sold for $4,500 and that all costs were as shown.
e. Allocate joint cost using the approximated net realizable value at split off method, assuming that the by product is recorded using the net realizable value approach and that the joint cost is reduced by the net realizable value of the by product.
f. Using the allocations from (d), prepare the necessary entries, assuming that the estimated realizable value of the by product is $4,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Book value per share of common stock Bronze Tint Trust has the following stockholders’ equity:
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
Preferred stock, 5%, $10 par, 6,000 shares authorized, 4,500 shares issued
|
$45,000
|
|
Common stock, $0.20 par, 1,200,000 shares authorized and issued
|
240,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
400,000
|
|
Total paid in capital
|
$685,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
255,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$940,000
|
Bronze Tint has not declared preferred dividends for five years (including the current year).
Requirement
1. Compute the book value per share of Bronze Tint’s preferred and common stock.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing return on assets and return on equity Godhi’s 2012 financial statements reported the following items—with 2011 figures given for comparison:
|
GODHI
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Total assets
|
$ 33,538
|
$ 29,562
|
|
Total liabilities
|
17,100
|
14,962
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity (all common)
|
16,438
|
14,600
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$ 33,538
|
$ 29,562
|
|
GODHI
Income Statement
|
|
Net sales
|
$ 21,960
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
7,900
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 14,060
|
|
Selling, administrative, and general expenses
|
8,600
|
|
Interest expense
|
210
|
|
All other expenses
|
1,360
|
|
Net income
|
$ 3,890
|
Requirement
1. Compute Godhi’s rate of return on total assets and rate of return on common stockholders’ equity for 2012. Do these rates of return look high or low?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Issuing stock Susie Systems completed the following stock issuance transactions:
|
May 19
|
Issued 2,000 shares of $1 par common stock for cash of $9.50 per share.
|
|
Jun 3
|
Sold 300 shares of $3, no par preferred stock for $15,000 cash.
|
|
11
|
Received equipment with market value of $78,000. Issued 3,000 shares of the $1 par common stock in exchange.
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the transactions. Explanations are not required.
2. How much paid in capital did these transactions generate for Susie Systems?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Circle City Inc. produces two joint products—JP#89 43 A and JP#89 43 B—from a single input. Further processing of product JP#89 43 A results in a by product designated BP#89 43 X. A summary of production and sales for 2010 follows.
- Circle City Inc. input 600,000 pounds of raw material into the Processing Department. Total joint processing cost was $520,000. During the joint processing, 90,000 pounds of material were lost.
- After joint processing, 60 percent of the joint process output was transferred to Division 1 to produce JP#89 43 A, and 40 percent of the joint process output was transferred to Division 2 to produce JP#89 43 B.
- Further processing in Division 1 resulted in 70 percent of the input pounds becoming JP#89 43 A and 30 percent of the input pounds becoming BP#89 43 X. The separate processing cost for JP#89 43 A in Division 1 was $649,026.
- Total packaging costs for JP#89 43 A were $122,094. After Division 1 processing and packaging, product JP#89 43 A is salable at $8.00 per pound.
- Each pound of BP#89 43 X can be sold for $0.25 after incurring total selling cost of $5,000. The company accounts for the by product using the net realizable value method and showing the NRV as a reduction in the cost of goods sold of the joint products.
- In Division 2, product JP#89 43 B was further processed at a separate cost of $387,600. A completed pound of JP#89 43 B sells for $3.70.
- Selling cost for product JP#89 43 A is $0.80 per pound and for product JP#89 43 B is $0.15 per pound.
Required:
a. Prepare a process diagram.
b. Record the journal entry to
1. recognize incurrence of joint cost.
2. allocate joint costs to the joint products using pounds as a physical measure and transfer the products into Divisions 1 and 2.
3. record incurrence of separate processing costs for products JP#89 43 A and JP#89 43 B in Divisions 1 and 2.
4. record incurrence of packaging cost for product JP#89 43 A.
5. transfer completed products JP#89 43 A and JP#89 43 B to finished goods.
c. Allocate the joint cost to products JP#89 43 A and JP#89 43 B using approximated net realizable values at split off. (Round proportions to nearest whole percentage.)
d. Circle City Inc. had no Work in Process or Finished Goods Inventory at the beginning of 2010. Prepare an income statement through gross margin for Circle City Inc. assuming that
- 80 percent of product JP#89 43 A and 90 percent of product JP#89 43 B produced were sold.
- all the by product BP#89 43 X that was produced during the year was sold.
- joint cost was allocated using the physical measurement method in (b).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Physical measure allocation) Michigan Timber uses a joint process to manufacture two grades of wood: A and B. During October 2010, the company incurred $12,000,000 of joint production cost in producing 18,000,000 board feet of Grade A and 6,000,000 board feet of Grade B lumber. The company allocates joint cost on the basis of board feet of lumber produced. The company can sell Grade A lumber at the split off point for $0.80 per board foot. Alternatively, Grade A lumber can be further processed at a cost of $0.75 per board foot and then sold for $1.90 per board foot. No opportunity exists for processing Grade B lumber after split off .
a. How much joint cost should be allocated to Grade A and to Grade B lumber?
b. If Grade A lumber is processed further and then sold, what is the incremental effect on Michigan Timber’s net income? Should the additional processing be performed?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Approximated net realizable value method) The Scent of Money makes three products that can be sold at split off or processed further and then sold. The joint cost for April 2010 is $1,080,000.
|
|
|
Sales
|
Separate
|
|
|
|
Bottles of
|
Price at
|
Cost after
|
Final Sales
|
|
Product
|
Output
|
Split Off
|
Split Off
|
Price
|
|
Perfume
|
20,000
|
$7.00
|
$2.50
|
$16.50
|
|
Eau de toilette
|
32,000
|
5.00
|
1.50
|
13.00
|
|
Body splash
|
28,000
|
5.00
|
2.00
|
12.00
|
The number of ounces in a bottle of each product is: perfume, 1; eau de toilette, 2; and body splash, 3. Assume that all products are processed further after split off .
a. Allocate the joint cost based on the number of bottles, weight, and approximated net realizable values at split off. (Round to the nearest whole percentage.)
b. Assume that all products are processed further and completed. At the end of the period, the inventories are as follows: perfume, 600 bottles; eau de toilette, 1,600 bottles; and body splash, 1,680 bottles. Determine the values of the inventories based on answers obtained in (a). (Round per unit costs to the nearest cent.)
c. Do you see any problems with the allocation based on approximated net realizable value?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Allocating joint cost) Keiffer Production manufactures three joint products in a single process. The following information is available for August 2010:
|
|
|
Sales Value
|
|
|
|
|
|
at Split Off
|
Cost after
|
Final Selling
|
|
Product
|
Gallons
|
per Gallon
|
Split Off
|
Price
|
|
JP 4539
|
4,500
|
$14
|
$4
|
$24
|
|
JP 4587
|
18,000
|
8
|
5
|
15
|
|
JP 4591
|
13,500
|
18
|
2
|
22
|
Allocate the joint cost of $558,000 to the production based on the
a. number of gallons.
b. sales value at split off .
c. approximated net realizable values at split off . (Round all percentages to the nearest whole percentage.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing and posting liabilities The general ledger of Pack N Ship at June 30, 2012, the end of the company’s fiscal year, includes the following account balances before adjusting entries.
|
Accounts payable
|
$111,000
|
|
Current portion of notes payable
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
|
Salary payable
|
|
|
Employee payroll taxes payable
|
960
|
|
Employer payroll taxes payable
|
|
|
Unearned rent revenue
|
6,300
|
|
Long–term note payable
|
220,000
|
The additional data needed to develop the adjusting entries at June 30 are as follows:
a. The long term debt is payable in annual installments of $44,000, with the next installment due on July 31. On that date, Pack N Ship will also pay one year’s interest at 10%. Interest was last paid on July 31 of the preceding year. Make the adjusting entry to shift the current installment of the long term note payable to a current liability. Also accrue interest expense at year end.
b. Gross salaries for the last payroll of the fiscal year were $4,900. Employer payroll taxes owed are $810.
c. On February 1, the company collected one year’s rent of $6,300 in advance.
Requirements
1. Using the four column ledger format, open the listed accounts and insert the unadjusted June 30 balances.
2. Journalize and post the June 30 adjusting entries to the accounts that you opened. Key adjusting entries by letter.
3. Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at June 30, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and journalizing payroll amounts Lenny Worthington is general manager of Crossroad Tanning Salons. During 2012, Worthington worked for the company all year at a $6,100 monthly salary. He also earned a year end bonus equal to 5% of his salary. Worthington’s federal income tax withheld during 2012 was $810 per month, plus $928 on his bonus check. State income tax withheld came to $80 per month, plus $60 on the bonus. The FICA tax withheld was 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. Worthington authorized the following payroll deductions: United Fund contribution of 1% of total earnings and life insurance of $15 per month. Crossroad incurred payroll tax expense on Worthington for FICA tax of 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. The company also paid state unemployment tax of 5.4% and federal unemployment tax of 0.8% on the first $7,000 in annual earnings. In addition, Crossroad provides Worthington with health insurance at a cost of $110 per month. During 2012, Crossroad paid $7,000 into Worthington’s retirement plan.
Requirements
1. Compute Worthington’s gross pay, payroll deductions, and net pay for the full year 2012. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.
2. Compute Crossroad’s total 2012 payroll expense for Worthington.
3. Make the journal entry to record Crossroad’s expense for Worthington’s total earnings for the year, his payroll deductions, and net pay. Debit Salary expense and Bonus expense as appropriate. Credit liability accounts for the payroll deductions and Cash for net pay. An explanation is not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and journalizing payroll amounts Lawlor Lawn Service, Inc., is considering hiring its first “real” employee. The employee will earn $900 weekly and will have $81 in federal income tax and $33 for health insurance withheld, in addition to 7.65% FICA, each week. Assume the employee will pay no state or other taxes. The employer must pay 7.65% FICA tax, federal unemployment tax of 0.8% of the first $7,000 in pay, and state unemployment tax of 5.4% of the first $7,000 in pay.
Requirements
1. Calculate the amount of the employee’s weekly net pay.
2. Journalize the entries to accrue the weekly payroll on July 31, 2012, to record the employer’s payroll taxes associated with the payroll, and to pay the payroll on August 4, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Golden Bear Construction Co. operates throughout California. The owner, Gaylan Beavers, employs 15 work crews. Construction supervisors report directly to Beavers, and the supervisors are trusted employees. The home office staff consists of an accountant and an office manager.
Because employee turnover is high in the construction industry, supervisors hire and fire their own crews. Supervisors notify the office of all personnel changes. Also, supervisors forward to the office the employee W 4 forms. Each Thursday, the supervisors submit weekly time sheets for their crews, and the accountant prepares the payroll. At noon on Friday, the supervisors come to the office to get paychecks for distribution to the workers at 5 PM. The company accountant prepares the payroll, including the paychecks. Beavers signs all paychecks. To verify that each construction worker is a bona fide employee, the accountant matches the employee’s endorsement signature on the back of the canceled paycheck with the signature on that employee’s W 4 form.
Requirements
1. Identify one way that a supervisor can defraud Golden Bear Construction under the present system.
2. Discuss a control feature that the company can use to safeguard against the fraud you identified in Requirement 1. or other taxes. The employer must pay 7.65% FICA tax, federal unemployment tax of 0.8% of the first $7,000 in pay, and state unemployment tax of 5.4% of the first $7,000 in pay.
3. Calculate the amount of the employee’s weekly net pay.
4. Journalize the entries to accrue the weekly payroll on July 31, 2012, to record the employer’s payroll taxes associated with the payroll, and to pay the payroll on August 4, 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sara Chung knew the construction contractors in her area well. She was the purchasing manager at the power plant, a business that was the major employer in the region. Whenever a repair or maintenance job came up, Sara’s friends would inflate the invoice by 10%. The invoice would then be passed through the accounts payable department, where the clerk was supposed to review and verify the charges before processing the payment. The accounts payable clerk, Valerie Judson, was happy to have a job and didn’t want anything to jeopardize it. She knew the deal, but kept her mouth shut. Sara’s contractor friends would always “kick back” the 10% extra to Sara under the table. One day Valerie had a heart attack and went into the hospital. The company hired a new accounts payable clerk, Spencer Finn. He had worked construction in his college days and suspected something was fishy, but he couldn’t prove it. He did, however, wish to protect himself in case the fraud came to light.
Requirements
1. How could an auditor detect fraud of this sort?
2. What can a business do to prevent this kind of fraudulent activity?
3. What should the new accountant do to protect himself?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In recent years, the airline industry has dominated headlines. Consumers are shopping and other Internet sites for the lowest rates. The airlines have also lured customers with frequent flyer programs, which award free flights to passengers who accumulate specified miles of travel. Unredeemed frequent flyer mileage represents a liability that airlines must report on their balance sheets, usually as Air traffic liability.
a profitable, no frills carrier based in Dallas, has been rated near the top of the industry. controls costs by flying to smaller, less expensive airports; using only one model of aircraft; serving no meals; increasing staff efficiency; and having a shorter turnaround time on the ground between flights. The fact that most of the cities served by Southwest have predictable weather maximizes its on time arrival record.
Requirements
With a partner or group, lead your class in a discussion of the following questions, or write a report as directed by your instructor.
1. Frequent flyer programs have grown into significant obligations for airlines. Why should a liability be recorded for those programs? Discuss how you might calculate the amount of this liability. Can you think of other industries that offer incentives that create a similar liability?
2. One of Southwest Airlines’ strategies for success is shortening stops at airport gates between flights. The company’s chairman has stated, “What [you] produce is lower fares for the customers because you generate more revenue from the same fixed cost in that airplane.” What are some of the “fixed costs” of an airline? How can better utilization of assets improve a company’s profits?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Delphian Corporation has two classes of common stock. The company’s balance sheet includes the following:
|
DELPHIAN CORPORATION Stockholders’ Equity December 31, 2013
|
|
Paid in capital:
|
|
|
Class A common stock, voting, $1 par value,
|
|
|
authorized and issued 1,200,000 shares
|
$ 1,200,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—Class A common
|
2,000,000
|
|
Class B common stock, nonvoting, no par value,
|
|
|
authorized and issued 11,000,000 shares
|
55,000,000
|
| |
58,200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
800,000,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$858,200,000
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the issuance of the Class A common stock.
2. Journalize the issuance of the Class B common stock.
3. What is the total paid in capital of the company?
4. What was the average issue price of each share of Class B common stock?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following accounts and related balances to prepare the classified balance sheet of Fiesta, Inc., at September 30, 2014. Compute the book value per share of Fiesta’s common stock. Preferred dividends are $5,000 in arrears because Fiesta has not declared the current year dividend.
|
Common stock, $1 par, 50,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued
|
$20,000
|
Inventory
|
$ 85,000
|
|
Salary payable
|
3,000
|
Long term note payable
|
70,000
|
|
Preferred stock, $2.50, no par, 10,000 shares authorized, 2,000 shares issued
|
50,000
|
Property, plant, and equipment, net
|
205,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
20,000
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
25,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
80,000
|
Cash
|
15,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
75,000
|
Income tax payable
|
12,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose Value Home and Garden Imports issued 400,000 shares of $0.10 par common stock at $4 per share. Which journal entry correctly records the issuance of this stock?
|
a.
|
Common stock
|
1,600,000
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
40,000
|
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
|
1,560,000
|
|
b.
|
Common stock
|
1,600,000
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
1,600,000
|
|
c.
|
Cash
|
1,600,000
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
40,000
|
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par—common
|
|
1,560,000
|
|
d.
|
Cash
|
1,600,000
|
|
|
|
Common stock
|
|
1,600,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The amount of equity attributed per common share is called
a. market value per share.
b. liquidation value per share.
c. book value per share.
d. par value per share.
2. Suppose Yummy Treats Bakery issues common stock to purchase a building. Yummy Treats Bakery should record the building at
a. the par value of the stock given.
b. its book value.
c. its market value.
d. a value assigned by the board of directors.
3. Jackson Health Foods has 8,000 shares of $2 par common stock outstanding, which was issued at $15 per share. Jackson also has a deficit balance in Retained earnings of $86,000. How much is Jackson’s total stockholders’ equity?
a. $16,000
b. $120,000
c. $206,000
d. $34,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dale Corporation has the following data:
|
Net income
|
$ 24,000
|
Average total assets
|
$ 300,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
9,000
|
Average common equity
|
100,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
12,000
|
|
|
Dale’s return on assets is
a. 5%.
b. 12%.
c. 11%.
d. 8%.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Issuing stock and interpreting stockholders’ equity Scifilink.com issued stock beginning in 2012 and reported the following on its balance sheet at December 31, 2012:
|
Common stock, $ 2.00 par value
|
|
|
Authorized: 6,000 shares
|
|
|
Issued: 4,000 shares
|
$ 8,000
|
|
Paid in capital in excess of par
|
4,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
26,500
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the company’s issuance of the stock for cash.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Closing entries The data for Amanda’s Tax Service, Inc., for the year ended August 31, 2012, follow:
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$62,000
|
Sales revenue
|
$ 125,000
|
|
Dividends
|
14,000
|
Operating expenses
|
44,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
1,800
|
Retained earnings
|
24,000
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the required closing entries for the year.
2. What is the balance in Retained earnings after the closing entries are posted?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
E Z Loan, Co., makes loans to high risk borrowers. E Z borrows from its bank and then lends money to people with bad credit. The bank requires E Z Loan to submit quarterly financial statements in order to keep its line of credit. E Z’s main asset is Notes receivable. Therefore, Uncollectible note expense and Allowance for uncollectible notes are important accounts. Slade McMurphy, the owner of E Z Loan, wants net income to increase in a smooth pattern, rather than increase in some periods and decrease in others. To report smoothly increasing net income, McMurphy underestimates Uncollectible note expense in some periods. In other periods, McMurphy overestimates the expense. He reasons that over time the income overstatements roughly offset the income understatements.
Requirement
1. Is McMurphy’s practice of smoothing income ethical? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dylan worked for a propane gas distributor as an accounting clerk in a small Midwestern town. Last winter, his brother Mike lost his job at the machine plant. By January, temperatures were sub zero, and Mike had run out of money. Dylan saw that Mike’s account was overdue, and he knew Mike needed another delivery to heat his home. He decided to credit Mike’s account and debit the balance to the parts inventory, because he knew the parts manager, the owner’s son, was incompetent and would never notice the extra entry. Months went by, and Dylan repeated the process until an auditor ran across the charges by chance. When the owner fired Dylan, he said “if you had only come to me and told me about Mike’s situation, we could have worked something out.”
Requirements
1. What can a business like this do to prevent employee fraud of this kind?
2. What effect would Dylan’s actions have on the balance sheet? The income statement?
3. How much discretion does a business have with regard to accommodating hardship situations? (Challenge)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bob Davidson and Sheila Thornton worked for several years as sales representatives for Xerox Corporation. During this time, they became close friends as they acquired expertise with the company’s full range of copier equipment. Now they see an opportunity to put their experience to work and fulfill lifelong desires to establish their own business. Rolltide College, located in their city, is expanding, and there is no copy center within five miles of the campus.
Business in the area is booming, and the population in this section of the city is growing.
Davidson and Thornton want to open a copy center, similar to a FedEx Office, near the campus.
A small shopping center across the street from the college has a vacancy that would fit their needs. Davidson and Thornton each have $20,000 to invest in the business, and they forecast the need for $30,000 to renovate the store. Xerox Corporation will lease two large copiers to them at a total monthly rental of $4,000. With enough cash to see them through the first six months of operation, they are confident they can make the business succeed. The two work very well together, and both have excellent credit ratings. Davidson and Thornton must borrow $40,000 to amass a total startup capital of $80,000, which will allow them to start the business, advertise its opening, and keep it running for its first six months. Assume the role of Davidson and Thornton, the partners who will own Rolltide Copy Center.
Requirements
1. As a group, visit a copy center to familiarize yourselves with its operations. If possible, interview the manager or another employee. Then write a loan request that Davidson and Thornton will submit to a bank with the intent of borrowing $40,000 to be paid back over three years. The loan will be a personal loan to the partnership of Davidson and Thornton, not to Rolltide Copy Center. The request should specify all the details of Davidson and Thornton’s plan that will motivate the bank to grant the loan. Include a budgeted income statement for the first six months of the copy center’s operation.
2. As a group, interview a loan officer in a bank. Have the loan officer evaluate your loan request. Write a report, or make a presentation to your class—as directed by your instructor—to reveal the loan officer’s decision.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing notes receivable transactions Big Ted Toys sells on account. When a customer account becomes three months old, Big Ted converts the account to a note receivable and immediately discounts the note to a bank. During 2012, Big Ted completed the following transactions:
|
Aug 29
|
Sold goods on account to V. Mayer, $3,000.
|
|
Dec 1
|
Received a $3,000, 60 day, 11% note from Mayer in satisfaction of his past due account receivable.
|
|
1
|
Sold the Mayer note by discounting it to a bank for $2,600.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in Big Ted’s journal.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing notes receivable transactions A company received the following notes during 2012. The notes were discounted on the dates and at the rates indicated:
|
|
|
Principal
|
Interest
|
|
Date
|
Discount
|
|
Note
|
Date
|
Amount
|
Rate
|
Term
|
Discounted
|
Rate
|
|
(1)
|
Jun 1
|
|
$13,000
|
10%
|
120
|
days
|
Aug 15
|
13%
|
|
(2)
|
Aug 19
|
|
10,000
|
9%
|
90
|
days
|
Aug 30
|
11%
|
|
(3)
|
Jul 15
|
|
4,000
|
7%
|
6
|
months
|
Oct 15
|
9%
|
Requirements
Identify each note by number, compute interest using a 360 day year, and round all interest amounts to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.
1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.
2. Determine the discount and proceeds from the sale (discounting) of each note.
3. Journalize the discounting of notes (1) and (2).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing notes receivable transactions A company received the following notes during 2012. The notes were discounted on the dates and at the rates indicated:
|
|
|
Principal
|
Interest
|
|
Date
|
Discount
|
|
Note
|
Date
|
Amount
|
Rate
|
Term
|
Discounted
|
Rate
|
|
(1)
|
Jul 1
|
|
$12,000
|
13%
|
120
|
days
|
Sep 10
|
16%
|
|
(2)
|
Jun 19
|
|
11,000
|
8%
|
90
|
days
|
Jun 20
|
10%
|
|
(3)
|
Jul 15
|
|
8,000
|
6%
|
6
|
months
|
Oct 15
|
8%
|
Requirements
Identify each note by number, compute interest using a 360 day year, and round all interest amounts to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.
1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.
2. Determine the discount and proceeds from the sale (discounting) of each note.
3. Journalize the discounting of notes (1) and (2).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. A Wendy’s restaurant made cash sales of $4,000 subject to a 5% sales tax. Record the sales and the related sales tax. Also record Wendy’s payment of the tax to the state of South Carolina.
2. At December 31, 2011, Chastains’ Hair Salons reported the following liabilities:
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
Portion of long term note payable due within one year
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Interest payable ($210,000 * 0.06 * 6/12)
|
6,300
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 16,300
|
|
Long Term Liabilities
|
|
|
Long term note payable
|
$200,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$216,300
|
Chastains’ Hair Salons signed a $210,000, 21 year, 6% note on July 1, 2011. The note payments of $10,000 plus interest are due June 30 each year. Show how Chastains’ Hair Salons would report its liabilities on the yearend balance sheet one year later—December 31, 2012.
3. How does a contingent liability differ from an actual liability? When would a contingent liability be journalized?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chastains’ Hair Salons’ balance sheet at December 31, 2012, is as follows:
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
Portion of long term note payable due within one year
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Interest payable ($200,000 * 0.06 * 6/12)
|
6,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$ 16,000
|
|
Long Term Liabilities
|
|
|
Long term note payable
|
$190,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
$206,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rags to Riches, a clothing resale store, employs one salesperson, Dee Hunter. Hunter’s straight time wage is $400 per week, with time and a half pay for hours above 40. Rags to Riches withholds income tax (10%) and FICA tax (7.65%) from Hunter’s pay. Rags to Riches also pays payroll taxes for FICA (7.65%) and state and federal unemployment (5.4% and 0.8%, respectively). In addition, Rags to Riches contributes 6% of Hunter’s gross pay into her retirement plan. During the week ended December 26, Hunter worked 50 hours. Prior to this week, she had earned $2,000.
Requirements
(Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.)
1. Compute Hunter’s gross pay and net (take home) pay for the week.
2. Record the payroll entries that Rags to Riches would make for each of the following:
a. Hunter’s gross pay, including overtime
b. Expense for employee benefits
c. Employer payroll taxes
d. Payment of net pay to Hunter
e. Payment for employee benefits
f. Payment of all payroll taxes
3. How much was Rags to Riches’ total payroll expense for the week?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Swell Company has a lawsuit pending from a customer claiming damages of $100,000. Swell’s attorney advises that the likelihood the customer will win is remote. GAAP requires at a minimum that this contingent liability be
a. disclosed in the footnotes.
b. disclosed in the footnotes, with ranges of potential loss.
c. booked, as well as disclosed in the footnotes.
d. No disclosure is required.
2. An employee has year to date earnings of $105,000. The employee’s gross pay for the next pay period is $5,000. If the FICA wage base is $106,800, how much FICA tax will be withheld from the employee’s pay?
a. $184.10
b. $382.50
c. $310.00
d. $137.70
3. The employer is responsible for which of the following payroll taxes?
a. 6.2% Social Security
b. 1.45% Medicare tax
c. Federal and state unemployment taxes
d. All of the above
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Jade Larson Antiques owes $20,000 on a truck purchased for use in the business. The company makes principal payments of $5,000 each year plus interest at 8%. Which of the following is true?
a. After the first payment is made, the company owes $15,000 plus three year’s interest.
b. After the first payment, $15,000 would be shown as a long term liability.
c. After the first payment is made, $5,000 would be shown as the current portion due on the long term note.
d. Just before the last payment is made, $5,000 will appear as a long term liability on the balance sheet.
2. Sydney Park Fitness Gym has Unearned revenue of $10,000, Salaries payable of $15,000, and Allowance for uncollectible accounts of $5,000. What amount would Sydney report as Total current liabilities?
a. $30,000
b. $25,000
c. $20,000
d. $15,000
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Interpreting an actual company’s contingent liabilities Farley Motors, Inc., a motorcycle manufacturer, included the following note (adapted) in its annual report:
|
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements
|
|
7 Commitments and Contingencies (Adapted)
|
|
The Company self insures its product liability losses in the United States up to $3,000,000.
|
|
Catastrophic coverage is maintained for individual claims in excess of $3,000,000 up to $25,000,000.
|
Requirements
1. Why are these contingent (versus actual) liabilities?
2. How can a contingent liability become an actual liability for Farley Motors? What are the limits to the company’s product liabilities in the United States?.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording note payable transactions Consider the following note payable transactions of Creative Video Productions.
|
2012
|
|
|
1 May
|
Purchased equipment costing $17,000 by issuing a one year, 6% note payable. Accrued interest on the note payable.
|
|
Dec 31
|
|
|
2013
|
|
|
1May
|
Paid the note payable at maturity.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions for the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording and reporting current liabilities TransWorld Publishing completed the following transactions during 2012:
|
1Oct
|
Sold a six month subscription, collecting cash of $330, plus sales tax of 9%.
|
|
15Nov
|
Remitted (paid) the sales tax to the state of Tennessee.
|
|
31Dec
|
Made the necessary adjustment at year end to record the amount of subscription revenue earned during the year.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions (explanations are not required).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing current liabilities Edmund O’Mally Associates reported short term notes payable and salary payable as follows:
|
2012
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current liabilities (partial)
|
|
|
|
Short term notes payable
|
$16,400
|
$15,600
|
|
Salary payable
|
3,400
|
3,100
|
During 2012, O’Mally paid off both current liabilities that were left over from 2011, borrowed money on short term notes payable, and accrued salary expense.
Requirement
1. Journalize all four of these transactions for O’Mally during 2012.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions The following transactions of Denver Pharmacies occurred during 2011 and 2012:
|
2011
|
|
|
9Jan
|
Purchased computer equipment at a cost of $9,000, signing a six month,
|
|
|
6% note payable for that amount.
|
|
29
|
Recorded the week’s sales of $64,000, three fourths on credit, and
|
|
|
one fourth for cash. Sales amounts are subject to a 6% state sales tax.
|
|
5Feb
|
Sent the last week’s sales tax to the state.
|
|
28
|
Borrowed $204,000 on a four year, 10% note payable that calls for $51,000
|
|
|
annual installment payments plus interest. Record the current and
|
|
|
long term portions of the note payable in two separate accounts.
|
|
9Jul
|
Paid the six month, 6% note, plus interest, at maturity.
|
|
31Aug
|
Purchased inventory for $12,000, signing a six month, 9% note payable.
|
|
31Dec
|
Accrued warranty expense, which is estimated at 2% of sales of $603,000.
|
|
31
|
Accrued interest on all outstanding notes payable. Make a separate
|
|
|
interest accrual for each note payable.
|
|
2012
|
|
|
28Feb
|
Paid the first installment and interest for one year on the four year note payable.
|
|
|
|
|
29
|
Paid off the 9% note plus interest at maturity.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions in Denver’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions The following transactions of Brooks Garrett occurred during 2012:
|
30Apr
|
Garrett is party to a patent infringement lawsuit of $200,000. Garrett’s attorney is certain it is remote that Garrett will lose this lawsuit.
|
|
30Jun
|
Estimated warranty expense at 2% of sales of $400,000.
|
|
28Jul
|
Warranty claims paid in the amount of $6,000.
|
|
30Sep
|
Garrett is party to a lawsuit for copyright violation of $100,000. Garrett’s attorney advises that it is probable Garrett will lose this lawsuit.
|
|
31Dec
|
Garrett estimates warranty expense on sales for the second half of the year of $500,000 at 2%.
|
Requirements
1. Journalize required transactions, if any, in Garrett’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
2. What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and journalizing payroll amounts Louis Welch is general manager of United Tanning Salons. During 2012, Welch worked for the company all year at a $6,200 monthly salary. He also earned a yearend bonus equal to 10% of his salary. Welch’s federal income tax withheld during 2012 was $850 per month, plus $924 on his bonus check. State income tax withheld came to $70 per month, plus $40 on the bonus. The FICA tax withheld was 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. Welch authorized the following payroll deductions: Charity Fund contribution of 1% of total earnings and life insurance of $5 per month. United incurred payroll tax expense on Welch for FICA tax of 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. The company also paid state unemployment tax of 5.4% and federal unemployment tax of 0.8% on the first $7,000 in annual earnings. In addition, United provides Welch with health insurance at a cost of $150 per month. During 2012, United paid $4,000 into Welch’s retirement plan.
Requirements
1. Compute Welch’s gross pay, payroll deductions, and net pay for the full year 2012. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.
2. Compute United’s total 2012 payroll expense for Welch.
3. Make the journal entry to record United’s expense for Welch’s total earnings for the year, his payroll deductions, and net pay. Debit Salary expense and Bonus expense as appropriate. Credit liability accounts for the payroll deductions and Cash for net pay. An explanation is not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions The following transactions of Plymouth Pharmacies occurred during 2011 and 2012:
|
2011
|
|
|
9Jan
|
Purchased computer equipment at a cost of $7,000, signing a six month,
|
|
|
9% note payable for that amount.
|
|
29
|
Recorded the week’s sales of $67,000, three fourths on credit, and
|
|
|
one fourth for cash. Sales amounts are subject to a 6% state sales tax.
|
|
5Feb
|
Sent the last week’s sales tax to the state.
|
|
28
|
Borrowed $210,000 on a four year, 8% note payable that calls for $52,500
|
|
|
annual installment payments plus interest. Record the current and
|
|
|
long term portions of the note payable in two separate accounts.
|
|
9Jul
|
Paid the six month, 9% note, plus interest, at maturity.
|
|
31Aug
|
Purchased inventory for $6,000, signing a six month, 11% note payable.
|
|
31Dec
|
Accrued warranty expense, which is estimated at 4% of sales of $608,000.
|
|
31
|
Accrued interest on all outstanding notes payable. Make a separate
|
|
|
interest accrual for each note payable.
|
|
2012
|
|
|
28Feb
|
Paid the first installment and interest for one year on the four year note payable.
|
|
29
|
Paid off the 11% note plus interest at maturity.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions in Plymouth’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions The following transactions of Dunn Miles occurred during 2012:
|
30Apr
|
Miles is party to a patent infringement lawsuit of $230,000. Miles’s attorney is certain it is remote that Miles will lose this lawsuit.
|
|
30Jun
|
Estimated warranty expense at 3% of sales of $430,000.
|
|
28Jul
|
Warranty claims paid in the amount of $6,400.
|
|
30Sep
|
Miles is party to a lawsuit for copyright violation of $130,000. Miles’s attorney advises that it is probable Miles will lose this lawsuit.
|
|
31Dec
|
Miles estimates warranty expense on sales for the second half of the year of $510,000 at 3%.
|
Requirements
1. Journalize required transactions, if any, in Miles’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
2. What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing transactions using the direct write off method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet High Performance Cell Phones sold $23,000 of merchandise to Anthony Trucking Company on account. Anthony fell on hard times and paid only $8,000 of the account receivable. After repeated attempts to collect, High Performance finally wrote off its accounts receivable from Anthony. Six months later High Performance received Anthony’s check for $15,000 with a note apologizing for the late payment.
Requirements
1. Journalize for High Performance:
a. Sale on account, $23,000. (Ignore cost of goods sold.)
b. Collection of $8,000 on account.
c. Write off of the remaining portion of Anthony’s account receivable. High Performance uses the direct write off method for un collectibles.
d. Reinstatement of Anthony’s account receivable.
e. Collection in full from Anthony, $15,000.
2. Show how High Performance would report receivables on its balance sheet after all entries have been posted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing card sales, note receivable transactions, and accruing interest Marathon Running Shoes reports the following:
|
2012
|
|
|
May 4
|
Recorded Estate credit card sales of $107,000, net of processor fee of 3%.
|
|
Sep 1
|
Loaned $17,000 to Jean Porter, an executive with the company, on a one year, 15% note.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Accrued interest revenue on the Porter note.
|
|
2013
|
|
|
Sep 1
|
Collected the maturity value of the Porter note.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize all entries required for Marathon Running Shoes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing note receivable transactions Hot Heat Steam Cleaning performs services on account. When a customer account becomes four months old, Hot Heat converts the account to a note receivable. During 2012, the company completed the following transactions:
|
28Apr
|
Performed service on account for Sinclair Club, $18,000.
|
|
1Sep
|
Received an $18,000, 60 day, 9% note from Sinclair Club in satisfaction of its past due account receivable.
|
|
31Oct
|
Collected the Sinclair Club note at maturity.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in Hot Heat’s journal.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evaluating ratio data Algonquin Carpets reported the following amounts in its 2013 financial statements. The 2012 figures are given for comparison.
| |
|
2,013
|
|
2012
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
4,000
|
|
$10,000
|
|
Short term investments
|
|
20,000
|
|
9,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$63,000
|
|
76,000
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for un collectibles
|
6,000
|
57,000
|
5,000
|
71,000
|
|
Inventory
|
|
195,000
|
|
191,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
|
$4,000
|
|
4,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
|
280,000
|
|
$285,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
|
104,000
|
|
$106,000
|
|
Net sales (all on account)
|
|
732,000
|
|
735,000
|
Requirements
1. Calculate Algonquin’s acid test ratio for 2013. Determine whether Algonquin’s acid test ratio improved or deteriorated from 2012 to 2013. How does Algonquin’s acid test ratio compare with the industry average of 0.80?
2. Calculate the days’ sales in receivables for 2013. How do the results compare with Algonquin’s credit terms of net 30?
3. Calculate Algonquin’s accounts receivable turnover ratio. How does Algonquin’s ratio compare to the industry average accounts receivable turnover of 10?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Collection period for receivables Contemporary Media Sign Company sells on account. Recently, Contemporary reported the following figures:
|
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Net sales
|
$572,000
|
$600,000
|
|
Receivables at end of year
|
38,700
|
46,100
|
Requirements
1. Compute Contemporary’s average collection period on receivables during 2012.
2. Suppose Contemporary’s normal credit terms for a sale on account are “2/10, net 30.” How well does Contemporary’s collection period compare to the company’s credit terms? Is this good or bad for Contemporary?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explaining common types of receivables and designing internal controls for receivables Organizational Kings performs organizational consulting services on account, so virtually all cash receipts arrive in the mail. Average daily cash receipts are $36,000. Katie Stykle, the owner, has just returned from a meeting with new ideas for the business. Among other things, Stykle plans to institute stronger internal controls over cash receipts from customers.
Requirements
1. What types of receivables are most likely to be collected by Organizational Kings?
2. List the following procedures in the correct order.
a. Another person, such as the owner or the manager, compares the amount of the bank deposit to the total of the customer credits posted by the accountant.
b. This gives some assurance that the day’s cash receipts went into the bank and that the same amount was posted to customer accounts.
c. The person who handles cash should not prepare the bank reconciliation. An employee with no access to the accounting records deposits the cash in the bank immediately.
d. The remittance slips go to the accountant, who uses them for posting credits to the customer accounts.
e. Someone other than the accountant opens the mail. This person separates customer checks from the accompanying remittance slips.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance and direct write off methods, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet On August 31, 2012, Daisy Floral Supply had a $155,000 debit balance in Accounts receivable and a $6,200 credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts. During September, Daisy made6
- sales on account, $590,000.
- collections on account, $627,000.
- write offs of uncollectible receivables, $7,000.
Requirements
1. Journalize all September entries using the allowance method. Uncollectible account expense was estimated at 3% of credit sales. Show all September activity in Accounts receivable, Allowance for uncollectible accounts, and Uncollectible account expense (post to these T accounts).
2. Using the same facts, assume instead that Daisy used the direct write off method to account for uncollectible receivables. Journalize all September entries using the direct write off method. Post to Accounts receivable and Uncollectible account expense and show their balances at September 30, 2012.
3. What amount of uncollectible account expense would Daisy report on its September income statement under each of the two methods? Which amount better matches expense with revenue? Give your reason.
4. What amount of net accounts receivable would Daisy report on its September 30, 2012 balance sheet under each of the two methods? Which amount is more realistic? Give your reason.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet At September 30, 2012, the accounts of Mountain Terrace Medical Center (MTMC) include the following:
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 145,000
|
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts (credit balance)
|
3,500
|
During the last quarter of 2012, MTMC completed the following selected transactions:
|
Dec 28
|
Wrote off accounts receivable as uncollectible: Regan, Co., $1,300;
|
|
|
Owen Mac, $900; and Rain, Inc., $700.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Recorded uncollectible account expense based on the aging of
|
|
|
accounts receivable, as follows:
|
| |
|
Age of Accounts
|
|
|
1–30
|
31–60 61–90
|
Over 90
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
Days
|
Days Days
|
Days
|
|
$165,000
|
$97,000
|
$ 37,000
|
$ 14,000
|
$ 17,000
|
|
Estimated percent
|
|
|
|
|
|
uncollectible
|
0.3%
|
3%
|
30%
|
35%
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Open the Allowance for uncollectible accounts T account, and post entries affecting that account. Keep a running balance.
3. Show how Mountain Terrace Medical Center should report net accounts receivable on its December 31, 2012 balance sheet. Use the three line reporting format.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method),card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue Relaxing Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions:
|
2011
|
|
|
Jul 1
|
Sold inventory to Great – Mart, receiving a $45,000, nine month, 12% note. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Oct 31
|
Recorded credit and debit card sales for the period of $21,000.
|
|
Nov 3
|
Card processor drafted company’s checking account for processing fee of $410.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Great – Mart note.
|
|
31
|
Made an adjusting entry to record uncollectible account expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The aging schedule shows that $15,200 of accounts receivable will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts is $11,600.
|
|
2012
|
|
|
Apr 1
|
Collected the maturity value of the Great – Mart note.
|
|
Jun 23
|
Sold merchandise to Ambiance, Corp., receiving a 60 day, 9%
|
|
|
note for $13,000. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Aug 22
|
Ambiance, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity;
|
|
|
we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable.
|
|
Nov 16
|
Loaned $21,000 cash to Creed, Inc., receiving a 90 day, 8% note.
|
|
Dec 5
|
Collected in full on account from Ambiance, Corp.
|
|
31
|
Accrued the interest on the Creed, Inc., note.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in the journal of Relaxing Recliner Chairs. Explanations are not required. (For notes stated in days, use a 360 day year. Round to the nearest dollar.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for notes receivable and accruing interest Kelly Realty loaned money and received the following notes during 2012.
|
Note
|
Date
|
Principal Amount
|
Interest Rate
|
Term
|
|
(1)
|
Aug 1
|
$
|
24,000
|
17%
|
1
|
year
|
|
(2)
|
Nov 30
|
|
18,000
|
6%
|
6
|
months
|
|
(3)
|
Dec 19
|
|
12,000
|
12%
|
30
|
days
|
Requirements
For each note, compute interest using a 360 day year. Explanations are not required.
1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.
2. Journalize the entry to record the inception of each of the three notes and also journalize a single adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, the fiscal year end, to record accrued interest revenue on all three notes.
3. Journalize the collection of principal and interest at maturity of all three notes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for notes receivable, dishonored notes, and accrued interest revenue Consider the following transactions for Jo Jo Music.
|
2011
|
|
|
Dec 6
|
Received a $7,000, 90 day, 12% note on account from Dark Star Music.
|
|
31
|
Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Dark Star Music note.
|
|
31
|
Made a closing entry for interest revenue.
|
|
2012
|
|
|
Mar 4
|
Collected the maturity value of the Dark Star Music note.
|
|
Jun 30
|
Loaned $11,000 cash to Love Joy Music, receiving a six month, 11% note.
|
|
Oct 2
|
Received a $2,400, 60 day, 11% note for a sale to Voice Publishing. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Dec 1
|
Voice Publishing dishonored its note at maturity; wrote off the note as uncollectible,
|
|
|
debiting Allowance for uncollectible accounts.
|
|
30
|
Collected the maturity value of the Love Joy Music note.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize all transactions for Jo Jo Music. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar. (For notes stated in days, use a 360 day year.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using ratio data to evaluate a company’s financial position The comparative financial statements of Lakeland Cosmetic Supply for 2012, 2011,and 2010 include the data shown here:
| |
2012
|
2011
|
20101
|
|
Balance sheet—partial
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$90,000
|
70,000
|
30,000
|
|
Short term investments
|
$145,000
|
175,000
|
125,000
|
|
Receivables, net
|
290,000
|
260,000
|
250,000
|
|
Inventories
|
370,000
|
335,000
|
325,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
60,000
|
$15,000
|
50,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$955,000
|
$855,000
|
$780,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$560,000
|
$600,000
|
$690,000
|
|
Income statement—partial
|
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue (all on account)
|
$58,60,000
|
$5,140,000
|
$4,200,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute these ratios for 2012 and 2011:
a. Acid test ratio
b. Days’ sales in receivables
c. Accounts receivable turnover
2. Considering each ratio individually, which ratios improved from 2011 to 2012 and which ratios deteriorated? Is the trend favorable or unfavorable for the company?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explaining common types of receivables and designing internal controls for receivables Tutor Tots performs tutoring services on account, so virtually all cash receipts arrive by mail and are then placed in the petty cash box for a week. Average daily cash receipts are $24,000. Jennifer Swanson, the owner, has just returned from a meeting with new ideas for the business. Among other things, Swanson plans to institute stronger internal controls over cash receipts from customers.
Requirements
1. What types of receivables are most likely to be collected by Tutor Tots?
2. List the following procedures in the correct order.
a. Another person, such as the owner or the manager, compares the amount of the bank deposit to the total of the customer credits posted by the accountant. This gives some assurance that the day’s cash receipts went into the bank and that the same amount was posted to customer accounts.
b. The person who handles cash should not prepare the bank reconciliation.
c. An employee with no access to the accounting records deposits the cash in the bank immediately.
d. The remittance slips go to the accountant, who uses them for posting credits to the customer accounts.
e. Someone other than the accountant opens the mail. This person separates customer checks from the accompanying remittance slips.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance and direct write off methods, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet On October 31, 2012, Blossom Floral Supply had a $180,000 debit balance in Accounts receivable and a $7,200 credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts. During November, Blossom made
• sales on account, $560,000.
• collections on account, $598,000.
• write offs of uncollectible receivables, $9,000.
Requirements
1. Journalize all November entries using the allowance method. Uncollectible account expense was estimated at 1% of credit sales. Show all November activity in Accounts receivable, Allowance for uncollectible accounts, and Uncollectible account expense (post to these T accounts).
2. Using the same facts, assume instead that Blossom used the direct write off method to account for uncollectible receivables. Journalize all November entries using the direct write off method. Post to Accounts receivable and Uncollectible account expense and show their balances at November 30, 2012.
3. What amount of uncollectible account expense would Blossom report on its November income statement under each of the two methods? Which amount better matches expense with revenue? Give your reason.
4. What amount of net accounts receivable would Blossom report on its November 30, 2012 balance sheet under each of the two methods? Which amount is more realistic? Give your reason.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method (percentage of sales), and reporting receivables on the balance sheet Beta Watches completed the following selected transactions during 2011 and 2012:
|
2011
|
|
|
Dec 31
|
Estimated that uncollectible account expense for the year was 3% of credit
|
|
|
sales of $440,000 and recorded that amount as expense. Use the allowance method.
|
|
31
|
Made the closing entry for uncollectible account expense.
|
|
2012
|
|
|
Jan 17
|
Sold inventory to Manny Vasquez, $800, on account. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Jun 29
|
Wrote off Manny Vasquez’s account as uncollectible after repeated efforts to collect from him.
|
|
Aug 6
|
Received $800 from Manny Vasquez, along with a letter apologizing for being
|
|
|
so late. Reinstated Vasquez’s account in full and recorded the cash receipt.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Made a compound entry to write off the following accounts as uncollectible:
|
|
|
Bill Kappy, $1,400; Mike Venture, $1,100; and Russell Reeves, $200.
|
|
31
|
Estimated that uncollectible account expense for the year was 3% on credit
|
|
|
sales of $470,000 and recorded the expense.
|
|
31
|
Made the closing entry for uncollectible account expense.
|
Requirements
1. Open T accounts for Allowance for uncollectible accounts and Uncollectible account expense. Keep running balances, assuming all accounts begin with a zero balance.
2. Record the transactions in the general journal, and post to the two T accounts.
3. Assume the December 31, 2012, balance of Accounts receivable is $139,000. Show how net Accounts receivable would be reported on the balance sheet at that date. Use the three line format of reporting the net accounts receivable.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method),card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue Sleepy Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions:
|
2011
|
|
|
Jul 1
|
Sold inventory to Go – Mart, receiving a $37,000,
|
|
|
nine month, 8% note. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Oct 31
|
Recorded credit and debit card sales for the period of $19,000.
|
|
Nov 3
|
Card processor drafted company’s checking account for
|
|
|
processing fee of $420.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Go – Mart note.
|
|
31
|
Made an adjusting entry to record uncollectible account
|
|
|
expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The
|
|
|
aging schedule shows that $14,100 of accounts receivable
|
|
|
will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit
|
|
|
balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts is $10,200.
|
|
2012
|
|
|
Apr 1
|
Collected the maturity value of the Go – Mart note.
|
|
Jun 23
|
Sold merchandise to Appeal, Corp., receiving a 60 day, 12%
|
|
|
note for $7,000. Ignore cost of goods sold.
|
|
Aug 22
|
Appeal, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity;
|
|
|
we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable.
|
|
Nov 16
|
Loaned $23,000 cash to Creed, Inc., receiving a 90 day, 16% note.
|
|
Dec 5
|
Collected in full on account from Appeal, Corp.
|
|
31
|
Accrued the interest on the Creed, Inc., note.
|
Requirement
1. Record the transactions in the journal of Sleepy Recliner Chairs. Explanations are not required. (For notes stated in days, use a 360 day year. Round to the nearest dollar.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using ratio data to evaluate a company’s financial position The comparative financial statements of Perfection Cosmetic Supply for 2012, 2011, and 2010 include the data that follow:
| |
2012
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Balance sheet—partial
|
|
|
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$60,000
|
$50,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Short term investments
|
155,000
|
155,000
|
120,000
|
|
Receivables, net
|
300,000
|
240,000
|
260,000
|
|
Inventories
|
355,000
|
320,000
|
320,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
$75,000
|
25,000
|
55,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$945,000
|
$790,000
|
$815,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$590,000
|
$580,000
|
$680,000
|
|
Income statement—partial
|
|
|
|
|
Sales revenue (all on account)
|
$5,830,000
|
$5,110,000
|
$4,210,000
|
Requirements
1. Compute these ratios for 2012 and 2011:
a. Acid test ratio
b. Days’ sales in receivables
c. Accounts receivable turnover
2. Considering each ratio individually, which ratios improved from 2011 to 2012 and which ratios deteriorated? Is the trend favorable or unfavorable for the company?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance and reporting accounts receivable on the balance sheet method Consider the following January transactions for Shine King Cleaning:
|
Jan 1
|
Performed cleaning services for Debbie’s D list for $8,000 on terms 3/10, n/20.
|
|
3
|
Shine King decides to adopt the allowance method. Uncollectible account expense is estimated at
|
|
|
2% of credit sales.
|
|
10
|
Borrowed money from North Spot Bank, $10,000, 7% for 180 days.
|
|
12
|
After discussions with Pierre’s Wig Stand, Shine King has determined that $225 of the receivable
|
|
|
owed will not be collected. Write off this portion of the receivable.
|
|
15
|
Sold goods to Watertown for $4,000 on terms 4/10, n/30. Cost of goods sold was $600.
|
|
15
|
Recorded uncollectible account expense estimate for Watertown sale.
|
|
28
|
Sold goods to Bridget, Inc., for cash of $1,200 (cost $280).
|
|
28
|
Collected from Pierre’s Wig Stand $225 of receivable previously written off. Reinstated the
|
|
|
remaining balance of Pierre’s receivable.
|
|
29
|
Paid cash for utilities of $350.
|
|
31
|
Created an aging schedule for Shine King for accounts receivable. Shine King determined that
|
|
|
accounts 1–20 days old were 2% uncollectible and accounts over 20 days old were 15%
|
|
|
uncollectible. Prepared an aging schedule and adjusted the Allowance for uncollectible
|
|
|
accounts to the aging schedule.
|
|
31
|
Shine King prepared all other adjusting entries necessary for January.
|
Requirements
1. Prepare all required journal entries and post them to Shine King’s ledger.
2. Reconcile the Accounts receivable control account to the Accounts receivable subsidiary ledger.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Weddings on Demand sells on account and manages its own receivables. Average experience for the past three years has been as follows:
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$350,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
210,000
|
|
Bad debt expense
|
4,000
|
|
Other expenses
|
61,000
|
Unhappy with the amount of bad debt expense she has been experiencing, Aledia Sanchez, owner of Weddings on Demand, is considering a major change in her business. Her plan would be to stop selling on account altogether but accept either cash, credit, or debit cards from her customers. Her market research indicates that if she does so, her sales will increase by 10% (i.e., from $350,000 to $385,000), of which $200,000 will be credit or debit card sales, and the rest will be cash sales. With a 10% increase in sales, there will also be a 10% increase in Cost of goods sold. If she adopts this plan, she will no longer have bad debt expense, but she will have to pay a fee on debit/credit card transactions of 2% of sales. She also believes this plan will allow her to save $5,000 per year in other operating expenses.
Requirement
1. Should Sanchez start accepting debit and credit cards? Show the computations of net income under her present arrangement and under the plan. (Challenge)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pauline’s Pottery has always used the direct write off method to account for un collectibles. The company’s revenues, bad debt write offs, and year end receivables for the most recent year follow:
|
Year
|
Revenues
|
Write offs
|
Receivables at Year End
|
|
2011
|
$150,000
|
$3,900
|
$14,000
|
The business is applying for a bank loan, and the loan officer requires figures based on the allowance method of accounting for bad debts. In the past, bad debts have run about 4% of revenues.
Requirements
Pauline must give the banker the following information:
1. How much more or less would net income be for 2011 if Pauline’s Pottery were to use the allowance method for bad debts? Please use the percentage of sales method.
2. How much of the receivables balance at the end of 2011 does Pauline’s Pottery actually expect to collect? (Disregard beginning account balances for the purpose of this question.)
3. Compute these amounts, and then explain for Pauline’s Pottery why net income is more or less using the allowance method versus the direct write off method for un collectibles.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions On September 1, Cool Salad Dressings creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $250. During September, Michael Martell, the fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
|
Petty Cash
|
|
|
|
Ticket Number
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
Office supplies
|
$30
|
|
102
|
Cab fare for executive
|
20
|
|
103
|
Delivery of package across town
|
35
|
|
104
|
Dinner money for city manager
|
25
|
|
|
to entertain the mayor
|
|
|
105
|
Inventory
|
80
|
On September 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $65. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Travel expense, Delivery expense, Entertainment expense, and Inventory.
Requirements
1. Explain the characteristics and the internal control features of an imprest fund.
2. On September 30, how much cash should the petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
3. Journalize all required entries to create the fund and replenish it. Include explanations.
4. Make the October 1 entry to increase the fund balance to $300. Include an explanation, and briefly describe what the custodian does.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions Suppose that on September 1, Bash Gyrations, a disc jockey service, creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $250. During September, Ruth Mangan, fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
|
Petty Cash
|
|
|
|
Ticket Number
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
1
|
Postage for package received
|
$30
|
|
2
|
Decorations and refreshments
|
10
|
|
|
for office party
|
|
|
3
|
Two boxes of stationery
|
25
|
|
4
|
Printer cartridges
|
35
|
|
5
|
Dinner money for sales manager
|
65
|
|
|
entertaining a customer
|
|
On September 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $80. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Entertainment expense, and Postage expense.
Requirements
1. On September 30, how much cash should this petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
2. Journalize all required entries to (a) create the fund and (b) replenish it. Include explanations.
3. Make the entry on October 1 to increase the fund balance to $325. Include an explanation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions This exercise continues the Lawlor Lawn Service, Inc., situation from During June, Lawlor Lawn Service decided that it needed a petty cash fund. Lawlor started the fund by cashing a check from her business bank account for $200. At the end of June, Lawlor had $123 in the petty cash fund. She also had three receipts, as shown:
- Receipt for $45 from the lawn supply store for Lawn Supplies
- Receipt for $11 from the gas station for fuel
- Receipt for $17 for lunch with a potential client
Requirements
1. Journalize the entry to establish the Petty cash fund.
2. Journalize any entries to replenish the fund at the end of June. Add any new accounts to the chart for Lawlor that may be necessary.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
This case is based on an actual situation. Centennial Construction Company, headquartered in Dallas, Texas, built a Rodeway Motel 35 miles north of Dallas. The construction foreman, whose name was Slim Chance, hired the 40 workers needed to complete the project. Slim had the construction workers fill out the necessary tax forms, and he sent their documents to the home office. Work on the motel began on April 1 and ended September 1. Each week, Slim filled out a time card of hours worked by each employee during the week. Slim faxed the time sheets to the home office, which prepared the payroll checks on Friday morning. Slim drove to the home office on Friday, picked up the payroll checks, and returned to the construction site. At 5 PM on Friday, Slim distributed payroll checks to the workers.
Requirements
1. Describe in detail the main internal control weakness in this situation. Specify what negative result(s) could occur because of the internal control weakness.
2. Describe what you would do to correct the internal control weakness.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
San Diego Harbor Tours has poor internal control over cash. Ben Johnson, the owner, suspects the cashier of stealing. Here are some details of company cash at September 30:
a. The Cash account in the ledger shows a balance of $6,450.
b. The September 30 bank statement shows a balance of $4,300. The bank statement lists a $200 bank collection, a $10 service charge, and a $40 NSF check.
c. At September 30, the following checks are outstanding:
d. There is a $3,000 deposit in transit at September 30.
e. The cashier handles all incoming cash and makes bank deposits. He also writes checks and reconciles the monthly bank statement. Johnson asks you to determine whether the cashier has stolen cash from the business and, if so, how much.
Requirements
1. Perform your own bank reconciliation using the format illustrated in the chapter. There are no bank or book errors.
2. Explain how Johnson can improve his internal controls.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mel O’Conner owns rental properties in Michigan. Each property has a manager who collects rent, arranges for repairs, and runs advertisements in the local newspaper. The property managers transfer cash to O’Conner monthly and prepare their own bank reconciliations. The manager in Lansing has been stealing from the company. To cover the theft, he understates the amount of the outstanding checks on the monthly bank reconciliation. As a result, each monthly bank reconciliation appears to balance. However, the balance sheet reports more cash than O’Conner actually has in the bank. O’Conner is currently putting his entire business up for sale. In negotiating the sale of the business, O’Conner is showing the balance sheet to prospective buyers.
Requirements
1. Identify who, other than O’Conner, could be harmed by this theft. In what ways could they be harmed?
2. Discuss the role accounting plays in this situation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Levon Helm was a kind of one man mortgage broker. He would drive around Tennessee looking for homes that had second mortgages, and if the criteria were favorable, he would offer to buy the second mortgage for “cash on the barrelhead.” Helm bought low and sold high, making sizable profits. Being a small operation, he employed one person, Cindy Patterson, who did all his bookkeeping. Patterson was an old family friend, and he trusted her so implicitly that he never checked up on the ledgers or the bank reconciliations. At some point, Patterson started “borrowing” from the business and concealing her transactions by booking phony expenses. She intended to pay it back someday, but she got used to the extra cash and couldn’t stop. By the time the scam was discovered, she had drained the company of funds that it owed to many of its investors. The company went bankrupt, Patterson did some jail time, and Helm lost everything.
Requirements
1. What was the key control weakness in this case?
2. Many small businesses cannot afford to hire enough people for adequate separation of duties. What can they do to compensate for this?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are promoting a rock concert in your area. Each member of your team will invest $10,000 of his or her hard earned money in this venture. It is April 1 and the concert is scheduled for June 30. Your promotional activities begin immediately, and ticket sales start on May 1. You expect to sell all the business’s assets, pay all the liabilities, and distribute all remaining cash to the group members by July 31.
Requirement
1. Write an internal control manual that will help safeguard the assets of the business. The starting point of the manual is to assign responsibilities among the group members. Authorize individuals, including group members and any outsiders that you need to hire, to perform specific jobs. Separate duties among the group and any employees.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Monarch Map Company’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011, reported the following:
|
Accounts receivable
|
$60,000
|
|
Less: Allowance for uncollectible accounts
|
2,000
|
Requirements
1. How much of the receivable did Monarch expect to collect? Stated differently, what was the net realizable value of these receivables?
2. Journalize, without explanations, 2012 entries for Monarch:
a. Total credit sales for 2012 were $80,000; 3% of sales were estimated to be uncollectible. Monarch received cash payments on account during 2012 of $74,300.
b. Accounts receivable identified to be uncollectible totaled $2,700.
c. December 31, 2012, aging of receivables indicates that $2,200 of the receivables is uncollectible (target balance).
3. Post the transactions to the Accounts receivable and the Allowance for uncollectible accounts T accounts. Calculate and report Monarch’s receivables and related allowance on the December 31, 2012 balance sheet. What is the net realizable value of receivables at December 31, 2012? How much is the uncollectible account expense for 2012?
4. What if the beginning balance in the Allowance for uncollectible accounts had instead been $200 credit? Journalize the entry or (entries) that would change. What would be the ending balance in the Allowance for uncollectible accounts after posting the entries? What would be the balance in Accounts receivable?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose First Fidelity Bank engaged in the following transactions:
|
2013
|
|
|
Apr 1
|
Loaned out $8,000 to Bland, Co. Received a six month, 10% note.
|
|
Oct 1
|
Collected the Bland note at maturity.
|
|
Dec 1
|
Loaned $6,000 to Flores, Inc., on a 180 day, 12% note.
|
|
Dec 31
|
Accrued interest revenue on the Flores note.
|
|
2014
|
|
|
May 30
|
Collected the Flores note at maturity.
|
First Fidelity’s accounting period ends on December 31.
Requirement
Explanations are not needed. Use a 360 day year to compute interest.
1. Journalize the 2013 and 2014 transactions on First Fidelity’s books.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. With good internal controls, the person who handles cash can also
a. account for cash payments.
b. account for cash receipts from customers.
c. issue credits to customers for sales returns.
d. None of the above
2. “Bad debts” are the same as
a. doubtful accounts.
b. uncollectible accounts.
c. Neither of the above
d. Both a and b.
3. When recording credit or debit card sales using the net method,
a. cash received equals sales.
b. cash received equals sales minus the fee assessed by the card processing company.
c. cash received equals sales plus the fee assessed by the card processing company.
d. cash isn’t received by the seller until the customer pays his or her credit card statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What is wrong with the direct write off method of accounting for un collectibles?
a. The direct write off method overstates assets on the balance sheet.
b. The direct write off method does not match expenses against revenue very well.
c. The direct write off method does not set up an allowance for un collectibles.
d. All of the above
2. At January 31, you have a $8,400 note receivable from a customer. Interest of 10% has accrued for 10 months on the note. What will your financial statements report for this situation?
a. The balance sheet will report the note receivable of $8,400.
b. The balance sheet will report the note receivable of $8,400 and interest receivable of $700.
c. Nothing, because you have not received the cash yet.
d. The income statement will report a note receivable of $8,400.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Return to the data in the preceding question. What will the income statement report for this situation?
a. Nothing, because you have not received the cash yet
b. Note receivable of $8,400
c. Interest revenue of $700
d. Both b and c.
2. At year end, your company has cash of $11,600, receivables of $48,900, inventory of $37,900, and prepaid expenses totaling $5,100. Liabilities of $55,900 must be paid next year. What is your acid test ratio?
a. 1.08
b. 0.21
c. 1.76
d. Cannot be determined from the data given
3. Return to the data in the preceding question. A year ago receivables stood at $67,400, and sales for the current year totaled $807,800. How many days did it take you to collect your average level of receivables?
a. 49
b. 35
c. 29
d. 26
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Applying the allowance method (aging of accounts) to account for Un collectibles Summer and Sandcastles Resort had the following balances at December 31, 2012, before the year end adjustments:
|
Accounts receivable
|
Allowance for uncollectible accounts
|
|
78,000
|
1,900
|
The aging of accounts receivable yields the following data:
|
|
0–60 Days
|
Age of Accounts receivable
|
|
|
Over 60 Days
|
Total Receivables
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$75,000
|
$3,000
|
$78,000
|
|
Percent uncollectible
|
*4%
|
* 24%
|
|
Requirements
1. Journalize Summer’s entry to adjust the allowance account to its correct balance at December 31, 2012.
2. Prepare a T account to compute the ending balance of Allowance for uncollectible accounts.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recording credit card and debit card sales Restaurants do a large volume of business by credit and debit cards. Suppose Chocolate Passion restaurant had these transactions on January 28, 2012:
|
National Express credit card sales
|
$ 9,300
|
|
ValueCard debit card sales
|
9,000
|
Suppose Chocolate Passion’s processor charges a 3% fee and deposits sales net of the fee.
Requirement
1. Journalize these sale transactions for the restaurant.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reporting receivables and other accounts in the financial statements Northend Medical Center included the following items in its financial statements:
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
$ 150
|
Service revenue
|
$ 14,700
|
|
Cash
|
1,010
|
Other assets
|
380
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,590
|
Cost of services sold and other expenses
|
12,400
|
|
Accounts payable
|
900
|
Notes payable
|
3,490
|
Requirements
1. How much net income did Northend earn for the month?
2. Show two ways Northend can report receivables on its classified balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the acid test ratio and days’ sales in receivables to evaluate a company Southside Clothiers reported the following items at September 30, 2012 (last year’s— 2011—amounts also given as needed):
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 320,000
|
Accounts receivable, net:
|
|
|
Cash
|
260,000
|
September 30, 2012
|
$ 270,000
|
|
Inventories
|
|
September 30, 2011
|
170,000
|
|
September 30, 2012
|
290,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,150,000
|
|
September 30, 2011
|
200,000
|
Short–term investments
|
140,000
|
|
Net sales revenue
|
2,920,000
|
Other current assets
|
120,000
|
|
Long–term assets
|
420,000
|
Other current liabilities
|
180,000
|
|
Long–term liabilities
|
130,000
|
`
|
|
Requirement
1. Compute Southside’s (a) acid test ratio, (b) days’ sales in average receivables for 2012, and (c) accounts receivable turnover ratio. Evaluate each ratio value as strong or weak. Southside sells on terms of net 30.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying and correcting internal control weakness Suppose The Right Rig Dealership is opening a regional office in Omaha. Cary Regal, the office manager, is designing the internal control system. Regal proposes the following procedures for credit checks on new customers, sales on account, cash collections, and write offs of uncollectible receivables:
The credit department runs a credit check on all customers who apply for credit. When an account proves uncollectible, the credit department authorizes the write off of the account receivable. Cash receipts come into the credit department, which separates the cash received from the customer remittance slips. The credit department lists all cash receipts by customer name and amount of cash received. The cash goes to the treasurer for deposit in the bank. The remittance slips go to the accounting department for posting to customer accounts. The controller compares the daily deposit slip to the total amount posted to customer accounts. Both amounts must agree.
Requirement
1. Recall the components of internal control you learned. Identify the internal control weakness in this situation, and propose a way to correct it.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet At December 31, 2012, the Accounts receivable balance of GPS Technology is $190,000. The Allowance for doubtful accounts has an $8,600 credit balance. GPS Technology prepares the following aging schedule for its accounts receivable:
|
|
|
Age of Accounts
|
|
|
1–30
|
31–60 61–90
|
Over 90
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
Days
|
Days Days
|
Days
|
|
$190,000
|
$80,000
|
$60,000
|
$40,000
|
$10,000
|
|
Estimated percent uncollectible
|
0.4 %
|
5.0 %
|
6.0 %
|
50.0 %
|
Requirements
1.Z
2. Show how GPS Technology will report its net Accounts receivable on its December 31, 2012 balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet At September 30, 2012, Windy Mountain Flagpoles had Accounts receivable of $34,000 and Allowance for uncollectible accounts had a credit balance of $3,000. During October 2012, Windy Mountain Flagpoles recorded the following:
- Sales of $189,000 ($165,000 on account; $24,000 for cash).
- Collections on account, $133,000.
- Uncollectible account expense, estimated as 1% of credit sales.
- Write offs of uncollectible receivables, $2,800.
Requirements
1. Journalize sales, collections, uncollectible account expense using the allowance method (percent of sales method), and write offs of uncollectibles during October 2012.
2. Prepare T accounts to show the ending balances in Accounts receivable and Allowance for uncollectible accounts. Compute net accounts receivable at October 31. How much does Windy Mountain expect to collect?
3. Show how Windy Mountain Flagpoles will report net Accounts receivable on its October 31, 2012 balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing periodic inventory amounts A Tomorrows Electronic Center began October with 90 units of inventory that cost $70 each. During October, the store made the following purchases:
|
Oct
|
3
|
20
|
@
|
$75
|
|
|
12
|
40
|
@
|
$78
|
|
|
18
|
60
|
@
|
$84
|
Tomorrows uses the periodic inventory system, and the physical count at October 31 indicates that 110 units of inventory are on hand.
Requirements
1. Determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold amounts for the October financial statements using the average cost, FIFO, and LIFO methods.
2. Sales revenue for October totaled $26,000. Compute Tomorrows’ gross profit for October using each method.
3. Which method will result in the lowest income taxes for Tomorrows? Why? Which method will result in the highest net income for Tomorrows? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing periodic inventory amounts Easy Use Electronic Center began October with 80 units of inventory that cost $57 each. During October, the store made the following purchases:
|
Oct
|
3
|
10
|
@
|
$65
|
|
|
12
|
30
|
@
|
$70
|
|
|
18
|
70
|
@
|
$72
|
Easy Use uses the periodic inventory system, and the physical count at October 31 indicates that 115 units of inventory are on hand.
Requirements
1. Determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold amounts for the October financial statements using the average cost, FIFO, and LIFO methods.
2. Sales revenue for October totaled $22,000. Compute Easy Use’s gross profit for October using each method.
3. Which method will result in the lowest income taxes for Easy Use? Why? Which method will result in the highest net income for Easy Use? Why?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cash account of Baylor Associates at February 28, 2014, follows.
|
Cash
|
|
Feb
|
1
|
Bal 3,995
|
Feb
|
3
|
400
|
|
|
6
|
800
|
|
12
|
3,100
|
|
|
15
|
1,800
|
|
19
|
1,100
|
|
|
23
|
1,100
|
|
25
|
500
|
|
|
28
|
2,400
|
|
27
|
900
|
|
Feb 28
|
|
Bal 4,095
|
|
|
|
Baylor Associates received the following bank statement on February 28, 2014:
Additional data:
Baylor deposits all cash receipts in the bank and makes all payments by check.
Requirements
1. Prepare the bank reconciliation of Baylor Associates at February 28, 2014.
2. Journalize the entries based on the bank reconciliation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Misler Company established a $300 petty cash fund on January 12, 2012. Karen Misler (KM) is the fund custodian. At the end of the month, the petty cash fund contains the following:
a. Cash: $163
b. Petty cash tickets, as follows:
|
No.
|
Amount
|
Issued to
|
Signed by
|
Account Debited
|
|
44
|
$14
|
B. Jarvis
|
B. Jarvis and KM
|
Office supplies
|
|
45
|
39
|
S. Bell
|
S. Bell
|
Delivery expense
|
|
47
|
43
|
R. Tate
|
R. Tate and KM
|
—
|
|
48
|
33
|
L. Blair
|
L. Blair and KM
|
Travel expense
|
Requirements
1. Identify three internal control weaknesses revealed in the given data.
2. Journalize the following transactions:
a. Establishment of the petty cash fund on January 12, 2012.
b. Replenishment of the fund on January 31, 2012. Assume petty cash ticket no. 47 was issued for the purchase of office supplies.
3. What is the balance in the Petty cash account immediately before replenishment? Immediately after replenishment?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Ethics for AICPA members is governed by
a. generally accepted accounting principles.
b. the AICPA Code of Professional Conduct.
c. the CPA’s ethical guide.
d. Standards of Ethical Conduct for Management Accountants.
2. Payment by check is an important internal control over cash payments because
a. the check must be signed by an authorized official.
b. before signing the check, the official reviews the invoice supporting the payment.
c. Both a and b
d. None of the above
3. Sahara Company’s Cash account shows an ending balance of $650. The bank statement shows a $29 service charge and an NSF check for $150. A $240 deposit is in transit, and outstanding checks total $420. What is Sahara’s adjusted cash balance?
a. $291
b. $829
c. $471
d. $470
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following petty cash transactions of Grayson Gaming Supplies occurred in March:
|
Mar 1
|
Established a petty cash fund with a $150 balance.
|
|
31
|
The petty cash fund has $14 in cash and $148 in petty cash
|
|
|
tickets that were issued to pay for Office supplies ($58) and
|
|
|
Entertainment expense ($90). Replenished the fund with $136
|
|
|
of cash and recorded the expenses.
|
Requirement
1. Prepare journal entries without explanations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding Sarbanes Oxley and identifying internal control strengths and weaknesses The following situations suggest a strength or a weakness in internal control.
a. Top managers delegate all internal control procedures to the accounting department.
b. The accounting department orders merchandise and approves invoices for payment.
c. Cash received over the counter is controlled by the sales clerk, who rings up the sale and places the cash in the register. The sales clerk matches the total recorded by the register to each day’s cash sales.
d. The officer who signs checks need not examine the payment packet because he is confident the amounts are correct.
Requirements
1. Define internal control.
2. The system of internal control must be tested by external auditors. What law or rule requires this testing?
3. Identify each item as either a strength or a weakness in internal control and give the reason for your answer
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
E commerce control procedures The following situations suggest a strength or a weakness in e commerce internal controls.
a. Net products sells merchandise over the Internet. Customers input their credit card information for payment.
b. Net products maintains employee information on the company intranet. Employees can retrieve information about annual leave, payroll deposits, and benefits from any computer using their login information.
c. Net products maintains trend information about its customers, products, and pricing on the company’s intranet.
d. Tax identification numbers for all vendors are maintained in Netproducts’ database.
Requirement
1. Identify the control that will best protect the company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using a bank reconciliation as a control device Lynn Cavender owns Cavender Boot City. She fears that a trusted employee has been stealing from the company. This employee receives cash from customers and also prepares the monthly bank reconciliation. To check up on the employee, Cavender prepares her own bank reconciliation, as shown. This reconciliation is both complete and accurate, based on the available data.
|
CAVENDER’S BOOT CITY
Bank Reconciliation
January 31, 2012
|
|
Bank
|
|
Books
|
|
|
Balance, January 31
|
$1,500
|
Balance, January 31
|
$1,050
|
|
Add: Deposit in transit
|
410
|
Add: Bank collection
|
790
|
|
Interest revenue
|
15
|
|
Less: Outstanding checks
|
1,080
|
Less: Service charge
|
20
|
|
Adjusted bank balance
|
$830
|
Adjusted book balance
|
$1,835
|
Requirements
1. How is the preparation of a bank reconciliation considered to be a control device?
2. Which side of the reconciliation shows the true cash balance?
3. What is Cavender’s true cash balance?
4. Does it appear that the employee has stolen from the company?
5. If so, how much? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a bank reconciliation D. J. Harrison’s checkbook lists the following:
|
|
Check
|
|
|
|
|
|
Date
|
No.
|
Item
|
Check
|
Deposit
|
Balance
|
|
Nov 1
|
|
|
|
|
$540
|
|
4
|
622
|
Java Joe’s
|
$15
|
|
525
|
|
9
|
|
Dividends received
|
|
$130
|
655
|
|
13
|
623
|
Skip’s Market
|
55
|
|
600
|
|
14
|
624
|
Fill N Go
|
75
|
|
525
|
|
18
|
625
|
Cash
|
60
|
|
465
|
|
26
|
626
|
Fernwood Golf Course
|
85
|
|
380
|
|
28
|
627
|
Upstate Realty, Co.
|
265
|
|
115
|
|
30
|
|
Paycheck
|
|
1,210
|
1,325
|
Harrison’s November bank statement shows the following:
|
Balance
|
$540
|
|
|
Deposits
|
130
|
|
|
Debit Checks: No.
|
Amount
|
|
|
622
|
15
|
|
|
623
|
55
|
|
|
624
|
115 *
|
|
|
625
|
60
|
|
|
Other charges:
|
|
|
|
Printed checks
|
$35
|
(245)
|
|
Service charge
|
20
|
55
|
|
Balance
|
|
$370
|
Requirements
1. Prepare Harrison’s bank reconciliation at November 30, 2012.
2. How much cash does Harrison actually have on November 30, 2012?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a bank reconciliation Brett Knight operates four bowling alleys. He just received the October 31 bank statement from City National Bank, and the statement shows an ending balance of $905. Listed on the statement are an EFT rent collection of $410, a service charge of $10, NSF checks totaling $70, and a $30 charge for printed checks. In reviewing his cash records, Knight identified outstanding checks totaling $450 and a deposit in transit of $1,775. During October, he recorded a $310 check by debiting Salary expense and crediting Cash for $31. His Cash account shows an October 31 balance of $2,209.
Requirements
1. Prepare the bank reconciliation at October 31.
2. Journalize any transactions required from the bank reconciliation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Correcting internal control weakness Each of the following situations has an internal control weakness.
|
a.
|
Upside – Down Applications develops custom programs to customer’s specifications.
|
|
|
Recently, development of a new program stopped while the programmers redesigned
|
|
|
Upside – Down’s accounting system. Upside – Down’s accountants could have performed this task.
|
|
b.
|
Norma Rottler has been your trusted employee for 24 years. She performs all cash
|
|
|
handling and accounting duties. Ms. Rottler just purchased a new Lexus and a new
|
|
|
home in an expensive suburb. As owner of the company, you wonder how she can
|
|
|
afford these luxuries because you pay her only $30,000 a year and she has no source of outside income.
|
|
c.
|
Izzie Hardwoods, a private company, falsified sales and inventory figures in order to get an
|
|
|
important loan. The loan went through, but Izzie later went bankrupt and could not repay the bank.
|
|
d.
|
The office supply company where Pet Grooming Goods purchases sales
|
|
|
receipts recently notified Pet Grooming Goods that its documents were not pre numbered.
|
|
|
Howard Mustro, the owner, replied that he never uses receipt numbers.
|
|
e.
|
Discount stores such as Cusco make most of their sales for cash, with the remainder in credit card sales. To reduce expenses, one store manager ceases pur chasing fidelity bonds on the cashiers.
|
|
f.
|
Cornelius’ Corndogs keeps all cash receipts in an empty bread box for a week, because he
|
|
|
likes to go to the bank on Tuesdays when Joann is working.
|
Requirements
1. Identify the missing internal control characteristics in each situation.
2. Identify the possible problem caused by each control weakness.
3. Propose a solution to each internal control problem.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a bank reconciliation and journal entries The December cash records of Dunlap Insurance follow:
|
Cash Receipts
|
Cash Payments
|
|
Date
|
Cash Debit
|
Check No.
|
Cash Credit
|
|
Dec
|
4
|
$4,170
|
1416
|
$860
|
|
|
9
|
510
|
1417
|
130
|
|
|
14
|
530
|
1418
|
650
|
|
|
17
|
2,180
|
1419
|
1,490
|
|
|
31
|
1,850
|
1420
|
1,440
|
|
|
|
|
1421
|
900
|
|
|
|
|
1422
|
630
|
Dunlap’s Cash account shows a balance of $16,740 at December 31. On December 31, Dunlap Insurance received the following bank statement:
|
Bank Statement for December
|
|
Beginning balance
|
|
$13,600
|
|
Deposits and other Credits:
|
|
|
|
1 Dec
|
EFT
|
300
|
|
|
5
|
|
4,170
|
|
|
10
|
|
510
|
|
|
15
|
|
530
|
|
|
18
|
|
2,180
|
|
|
22
|
BC
|
1,400
|
9,090
|
|
Checks and other Debits:
|
|
|
|
|
8 Dec
|
NSF
|
$1,000
|
|
|
11 (check no. 1416)
|
|
860
|
|
|
19
|
EFT
|
700
|
|
|
22 (check no. 1417)
|
|
130
|
|
|
29 (check no. 1418)
|
|
650
|
|
|
31 (check no. 1419)
|
|
1,940
|
|
|
31
|
SC
|
60
|
(5,340)
|
|
Ending balance
|
|
|
$17,350
|
Additional data for the bank reconciliation follows:
- The EFT credit was a receipt of rent. The EFT debit was an insurance payment.
- The NSF check was received from a customer.
- The $1,400 bank collection was for a note receivable.
- The correct amount of check 1419 for rent expense is $1,940. Dunlap’s controller mistakenly recorded the check for $1,490.
Requirements
1. Prepare the bank reconciliation of Dunlap Insurance at December 31, 2012.
2. Journalize any required entries from the bank reconciliation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying internal control weakness in cash receipts Two Brother Productions makes all sales on credit. Cash receipts arrive by mail. Justin Broaddus in the mailroom opens envelopes and separates the checks from the accompanying remittance advices. Broaddus forwards the checks to another employee, who makes the daily bank deposit but has no access to the accounting records. Broaddus sends the remittance advices, which show cash received, to the accounting department for entry in the accounts. Broaddus’s only other duty is to grant sales allowances to customers. (A sales allowance decreases the amount receivable.) When Broaddus receives a customer check for $375 less a $60 allowance, he records the sales allowance and forwards the document to the accounting department.
Requirements
1. Identify the internal control weakness in this situation.
2. Who should record sales allowances?
3. What is the amount that should be shown in the ledger for cash receipts?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions On June 1, Bash Salad Dressings creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $450. During June, Al Franklin, the fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
|
Petty Cash
|
|
|
|
Ticket Number
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
Office supplies
|
$15
|
|
102
|
Cab fare for executive
|
10
|
|
103
|
Delivery of package across town
|
20
|
|
104
|
Dinner money for city manager
|
35
|
|
|
to entertain the mayor
|
|
|
105
|
Inventory
|
65
|
On June 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $310. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Travel expense, Delivery expense, Entertainment expense, and Inventory.
Requirements
1. Explain the characteristics and the internal control features of an imprest fund.
2. On June 30, how much cash should the petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
3. Journalize all required entries to create the fund and replenish it. Include explanations.
4. Make the July 1 entry to increase the fund balance to $475. Include an explanation, and briefly describe what the custodian does.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions Suppose that on June 1, Rockin’ Gyrations, a disc jockey service, creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $500. During June, Michael Martell, fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
|
Petty Cash
|
|
|
|
Ticket Number
|
Item
|
Amount
|
|
1
|
Postage for package received
|
$20
|
|
2
|
Decorations and refreshments
|
25
|
|
|
for office party
|
|
|
3
|
Two boxes of stationery
|
35
|
|
4
|
Printer cartridges
|
15
|
|
5
|
Dinner money for sales manager
|
75
|
|
|
entertaining a customer
|
|
On June 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $325. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Entertainment expense, and Postage expense.
Requirements
1. On June 30, how much cash should this petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
2. Journalize all required entries to (a) create the fund and (b) replenish it. Include explanations.
3. Make the entry on July 1 to increase the fund balance to $550. Include an explanation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Making an ethical judgment North Bank has a loan receivable from Westminster Dance Company. Westminster is late making payments to the bank, and Kevin McHale, a North Bank vice president, is helping Westminster restructure its debt. McHale learns that Westminster is depending on landing a $1,500,000 contract from Envy Theater, another North Bank client. McHale also serves as Envy’s loan officer at the bank. In this capacity, he is aware that Envy is considering declaring bankruptcy. McHale has been a great help to Westminster, and Westminster’s owner is counting on him to carry the company through this difficult restructuring. To help the bank collect on this large loan, McHale has a strong motivation to help Westminster survive.
Requirements
1. Identify the ethical issue that McHale is facing. Specify the two main alternatives available to McHale.
2. Identify the possible consequences of McHale identifying Envy’s financial position to Westminster Dance Company.
3. Identify the correct ethical decision McHale must make based on the two alternatives identified in Requirement 2.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Internal control, components, procedures, and laws
|
TERMS:
|
DEFINITIONS:
|
|
1.
|
Collusion
|
A. The “tone at the top” of the business.
|
|
2.
|
Controller
|
B. Control procedure that divides responsibility between two or more people.
|
|
3.
|
Lock box system
|
C. Outside accountants completely independent of the business who monitor the controls to ensure
|
|
4.
|
Firewalls
|
that the financial statements are presented fairly in accordance with GAAP.
|
|
5.
|
Encryption
|
D. After using this process, messages cannot be read by those who do not know the code.
|
|
6.
|
Control environment
|
E. Two or more people working together to circumvent internal controls and defraud a company.
|
|
7.
|
Documents
|
F. The chief accounting officer of a company.
|
|
8.
|
Internal control
|
G. The organizational plan and all related measures that promote operational efficiency.
|
|
9.
|
External auditors
|
H. Prevents nonmembers from accessing the network but allows members to access the network.
|
|
10.
|
Timing difference
|
I. Without a sufficient one of these, information cannot properly be gathered and summarized.
|
|
11.
|
Information system
|
J. These should be pre numbered to prevent theft and inefficiency.
|
|
12.
|
Separation of duties
|
K. A system in which customers pay their accounts directly to a business’s bank.
|
|
|
L. Differences that arise between the balance on the bank statement and the balance on the books because of a time lag in recording transactions.
|
Requirement
1. Match the terms with their definitions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Correcting internal control weakness Each of the following situations has an internal control weakness:
a. Soft Wizzard Applications sells accounting software. Recently, development of a new program stopped while the programmers redesigned Soft Wizzard’s accounting sys tem. Soft Wizzard’s accountants could have performed this task.
b. Rita Johnson has been your trusted employee for 30 years. She performs all credit functions, including credit authorization. Ms. Johnson just purchased a new Lexus and a new home in an expensive suburb. As owner of the company, you wonder how she can afford these luxuries because you pay her only $27,500 a year and she has no source of outside income.
c. Wong Hardwoods, a private company, falsified sales discount and net profit figures in order to get an important loan. The loan went through, but Wong later went bankrupt and could not repay the bank.
d. The office supply company where Retail Display Goods purchases customer invoices recently notified Retail Display Goods that its documents were not pre numbered. Adrian Monet, the owner, replied that he never uses the customer invoice numbers.
e. Discount stores such as Wallman make most of their sales for cash, with the remainder in credit card sales. To reduce expenses and increase efficiency, the store manager stops rotating clerks among different job stations.
f. Kayleigh’s Keys keeps all cash receipts in an old hat box for a month because Kayleighlikes to “see” her earnings.
Requirements
1. Identify the missing internal control characteristic in each situation.
2. Identify the possible problem caused by each control weakness.
3. Propose a solution to each internal control problem.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identifying internal control weakness in cash receipts Rocking Chair Productions makes all sales on credit. Cash receipts arrive by mail. Larry Padgitt in the mailroom opens envelopes and separates the checks from the accompanying remittance advices. Padgitt forwards the checks to another employee, who makes the daily bank deposit, but has no access to the accounting records. Padgitt sends the remittance advices, which show cash received, to the accounting department for entry in the accounts. Padgitt’s only other duty is to grant sales allowances to customers. (A sales allowance decreases the amount receivable.) When Padgitt receives a customer check for $300 less a $40 sales allowance, he records the sales allowance and forwards the document to the accounting department.
Requirements
1. Identify the internal control weakness in this situation.
2. Who should record sales allowances?
3. What is the amount that should be shown in the ledger for cash receipts?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transaction Analysis—Service Company) Christine Ewing is a licensed CPA. During the first month of operations of her business (a sole proprietorship), the following events and transactions occurred.
|
2 Apr
|
2 Invested $30,000 cash and equipment valued at $14,000 in the business.
|
|
2
|
2 Hired a secretary receptionist at a salary of $290 per week payable monthly.
|
|
3
|
3 Purchased supplies on account $700. (debit an asset account.)
|
|
7
|
7 Paid officerent of $600 for the month.
|
|
11
|
Completed a tax assignment and billed client $1,100 for services rendered. (Use Service Revenue account.)
|
|
12
|
Received $3,200 advance on a management consulting engagement.
|
|
17
|
Received cash of $2,300 for services completed for Ferengi Co.
|
|
21
|
Paid insurance expense $110.
|
|
30
|
Paid secretary receptionist $1,160 for the month.
|
|
30
|
A count of supplies indicated that $120 of supplies had been used.
|
|
30
|
Purchased a new computer for $5,100 with personal funds. (The computer will be used exclusively for business purposes.)
|
Instructions
Journalize the transactions in the general journal. (Omit explanations.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Corrected Trial Balance) The trial balance of Geronimo Company, shown on the next page, does not balance. Your review of the ledger reveals the following: (a) Each account had a normal balance. (b) The debit footings in Prepaid Insurance, Accounts Payable, and Property Tax Expense were each understated $1,000. (c) A transposition error was made in Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue; the correct balances for Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue are $2,750 and $6,690, respectively. (d) A debit posting to Advertising Expense of $300 was omitted. (e) A $3,200 cash drawing by the owner was debited to Owner’s Capital and credited to Cash.
|
GERONIMO COMPANY TRIAL BALANCE APRIL 30, 2012
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$2,100
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
2,570
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
700
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
$8,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,500
|
|
Property Taxes Payable
|
560
|
|
|
Owner’s Capital
|
|
11,200
|
|
Service Revenue
|
6,960
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
4,200
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
1,100
|
|
|
Property Tax Expense
|
|
800
|
| |
$18,190
|
$24,500
|
Instructions
Prepare a correct trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Corrected Trial Balance) 4 The following trial balance of Scarlatti Corporation does not balance.
|
SCARLATTI CORPORATION TRIAL BALANCE APRIL 30, 2012
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$5,912
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
5,240
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,967
|
|
|
Equipment
|
6,100
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$7,044
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
8,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
2,000
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
5,200
|
|
Office Expense
|
4,320
|
|
| |
$24,539
|
$22,244
|
An examination of the ledger shows these errors.
1. Cash received from a customer on account was recorded (both debit and credit) as $1,580 instead of $1,850.
2. The purchase on account of a computer costing $1,900 was recorded as a debit to Office Expense and a credit to Accounts Payable.
3. Services were performed on account for a client, $2,250, for which Accounts Receivable was debited $2,250 and Service Revenue was credited $225.
4. A payment of $95 for telephone charges was entered as a debit to Office Expenses and a debit to Cash.
5. The Service Revenue account was totaled at $5,200 instead of $5,280.
Instructions
From this information, prepare a corrected trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Corrected Trial Balance) 4 The following trial balance of Oakley Co. does not balance.
|
OAKLEY CO. TRIAL BALANCE JUNE 30, 2012
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
|
$2,870
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$3,231
|
|
|
Supplies
|
800
|
|
|
Equipment
|
3,800
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
2,666
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
1,200
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
6,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
3,000
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
2,380
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
3,400
|
|
|
Office Expense
|
940
|
|
| |
$13,371
|
$16,916
|
Each of the listed accounts should have a normal balance per the general ledger. An examination of the ledger and journal reveals the following errors.
1. Cash received from a customer on account was debited for $370, and Accounts Receivable was credited for the same amount. The actual collection was for $730.
2. The purchase of a computer printer on account for $500 was recorded as a debit to Supplies for $500 and a credit to Accounts Payable for $500.
3. Services were performed on account for a client for $890. Accounts Receivable was debited for $890 and Service Revenue was credited for $89.
4. A payment of $65 for telephone charges was recorded as a debit to Office Expense for $65 and a debit to Cash for $65.
5. When the Unearned Service Revenue account was reviewed, it was found that $225 of the balance was earned prior to June 30.
6. A debit posting to Salaries and Wages Expense of $670 was omitted.
7. A payment on account for $206 was credited to Cash for $206 and credited to Accounts Payable for $260.
8. A dividend of $575 was debited to Salaries and Wages Expense for $575 and credited to Cash for $575.
Instructions
Prepare a correct trial balance. (Note: It may be necessary to add one or more accounts to the trial balance.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries) The ledger of Chopin Rental Agency on March 31 of the current year includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries have been prepared.
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
$3,600
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
Equipment
|
25,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$8,400
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
20,000
|
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
6,300
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
60,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
–0–
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
14,000
|
|
An analysis of the accounts shows the following.
1. The equipment depreciates $250 per month.
2. One third of the unearned rent was earned during the quarter.
3. Interest of $500 is accrued on the notes payable.
4. Supplies on hand total $650.
5. Insurance expires at the rate of $300 per month.
Instructions
Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly. Additional accounts are: Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Interest Payable, and Supplies Expense. (Omit explanations.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries) Selected accounts of Leno Company are shown below.
|
Supplies
|
|
Beg. Bal.
|
800
|
10 ⁄ 31
|
470
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
|
10 ⁄15
|
800
|
|
|
10 ⁄31
|
600
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
10 ⁄31
|
400
|
10 ⁄20
|
650
|
|
Service Revenue
|
| |
10 ⁄17
|
2,100
|
|
|
10 ⁄31
|
1,650
|
|
10 ⁄31
|
400
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
10 ⁄ 17
|
2,100
|
|
|
10 ⁄31
|
1,650
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
| |
10 ⁄31
|
600
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
10 ⁄31
|
470
|
|
Instructions
From an analysis of the T accounts, reconstruct (a) the October transaction entries, and (b) the adjusting journal entries that were made on October 31, 2012. Prepare explanations for each journal entry.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries) Uhura Resort opened for business on June 1 with eight air conditioned units. Its trial balance on August 31 is as follows.
|
UHURA RESORT TRIAL BALANCE AUGUST 31, 2012
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$19,600
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
4,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,600
|
|
|
Land
|
20,000
|
|
|
Buildings
|
120,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
16,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$4,500
|
|
Unearned Rent Revenue
|
|
4,600
|
|
Mortgage Payable
|
|
50,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
100,000
|
|
Dividends
|
5,000
|
|
|
Rent Revenue
|
|
86,200
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
44,800
|
|
|
Utilities Expenses
|
9,200
|
|
|
Maintenance and Repairs Expense
|
3,600
|
|
| |
$245,300
|
$245,300
|
Other data:
1. The balance in prepaid insurance is a one year premium paid on June 1, 2012.
2. An inventory count on August 31 shows $650 of supplies on hand.
3. Annual depreciation rates are buildings (4%) and equipment (10%). Salvage value is estimated to be 10% of cost.
4. Unearned Rent Revenue of $3,800 was earned prior to August 31.
5. Salaries of $375 were unpaid at August 31.
6. Rentals of $800 were due from tenants at August 31.
7. The mortgage interest rate is 8% per year.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the adjusting entries on August 31 for the 3 month period June 1–August 31. (Omit explanations.)
(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance on August 31.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Prepare Financial Statements) The adjusted trial balance of Cavamanlis Co. as of December 31, 2012, contains the following.
|
CAVAMANLIS CO. ADJUSTED TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
|
Account Titles
|
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$18,972
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
6,920
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent Expense
|
2,280
|
|
|
Equipment
|
18,050
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$4,895
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
5,700
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,472
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
20,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
11,310
|
|
Dividends
|
3,000
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
12,590
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
6,840
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
2,760
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
145
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
83
|
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
83
|
| |
$59,050
|
$59,050
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement.
(b) Prepare a statement of retained earnings.
(c) Prepare a classified balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Prepare Financial Statements) Flynn Design Agency was founded by Kevin Flynn in January 2006. Presented below is the adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2012.
|
FLYNN DESIGN AGENCY ADJUSTED TRIAL BALANCE DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
| |
Dr.
|
Cr.
|
|
Cash
|
$10,000
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
21,500
|
|
|
Supplies
|
5,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
2,500
|
|
|
Equipment
|
60,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$35,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
8,000
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
150
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
5,000
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
|
5,600
|
|
Salaries and Wages Payable
|
|
1,300
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
10,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
3,500
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
58,500
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
12,300
|
|
|
Insurance Expense
|
850
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
7,000
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
3,400
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
4,000
|
|
| |
$127,050
|
$127,050
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement and a statement of retained earnings for the year ending December 31, 2012, and an unclassified balance sheet at December 31.
(b) Answer the following questions.
(1) If the note has been outstanding 6 months, what is the annual interest rate on that note?
(2) If the company paid $17,500 in salaries and wages in 2012, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable on December 31, 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Closing Entries) Presented below is information related to Russell Corporation for the month of January 2012.
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$202,000
|
Salaries and wages expense
|
$ 61,000
|
|
Freight out
|
7,000
|
Sales discounts
|
8,000
|
|
Insurance expense
|
12,000
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
13,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
20,000
|
Sales revenue
|
340,000
|
Instructions
Prepare the necessary closing entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Transactions of a Corporation, Including Investment and Dividend) Snyder Miniature Golf and Driving Range Inc. was opened on March 1 by Mickey Snyder. The following selected events and transactions occurred during March.
|
Mar. 1
|
Invested $60,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.
|
|
3
|
Purchased Michelle Wie’s Golf Land for $38,000 cash. The price consists of land $10,000; building $22,000; and equipment $6,000. (Make one compound entry.)
|
|
5
|
Advertised the opening of the driving range and miniature golf course, paying advertising expenses of $1,600.
|
|
6
|
Paid cash $1,480 for a one year insurance policy.
|
|
10
|
Purchased golf equipment for $2,500 from Young Company, payable in 30 days.
|
|
18
|
Received golf fees of $1,200 in cash.
|
|
25
|
Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend.
|
|
30
|
Paid wages of $900.
|
|
30
|
Paid Young Company in full.
|
|
31
|
Received $750 of fees in cash.
|
Snyder uses the following accounts: Cash, Prepaid Insurance, Land, Buildings, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, Advertising Expense, and Salaries and Wages Expense.
Instructions
Journalize the March transactions. (Provide explanations for the journal entries.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting and Reversing Entries) When the accounts of Constantine Inc. are examined, the adjusting data listed below are uncovered on December 31, the end of an annual fiscal period.
1. The prepaid insurance account shows a debit of $6,000, representing the cost of a 2 year fire insurance policy dated August 1 of the current year.
2. On November 1, Rent Revenue was credited for $2,400, representing revenue from a subrental for a 3 month period beginning on that date.
3. Purchase of advertising supplies for $800 during the year was recorded in the Advertising Expense account. On December 31, advertising supplies of $290 are on hand.
4. Interest of $770 has accrued on notes payable.
Instructions
Prepare the following in general journal form.
(a) The adjusting entry for each item.
(b) The reversing entry for each item where appropriate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Worksheet) Presented below are selected accounts for Acevedo Company as reported in the worksheet at the end of May 2012.
| |
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Accounts
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
15,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Inventory
|
80,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
470,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales Returns and Allowances
|
10,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sales Discounts
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
250,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
Complete the worksheet by extending amounts reported in the adjusted trial balance to the appropriate columns in the worksheet. Do not total individual columns.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Worksheet and Balance Sheet Presentation) The adjusted trial balance for Madrasah Co. is presented in the following worksheet for the month ended April 30, 2012.
|
MADRASAH CO. Worksheet (PARTIAL) For The Month Ended April 30, 2012
|
| |
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
Income Statement
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
Accounts
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$18,972
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
6,920
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
2,280
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
18,050
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
$4,895
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
5,700
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,472
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner”s Capital
|
|
34,960
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner”s Drawings
|
6,650
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
12,590
|
|
|
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
6,840
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
2,760
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
145
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
83
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
83
|
|
|
|
|
Instructions
Complete the worksheet and prepare a classified balance sheet.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Partial Worksheet Preparation) Letterman Co. prepares monthly financial statements from a worksheet. Selected portions of the January worksheet showed the following data.
| |
Trial Balance
|
|
Adjustments
|
Adjusted Trial Balance
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Account Title
|
|
|
|
(a)1,500
|
|
|
|
Supplies
|
3,256
|
|
|
(b)257
|
|
7,967
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment
|
|
7,710
|
|
(c)50
|
|
150
|
|
Interest Payable
|
|
100
|
|
|
|
|
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
|
(a)1,500
|
|
1,500
|
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
(b)257
|
|
257
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
|
|
(c)50
|
|
50
|
|
During February no events occurred that affected these accounts, but at the end of February the following information was available.
|
(a) Supplies on hand
|
$515
|
|
(b) Monthly depreciation
|
$257
|
|
(c) Accrued interest
|
$ 50
|
Instructions
Reproduce the data that would appear in the February worksheet, and indicate the amounts that would be shown in the February income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for inventory using the perpetual system—FIFO Consider the December transactions for Shine King Cleaning that were presented (Cost data has been removed from the sale transactions.)
|
Dec 2
|
Purchased 600 units of inventory, $3,600, from Sparkle, Co., on terms, 3/10, n/20.
|
|
5
|
Purchased 400 units of inventory from Borax on terms 4/5, n/30. The total invoice was for $3,200, which included a $200 freight charge.
|
|
7
|
Returned 100 units of inventory to Sparkle from the December 2 purchase.
|
|
9
|
Paid Borax.
|
|
11
|
Sold 350 units of goods to Happy Maids for $4,900 on terms 5/10, n/30.
|
|
12
|
Paid Sparkle.
|
|
15
|
Received 30 units with a retail price of $420 of goods back from customer Happy Maids.
|
|
21
|
Received payment from Happy Maids, settling the amount due in full.
|
|
28
|
Sold 200 units of goods to Bridget, Inc., for cash of $3,000.
|
|
29
|
Paid cash for Utilities of $350.
|
|
30
|
Paid cash for Sales commission expense of $225.
|
|
31
|
Recorded these adjusting entries: Physical count of Inventory on December 31 revealed 330 units of goods on hand. Depreciation, $170. Accrued salary expense of $700. Prepared all other adjustments necessary for December.
|
Requirements
1. Prepare perpetual inventory records for December for Shine King using the FIFO method. (Note: You must figure cost on the 11th, 28th, and 31st.)
2. Journalize and post the December transactions using the perpetual inventory record created in Requirement 1. Key all items by date. Compute each account balance, and denote the balance as Bal.
3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Denote each adjusting amount as Adj. After posting all adjusting entries, prove the equality of debits and credits in the ledger.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume you are opening a Bed Bath & Beyond store. To finance the business, you need a $500,000 loan, and your banker requires a set of forecasted financial statements. Assume you are preparing the statements and must make some decisions about how to do the accounting for the business.
Requirements
1. Which type of inventory system will you use? Perpetual or Periodic? Give your reason.
2. Show how to compute net purchases (see the vocabulary list in Chapter 5 for the definition of “net purchases”) and net sales. How will you treat the cost of freight in?
3. How often do you plan to do a physical count of inventory on hand? What will the physical count accomplish?
4. Inventory costs are rising. Which inventory costing method would have the effect of a. maximizing net income?
b. paying the least amount of income tax?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose you manage Campbell Appliance. The store’s summarized financial statements for 2012, the most recent year, follow:
|
CAMPBELL APPLIANCE
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2012
|
|
Sales
|
$800,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
660,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$140,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
100,000
|
|
Net income
|
$ 40,000
|
|
CAMPBELL APPLIANCE
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2012
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities and Equity
|
|
Cash
|
$ 30,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 35,000
|
|
Inventories
|
75,000
|
Note payable
|
280,000
|
|
Land and buildings, net
|
360,000
|
Total liabilities
|
$315,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$465,000
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
150,000
|
Assume that you need to double net income. To accomplish your goal, it will be very difficult to raise the prices you charge because there is a Best Buy nearby. Also, you have little control over your cost of goods sold because the appliance manufacturers set the price you must pay.
Requirement
1. Identify several strategies for doubling net income. (Challenge)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ever since he was a kid, Carl Montague wanted to be a pro football player. When that didn’t work out, he found another way to channel his natural competitive spirit: He bought a small auto parts store in Kentucky that was deep in red ink (negative earnings). At the end of the year, he created “ghost” inventory by recording fake inventory purchases. He offset these transactions by “adjustments” to Cost of goods sold, thereby boosting profit and strengthening the balance sheet. Fortified with great financials, he got bank loans that allowed him to build up a regional chain of stores, buy a local sports franchise, and take on the lifestyle of a celebrity. When the economy in the region tanked, he could no longer cover his losses with new debt or equity infusions, and the whole empire fell like a house of cards.
Requirements
1. Name several parties that could have been hurt by the actions of Carl Montague.
2. What kind of adjustment to Cost of goods sold (debit or credit) would have the effect of boosting earnings?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing periodic inventory amounts Consider the data of the following companies:
|
|
|
Beginning
|
Net
|
Ending
|
Cost of
|
Gross
|
|
Company
|
Net sales
|
inventory
|
purchases
|
inventory
|
goods sold
|
profit
|
|
Red
|
$101,000
|
$22,000
|
$65,000
|
$17,000
|
(a)
|
$31,000
|
|
Yellow
|
(b)
|
25,000
|
95,000
|
(c)
|
96,000
|
40,000
|
|
Orange
|
93,000
|
(d)
|
52,000
|
22,000
|
62,000
|
(e)
|
|
Green
|
86,000
|
12,000
|
(f)
|
5,000
|
(g)
|
49,000
|
Requirements
1. Supply the missing amounts in the preceeding table.
2. Prepare the income statement for Red Company, which uses the periodic inventory system. Include a complete heading and show the full computation of cost of goods sold. Red’s operating expenses for the year were $11,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Conceptual Framework—General) Wayne Cooper has some questions regarding the theoretical framework in which GAAP is set. He knows that the FASB and other predecessor organizations have attempted to develop a conceptual framework for accounting theory formulation. Yet, Wayne’s supervisors have indicated that these theoretical frameworks have little value in the practical sense (i.e., in the real world). Wayne did notice that accounting rules seem to be established after the fact rather than before. He thought this indicated a lack of theory structure but never really questioned the process at school because he was too busy doing the homework.
Wayne feels that some of his anxiety about accounting theory and accounting semantics could be alleviated by identifying the basic concepts and definitions accepted by the profession and considering them in light of his current work. By doing this, he hopes to develop an appropriate connection between theory and practice.
Instructions
(a) Help Wayne recognize the purpose of and benefit of a conceptual framework.
(b) Identify any Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts issued by FASB that may be helpful to Wayne in developing his theoretical background.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Conceptual Framework—General) The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) has developed a conceptual framework for financial accounting and reporting. The FASB has issued eight Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts. These statements are intended to set forth the objective and fundamentals that will be the basis for developing financial accounting and reporting standards. The objective identifies the goals and purposes of financial reporting. The fundamentals are the underlying concepts of financial accounting that guide the selection of transactions, events, and circumstances to be accounted for;
their recognition and measurement; and the means of summarizing and communicating them to interested parties.
The purpose of the statement on qualitative characteristics is to examine the characteristics that make accounting information useful. These characteristics or qualities of information are the ingredients that make information useful and the qualities to be sought when accounting choices are made.
Instructions
(a) Identify and discuss the benefits that can be expected to be derived from the FASB’s conceptual framework study.
(b) What is the most important quality for accounting information as identified in the conceptual framework? Explain why it is the most important.
(c) Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 8 describes a number of key characteristics or qualities for accounting information. Briefly discuss the importance of any three of these qualities for financial reporting purposes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Qualitative Characteristics) Accounting information provides useful information about business transactions and events. Those who provide and use financial reports must often select and evaluate accounting alternatives. The FASB statement on qualitative characteristics of accounting information examines the characteristics of accounting information that make it useful for decision making. It also points out that various limitations inherent in the measurement and reporting process may necessitate trade offs or sacrifices among the characteristics of useful information.
Instructions
(a) Describe briefly the following characteristics of useful accounting information.
(1) Relevance
(2) Faithful representation
(3) Understandability
(4) Comparability
(5) Consistency
(b) For each of the following pairs of information characteristics, give an example of a situation in which one of the characteristics may be sacrificed in return for a gain in the other.
(1) Relevance and faithful representation.
(2) Relevance and consistency.
(3) Comparability and consistency.
(4) Relevance and understandability.
(c) What criterion should be used to evaluate trade offs between information characteristics?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Revenue and Expense Recognition Principles) After the presentation of your report on the examination of the financial statements to the board of directors of Piper Publishing Company, one of the new directors expresses surprise that the income statement assumes that an equal proportion of the revenue is earned with the publication of every issue of the company’s magazine. She feels that the “crucial event” in the process of earning revenue in the magazine business is the cash sale of the subscription. She says that she does not understand why most of the revenue cannot be “recognized” in the period of the sale.
Instructions
(a) List the various accepted times for recognizing revenue in the accounts and explain when the methods are appropriate.
(b) Discuss the propriety of timing the recognition of revenue in Piper Publishing Company’s accounts with:
(1) The cash sale of the magazine subscription.
(2) The publication of the magazine every month.
(3) Both events, by recognizing a portion of the revenue with the cash sale of the magazine subscription and a portion of the revenue with the publication of the magazine every month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Revenue and Expense Recognition Principles) On June 5, 2011, Argot Corporation signed a contract with Lopez Associates under which Lopez agreed (1) to construct an office building on land owned by Argot, (2) to accept responsibility for procuring financing for the project and finding tenants, and (3) to manage the property for 35 years. The annual net income from the project, after debt service, was to be divided equally between Argot Corporation and Lopez Associates. Lopez was to accept its share of future net income as full payment for its services in construction, obtaining finances and tenants, and management of the project.
By May 31, 2012, the project was nearly completed, and tenants had signed leases to occupy 90% of the available space at annual rentals totaling $4,000,000. It is estimated that, after operating expenses and debt service, the annual net income will amount to $1,500,000.
The management of Lopez Associates believed that (a) the economic benefit derived from the contract with Argot should be reflected on its financial statements for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, and directed that revenue be accrued in an amount equal to the commercial value of the services Lopez had rendered during the year, (b) this amount should be carried in contracts receivable, and (c) all related expenditures should be charged against the revenue.
Instructions
(a) Explain the main difference between the economic concept of business income as reflected by Lopez’s management and the measurement of income under generally accepted accounting principles.
(b) Discuss the factors to be considered in determining when revenue should be recognized for the purpose of accounting measurement of periodic income.
(c) Is the belief of Lopez’s management in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles for the measurement of revenue and expense for the year ended May 31, 2012? Support your opinion by discussing the application to this case of the factors to be considered for asset measurement and revenue and expense recognition.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Expense Recognition Principle) An accountant must be familiar with the concepts involved in determining earnings of a business entity. The amount of earnings reported for a business entity is dependent on the proper recognition, in general, of revenue and expense for a given time period. In some situations, costs are recognized as expenses at the time of product sale. In other situations, guidelines have been developed for recognizing costs as expenses or losses by other criteria.
Instructions
(a) Explain the rationale for recognizing costs as expenses at the time of product sale.
(b) What is the rationale underlying the appropriateness of treating costs as expenses of a period instead of assigning the costs to an asset? Explain.
(c) In what general circumstances would it be appropriate to treat a cost as an asset instead of as an expense? Explain.
(d) Some expenses are assigned to specific accounting periods on the basis of systematic and rational allocation of asset cost. Explain the underlying rationale for recognizing expenses on the basis of systematic and rational allocation of asset cost.
(e) Identify the conditions under which it would be appropriate to treat a cost as a loss.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Expense Recognition Principle) Accountants try to prepare income statements that are as accurate as possible. A basic requirement in preparing accurate income statements is to record costs and revenues properly. Proper recognition of costs and revenues requires that costs resulting from typical business operations be recognized in the period in which they expired.
Instructions
(a) List three criteria that can be used to determine whether such costs should appear as charges in the income statement for the current period.
(b) As generally presented in financial statements, the following items or procedures have been criticized as improperly recognizing costs. Briefly discuss each item from the viewpoint of matching costs with revenues and suggest corrective or alternative means of presenting the financial information.
(1) Receiving and handling costs.
(2) Cash discounts on purchases.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Expense Recognition Principle) Daniel Barenboim sells and erects shell houses, that is, frame structures that are completely finished on the outside but are unfinished on the inside except for flooring, partition studding, and ceiling joists. Shell houses are sold chiefly to customers who are handy with tools and who have time to do the interior wiring, plumbing, wall completion and finishing, and other work necessary to make the shell houses livable dwellings.
Barenboim buys shell houses from a manufacturer in unassembled packages consisting of all lumber, roofing, doors, windows, and similar materials necessary to complete a shell house. Upon commencing operations in a new area, Barenboim buys or leases land as a site for its local warehouse, field office, and display houses. Sample display houses are erected at a total cost of $30,000 to $44,000 including the cost of the unassembled packages. The chief element of cost of the display houses is the unassembled packages, inasmuch as erection is a short, low cost operation. Old sample models are torn down or altered into new models every 3 to 7 years. Sample display houses have little salvage value because dismantling and moving costs amount to nearly as much as the cost of an unassembled package.
Instructions
(a) A choice must be made between (1) expensing the costs of sample display houses in the periods in which the expenditure is made and (2) spreading the costs over more than one period. Discuss the advantages of each method.
(b) Would it be preferable to amortize the cost of display houses on the basis of (1) the passage of time or (2) the number of shell houses sold? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Qualitative Characteristics) Recently, your Uncle Carlos Beltran, who knows that you always have your eye out for a profitable investment, has discussed the possibility of your purchasing some corporate bonds. He suggests that you may wish to get in on the “ground floor” of this deal. The bonds being issued by Neville Corp. are 10 year debentures which promise a 40% rate of return. Neville manufactures novelty/party items.
You have told Neville that, unless you can take a look at its financial statements, you would not feel comfortable about such an investment. Believing that this is the chance of a lifetime, Uncle Carlos has procured a copy of Neville’s most recent, unaudited financial statements which are a year old. These statements were prepared by Mrs. Andy Neville. You peruse these statements, and they are quite impressive. The balance sheet showed a debt to equity ratio of 0.10 and, for the year shown, the company reported net income of $2,424,240.
The financial statements are not shown in comparison with amounts from other years. In addition, no significant note disclosures about inventory valuation, depreciation methods, loan agreements, etc. are available.
Instructions
Write a letter to Uncle Carlos explaining why it would be unwise to base an investment decision on the financial statements that he has provided to you. Be sure to explain why these financial statements are neither relevant nor representationally faithful.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost Constraint) The AICPA Special Committee on Financial Reporting proposed the following constraints related to financial reporting.
1. Business reporting should exclude information outside of management’s expertise or for which management is not the best source, such as information about competitors.
2. Management should not be required to report information that would significantly harm the company’s competitive position.
3. Management should not be required to provide forecasted financial statements. Rather, management should provide information that helps users forecast for themselves the company’s financial future.
4. Other than for financial statements, management need report only the information it knows. That is, management should be under no obligation to gather information it does not have, or does not need, to manage the business.
5. Companies should present certain elements of business reporting only if users and management agree they should be reported—a concept of flexible reporting.
6. Companies should not have to report forward looking information unless there are effective deterrents to unwarranted litigation that discourages companies from doing so.
Instructions
For each item, briefly discuss how the proposed constraint addresses concerns about the costs and benefits of financial reporting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FINANCIAL REPORTING
The Procter & Gamble Company (P&G)
Instructions
Refer to P&G’s financial statements and the accompanying notes to answer the following questions.
(a) Using the notes to the consolidated financial statements, determine P&G’s revenue recognition policies. Discuss the impact of trade promotions on P&G’s financial statements.
(b) Give two examples of where historical cost information is reported in P&G’s financial statements and related notes. Give two examples of the use of fair value information reported in either the financial statements or related notes.
(c) How can we determine that the accounting principles used by P&G are prepared on a basis consistent with those of last year?
(d) What is P&G’s accounting policy related to advertising? What accounting principle does P&G follow regarding accounting for advertising? Where are advertising expenses reported in the financial statements? Comparative Analysis Case
The Coca Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc.
Instructions
Go to the book’s companion website, and use information found there to answer the following questions related to The Coca Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc.
(a) What are the primary lines of business of these two companies as shown in their notes to the financial statements?
(b) Which company has the dominant position in beverage sales?
(c) How are inventories for these two companies valued? What cost allocation method is used to report inventory? How does their accounting for inventories affect comparability between the two companies?
(d) Which company changed its accounting policies during 2009 which affected the consistency of the financial results from the previous year? What were these changes?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statement Analysis Case
Wal Mart
Wal Mart Stores provided the following disclosure in a recent annual report.
New accounting pronouncement (partial) . . . the Securities and Exchange Commission issued Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 101—“Revenue Recognition in Financial Statements”
(SAB 101). This SAB deals with various revenue recognition issues, several of which are common within the retail industry. As a result of the issuance of this SAB . . . the Company is currently evaluating the effects of the SAB on its method of recognizing revenues related to layaway sales and will make any accounting method changes necessary during the first quarter of [next year].
In response to SAB 101, Wal Mart changed its revenue recognition policy for layaway transactions, in which Wal Mart sets aside merchandise for customers who make partial payment. Before the change, Wal Mart recognized all revenue on the sale at the time of the layaway. After the change, Wal Mart does not recognize revenue until customers satisfy all payment obligations and take possession of the merchandise.
Instructions
(a) Discuss the expected effect on income (1) in the year that Wal Mart makes the changes in its revenue recognition policy, and (2) in the years following the change.
(b) Evaluate the extent to which Wal Mart’s previous revenue policy was consistent with the revenue recognition principle.
(c) If all retailers had used a revenue recognition policy similar to Wal Mart’s before the change, are there any concerns with respect to the qualitative characteristic of comparability? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting, Analysis, and Principles
William Murray achieved one of his life long dreams by opening his own business, The Caddie Shack Driving Range, on May 1, 2012. He invested $20,000 of his own savings in the business. He paid $6,000 cash to have a small building constructed to house the operations and spent $800 on golf clubs, golf balls, and yardage signs. Murray leased 4 acres of land at a cost of $1,000 per month. (He paid the first month’s rent in cash.) During the first month, advertising costs totaled $750, of which $150 was unpaid at the end of the month. Murray paid his three nephews $400 for retrieving golf balls. He deposited in the company’s bank account all revenues from customers ($4,700). On May 15, Murray withdrew $800 in cash for personal use. On May 31, the company received a utility bill for $100 but did not immediately pay it. On May 31, the balance in the company bank account was $15,100.
Murray is feeling pretty good about results for the first month, but his estimate of profitability ranges from a loss of $4,900 to a profit of $1,650.
Accounting
Prepare a balance sheet at May 31, 2012. Murray appropriately records any depreciation expense on a quarterly basis. How could Murray have determined that the business operated at a profit of $1,650? How could Murray conclude that the business operated at a loss of $4,900?
Analysis
Assume Murray has asked you to become a partner in his business. Under the partnership agreement, after paying him $10,000, you would share equally in all future profits. Which of the two income measures above would be more useful in deciding whether to become a partner? Explain.
Principles
What is income according to GAAP? What concepts do the differences in the three income measures for The Caddie Shack Driving Range illustrate?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BRIDGE TO THE PROFESSION
Professional Research
Your aunt recently received the annual report for a company in which she has invested. The report notes that the statements have been prepared in accordance with “generally accepted accounting principles.” She has also heard that certain terms have special meanings in accounting relative to everyday use. She would like you to explain the meaning of terms she has come across related to accounting.
Instructions
(a) How is “materiality” defined in the conceptual framework?
(b) The concepts statements provide several examples in which specific quantitative materiality guidelines are provided to firms. Identity at least two of these examples. Do you think the materiality guidelines should be quantified? Why or why not?
(c) The concepts statements discuss the concept of “articulation” between financial statement elements. Briefly summarize the meaning of this term and how it relates to an entity’s financial statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. As discussed in Chapter 1, the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) develops accounting standards for many international companies. The IASB also has developed a conceptual framework to help guide the setting of accounting standards. While the FASB and IASB have issued converged concepts statements on the objective and qualitative characteristics, other parts of their frameworks differ. Following is an excerpt of the IASB Framework. Elements of Financial Statements
Asset: A resource controlled by the enterprise as a result of past events and from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the enterprise. Liability: A present obligation of the enterprise arising from past events, the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow from the enterprise of resources embodying economic benefits.
Equity: The residual interest in the assets of the enterprise after deducting all its liabilities.
Income: Increases in economic benefi ts during the accounting period in the form of inflows or enhancements of assets or decreases of liabilities that result in increases in equity, other than those relating to contributions from equity participants.
Expenses: Decreases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of outflows or depletions of assets or incurrences of liabilities that result in decreases in equity, other than those relating to distributions to equity participants.
Instructions
Briefly discuss the similarities and differences between the FASB and IASB conceptual frameworks as revealed in the above excerpt.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
International Financial Reporting Problem:
Marks and Spencer plc
Instructions
Refer to M&S’s financial statements and the accompanying notes to answer the following questions.
(a) Using the notes to the consolidated financial statements, determine M&S’s revenue recognition policies.
(b) Give two examples of where historical cost information is reported in M&S’s financial statements and related notes. Give two examples of the use of fair value information reported in either the financial statements or related notes.
(c) How can we determine that the accounting principles used by M&S are prepared on a basis consistent with those of last year?
(d) What is M&S’s accounting policy related to refunds and loyalty schemes? Why does M&S include the accounting for refunds and loyalty schemes in its critical accounting estimates and judgments?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What are adjusting entries and why are they necessary?
2. What are closing entries and why are they necessary?
3. Jay Hawk, maintenance supervisor for Boston Insurance Co., has purchased a riding lawnmower and accessories to be used in maintaining the grounds around corporate headquarters. He has sent the following information to the accounting department.
|
Cost of mower and accessories
|
$4,000
|
Date purchased
|
7/1/2012
|
|
Estimated useful life
|
5 yrs
|
Monthly salary of groundskeeper
|
$1,100
|
|
Salvage value
|
$0
|
Estimated annual fuel cost
|
$150
|
Compute the amount of depreciation expense (related to the mower and accessories) that should be reported on Boston’s December 31, 2012, income statement. Assume straight line depreciation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Midwest Enterprises made the following entry on December 31, 2012.
|
Interest Expense
|
10,000
|
|
|
Interest Payable (To record interest expense due on loan from Anaheim National Bank.)
|
|
10,000
|
What entry would Anaheim National Bank make regarding its outstanding loan to Midwest Enterprises? Explain why this must be the case.
* 15. Distinguish between cash basis accounting and accrualbasis accounting. Why is accrual basis accounting acceptable for most business enterprises and the cash basis unacceptable in the preparation of an income statement and a balance sheet?
* 16. When salaries and wages expense for the year is computed, why are beginning accrued salaries and wages subtracted from, and ending accrued salaries and wages added to, salaries and wages paid during the year?
* 17. List two types of transactions that would receive different accounting treatment using (a) strict cash basis accounting, and (b) a modified cash basis.
* 18. What are reversing entries, and why are they used?
* 19. “A worksheet is a permanent accounting record, and its use is required in the accounting cycle.” Do you agree? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions for Mehta Company for the month of May are presented below. Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions. (You may omit explanations.)
|
1 May
|
B.D. Mehta invests $4,000 cash in exchange for common stock in a small welding corporation.
|
|
3
|
Buys equipment on account for $1,100.
|
|
13
|
Pays $400 to landlord for May rent.
|
|
21
|
Bills Noble Corp. $500 for welding work done.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Agazzi Repair Shop had the following transactions during the first month of business as a proprietorship.
Journalize the transactions. (Omit explanations.)
|
Aug. 2
|
Invested $12,000 cash and $2,500 of equipment in the business.
|
|
7
|
Purchased supplies on account for $500. (Debit asset account.)
|
|
12
|
Performed services for clients, for which $1,300 was collected in cash and $670 was billed to the clients.
|
|
15
|
Paid August rent $600.
|
|
19
|
Counted supplies and determined that only $270 of the supplies purchased on August 7 are still on hand.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Economic Consequences) Presented below are comments made in the financial press.
Instructions
Prepare responses to the requirements in each item.
(a) Rep. John Dingell, the ranking Democrat on the House Commerce Committee, threw his support behind the FASB’s controversial derivatives accounting standard and encouraged the FASB to adopt the rule promptly. Indicate why a member of Congress might feel obligated to comment on this proposed FASB standard.
(b) In a strongly worded letter to Senator Lauch Faircloth (R NC) and House Banking Committee Chairman Jim Leach (R IA), the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) cautioned against government intervention in the accounting standard setting process, warning that it had the potential of jeopardizing U.S. capital markets. Explain how government intervention could possibly affect capital markets adversely.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(GAAP and Economic Consequences) The following letter was sent to the SEC and the FASB by leaders of the business community.
Dear Sirs:
The FASB has been struggling with accounting for derivatives and hedging for many years. The FASB has now developed, over the last few weeks, a new approach that it proposes to adopt as a final standard. We understand that the Board intends to adopt this new approach as a final standard without exposing it for public comment and debate, despite the evident complexity of the new approach, the speed with which it has been developed and the significant changes to the exposure draft since it was released more than one year ago. Instead, the Board plans to allow only a brief review by selected parties, limited to issues of operationality and clarity, and would exclude questions as to the merits of the proposed approach.
As the FASB itself has said throughout this process, its mission does not permit it to consider matters that go beyond accounting and reporting considerations. Accordingly, the FASB may not have adequately considered the wide range of concerns that have been expressed about the derivatives and hedging proposal, including concerns related to the potential impact on the capital markets, the weakening of companies’ ability to manage risk, and the adverse control implications of implementing costly and complex new rules imposed at the same time as other major initiatives, including the Year 2000 issues and a single European currency. We believe that these crucial issues must be considered, if not by the FASB, then by the Securities and Exchange Commission, other regulatory agencies, or Congress. We believe it is essential that the FASB solicit all comments in order to identify and address all material issues that may exist before issuing a final standard. We understand the desire to bring this process to a prompt conclusion, but the underlying issues are so important to this nation’s businesses, the customers they serve and the economy as a whole that expediency cannot be the dominant consideration.
As a result, we urge the FASB to expose its new proposal for public comment, following the established due process procedures that are essential to acceptance of its standards, and providing sufficient time to affected parties to understand and assess the new approach.
We also urge the SEC to study the comments received in order to assess the impact that these proposed rules may have on the capital markets, on companies’ risk management practices, and on management and financial controls. These vital public policy matters deserve consideration as part of the Commission’s oversight responsibilities.
We believe that these steps are essential if the FASB is to produce the best possible accounting standard while minimizing adverse economic effects and maintaining the competitiveness of U.S. businesses in the international marketplace.
Very truly yours,
This letter was signed by the chairs of 22 of the largest U.S. companies.)
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
(a) Explain the “due process” procedures followed by the FASB in developing a financial reporting standard.
(b) What is meant by the term “economic consequences” in accounting standard setting?
(c) What economic consequences arguments are used in this letter?
(d) What do you believe is the main point of the letter?
(e) Why do you believe a copy of this letter was sent by the business community to influential members of the U.S. Congress?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
FINANCIAL REPORTING
Financial Reporting Problem
Beverly Crusher, a new staff accountant, is confused because of the complexities involving accounting standard setting. Specifically, she is confused by the number of bodies issuing financial reporting standards of one kind or another and the level of authoritative support that can be attached to these reporting standards. Beverly decides that she must review the environment in which accounting standards are set, if she is to increase her understanding of the accounting profession.
Beverly recalls that during her accounting education there was a chapter or two regarding the environment of financial accounting and the development of GAAP. However, she remembers that her instructor placed little emphasis on these chapters.
Instructions
(a) Help Beverly by identifying key organizations involved in accounting rule making.
(b) Beverly asks for guidance regarding authoritative support. Please assist her by explaining what is meant by authoritative support.
(c) Give Beverly a historical overview of how rule making has evolved so that she will not feel that she is the only one to be confused.
(d) What authority for compliance with GAAP has existed throughout the history of rulemaking?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BRIDGE TO THE PROFESSION
Professional Research
As a newly enrolled accounting major, you are anxious to better understand accounting institutions and sources of accounting literature. As a first step, you decide to explore the FASB Conceptual Framework.
Instructions
When you have accessed the documents, you can use the search tool in your Internet browser to respond to the following items. (Provide paragraph citations.)
(a) What is the objective of financial reporting?
(b) What other means are there of communicating information, besides financial statements?
(c) Indicate some of the users and the information they are most directly concerned with in economic decision making.
Professional Simulation
In this simulation, you are asked questions regarding accounting principles. Prepare responses to all parts.
(a) Explain the meaning of the term “accounting principles” as used in the audit report.
(Do not discuss in this part the significance of “generally accepted.”)
(b) President Bloom wants to know how you determine whether or not an accounting principle is generally accepted. Discuss the sources of evidence for determining whether an accounting principle has substantial authoritative support. Do not merely list the titles of publications.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following comments were made at an Annual Conference of the Financial Executives Institute (FEI). There is an irreversible movement towards the harmonization of financial reporting throughout the world. The international capital markets require an end to:
1. The confusion caused by international companies announcing different results depending on the set of accounting standards applied.
2. Companies in some countries obtaining unfair commercial advantages from the use of particular national accounting standards.
3. The complications in negotiating commercial arrangements for international joint ventures caused by different accounting requirements.
4. The inefficiency of international companies having to understand and use a myriad of different accounting standards depending on the countries in which they operate and the countries in which they raise capital and debt. Executive talent is wasted on keeping up to date with numerous sets of accounting standards and the never ending changes to them.
5. The inefficiency of investment managers, bankers, and financial analysts as they seek to compare financial reporting drawn up in accordance with different sets of accounting standards.
Instructions
(a) What is the International Accounting Standards Board?
(b) What stakeholders might benefit from the use of International Accounting Standards?
(c) What do you believe are some of the major obstacles to convergence?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Revenues, gains, and investments by owners are all increases in net assets. What are the distinctions among them?
2. What are the four basic assumptions that underlie the financial accounting structure?
3. The life of a business is divided into specific time periods, usually a year, to measure results of operations for each such time period and to portray financial conditions at the end of each period.
(a) This practice is based on the accounting assumption that the life of the business consists of a series of time periods and that it is possible to measure accurately the results of operations for each period. Comment on the validity and necessity of this assumption.
(b) What has been the effect of this practice on accounting? What is its relation to the accrual system? What influence has it had on accounting entries and methodology?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What is the difference between realized and realizable? Give an example of where the concept of realizable is used to recognize revenue.
2. What is the justification for the following deviations from recognizing revenue at the time of sale?
(a) Installment sales method of recognizing revenue.
(b) Recognition of revenue at completion of production for certain agricultural products.
(c) The percentage of completion basis in long term construction contracts.
3. Mogilny Company paid $135,000 for a machine. The Accumulated Depreciation account has a balance of $46,500 at the present time. The company could sell the machine today for $150,000. The company president believes that the company has a “right to this gain.” What does the president mean by this statement? Do you agree?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Three expense recognition methods (associating cause and effect, systematic and rational allocation, and immediate recognition) were discussed in the text under the expense recognition principle. Indicate the basic nature of each of these expense recognition methods and give two examples of each.
2. Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 5 identifies four characteristics that an item must have before it is recognized in the financial statements. What are these four characteristics?
3. Briefly describe the types of information concerning financial position, income, and cash flows that might be provided: (a) within the main body of the financial statements,
(b) in the notes to the financial statements, or (c) as supplementary information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. In January 2013, Janeway Inc. doubled the amount of its outstanding stock by selling on the market an additional 10,000 shares to finance an expansion of the business. You propose that this information be shown by a footnote on the balance sheet as of December 31, 2012. The president objects, claiming that this sale took place after December 31, 2012, and, therefore, should not be shown. Explain your position.
2. Describe the major constraint inherent in the presentation of accounting information.
3. What are some of the costs of providing accounting information? What are some of the benefits of accounting information? Describe the cost benefit factors that should be considered when new accounting standards are being proposed.
3. The treasurer of Landowska Co. has heard that conservatism is a doctrine that is followed in accounting and, therefore, proposes that several policies be followed that are conservative in nature. State your opinion with respect to each of the policies listed on the next page.
(a) The company gives a 2 year warranty to its customers on all products sold. The estimated warranty costs incurred from this year’s sales should be entered as an expense this year instead of an expense in the period in the future when the warranty is made good.
(b) When sales are made on account, there is always uncertainty about whether the accounts are collectible. Therefore, the treasurer recommends recording the sale when the cash is received from the customers.
(c) A personal liability lawsuit is pending against the company. The treasurer believes there is an even chance that the company will lose the suit and have to pay damages of $200,000 to $300,000. The treasurer recommends that a loss be recorded and a liability created in the amount of $300,000.
(d) The inventory should be valued at “cost or market, whichever is lower” because the losses from price declines should be recognized in the accounts in the period in which the price decline takes place.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the qualitative characteristics below with the following statements.
1. Relevance
2. Faithful representation
3. Predictive value
4. Confirmatory value
5. Comparability
6. Completeness
7. Neutrality
8. Timeliness
(a) Quality of information that permits users to identify similarities in and differences between two sets of economic phenomena.
(b) Having information available to users before it loses its capacity to influence decisions.
(c) Information about an economic phenomenon that has value as an input to the processes used by capital providers to form their own expectations about the future.
(d) Information that is capable of making a difference in the decisions of users in their capacity as capital providers.
(e) Absence of bias intended to attain a predetermined result or to induce a particular behavior.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match the qualitative characteristics below with the following statements.
1. Timeliness
2. Completeness
3. Free from error
4. Understandability
5. Faithful representation
6. Relevance
7. Neutrality
8. Confirmatory value
(a) Quality of information that assures users that information represents the economic phenomena that it purports to represent.
(b) Information about an economic phenomenon that corrects past or present expectations based on previous evaluations.
(c) The extent to which information is accurate in representing the economic substance of a transaction.
(d) Includes all the information that is necessary for a faithful representation of the economic phenomena that it purports to represent.
(e) Quality of information that allows users to comprehend its meaning.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explain how you would decide whether to record each of the following expenditures as an asset or an expense. Assume all items are material.
(a) Legal fees paid in connection with the purchase of land are $1,500.
(b) Eduardo, Inc. paves the driveway leading to the office building at a cost of $21,000.
(c) A meat market purchases a meat grinding machine at a cost of $3,500.
(d) On June 30, Monroe and Meno, medical doctors, pay 6 months’ office rent to cover the month of July and the next 5 months.
(e) Smith’s Hardware Company pays $9,000 in wages to laborers for construction on a building to be used in the business.
(f) Alvarez’s Florists pays wages of $2,100 for the month an employee who serves as driver of their delivery truck.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Usefulness, Objective of Financial Reporting) Indicate whether the following statements about the conceptual framework are true or false. If false, provide a brief explanation supporting your position.
(a) Accounting rule making that relies on a body of concepts will result in useful and consistent pronouncements.
(b) General purpose financial reports are most useful to company insiders in making strategic business decisions.
(c) Accounting standards based on individual conceptual frameworks generally will result in consistent and comparable accounting reports.
(d) Capital providers are the only users who benefit from general purpose financial reporting.
(e) Accounting reports should be developed so that users without knowledge of economics and business can become informed about the financial results of a company.
(f) The objective of financial reporting is the foundation from which the other aspects of the framework logically result.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Usefulness, Objective of Financial Reporting, Qualitative Characteristics) Indicate whether the following statements about the conceptual framework are true or false. If false, provide a brief explanation supporting your position.
(a) The fundamental qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful are relevance and verifiability.
(b) Relevant information only has predictive value, confirmatory value, or both.
(c) Information that is a faithful representation is characterized as having predictive or confirmatory value.
(d) Comparability pertains only to the reporting of information in a similar manner for different companies.
(e) Verifiability is solely an enhancing characteristic for faithful representation.
(f) In preparing financial reports, it is assumed that users of the reports have reasonable knowledge of business and economic activities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Elements of Financial Statements) Ten interrelated elements that are most directly related to measuring the performance and financial status of an enterprise are provided below.
|
Assets
|
Distributions to owners
|
Expenses
|
|
Liabilities
|
Comprehensive income
|
Gains
|
|
Equity
|
Revenues
|
Losses
|
|
Investments by owners
|
|
|
Instructions
Identify the element or elements associated with the 12 items below.
(a) Arises from peripheral or incidental transactions.
(b) Obligation to transfer resources arising from a past transaction.
(c) Increases ownership interest.
(d) Declares and pays cash dividends to owners.
(e) Increases in net assets in a period from nonowner sources.
(f) Items characterized by service potential or future economic benefit.
(g) Equals increase in assets less liabilities during the year, after adding distributions to owners and subtracting investments by owners.
(h) Arises from income statement activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations.
(i) Residual interest in the assets of the enterprise after deducting its liabilities.
(j) Increases assets during a period through sale of product.
(k) Decreases assets during the period by purchasing the company’s own stock.
(l) Includes all changes in equity during the period, except those resulting from investments by owners and distributions to owners.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Assumptions, Principles, and Constraints) Presented below are the assumptions, principles, and constraints used in this chapter.
1. Economic entity assumption
2. Going concern assumption
3. Monetary unit assumption
4. Periodicity assumption
5. Historical cost principle
6. Fair value principle
7. Expense recognition principle
8. Full disclosure principle
9. Cost constraint
10. Industry practices
Instructions
Identify by number the accounting assumption, principle, or constraint that describes each situation on the next page. Do not use a number more than once.
(a) Allocates expenses to revenues in the proper period.
(b) Indicates that fair value changes subsequent to purchase are not recorded in the accounts. (Do not use revenue recognition principle.)
(c) Ensures that all relevant financial information is reported.
(d) Rationale why plant assets are not reported at liquidation value. (Do not use historical cost principle.)
(e) Indicates that personal and business record keeping should be separately maintained.
(f) Separates financial information into time periods for reporting purposes.
(g) Permits the use of fair value valuation in certain industries. (Do not use fair value principle.)
(h) Assumes that the dollar is the “measuring stick” used to report on financial performance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Assumptions, Principles, and Constraints) Presented below are a number of operational guidelines and practices that have developed over time.
Instructions
Select the assumption, principle, or constraint that most appropriately justifies these procedures and practices. (Do not use qualitative characteristics.)
(a) Fair value changes are not recognized in the accounting records.
(b) Financial information is presented so that investors will not be misled.
(c) Intangible assets are capitalized and amortized over periods benefited.
(d) Repair tools are expensed when purchased.
(e) Agricultural companies use fair value for purposes of valuing crops.
(f) Each enterprise is kept as a unit distinct from its owner or owners.
(g) All significant postbalance sheet events are reported.
(h) Revenue is recorded at point of sale.
(i) All important aspects of bond indentures are presented in financial statements.
(j) Rationale for accrual accounting.
(k) The use of consolidated statements is justified.
(l) Reporting must be done at defined time intervals.
(m) An allowance for doubtful accounts is established.
(n) Goodwill is recorded only at time of purchase.
(o) A company charges its sales commission costs to expense.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Full Disclosure Principle) Presented below are a number of facts related to Weller, Inc. Assume that no mention of these facts was made in the financial statements and the related notes.
Instructions
Assume that you are the auditor of Weller, Inc. and that you have been asked to explain the appropriate accounting and related disclosure necessary for each of these items.
(a) The company decided that, for the sake of conciseness, only net income should be reported on the income statement. Details as to revenues, cost of goods sold, and expenses were omitted.
(b) Equipment purchases of $170,000 were partly financed during the year through the issuance of a $110,000 notes payable. The company offset the equipment against the notes payable and reported plant assets at $60,000.
(c) Weller has reported its ending inventory at $2,100,000 in the financial statements. No other information related to inventories is presented in the financial statements and related notes.
(d) The company changed its method of valuing inventories from weighted average to FIFO. No mention of this change was made in the financial statements.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Accounting Principles—Comprehensive) Presented below are a number of business transactions that occurred during the current year for Gonzales, Inc.
Instructions
In each of the situations, discuss the appropriateness of the journal entries in terms of generally accepted accounting principles.
(a) The president of Gonzales, Inc. used his expense account to purchase a new Suburban solely for personal use. The following journal entry was made.
|
Miscellaneous Expense
|
29,000
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
29,000
|
(b) Merchandise inventory that cost $620,000 is reported on the balance sheet at $690,000, the expected selling price less estimated selling costs. The following entry was made to record this increase in value.
|
Inventory
|
70,000
|
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
70,000
|
(c) The company is being sued for $500,000 by a customer who claims damages for personal injury apparently caused by a defective product. Company attorneys feel extremely confident that the company will have no liability for damages resulting from the situation. Nevertheless, the company decides to make the following entry.
|
Loss from Lawsuit
|
500,000
|
|
|
Liability for Lawsuit
|
|
500,000
|
(d) Because the general level of prices increased during the current year, Gonzales, Inc. determined that there was a $16,000 understatement of depreciation expense on its equipment and decided to record it in its accounts. The following entry was made.
|
Depreciation Expense
|
16,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation —Equipment
|
|
16,000
|
(e) Gonzales, Inc. has been concerned about whether intangible assets could generate cash in case of liquidation. As a consequence, goodwill arising from a purchase transaction during the current year and recorded at $800,000 was written off as follows.
|
Retained Earnings
|
800,000
|
|
|
Goodwill
|
|
800,000
|
(f) Because of a “fire sale,” equipment obviously worth $200,000 was acquired at a cost of $155,000. The following entry was made.
|
Equipment
|
200,000
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
155,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
45,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Accounting Principles—Comprehensive) Presented below is information related to Anderson, Inc.
Instructions
Comment on the appropriateness of the accounting procedures followed by Anderson, Inc.
(a) Depreciation expense on the building for the year was $60,000. Because the building was increasing in value during the year, the controller decided to charge the depreciation expense to retained earnings instead of to net income. The following entry is recorded.
|
Retained Earnings
|
60,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings
|
|
60,000
|
(b) Materials were purchased on January 1, 2012, for $120,000 and this amount was entered in the Materials account. On December 31, 2012, the materials would have cost $141,000, so the following entry is made.
|
Inventory
|
21,000
|
|
|
Gain on Inventories
|
|
21,000
|
(c) During the year, the company purchased equipment through the issuance of common stock. The stock had a par value of $135,000 and a fair value of $450,000. The fair value of the equipment was not easily determinable. The company recorded this transaction as follows.
|
Equipment
|
135,000
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
135,000
|
(d) During the year, the company sold certain equipment for $285,000, recognizing a gain of $69,000. Because the controller believed that new equipment would be needed in the near future, she decided to defer the gain and amortize it over the life of any new equipment purchased.
(e) An order for $61,500 has been received from a customer for products on hand. This order was shipped on January 9, 2013. The company made the following entry in 2012.
|
Accounts Receivable
|
61,500
|
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
|
61,500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
WD 40 Company, the manufacturer and marketer of WD 40® lubricant, reported the following information about its long term debt in the notes to a recent financial statement:
Long term debt is comprised of the following:
|
|
August 31,
|
|
|
2005
|
2004
|
|
Notes payable
|
$75,000,000
|
$85,000,000
|
|
Less current portion
|
(10,714,000)
|
(10,000,000)
|
|
Long term debt
|
$64,286,000
|
$75,000,000
|
a. How much of the notes payable was disclosed as a current liability on the August 31,2005, balance sheet?
b. How much did the total current liabilities change between 2004 and 2005 as a result of the current portion of long term debt?
c. If WD 40 did not issue additional notes payable during 2006, what would be the total notes payable on August 31, 2006?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Strategem Business Consultants has three employees—a consultant, a computer programmer, and an administrator. The following payroll information is available for each employee:
|
|
|
Computer
|
|
|
|
Consultant
|
Programmer
|
Administrator
|
|
Regular earnings rate
|
$2,400 per week
|
$40 per hour
|
$22 per hour
|
|
Overtime earnings rate
|
Not applicable
|
11/2 times hourly rate
|
11/2 times hourly rate
|
|
Gross pay prior to current
|
|
|
|
|
pay period
|
$115,200
|
$98,600
|
$43,100
|
|
Number of withholding
|
|
|
|
|
allowances
|
1
|
0
|
3
|
| |
|
|
|
|
For the current pay period, the computer programmer worked 48 hours and the administrator worked 45 hours. The federal income tax withheld for all three employees, who are single, can be determined from the wage bracket withholding table in Exhibit 3 in the chapter. Assume further that the social security tax rate was 6.0% on the first $100,000 of annual earnings, the Medicare tax rate was 1.5%, and one withholding allowance is $63. Determine the gross pay and the net pay for each of the three employees for the current pay period.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the following summary of data for a payroll period, some amounts have been intentionally omitted:
|
At regular rate
|
?
|
|
At overtime rate
|
$ 39,480
|
|
Total earnings
|
?
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
15,250
|
|
Medicare tax
|
3,900
|
|
Income tax withheld
|
46,590
|
|
Medical insurance
|
7,775
|
|
Union dues
|
?
|
|
Total deductions
|
76,000
|
|
Net amount paid
|
184,000
|
|
Accounts debited:
|
|
|
Factory Wages
|
138,900
|
|
Sales Salaries
|
?
|
|
Office Salaries
|
59,200
|
a. Calculate the amounts omitted in lines (1), (3), (8), and (12).
b. Journalize the entry to record the payroll accrual.
c. Journalize the entry to record the payment of the payroll.
d. From the data given in this exercise and your answer to (a), would you conclude that this payroll was paid sometime during the first few weeks of the calendar year? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The payroll register for Hillsdale Company for the week ended December 14 indicated the following:
|
Salaries
|
$690,000
|
|
Social security tax withheld
|
32,700
|
|
Medicare tax withheld
|
10,350
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
138,700
|
In addition, state and federal unemployment taxes were calculated at the rate of 0.8% and 5.2%, respectively, on $26,000 of salaries.
a. Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week of December 14.
b. Journalize the entry to record the payroll tax expense incurred for the week of December 14.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dowling Company had gross wages of $356,000 during the week ended December 6. The amount of wages subject to social security tax was $285,000, while the amount of wages subject to federal and state unemployment taxes was $18,000. Tax rates are as follows:
|
Social security
|
6.0%
|
|
Medicare
|
1.5%
|
|
State unemployment
|
5.4%
|
|
Federal unemployment
|
0.8%
|
The total amount withheld from employee wages for federal taxes was $66,900.
a. Journalize the entry to record the payroll for the week of December 6.
b. Journalize the entry to record the payroll tax expense incurred for the week of December 6.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nashville Sounds is a retail store specializing in the sale of country music. The store employs 3 full time and 10 part time workers. The store’s weekly payroll averages $2,500 for all 13 workers.
Nashville Sounds uses a personal computer to assist in preparing paychecks. Each week, the store’s accountant collects employee time cards and enters the hours worked into the payroll program. The payroll program calculates each employee’s pay and prints a paycheck. The accountant uses a check signing machine to sign the paychecks. Next, the store’s owner authorizes the transfer of funds from the store’s regular bank account to the payroll account.
For the week of May 10, the accountant accidentally recorded 400 hours worked instead of 40 hours for one of the full time employees. Does Nashville Sounds have internal controls in place to catch this error? If so, how will this error be detected?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Several months ago, Rainbow Paint Company experienced a hazardous materials spill at one of its plants. As a result, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) fined the company $560,000. The company is contesting the fine. In addition, an employee is seeking $275,000 damages related to the spill. Lastly, a homeowner has sued the company for $190,000. The homeowner lives 25 miles from the plant, but believes that the incident has reduced the home’s resale value by $190,000.
Rainbow’s legal counsel believes that it is probable that the EPA fine will stand. In addition, counsel indicates that an out of court settlement of $150,000 has recently been reached with the employee. The final papers will be signed next week. Counsel believes that the homeowner’s case is much weaker and will be decided in favor of Rainbow. Other litigation related to the spill is possible, but the damage amounts are uncertain.
a. Journalize the contingent liabilities associated with the hazardous materials spill. Use the account “Damage Awards and Fines” to recognize the expense for the period.
b. Prepare a note disclosure relating to this incident.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Urban Wear Clothes Co. had the following current assets and liabilities for two comparative years:
|
|
Dec. 31, 2008
|
Dec. 31, 2007
|
|
Current assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$140,000
|
$205,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
250,000
|
245,000
|
|
Inventory
|
300,000
|
180,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$690,000
|
$630,000
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
Current portion of long term debt
|
$ 50,000
|
$ 50,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200,000
|
190,000
|
|
Accrued expenses payable
|
140,000
|
135,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$390,000
|
$375,000
|
a. Determine the quick ratio for December 31, 2008 and 2007.
b. Interpret the change in the quick ratio between the two balance sheet dates.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following items were selected from among the transactions completed by Sounds and Sight Stores during the current year:
|
Apr. 7.
|
Borrowed $36,000 from First Financial Company, issuing a 60 day, 8% note for
|
| |
that amount.
|
|
May 10.
|
Purchased equipment by issuing a $125,000, 120 day note to Milford Equipment
|
| |
Co., which discounted the note at the rate of 6%.
|
|
June 6.
|
Paid First Financial Company the interest due on the note of April 7 and
|
| |
renewed the loan by issuing a new 30 day, 9% note for $36,000. (Record both
|
| |
the debit and credit to the notes payable account.)
|
|
July 6.
|
Paid First Financial Company the amount due on the note of June 6.
|
|
Aug. 3.
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Hamilton Co., $15,000, terms, n/30.
|
|
Sept. 2.
|
Issued a 60 day, 6% note for $15,000 to Hamilton Co., on account.
|
|
7
|
Paid Milford Equipment Co. the amount due on the note of May 10.
|
|
Nov. 1.
|
Paid Hamilton Co. the amount owed on the note of September 2.
|
|
15
|
Purchased store equipment from Merchandising Systems Co. for $150,000,
|
| |
paying $55,500 and issuing a series of seven 8% notes for $13,500 each, coming
|
| |
due at 30 day intervals.
|
|
Dec. 15.
|
Paid the amount due Merchandising Systems Co. on the first note in the series
|
| |
issued on November 15.
|
|
21
|
Settled a personal injury lawsuit with a customer for $30,000, to be paid in January.
|
| |
Sounds and Sight Stores accrued the loss in a litigation claims payable account.
|
Instructions
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Journalize the adjusting entry for each of the following accrued expenses at the end of the current year:
a. Product warranty cost, $8,400.
b. Interest on the six remaining notes owed to Merchandising Systems Co.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. What are the primary advantages of having a Codification of generally accepted accounting principles?
2. What are the sources of pressure that change and influence the development of GAAP?
3. Some individuals have indicated that the FASB must be cognizant of the economic consequences of its pronouncements. What is meant by “economic consequences”? What dangers exist if politics play too much of a role in the development of GAAP?
4. If you were given complete authority in the matter, how would you propose that GAAP should be developed and enforced?
5. One writer recently noted that 99.4 percent of all companies prepare statements that are in accordance with GAAP. Why then is there such concern about fraudulent financial reporting?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Karen Sepan, a recent graduate of the local state university, is presently employed by a large manufacturing company. She has been asked by Jose Martinez, controller, to prepare the company’s response to a current Preliminary Views published by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB). Sepan knows that the FASB has a conceptual framework, and she believes that these concept statements could be used to support the company’s response to the Preliminary Views. She has prepared a rough draft of the response citing the objective of financial reporting. Instructions
(a) Identify the objective of financial reporting.
(b) Describe the level of sophistication expected of the users of financial information by the objective of financial reporting.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Some accountants have said that politicization in the development and acceptance of generally accepted accounting principles (i.e., rule making) is taking place. Some use the term “politicization” in a narrow sense to mean the influence by governmental agencies, particularly the Securities and Exchange Commission, on the development of generally accepted accounting principles. Others use it more broadly to mean the compromise that results when the bodies responsible for developing generally accepted accounting principles are pressured by interest groups (SEC, American Accounting Association, businesses through their various organizations, Institute of Management Accountants, financial analysts, bankers, lawyers, and so on).
Instructions
(a) The Committee on Accounting Procedure of the AICPA was established in the mid to late 1930s and functioned until 1959, at which time the Accounting Principles Board came into existence. In 1973, the Financial Accounting Standards Board was formed and the APB went out of existence. Do the reasons these groups were formed, their methods of operation while in existence, and the reasons for the demise of the first two indicate an increasing politicization (as the term is used in the broad sense) of accounting standard setting? Explain your answer by indicating how the CAP, the APB, and the FASB operated or operate. Cite specific developments that tend to support your answer.
(b) What arguments can be raised to support the “politicization” of accounting rule making?
(c) What arguments can be raised against the “politicization” of accounting rule making?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are three models for setting GAAP.
1. The purely political approach, where national legislative action decrees GAAP.
2. The private, professional approach, where GAAP is set and enforced by private professional actions only.
3. The public/private mixed approach, where GAAP is basically set by private sector bodies that behave as though they were public agencies and whose standards to a great extent are enforced through governmental agencies.
Instructions
(a) Which of these three models best describes standard setting in the United States? Comment on your answer.
(b) Why do companies, financial analysts, labor unions, industry trade associations, and others take such an active interest in standard setting?
(c) Cite an example of a group other than the FASB that attempts to establish accounting standards. Speculate as to why another group might wish to set its own standards.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wayne Rogers, an administrator at a major university, recently said, “I’ve got some CDs in my IRA, which I set up to beat the IRS.” As elsewhere, in the world of accounting and finance, it often helps to be fluent in abbreviations and acronyms.
Instructions
Presented below is a list of common accounting acronyms. Identify the term for which each acronym stands, and provide a brief definition of each term.
|
(a) AICPA
|
(e) FAF
|
(i) CPA
|
|
(b) CAP
|
(f) FASAC
|
(j) FASB
|
|
(c) ARB
|
(g) SOP
|
(k) SEC
|
|
(d) APB
|
(h) GAAP
|
(l) IASB
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Accounting Organizations and Documents Issued) Presented below are a number of accounting organizations and types of documents they have issued.
Instructions
Match the appropriate document to the organization involved. Note that more than one document may be issued by the same organization. If no document is provided for an organization, write in “0.”
|
Organization
|
Document
|
|
1. _____ Accounting Standards Executive Committee
|
(a) Opinions
|
|
2. _____ Accounting Principles Board
|
(b) Practice Bulletins
|
|
3. _____ Committee on Accounting Procedure
|
(c) Accounting Research Bulletins
|
|
4. _____ Financial Accounting Standards Board
|
(d) Financial Accounting Standards
|
|
|
(e) Statements of Position
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Accounting Pronouncements) Standard setting bodies have issued a number of authoritative pronouncements. A list is provided on the left, below, with a description of these pronouncements on the right.
Instructions
Match the description to the pronouncements.
|
1. _____ Staff Positions
|
(a) Official pronouncements of the APB.
|
|
2. _____ Interpretations (of the Financial Accounting Standards Board)
|
(b) Sets forth fundamental objectives and concepts that will be used in developing future standards.
|
|
3. _____ Statement of Financial Accounting Standards
|
(c) Primary document of the FASB that establishes GAAP.
|
|
4. _____ EITF Statements
|
(d) Provides additional guidance on implementing or applying FASB Standards or Interpretations.
|
|
5. _____ Opinions
|
(e) Provides guidance on how to account for new and unusual financial transactions that have the potential for creating diversity in financial reporting practices.
|
|
6. _____ Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts
|
(f) Represent extensions or modify cations of existing standards.
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Rule Making Issues) When the FASB issues new pronouncements, the implementation date is usually 12 months from date of issuance, with early implementation encouraged. Karen Weller, controller, discusses with her financial vice president the need for early implementation of a rule that would result in a fairer presentation of the company’s financial condition and earnings. When the financial vice president determines that early implementation of the rule will adversely affect the reported net income for the year, he discourages Weller from implementing the rule until it is required.
Instructions
Answer the following questions.
(a) What, if any, is the ethical issue involved in this case?
(b) Is the financial vice president acting improperly or immorally?
(c) What does Weller have to gain by advocacy of early implementation?
(d) Which stakeholders might be affected by the decision against early implementation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Securities and Exchange Commission) The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) was created in 1934 and consists of five commissioners and a large professional staff. The SEC professional staff is organized into five divisions and several principal offices. The primary objective of the SEC is to support fair securities markets. The SEC also strives to foster enlightened stockholder participation in corporate decisions of publicly traded companies. The SEC has a significant presence in financial markets, the development of accounting practices, and corporation shareholder relations, and has the power to exert influence on entities whose actions lie within the scope of its authority.
Instructions
(a) Explain from where the Securities and Exchange Commission receives its authority.
(b) Describe the official role of the Securities and Exchange Commission in the development of financial accounting theory and practices.
(c) Discuss the interrelationship between the Securities and Exchange Commission and the Financial Accounting Standards Board with respect to the development and establishment of financial accounting theory and practices.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Rule Making Process) In 1973, the responsibility for developing and issuing rules on accounting practices was given to the Financial Accounting Foundation and, in particular, to an arm of the foundation called the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB). The generally accepted accounting principles established by the FASB are enunciated through a publication series entitled Statements of Financial Accounting Standards. These statements are issued periodically, and over 160 have been issued. The statements have a significant influence on the way in which financial statements are prepared by U.S. corporations.
Instructions
(a) Describe the process by which a topic is selected or identified as appropriate for study by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB).
(b) Once a topic is considered appropriate for consideration by the FASB, a series of steps is followed before a Statement of Financial Accounting Standards is issued. Describe the major steps in the process leading to the issuance of a standard.
(c) Identify at least three other organizations that influence the setting of generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Financial Reporting Pressures) Presented below is abbreviated testimony from Troy Normand in the WorldCom case. He was a manager in the corporate reporting department and is one of five individuals who pleaded guilty. He is testifying in hopes of receiving no prison time when he is ultimately sentenced.
Q. Mr. Normand, if you could just describe for the jury how the meeting started and what was said during the meeting?
Q. Mr. Normand, you said that Mr. Sullivan said something about don’t jump out of the plane. What did you understand him to mean when he said that?
Q. During this meeting, did Mr. Sullivan say anything about whether you would be asked to make entries like this in the future?
Q. What did you understand that to be mean, the numbers would be the numbers?
Q. I believe you testified that Mr. Sullivan said something about the line cost numbers not being accurate. Did he ask you to conduct any analysis to determine whether the line cost numbers were accurate?
Q. Did anyone ever ask you to do that?
Q. Did you ever conduct any such analysis?
Q. During this meeting, did Mr. Sullivan ever provide any accounting justification for the entry you were asked to make?
Q. Did anything else happen during the meeting?
Q. How did you feel after this meeting?
Answer the following questions.
(a) What appears to be the ethical issue involved in this case?
(b) Is Troy Normand acting improperly or immorally?
(c) What would you do if you were Troy Normand?
(d) Who are the major stakeholders in this case?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Felix Little owns and operates Big Sky Transport Co. During the past year, Felix incurred the following costs related to his 18 wheel truck:
1. Replaced a headlight that had burned out.
2. Replaced fog and cab light bulbs.
3. Installed a television in the sleeping compartment of the truck.
4. Removed the old CB radio and replaced it with a newer model with a greater range.
5. Replaced a shock absorber that had worn out.
6. Installed a wind deflector on top of the cab to increase fuel mileage.
7. Replaced the old radar detector with a newer model that detects the KA frequencies now used by many of the state patrol radar guns. The detector is wired directly into the cab, so that it is partially hidden. In addition, Felix fastened the detector to the truck with a locking device that prevents its removal.
8. Changed engine oil.
9. Replaced the hydraulic brake system that had begun to fail during his latest trip through the Rocky Mountains.
10. Modified the factory installed turbo charger with a special order kit designed to add 50 more horsepower to the engine performance. Classify each of the costs as a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditure.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Convert each of the following estimates of useful life to a straight line depreciation rate, stated as a percentage, assuming that the residual value of the fixed asset is to be ignored: (a) 2 years, (b) 8 years, (c) 10 years, (d) 20 years, (e) 25 years, (f) 40 years, (g) 50 years.
- A refrigerator used by a meat processor has a cost of $198,500, an estimated residual value of $30,500, and an estimated useful life of 15 years. What is the amount of the annual depreciation computed by the straight line method?
- A diesel powered tractor with a cost of $215,000 and estimated residual value of $27,000 is expected to have a useful operating life of 80,000 hours. During October, the generator was operated 380 hours. Determine the depreciation for the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prior to adjustment at the end of the year, the balance in Trucks is $225,900 and the balance in Accumulated Depreciation—Trucks is $87,010. Details of the subsidiary ledger are as follows:
|
|
|
|
|
Accumulated
|
Miles
|
|
|
|
Estimated
|
Estimated
|
Depreciation
|
Operated
|
|
Truck
|
|
Residual
|
Useful
|
at Beginning
|
During
|
|
No.
|
Cost
|
Value
|
Life
|
of Year
|
Year
|
|
1
|
$75,000
|
$12,000
|
150,000 miles
|
$19,110
|
36,000 miles
|
|
2
|
72,900
|
9,900
|
300,000
|
59,850
|
18,000
|
|
3
|
38,000
|
3,000
|
200,000
|
8,050
|
36,000
|
|
4
|
40,000
|
4,000
|
120,000
|
—
|
16,000
|
a. Determine the depreciation rates per mile and the amount to be credited to the accumulated depreciation section of each of the subsidiary accounts for the miles operated during the current year.
b. Journalize the entry to record depreciation for the year.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Apple Computer, Inc., designs, manufactures, and markets personal computers and related software. Apple also manufactures and distributes music players (Ipod) along with related accessories and services including the online distribution of third party music. The following information was taken from a recent annual report of Apple:
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (in millions):
|
|
|
|
|
Current
|
Preceding
|
|
|
Year
|
Year
|
|
Land and buildings
|
$361
|
$351
|
|
Machinery, equipment, and internal use software
|
494
|
422
|
|
Office furniture and equipment
|
81
|
79
|
|
Other fixed assets related to leases
|
545
|
446
|
|
Accumulated depreciation and amortization
|
664
|
591
|
a. Compute the book value of the fixed assets for the current year and the preceding year and explain the differences, if any.
b. Would you normally expect the book value of fixed assets to increase or decrease during the year?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Verizon Communications is a major telecommunications company in the United States.
Verizon’s balance sheet disclosed the following information regarding fixed assets:
|
Dec. 31, 2005
|
|
Dec. 31, 2004
|
|
(in millions)
|
|
(in millions)
|
|
Plant, property, and equipment
|
$193,610
|
$185,522
|
|
Less accumulated depreciation
|
118,305
|
111,398
|
|
|
$ 75,305
|
$ 74,124
|
Verizon’s revenue for 2005 was $75,112 million. The fixed asset turnover for the telecommunications industry averages 1.10.
a. Determine Verizon’s fixed asset turnover ratio. Round to two decimal places.
b. Interpret Verizon’s fixed asset turnover ratio.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table shows the revenue and average net fixed assets (in millions) for a recent fiscal year for Best Buy and Circuit City Stores, Inc.:
|
|
|
Average Net
|
|
|
Revenue
|
Fixed Assets
|
|
Best Buy
|
$27,433
|
$2,354
|
|
Circuit City Stores, Inc.
|
10,472
|
662
|
a Compute the fixed asset turnover for each company. Round to two decimal places.
b. Which company uses its fixed assets more efficiently? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following payments and receipts are related to land, land improvements, and buildings acquired for use in a wholesale ceramic business. The receipts are identified by an asterisk.
|
a.
|
Fee paid to attorney for title search
|
$3,000
|
|
b.
|
Cost of real estate acquired as a plant site: Land
|
325,000
|
| |
Building
|
75,000
|
|
c.
|
Delinquent real estate taxes on property, assumed by purchaser
|
10,000
|
|
d.
|
Special assessment paid to city for extension of water main to the
|
| |
property
|
12,800
|
|
e.
|
Cost of razing and removing building
|
3,900
|
|
f.
|
Proceeds from sale of salvage materials from old building
|
4,000*
|
|
g.
|
Cost of filling and grading land
|
17,500
|
|
h.
|
Architect’s and engineer’s fees for plans and supervision
|
40,000
|
|
i.
|
Premium on one year insurance policy during construction
|
4,800
|
|
j.
|
Cost of trees and shrubbery planted
|
9,000
|
|
k.
|
Money borrowed to pay building contractor
|
800,000*
|
|
l.
|
Cost of paving parking lot to be used by customers
|
15,000
|
|
m.
|
Cost of repairing windstorm damage during construction
|
2,000
|
|
n.
|
Cost of repairing vandalism damage during construction
|
$2,500
|
|
o.
|
Cost of floodlights installed on parking lot
|
1,100
|
|
p.
|
Interest incurred on building loan during construction
|
42,000
|
|
q.
|
Payment to building contractor for new building
|
915,000
|
|
r.
|
Proceeds from insurance company for windstorm and vandalism damage
|
4,000*
|
|
s.
|
Refund of premium on insurance policy (i) canceled after 11 months
|
400*
|
Instructions
1. Assign each payment and receipt to Land (unlimited life), Land Improvements (limited life), Building, or Other Accounts. Indicate receipts by an asterisk. Identify each item by letter and list the amounts in columnar form, as follows:
|
|
|
Land
|
|
Other
|
|
Item
|
Land
|
Improvements
|
Building
|
Accounts
|
2. Determine the amount debited to Land, Land Improvements, and Building.
3. The costs assigned to the land, which is used as a plant site, will not be depreciated, while the costs assigned to land improvements will be depreciated. Explain this seemingly contradictory application of the concept of depreciation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Air Pack Company purchased packaging equipment on January 3, 2006, for $90,000. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of three years, or 21,000 operating hours, and a residual value of $6,000. The equipment was used for 8,000 hours during 2006, 7,500 hours in 2007, and 5,500 hours in 2008.
Instructions
Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2007, and 2008, by (a) the straight line method, (b) the units of production method, and (c) the double declining balance method. Also determine the total depreciation expense for the three years by each method. The following columnar headings are suggested for recording the depreciation expense amounts:
|
Depreciation Ex
|
|
|
Straight
|
Units of
|
Double Declining
|
|
|
Line
|
Production
|
Balance
|
|
Year
|
Method
|
Method
|
Method
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
New lithographic equipment, acquired at a cost of $175,000 at the beginning of a fiscal year, has an estimated useful life of five years and an estimated residual value of $15,000. The manager requested information regarding the effect of alternative methods on the amount of depreciation expense each year. On the basis of the data presented to the manager, the double declining balance method was selected. In the first week of the fifth year, the equipment was traded in for similar equipment priced at $240,000. The trade in allowance on the old equipment was $25,000, cash of $15,000 was paid, and a note payable was issued for the balance.
Instructions
1. Determine the annual depreciation expense for each of the estimated five years of use, the accumulated depreciation at the end of each year, and the book value of the equipment at the end of each year by (a) the straight line method and (b) the double declining balance method. The following columnar headings are suggested for each schedule:
|
|
|
Accumulated
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
Depreciation,
|
Book Value,
|
|
Year
|
Expense
|
End of Year
|
End of Year
|
2. For financial reporting purposes, determine the cost of the new equipment acquired in the exchange.
3. Journalize the entry to record the exchange.
4. Journalize the entry to record the exchange, assuming that the trade in allowance was $18,000 instead of $25,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the current year ended December 31 are as follows:
a. Timber rights on a tract of land were purchased for $648,000 on July 5. The stand of timber is estimated at 3,600,000 board feet. During the current year, 1,200,000 board feet of timber were cut and sold.
b. Goodwill in the amount of $27,000,000 was purchased on January 7.
c. Governmental and legal costs of $780,000 were incurred on October 4 in obtaining a patent with an estimated economic life of 12 years. Amortization is to be for one fourth year.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of the amortization or depletion expense for the current year for each of the foregoing items.
2. Journalize the adjusting entries required to record the amortization or depletion for each item.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following payments and receipts are related to land, land improvements, and buildings acquired for use in a wholesale apparel business. The receipts are identified by an asterisk.
|
a.
|
Finder’s fee paid to real estate agency
|
$7,500
|
|
b.
|
Cost of real estate acquired as a plant site: Land
|
$210,000
|
| |
Building
|
50,000
|
|
c.
|
Fee paid to attorney for title search
|
2,500
|
|
d.
|
Delinquent real estate taxes on property, assumed by purchaser
|
20,650
|
|
e.
|
Cost of razing and removing building
|
16,250
|
|
f.
|
Cost of filling and grading land
|
12,500
|
|
g.
|
Proceeds from sale of salvage materials from old building
|
5,000*
|
|
h.
|
Architect’s and engineer’s fees for plans and supervision
|
36,000
|
|
i.
|
Special assessment paid to city for extension of water main to the
|
| |
property
|
8,000
|
|
j.
|
Premium on one year insurance policy during construction
|
3,600
|
|
k.
|
Money borrowed to pay building contractor
|
900,000*
|
|
l.
|
Cost of trees and shrubbery planted
|
18,000
|
|
m.
|
Cost of repairing windstorm damage during construction
|
3,000
|
|
n.
|
Cost of repairing vandalism damage during construction
|
4,200
|
|
o.
|
Cost of paving parking lot to be used by customers
|
15,000
|
|
p.
|
Proceeds from insurance company for windstorm and vandalism
|
| |
damage
|
7,000*
|
|
q.
|
Interest incurred on building loan during construction
|
54,000
|
|
r.
|
Payment to building contractor for new building
|
1,000,000
|
|
s.
|
Refund of premium on insurance policy (j) canceled after 10 months
|
600*
|
Instructions
1. Assign each payment and receipt to Land (unlimited life), Land Improvements (limited life), Building, or Other Accounts. Indicate receipts by an asterisk. Identify each item by letter and list the amounts in columnar form, as follows:
|
|
|
Land
|
|
Other
|
|
Item
|
Land
|
Improvements
|
Building
|
Accounts
|
2. Determine the amount debited to Land, Land Improvements, and Building.
3. The costs assigned to the land, which is used as a plant site, will not be depreciated, while the costs assigned to land improvements will be depreciated. Explain this seemingly contradictory application of the concept of depreciation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Seal Coatings Company purchased waterproofing equipment on January 2, 2007, for $475,000. The equipment was expected to have a useful life of four years, or 21,500 operating hours, and a residual value of $45,000. The equipment was used for 7,600 hours during 2007, 6,800 hours in 2008, 5,100 hours in 2009, and 2,000 hours in 2010.
Instructions
Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2008, 2009, and 2010, by (a) the straight line method, (b) the units of production method, and (c) the double declining balance method. Also determine the total depreciation expense for the four years by each method. The following columnar headings are suggested for recording the depreciation expense amounts:
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
|
Straight
|
Units of
|
Double Declining
|
|
|
Line
|
Production
|
Balance
|
|
Year
|
Method
|
Method
|
Method
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
New tire retreading equipment, acquired at a cost of $240,000 at the beginning of a fiscal year, has an estimated useful life of four years and an estimated residual value of $18,000. The manager requested information regarding the effect of alternative methods on the amount of depreciation expense each year. On the basis of the data presented to the manager, the double declining balance method was selected. In the first week of the fourth year, the equipment was traded in for similar equipment priced at $325,000. The trade in allowance on the old equipment was $45,000, cash of $10,000 was paid, and a note payable was issued for the balance.
Instructions
1. Determine the annual depreciation expense for each of the estimated four years of use, the accumulated depreciation at the end of each year, and the book value of the equipment at the end of each year by (a) the straight line method and (b) the double declining balance method. The following columnar headings are suggested for each schedule:
|
|
|
Accumulated
|
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
Depreciation,
|
Book Value,
|
|
Year
|
Expense
|
End of Year
|
End of Year
|
2. For financial reporting purposes, determine the cost of the new equipment acquired in the exchange.
3. Journalize the entry to record the exchange.
4. Journalize the entry to record the exchange, assuming that the trade in allowance was $25,000 instead of $45,000.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following transactions, adjusting entries, and closing entries were completed by Crown Furniture Co. during a three year period. All are related to the use of delivery equipment. The double declining balance method of depreciation is used.
|
2006
|
|
|
Jan. 9.
|
Purchased a used delivery truck for $38,000, paying cash.
|
|
Mar. 15.
|
Paid garage $180 for changing the oil, replacing the oil filter, and tuning the
|
| |
engine on the delivery truck.
|
|
Dec. 31.
|
Recorded depreciation on the truck for the fiscal year. The estimated useful life of
|
| |
the truck is eight years, with a residual value of $7,000 for the truck.
|
|
2007
|
|
|
Jan. 3.
|
Purchased a new truck for $62,500, paying cash.
|
|
Feb. 20.
|
Paid garage $150 to tune the engine and make other minor repairs on the used
|
| |
truck.
|
|
Apr. 30.
|
Sold the used truck for $25,000. (Record depreciation to date in 2007 for the truck.)
|
|
Dec. 31.
|
Recorded depreciation on the truck. It has an estimated trade in value of
|
| |
$12,000 and an estimated life of 10 years.
|
|
2008
|
|
|
July 1.
|
Purchased a new truck for $70,000, paying cash.
|
|
Oct. 6.
|
Sold the truck purchased January 3, 2007, for $43,900. (Record depreciation for
|
| |
the year.)
|
|
Dec. 31.
|
Recorded depreciation on the remaining truck. It has an estimated residual value
|
| |
of $4,500 and an estimated useful life of 10 years.
|
Instructions
Journalize the transactions and the adjusting entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Data related to the acquisition of timber rights and intangible assets during the current year ended December 31 are as follows:
a. Goodwill in the amount of $15,000,000 was purchased on January 11.
b. Governmental and legal costs of $475,000 were incurred on June 30 in obtaining a patent with an estimated economic life of 10 years. Amortization is to be for one half year.
c. Timber rights on a tract of land were purchased for $900,000 on April 6. The stand of timber is estimated at 6,000,000 board feet. During the current year, 800,000 board feet of timber were cut and sold.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of the amortization or depletion expense for the current year for each of the foregoing items.
2. Journalize the adjusting entries to record the amortization or depletion expense for each item.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is an excerpt from a conversation between two employees of Resource Technologies, Haley Eubanks and Clay Hamon. Haley is the accounts payable clerk, and Clay is the cashier.
Haley: Clay, could I get your opinion on something?
Clay: Sure, Haley.
Haley: Do you know Amber, the fixed assets clerk?
Clay: I know who she is, but I don’t know her real well. Why?
Haley: Well, I was talking to her at lunch last Monday about how she liked her job, etc. You know, the usual . . . and she mentioned something about having to keep two sets of books . . . one for taxes and one for the financial statements. That can’t be good accounting, can it? What do you think?
Clay: Two sets of books? It doesn’t sound right.
Haley: It doesn’t seem right to me either. I was always taught that you had to use generally accepted accounting principles. How can there be two sets of books? What can be the difference between the two?
How would you respond to Clay and Haley if you were Amber?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cowboy Construction Co. specializes in building replicas of historic houses. Tom Askew, president of Cowboy Construction, is considering the purchase of various items of equipment on July 1, 2006, for $150,000. The equipment would have a useful life of five years and no residual value. In the past, all equipment has been leased. For tax purposes, Tom is considering depreciating the equipment by the straight line method. He discussed the matter with his CPA and learned that, although the straight line method could be elected, it was to his advantage to use the Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) for tax purposes. He asked for your advice as to which method to use for tax purposes.
1. Compute depreciation for each of the years (2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, and 2011) of useful life by (a) the straight line method and (b) MACRS. In using the straight line method, one half year’s depreciation should be computed for 2006 and 2011. Use the MACRS rates presented in the chapter.
2. Assuming that income before depreciation and income tax is estimated to be $300,000 uniformly per year and that the income tax rate is 30%, compute the net income for each of the years 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, and 2011, if (a) the straight line method is used and (b) MACRS is used.
3. What factors would you present for Tom’s consideration in the selection of a depreciation method?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table shows the revenues and average net fixed assets for a recent fiscal year for three different companies from three different industries: retailing, manufacturing, and communications.
|
|
|
Average Net
|
|
|
Revenues
|
Fixed Assets
|
|
|
(in millions)
|
(in millions)
|
|
Wal Mart
|
$258,681
|
$51,686
|
|
Alcoa Inc.
|
21,504
|
12,333
|
|
Comcast Corporation
|
18,348
|
18,427
|
a. For each company, determine the fixed asset turnover ratio. Round to two decimal places.
b. Explain Wal Mart’s ratio relative to the other two companies.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions of Taylor Company, completed during the fiscal year ended December 31, are as follows:
|
Mar. 1.
|
Purchased merchandise on account from Kelvin Co., $20,000.
|
|
Apr. 10.
|
Issued a 60 day, 12% note for $20,000 to Kelvin Co. on account.
|
|
June 9.
|
Paid Kelvin Co. the amount owed on the note of April 10.
|
|
Aug. 1.
|
Issued a $50,000, 90 day note to Harold Co. in exchange for a building. Harold
|
| |
Co. discounted the note at 15%.
|
|
Oct. 30.
|
Paid Harold Co. the amount due on the note of August 1.
|
|
Dec. 27.
|
Journalized the entry to record the biweekly payroll. A summary of the payroll
|
| |
record follows:
|
|
|
|
Salary distribution:
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
$63,400
|
|
|
Officers
|
36,600
|
|
|
Office
|
10,000
|
$110,000
|
|
Deductions:
|
|
|
|
Social security tax
|
$ 5,050
|
|
|
Medicare tax
|
1,650
|
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
17,600
|
|
|
State income tax withheld
|
4,950
|
|
|
Savings bond deductions
|
850
|
|
|
Medical insurance deductions
|
1,120
|
31,220
|
|
Net amount
|
|
$ 78,780
|
| |
|
|
|
|
27
|
Journalized the entry to record payroll taxes for social security and Medicare
|
| |
from the biweekly payroll.
|
|
30
|
Issued a check in payment of liabilities for employees’ federal income tax of
|
| |
$17,600, social security tax of $10,100, and Medicare tax of $3,300.
|
|
31
|
Issued a check for $9,500 to the pension fund trustee to fully fund the pension
|
| |
cost for December.
|
|
Dec. 31.
|
Journalized an entry to record the employees’ accrued vacation pay, $36,100.
|
|
31
|
Journalized an entry to record the estimated accrued product warranty liability,
|
| |
$37,240.00
|
Instructions
Journalize the preceding transactions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
An employee’s rate of pay is $40 per hour, with time and a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 during a week. The social security rate is 6.0% on the first $100,000 of annual earnings, and the Medicare rate is 1.5% on all earnings. The following additional data are available:
|
Hours worked during current week
|
45
|
|
Year’s cumulative earnings prior to current week
|
$99,400
|
|
Federal income tax withheld
|
$450
|
Based on these data, the amount of the employee’s net pay for the current week is:
A. $1,307.50.
B. $1,405.00.
C. $1,450.00.
D. $1,385.50.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Not for Profit Financial Statements. Renfrow Rehabilitation Center uses fund accounting for internal purposes. Presented is the December 31, 2011 balance sheet prepared from the funds the center uses.
Required
The controller asks that you prepare an aggregated balance sheet in accordance with current financial reporting standards for a not for profit health care organization using SFAS No. 117 and the AICPA Audit and Accounting Guide, Health Care Organizations. Based on additional information provided, you determine that
1. The cash and investments of the plant are restricted under the terms of several gifts to use for plant expansion, with income from plant fund investments restricted to the same purpose.
2. Income from endowment fund investments may be used at the discretion of the center’s governing board.
|
RENFROW REHABILITATION CENTER Balance Sheet As of December 31, 2011
|
|
Assets
|
Liabilities and Fund Balances
|
| |
|
Operating Fund
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 120,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 516,000
|
|
Short term investments
|
|
500,000
|
Accrued expenses payable
|
96,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$ 137,000
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Allowance for
|
|
|
|
|
|
uncollectible
|
|
|
|
|
|
accounts
|
27,000
|
110,000
|
Total liabilities
|
612,000
|
|
Inventory of supplies
|
|
74,000
|
Fund balance
|
192,000
|
|
Total
|
|
$ 804,000
|
Total
|
$ 804,000
|
| |
|
Plant Fund
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 53,800
|
Mortgage bonds payable
|
$ 950,000
|
|
Investments
|
|
871,200
|
|
|
|
Land
|
|
400,000
|
|
|
|
Buildings
|
$2,750,000
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Accumulated
|
|
|
Fund balance:
|
|
|
depreciation
|
525,000
|
2,225,000
|
Investment in plant
|
2,621,000
|
|
Equipment
|
1,380,000
|
|
Reserved for plant improvement
|
|
Less: Accumulated
|
|
|
and replacement
|
925,000
|
|
depreciation
|
434,000
|
946,000
|
Total fund balance
|
3,546,000
|
|
Total
|
|
$4,496,000
|
Total
|
$4,496,000
|
| |
|
Endowment Fund
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 6,000
|
|
|
|
Investments
|
|
1,260,000
|
Fund balance—income unrestricted
|
$1,266,000
|
|
Total
|
|
$1,266,000
|
Total
|
$1,266,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Restricted Contribution. The following transactions occurred at Jackson
Hospital:
1. Under the will of Samuel H. Samuels, a bequest of $100,000 was received for research on gerontology. The principal of the bequest, as well as any earnings on investments, is expendable for the specified research purpose.
2. Pending the need for the money for the designated purpose, part of the bequest was invested in $95,000 of par value City of Jackson 6 percent bonds at 103 plus accrued interest of $823.
3. An interest payment of $2,850 was received on the City of Jackson bonds.
4. The bonds were sold at 104 plus accrued interest of $443.
5. The income from the Samuels gift was used for the stipulated purpose.
Required
Make journal entries for these transactions assuming that this is a not for profit hospital.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Revenue and Related Transactions. During its current fiscal year, Dearborn General Hospital, a not for profit health care organization, had the following revenue related transactions (amounts summarized for the year).
1. Services provided to inpatients and outpatients amounted to $9,600,000, of which $450,000 was for charity care, $928,000 was paid by uninsured patients, and $8,222,000 was billed to Medicare, Medicaid, and insurance companies.
2. Pharmaceutical drugs sold by the hospital pharmacy amounted to $970,000, all of which was paid by customers or insurance.
3. Medicare, Medicaid, and third party payors (insurance companies) approved and paid $5,365,000 of the $8,222,000 billed by the hospital during the year (see transaction 1).
4. An unconditional contribution of $5,000,000 was received in cash from a donor to construct a new facility for care of Alzheimers patients. The full amount is expendable for that purpose. No activity occurred on this project during the current year.
5. A total of $840,000 was received from the following activities/sources: cafeteria and gift shop sales, $710,000; unrestricted transfers from the Dearborn General Hospital Foundation, $75,000; and fees for medical transcripts, $55,000.
6. The allowance for uncollectible receivables was increased by $1,200.
Required
a. Record the preceding transactions in general journal form.
b. Prepare the unrestricted revenues, gains, and other support section of Dearborn General Hospital’s statement of operations for the current year, following the format in Illustration 17 4.
c. On which statement would restricted contributions be reported? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Governmental Hospital. During 2011, the following selected events and transactions were recorded by Nichols County Hospital. 1. Gross charges for hospital services, all charged to accounts and notes receivable, were as follows:
|
Patient service revenues
|
$1,364,900
|
2. After recording patient service revenues, it was determined that $52,000 related to charity care.
3. Additional information relating to current year receivables and revenues is as follows:
|
Contractual adjustments
|
$632,000
|
|
Provision for bad debts
|
30,200
|
4. During the year, the hospital received unrestricted cash contributions of $50,000 and unrestricted cash income from endowment investments of $6,500.
5. A federal cost reimbursement research grant of $350,000 was awarded. As of the end of the year, $200,000 in expenses related to the grant had been made.
6. New equipment costing $39,000 was acquired from donor restricted cash. An X ray machine that cost $31,000 and had a book value of $2,400 was sold for $500 cash.
7. Vouchers totaling $1,340,200 were issued for the following items:
|
Fiscal and administrative services expenses
|
$241,800
|
|
General services expenses
|
253,100
|
|
Nursing services expenses
|
585,000
|
|
Other professional services expenses
|
185,600
|
|
Inventory
|
67,500
|
|
Expenses accrued at December 31, 2010
|
7,200
|
8. Collections of accounts receivable totaled $1,159,000. Accounts written off as uncollectible amounted to $11,900.
9. Cash payments on vouchers payable (paid to employers and suppliers) during the year were $1,031,200.
10. Supplies of $68,000 were issued to nursing services.
11. On December 31, 2011, accrued interest income on investments was $800.
12. Depreciation of buildings and equipment was as follows:
|
Buildings
|
$51,000
|
|
Equipment
|
73,000
|
13. On December 31, 2011, closing entries were made in the general journal.
Required
a. Show in general journal form the entries that should be made for each of the transactions and the closing entries in accordance with the standards for a governmental health care entity that follows proprietary fund accounting, as discussed in this chapter and Chapter 7.
b. Using the available information, calculate the net patient service revenue that would be reported on the statement of revenues, expenses, and changes in net assets.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Not for Profit Hospital. The Phelps Community Hospital balance sheet as of December 31, 2010, follows.
Required
a. Record in general journal form the effect of the following transactions during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2011, assuming that Phelps Community Hospital is a not for profit hospital.
(1) Summary of revenue journal:
|
Patient services revenue, gross
|
$3,584,900
|
|
Adjustments and allowances:
|
|
|
Contracting agencies
|
162,000
|
(2) Summary of cash receipts journal:
|
Interest on investments in Assets Limited as to Use
|
7,350
|
|
Unrestricted grant from United Fund
|
300,000
|
|
Collections of receivables
|
3,520,600
|
(3) Purchases journal:
|
Administration expenses
|
167,900
|
|
General services expenses
|
181,200
|
|
Nursing services expenses
|
278,800
|
|
Other professional services expenses
|
263,100
|
|
(4) Payroll journal:
|
|
|
Administration expenses
|
253,700
|
|
General services expenses
|
179,200
|
|
Nursing services expenses
|
659,200
|
|
Other professional services expenses
|
422,400
|
|
5) Summary of cash payments journal:
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
280,000
|
|
Payment on mortgage principal
|
500,000
|
|
Accounts payable for purchases
|
936,800
|
|
Accrued payroll
|
1,579,500
|
|
Transfer to Assets Limited as to Use
|
30,000
|
(6) The following additional information relates to assets limited as to use:
(a) $10,000 in CDs matured on which $590 in interest was earned.
(b) $30,000 was reinvested in CDs.
(c) $12,300 in equipment was purchased.
(7) Depreciation charges for the year amounted to $117,000 for the buildings and $128,500 for equipment.
(8) Other information:
(a) Provision for uncollectible receivables was increased by $3,800.
(b) Supplies inventory:
|
12/31/2010
|
12/31/2011
|
|
Administration expenses
|
$ 8,000
|
$ 7,300
|
|
General services expenses
|
8,700
|
9,000
|
|
Nursing services expenses
|
17,000
|
16,800
|
|
Other professional
|
|
|
|
services expenses
|
37,300
|
40,000
|
|
Totals
|
$71,000
|
$73,100
|
(c) Portion of mortgage payable due within one year, $500,000.
(9) Assume that there was no change in fair value of investments at yearend.
(10) Provisions for bad debts, interest expense, and depreciation expense were allocated to functional expense accounts in proportion to their reallocation balances. Nominal accounts were closed.
(11) Reflecting the net increase in Assets Limited as to Use of $25,640 (see transactions 2, 5, and 6), record the increase in Net Assets—Unrestricted, Designated for Plant Replacement.
b. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.
c. Prepare a statement of operations for the year ended December 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A financial adviser provides each client with three hours’ consultation prior to arranging a pension plan. The cost of the adviser’s time is estimated at £500 per hour. Advertising costs £2,000 per month. The client is charged £2,100 commission on completion of the three hour sequence of consultation. During one week the financial adviser provides 20 hours of consultation. The statement of costs would be:
| |
|
£
|
|
Product cost
|
Labour: 20 hours at £500 per hour
|
10,000
|
|
Period cost
|
Advertising
|
2,000
|
Suppose that the consultations are complete for six clients (18 hours) but unfinished for one client, who has been provided with only two hours’ consultation by the end of the week. The incomplete consultation is described as work in progress. There was no work in progress at the start of the week. The calculation of profit would be:
| |
|
£
|
£
|
|
Product cost
|
Sales (commission) 6 clients at £2,100 each
|
|
12,600
|
|
Labour: 20 hours at £500 per hour
|
10,000
|
|
|
Less work in progress 2 hours at £500 per hour
|
1,000)
|
|
|
Product cost of goods sold
|
|
(9,000)
|
|
Period cost
|
Advertising
|
|
(2,000)
|
|
Operating profit
|
|
1,600
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A toy manufacturer produces hand crafted rocking horses. During one week six rocking horses are completed. The direct materials costs of wood and leather materials amount to £180 per completed horse. The indirect materials cost of glue and paint amount to £20 per completed horse. The direct labour cost for craft working is £150 per completed horse. The indirect labour cost of handling within the production department is £50 per completed horse. Advertising amounted to £1,200 per week. Five completed rocking horses are sold for £1,000 each. There were none in inventory (stock) at the start of the week. The statements of costs would be:
| |
|
£
|
|
Product cost
|
Direct materials, wood & leather, 6 @ £180
|
1,080
|
| |
Indirect materials, glue & paint, 6 @ £20
|
120
|
| |
Direct labour: craft work, 6 @ £150
|
900
|
| |
Indirect labour: handling 6 @ £50
|
300
|
|
Period cost
|
Advertising
|
1,200
|
The calculation of profit would be:
| |
|
£
|
£
|
|
Product cost
|
Sales: 5 completed rocking horses
|
|
5,000
|
|
Direct materials, wood & leather, 6 @ £180
|
1,080
|
|
|
Indirect materials, glue & paint, 6 @ £20
|
120
|
|
|
Direct labour: craft work, 6 @ £150
|
900
|
|
|
Indirect labour: handling 6 @ £50
|
300
|
|
| |
2,400
|
|
| |
Less unsold inventory (stock), 1 ¥ (180 + 20 + 150 + 50)
|
(400)
|
|
|
Period cost
|
Product cost of 5 horses sold
|
|
(2,000)
|
|
Advertising
|
|
(1,200)
|
|
Operating profit
|
|
1,800
|
In each of these examples the product cost of completed services and of goods sold is matched against sales revenue of the week. The product cost of work in progress and of unsold goods is carried in the valuation of inventory (stock) to be matched against sales revenue of a future week. The period costs are all matched against sales revenue of the week.
In a service organisation, all costs incurred up to the point of completion of the service are regarded as product costs. Any costs incurred beyond the act of service, such as advertising the service or collecting cash from customers, would be a period cost. In a manufacturing organisation, all manufacturing costs are regarded as product costs. This will include the direct and indirect costs of manufacturing. I will explain the methods of calculating the indirect manufacturing costs for each product item. Costs incurred beyond the completion of manufacture, such as the costs of administration and selling, are period costs. The valuation of unsold inventory (stock) is based on the product cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(a) Identify the cost behaviour in each of the following tables as:
(i) fixed cost; or
(ii) variable cost; or
(iii) semi variable cost.
(b) Draw a graph for each table to illustrate the cost behaviour.
|
Cost X
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Output (units)
|
100
|
200
|
300
|
400
|
500
|
|
Total cost (£)
|
600
|
600
|
600
|
600
|
600
|
|
Unit cost (£)
|
6.00
|
3.00
|
2.00
|
1.50
|
1.20
|
|
Cost Y
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Output (units)
|
100
|
200
|
300
|
400
|
500
|
|
Total cost (£)
|
300
|
600
|
900
|
1,200
|
1,500
|
|
Unit cost (£)
|
3.00
|
3.00
|
3.00
|
3.00
|
3.00
|
|
Cost Z
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Output (units)
|
100
|
200
|
300
|
400
|
500
|
|
Total cost (£)
|
660
|
720
|
780
|
840
|
900
|
|
Unit cost (£)
|
6.60
|
3.60
|
2.60
|
2.10
|
1.80
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Oven Pies Ltd plans to buy a delivery van to distribute pies from the bakery to various neighborhood shops. It will use the van for three years. The expected costs are as follows:
|
|
£
|
|
New van
|
15,000
|
|
Trade in price after 3 years
|
600
|
|
Service costs (every 6 months)
|
450
|
|
Spare parts, per 10,000 miles
|
360
|
|
Four new tyres, every 15,000 miles
|
1,200
|
|
Vehicle licence and insurance, per year
|
800
|
|
Fuel, per litre*
|
0.70
|
(a) Prepare a table of costs for mileages of 5,000, 10,000, 15,000, 20,000 and 30,000 miles per annum, distinguishing variable costs from fixed costs.
(b) Draw a graph showing variable cost, fixed cost and total cost.
(c) Calculate the average cost per mile at each of the mileages set out in (a).
(d) Write a short commentary on the behaviour of costs as annual mileage increases.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the month of May, 4,000 metal towel rails were produced and 3,500 were sold. There had been none in store at the start of the month. There were no inventories (stocks) of raw materials at either the start or end of the period. Costs incurred during May in respect of towel rails were as follows:
|
|
£
|
|
Metal piping
|
12,000
|
|
Wages to welders and painters
|
9,000
|
|
Supplies for welding
|
1,400
|
|
Advertising campaign
|
2,000
|
|
Production manager’s salary
|
1,800
|
|
Accounts department computer costs for dealing with
|
|
|
production records
|
1,200
|
(a) Classify the list of costs set out above into product costs and period costs.
(b) Explain how you would value inventory (stock) held at the end of the month.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the management team in a business which makes self assembly kitchen units and sells them to large do it yourself stores. One person should take on the role of the financial controller but the rest of the team may take any managerial roles they choose. Each manager will have responsibility for a cost centre. The group should decide, at the outset, on the name and purpose of each cost centre. In stage 1 of the team exercise, each manager should write down the name of the cost centre and a list of the costs for which the manager expects to have responsibility. A copy of the cost centre name and the list of costs should be supplied to each member of the team. In stage 2, each manager should separately write down his or her requirements from a companywide cost coding system, yet to be designed, which has been specified in outline as having six alphanumeric characters. Each manager should also make a note of any costs which are shared with another manager or managers. While the managers are carrying out the second stage, the financial controller should prepare a cost coding system which would meet the needs as specified on the lists of costs provided by each manager from stage 1. In stage 3, the group should come together for a management meeting at which the financial controller will provide his or her cost coding system and each manager will respond with his or her ideas. If possible, a mutually agreed solution should be found but, at the very least, the group should identify the areas where further negotiation will be required. Finally, the group should make a five minute presentation to the class describing the negotiations on the coding system and commenting on the practical problems of such negotiation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was recorded during the month of May by the central warehouse of Stores Co. The warehouse issues goods to retail outlets owned by Stores Co. to allow the retail outlets to meet expected demand from customers. The record represents kitchen units, all of the same type.
|
Date
|
Received into store
|
Unit price
|
Price paid to supplier
|
Issued to retail outlets
|
|
|
Units
|
£
|
£
|
Units
|
|
1 May
|
120
|
30
|
3,600
|
–
|
|
19 May
|
60
|
34
|
2,040
|
–
|
|
22 May
|
–
|
–
|
–
|
80
|
|
30 May
|
–
|
–
|
–
|
70
|
|
Total
|
180
|
|
5,640
|
150
|
Calculate (i) the cost of goods issued to retail stores during May and (ii) the cost value of goods held in the warehouse at the end of May, under each of:
(a) FIFO
(b) LIFO
(c) average cost.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Explain which document you would expect to find in the records of Chocolate Ltd as evidence of each of the following transactions or events which took place during the month of June:
(a) Evidence that the buying department of Chocolate Ltd had authority to order new supplies of cocoa beans from a supplier.
(b) Evidence that the supplier had the authority to send cocoa beans to Chocolate Ltd.
(c) Evidence that the cocoa beans arrived at the stores of Chocolate Ltd in good condition and in the quantities expected.
(d) Evidence that the amount payable to the supplier is correct in quantities and prices.
(e) Evidence that the storekeeper of Chocolate Ltd had the authority to release cocoa beans to the production unit, for conversion to chocolate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Electric Wiring Company employs staff to repair electrical equipment in customers’ homes under maintenance contracts. Each job of work is the cost unit for which costs are recorded and monitored. Explain which of the following will be direct labour costs and which will be indirect labour costs for each cost unit:
(a) The hourly rate payable to an employee technician for hours worked on repairing electrical equipment for customers under maintenance contracts.
(b) The hourly rate payable to a cleaner who works in cleaning the head office premises.
(c) The annual salary paid to a supervisor who allocates work to technicians carrying out repair work for customers, and who also checks the quality of the completed work.
(d) The monthly allowance paid to technician employees for being available ‘on call’ for emergency repairs.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. You are the newly appointed secretary of a primary school employing 20 teachers and having 300 pupils. The head teacher has asked you to design a system for ordering books and stationery and controlling the issue of books and stationery to teachers. Make a list of the key features that you will recommend for the new system.
2. You have been asked to plan the labour force for a job of work that will require the equivalent of five skilled workers for a period of 30 days. Within that period there is an expectation of 25 days of productive work and five days equivalent of non productive work relating to rest periods and statutory holiday leave. You have only been able to find three workers of sufficient skill who will work full time. There are two part timers who together will cover the equivalent of one further full time worker. You will need to hire agency staff on an hourly basis to make up the shortfall. Explain the problems you will face in estimating the labour cost of the job.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A language college teaches English as a Foreign Language. It has two departments: E (European mother tongue) and A (Asian mother tongue). Information about each is shown in Table 4.7. The overhead cost of cleaning classrooms is £32,000 per year.
Table 4.7 Information for Example 1: departments E and A
|
Department
|
E
|
A
|
|
Number of teaching staff
|
12
|
18
|
|
Annual teaching labour cost
|
£600,000
|
£1,000,000
|
|
Number of rooms
|
18
|
16
|
The traditional method of allocating cleaning overhead cost to departments has been to apply a rate of two per cent of the labour cost of teaching. This is shown in Table 4.8.
Table 4.8 Traditional treatment of cleaning overhead
|
|
E
|
A
|
|
Overhead cost rate
|
2% of labour cost
|
2% of labour cost
|
|
Apportionment of cost £32,000
|
£12,000
|
£20,000
|
The head tutor of Department A feels this is unfair because it has fewer classrooms than Department E and so requires less cleaning effort. Assume that cleaning cost may be regarded as a cost pool and show how activity based costing can be applied where the number of classrooms is the cost driver for cleaning. The apportionment of cost by the activity based method is shown in Table 4.9.
Table 4.9 Activity based costing for cleaning overhead
|
|
E
|
A
|
|
Cost pool: cleaning, £32,000
|
|
|
|
Cost driver: fraction of classroom usage
|
18/34
|
16/34
|
|
Apportionment of cost £32,000
|
£16,940
|
£15,060
|
Comment. The head of Department A will be happier with the use of activity based costing because it reflects the lower usage of cleaning driven by fewer classrooms. On the other hand, it may be that this is not the best cost driver. For instance, suppose that the head of Department E responds by pointing out that their classrooms are kept tidy and are therefore easier to clean. The debate over cost drivers might take some time to resolve.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
In the office of a firm of solicitors and estate agents there are overhead costs incurred relating to the cost of office support for the staff preparing legal documentation. There are two departments preparing legal documentation. Department A has dealt with 15 property transactions having an average value of £100,000 each, while Department B has dealt with 5 property transactions having an average value of £1m each. The total amount of the office overhead costs for the period is £100,000. The traditional approach to overhead cost has been to apportion the amount of £100,000 in proportion to the number of property deals dealt with by each department. They are now asking for an activity based approach to costing, where the cost driver is the value of transactions in each department, because high value transactions involve more work.
Table 4.10 Traditional treatment of cleaning overhead
|
|
A
|
B
|
|
Cost pool: office overhead, £100,000
|
|
|
|
Cost driver: number of transactions
|
15/20
|
5/20
|
|
Apportionment of cost £100,000
|
£75,000
|
£25,000
|
|
Cost per transaction
|
£5,000
|
£5,000
|
The traditional approach gives the same unit cost regardless of size of transaction.
Table 4.11 Activity based costing for office overhead
|
|
A
|
B
|
|
Overhead cost rate
|
1,500/6,500
|
5,000/6,500
|
|
Apportionment of cost £100,000
|
100,000 × 1.5/6.5
|
100,000 × 5/6.5
|
|
|
= £23,000
|
= £77,000
|
|
Cost per transaction
|
£1,530
|
£15,400
|
Comment. The activity based approach puts much more of the overhead cost on to Department B because that one is driving more of the overheads. When the cost per transaction is calculated, the activity based approach, based on value, loads the cost towards the high value transaction and so produces a relatively higher cost per unit for these transactions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company manufactures golf bags. Golf bags have the following manufacturing costs:
|
|
£ per bag
|
|
Labour (5 hours at £5.00/hour)
|
25
|
|
Materials
|
40
|
|
Variable production overheads
|
10
|
In addition, the company has monthly fixed production overhead costs of £100,000. 5,000 golf bags are manufactured every month.
Required
Prepare a statement of total product cost for a batch of 5,000 golf bags which shows prime cost and production overhead cost as subtotals.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted information relating to two departments of Rydons Tables Ltd for the next period is as follows:
|
Department
|
Productio overhead £
|
Direct
material
cost
£
|
Direct labour cost
£
|
Direct labour hours
|
Machine hours
|
|
1
|
270,000
|
67,500
|
13,500
|
2,700
|
45,000
|
|
2
|
18,000
|
36,000
|
100,000
|
25,000
|
300
|
Individual direct labour employees within each department earn differing rates of pay according to their skills, grade and experience.
Required
(a) Rydons Tables intends to use a production overhead cost rate of £6 per machine hour for absorbing production overhead cost into jobs, based on the budget. Write a short note to the managers of the business commenting on this proposal.
(b) During the past year, Rydons Tables has been using a production overhead cost rate of £5.60 per machine hour. During the year overheads of £275,000 were incurred and 48,000 machine hours worked. Were overheads under absorbed or over absorbed, and by how much?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Thare Co. incurred the following costs related to trucks and vans used in operating its delivery service:
1. Changed the oil and greased the joints of all the trucks and vans.
2. Installed security systems on four of the newer trucks.
3. Changed the radiator fluid on a truck that had been in service for the past four years.
4. Installed a hydraulic lift to a van.
5. Removed a two way radio from one of the trucks and installed a new radio with a greater range of communication.
6. Overhauled the engine on one of the trucks that had been purchased three years ago.
7. Tinted the back and side windows of one of the vans to discourage theft of contents.
8. Repaired a flat tire on one of the vans.
9. Rebuilt the transmission on one of the vans that had been driven 40,000 miles. The van was no longer under warranty.
10. Replaced the trucks’ suspension system with a new suspension system that allows for the delivery of heavier loads.
Classify each of the costs as a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditure.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shaw Management Services opens for business and completes these transactions in November.
Nov. 1 Kita Shaw, the owner, invested $30,000 cash along with $15,000 of office equipment in the company.
2 The company prepaid $4,500 cash for six months’ rent for an office. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Rent for $4,500.)
4 The company made credit purchases of office equipment for $2,500 and of office supplies for $600. Payment is due within 10 days.
8 The company completed work for a client and immediately received $3,400 cash.
12 The company completed a $10,200 project for a client, who must pay within 30 days.
13 The company paid $3,100 cash to settle the payable created on November 4.
19 The company paid $1,800 cash for the premium on a 24 month insurance policy.
22 The company received $5,200 cash as partial payment for the work completed on November 12.
24 The company completed work for another client for $1,750 on credit.
28 K. Shaw withdrew $5,300 cash from the company for personal use.
29 The company purchased $249 of additional office supplies on credit.
30 The company paid $531 cash for this month’s utility bill.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (124); Prepaid Insurance (128); Prepaid Rent (131); Office Equipment (163); Accounts Payable (201); K. Shaw, Capital (301); K. Shaw, Withdrawals (302); Services Revenue (403); and Utilities Expense (690). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the ledger accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of November.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the beginning of April, Brooke Gable launched a custom computer solutions company called Softways. The company had the following transactions during April.
a. Brooke Gable invested $45,000 cash, office equipment with a value of $4,500, and $28,000 of computer equipment in the company.
b. The company purchased land worth $24,000 for an office by paying $4,800 cash and signing a long term note payable for $19,200.
c. The company purchased a portable building with $21,000 cash and moved it onto the land acquired in b.
d. The company paid $6,600 cash for the premium on a two year insurance policy.
e. The company provided services to a client and immediately collected $3,200 cash.
f. The company purchased $3,500 of additional computer equipment by paying $700 cash and signing a long term note payable for $2,800.
g. The company completed $3,750 of services for a client. This amount is to be received within 30 days.
h. The company purchased $750 of additional office equipment on credit.
i. The company completed client services for $9,200 on credit.
j. The company received a bill for rent of a computer testing device that was used on a recently completed job. The $320 rent cost must be paid within 30 days.
k. The company collected $4,600 cash in partial payment from the client described in transaction i.
l. The company paid $1,600 cash for wages to an assistant.
m. The company paid $750 cash to settle the payable created in transaction h.
n. The company paid $425 cash for minor maintenance of the company’s computer equipment.
o. B. Gable withdrew $3,875 cash from the company for personal use.
p. The company paid $1,600 cash for wages to an assistant.
q. The company paid $800 cash for advertisements in the local newspaper during April.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Prepaid Insurance (108); Office Equipment (163); Computer Equipment (164); Building (170); Land (172); Accounts Payable (201); Notes Payable (250); B. Gable, Capital (301); B. Gable, Withdrawals (302); Fees Earned (402); Wages Expense (601); Computer Rental Expense (602); Advertising Expense (603); and Repairs Expense (604). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of April.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting records of Schmitt Co. show the following assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2010 and 2011.
|
December 31
|
2010
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
$14,000
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
25,000
|
30,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
10,000
|
12,500
|
|
Office equipment
|
60,000
|
60,000
|
|
Machinery
|
30,500
|
30,500
|
|
Building
|
0
|
260,000
|
|
Land
|
0
|
65,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
5,000
|
15,000
|
|
Note payable
|
0
|
260,000
|
Late in December 2011, the business purchased a small office building and land for $325,000. It paid $65,000 cash toward the purchase and a $260,000 note payable was signed for the balance. Janet Schmit, the owner, had to invest an additional $25,000 cash to enable it to pay the $65,000 cash toward the purchase. The owner withdraws $1,000 cash per month for personal use.
Required
1. Prepare balance sheets for the business as of December 31, 2010 and 2011. (Hint: Report only total equity on the balance sheet and remember that total equity equals the difference between assets and liabilities.)
2. By comparing equity amounts from the balance sheets and using the additional information presented in the problem, prepare a calculation to show how much net income was earned by the business during 2011.
3. Calculate the December 31, 2011, debt ratio for the business.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lummus Management Services opens for business and completes these transactions in September.
1 Rhonda Lummus, the owner, invests $28,000 cash along with office equipment valued at $25,000 in the company.
2 The company prepaid $10,500 cash for 12 months’ rent for office space.
4 The company made credit purchases for $9,000 in office equipment and $1,200 in office supplies. Payment is due within 10 days.
8 The company completed work for a client and immediately received $2,600 cash.
12 The company completed a $13,400 project for a client, who must pay within 30 days.
13 The company paid $10,200 cash to settle the payable created on September 4.
19 The company paid $5,200 cash for the premium on an 18 month insurance policy.
22 The company received $7,800 cash as partial payment for the work completed on September 12.
24 The company completed work for another client for $1,900 on credit.
28 Lummus withdrew $5,300 cash from the company for personal use.
29 The company purchased $1,700 of additional office supplies on credit.
30 The company paid $460 cash for this month’s utility bill.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (124); Prepaid Insurance (128); Prepaid Rent (131); Office Equipment (163); Accounts Payable (201); R. Lummus, Capital (301); R. Lummus, Withdrawals (302); Service Fees Earned (401); and Utilities Expense (690). Post journal entries from part 1 to the ledger accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of September.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cooke Consulting completed the following transactions during June.
a. Chris Cooke, the owner, invested $80,000 cash along with office equipment valued at $30,000 in the new company.
b. The company purchased land valued at $30,000 and a building valued at $170,000. The purchase is paid with $40,000 cash and a long term note payable for $160,000.
c. The company purchased $2,400 of office supplies on credit.
d. C. Cooke invested his personal automobile in the company. The automobile has a value of $18,000 and is to be used exclusively in the business.
e. The company purchased $6,000 of additional office equipment on credit.
f. The company paid $1,500 cash salary to an assistant.
g. The company provided services to a client and collected $6,000 cash.
h. The company paid $800 cash for this month’s utilities.
i. The company paid $2,400 cash to settle the payable created in transaction c.
j. The company purchased $20,000 of new office equipment by paying $20,000 cash.
k. The company completed $5,200 of services for a client, who must pay within 30 days.
l. The company paid $1,500 cash salary to an assistant.
m. The company received $3,800 cash in partial payment on the receivable created in transaction k.
n. C. Cooke withdrew $6,400 cash from the company for personal use.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (108); Office Equipment (163); Automobiles (164); Building (170); Land (172); Accounts Payable (201); Notes Payable (250); C. Cooke, Capital (301); C. Cooke, Withdrawals (302); Fees Earned (402); Salaries Expense (601); and Utilities Expense (602). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the ledger accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of June.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Michael Gould started a Web consulting firm called Gould Solutions. He began operations and completed seven transactions in April that resulted in the following accounts, which all have normal balances.
|
Cash
|
$12,485
|
|
Office supplies
|
560
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
1,500
|
|
Office equipment
|
11,450
|
|
Accounts payable
|
11,450
|
|
M. Gould, Capital
|
10,000
|
|
M. Gould,Withdrawals
|
6,200
|
|
Consulting fees earned
|
16,400
|
|
Operating expenses
|
5,655
|
Required
1. Prepare a trial balance for this business as of the end of April.
2. Analyze the accounts and their balances and prepare a list that describes each of the seven most likely transactions and their amounts.
3. Prepare a report of cash received and cash paid showing how the seven transactions in part 2 yield the $12,485 ending Cash balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gift Shop UBIT. A local exempt organization that trains at risk youth for employment has an annual operating budget of $300,000, which includes revenue from operating a gift shop in a nearby hotel lobby. Gift shop sales result in a profit of $15,000. The organization has $6,500 of endowment income that it earns on permanently restricted net assets. The income from both the gift shop and the endowment is used to support the organization’s exempt purpose. The balance of $278,500 required for annual operations is provided through public support and charges for services.
Required
a. Calculate the UBIT if the corporate tax rate is 15 percent on the first $50,000 of net income and 25 percent on the next $25,000 of income.
b. Assume that the endowment income is reinvested rather than being used to support annual operations. Calculate the amount of unrelated business income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Intermediate Sanctions. For each of the following independent situations, determine whether the organization is at risk for receiving intermediate sanctions from the Internal Revenue Service for conferring excess economic benefits on disqualified persons. If so, indicate how the organization can minimize those sanctions.
1. Jane is president of an IRC Sec. 501(c)(3) public charity and personally owns a building that she has decided to sell to the not for profit organization. The appraisal value is $200,000, and the agreed upon selling price is $250,000.
2. A large public charity is very happy with its president’s performance and offers him a new compensation agreement for the coming year. He will receive a base salary plus a percentage of the increase in the gross revenues of the organization with no limitation as to the maximum amount.
3. Ann is a member and the director of a symphony association. She receives 20 free admission tickets as a member of the organization.
4. The local chapter of the United Way recently hired Joe Curtis as its new president at a salary of $200,000. The outgoing president was paid $150,000. Mr. Curtis had other offers that ranged from $95,000 to $190,000. The minutes of the meeting reflected that he was exceptionally talented and would not have accepted the position for a lower salary.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Investment Performance and UPMIFA. Crossroads University is a tax exempt, private university. An excerpt from Note 5 “Endowment Fund” of its
2007 audited financial statements is as follows:
State law allows the board to appropriate investment income and as much of the net appreciation as is prudent considering the University’s needs and general economic conditions. Under the University’s endowment spending policy, approximately 4 percent of the value of fixed income investments and 4.5 percent of the value of equity investments is appropriated to support current operations.
The state adopted the 1972 Uniform Management of Institutional Funds Act (the Act). Under the provisions of the Act, appreciation of permanently restricted endowment net assets is considered unrestricted unless the applicable gift instrument specifically states such appreciation should not be spent. This appreciation continues to be invested in the University’s pooled endowment.
Required
a. Has the state in which your college or university is located adopted the 2006 Uniform Prudent Management of Investment Funds Act (UPMIFA)?
b. How will Note 5 change for Crossroads University if it adopts UPMIFA?
c. As a potential donor to the university, you are considering a gift that will
be permanently restricted. What questions would you ask of the investment manager with respect to the investment performance of the endowment?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance Measures. Information from the Form 990 for the American Heart Association for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2007, follows. The full text of the Form 990 is available.
Required
a. Compute the following performance measures using the Form 990 data presented in this exercise and comment on what information they convey to a potential donor without comparing them to prior years or other comparable agencies.
1. Current ratio—liquidity.
2. Revenues/expenses—going concern.
3. Program expenses/total expenses—program effectiveness.
4. Public support/fund raising expenses—fund raising efficiency.
5. Investment performance.
b. Obtain the audited annual financial statement for the American Heart Association for fiscal year 2007. Calculate the same ratios listed in requirement
a. Comment on any differences. (Note: Use the most recent year for which both audited financial statements and Form 990 are readily available.)
c. Discuss the advantages of analyzing financial performance using audited annual financial statement information versus IRS Form 990 information.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Institutionally Related Foundations. Review each of the following cases that describe a public university and a foundation related to it (i.e., an institutionally related foundation). Explain whether the GASB criteria are met so that the organizations should be discretely presented in the financial statements of the public university. If the criteria are not met, explain why.
1. University Alumni Association. KMH University Alumni Association was established as a legally separate, tax exempt organization to support both KMH University and its students. Generally, when the university awards a scholarship to a student who meets the criteria established by the Alumni Association, the university requests funds from the Alumni Association’s resources. Normally, the Alumni Association honors the request and transfers the funds to the university. In the current year, the Alumni Association has endowed a chair and financed 14 scholarships for the KMH University School of Business and has donated funds for these purposes to KMH University. The funds donated directly to the university and the resources held by the association are significant to the university’s financial statements.
2. University Fund Raising Foundation. CCB University Foundation is a legally separate, tax exempt organization whose bylaws state that it exists solely to provide financial support to CCB University. The foundation regularly makes distributions directly to the university and pays certain maintenance expenses by making payments directly to vendors and contractors rather than the university. Separately, the direct cash payments to the university and the maintenance expenses of the university paid by the foundation are not significant to the university; however, they are significant when combined. The economic resources of the foundation that are restricted for the benefit of the university are significant.
3. University Research Foundation. Ten years ago, the State University Research Foundation was established as a legally separate, tax exempt organization to provide the buildings, laboratory facilities, and administrative support necessary for the faculty of State University to competitively attract and carry out research grants, principally from the federal government and corporations. The foundation’s total research and administrative costs were significant to the university in the current year. The foundation occupies two buildings that it constructed on campus on land leased from the university. A significant portion of the instructional faculty in the School of Engineering, Science, and Technology carry out research at the foundation, and the annual university performance evaluations and merit increases of these faculty are based to a certain extent on the research they perform at the foundation. The completion of a research grant typically results in the submittal of
a report of research findings and recommendations to the grantor, and often the publication of results in academic and professional journals. This research activity is deemed integral to the duties of faculty and is consistent with the university’s mission. A formal agreement between the university and the foundation requires the foundation to make its general lecture and meeting rooms available, upon request, to the university, and to make certain research laboratories available for special lectures and seminars. The university’s personnel office provides administrative support for hiring foundation personnel, including research technicians who typically are selected by faculty committees. The relationship between the university and the foundation is disclosed in a brochure for prospective faculty of the university. Students enrolled in university graduate courses work at the foundation as research assistants. They are compensated through stipends paid by research grants through financial aid work study programs administered by the university. Faculty are required to periodically report their research, instructional, and other efforts through a reporting system administered jointly by the foundation and the university. Faculty working on research grants typically receive a portion of their compensation from grant funds.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparison of Public and Private Universities. Following are the operating statements for a public and private university. The operating statements have been adapted from the annual reports of a public and a private university. As would be expected, the reports are somewhat different. Boca Bay State College has an enrollment of 28,980 students and Von College has an enrollment of 20,100 students.
|
VON COLLEGE
Statement of Activities
for Year Ended June 30, 2011
(amounts in thousands)
|
|
|
Unrestricted
|
Temporarily Restricted
|
Permanently Restricted
|
Totals
|
|
Revenues
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tuition and fees
|
$494,729
|
—
|
—
|
$ 494,729
|
|
Less: Scholarships
|
(173,659)
|
—
|
—
|
(173,659)
|
|
Net tuition and fees
|
321,070
|
—
|
—
|
321,070
|
|
Contributions
|
28,121
|
$17,443
|
$ 45,135
|
90,699
|
|
Grants and contracts
|
66,730
|
—
|
—
|
66,730
|
|
Investment revenue
|
21,361
|
112
|
403
|
21,876
|
|
Net realized and unrealized gains on investments
|
83,655
|
—
|
168
|
83,823
|
|
Auxiliary enterprises
|
141,910
|
—
|
—
|
141,910
|
|
Other
|
16
|
—
|
—
|
16
|
|
Net assets released from restrictions
|
14,508
|
(14,508)
|
—
|
—
|
|
Total revenues
|
677,371
|
3,047
|
45,706
|
726,124
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Instruction
|
265,946
|
—
|
—
|
265,946
|
|
Sponsored research
|
48,331
|
—
|
—
|
48,331
|
|
Academic support
|
77,969
|
—
|
—
|
77,969
|
|
Student services
|
40,541
|
—
|
—
|
40,541
|
|
Institutional support
|
67,475
|
—
|
—
|
67,475
|
|
Auxiliary enterprises
|
144,013
|
—
|
—
|
144,013
|
|
Total expenses
|
644,275
|
—
|
—
|
644,275
|
|
Change in net assets before cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
|
33,096
|
3,047
|
45,706
|
81,849
|
|
Cumulative effect of change in accounting principle
|
(24,083)
|
—
|
—
|
(24,083) 57,766
|
|
Change in net assets
|
9,013
|
3,047
|
45,706
|
|
Net assets at beginning of year
|
845,610
|
35,936
|
358,121
|
1,239,667
|
|
Net assets at end of year
|
$854,623
|
$38,983
|
$403,827
|
$1,297,433
|
|
BOCA BAY STATE COLLEGE
Statement of Revenues, Expenses, and Changes in Net Assets
for the Year Ended September 30, 2011
(amounts in thousands)
|
|
|
Operating Revenues
|
|
|
|
Tuition and fees (net of scholarship allowances of $36,632)
|
$ 160,978
|
|
|
Federal grants and contracts
|
78,826
|
|
|
State grants and contracts
|
67,742
|
|
|
Auxiliary enterprises
|
83,482
|
|
|
Other operating revenues
|
14,596
|
|
|
Total operating revenues
|
405,624
|
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
|
|
|
Compensation and benefits
|
380,516
|
|
|
Scholarships and fellowships
|
13,812
|
|
|
Supplies and services
|
175,326
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
32,306
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total operating expenses
|
601,960
|
|
|
Operating loss
|
(196,336)
|
|
|
Nonoperating Revenues (Expenses)
|
|
|
|
State appropriations
|
247,895
|
|
|
Gifts
|
26,591
|
|
|
Net investment income
|
44,912
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
(10,167)
|
|
|
Nonoperating revenues
|
309,231
|
|
|
Income before other changes in net assets
|
112,895
|
|
|
Other Changes in Net Assets
|
|
|
|
Capital appropriations
|
104
|
|
|
Capital grants
|
19,051
|
|
|
Additions to permanent endowments
|
237
|
|
|
Change in net assets
|
132,287
|
|
|
Net assets—beginning of year
|
856,857
|
|
|
Net assets—end of year
|
$ 989,144
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Required
a. List some of the differences you observe in the formats of the two operating statements.
b. What portion of the total revenues of Boca Bay State College comes from tuition and fees? From state appropriations? From gifts and contributions? How do those amounts compare to those for Von College?
c. What portion of all of Boca Bay State College’s gifts, grants, and contracts is in the form of endowments? How does that amount compare to the portion of gifts, grants, and contracts in the form of endowments at Von College? Can you tell how much each college earns on its endowments?
d. Which college’s financial operating performance for the year appears to be better? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Private College Transactions. Elizabeth College, a small private college, had the following transactions in fiscal year 2011.
1. Billings for tuition and fees totaled $5,600,000. Tuition waivers and scholarships of $61,500 were granted. Students received tuition refunds of $101,670.
2. During the year the college received $1,891,000 cash in unrestricted private gifts, $575,200 cash in temporarily restricted grants, and $1,000,000 in securities for an endowment.
3. A pledge campaign generated $626,000 in unrestricted pledges, payable in fiscal year 2012.
4. Auxiliary enterprises provided goods and services that generated $94,370 in cash.
5. Collections of tuition receivable totaled $5,380,000.
6. Unrestricted cash of $1,000,000 was invested.
7. The college purchased computer equipment at a cost of $10,580.
8. During the year the following expenses were paid:
|
Instruction
|
$3,866,040
|
|
Academic support
|
1,987,000
|
|
Student services
|
87,980
|
|
Institutional support
|
501,130
|
|
Auxiliary enterprises
|
92,410
|
9. Instruction provided $450,000 in services related to the temporarily restricted grant recorded in transaction 2.
10. At year end, the allowance for uncollectible tuition and fees was increased by $7,200. The fair value of investments had increased $11,540; of this amount, $3,040 was allocated to permanently restricted net assets, the remainder was allocated to unrestricted net assets. Depreciation on plant and equipment was allocated $34,750 to instruction, $41,000 to auxiliary enterprises, and $12,450 to academic support.
11. All nominal accounts were closed.
Required
a. Prepare journal entries in good form to record the foregoing transactions for the fiscal year ended June 30, 2011.
b. Prepare a statement of activities for the year ended June 30, 2011. Assume beginning net asset amounts of $7,518,000 unrestricted, $200,000 temporarily restricted, and $5,000,000 permanently restricted.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Public University Transactions. The Statement of Net Assets of Green Tree State University, a governmentally owned university, as of the end of its fiscal year June 30, 2010, follows.
|
GREEN TREE STATE UNIVERSITY
Statement of Net Assets
June 30, 2010
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 340,000
|
|
|
Accounts receivable (net of doubtful accounts of $15,000)
|
|
370,000
|
|
|
Investments
|
|
250,000
|
|
|
Capital assets
|
$1,750,000
|
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
275,000
|
1,475,000
|
|
|
Total assets
|
|
2,435,000
|
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
105,000
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
40,000
|
|
Deferred revenue
|
25,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
600,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
770,000
|
|
Net Assets
|
|
|
Invested in capital assets, net of related debt
|
875,000
|
|
Restricted
|
215,000
|
|
Unrestricted
|
575,000
|
|
Total net assets
|
$1,665,000
|
| |
|
|
|
|
The following information pertains to the year ended June 30, 2011:
1. Cash collected from students’ tuition totaled $3,000,000. Of this $3,000,000, $362,000 represented accounts receivable outstanding at June 30, 2010; $2,500,000 was for current year tuition; and $138,000 was for tuition applicable to the semester beginning in August 2011.
2. Deferred revenue at June 30, 2010, was earned during the year ended June 30, 2011.
3. Notification was received from the federal government that up to $50,000 in funds could be received in the current year for costs incurred in developing student performance measures.
4. During the year, the University received an unrestricted appropriation of 60,000 from the state.
5. Equipment for the student computer labs was purchased for cash in the amount of $225,000.
6. During the year, $200,000 in cash contributions was received from alumni. The contributions are to be used for construction of a new library.
7. Interest expense on the bonds payable in the amount of $48,000 was paid.
8. During the year, investments with a carrying value of $25,000 were sold for $31,000. Investments were purchased at a cost of $40,000. Investment income of $18,000 was earned and collected during the year.
9. General expenses of $2,500,000 related to the administration and operation of academic programs, and research expenses of $37,000 related to the development of student performance measures were recorded in the voucher system. At June 30, 2011, the accounts payable balance was $75,000.
10. Accrued liabilities at June 30, 2010, were paid.
11. At year end, adjusting entries were made. Depreciation on capital assets totaled $90,000. Accrued interest on investments was $1,250. The fair value of investments at year end was $262,000. The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts was adjusted to $17,000.
12. Nominal accounts were closed and net asset amounts were reclassified as necessary.
Required
a. Prepare journal entries in good form to record the foregoing transactions for the year ended June 30, 2011.
b. Prepare a statement of net assets for the year ended June 30, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various Unrelated Transactions. Following are several unrelated transactions involving a university.
1. In fiscal year 2011, the university was notified by the federal government that in 2012 it would receive a $500,000 grant for wetlands research.
2. The university received $234,000 in contributed services from nurses providing services in its community outreach clinics. The services were part of the regular operation of the clinics.
3. During the year, the university constructed a new street, to allow for the expansion of its student housing efforts. The cost of the street was $1,980,000.
4. The university extended $325,000 in loans to students. During the year, $196,000 in loans was collected, along with $2,450 in interest.
5. At year end, the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts was increased by $1,670.
Required
a. Prepare journal entries to record the foregoing transactions, assuming the university is a private institution.
b. Prepare journal entries to record the foregoing transactions, assuming the university is a public institution.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Statements—Private University. The following is the pre closing trial balance for Horton University as of June 30, 2011. Additional information related to net assets and the statement of cash flows is also provided.
|
HORTON UNIVERSITY
Pre Closing Trial Balance
June 30, 2011
|
|
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Cash and Cash Equivalents
|
$1,516,600
|
|
|
Investments
|
3,200,000
|
|
|
Tuition and Fees Receivable
|
372,400
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts
|
|
$ 75,600
|
|
Pledges Receivable
|
223,000
|
|
|
Allowance for Doubtful Pledges
|
|
79,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment
|
1,996,160
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
|
658,720
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
103,000
|
|
Accrued Liabilities
|
|
37,500
|
|
Deposits Held in Custody for Others
|
|
17,570
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
|
792,000
|
|
Deferred Revenue
|
|
62,150
|
|
Liabilities Under Split Interest Agreements
|
|
40,510
|
|
Net Assets—Unrestricted
|
|
4,051,410
|
|
Net Assets—Temporarily Restricted
|
|
200,600
|
|
Net Assets—Permanently Restricted
|
|
980,000
|
|
Net Assets Released from Restrictions—Temporarily Restricted
|
26,850
|
|
|
Net Assets Released from Restrictions—Unrestricted
|
|
26,850
|
|
Tuition and Fees
|
|
290,750
|
|
Tuition and Fees Discounts and Allowances
|
98,000
|
|
|
Contributions—Unrestricted
|
|
310,200
|
|
Contributions—Temporarily Restricted
|
|
77,000
|
|
Grants and Contracts—Unrestricted
|
|
324,000
|
|
Grants and Contracts—Temporarily Restricted
|
|
121,800
|
|
Investment Income—Unrestricted
|
|
11,500
|
|
Other Revenue
|
|
13,250
|
|
Auxiliary Enterprise Sales and Services
|
|
53,560
|
|
Unrealized Gain on Investments
|
|
280,400
|
|
Instruction Expense
|
629,750
|
|
|
Research Expense
|
269,600
|
|
|
Academic Support Expense
|
100,400
|
|
|
Student Services Expense
|
46,500
|
|
|
Institutional Support Expense
|
68,910
|
|
|
Auxiliary Enterprise Expenses
|
58,700
|
|
|
Loss on Sale of Equipment
|
500
|
|
|
Total
|
$8,580,520
|
$8,580,520
|
Additional information
Net assets released from temporary restrictions totaled $26,850. There were no restrictions on the investment income earned. Twenty percent of the unrealized gain is related to permanently restricted net assets and 10 percent is related to temporarily restricted net assets, with the remainder related to unrestricted net assets.
The differences between the beginning and ending balances were as follows:
Tuition and Fees Receivable increased by $10,230.
Pledges Receivable decreased by $1,560.
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts was increased by $770 (the bad debt was netted against Tuition and Fees).
Accounts Payable decreased by $2,900.
Accrued Liabilities decreased by $1,120.
Deferred Revenue increased by $6,200.
Depreciation Expense was $30,070.
Cash of $100,000 was used to retire bonds.
Investments were sold for $1,500,000 and others were purchased for $1,250,000.
Required
a. Prepare a statement of activities for the year ended June 30, 2011.
b. Prepare a statement of financial position for June 30, 2011.
c. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended June 30, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Charity Care. The local newspaper of a large urban area printed a story titled “Charity Care by Hospitals Stirs Debate.” The story quotes one legislator who wants “to ensure that the state’s nonprofit hospitals are fulfilling their obligation; that is to provide charity care at least equal to the tax exemption they receive as a nonprofit entity.” The following table is provided:
|
Comparison of Selected Factors in Three Nonprofit Hospitals
(dollars in millions)
|
|
|
Hope Hospital
|
St. Pat’s Hospital
|
Capitol Hospital
|
|
Estimated taxes the hospitals would
|
|
|
|
|
pay if they were not tax exempt
|
$6.8
|
$2.2
|
$4.5
|
|
Charity and other uncompensated care
|
$17.8, of which $3.8 is bad debts
|
$3.1, not including bad debts
|
$6.7
|
|
Community service programs*
|
$1.6
|
$1.0
|
n.a.
|
|
Unpaid cost of Medicaid
|
|
|
|
|
and Medicare
|
$3.4
|
$0.6
|
n.a.
|
|
Nonreimbursed research and
|
|
|
|
|
graduate medical education
|
$2.0
|
$0.7
|
n.a.
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Required
a. What are the obligations of IRC Sec. 501(c)(3) organizations to provide charity care?
b. Do you agree that the hospitals are not fulfilling their obligations? Why or why not?
c. What additional information would you like to have? Do you expect to find this information in the audited annual financial statements?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Organizational Form. Responding to a growing need for medical care as its population grew in the early 1900s, Suffolk County founded the Suffolk County Hospital in 1920, financing construction of the original hospital building and equipment with a $500,000 general obligation bond issue.
Over the next 75 years, the hospital was able to sustain its own operations from patient service, federal and state grants, and other revenues, but it relied on the Suffolk County government to finance construction of needed expansions. In 1995, Suffolk County issued $10 million of general obligation bonds to finance a new hospital building. A special property tax levy has paid principal and interest on this debt issue and will continue to do so until 2020. In 1998, the hospital board of trustees signed a 10 year lease and management contract under which the hospital became an affiliate of ABC Medical Group, a for profit organization. Under the contract, ABC agreed to provide capital financing for plant expansion and equipment modernization, in addition to providing the county with 15 percent of net income, as defined in the contract. Over the past 10 years, the county has received an average of about $1.5 million each year, but it has had no involvement with the operations of the hospital, except for continuing oversight by the elected board of trustees. As the lease contract nears its renewal date, two of the five members of the hospital board are openly questioning ABC’s quality of care and pricing structures. In addition, these members argue that the hospital has not been sufficiently responsive to county patients and has not provided adequate charity care. The other three members of the board believe that ABC is performing well under the lease contract and that the contract should be renewed for another 10 years.
These three members of the board believe, however, that the contract should not be renewed unless a higher share of net income can be negotiated with ABC. A target share of 20 percent has been mentioned by one of the board members. As might be expected in such circumstances, the local print and broadcast media have devoted extensive coverage to this issue and public feelings are running strong both for and against renewing the lease contract with ABC. For the most recent year, ABC reported $10.9 million of net income on revenues of $17.4 million and expenses of $6.5 million.
Required
a. Assume you are the county finance director and have been asked to evaluate the arguments for and against renewing the lease contract with ABC Medical Group. What financial and nonfinancial factors would you consider in conducting your analysis and preparing recommendations to share with the hospital board of trustees?
b. What factors, in your judgment, are most important in deciding whether or not to renew the lease contract?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Internet Case—Medicare and Medicaid. The federal government through the Medicare and Medicaid programs is one of the largest providers of patient service revenues to health care organizations. Information concerning these programs is available through the Department of Health and Human Services Web site.
Required
Accessing the Web site at www.cms.hhs.gov, answer the following questions:
a. Who are the recipients of Medicare and Medicaid program benefits?
b. What were the annual outlays (expenditures) for each program for the most recent year?
c. What is CMS?
d. What is the National Program on Integrity and what are the objectives of its program reviews?
e. What factors do you believe contribute to fraud in Medicare and Medicaid programs?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Internet Case—Evaluating the Quality of Health Care. The U.S. Department of Health and Human Services maintains the Web site which provides an array of process of care and outcome of care measures that report on how well individual hospitals are caring for their patients, compared with state and national benchmarks.
Required
a. Access the Web site shown above and describe the medical and surgical categories for which process of care and outcome of care quality measures are reported.
b. At the Web site, click on “Find and Compare Hospitals” and locate quality of care data for two hospitals in your city or geographic area. Evaluate that data and explain how the quality of care scores of each of those hospitals compares with the average scores for your state and the nation.
c. Explain how such factors as patient mix, occupancy rate, average length of stay, payor mix and the hospital’s financial condition may affect the quality of care. Did any of these factors impact, in your judgment, the quality of care scores received by the two hospitals you selected for analysis?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following transactions of a new company called Pose for Pics.
Aug. 1 Kasey Madison, the owner, invested $7,500 cash and $32,500 of photography equipment in the company.
2 The company paid $3,000 cash for an insurance policy covering the next 24 months.
5 The company purchased office supplies for $1,400 cash.
20 The company received $2,650 cash in photography fees earned.
31 The company paid $875 cash for August utilities.
prepare an August 31 trial balance for Pose for Pics. Begin by opening these T accounts: Cash; Office Supplies; Prepaid Insurance; Photography Equipment; K. Madison, Capital; Photography Fees Earned; and Utilities Expense. Then, post the general journal entries to these T accounts (which will serve as the ledger), and prepare the trial balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare general journal entries to record the transactions below for Dexter Company by using the following accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Office Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable;
M. Dexter, Capital; M. Dexter, Withdrawals; Fees Earned; and Rent Expense. Use the letters beside each transaction to identify entries. After recording the transactions, post them to T accounts, which serves as the general ledger for this assignment. Determine the ending balance of each T account.
a. Macy Dexter, owner, invested $12,750 cash in the company.
b. The company purchased office supplies for $375 cash.
c. The company purchased $7,050 of office equipment on credit.
d. The company received $1,500 cash as fees for services provided to a customer.
e. The company paid $7,050 cash to settle the payable for the office equipment purchased in transaction c.
f. The company billed a customer $2,700 as fees for services provided.
g. The company paid $525 cash for the monthly rent.
h. The company collected $1,125 cash as partial payment for the account receivable created in transaction f.
i. Macy Dexter withdrew $1,000 cash from the company for personal use.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare general journal entries to record the transactions below for Dexter Company by using the following accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Office Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; M. Dexter, Capital; M. Dexter, Withdrawals; Fees Earned; and Rent Expense. Use the letters beside each transaction to identify entries. After recording the transactions, post them to T accounts, which serves as the general ledger for this assignment. Determine the ending balance of each T account.
a. Macy Dexter, owner, invested $12,750 cash in the company.
b. The company purchased office supplies for $375 cash.
c. The company purchased $7,050 of office equipment on credit.
d. The company received $1,500 cash as fees for services provided to a customer.
e. The company paid $7,050 cash to settle the payable for the office equipment purchased in transaction c.
f. The company billed a customer $2,700 as fees for services provided.
g. The company paid $525 cash for the monthly rent.
h. The company collected $1,125 cash as partial payment for the account receivable created in transaction f.
i. Macy Dexter withdrew $1,000 cash from the company for personal use.
After recording the transactions T accounts and calculating the balance of each account, prepare a trial balance. Use May 31, 2011, as its report date.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dominick Lopez operates a consulting firm called Tech Today. On August 31, the company’s records show the following accounts and amounts for the month of August. Use this information to prepare an August income statement for the business.
|
Cash
|
$ 8,360
|
D. Lopez, Withdrawals
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
17,000
|
Consulting fees earned
|
17,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
3,250
|
Rent expense
|
4,550
|
|
Land
|
46,000
|
Salaries expense
|
8,000
|
|
Office equipment
|
18,000
|
Telephone expense
|
560
|
|
Accounts payable
|
8,000
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
280
|
|
D. Lopez, Capital, July 31
|
4,000
|
Owner investments
|
80,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dominick Lopez operates a consulting firm called Tech Today. On August 31, the company’s records show the following accounts and amounts for the month of August. Use this information to prepare an August income statement for the business.
|
Cash
|
$ 8,360
|
D. Lopez, Withdrawals
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
17,000
|
Consulting fees earned
|
17,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
3,250
|
Rent expense
|
4,550
|
|
Land
|
46,000
|
Salaries expense
|
8,000
|
|
Office equipment
|
18,000
|
Telephone expense
|
560
|
|
Accounts payable
|
8,000
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
280
|
|
D. Lopez, Capital, July 31
|
4,000
|
Owner investments
|
80,000
|
Prepare an August statement of owner’s equity for Tech Today. (The owner invested $84,000 cash in the company during the first week of August.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute the missing amount for each of the following separate companies a through d.
|
|
(a)
|
(b)
|
(c)
|
(d)
|
|
Equity, December 31,2010
|
$ 0
|
$ 0
|
$ 0
|
$ 0
|
|
Owner investments during the year
|
120,000
|
?
|
87,000
|
210,000
|
|
Owner withdrawals during the year
|
?
|
54,000
|
10,000
|
55,000
|
|
Net income (loss) for the year
|
31,500
|
81,000
|
(4,000)
|
?
|
|
Equity, December 31,2011
|
102,000
|
99,000
|
?
|
110,000
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume the following T accounts reflect Joy Co.’s general ledger and that seven transactions a through g are posted to them. Provide a short description of each transaction. Include the amounts in your descriptions.
|
Cash
|
|
(a)
|
7,000
|
(b)
|
3,600
|
|
(e)
|
2,500
|
(c)
|
600
|
|
|
(f)
|
2,400
|
|
|
(g)
|
700
|
|
Office Supplies
|
|
(c)
|
600
|
|
|
|
(d)
|
200
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
(b)
|
3,600
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
(a)
|
5,600
|
|
|
|
(d)
|
9,400
|
|
|
|
Automobiles
|
|
(a)
|
11,000
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
(f)
|
2,400
|
(d)
|
9,600
|
|
D. Joy, Capital
|
|
|
|
(a)
|
23,600
|
|
Delivery Services Revenue
|
|
|
|
(e)
|
2,500
|
|
Gas and Oil Expense
|
|
(g)
|
700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume the following T accounts reflect Joy Co.’s general ledger and that seven transactions a through g are posted to them. Provide a short description of each transaction. Include the amounts in your descriptions.
|
Cash
|
|
(a)
|
7,000
|
(b)
|
3,600
|
|
(e)
|
2,500
|
(c)
|
600
|
|
|
(f)
|
2,400
|
|
|
(g)
|
700
|
|
Office Supplies
|
|
(c)
|
600
|
|
|
|
(d)
|
200
|
|
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
(b)
|
3,600
|
|
|
|
Equipment
|
|
(a)
|
5,600
|
|
|
|
(d)
|
9,400
|
|
|
|
Automobiles
|
|
(a)
|
11,000
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
(f)
|
2,400
|
(d)
|
9,600
|
|
D. Joy, Capital
|
|
|
|
(a)
|
23,600
|
|
Delivery Services Revenue
|
|
|
|
(e)
|
2,500
|
|
Gas and Oil Expense
|
|
(g)
|
700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Prepare general journal entries for each of the seven transactions a through g.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Posting errors are identified in the following table. In column (1), enter the amount of the difference between the two trial balance columns (debit and credit) due to the error. In column (2), identify the trial balance column (debit or credit) with the larger amount if they are not equal. In column (3), identify the account(s) affected by the error. In column (4), indicate the amount by which the account(s) in column (3) is under or overstated. Item (a) is completed as an example.
|
|
Description of Posting Error
|
(1)
Difference between Debit and Credit Columns
|
(2)
Column with the Larger Total
|
(3)
Identify Account(s) Incorrectly Stated
|
(4)
Amount that Account(s) Is Over or Understated
|
|
$2,400 debit to Rent Expense is posted as a $1,590 debit.
|
$810
|
Credit
|
Rent Expense
|
Rent Expense understated $810
|
|
$4,050 credit to Cash is posted twice as two credits to Cash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
$9,900 debit to the Withdrawals account is debited to Owner’s Capital.
|
|
|
|
|
|
$2,250 debit to Prepaid Insurance is posted as a debit to Insurance Expense.
|
|
|
|
|
|
$42,000 debit to Machinery is posted as a debit to Accounts Payable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
$4,950 credit to Services Revenue is posted as a $495 credit.
|
|
|
|
|
|
$1,440 debit to Store Supplies is not posted.
|
|
|
|
|
You are told the column totals in a trial balance are not equal. After careful analysis, you discover only one error. Specifically, a correctly journalized credit purchase of a computer for $16,950 is posted from the journal to the ledger with a $16,950 debit to Office Equipment and another $16,950 debit to Accounts Payable. The Office Equipment account has a debit balance of $40,100 on the trial balance. Answer each of the following questions and compute the dollar amount of any misstatement.
a. Is the debit column total of the trial balance overstated, understated, or correctly stated?
b. Is the credit column total of the trial balance overstated, understated, or correctly stated?
c. Is the Office Equipment account balance overstated, understated, or correctly stated in the trial balance?
d. Is the Accounts Payable account balance overstated, understated, or correctly stated in the trial balance?
e. If the debit column total of the trial balance is $360,000 before correcting the error, what is the total of the credit column before correction?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
BMW reports the following balance sheet accounts for the year ended December 31, 2009 (euro in millions). Prepare the balance sheet for this company as of December 31, 2009, following the usual IFRS formats.
|
Current liabilities
|
€ 8,350
|
Noncurrent liabilities
|
€10,943
|
|
Current assets
|
17,663
|
Noncurrent assets
|
6,984
|
|
Total equity
|
5,354
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gary Bauer opens a computer consulting business called Technology Consultants and completes the following transactions in April.
1 Bauer invested $100,000 cash along with $24,000 in office equipment in the company.
2 The company prepaid $7,200 cash for twelve months’ rent for an office. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Rent for $7,200.)
3 The company made credit purchases of office equipment for $12,000 and office supplies for $2,400. Payment is due within 10 days.
6 The company completed services for a client and immediately received $2,000 cash.
9 The company completed an $8,000 project for a client, who must pay within 30 days.
13 The company paid $14,400 cash to settle the account payable created on April 3.
19 The company paid $6,000 cash for the premium on a 12 month insurance policy. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Insurance for $6,000.)
22 The company received $6,400 cash as partial payment for the work completed on April 9.
25 The company completed work for another client for $2,640 on credit.
28 Bauer withdrew $6,200 cash from the company for personal use.
29 The company purchased $800 of additional office supplies on credit.
30 The company paid $700 cash for this month’s utility bill.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use the account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (124); Prepaid Insurance (128);
Prepaid Rent (131); Office Equipment (163); Accounts Payable (201); G. Bauer, Capital (301);
G. Bauer, Withdrawals (302); Services Revenue (403); and Utilities Expense (690). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the ledger accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of April.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shelton Engineering completed the following transactions in the month of June.
a. Shana Shelton, the owner, invested $105,000 cash, office equipment with a value of $6,000, and $45,000 of drafting equipment to launch the company.
b. The company purchased land worth $54,000 for an office by paying $5,400 cash and signing a long term note payable for $48,600.
c. The company purchased a portable building with $75,000 cash and moved it onto the land acquired in b.
d. The company paid $6,000 cash for the premium on an 18 month insurance policy.
e. The company completed and delivered a set of plans for a client and collected $5,700 cash.
f. The company purchased $22,500 of additional drafting equipment by paying $10,500 cash and signing a long term note payable for $12,000.
g. The company completed $12,000 of engineering services for a client. This amount is to be received in 30 days.
h. The company purchased $2,250 of additional office equipment on credit.
i. The company completed engineering services for $18,000 on credit.
j. The company received a bill for rent of equipment that was used on a recently completed job. The $1,200 rent cost must be paid within 30 days.
k. The company collected $7,200 cash in partial payment from the client described in transaction g.
l. The company paid $1,500 cash for wages to a drafting assistant.
m. The company paid $2,250 cash to settle the account payable created in transaction h.
n. The company paid $675 cash for minor maintenance of its drafting equipment.
o. S. Shelton withdrew $9,360 cash from the company for personal use.
p. The company paid $1,500 cash for wages to a drafting assistant.
q. The company paid $3,000 cash for advertisements in the local newspaper during June.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use the account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Prepaid Insurance (108); Office Equipment (163); Drafting Equipment (164); Building (170); Land (172); Accounts Payable (201); Notes Payable (250); S. Shelton, Capital (301); S. Shelton, Withdrawals (302); Engineering Fees Earned (402); Wages Expense (601); Equipment Rental Expense (602); Advertising Expense (603); and Repairs Expense (604). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of June.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting records of Fabiano Distribution show the following assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2010 and 2011.
|
December 31
|
2010
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
$ 52,500
|
$ 18,750
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
28,500
|
22,350
|
|
Office supplies
|
4,500
|
3,300
|
|
Office equipment
|
138,000
|
147,000
|
|
Trucks
|
54,000
|
54,000
|
|
Building
|
0
|
180,000
|
|
Land
|
0
|
45,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
7,500
|
37,500
|
|
Note payable
|
0
|
105,000
|
Late in December 2011, the business purchased a small office building and land for $225,000. It paid $120,000 cash toward the purchase and a $105,000 note payable was signed for the balance. Mr. Fabiano had to invest $35,000 cash in the business to enable it to pay the $120,000 cash. Mr. Fabiano withdraws $3,000 cash per month for personal use.
Required
1. Prepare balance sheets for the business as of December 31, 2010 and 2011. (Hint: Report only total equity on the balance sheet and remember that total equity equals the difference between assets and liabilities.)
2. By comparing equity amounts from the balance sheets and using the additional information presented in this problem, prepare a calculation to show how much net income was earned by the business during 2011.
3. Compute the 2011 year end debt ratio for the business.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santo Birch opens a Web consulting business called Show Me the Money and completes the following transactions in its first month of operations.
March 1 Birch invests $150,000 cash along with office equipment valued at $22,000 in the company.
2 The company prepaid $6,000 cash for twelve months’ rent for office space. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Rent for $6,000.)
3 The company made credit purchases for $3,000 in office equipment and $1,200 in office supplies.
Payment is due within 10 days.
6 The company completed services for a client and immediately received $4,000 cash.
9 The company completed a $7,500 project for a client, who must pay within 30 days.
13 The company paid $4,200 cash to settle the account payable created on March 3.
19 The company paid $5,000 cash for the premium on a 12 month insurance policy. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Insurance for $5,000.)
22 The company received $3,500 cash as partial payment for the work completed on March 9.
25 The company completed work for another client for $3,820 on credit.
29 Birch withdrew $5,100 cash from the company for personal use.
30 The company purchased $600 of additional office supplies on credit.
31 The company paid $200 cash for this month’s utility bill.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (124); Prepaid Insurance (128);
Prepaid Rent (131); Office Equipment (163); Accounts Payable (201); S. Birch, Capital (301);
S. Birch, Withdrawals (302); Services Revenue (403); and Utilities Expense (690). Post journal entries from part 1 to the ledger accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3 . Prepare a trial balance as of April 30.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business transactions completed by Eric Pense during the month of September are as follows.
a. Pense invested $23,000 cash along with office equipment valued at $12,000 in a new sole proprietorship named EP Consulting.
b. The company purchased land valued at $8,000 and a building valued at $33,000. The purchase is paid with $15,000 cash and a long term note payable for $26,000.
c. The company purchased $600 of office supplies on credit.
d. Pense invested his personal automobile in the company. The automobile has a value of $7,000 and is to be used exclusively in the business.
e. The company purchased $1,100 of additional office equipment on credit.
f. The company paid $800 cash salary to an assistant.
g. The company provided services to a client and collected $2,700 cash.
h. The company paid $430 cash for this month’s utilities.
i. The company paid $600 cash to settle the account payable created in transaction c.
j. The company purchased $4,000 of new office equipment by paying $4,000 cash.
k. The company completed $2,400 of services for a client, who must pay within 30 days.
l. The company paid $800 cash salary to an assistant.
m. The company received $1,000 cash in partial payment on the receivable created in transaction k.
n. Pense withdrew $1,050 cash from the company for personal use.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (108); Office Equipment (163); Automobiles (164); Building (170); Land (172); Accounts Payable (201); Notes Payable (250); E. Pense, Capital (301); E. Pense, Withdrawals (302); Fees Earned (402); Salaries Expense (601); and Utilities Expense (602). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the ledger accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of September.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carlos Beltran started an engineering firm called Beltran Engineering. He began operations and completed seven transactions in May, which included his initial investment of $17,000 cash. After those seven transactions, the ledger included the following accounts with normal balances.
|
Cash
|
$26,660
|
|
Office supplies
|
660
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
3,200
|
|
Office equipment
|
16,500
|
|
Accounts payable
|
16,500
|
|
C. Beltran, Capital
|
17,000
|
|
C. Beltran,Withdrawals
|
3,740
|
|
Engineering fees earned
|
24,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
6,740
|
Required
1. Prepare a trial balance for this business as of the end of May.
2. Analyze the accounts and their balances and prepare a list that describes each of the seven most likely transactions and their amounts.
3. Prepare a report of cash received and cash paid showing how the seven transactions in part 2 yield the $26,660 ending Cash balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shaw Management Services opens for business and completes these transactions in November.
1 Kita Shaw, the owner, invested $30,000 cash along with $15,000 of office equipment in the company.
2 The company prepaid $4,500 cash for six months’ rent for an office. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Rent for $4,500.)
4 The company made credit purchases of office equipment for $2,500 and of office supplies for $600. Payment is due within 10 days.
8 The company completed work for a client and immediately received $3,400 cash.
12 The company completed a $10,200 project for a client, who must pay within 30 days.
13 The company paid $3,100 cash to settle the payable created on November 4.
19 The company paid $1,800 cash for the premium on a 24 month insurance policy.
22 The company received $5,200 cash as partial payment for the work completed on November 12.
24 The company completed work for another client for $1,750 on credit.
28 K. Shaw withdrew $5,300 cash from the company for personal use.
29 The company purchased $249 of additional office supplies on credit.
30 The company paid $531 cash for this month’s utility bill.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (124); Prepaid Insurance (128);
Prepaid Rent (131); Office Equipment (163); Accounts Payable (201); K. Shaw, Capital (301);
K. Shaw, Withdrawals (302); Services Revenue (403); and Utilities Expense (690). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the ledger accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of November.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the beginning of April, Brooke Gable launched a custom computer solutions company called Softways. The company had the following transactions during April.
a. Brooke Gable invested $45,000 cash, office equipment with a value of $4,500, and $28,000 of computer equipment in the company.
b. The company purchased land worth $24,000 for an office by paying $4,800 cash and signing a long term note payable for $19,200.
c. The company purchased a portable building with $21,000 cash and moved it onto the land acquired in b.
d. The company paid $6,600 cash for the premium on a two year insurance policy.
e. The company provided services to a client and immediately collected $3,200 cash.
f. The company purchased $3,500 of additional computer equipment by paying $700 cash and signing a long term note payable for $2,800.
g. The company completed $3,750 of services for a client. This amount is to be received within 30 days.
h. The company purchased $750 of additional office equipment on credit.
i. The company completed client services for $9,200 on credit.
j. The company received a bill for rent of a computer testing device that was used on a recently completed job. The $320 rent cost must be paid within 30 days.
k. The company collected $4,600 cash in partial payment from the client described in transaction i.
l. The company paid $1,600 cash for wages to an assistant.
m. The company paid $750 cash to settle the payable created in transaction h.
n. The company paid $425 cash for minor maintenance of the company’s computer equipment.
o. B. Gable withdrew $3,875 cash from the company for personal use.
p. The company paid $1,600 cash for wages to an assistant.
q. The company paid $800 cash for advertisements in the local newspaper during April.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following ledger accounts — their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Prepaid Insurance (108); Office Equipment
(163); Computer Equipment (164); Building (170); Land (172); Accounts Payable (201); Notes Payable
(250); B. Gable, Capital (301); B. Gable, Withdrawals (302); Fees Earned (402); Wages Expense
(601); Computer Rental Expense (602); Advertising Expense (603); and Repairs Expense (604). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of April.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounting records of Schmitt Co. show the following assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2010 and 2011.
|
December 31
|
2010
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
$14,000
|
$ 10,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
25,000
|
30,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
10,000
|
12,500
|
|
Office equipment
|
60,000
|
60,000
|
|
Machinery
|
30,500
|
30,500
|
|
Building
|
0
|
260,000
|
|
Land
|
0
|
65,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
5,000
|
15,000
|
|
Note payable
|
0
|
260,000
|
Late in December 2011, the business purchased a small office building and land for $325,000. It paid $65,000 cash toward the purchase and a $260,000 note payable was signed for the balance. Janet Schmit, the owner, had to invest an additional $25,000 cash to enable it to pay the $65,000 cash toward the purchase. The owner withdraws $1,000 cash per month for personal use.
Required
1. Prepare balance sheets for the business as of December 31, 2010 and 2011. (Hint: Report only total equity on the balance sheet and remember that total equity equals the difference between assets and liabilities.)
2. By comparing equity amounts from the balance sheets and using the additional information presented in the problem, prepare a calculation to show how much net income was earned by the business during 2011.
3. Calculate the December 31, 2011, debt ratio for the business.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carlos Beltran started an engineering firm called Beltran Engineering. He began operations and completed seven transactions in May, which included his initial investment of $17,000 cash. After those seven transactions, the ledger included the following accounts with normal balances.
|
Cash
|
$26,660
|
|
Office supplies
|
660
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
3,200
|
|
Office equipment
|
16,500
|
|
Accounts payable
|
16,500
|
|
C. Beltran, Capital
|
17,000
|
|
C. Beltran,Withdrawals
|
3,740
|
|
Engineering fees earned
|
24,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
6,740
|
Required
1. Prepare a trial balance for this business as of the end of May.
2. Analyze the accounts and their balances and prepare a list that describes each of the seven most likely transactions and their amounts.
3. Prepare a report of cash received and cash paid showing how the seven transactions in part 2 yield the $26,660 ending Cash balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nokia is a leading manufacturer of mobile devices and services, and it competes to some extent with both Research In Motion and Apple. Key financial figures for Nokia follow.
|
Key Figure*
|
Euro (EUR) in Millions
|
|
Average assets
|
37,660
|
|
Net income
|
260
|
|
Revenue
|
40,984
|
|
Return on assets
|
0.7%
|
Required
1. Identify any concerns you have in comparing Nokia’s income and revenue figures to those of Research In Motion and Apple for purposes of making business decisions.
2. Identify any concerns you have in comparing Nokia’s return on assets ratio to those of Research In Motion and Apple for purposes of making business decisions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
A trial balance has total debits of $20,000 and total credits of $24,500. Which one of the following errors would create this imbalance? Explain.
a. A $2,250 debit posting to Accounts Receivable was posted mistakenly to Cash.
b. A $4,500 debit posting to Equipment was posted mistakenly to Supplies.
c. An entry debiting Cash and crediting Accounts Payable for $4,500 was mistakenly not posted.
d. A $2,250 credit to Revenue in a journal entry is incorrectly posted to the ledger as a $2,250 debit, leaving the Revenue account with a $6,300 credit balance.
e. A $4,500 debit to Rent Expense in a journal entry is incorrectly posted to the ledger as a $4,500 credit, leaving the Rent Expense account with a $750 debit balance.
f. A $2,250 debit to Utilities Expense in a journal entry is incorrectly posted to the ledger as a $2,250 credit, leaving the Utilities Expense account with a $3,000 debit balance.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Enter the number for the item that best completes each of the descriptions below.
1. General ledger
2. Chart
a. The is a record containing all accounts used by a company.
b. A of accounts is a list of all accounts a company uses.
2. For each of the following identify the type of account as an asset, liability, equity, revenue, or expense, identify the normal balance of the account, and enter debit (Dr.) or credit (Cr.) to identify the kind of entry that would increase the account balance.
a. Fees Earned
b. Equipment j. Owner Withdrawals
c. Notes Payable
d. Owner Capital
e. Cash
f. Legal Expense
g. Prepaid Insurance
h. Land
i. Accounts Receivable
k. License Fee Revenue
l. Unearned Revenue
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
J. D. Simpson started The Simpson Co., a new business that began operations on May 1. The Simpson Co. completed the following transactions during its first month of operations.
May 1 J. D. Simpson invested $60,000 cash in the company.
1 The company rented a furnished office and paid $3,200 cash for May’s rent.
3 The company purchased $1,680 of office equipment on credit.
5 The company paid $800 cash for this month’s cleaning services.
8 The company provided consulting services for a client and immediately collected $4,600 cash.
12 The company provided $3,000 of consulting services for a client on credit.
15 The company paid $850 cash for an assistant’s salary for the first half of this month.
20 The company received $3,000 cash payment for the services provided on May 12.
22 The company provided $2,800 of consulting services on credit.
25 The company received $2,800 cash payment for the services provided on May 22.
26 The company paid $1,680 cash for the office equipment purchased on May 3.
27 The company purchased $60 of advertising in this month’s (May) local paper on credit; cash payment is due June 1.
28 The company paid $850 cash for an assistant’s salary for the second half of this month.
30 The company paid $200 cash for this month’s telephone bill.
30 The company paid $480 cash for this month’s utilities.
31 J. D. Simpson withdrew $1,200 cash from the company for personal use.
Required
1. Arrange the following asset, liability, and equity titles in a table: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; J. D. Simpson, Capital; J. D. Simpson, Withdrawals; Revenues; and Expenses.
2. Show effects of the transactions on the accounts of the accounting equation by recording increases and decreases in the appropriate columns. Do not determine new account balances after each transaction. Determine the final total for each account and verify that the equation is in balance.
3. Prepare an income statement for May, a statement of owner’s equity for May, a May 31 balance sheet, and a statement of cash flows for May.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Coca Cola and PepsiCo both produce and market beverages that are direct competitors. Key financial figures (in $ millions) for these businesses over the past year follow.
|
Key Figures ($ millions) Coca Cola PepsiCo
|
|
Sales
|
$30,990
|
$43,232
|
|
Net income
|
6,906
|
5,979
|
|
Average assets
|
44,595
|
37,921
|
Required
1. Compute return on assets for (a) Coca Cola and (b) PepsiCo.
2. Which company is more successful in its total amount of sales to consumers?
3. Which company is more successful in returning net income from its assets invested?
4. Write a one paragraph memorandum explaining which company you would invest your money in and why. (Limit your explanation to the information provided.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following financial statement information is from five separate companies:
|
|
Company A
|
Company B
|
Company C
|
Company D
|
Company
E
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
$45,000
|
$35,000
|
$29,000
|
$80,000
|
$123,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
23,500
|
22,500
|
14,000
|
38,000
|
?
|
|
31 Dec 11
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
48,000
|
41,000
|
?
|
125,000
|
112,500
|
|
Liabilities
|
?
|
27,500
|
19,000
|
64,000
|
75,000
|
|
During year 2011
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner investments
|
5,000
|
1,500
|
7,750
|
?
|
4,500
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
7,500
|
?
|
9,000
|
12,000
|
18,000
|
|
Owner cash withdrawals
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
3,875
|
0
|
9,000
|
Required
1. Answer the following questions about Company A:
a. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2010?
b. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2011?
c. What is the amount of liabilities on December 31, 2011?
2. Answer the following questions about Company B:
a. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2010?
b. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2011?
c. What is net income for year 2011?
3. Calculate the amount of assets for Company C on December 31, 2011.
4. Calculate the amount of owner investments for Company D during year 2011.
5. Calculate the amount of liabilities for Company E on December 31, 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The following is selected financial information for Affiliated Company as of December 31, 2011.
|
Liabilities $ 74,000
|
Equity $ 56,000
|
Assets $ 90,000
|
Required
Prepare the balance sheet for Affiliated Company as of December 31, 2011.
2. The following is selected financial information for Sun Energy Company for the year ended December 31, 2011.
|
Revenues $ 65,000
|
Expenses $ 56,000
|
Income $ 90,000
|
Required
Prepare the 2011 calendar year income statement for Sun Energy Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Following is selected financial information for Boardwalk for the year ended December 31, 2011.
|
B. Walk, Capital, Dec. 31, 2011
|
$15,000
|
B. Walk,Withdrawals
|
$2,000
|
|
Net income
|
9,000
|
B. Walk, Capital, Dec. 31, 2010
|
8,000
|
Required
Prepare the 2011 statement of owner’s equity for Boardwalk.
2. Following is selected financial information of Trimark for the year ended December 31, 2011.
|
Cash used by investing activities
|
$(3,000)
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
200
|
|
Cash used by financing activities
|
(3,800)
|
|
Cash from operating activities
|
7,000
|
|
Cash, December 31, 2010
|
3,300
|
Required
Prepare the 2011 statement of cash flows for Trimark Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Curtis Hamilton started a new business and completed these transactions during December.
1 Curtis Hamilton transferred $56,000 cash from a personal savings account to a checking account in the name of Hamilton Electric.
2 The company rented office space and paid $800 cash for the December rent.
3 The company purchased $14,000 of electrical equipment by paying $3,200 cash and agreeing to pay the $10,800 balance in 30 days.
5 The company purchased office supplies by paying $900 cash.
6 The company completed electrical work and immediately collected $1,000 cash for these services.
8 The company purchased $3,800 of office equipment on credit.
15 The company completed electrical work on credit in the amount of $4,000.
18 The company purchased $500 of office supplies on credit.
20 The company paid $3,800 cash for the office equipment purchased on December 8.
24 The company billed a client $600 for electrical work completed; the balance is due in 30 days.
28 The company received $4,000 cash for the work completed on December 15.
29 The company paid the assistant’s salary of $1,200 cash for this month.
30 The company paid $440 cash for this month’s utility bill.
31 C. Hamilton withdrew $700 cash from the company for personal use.
Required
1. Arrange the following asset, liability, and equity titles in a table: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Office Supplies; Office Equipment; Electrical Equipment; Accounts Payable; C. Hamilton, Capital; C. Hamilton, Withdrawals; Revenues; and Expenses.
2. Use additions and subtractions to show the effects of each transaction on the accounts in the accounting equation. Show new balances after each transaction.
3. Use the increases and decreases in the columns of the table from part 2 to prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a statement of cash flows—each of these for the current month. Also prepare a balance sheet as of the end of the month.
4. Assume that the owner investment transaction on December 1 was $40,000 cash instead of $56,000 and that Hamilton Electric obtained another $16,000 in cash by borrowing it from a bank. Explain the effect of this change on total assets, total liabilities, and total equity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Coca Cola and PepsiCo both produce and market beverages that are direct competitors. Key financial figures (in $ millions) for these businesses over the past year follow.
|
Key Figures ($ millions)
|
Coco cola
|
PepsiCo
|
|
Sales
|
$30,990
|
$43,232
|
|
Net income
|
6,906
|
5,979
|
|
Average assets
|
44,595
|
37,921
|
Required
1. Compute return on assets for (a) Coca Cola and (b) PepsiCo.
2. Which company is more successful in its total amount of sales to consumers?
3. Which company is more successful in returning net income from its assets invested?
4. Write a one paragraph memorandum explaining which company you would invest your money in and why. (Limit your explanation to the information provided.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify how each of the following separate transactions affects financial statements. For the balance sheet, identify how each transaction affects total assets, total liabilities, and total equity. For the income statement, identify how each transaction affects net income. For the statement of cash flows, identify how each transaction affects cash flows from operating activities, cash flows from financing activities, and cash flows from investing activities. For increases, place a “1” in the column or columns. For decreases, place a “2” in the column or columns. If both an increase and a decrease occur, place “1y2” in the column or columns. The first transaction is completed as an example.
|
Balance sheet Income Statement Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
Transaction
|
Total Assets
|
Total Liab.
|
Total Equity
|
Net Income
|
Operating Activities
|
Financing Activities
|
Investing Activities
|
|
1
|
Owner Invests cash In business
|
+
|
|
+
|
|
|
+
|
|
|
2
|
Buys building by signing note payable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
Pays cash for salarles incurred
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
Provides services for cash
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5
|
Pay cash for rent incurred
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
Incurs utilities costs on credit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7
|
Buys store equipment for cash
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8
|
Owner withdraws cash
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
9
|
Provides services on credit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
10
|
Collects cash on receivable from (9)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following financial statement information is from five separate companies.
|
|
Company V
|
Company W
|
Company X
|
Company Y
|
Company Z
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
31 Dec 11
|
$45,000
|
$70,000
|
$121,500
|
$82,500
|
$124,000
|
|
Assets
|
30,000
|
50,000
|
58,500
|
61,500
|
?
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
During year 2011
|
49,000
|
90,000
|
136,500
|
?
|
160,000
|
|
Owner investments
|
26,000
|
?
|
55,500
|
72,000
|
52,000
|
|
Net income or (loss)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner cash withdrawals
|
6,000
|
10,000
|
?
|
38,100
|
40,000
|
|
31 Dec 11
|
?
|
30,000
|
16,500
|
24,000
|
32,000
|
|
Assets
|
4,500
|
2,000
|
0
|
18,000
|
6,000
|
Required
1. Answer the following questions about Company V:
a. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2010?
b. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2011?
c. What is the net income or loss for the year 2011?
2. Answer the following questions about Company W:
a. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2010?
b. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2011?
c. What is the amount of liabilities on December 31, 2011?
3. Calculate the amount of owner investments for Company X during 2011.
4. Calculate the amount of assets for Company Y on December 31, 2011.
5. Calculate the amount of liabilities for Company Z on December 31, 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 .Following is selected financial information of Com Ex for the year ended December 31, 2011.
|
C. Tex, Capital, Dec. 31, 2011
|
$47,000
|
C. Tex,Withdrawals
|
$ 8,000
|
|
Net income
|
6,000
|
C. Tex, Capital, Dec. 31, 2010
|
49,000
|
Required
Prepare the 2011 statement of owner’s equity for Com Ex.
2. Selected financial information of Buy Right Co. for the year ended December 31, 2011, follows.
|
Cash from investing activities
|
$2,600
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
1,400
|
|
Cash from financing activities
|
2,800
|
|
Cash used by operating activities
|
(4,000)
|
|
Cash, December 31, 2010
|
1,300
|
Required
Prepare the 2011 statement of cash flows for Buy Right Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tiana Moore started a new business, Tiana’s Solutions, and completed the following transactions during its first year of operations.
a. T. Moore invests $95,000 cash and office equipment valued at $20,000 in the company.
b. The company purchased a $120,000 building to use as an office. It paid $20,000 in cash and signed a note payable promising to pay the $100,000 balance over the next ten years.
c. The company purchased office equipment for $20,000 cash.
d. The company purchased $1,400 of office supplies and $3,000 of office equipment on credit.
e. The company paid a local newspaper $400 cash for printing an announcement of the office’s opening.
f. The company completed a financial plan for a client and billed that client $1,800 for the service.
g. The company designed a financial plan for another client and immediately collected a $2,000 cash fee.
h. T. Moore withdrew $5,000 cash from the company for personal use.
i. The company received $1,800 cash from the client described in transaction f.
j. The company made a payment of $2,000 cash on the equipment purchased in transaction d.
k. The company paid $2,000 cash for the office secretary’s wages.
Required
1. Create a table, using the following headings for the columns: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Office Supplies; Office Equipment; Building; Accounts Payable; Notes Payable; T. Moore, Capital; T. Moore, Withdrawals; Revenues; and Expenses.
2. Use additions and subtractions within the table created in part 1 to show the dollar effects of each transaction on individual items of the accounting equation. Show new balances after each transaction.
3. Once you have completed the table, determine the company’s net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ken Stone launched a new business, Ken’s Maintenance Co., that began operations on June 1. The following transactions were completed by the company during that first month.
June 1 K. Stone invested $120,000 cash in the company.
2 The company rented a furnished office and paid $4,500 cash for June’s rent.
4 The company purchased $2,400 of equipment on credit.
6 The company paid $1,125 cash for this month’s advertising of the opening of the business.
8 The company completed maintenance services for a customer and immediately collected $750 cash.
14 The company completed $6,300 of maintenance services for City Center on credit.
16 The company paid $900 cash for an assistant’s salary for the first half of the month.
20 The company received $6,300 cash payment for services completed for City Center on June 14.
21 The company completed $3,500 of maintenance services for Skyway Co. on credit.
24 The company completed $825 of maintenance services for Comfort Motel on credit.
25 The company received $3,500 cash payment from Skyway Co. for the work completed on June 21.
26 The company made payment of $2,400 cash for equipment purchased on June 4.
28 The company paid $900 cash for an assistant’s salary for the second half of this month.
29 K. Stone withdrew $2,000 cash from the company for personal use.
30 The company paid $120 cash for this month’s telephone bill.
30 The company paid $525 cash for this month’s utilities.
Required
1. Arrange the following asset, liability, and equity titles in a table: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Equipment; Accounts Payable; K. Stone, Capital; K. Stone, Withdrawals; Revenues; and Expenses.
2. Show the effects of the transactions on the accounts of the accounting equation by recording increases and decreases in the appropriate columns. Do not determine new account balances after each transaction. Determine the final total for each account and verify that the equation is in balance.
3. Prepare a June income statement, a June statement of owner’s equity, a June 30 balance sheet, and a June statement of cash flows.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, 2011, Santana Rey launched a computer services company, Business Solutions, that is organized as a proprietorship and provides consulting services, computer system installations, and custom program development. Rey adopts the calendar year for reporting purposes and expects to prepare the company’s first set of financial statements on December 31, 2011.
Required
Create a table using the following headings for columns: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Computer Supplies; Computer System; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; S. Rey, Capital; S. Rey, Withdrawals; Revenues; and Expenses. Then use additions and subtractions within the table created to show the dollar effects for each of the following October transactions for Business Solutions on the individual items of the accounting equation. Show new balances after each transaction.
Oct. 1 S. Rey invested $45,000 cash, a $20,000 computer system, and $8,000 of office equipment in the company.
3 The company purchased $1,420 of computer supplies on credit from Harris Office Products.
6 The company billed Easy Leasing $4,800 for services performed in installing a new Web server.
8 The company paid $1,420 cash for the computer supplies purchased from Harris Office Products on October 3.
10 The company hired Lyn Addie as a part time assistant for $125 per day, as needed.
12 The company billed Easy Leasing another $1,400 for services performed.
15 The company received $4,800 cash from Easy Leasing as partial payment toward its account.
17 The company paid $805 cash to repair computer equipment damaged when moving it.
20 The company paid $1,728 cash for advertisements published in the local newspaper.
22 The company received $1,400 cash from Easy Leasing toward its account.
28 The company billed IFM Company $5,208 for services performed.
31 The company paid $875 cash for Lyn Addie’s wages for seven days of work this month.
31 S. Rey withdrew $3,600 cash from the company for personal use.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Key financial figures for Research In Motion’s fiscal year ended February 27, 2010, follow.
|
Key Figure
|
In Millions
|
|
Liabilities 1 Equity
|
$10,204
|
|
Net income
|
2,457
|
|
Revenues
|
14,953
|
Required
1. What is the total amount of assets invested in Research In Motion?
2. What is Research In Motion’s return on assets? Its assets at February 28, 2009, equal $8,101 (in millions).
3. How much are total expenses for Research In Motion for the year ended February 27, 2010?
4. Does Research In Motion’s return on assets seem satisfactory if competitors average an 18% return?
5. Access Research In Motion’s financial statements (Form 10 K) for fiscal years ending after February 27, 2010, from its from the SEC compute its return on assets for those fiscal years. Compare the February 27, 2010, fiscal year end return on assets to any subsequent years’ returns you are able to compute, and interpret the results.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Key comparative figures ($ millions) for both Research In Motion and Apple follow.
|
Key Figure
|
Research In Motion
|
Apple
|
|
Liabilities 1 Equity
|
$10,204
|
$47,501
|
|
Net income
|
2,457
|
8,235
|
|
Revenues and sales
|
14,953
|
42,905
|
Required
1. What is the total amount of assets invested in (a) Research In Motion and (b) Apple?
2. What is the return on assets for (a) Research In Motion and (b) Apple? Research In Motion’s beginning year assets equal $8,101 (in millions) and Apple’s beginning year assets equal $36,171 (in millions).
3. How much are expenses for (a) Research In Motion and (b) Apple?
4. Is return on assets satisfactory for (a) Research In Motion and (b) Apple? (Assume competitors average an 18% return.)
5. What can you conclude about Research In Motion and Apple from these computations?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to this chapter’s opening feature about Facebook. Assume that Mark Zuckerberg decides to open a new Website devoted to social networking for accountants and those studying accounting. This new company will be called Account Book.
Required
1. Account Book obtains a $500,000 loan and Mark Zuckerberg contributes $250,000 of his own assets in exchange for common stock in the new company.
a. What is the new company’s total amount of liabilities plus equity?
b. What is the new company’s total amount of assets?
2. If the new company earns $80,000 in net income in the first year of operation, compute its return on asset (assume average assets equal $750,000). Assess its performance if competitors average a 10% return.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are to interview a local business owner. (This can be a friend or relative.) Opening lines of communication with members of the business community can provide personal benefits of business networking. If you do not know the owner, you should call ahead to introduce yourself and explain your position as a student and your assignment requirements. You should request a thirty minute appointment for a face to face or phone interview to discuss the form of organization and operations of the business. Be prepared to make a good impression.
Required
1. Identify and describe the main operating activities and the form of organization for this business.
2. Determine and explain why the owner(s) chose this particular form of organization.
3. Identify any special advantages and/or disadvantages the owner(s) experiences in operating with this form of business organization.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify which accounting principle or assumption best describes each of the following practices:
A. If $51,000 cash is paid to buy land, the land is reported on the buyer’s balance sheet at $51,000.
Business entity assumption
Objectivity principle
Revenue recognition principle
Monetary unit principle
Cost principle or historical cost
Going concern principle
B. Alissa Kees owns both Sailing Passions and Dockside Supplies. In preparing financial statements for Dockside Supplies, Kees makes sure that the expense transactions of Sailing Passions are kept separate from Dockside’s transactions and financial statements.
Revenue recognition principle
Cost principle or historical cost
Monetary unit principle
Business entity assumption
Objectivity principle
Going concern principle
C. In December 2010, Ace Landscaping received a customer’s order and cash prepayment to install sod at a new house that would not be ready for installation until March 2011. Ace should record the revenue from the customer order in March 2011, not in December 2010.
Cost principle or historical cost
Monetary unit principle
Going concern principle
Objectivity principle
Revenue recognition principle
Business entity assumption
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. a. Total assets of Caldwell Company equal $40,000 and its equity is $10,000. What is the amount of its liabilities?
b. Total assets of Water world equal $55,000 and its liabilities and equity amounts are equal to each other. What is the amount of its liabilities? What is the amount of its equity?
2. Use the accounting equation to compute the missing financial statement amounts (a), (b), and (c).
|
Company Assets = Liabilities+ Equity
|
|
1
|
$ 30,000
|
$ (a)
|
$ 20,000
|
|
2
|
(b)
|
50,000
|
30,000
|
|
3
|
90,000
|
10,000
|
(c)
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. In a recent year’s financial statements, Home Depot reported the following results. Compute and interpret Home Depot’s return on assets (assume competitors average a 5% return on assets).
|
Sales
|
$71,288 million
|
|
Net income
|
2,260 million
|
|
Average total assets
|
42,744 million
|
2. Indicate in which financial statement each item would most likely appear: income statement (I), balance sheet (B), statement of owner’s equity (OE), or statement of cash flows (CF).
a. Assets
b. Revenues
c. Liabilities
d. Equipment
e. Withdrawals
f. Expenses
g. Total liabilities and equity
h. Cash from operating activities
i. Net decrease (or increase) in cash
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part A. Identify the following users of accounting information as either an internal (I) or an external (E) user.
1. Shareholders
2. Creditors
3. Nonexecutive employee
4. Research and development director
5. Purchasing manager
6. Human resources director
7. Production supervisors
8. Distribution managers
Part B. Identify the following questions as most likely to be asked by an internal (I) or an external (E) user of accounting information.
1. What are the costs of our service to customers?
2. Should we make a five year loan to that business?
3. Should we spend further research on our product?
4. Do income levels justify the current stock price?
5. What are reasonable payroll benefits and wages?
6. Which firm reports the highest sales and income?
7. What are the costs of our product’s ingredients?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match each of the numbered descriptions with the term or phrase it best reflects. Indicate your answer by writing the letter for the term or phrase in the blank provided.
A. Audit
B. GAAP
C. Ethics
D. Tax accounting
E. SEC
G. Net income
F. Public accountants
H. IASB
1. Amount a business earns after paying all expenses and costs associated with its sales and revenues.
2. An examination of an organization’s accounting system and records that adds credibility to financial statements.
3. Principles that determine whether an action is right or wrong.
4. Accounting professionals who provide services to many clients.
5. An accounting area that includes planning future transactions to minimize taxes paid.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match each of the numbered descriptions with the principle or assumption it best reflects. Enter the letter for the appropriate principle or assumption in the blank space next to each description.
A. Cost principle
B. Matching principle
C. Specific accounting principle
D. Full disclosure principle
E. General accounting principle
F. Business entity assumption
G. Revenue recognition principle
H. Going concern assumption
1. Revenue is recorded only when the earnings process is complete.
2. Information is based on actual costs incurred in transactions.
3. Usually created by a pronouncement from an authoritative body.
4. Financial statements reflect the assumption that the business continues operating.
5. A company reports details behind financial statements that would impact users’ decisions.
6. A company records the expenses incurred to generate the revenues reported.
7. Derived from long used and generally accepted accounting practices.
8. Every business is accounted for separately from its owner or owners.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following describe several different business organizations. Determine whether the description refers to a sole proprietorship, partnership, or corporation.
a. A 1 pays its own income taxes and has two owners.
b. Ownership of Zeller Company is divided into 1,000 shares of stock.
c. Waldron is owned by Mary Malone, who is personally liable for the company’s debts.
d. Micah Douglas and Nathan Logan own Financial Services, a financial services provider. Neither Douglas nor Logan has personal responsibility for the debts of Financial Services.
e. Bailey and Kay own Squeaky Clean, a cleaning service. Both are personally liable for the debts of the business.
f. Plasto Products does not pay income taxes and has one owner.
g. Ian LLC does not have separate legal existence apart from the one person who owns it.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Determine the missing amount from each of the separate situations a, b, and c below.
|
Assets = Liabilities + Equity
|
|
(a) $ ?
|
$ 30,000
|
$ 65,000
|
|
(b) 89,000
|
22,000
|
?
|
|
(c) 132,000
|
?
|
20,000
|
2. Provide an example of a transaction that creates the described effects for the separate cases a through g.
a. Increases an asset and decreases an asset.
b. Decreases an asset and decreases a liability.
c. Decreases a liability and increases a liability.
d. Increases an asset and increases a liability.
e. Decreases an asset and decreases equity.
f. Increases a liability and decreases equity.
g. Increases an asset and increases equity.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lena Gold began a professional practice on June 1 and plans to prepare financial statements at the end of each month. During June, Gold (the owner) completed these transactions:
a. Owner invested $50,000 cash in the company along with equipment that had a $10,000 market value.
b. The company paid $1,600 cash for rent of office space for the month.
c. The company purchased $12,000 of additional equipment on credit (payment due within 30 days).
d. The company completed work for a client and immediately collected the $2,000 cash earned.
e. The company completed work for a client and sent a bill for $7,000 to be received within 30 days.
f. The company purchased additional equipment for $8,000 cash.
g. The company paid an assistant $2,400 cash as wages for the month.
h. The company collected $5,000 cash as a partial payment for the amount owed by the client in transaction e.
i. The company paid $12,000 cash to settle the liability created in transaction c.
j. Owner withdrew $500 cash from the company for personal use.
Required
Create a table, using the following headings for columns: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Equipment; Accounts Payable; L. Gold, Capital; L. Gold, Withdrawals; Revenues; and Expenses. Then use additions and subtractions to show the effects of the transactions on individual items of the accounting equation. Show new balances after each transaction.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Zelda began a new consulting firm on January 5. The accounting equation showed the following balances after each of the company’s first five transactions. Analyze the accounting equation for each transaction and describe each of the five transactions with their amounts.
|
Assets = Liabilities + Equity
|
|
|
|
Accounts
Receiv
able
|
|
Office
Sup
plies
|
|
Office
Furni
ture
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Trans
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts
Payable
|
|
Zelda,
Capital
|
|
|
|
action
|
Cash
|
+
|
+
|
+
|
=
|
+
|
+
|
Revenues
|
|
a.
|
$20,000
|
+
|
$ 0
|
+
|
$ 0
|
+
|
$ 0
|
=
|
$ 0
|
+
|
$20,000
|
+
|
$ 0
|
|
b.
|
19,000
|
+
|
0
|
+
|
1,500
|
+
|
0
|
=
|
500
|
+
|
20,000
|
+
|
0
|
|
c.
|
11,000
|
+
|
0
|
+
|
1,500
|
+
|
8,000
|
=
|
500
|
+
|
20,000
|
+
|
0
|
|
d.
|
11,000
|
+
|
3,000
|
+
|
1,500
|
+
|
8,000
|
=
|
500
|
+
|
20,000
|
+
|
3,000
|
|
e.
|
11,500
|
+
|
3,000
|
+
|
1,500
|
+
|
8,000
|
=
|
500
|
+
|
20,000
|
+
|
3,500
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, Natalie King organized Real Solutions, a new consulting firm. On October 31, the company’s records show the following items and amounts. Use this information to prepare an October income statement for the business.
|
Cash
|
$ 2,000
|
Cash withdrawals by owner
|
$ 3,360
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
13,000
|
Consulting fees earned
|
15,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
4,250
|
Rent expense
|
2,550
|
|
Land
|
36,000
|
Salaries expense
|
6,000
|
|
Office equipment
|
28,000
|
Telephone expense
|
660
|
|
Accounts payable
|
7,500
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
680
|
|
Owner investments
|
74,000
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, Natalie King organized Real Solutions, a new consulting firm. On October 31, the company’s records show the following items and amounts. Use this information to prepare an October income statement for the business.
|
Cash
|
$ 2,000
|
Cash withdrawals by owner
|
$ 3,360
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
13,000
|
Consulting fees earned
|
15,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
4,250
|
Rent expense
|
2,550
|
|
Land
|
36,000
|
Salaries expense
|
6,000
|
|
Office equipment
|
28,000
|
Telephone expense
|
660
|
|
Accounts payable
|
7,500
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
680
|
|
Owner investments
|
74,000
|
|
|
Prepare an October statement of owner’s equity for Real Solutions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, Natalie King organized Real Solutions, a new consulting firm. On October 31, the company’s records show the following items and amounts. Use this information to prepare an October income statement for the business.
|
Cash
|
$ 2,000
|
Consulting fees earned
|
$ 3,360
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
13,000
|
Rent expense
|
15,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
4,250
|
Salaries expense
|
2,550
|
|
Land
|
36,000
|
Telephone expense
|
6,000
|
|
Office equipment
|
28,000
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
660
|
|
Accounts payable
|
7,500
|
Consulting fees earned
|
680
|
|
Owner investments
|
74,000
|
|
|
Prepare an October 31 balance sheet for Real Solutions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
On October 1, Natalie King organized Real Solutions, a new consulting firm. On October 31, the company’s records show the following items and amounts. Use this information to prepare an October income statement for the business.
|
Cash
|
$ 2,000
|
Cash withdrawals by owner
|
$ 3,360
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
13,000
|
Consulting fees earned
|
15,000
|
|
Office supplies
|
4,250
|
Rent expense
|
2,550
|
|
Land
|
36,000
|
Salaries expense
|
6,000
|
|
Office equipment
|
28,000
|
Telephone expense
|
660
|
|
Accounts payable
|
7,500
|
Miscellaneous expenses
|
680
|
|
Owner investments
|
74,000
|
|
|
Prepare an October 31 statement of cash flows for Real Solutions. Also assume the following:
a. The owner’s initial investment consists of $38,000 cash and $36,000 in land.
b. The company’s $28,000 equipment purchase is paid in cash.
c. The accounts payable balance of $7,500 consists of the $4,250 office supplies purchase and $3,250 in employee salaries yet to be paid.
d. The company’s rent, telephone, and miscellaneous expenses are paid in cash.
e. $2,000 has been collected on the $15,000 consulting fees earned.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Geneva Group reports net income of $20,000 for 2011. At the beginning of 2011, Geneva Group had $100,000 in assets. By the end of 2011, assets had grown to $150,000. What is Geneva Group’s 2011 return on assets? How would you assess its performance if competitors average a 10% return on assets?
2. Indicate the section where each of the following would appear on the statement of cash flows.
A. Cash flows from operating activity
B. Cash flows from investing activity
C. Cash flows from financing activity
1. Cash paid for wages
2. Cash withdrawal by owner
3. Cash purchase of equipment
4. Cash paid for advertising
5. Cash paid on an account payable
6. Cash investment by owner
7. Cash received from clients
8. Cash paid for rent
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nintendo Company reports the following income statement accounts for the year ended March 31, 2009. (Japanese yen in millions.)
|
Net sales
|
¥1,838,622
|
|
Cost of sales
|
1,044,981
|
|
Selling, general and administrative expenses
|
238,378
|
|
Other expenses
|
276,174
|
Use this information to prepare Nintendo’s income statement for the year ended March 31, 2009.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify how each of the following separate transactions affects financial statements. For the balance sheet, identify how each transaction affects total assets, total liabilities, and total equity. For the income statement, identify how each transaction affects net income. For the statement of cash flows, identify how each transaction affects cash flows from operating activities, cash flows from financing activities, and cash flows from investing activities. For increases, place a “+” in the column or columns. For decreases, place a “ ” in the column or columns. If both an increase and a decrease occur, place a “+/ ” in the column or columns. The first transaction is completed as an example.
|
Balance sheet Income Statement Statement of Cash Flows
|
|
Transaction
|
Total Assets
|
Total Liab.
|
Total Equity
|
Net Income
|
Operating Activities
|
Financing Activities
|
Investing Activities
|
|
1
|
Owner Invests cash In business
|
+
|
|
+
|
|
|
+
|
|
|
2
|
Incurs legal costs on credit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
Pays cash for employee wages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4
|
Borrows cash by signing long term note payable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5
|
Receives cash for services provided
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6
|
Buys land by signing note payable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7
|
Busy office equipment for cash
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8
|
Provides services on credit
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
9
|
Collects cash on receivable from (8)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
10
|
Owner withdraws cash
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following financial statement information is from five separate companies:
|
|
Company A
|
Company B
|
Company C
|
Company D
|
Company
E
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
$45,000
|
$35,000
|
$29,000
|
$80,000
|
$123,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
23,500
|
22,500
|
14,000
|
38,000
|
?
|
|
31 Dec 11
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
48,000
|
41,000
|
?
|
125,000
|
112,500
|
|
Liabilities
|
?
|
27,500
|
19,000
|
64,000
|
75,000
|
|
During year 2011
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Owner investments
|
5,000
|
1,500
|
7,750
|
?
|
4,500
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
7,500
|
?
|
9,000
|
12,000
|
18,000
|
|
Owner cash withdrawals
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
3,875
|
0
|
9,000
|
Required
1. Answer the following questions about Company A:
a. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2010?
b. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2011?
c. What is the amount of liabilities on December 31, 2011?
2. Answer the following questions about Company B:
a. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2010?
b. What is the amount of equity on December 31, 2011?
c. What is net income for year 2011?
3. Calculate the amount of assets for Company C on December 31, 2011.
4. Calculate the amount of owner investments for Company D during year 2011.
5. Calculate the amount of liabilities for Company E on December 31, 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Following is selected financial information for Boardwalk for the year ended December 31, 2011.
|
B. Walk, Capital, Dec. 31, 2011.
|
$15,000
|
B. Walk,Withdrawals
|
$2,000
|
|
Net income
|
9,000
|
B. Walk, Capital, Dec. 31, 2010
|
8,000
|
Required
Prepare the 2011 statement of owner’s equity for Boardwalk.
2. Following is selected financial information of Trimark for the year ended December 31, 2011.
|
Cash used by investing activities
|
$(3,000)
|
|
Net increase in cash
|
200
|
|
Cash used by financing activities
|
(3,800)
|
|
Cash from operating activities
|
7,000
|
|
Cash, December 31, 2010
|
3,300
|
Required
Prepare the 2011 statement of cash flows for Trimark Company.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Miranda Right started Right Consulting, a new business, and completed the following transactions during its first year of operations.
a. M. Right invests $60,000 cash and office equipment valued at $30,000 in the company.
b. The company purchased a $300,000 building to use as an office. Right paid $50,000 in cash and signed a note payable promising to pay the $250,000 balance over the next ten years.
c. The company purchased office equipment for $6,000 cash.
d. The company purchased $4,000 of office supplies and $1,000 of office equipment on credit.
e. The company paid a local newspaper $1,000 cash for printing an announcement of the office’s opening.
f. The company completed a financial plan for a client and billed that client $4,000 for the service.
g. The company designed a financial plan for another client and immediately collected an $8,000 cash fee.
h. M. Right withdrew $1,800 cash from the company for personal use.
i. The company received $3,000 cash as partial payment from the client described in transaction f.
j. The company made a partial payment of $500 cash on the equipment purchased in transaction d.
k. The company paid $2,500 cash for the office secretary’s wages for this period.
Required
1. Create a table, using the following headings for the columns: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Office Supplies; Office Equipment; Building; Accounts Payable; Notes Payable; M. Right, Capital; M. Right, Withdrawals; Revenues; and Expenses.
2. Use additions and subtractions within the table created in part 1 to show the dollar effects of each transaction on individual items of the accounting equation. Show new balances after each transaction.
3. Once you have completed the table, determine the company’s net income.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Asset replacement) Arizona Mechanical recently created a new product, a computer controlled, laser precise lathe, and Ohio Ornamental Metals is considering purchasing one. Ohio’s CFO received the following information from the accounting department regarding the company’s existing lathe and the new Arizona Mechanical lathe. The savings in operating costs offered by the new lathe would mostly derive from reduced waste, reduced labor, and energy cost savings.
|
Old Machine
|
|
Original cost
|
$875,000
|
|
Present book value
|
$150,000
|
|
Annual cash operating costs
|
$450,000
|
|
Market value now
|
$200,000
|
|
Market value in 5 years
|
$0
|
|
Remaining useful life
|
5 years
|
|
New Machine
|
|
|
Cost
|
$1,600,000
|
|
Annual cash operating costs
|
$155,000
|
|
Market value in 5 years
|
$0
|
|
Useful life
|
5 years
|
a. Based on financial considerations alone, should Ohio Ornamental Metals purchase the new lathe? Show computations to support your answer.
b. What qualitative factors should Ohio Ornamental Metals consider before making a decision about purchasing the new lathe?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Asset replacement) Missouri River Energy Company provides electrical services to several rural counties in Nebraska and South Dakota. Its efficiency has been greatly affected by changes in technology. The company is currently considering the replacement of its main steam turbine, which was put in place in the 1980s but is now obsolete. The turbine’s operation is very reliable, but it is much less efficient than newer, computer controlled turbines. The controller presented the following financial information to corporate management:
|
|
Old Turbine
|
New Turbine
|
|
Original cost
|
$4,000,000
|
$6,000,000
|
|
Market value now
|
$400,000
|
$6,000,000
|
|
Remaining life
|
8 years
|
8 years
|
|
Quarterly operating costs
|
$210,000
|
$45,000
|
|
Salvage value in 8 years
|
$0
|
$0
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
$800,000
|
N/A
|
a. Identify the costs that are relevant to the company’s equipment replacement decision.
b. Determine whether it is more financially sound to keep the old turbine or replace it. Provide your own computations based on relevant costs only.
c. For this part only, assume that the acquisition cost of the new technology is unknown. What is the maximum amount that the company could pay for the new technology and be in the same financial condition as it is in currently?
d. What other considerations would come into play if, rather than a new turbine, the company were considering solar powered technology to replace the old turbine system?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Outsourcing) Louisiana Luggage Components manufactures handles for suit cases and other luggage. Attaching each handle to the luggage requires, depending on the size of the luggage piece, between two and six standard fasteners, which the company has historically produced. The costs to produce one fastener (based on capacity operation of 4,000,000 units per year) are:
|
Direct material
|
$0.08
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.06
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
0.04
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
0.07
|
|
Total
|
$0.25
|
Fixed factory overhead includes $100,000 of depreciation on equipment for which there is no alternative use and no market value. The balance of the fixed factory overhead pertains to the salary of the production supervisor, JeffWittier. Wittier has a lifetime employment contract and the skills that could be used to replace Brenda Gibbons, supervisor of floor maintenance. She draws a salary of $50,000 per year but is due to retire from the company.
Saratoga Suitcase Co. recently approached Louisiana Luggage Components with an offer to supply all required fasteners for $0.19 per unit. Anticipated sales demand for the coming year will require 4,000,000 fasteners.
a. Identify the costs that are relevant in this outsourcing decision.
b. What is the total annual advantage or disadvantage (in dollars) of outsourcing the fasteners rather than making them?
c. What qualitative factors should be taken into account in making this decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Outsourcing) Structural Steel Systems manufactures steel buildings for agricultural and home applications. Currently, managers are trying to decide between two alternatives regarding a major overhead door assembly for the company’s buildings. The alternatives are as follows:
- Purchase new equipment with a five year life and no salvage value at a cost of $10,000,000. The company uses straight line depreciation and allocates that amount on a per unit of production basis.
- Purchase the assemblies from an outside vendor who will sell them for $480 each under a five year contract.
Following is Structural Steel Systems’ present cost to produce one door assembly based on current and normal activity of 50,000 units per year
|
Direct material
|
$278
|
|
Direct labor
|
132
|
|
Variable overhead
|
86
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
72
|
|
Total
|
$568
|
The new equipment would be more efficient than the old equipment and would re duce direct labor costs and variable overhead costs by 25 percent. Supervisory costs of $700,000 would be unaffected. The new equipment would have a capacity of 75,000 assemblies per year. Structural Steel Systems could lease the space occupied by current assembly production to another firm for $228,000 per year if the company decides to buy from the outside vendor.
a. Show an analysis, including relevant unit and total costs, for each alternative of producing or buying the assemblies. Assume 50,000 assemblies are needed each year.
b. How would your answer differ if 60,000 assemblies were needed?
c. How would your answer differ if 75,000 assemblies were needed?
d. In addition to quantitative factors, what qualitative factors should be considered?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Each of the following proposals is to be considered independently of the other proposals. Consider only the product changes stated in each proposal; the activity of the other proposals remains stable.
a. What is the effect on income if Product P is discontinued?
b. What is the effect on income if Product R is discontinued?
c. What is the effect on income if Product R is discontinued and a consequent loss of customers causes a decrease in sales of 200 units of Product Q?
d. What is the effect on income if the sales price of product R is increased to $8.00 with a decrease in the number of units sold to 1,500?
e. Janet Poole, marketing manager at Bardwell Company, approaches Pamela Bardwell, the company’s president. She proposes that Bardwell Company drop production of Product S to produce Product T, which is made on the same production equipment. Product T has a selling price of $14.00, variable manufacturing costs of $9.00, and variable selling expenses of $2.46. Poole estimates that 2,100 units of Product T could be sold annually; she feels that this would be good for the company, as total sales revenue will increase by $7,400 and Product T would be replacing a product that is currently losing money for the company. Poole also believes that this would be good for the morale of the sales department, as total sales commissions will increase. Should Bardwell consider Poole’s suggestion? Why or why not?
f. Explain why traditional cost accounting sometimes leads managers to make incorrect decisions.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Outsourcing; opportunity cost) Riedel Motors uses ten units of Part No. T305 each month in the production of large diesel engines. The cost to manufacture one unit of T305 is presented below:
|
Direct material
|
$ 2,000
|
|
Material handling (20% of direct materials)
|
400
|
|
Direct labor
|
16,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead (150% of direct labor)
|
24,000
|
|
Total manufacturing cost
|
$42,400
|
Material handling, which is not included in the manufacturing overhead, represents the direct variable costs of the receiving department that are applied to direct materials and purchased components on the basis of their cost. Riedel’s annual manufacturing over head budget is one third variable and two thirds fixed. Precision Tool Company, one of Riedel’s reliable vendors, has offered to supply T305 at a unit price of $30,000.
a. If Riedel Motors purchases the ten T305 units from Precision Tool Company, the capacity Riedel used to manufacture these parts would be idle. Compute the change in the out of pocket cost per unit to Riedel, if it decided to purchase the parts from Precision Tool Company.
b. Assume that Riedel Motors is able to rent all idle capacity for $50,000 per month. If Riedel decides to purchase the ten units from Precision Tool Company, what would be the change in the total monthly cost for T305?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Outsourcing; scarce resources) Garrity Manufacturing has assembled the data appearing below pertaining to two products. Past experience has shown that the unavoidable fixed factory overhead included in the cost per machine hour averages $10. Direct labor is paid $18 per hour. Garrity has a policy of filling all sales orders, even if it means purchasing units from outside suppliers at the same selling price per unit that Garrity currently charges.
|
|
Blender
|
Electric Mixer
|
|
Direct material
|
$6
|
$11
|
|
Direct labor
|
$4
|
$9
|
|
Factory overhead at $16 per machine hour
|
$16
|
$32
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$20
|
$38
|
|
Annual demand in units
|
20,000
|
28,000
|
a. Assume Garrity Manufacturing has 50,000 machine hours available. What would be the optimal production of each product to maximize Garrity’s profits?
b. Refer to the original information. With all other things constant, if Garrity is able to reduce direct materials cost for the electric mixer by $6 per unit, what strategy should Garrity pursue?
c. Refer to the original information. Assume that an outbreak of swine flu has left Garrity shorthanded on direct labor personnel. Approximately one half of the workforce will be out of work for one month. During the month, what strategy should Garrity pursue?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Relevant costs; special order pricing) Kantrovitz Company is a manufacturer of industrial components. One of its products that is used as a subcomponent in appliance manufacturing is AP110. This product has the following information per unit:
|
Selling price
|
$150
|
|
Costs:
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
15
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
12
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
30
|
|
Shipping and handling
|
3
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
10
|
|
Total per unit cost
|
$90
|
a. Kantrovitz has received a special, one time order for 1,000 AP110 parts. Assuming Kantrovitz has excess capacity, what is the minimum price that is acceptable for beginning negotiations on this order?
b. Kantrovitz has 5,000 units of AP110 in inventory that have some defects. The units cannot be sold through regular channels without a significant price reduction. What per unit cost figure is relevant for setting a minimum selling price on these units?
c. During the next year, sales of AP110 are expected to be 10,000 units. All of the costs will remain the same except that fixed manufacturing overhead will increase by 20 percent and direct material will increase by 10 percent. The selling price per unit for next year will be $160. Based on these data, what will be the total contribution margin generated by part AP110?
d. Refer to (a). Kantrovitz has received a special, one time order for 1,000 AP110 parts. Assume that Kantrovitz is operating at full capacity, and that the contribution of the output would be displaced by the one time special order. Using the original data, compute the minimum acceptable selling price for this order.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Relevant costs; sales mix; writing) In November 2005, Microsoft introduced its highly anticipated new video game player, the Xbox 360.In early July 2007, Microsoft announced it was extending the warranty on its Xbox360 to three years for a certain type of malfunction indicated by three flashing red lights on the game console. The warranty extension would apply to previously sold units; however, the warranty for any other type of failure would not be extended beyond the original one year warranty term. In making this announcement, Microsoft indicated it would take a charge of $1.05–1.15 billion in the quarter ending June 30, 2007, for the costs of the warranty extension. [Source: NickWingfield, “Microsoft’s Videogame Efforts Take a Costly Hit,” Wall Street Journal ( July 6, 2007), p. A3.]
a. What relevant costs were likely considered by Microsoft management in reaching the decision to extend the warranty on the Xbox 360 and, in so doing, incur in excess of $1 billion of additional costs?
b. Conduct research to determine how Microsoft’s stock price was affected by the announcement of the warranty extension and its associated costs on July 6, 2007.Explain why the stock price reacted as it did.
c. Assume that one of the rationalizations for Microsoft to extend the warranty on the Xbox 360 was to manage sales mix. How could the extension of the Xbox warranty affect the sales mix of Microsoft’s entertainment and devices division?
d. Comment on whether Microsoft was ethically obligated to extend the warranty on the Xbox 360 to three years.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Sales mix) Leather Accessories produces leather belts and key fobs that sell for $40 and $10, respectively. The company currently sells 100,000 units of each type with the following operating results:
|
Belts
|
|
|
|
Sales (100,000 X $40)
|
|
$4,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
|
|
|
Production (100,000 X $25)
|
$2,500,000
|
|
|
Selling (100,000 X $6)
|
600,000
|
(3,100,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
$ 900,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
|
Production
|
$ 400,000
|
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
180,000
|
(580,000)
|
|
Income
|
|
$ 320,000
|
|
|
|
|
|
Key Fobs
|
|
|
|
Sales (100,000 X $10)
|
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
|
|
|
Production (100,000 X $6)
|
$ 600,000
|
|
|
Selling (100,000 X $1)
|
100,000
|
(700,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
$ 300,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
|
Production
|
$ 100,000
|
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
80,000
|
(180,000)
|
|
Income
|
|
$ 120,000
|
Corporate management has expressed its disappointment with the income being generated from the sales of these two products. Managers have asked for your help in analyzing three alternative plans to improve operating results.
1. Change the sales commission to 12 percent of sales price less variable production costs for each product from the current 5 percent of selling price. The marketing manager believes that the sales of the belts will decline by 5,000 units but those of key fobs will increase by 15,000 units.
2. Increase the advertising budget for belts by $75,000.The marketing manager believes this will increase the sales of belts by 19,000 units but will decrease the sales of key fobs by 9,000 units.
3. Raise the per unit price of belts by $5 and of key fobs by $3.The marketing manager believes this will cause a decrease in the sales of belts by 6,000 units and of key fobs by 10,000 units.
a. Determine the effects on the income of each product line and the company in total if each alternative plan is put into effect.
b. What is your recommendation to the management of Leather Accessories?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Sales mix with scarce resources) San Fran Cycles manually manufactures three unique bicycle models: racing, touring, and basic. All of the skilled crafts people employed at San Fran can make each of the three models. Because it takes about a year to train each craftsperson, labor is a fixed production constraint over the short term. For 2010, the company expects to have available 34,000 labor hours. The average hourly labor rate is $30. Data regarding the current product line follow.
|
|
|
Racing
|
Touring
|
Basic
|
|
Selling price
|
|
$3,600
|
$2,720
|
$960
|
|
Variable costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
|
$ 880
|
$ 640
|
$240
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
1,500
|
1,050
|
300
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
|
720
|
480
|
164
|
|
Variable selling
|
|
80
|
60
|
40
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factory
|
$400,000
|
|
|
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
100,000
|
|
|
|
The company pays taxes at the rate of 50 percent of operating income.
a. If the company can sell an unlimited amount of any of the products, how many of each product should it make? What pre tax income will the company earn given your answer?
b. How many of each product must the company make if it has the policy to devote no more than 50 percent of its available skilled labor capacity to any one product but at least 20 percent to every product? What pre tax income will the company earn given your answer?
c. Given the nature of the three products, is it reasonable to believe that there are market constraints on the mix of products that can be sold? Explain.
d. How does the company’s tax rate enter into the calculation of the optimal labor allocation?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Special order) Layton Ironworks manufactures a variety of industrial valves and pipe fittings sold primarily to customers in the United States. Currently, the company is operating at 70 percent of capacity and is earning a satisfactory return on investment.
Prince Industries Ltd. of Scotland has approached Layton’s management with an offer to buy 120,000 pressure valves. Prince manufactures an almost identical pressure valve, but a fire in Prince’s valve plant has closed its manufacturing operations. Prince needs the 120,000 valves over the next four months to meet commitments to its regular customers; the company is prepared to pay $19 each for the valves.
Layton’s product cost for the pressure valve based on current attainable standards is
|
Direct material
|
$ 5
|
|
Direct labor
|
6
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
9
|
|
Total cost
|
$20
|
Manufacturing overhead is applied to production at the rate of $18 per standard direct labor hour. This overhead rate is made up of the following components:
|
Variable factory overhead
|
$ 6
|
|
Fixed factory overhead—direct
|
8
|
|
Fixed factory overhead—allocated
|
4
|
|
Applied manufacturing overhead rate
|
$18
|
Additional costs incurred in connection with sales of the pressure valve include 5 per cent sales commissions and $1 freight expense per unit. However, the company does not pay sales commissions on special orders that come directly to management.
In determining selling prices, Layton adds a 40 percent markup to product cost, which provides a $28 suggested selling price for the pressure valve. The marketing department, however, has set the current selling price at $27 to maintain market share.
Production management believes that it can handle Prince Industries’ order with out disrupting its scheduled production. The order would, however, require additional fixed factory overhead of $12,000 per month for supervision and clerical costs.
If management accepts the order, Layton will manufacture 30,000 pressure valves and ship them to Prince Industries each month for the next four months.
a. Determine how many additional direct labor hours would be required each month to fill the Prince Industries order.
b. Prepare an incremental analysis showing the impact of accepting the Prince Industries order.
c. Calculate the minimum unit price that Layton Valves’ management could accept for the Prince Industries order without reducing net income.
d. Identify the factors, other than price, that Layton Valves should consider before accepting the Prince Industries order.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Product line) Gilfeather Food Service sells high quality ice cream and steaks via overnight delivery. Income statements showing revenues and costs of fiscal year 2010 for each product line are as follows.
|
|
Ice Cream
|
Steaks
|
|
Sales
|
$4,000,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Less: Cost of merchandise sold
|
(2,600,000)
|
(1,500,000)
|
|
Commissions to salespeople
|
(200,000)
|
(150,000)
|
|
Delivery costs
|
(600,000)
|
(120,000)
|
|
Depreciation on equipment
|
(200,000)
|
(100,000)
|
|
Salaries of division managers
|
(80,000)
|
(75,000)
|
|
Allocated corporate costs
|
(100,000)
|
(100,000)
|
|
Net income (loss)
|
$ 220,000
|
$ (45,000)
|
Management is concerned about profitability of steaks and is considering dropping the line and estimates that the equipment currently used to process steaks could be rented to a competitor for $8,500 annually. If the steaks line is dropped, allocated corporate costs would decrease from a total of $200,000 to $170,000, and all employees, including the manager of the product line, would be dismissed. The depreciation would be unaffected by the decision, but $105,000 of the delivery costs charged to the steaks line could be eliminated if it is dropped.
a. Recast the preceding income statements in a format that provides more information in making this decision regarding the steaks product line.
b. What is the net advantage or disadvantage (change in total company pre tax profits) of continuing sales of steaks?
c. Should the company be concerned about losing sales of ice cream products if it drops the steaks line? Explain.
d. How would layoffs that would occur as a consequence of dropping the steaks line adversely affect the whole company?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Product line) You have been hired to assist the management of GreatBend Office Systems in resolving certain issues. The company has its home office in Montana and leases facilities in Montana, Idaho, and North Dakota, where it produces a high quality bean bag chair designed for residential use. Great Bend management has provided you a projection of operations for fiscal 2011, the forth coming year, as follows:
|
|
Total
|
Montana
|
Idaho
|
North Dakota
|
|
Sales
|
$ 17,600,000
|
$ 8,800,000
|
$ 5,600,000
|
$ 3,200,000
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
|
|
|
Factory
|
$ 4,400,000
|
$ 2,240,000
|
$ 1,120,000
|
$ 1,040,000
|
|
Administration
|
1,400,000
|
840,000
|
440,000
|
120,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
5,800,000
|
2,660,000
|
1,700,000
|
1,440,000
|
|
Allocated home office costs
|
2,000,000
|
900,000
|
700,000
|
400,000
|
|
Total costs
|
$(13,600,000)
|
$(6,640,000)
|
$(3,960,000)
|
$ (3,000,000)
|
|
Pre tax profit from operations
|
$ 4,000,000
|
$ 2,160,000
|
$ 1,640,000
|
$ 200,000
|
The sales price per unit is $100.
Due to the marginal results of operations in North Dakota, Great Bend has decided to cease its operations there and sell that factory’s machinery and equipment by the end of 2011. Managers expect proceeds from the sale of these assets to exceed their book value by enough to cover termination costs.
However, Great Bend would like to continue serving its customers in that area if it is economically feasible. It is considering the following three alterna tives:
1. Expand the operations of the Idaho factory by using space that is currently idle. This move would result in the following changes in that factory’s operations:
|
Increase over Factory’s Current
|
|
|
Operations
|
|
|
Sales
|
50%
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
Factory
|
20%
|
|
Administration
|
10%
|
Under this proposal, variable costs would be $32 per unit sold.
2. Enter into a long term contract with a competitor who will serve that area’s customers and will pay Great Bend a royalty of $16 per unit based on an estimate of 30,000 units being sold.
3. Close the North Dakota factory and not expand the operations of the Idaho factory. Note: Total home office costs of $2,000,000 will remain the same under each situation.
To assist the company’s management in determining which alternative is most economically feasible, prepare a schedule computing its estimated pre tax profit from total operations that would result from each of the following alternative:
a. Expansion of the Idaho factory.
b. Negotiation of a long term contract on a royalty basis.
c. Closure of the North Dakota operations with no expansion at other locations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Comprehensive) Louisville Jar Co. has processing plants in Kentucky and Pennsylvania. Both plants use recycled glass to produce jars that a variety of food processors use in food canning. The jars sell for $10 per hundred units.
Budgeted revenues and costs for the year ending December 31, 2011, in thousands of dollars, are:
|
|
Kentucky
|
Pennsylvania
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$1,100
|
$2,000
|
$3,100
|
|
Variable production costs
|
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$275
|
$500
|
$ 775
|
|
Direct labor
|
330
|
500
|
830
|
|
Factory overhead
|
220
|
350
|
570
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
350
|
450
|
800
|
|
Fixed regional promotion costs
|
50
|
50
|
100
|
|
Allocated home office costs
|
55
|
100
|
155
|
|
Total costs
|
$1,280
|
$1,950
|
$3,230
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$ (180)
|
$ 50
|
$ (130)
|
Home office costs are fixed and are allocated to manufacturing plants on the basis of relative sales levels. Fixed regional promotional costs are discretionary advertising costs needed to obtain budgeted sales levels.
Because of the budgeted operating loss, Louisville Jar Co. is considering ceasing operations at its Kentucky plant. If it does so, proceeds from the sale of plant assets will exceed asset book values and exactly cover all termination costs; fixed factory overhead costs of $25,000 would not be eliminated. Louisville Jar Co. is considering the following three alternative plans:
PLAN A: Expand Kentucky’s operations from its budgeted 11,000,000 units to a budgeted 17,000,000 units. It is believed that this can be accomplished by increasing Kentucky’s fixed regional promotional expenditures by $120,000.
PLAN B: Close the Kentucky plant and expand the Pennsylvania operations from the current budgeted 20,000,000–31,000,000 units to fill Kentucky’s budgeted production of 11,000,000 units. The Kentucky region would continue to incur promotional costs to sell the 11,000,000 units. All sales and costs would be budgeted by the Pennsylvania plant.
PLAN C: Close the Kentucky plant and enter into a long term contract with a competitor to serve the Kentucky region’s customers. This competitor would pay a royalty of $1.25 per 100 units sold to Louisville, which would continue to incur fixed regional promotional costs to maintain sales of 11,000,000 units in the Kentucky region.
a. Without considering the effects of implementing Plans A, B, and C, compute the number of units that the Kentucky plant must produce and sell to cover its fixed factory overhead costs and fixed regional promotional costs.
b. Prepare a schedule by plant and in total of Louisville’s budgeted contribution margin and operating income resulting from the implementation of each of the following:
1. Plan A.
2. Plan B.
3. Plan C.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Sales and profit improvement) Classic Clothes is a retail organization in the Northeast that sells upscale clothing. Each year, store managers in consultation with their supervisors establish financial goals, and then a monthly reporting system captures actual performance.
One of the firm’s sales districts, District A, has three stores but has historically been a very poor performer. Consequently, the district supervisor has been searching for ways to improve the performance of her three stores. For May, she set performance goals with the managers of Stores 1 and 2. The managers will receive bonuses if the stores exceed certain performance measures. The manager of Store 3 decided not to participate in the bonus scheme. Because the district supervisor is unsure what type of bonus will encourage better performance, she offered the manager of Store 1 a bonus based on sales in excess of budgeted sales of $670,000; she offered the manager of Store 2 a bonus based on net income in excess of budgeted net income. The company’s net income goal for each store is 12 percent of sales. The budgeted sales for Store 2 are $630,000.
Other pertinent data for May follow.
- At Store 1, sales were 40 percent of total District A sales; sales at Store 2 were 35 percent of total District A sales. The cost of goods sold at both stores was 45 percent of sales.
- Variable selling expenses (sales commissions) were 8 percent of sales for all stores and districts.
- Variable administrative expenses were 3 percent of sales for all stores and districts.
- Maintenance cost including janitorial and repair services is a direct cost for each store. The store manager has complete control over this outlay; however, it should not be below 1 percent of sales.
- Advertising is considered a direct cost for each store and is completely under the store manager’s control. Store 1 spent two thirds of District A’s total outlay for advertising, which was 10 times more than Store 2 spent on advertising.
- The rental expense at Store 1 is 40 percent of District A’s total and at Store 2 is 30 percent of District A’s total.
District A expenses are allocated to the stores based on sales.
a. Will Store 1 or Store 2 generate more profit under the new bonus scheme?
b. Will Store 1 or Store 2 generate more revenue under the new bonus scheme?
c. Why would Store 1 have an incentive to spend so much more on advertising than Store 2?
d. Which store manager has the most incentive to spend money on regular maintenance? Explain.
e. Which bonus scheme appears to offer the most incentive to improve the profit performance of the district in the short term? Long term?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Comprehensive; product line) Clean N Brite is a multiproduct company with several manufacturing plants. The Cincinnati plant manufactures and distributes two household cleaning and polishing compounds, regular and heavy duty under the House Safe label. The forecasted operating results for the first six months of 2011, when 100,000 cases of each compound are expected to be manufactured and sold, are presented in the following statement:
|
HOUSE SAFE COMPOUNDS—CINCINNATI PLANT
|
|
|
|
Forecasted Results of Operations
|
|
|
|
For the Six Month Period Ending June 30, 2011
|
|
|
|
|
|
(in $000s)
|
|
|
|
Regular
|
Heavy Duty
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$2,000
|
$ 3,000
|
$ 5,000
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(1,600)
|
(1,900)
|
(3,500)
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 400
|
$ 1,100
|
$ 1,500
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
$ 400
|
$700
|
$ 1,100
|
|
Fixed
|
240
|
360
|
600
|
|
Total selling and administrative expenses
|
$ (640)
|
$(1,060)
|
$ (1,700)
|
|
Income (loss) before taxes
|
$ (240)
|
$ 40
|
$ (200)
|
The sales price per case for the regular compound will be $20 and for the heavy duty will be $30 during the first six months of 2011. The manufacturing costs by case of product follow.
|
|
COST PER CASE
|
|
|
Regular
|
Heavy Duty
|
|
Raw material
|
$ 7.00
|
$ 8.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
4.00
|
4.00
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
1.00
|
2.00
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead*
|
4.00
|
5.00
|
|
|
|
|
Total manufacturing cost
|
$16.00
|
$19.00
|
|
Variable selling and administrative costs
|
$ 4.00
|
$ 7.00
|
Each product is manufactured on a separate production line. Annual normal manufacturing capacity is 200,000 cases of each product. However, the plant is capable of producing 250,000 cases of regular compound and 350,000 cases of heavy duty compound annually.
The following schedule reflects top management consensus regarding the price/volume alternatives for the House Safe products for the last six months of 2011, which are essentially the same as those during its first six months.
|
REGULAR COMPOUND
|
HEAVY DUTY COMPOUND
|
|
Alternative
|
Sales Volume
|
Alternative Prices
|
Sales Volume
|
|
Prices (per case)
|
(in cases)
|
(per case)
|
(in cases)
|
|
$18
|
120,000
|
$25
|
175,000
|
|
20
|
100,000
|
27
|
140,000
|
|
21
|
90,000
|
30
|
100,000
|
|
22
|
80,000
|
32
|
55,000
|
|
23
|
50,000
|
35
|
35,000
|
Top management believes the expected loss for the first six months reflects a tight profit margin caused by intense competition and that many competitors will be forced out of this market by next year, so the company’s profits should improve.
a. What unit selling price should Clean N Brite select for each House Safe com pound for the remaining six months of 2011? Support your answer with appropriate calculations.
b. Without prejudice to your answer for requirement (a), assume that the optimum price/volume alternatives for the last six months will be a selling price of $23 and volume level of 50,000 cases for the regular compound and a selling price of $35 and volume of 35,000 cases for the heavy duty compound.
1. Should Clean N Brite consider closing its Cincinnati operations until 2012 to minimize its losses? Support your answer with appropriate calculations.
2. Identify and discuss the qualitative factors that should be considered in deciding whether the Cincinnati plant should be closed during the last six months of 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Appendix) Upstate Leisure makes three outdoor leisure products: chairs, tables, and umbrellas. The company has significant demand for all three products but must manage certain constraints in its operations. Following are sales price and cost information for each product.
|
|
Chairs
|
Tables
|
Umbrellas
|
|
Sales price
|
$25
|
$90
|
$75
|
|
Variable production cost
|
15
|
50
|
40
|
|
Variable selling cost
|
5
|
20
|
20
|
The company faces machine time and labor time constraints in producing the three products. In total, the company has 15,000 machine hours and 30,000 labor hours available for production in the coming year. Following are the per unit production requirements for the three products.
|
|
Chairs
|
Tables
|
Umbrellas
|
|
Machine hours
|
1.5
|
2.5
|
1
|
|
Labor hours
|
1.0
|
1.5
|
1.5
|
a. In managing its constrained resources, what is the objective function of Upstate Leisure?
b. What are the production constraint equations for Upstate Leisure?
c. What are non negativity constraint equations for Upstate Leisure?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Why is the revenue recognition principle important?
2. What are the three basic forms of business organization?
3. Identify the owners of corporations and the terminology for ownership units.
4. When is the accounting equation in balance, and what does that mean?
5. How can a transaction not affect any liability and equity accounts?
6. Describe a transaction increasing equity and one decreasing it.
7. Identify a transaction that decreases both assets and liabilities.
8. Explain the link between the income statement and the statement of owner’s equity.
9. Describe the link between the balance sheet and the statement of owner’s equity.
10. Discuss the three major sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
After several months of planning, Jasmine Worthy started a haircutting business called Expressions. The following events occurred during its first month of business.
a. On August 1, Worthy invested $3,000 cash and $15,000 of equipment in Expressions.
b. On August 2, Expressions paid $600 cash for furniture for the shop.
c. On August 3, Expressions paid $500 cash to rent space in a strip mall for August.
d. On August 4, it purchased $1,200 of equipment on credit for the shop (using a long term note payable).
e. On August 5, Expressions opened for business. Cash received from haircutting services in the first week and a half of business (ended August 15) was $825.
f. On August 15, it provided $100 of haircutting services on account.
g. On August 17, it received a $100 check for services previously rendered on account.
h. On August 17, it paid $125 cash to an assistant for hours worked during the grand opening.
i. Cash received from services provided during the second half of August was $930.
j. On August 31, it paid a $400 installment toward principal on the note payable entered into on August 4.
k. On August 31, Worthy made a $900 cash withdrawal from the company for personal use.
Required
1. Arrange the following asset, liability, and equity titles in a table similar to the one Cash; Accounts Receivable; Furniture; Store Equipment; Note Payable; J. Worthy, Capital; J. Worthy, Withdrawals; Revenues; and Expenses. Show the effects of each transaction using the accounting equation.
2. Prepare an income statement for August.
3. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for August.
4. Prepare a balance sheet as of August 31.
5. Prepare a statement of cash flows for August.
6. Determine the return on assets ratio for August.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP; DOL; MS—two quarters; comprehensive) Following is information pertaining to Dayton Co.’s operations of the first and second quarter of 2010:
|
|
QUARTER
|
|
|
First
|
Second
|
|
Units
|
|
|
|
Production
|
70,000
|
60,000
|
|
Sales
|
60,000
|
70,000
|
|
Expected activity level
|
65,000
|
65,000
|
|
Unit selling price
|
$ 75.00
|
$ 75.00
|
|
Unit variable costs
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$ 34.50
|
$ 34.50
|
|
Direct labor
|
16.50
|
16.50
|
|
Factory overhead
|
7.80
|
7.80
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
5.70
|
5.70
|
|
Fixed costs
|
|
|
|
Factory overhead
|
$195,000
|
$195,000
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
42,800
|
42,800
|
Additional Information
- There were no finished goods at January 1, 2010.
- Dayton Co. writes off any quarterly underapplied or overapplied overhead as an adjustment to Cost of Goods Sold.
- Dayton Co.’s income tax rate is 35 percent.
a. Prepare a variable costing income statement for each quarter.
b. Calculate each of the following for 2010 if 260,000 units were produced and sold:
1. Unit contribution margin.
2. Contribution margin ratio.
3. Total contribution margin.
4. Net income.
5. Degree of operating leverage.
6. Annual break even unit sales volume.
7. Annual break even dollar sales volume.
8. Annual margin of safety as a percentage.
9. Annual margin of safety in units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP assumptions; writing) You were talking to your roommate one day about CVP analysis and the approaches that are used to calculate the break even point. You also described the assumptions that underlie this type of analysis.
Your roommate proclaimed, “Wow, you people in accounting are pretty simple. Do you realize how unrealistic it is to assume that, no matter how many units you sell, you will realize the same price per unit? And, I’ve never heard any serious person suggest that costs are linear. How can you possibly state that assumption with a straight face? In your world, profit maximization is simple . . . just produce the maximum amount possible.”
Provide a written justification of the assumptions accountants make in conducting CVP analysis that will satisfy your critical economist roommate.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Relevant costs; writing) Because of a monumental error committed by its purchasing department, Corner Grocery ordered 5,000 heads of lettuce rather than the 1,000 that should have been ordered. The company paid $0.65 per head for the lettuce. Although management is confident that it can sell 2,000 units through regular sales, the market is not large enough to absorb the other 3,000 heads. Management has identified two ways to dispose of the excess heads of lettuce. First, a wholesaler has offered to purchase them for $0.25 each. Second, a restaurant chain has offered to purchase the lettuce if Corner Grocery will agree to convert it into packaged lettuce for salads. This option would require Corner Grocery to incur $2,500 for conversion, and the heads of lettuce could then be sold for the equivalent of $1.05 each.
a. Which costs are sunk in this decision?
b. Actually, Corner Grocery can consider three alternatives in this decision. Describe the alternative that is not mentioned in the problem.
c. What are the relevant costs of each decision alternative, and what should the company do?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Relevant costs) Assume that you are about to graduate from your university and are deciding whether to apply for graduate school or enter the job market. To help make the decision, you have gathered the following data:
|
Costs incurred for the bachelor’s degree
|
$163,000
|
|
Out of pocket costs for a master’s degree
|
$92,000
|
|
Estimated starting salary with B.A.
|
$48,400
|
|
Estimated starting salary with MA
|
$66,800
|
|
Estimated time to complete master’s degree
|
2 years
|
|
Estimated time from the present to retirement
|
40 years
|
a. Which of these factors is relevant to your decision?
b. What is the opportunity cost associated with earning the master’s degree?
c. What is the out of pocket cost to obtain the master’s degree?
d. What other factors should you consider before making a decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Relevant vs. sunk costs; writing) Your roommate, Jill Blalock, purchased a new portable DVD player just before this school term for $80. Shortly after the semester began, her new DVD player was crushed by an errant “flying plant” during a party at her apartment. Returning the equipment to the retailer, Blalock was informed that the estimated cost of repairs was $65 because the damage was not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
Pondering the figures, Blalock was ready to decide to make repairs; after all, she had recently paid $80 for the equipment. However, before making a decision, she asked for your advice.
a. Prepare a brief presentation outlining factors that Blalock should consider in making her decision.
b. Continue the presentation in (a) by discussing the options Blalock should consider in making her decision. Start by defining a base case against which alternatives can be compared.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Asset replacement) Certain production equipment used by Cincinnati Chemical has become obsolete relative to current technology. The company is considering whether it should keep or replace its existing equipment. To aid in this decision, the company’s controller gathered the following data:
|
|
Old Equipment
|
New Equipment
|
|
Original cost
|
$350,000
|
$396,000
|
|
Remaining life
|
5 years
|
5 years
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
$158,000
|
$0
|
|
Annual cash operating costs
|
$64,000
|
$16,000
|
|
Current salvage value
|
$88,000
|
NA
|
|
Salvage value in 5 years
|
$0
|
$0
|
a. Identify any sunk costs in the data.
b. Identify any irrelevant (nondifferential) future costs.
c. Identify all relevant costs to the equipment replacement decision.
d. What are the opportunity costs associated with the alternative of keeping the old equipment?
e. What is the incremental cost to purchase the new equipment?
f. What qualitative considerations should be considered before making any decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Asset replacement) On April 1, 2010, Topeka Brake Mfg. purchased new computer based production scheduling software for $480,000. On May 15, 2010, a representative of a computerized manufacturing technology company demonstrated new software that was clearly superior to that purchased by the firm in April. The price of this software is $840,000. Corporate managers estimate that the new software would save the company $32,000 annually in schedule related costs compared to the recently installed software. Both software packages should last 10 years (the expected life of the computer hardware) and have no salvage value at that time. The company can sell its existing software for $356,000 if the new software is purchased. Should the company keep and use the software purchased earlier or buy the new software? Show computations to support your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Outsourcing) Fibre Technologies manufactures fiberglass housings for portable generators. One part of a housing is a metal latch. Currently, the company produces the 120,000 metal latch units required annually. Company management is considering purchasing the latch from an external vendor. The following data are available for making the decision:
|
Cost per Unit to Manufacture
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$1.60
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.36
|
|
Variable overhead
|
0.72
|
|
Fixed overhead—applied
|
1.12
|
|
Total cost
|
$4.80
|
|
|
|
|
Cost per Unit to Purchase
|
|
|
Purchase price
|
$3.92
|
|
Freight charges
|
0.08
|
|
Total cost
|
$4.00
|
a. Assuming that all of Fibre Technologies’ internal production costs are avoidable if the company purchases rather than makes the latch, what would be the net annual cost advantage to purchasing the latches?
b. Assume that some of Fibre Technologies’ fixed overhead costs could not be avoided if it purchases rather than makes the latches. How much of the fixed overhead must be avoidable for the company to be indifferent as to making or buying the latches?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Outsourcing) Orlando Auto Accessories produces pickup truck bumpers that it sells on a wholesale basis to new car retailers. The average bumper sales price is $160.Normal annual sales volume is 300,000 units, which is the company’s maximum production capacity. At this capacity, the company’s per unit costs are as follows:
|
Direct material
|
$ 53 (including mounting hardware @ $15 per unit)
|
|
Direct labor
|
17
|
|
Overhead (2/3 is fixed)
|
45
|
|
Total
|
$115
|
A key component in producing bumpers is the mounting hardware used to attach the bumpers to the vehicles. Birmingham Mechanical has offered to sell Orlando Auto Accessories as many mounting units as the company needs for $20 per unit. If Orlando Auto accepts the offer, the released facilities currently used to produce mounting hardware could be used to produce an additional 4,800 bumpers. What alternative is more desirable and by what amount? (Assume that the company is currently operating at its capacity of 300,000 units.)
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Outsourcing) Pneu Shoe Company manufactures various types of athletic shoes. Several types require a built in air pump. Presently, the company makes all air pumps it requires. However, management is evaluating an offer from Ram Air Co. to provide air pumps at a cost of $3.60 each. Pneu Shoe’s management has estimated that the variable production costs of the air pump total $2.70 per unit and that the company could avoid $27,000 per year in fixed costs if it purchased rather than produced the air pumps.
a. If 25,000 pumps per year are required, should Pneu Shoe make them or buy them from Ram Air Co.?
b. If 60,000 pumps per year are required, should Pneu Shoe make them or buy them?
c. Assuming that all other factors are equal, at what level of production would the company be indifferent between making and buying the pumps?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Allocation of scarce resources) Michigan Mfg. makes electronic products. Because the employees of one of the company’s plants are on strike, the Chicago plant is operating at peak capacity. It makes two electronic products: MP3 players and PDAs. Presently, the company can sell as many of each product as can be made, but making a PDA takes twice as long in production labor time as an MP3 player. The company’s production capacity is 100,000 labor hours per month. Data on each product are as follows:
|
|
MP3 players
|
PDAs
|
|
Sales
|
$70
|
$108
|
|
Variable costs
|
(58)
|
(88)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$12
|
$ 20
|
|
Labor hours required
|
1
|
2
|
|
Fixed costs are $240,000 per month.
|
|
|
a. How many of each product should the Chicago plant make? Explain your answer.
b. What qualitative factors would you consider in making this product mix decision?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Sales mix) Pet Palace provides two types of services to dog owners: grooming and training. All company personnel can perform each service equally well. To expand sales and market share, Pet Palace’s manager, Jim Jones, relies heavily on radio and billboard advertising, but the 2010 advertising budget is expected to be very limited. Information on projected operations for 2010 follows.
|
|
Grooming
|
Training
|
|
Revenue per billable hour
|
$50
|
$70
|
|
Variable cost of labor
|
$20
|
$41
|
|
Material cost per billable hour
|
$6
|
$7
|
|
Allocated fixed cost per year
|
$250,000
|
$260,000
|
|
Projected billable hours for 2010
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
a. What is Pet Palace’s projected pre tax profit (or loss) for 2010?
b. If $1 spent on advertising could increase grooming revenue by $20 or training revenue by $20, on which service should the advertising dollar be spent?
c. If $1 spent on advertising could increase either grooming billable time or training billable time by 1 hour, on which service should the advertising dollar be spent?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Sales mix) One product produced and sold by Outback Outfitters is an ATV gun rack for which 2010 projections are as follows:
|
Projected volume in units
|
120,000
|
|
Sales price per unit
|
$60
|
|
Variable production cost per unit
|
$24
|
|
Variable selling cost per unit
|
$12
|
|
Fixed production cost
|
$805,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administration costs
|
$435,000
|
a. Compute the projected pre tax profit to be earned on the ATV gun rack during 2010.
b. Corporate management estimates that unit volume could be increased by 20 percent if sales price were decreased by 10 percent. How would such a change affect the profit level projected in part (a)?
c. Rather than cutting the sales price, management is considering holding the sales price at the projected level and increasing advertising by $185,000. Such a change would increase volume by 20 percent. How would the level of profit under this alternative compare to the profit projected in (a)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Sales mix) Cellular Communications manufactures cell phones and two cell phone accessories: ear buds and a 12 volt (automotive) battery charger. (Each ear bud package contains a set of ear buds.) The ear buds and charger are compatible only with the Matrix cell phone. Sales prices and variable costs for each product are as follows:
|
|
Cell phones
|
Set of ear buds
|
Charger
|
|
Sales
|
$75
|
$20
|
$20
|
|
Variable production costs
|
(60)
|
(4)
|
(5)
|
|
Variable selling costs
|
(4)
|
(1)
|
(2)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$11
|
$15
|
$13
|
|
Unit sales (next year’s budget)
|
1,400,000
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
The historical data of Cellular Communications suggest that, for each of the seven cell phones sold, two ear bud sets and one battery charger are sold. The company is currently exploring two options to increase overall corporate income for the upcoming year. The alternatives that follow would maintain the historical sales mix ratios:
1. Increase corporate advertising by $1,000,000. The company estimates doing so would increase total unit sales to 2,200,000.
2. Decrease the price of cell phones to $70. The company estimates doing so would increase cell phone sales to 3,150,000 units and have no effect on the other products.
a. Determine the effect of each proposal on budgeted profits for the coming year. Which alternative is preferred and what is the relative financial benefit of that alternative?
b. How could the firm’s management increase the ratio of ear buds and chargers to cell phone unit sales?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Special order) Wisconsin Metal Co. produces 12.5 gauge barbed wire that is retailed through farm supply companies. Presently, the company has the capacity to produce 100,000 tons of wire per year. It is operating at 80 percent of annual capacity and, at this level of operations, the cost per ton of wire is as follows:
|
Direct material
|
$520
|
|
Direct labor
|
40
|
|
Variable overhead
|
50
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
190
|
|
Total
|
$800
|
The average sales price for the output produced by the firm is $900 per ton. The State of Texas has approached the firm to supply 200 tons of wire for the state’s prisons for $620per ton. No production modifications would be necessary to fulfill the order from the State of Texas.
a. What costs are relevant to the decision to accept this special order?
b. What would be the dollar effect on pre tax income if this order were accepted?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Special order) For The Ages Inc. produces solid oak umbrella stands. Each stand is handmade and hand finished using the finest materials available. The firm has been operating at capacity (2,000 stands per year) for the past three years. Based on this capacity of operations, the firm’s costs per stand are as follows:
|
Material
|
$ 50
|
|
Direct labor
|
40
|
|
Variable overhead
|
10
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
30
|
|
Total cost
|
$130
|
All selling and administrative expenses incurred by the firm are fixed. The average selling price of stands is $230. Recently, a large retailer approached Bill Wood, the president of For The Ages, about supplying three special stands to give as gifts to CEOs of key sup pliers. Wood estimates that the following per unit costs would be incurred to make the three stands:
|
Material
|
$250
|
|
Direct labor
|
350
|
|
Variable overhead
|
90
|
|
Total direct costs
|
$690
|
To accept the special order, the firm would have to sacrifice production of 20 regular units.
a. Identify all relevant costs that Wood should consider in deciding whether to accept the special order.
b. Assume the retailer offers to pay For The Ages a total of $3,800 for the three stands. How would accepting this offer affect For The Ages’ pre tax income?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Product line) Operations of Borderland Oil Drilling Services are separated into two geographical divisions: United States and Mexico. The operating results of each division for 2010 are as follows:
|
|
United States
|
Mexico
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$7,200,000
|
$3,600,000
|
$10,800,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
(4,740,000)
|
(2,088,000)
|
(6,828,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$2,460,000
|
$1,512,000
|
$ 3,972,000
|
|
Direct fixed costs
|
(800,000)
|
(490,000)
|
(1,290,000)
|
|
Segment margin
|
$1,660,000
|
$1,022,000
|
$ 2,682,000
|
|
Corporate fixed costs
|
(1,900,000)
|
(890,000)
|
(2,790,000)
|
|
Operating income (loss)
|
$ (240,000)
|
$ 132,000
|
$ (108,000)
|
Corporate fixed costs are allocated to the divisions based on relative sales. Assume that all of a division’s direct fixed costs could be avoided by eliminating that division. Because the U.S. division is operating at a loss, Borderland’s president is considering eliminating it.
a. If the U.S. division had been eliminated at the beginning of the year, what would have been Borderland’s pre tax income?
b. Recast the income statements into a more meaningful format than the one given. Why would total corporate operating results change from the $108,000 loss to the results determined in part (a)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Product line) Lakeland Financial Services provides outsourcing services for three areas: payroll, general ledger (GL), and tax compliance. The company is currently contemplating the elimination of the GL area because it is showing a pre tax loss. An annual income statement follows.
|
Lakeland Financial Services
|
|
|
|
Income Statement by Service Line
|
|
|
|
For the Year Ended July 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
(in thousands)
|
|
|
|
|
Payroll
|
GL
|
Tax
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
$4,400
|
$3,200
|
$3,600
|
$11,200
|
|
Cost of sales
|
(2,800)
|
(2,000)
|
(2,160)
|
(6,960)
|
|
Gross margin
|
$1,600
|
$1,200
|
$1,440
|
$ 4,240
|
|
Avoidable fixed and variable costs
|
$1,260
|
$1,470
|
$1,040
|
$ 3,770
|
|
Allocated fixed costs
|
180
|
140
|
210
|
530
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
$1,440
|
$1,610
|
$1,250
|
$ 4,300
|
|
Operating profit
|
$ 160
|
$ (410)
|
$ 190
|
$ (60)
|
a. Should corporate management drop the GL area? Support your answer with appropriate schedules.
b. If the GL area were dropped, how would the company’s pre tax profit be affected?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Appendix) Ludmilla Sanches is a college student with a food budget of $250 per month. She wants to get a certain level of nutritional benefits from the food she buys. The following table lists the foods she can buy with the nutritional information per serving.
|
|
Carbohydrates
|
Protein
|
Potassium
|
Calories
|
Cost
|
|
Pizza
|
38 g
|
11 g
|
0
|
400
|
$5.00
|
|
Tuna
|
1 g
|
14 g
|
0
|
70
|
1.35
|
|
Cereal
|
35 g
|
8 g
|
120 mg
|
200
|
1.05
|
|
Macaroni & cheese
|
23 g
|
4 g
|
110 mg
|
110
|
2.12
|
|
Spaghetti
|
42 g
|
9 g
|
100 mg
|
210
|
3.50
|
|
Recommended daily allowance
|
50 g
|
10 g
|
100 mg
|
2,000
|
|
Write the objective function and constraints to minimize the cost yet meet the recommended daily nutritional allowances.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Relevant costs; writing) Janet Cosgrove is the manager of Saratoga Sporting Goods, a division of Global Sports. Cosgrove’s division sells a variety of sporting goods and supplies to wholesalers and retail chains throughout the Pacific Northwest and Latin America. Saratoga Sporting Goods has a single manufacturing facility located in Florida. As the manager of Saratoga Sporting Goods, Cosgrove is paid a salary and a bonus based on the profit she generates for the company. Recently, Cosgrove has been contemplating selling a warehouse owned by the division in Jacksonville. She has gathered the following information regarding the warehouse.
|
Acquisition date
|
10/10/1994
|
|
Acquisition price
|
$ 17,500,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
$ 5,300,000
|
|
Current market value
|
$ 7,000,000
|
Because the company has adopted JIT based inventory management, the warehouse is no longer needed to store finished goods inventory. Furthermore, if the warehouse were sold, the $7,000,000 of current market value would be realized on the sale. Cosgrove has consulted you, the CFO of the division, about the effect of the warehouse sale on divisional profits. You provided Cosgrove the following calculation:
|
Sales price
|
$ 7,000,000
|
|
Less net book value ($17,500,000 – $5,300,000)
|
(12,200,000)
|
|
Projected profit (loss) on sale
|
$ (5,200,000)
|
a. Discuss whether the loss that would be recognized on the sale is relevant to the decision to sell the warehouse.
b. What would you recommend that Cosgrove do with respect to the warehouse?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Variable costing income statement) High Flight Toys manufactures Frisbees. The following information is available for 2010, the company’s first year in business when it produced 300,000 units. Revenue of $480,000 was generated by the sale of 180,000 Frisbees.
|
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Production
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$150,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
100,000
|
|
|
Overhead
|
75,000
|
$112,500
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
90,000
|
100,000
|
a. What is the variable production cost per unit?
b. What is the total contribution margin per unit?
c. Prepare a variable costing income statement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cost and revenue behavior) The following financial data have been deter mined from analyzing the records of Tim’s Brake Co. (a one product firm):
|
Contribution margin per unit
|
$ 50
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
42
|
|
Annual fixed cost
|
$180,000
|
How does each of the following measures change when product volume goes up by one unit at Tim’s Brake Co?
a. Total revenue
b. Total cost
c. Income before tax
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Formula; graph; income statement) Pittsburg Tar Co. had the following income statement for 2010:
|
Sales (30,000 gallons × $8)
|
|
$240,000
|
|
Variable cost
|
|
|
|
Production (40,000 gallons × $3)
|
$120,000
|
|
|
Selling (30,000 gallons × $0.50)
|
15,000
|
(135,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
|
$105,000
|
|
Fixed cost
|
|
|
|
Production
|
$ 46,000
|
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
6,200
|
(52,200)
|
|
Income before tax
|
|
$ 52,800
|
|
Income tax (40%)
|
|
(21,120)
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 31,680
|
a. Compute the break even point using the equation approach.
b. Prepare a CVP graph to reflect the relationships among cost, revenue, profit, and volume.
c. Prepare a profit volume graph.
d. Prepare a short explanation for company management about each of the graphs.
e. Prepare an income statement at break even point using variable costing.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP) Seattle Leisure Designs has designed a new athletic suit. The company plans to produce and sell 30,000 units of the new product in the coming year. Annual fixed costs are $600,000, and variable costs are 70 percent of selling price. If the company wants a pre tax profit of $300,000, at what minimum price must it sell its product?
(CVP) Sheridan Shacks makes portable garden sheds that sell for $1,800 each. Costs are as follows:
|
|
Per Unit
|
Total
|
|
Direct material
|
$800
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
90
|
|
|
Variable production overhead
|
60
|
|
|
Variable selling and administrative cost
|
50
|
|
|
Fixed production overhead
|
|
$200,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
|
60,000
|
a. How many garden sheds must the company sell to break even?
b. If Sheridan Shacks’ management wants to earn a pre tax profit of $200,000, how many garden sheds must it sell?
c. If Sheridan Shacks’ management wants to earn a pre tax profit of $280,000, how many garden sheds must it sell?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP; taxes) Sheridan Shacks makes portable garden sheds that sell for $1,800 each. Costs are as follows:
|
|
Per Unit
|
Total
|
|
Direct material
|
$800
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
90
|
|
|
Variable production overhead
|
60
|
|
|
Variable selling and administrative cost
|
50
|
|
|
Fixed production overhead
|
|
$200,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative
|
|
60,000
|
Assume a tax rate for the company of 35 percent.
a. If Sheridan Shacks wants to earn an after tax profit of $182,000, how many garden sheds must it sell?
b. How much revenue is needed to yield an after tax profit of 8 percent of revenue? How many garden sheds does this revenue amount represent?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP; taxes) Golf Glider makes gasoline powered golf carts. The selling price is $5,000 each, and costs are as follows:
|
Cost
|
Per Unit
|
Total
|
|
Direct material
|
$2,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
625
|
|
|
Variable overhead
|
325
|
|
|
Variable selling
|
50
|
|
|
Annual fixed production overhead
|
|
$250,000
|
|
Annual fixed selling and administrative
|
|
120,000
|
Golf Glider’s income is taxed at a 40 percent rate.
a. How many golf carts must Golf Glider sell to earn $600,000 after tax?
b. What level of revenue is needed to yield an after tax income equal to 20 percent of sales?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Volume and pricing) Dim Witt is the county commissioner of Clueless County. He decided to institute tolls for local ferry boat passengers. After the tolls had been in effect for four months, Astra Astute, county accountant, noticed that collecting $1,450 in tolls incurred a daily cost of $2,000. The toll is $0.50 per passenger.
a. How many people are using the ferry boats each day?
b. If the $2,000 cost is entirely fixed, how much must each passenger be charged for the toll process to break even? How much must each passenger be charged for the toll process to make a profit of $250 per day?
c. Assume that only 80 percent of the $2,000 is fixed and the remainder varies by passenger. If the toll is raised to $0.60 per person, passenger volume is expected to fall by 10 percent. If the toll is raised and volume falls, will the county be better or worse off than it is currently and by what amount?
d. Assume that only 80 percent of the $2,000 is fixed and the remainder varies by passenger. If passenger volume will decline by 5 percent for every $0.20 increase from the current $0.50 rate, at what level of use and toll amount would the county first make a profit?
e. Discuss the saying “We may be showing a loss, but we can make it up in volume.”
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP analysis) Following are abbreviated income statements for two companies, Ainsley and Bard:
|
|
Ainsley
|
Bard
|
|
Sales
|
$2,000,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Variable cost
|
(1,400,000)
|
0
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 600,000
|
$2,000,000
|
|
Fixed cost
|
0
|
(1,400,000)
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 600,000
|
$ 600,000
|
Ainsley and Bard produce an identical product and both sell that product at $40.Both companies are searching for ways to increase operating income. Managers of both companies are considering three identical strategies. Consider each of the following strategies, and discuss which company is best situated to adopt that strategy.
a. Decrease sales price 30 percent to increase sales volume 60 percent.
b. Increase sales price per unit 30 percent, which will cause sales volume to decline by 15 percent.
c. Increase advertising by $200,000 to increase sales volume by 15,000 units.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP; multiproduct) Mel’s Male Accessories sells wallets and money clips. Historically, the firm’s sales have averaged three wallets for every money clip. Each wallet has an $8 contribution margin, and each money clip has a $6 contribution mar gin. Mel’s incurs fixed cost in the amount of $180,000.The selling prices of wallets and money clips, respectively, are $30 and $15. The corporate wide tax rate is 40 percent.
a. How much revenue is needed to break even? How many wallets and money clips does this represent?
b. How much revenue is needed to earn a pre tax profit of $150,000?
c. How much revenue is needed to earn an after tax profit of $150,000?
d. If Mel’s earns the revenue determined in (b) but does so by selling five wallets for every two money clips, what would be the pre tax profit (or loss)? Why is this amount not $150,000?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Multiproduct) Mean Machine makes three types of electric scooters. The company’s total fixed cost is $1,080,000,000. Selling prices, variable cost, and sales percent ages for each type of scooter follow:
|
|
|
|
Percent of
|
|
|
Selling Price
|
Variable Cost
|
Total Unit Sales
|
|
Mod
|
$2,200
|
$1,900
|
30
|
|
Rad
|
3,700
|
3,000
|
50
|
|
X treme
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
20
|
a. What is Mean Machine’s break even point in units and sales dollars?
b. If the company has an after tax income goal of $1 billion and the tax rate is 50 percent, how many units of each type of scooter must be sold for the goal to be reached at the current sales mix?
c. Assume the sales mix shifts to 50 percent Mod, 40 percent Rad, and 10 percent X treme. How does this change affect your answer to part (a)?
d. If Mean Machine sold more X treme scooters and fewer Mod scooters, how would your answers to parts (a) and (b) change? No calculations are needed.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Comprehensive) Compute the answers to each of the following independent situations.
a. Orlando Ray sells liquid and spray mouthwash in a sales mix of 1:2, respectively. The liquid mouthwash has a contribution margin of $10 per unit; the spray’s CM is $5 per unit. Annual fixed cost for the company is $100,000. How many units of spray mouthwash would Orlando Ray sell at the break even point?
b. Piniella Company has a break even point of 4,000 units. At BEP, variable cost is $6,400 and fixed cost is $1,600. If one unit over breakeven is sold, what will be the company’s pre tax income?
c. Montreal Company’s product sells for $10 per bottle. Annual fixed costs are $216,000 and variable cost is 40 percent of selling price. How many units would Montreal Company need to sell to earn a 25 percent pre tax profit on sales?
d. York Mets Company has a BEP of 2,800 units. The company currently sells 3,200 units at $65 each. What is the company’s margin of safety in units, in sales dollars, and as a percentage?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP assumptions; writing) A local businesswoman, Jane Aire, has hired you and a colleague, Joanna, from your cost accounting class to advise her regarding her small manufacturing business that makes leather valises. The business was organized just two years ago and has failed to become profitable, which is why the business owner has hired you and Joanna. After analyzing the client’s books, Joanna prepared the following simple income statement for the current year.
|
Sales
|
$200,000
|
|
Variable cost
|
(120,000)
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$ 80,000
|
|
Fixed cost
|
(140,000)
|
|
Operating loss
|
$ (60,000)
|
After studying the income statement, Joanna worked out the break even point for the firm and advised the client,
“Ms. Aire, you will need to achieve sales of $350,000 before this business is producing enough revenues to cover all cost.” Ms. Aire replied, “That’s a 75 percent increase over existing sales; I don’t see any way this business will reach that level of sales.”
“Then,” said Joanna, “you should shut the business down today to cut your losses.”
After considering Joanna’s income statement and the conversation between Joanna and Aire, discuss whether you agree with Joanna’s recommendation.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Variable costing; ethics) In its first year of operations, Utah Utility Trailers incurred the following costs:
|
Variable production cost
|
$ 2,800 per unit
|
|
Variable selling and administrative cost
|
200 per unit
|
|
Fixed production cost
|
$200,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative cost
|
80,000
|
For the year, the company reported the following results:
|
Sales ($5,000 per unit)
|
$500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
(400,000)
|
|
Gross Margin
|
$100,000
|
|
Selling and Administrative Cost
|
(100,000)
|
|
Operating Income
|
$ 0
|
a. Using the contribution margin ratio approach, compute the break even point for this company.
b. How many units did the firm produce in its first year of operations?
c. Provide an explanation that reconciles your result in (a) to the income statement provided above.
d. Prepare a variable costing income statement for sales of 100 units.
e. Assume that Utah Utility Trailers is in need of a bank loan. Would it be unethical to use the income statement above, rather than the income statement compiled in (d), to present to the loan officer? Explain. Ethics
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP single product; comprehensive) Beantown Baseball Company makes baseballs that sell for $13.00 per two pack. Current annual production and sales are 960,000 baseballs. Costs for each baseball are as follows:
|
Direct material
|
$2.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.25
|
|
Variable overhead
|
0.50
|
|
Variable selling expenses
|
0.25
|
|
Total variable cost
|
$4.00
|
|
Total fixed overhead
|
$1,250,000
|
a. Calculate the unit contribution margin in dollars and the contribution margin ratio for the company.
b. Determine the break even point in number of baseballs.
c. Calculate the dollar break even point using the contribution margin ratio.
d. Determine the company’s margin of safety in number of baseballs, in sales dollars, and as a percentage.
e. Compute the company’s degree of operating leverage. If sales increase by 30 percent, by what percentage would pre tax income increase?
f. How many baseballs must the company sell if it desires to earn $1,096,000 in pre tax profit?
g. If the company wants to earn $750,000 after tax and is subject to a 40 percent tax rate, how many baseballs must be sold?
h. How many baseballs would the company need to sell to break even if its fixed cost increased by $50,000? (Use original data.)
i. Beantown Baseball Company has received an offer to provide a one time sale of 20,000 baseballs at $8.80 per two pack to the Lowell Spinners. This sale would not affect other sales, nor would the cost of those sales change. However, the variable cost of the additional units would increase by $0.20 for shipping, and fixed cost would increase by $6,000. Based solely on financial information, should the company accept this offer? Show your calculations. What other factors should the company consider in accepting or rejecting this offer?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP) Aqua Gear, in business since 2008, makes swimwear for professional athletes. Analysis of the firm’s financial records for the current year reveals the following:
|
Average swimsuit selling price
|
$70
|
|
Variable swimsuit expenses
|
|
|
Direct material
|
28
|
|
Direct labor
|
12
|
|
Variable overhead
|
8
|
|
Annual fixed cost
|
|
|
Selling
|
$10,000
|
|
Administrative
|
24,000
|
The company’s tax rate is 40 percent. Samantha Waters, company president, has asked you to help her answer the following questions.
a. What is the break even point in number of swimsuits and in dollars?
b. How much revenue must be generated to produce $40,000 of pre tax earnings? How many swimsuits would this level of revenue represent?
c. How much revenue must be generated to produce $40,000 of after tax earnings? How many swimsuits would this represent?
d. What amount of revenue would be necessary to yield an after tax profit equal to 20 percent of revenue?
e. Aqua Gear I s considering purchasing a faster sewing machine that will save $6 per swimsuit in cost but will raise annual fixed cost by $40,000. If the equipment is purchased, the company expects to make and sell an additional 5,000 swimsuits. Should the company make this investment?
f. A marketing consultant told Aqua Gear managers that they could increase the number of swimsuits sold by 30 percent if the selling price was reduced by 10 percent and the company spent $10,000 on advertising. The company has been selling 3,000 swimsuits. Should the company make the changes advised by the consultant?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP decision alternatives) Mons Weather by owns a sports brokerage agency and sells tickets to major league baseball, football, and basketball games. He also sells sports travel packages that include game tickets, airline tickets, and hotel accommodations. Revenues are commissions based as follows:
|
Game ticket sales
|
8% commission
|
|
Airline ticket sales
|
10% commission
|
|
Hotel bookings sales
|
20% commission
|
Monthly fixed costs include advertising ($2,200), rent ($1,800), utilities ($500), and other costs ($4,400).There are no variable costs. A typical month generates the following sales amounts that are subject to the stated commission structure:
|
Game tickets
|
$60,000
|
|
Airline tickets
|
9,000
|
|
Hotel bookings
|
14,000
|
|
Total
|
$83,000
|
a. What is Weatherby’s normal monthly profit or loss?
b. Weatherby estimates that airline bookings can be increased by 40 percent if he increases advertising by $1,200. Should he increase advertising?
c. Weatherby’s friend Rusty has asked him for a job in the travel agency. Rusty has proposed that he be paid 50 percent of whatever additional commissions he can bring to the agency plus a salary of $400 per month. Weatherby has estimated that Rusty can generate the following additional bookings per month:
|
Game tickets
|
$ 8,000
|
|
Airline tickets
|
1,500
|
|
Hotel bookings
|
6,000
|
|
Total
|
$15,500
|
Hiring Rusty would also increase fixed cost by $600 per month inclusive of salary. Should Weatherby hire Rusty?
d. Weatherby hired Rusty and in the first month, Rusty generated an additional $13,000 of bookings for the agency. The bookings, however, were all airline tickets. Was the decision to hire Rusty a good one? Why or why not?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Multiproduct firm) The Glass Menagerie makes small pressed resin ducks and ducklings. For every duck sold, the company sells five ducklings. The following information is available about the company’s selling prices and cost:
|
|
Ducks
|
|
Ducklings
|
|
Selling price
|
$24
|
|
$12
|
|
Variable cost
|
12
|
|
8
|
|
Annual fixed cost
|
|
$288,000
|
|
a. What is the average contribution margin ratio?
b. Calculate the monthly break even point if fixed cost is incurred evenly through out the year. At the BEP, indicate how many units of each product will be sold monthly.
c. If the company wants to earn $96,000 pre tax profit monthly, how many units of each product must it sell?
d. Company management has specified $31,680 as monthly net income, and the company is in a 40 percent tax bracket. However, marketing information has indicated that the sales mix has changed to one duck to nine ducklings. How much total revenue and what number of products must be sold to achieve the company’s profit objective?
e. Refer to the original information. If the company can reduce variable cost per duck ling to $4 by raising monthly fixed cost by $8,500, how will the break even point change? Should the company make these changes? Explain your answer.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Comprehensive; multiproduct) Nature’s Own makes three types of wood flooring: Oak, Hickory, and Cherry. The company’s tax rate is 40 percent. The following costs are expected for 2011:
|
|
|
Oak
|
Hickory
|
Cherry
|
|
Variable cost (on a per square yard basis)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
|
$10.40
|
$6.50
|
$17.60
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
3.60
|
0.80
|
12.80
|
|
Production overhead
|
|
2.00
|
0.30
|
3.50
|
|
Selling expense
|
|
1.00
|
0.50
|
4.00
|
|
Administrative expense
|
|
0.40
|
0.20
|
0.60
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
$760,000
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed selling expense
|
240,000
|
|
|
|
|
Fixed administrative expense
|
200,000
|
|
|
|
Per square yard expected selling prices are as follows: Oak, $32.80; Hickory, $16.00; and Cherry, $50.00. The expected sales mix is as follows:
|
|
Oak
|
Hickory
|
Cherry
|
|
Square yards
|
9,000
|
72,000
|
6,000
|
a. Calculate the break even point for 2011.
b. How many square yards of each product are expected to be sold at the break even point?
c. If the company wants to earn pre tax profit of $800,000, how many square yards of each type of flooring would it need to sell? How much total revenue would be required?
d. If the company wants to earn an after tax profit of $680,000, determine the revenue needed using the contribution margin percentage approach.
e. If the company achieves the revenue determined in part (d), what is the margin of safety (1) in dollars and (2) as a percentage?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(CVP analysis; multiproduct) Ted Tyner owns Sixth Man Hotel, a luxury hotel with 60 two bedroom suites for coaches and their players. Capacity is 10 coaches and 50 players. Each suite is equipped with extra long king sized beds, super tall and extended shower heads, extra tall bathroom vanities, a laptop, and a printer. Each suite has a Pacific Ocean view. Hotel services include airport limousine pickup and drop off, a daily fruit basket, champagne on the day of arrival, and a Hummer for transportation. Coaches and players are interviewed about their dietary restrictions and room service requirements before arrival. The hotel’s original cost was $1,920,000, and depreciation is $160,000 per year. Other hotel operating costs include:
|
Labor
|
$320,000 per year plus $5 per suite per day
|
|
Utilities
|
$158,000 per year plus $1 per suite per day
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
$100,000 per year plus $6 per suite per day
|
In addition to these costs, costs are also incurred on food and beverage for each guest. These costs are strictly variable and (on average) are $40 per day for coaches and $15 per day for players.
a. Assuming that the hotel is able to maintain an average annual occupancy of 80 percent in both coach and player suites (based on a 360 day year), determine the minimum daily charge that must be assessed per suite per day to generate $240,000 of income before tax.
b. Assume that the per day price Tyner charges is $240 for coaches and $200 for players. If the sales mix is 12:48 (12 coach days of occupancy for every 48 player days of occupancy), compute the following:
1. The break even point in total occupancy days.
2. Total occupancy days required to generate $400,000 of income before tax.
3. Total occupancy days to generate $400,000 of after tax income. Tyner’s personal tax rate is 35 percent.
c. Tyner is considering adding a massage service for guests to complement current hotel services. He has estimated that the cost of providing such a service would largely be fixed because all necessary facilities already exist. He would, however, need to hire five certified masseurs at a cost of $500,000 per year. If Tyner decides to add this service, how much would he need to increase his daily charges (assume equal dollar increases to coach and player room fees) to maintain the break even point computed in (b)?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(MS; DOL; PV graph) You are considering buying one of two local firms (Olson Corp. and Miami Inc.). Olson Corp. uses a substantial amount of direct labor in its manufacturing operations and its salespeople work on com mission. Miami Inc. uses the latest automated technology in manufacturing; its sales people are salaried. The following financial information is available for the two companies:
|
|
OLSON CORP.
|
MIAMI INC.
|
|
|
2010
|
2011
|
2010
|
2011
|
|
Sales
|
$600,000
|
$960,000
|
$600,000
|
$840,000
|
|
Expenses including taxes
|
(528,000)
|
(823,200)
|
(528,000)
|
(667,200)
|
|
Net income
|
$ 72,000
|
$136,800
|
$ 72,000
|
$172,800
|
After examining cost data, you find that the fixed cost for Olson Corp. is $60,000; the fixed cost for Miami Inc. is $300,000. The tax rate for both companies is 40 percent.
a. Recast the income statements into a variable costing format.
b. What are the break even sales for each firm for each year?
c. Assume that you could acquire either firm for $1,200,000, and you want an after tax return of 12 percent on your investment. Determine what sales level for each firm would allow you to reach your goal.
d. What is the margin of safety for each firm for each year? What is the degree of operating leverage?
e. Assume that product demand for 2012 is expected to rise by 15 percent from the 2011 level. What will be the expected net income for each firm?
f. Assume that product demand for 2012 is expected to fall by 20 percent from the 2011 level. What will be the expected net income for each firm?
g. Prepare a profit volume graph for each firm.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Budgeted income statement) The operating results in summarized form for a retail computer store for 2010 are:
|
Revenue:
|
|
|
Hardware sales
|
$ 4,800,000
|
|
Software sales
|
2,000,000
|
|
Maintenance contracts
|
1,200,000
|
|
Total revenue
|
$ 8,000,000
|
|
Costs and expenses:
|
|
|
Cost of hardware sales
|
$ 3,360,000
|
|
Cost of software sales
|
1,200,000
|
|
Marketing expenses
|
600,000
|
|
Customer maintenance costs
|
640,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
1,120,000
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
$ (6,920,000)
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 1,080,000
|
The computer store is in the process of formulating its operating budget for 2011 and has made the following assumptions:
- The selling prices of hardware are expected to increase 10 percent but there will be no selling price increases for software and maintenance contracts.
- Hardware unit sales are expected to increase 5 percent with a corresponding 5 per cent growth in the number of maintenance contracts; growth in unit software sales is estimated at 8 percent.
- The cost of hardware and software is expected to increase 4 percent.
- Marketing expenses will be increased 5 percent in the coming year.
- Three technicians will be added to the customer maintenance operations in the coming year, increasing the customer maintenance costs by $120,000.
- Administrative costs will be held at the same level.
Compute the computer retail store’s budgeted operating income for 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Budgeted income statement) Alyssa Co. is planning to purchase a new piece of production equipment. The equipment will increase fixed overhead by $700,000 per year in depreciation but reduce variable expenses per unit by 20 percent. Budgeted 2011 sales of the company’s products are 240,000 units at an average selling price of $25. Variable expenses are currently 65 percent of sales, and fixed costs total $1,400,000 per year.
a. Prepare an income statement assuming that the new equipment is not purchased.
b. What is the current variable cost per unit? What will be the new variable cost per unit if the equipment is purchased?
c. Prepare an income statement assuming that the new equipment is purchased.
d. Should the equipment be acquired?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Production and purchases budgets) Caleb Corp. has prepared the following unit sales forecast for 2011:
|
|
January–June
|
July–December
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
1,160,000
|
1,440,000
|
2,600,000
|
Estimated ending Finished Goods Inventories are 50,000 units at December 31, 2010; 72,000 units at June 30, 2011; and 120,000 units at December 31, 2011.
In manufacturing a unit of this product, Caleb Corp. uses 3 pounds of Material A and 0.75 gallons of Material B. Materials A and B cost, respectively, $2.50 per pound and $1.80 per gallon.
The company carries no Work in Process Inventory. Ending inventories of direct material are projected as follows:
|
|
December 31, 2010
|
June 30, 2011
|
December 31, 2011
|
|
Material A (in pounds)
|
240,000
|
270,000
|
284,000
|
|
Material B (in gallons)
|
90,000
|
70,000
|
76,000
|
Prepare a production and purchases budget for each semiannual period of 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Production and purchases budgets; writing) Narisho Supply is in the process of preparing the budget for the first quarter of 2011. The following projections for unit sales have been made:
|
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
Total
|
|
Sales
|
72,000
|
64,000
|
60,000
|
196,000
|
Each finished unit requires three direct materials: 4 pounds of Material M, 2.5 pounds of Material N, and 2 pounds of Material O. Based on company policies, the following estimates of finished units and pounds of direct material inventories are made:
|
|
December
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
|
Finished units
|
18,000
|
16,000
|
15,000
|
14,000
|
|
Direct material M
|
13,500
|
12,000
|
11,250
|
10,500
|
|
Direct material N
|
9,000
|
8,000
|
7,500
|
7,000
|
|
Direct material O
|
7,300
|
9,400
|
8,200
|
8,500
|
a. Prepare a monthly production and purchases budget for the first quarter of 2011.
b. The production supervisor wants to purchase new production equipment for 2011.Such equipment would largely replace the current labor intensive production system. Write a memo to corporate management explaining why new production equipment could affect the production and purchases budget.
c. Who should be consulted to determine the new material requirements per unit if the new production equipment is installed?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Production; purchases; cash disbursements) So Sweet! has budgeted sales of 600,000 cans of diet iced tea mix during June 2010 and 750,000 cans during July. Production of the mix requires 14.5 ounces of tea and 1.5 ounces of sugar substitute. June 1 inventories of tea and sugar substitute are as follows:
|
Iced tea mix
|
24,600 cans of finished product
|
|
Tea
|
750 pounds
|
|
Sugar substitute
|
200 pounds
|
So Sweet! generally carries a finished goods inventory equal to 5 percent of the following month’s needs; raw material ending inventories should equal 10 percent of Finished Goods Inventory. Assuming that the ending inventory policy is met, answer the following questions.
a. How many cans of iced tea mix will be produced in June?
b. How many pounds of tea will be purchased in June?
c. How many pounds of sugar substitute will be purchased in June?
d. Tea and sugar substitute cost $3.50 and $0.40 per pound, respectively. What dollar amount of raw material purchases is budgeted for June?
e. If the company normally pays for 40 percent of its budgeted purchases during the month of purchase and takes a 2 percent discount, what are budgeted cash disbursements in June for June purchases? How much will So Sweet! owe for June purchases in July?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Production; purchases; direct labor & OH budgets) Atkinson’s Reliable Tools makes two products that use similar raw materials: #587Q and #253X. Estimated production needs for a unit of each product follow.
|
|
#587Q
|
#253X
|
|
Steel (in pounds)
|
3
|
5
|
|
Wood (in board feet)
|
0.5
|
0.2
|
|
Direct labor (in hours)
|
2
|
3
|
|
Machine hours
|
0.5
|
0.7
|
Estimated sales in units by product for 2011 are 80,000 of #587Q and 30,000 of #253X. Additionally, estimated beginning and desired ending inventory quantities for 2011 are as follows.
|
|
Beginning
|
Ending
|
|
#587Q (units)
|
800
|
640
|
|
#253X (units)
|
1,200
|
900
|
|
Steel (in pounds)
|
2,000
|
1,400
|
|
Wood (in board feet)
|
800
|
600
|
Overhead is applied to production at the rate of $15 per machine hour and the direct labor wage rate is $10.50 per hour. Prepare the production, purchases, direct labor, and overhead budgets for 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Production; purchases; cash budgets) Corner Brook Furniture Co. makes bookstands and expects sales and collections for the first three months of 2011 to be as follows:
January February March Total Sales quantity (units) 6,400 5,200 7,400 19,000
Revenue $128,000 $104,000 $148,000 $380,000
Collections $116,200 $ 81,300 $101,500 $299,000
The December 31, 2010, balance sheet revealed the following selected account balances: Cash, $18,320; Direct Material Inventory, $8,230; Finished Goods Inventory, $23,200; and Accounts Payable, $5,800. The Direct Material Inventory balance rep resents 1,580 pounds of scrap iron and 1,200 bookstand bases. The Finished Goods Inventory consists of 1,220 bookstands.
Each bookstand requires 2 pounds of scrap iron, which costs $3 per pound. Book stand bases are purchased from a local lumber mill at a cost of $2.50 per unit. Company management decided that, beginning in 2011, the ending balance of Direct Material Inventory should be 25 percent of the following month’s production requirements and that the ending balance of Finished Goods Inventory should be 20 percent of the next month’s sales. Sales for April and May are expected to be 8,000 bookstands per month.
The company normally pays for 75 percent of a month’s purchases of direct material in the month of purchase (on which it takes a 1 percent cash discount).The remaining 25 percent is paid in full in the month following the month of purchase.
Direct labor is budgeted at $0.70 per bookstand produced and is paid in the month of production. Total cash manufacturing overhead is budgeted at $14,000 per month plus $1.30 per bookstand. Total cash selling and administrative costs equal $13,600per month plus 10 percent of sales revenue. These costs are all paid in the month of incurrence. In addition, the company plans to pay executive bonuses of $35,000in January 2011 and make an estimated quarterly tax payment of $5,000 in March2011.
Management requires a minimum cash balance of $10,000 at the end of each month. If the company borrows funds, it will do so only in $1,000 multiples at the beginning of a month at a 12 percent annual interest rate. Loans are to be repaid at the end of a month in multiples of $1,000. Interest is paid only when a repayment is made. Investments are made in $1,000 multiples at the end of a month, and the return on investment is 8 percent per year.
a. Prepare a production budget by month and in total for the first quarter of 2011.
b. Prepare a direct material purchases budget by month and in total for the first quarter of 2011.
c. Prepare a schedule of cash payments for purchases by month and in total for the first quarter of 2011.
d. Prepare a combined payments schedule for manufacturing overhead and selling and administrative cash costs for each month and in total for the first quarter of2011.
e. Prepare a cash budget for each month and in total for the first quarter of 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Budgeted sales and S&A; other computations) Butler Inc. has projected Cost of Goods Sold (CGS) for June 2011 of $1,500,000. Of this amount, $80,000 represents fixed overhead costs. Total variable costs for the company each month aver age 70 percent of sales. The company’s cost to retail (CGS to sales) percentage is 60 percent, and the company normally generates net income equal to 15 percent of sales.
All purchases and expenses (except depreciation) are paid 65 percent in the month incurred and 35 percent in the following month. Depreciation is $45,000 per month.
a. What are Butler Inc.’s expected sales for June?
b. What are Butler Inc.’s expected variable selling and administrative costs for June?
c. What are Butler Inc.’s total fixed costs? How much of this is fixed selling and administrative cost?
d. Butler Inc. normally collects 55 percent of its sales in the month of sale and the rest in the next month. What are expected cash receipts and disbursements related only to June’s transactions?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Budgeted cash collections; budgeted accounts receivable; bad debts) Cute and Cuddly Inc. sells teddy bears in walk by kiosks in shopping malls. The company’s balance sheet on March 31, 2010, showed the following balances related to Accounts Receivable and inventories
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$346,000
|
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts
|
$35,000
|
|
Inventory
|
208,000
|
|
Accounts payable to suppliers
|
$455,000
|
The company’s controller, Brad Jones, is making budget projections for the second quarter of 2010 and has made the following assumptions:
- Budgeted sales: April—60,000 units, May—140,000 units, June—46,000 units
- Selling price per bear—$12
- Cost per bear—$8
- Expected cash collections from 3/31/2010 Accounts Receivable:
|
In April:
|
$ 36,000
|
|
In May:
|
295,000
|
|
To be written off :
|
15,000
|
Other information:
The Accounts Receivable balance at March 31 consists of $36,000 from February sales and $310,000 from March sales. For budgeting purposes, Jones estimates that $36,000 will be collected in April, $295,000 in May, and that the remaining $15,000 will be written off during the second quarter.
Eighty percent of sales are on credit. The remaining sales are cash sales. Twenty five percent of credit sales are collected in the month of sale, with 55 percent in the month following and 18 percent in the second month following. The remaining 2 percent are uncollectible. The company expects to write off $15,000 of accounts receivable during the second quarter.
Thirty percent of purchases are paid for in the month of purchase with the remain der in the month following.
The company budgets ending inventory equal to 40 percent of the following month’s sales in units. July’s sales are budgeted at 30,000 units.
a. Prepare a sales budget for the quarter ended June 30, 2010.
b. Compute budgeted cash collections for the quarter ending June 30, 2010.
c. Compute budgeted Accounts Receivable at June 30, 2010.
d. Compute the estimated bad debt expense that will appear in the budgeted income statement for the quarter ending June 30, 2010.
e. How would the Accounts Receivable be presented on the budgeted balance sheet at June 30, 2010?
f. Computed budgeted purchases for the quarter ended June 30, 2010.
g. Compute budgeted cash payments for inventory for the quarter ended June 30, 2010.
h. Compute budgeted accounts payable at June 30, 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash budget) Stabler Co.’s projected March 31, 2011, balance sheet follows.
|
|
|
Liabilities and
|
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
$ 24,000
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$140,400
|
|
Accounts Receivable (net of
|
|
|
|
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectibles
|
|
|
|
|
|
of $2,880)
|
69,120
|
|
|
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
104,800
|
Common Stock
|
$50,000
|
|
|
Plant Assets (net of Accumulated
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depreciation of $120,000)
|
72,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
79,520
|
129,520
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities and
|
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$269,920
|
Stockholders’Equity
|
|
$269,920
|
Additional information about the company is as follows:
- Expected sales for April and May are $240,000 and $260,000, respectively. All sales are made on account.
- The monthly collection pattern from the month of sale forward is 50 percent, 48 percent, and 2 percent uncollectible. Accounts Receivable and the Allowance for Uncollectibles reflect only accounts for March.
- Cost of goods sold is 65 percent of sales.
- Purchases each month are 60 percent of the current month’s sales and 30 percent of the next month’s projected sales. All purchases are paid for in full in the month following purchase.
- Dividends of $20,000 will be declared and paid in April 2011.
- Selling and administrative expenses each month are $43,000, of which $8,000 is depreciation.
- Investments and borrowings must be made in $1,000 amounts.
a. What were March 2011 sales?
b. What will be budgeted cash collections for April 2011?
c. What will be the Merchandise Inventory balance at April 30, 2011?
d. What will be the projected balance in the Retained Earnings account at April 30,2011?
e. If the company wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $16,000, how much will be available for investment, or be borrowed at the end of April 2011?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash budget) Vassar Corp. has incurred substantial losses for several years and has decided to declare bankruptcy. The company petitioned the court for protection from creditors on March 31, 2010, and submitted the following balance sheet:
|
|
VASSAR CORP.
|
|
|
|
Balance Sheet
|
|
|
|
March 31, 2010
|
|
|
|
Book Value
|
Liquidation Value
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$100,000
|
$ 50,000
|
|
Inventories
|
90,000
|
40,000
|
|
Plant Assets (net)
|
150,000
|
160,000
|
|
Totals
|
$340,000
|
$250,000
|
Vassar’s liabilities and stockholders’ equity at this date are as follows:
|
Accounts Payable—General Creditors
|
$600,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
60,000
|
|
Retained Earnings Deficit
|
(320,000)
|
|
Totals
|
$340,000
|
Vassar’s management informed the court that the company has developed a new product and that a prospective customer is willing to sign a contract for the purchase of 12,000 units during the year ending March 31, 2011, and 15,000 units during the year ending March 31, 2012, at a price of $90 per unit. This product can be manufactured using Vassar’s present facilities. Monthly production with immediate delivery is expected to be uniform within each year. Receivables are expected to be collected during the calendar month following sales. Unit production costs of the new product are estimated as follows:
|
Direct material
|
$20
|
|
Direct labor
|
30
|
|
Variable overhead
|
40
|
Fixed costs of $130,000 (excluding depreciation) are incurred per year. Purchases of direct material will be paid during the calendar month following purchase. Fixed costs, direct labor, and variable overhead will be paid as incurred. Inventory of direct material will equal 60 days’ usage. After the first month of operations, 30 days’ usage will be ordered each month.
- The general creditors have agreed to reduce their total claims to 60 percent of their March 31, 2010, balances under the following conditions:
- Existing accounts receivable and inventories are to be liquidated immediately, with the proceeds turned over to the general creditors.
- The reduced balance of accounts payable is to be paid as cash is generated from future operations but no later than March 31, 2012. No interest will be paid on these obligations.
Under this proposed plan, the general creditors would receive $110,000 more than the current liquidation value of Vassar’s assets. The court has engaged you to determine the feasibility of this plan.
Ignoring any need to borrow and repay short term funds for working capital purposes, prepare a cash budget for the years ending March 31, 2011 and 2012, showing the cash expected to be available for paying the claims of the general creditors, the amount of payments to general creditors, and the cash remaining after payment of claims.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash budget) Collegiate Management Education (CME) Inc. is a nonprofit organization that sponsors a wide variety of management seminars throughout the Southwest. In addition, it is heavily involved in research into improved methods of teaching and motivating college administrators. Its seminar activity is largely sup ported by fees, and the research program is supported by membership dues.
CME operates on a calendar year basis and is finalizing the budget for 2011. The following information has been taken from approved plans, which are still tentative at this time:
Seminar Program
Revenue
The scheduled number of programs should produce $12,000,000 of revenue for the year. Each program is budgeted to produce the same amount of revenue. The revenue is collected during the month the program is offered. The programs are scheduled during the basic academic year and are not held during June, July, August, or December. Of the revenue, 12 percent is generated in each of the first five months of the year and the remainder is distributed evenly during September, October, and November.
Direct expenses
The seminar expenses are of three types:
- Instructors’ fees are paid at the rate of 70 percent of seminar revenue in the month following the seminar. The instructors are considered independent contractors and are not eligible for CME employee benefits.
- Facilities fees total $5,600,000 for the year. They are the same for each program and are paid in the month the program is given.
- Annual promotional costs of $1,000,000 are spent equally in all months except June and July, when there is no promotional effort.
Research Program
Research grant
The research program has a large number of projects nearing completion. The main research activity this year includes feasibility studies for new projects to be started in 2012. As a result, the total grant expense of $3,000,000 for 2011 is expected to be incurred at the rate of $500,000 per month during the first six months of the year.
Salaries and Other CME Expenses
- Office lease—annual amount of $240,000 paid monthly at the beginning of each month.
- General administrative expenses—$1,500,000 annually, or $125,000 per month, paid in cash as incurred.
- Depreciation expense—$240,000 per year.
- General CME promotion—annual cost of $600,000, paid monthly.
- Salaries and benefits are as follows:
|
Number of
|
Annual
|
Total Annual
|
|
Employees
|
Cash Salary
|
Salaries
|
|
1
|
$50,000
|
$ 50,000
|
|
3
|
40,000
|
120,000
|
|
4
|
30,000
|
120,000
|
|
15
|
25,000
|
375,000
|
|
5
|
15,000
|
75,000
|
|
22
|
10,000
|
220,000
|
|
50
|
|
$960,000
|
Employee benefits are $240,000, or 25 percent of annual salaries. Except for the pension contribution, the benefits are paid as salaries are paid. The annual pension payment of $24,000, based on 2.5 percent of total annual salaries, is due on April 15,2011.
Other Information
- Membership income—CME has 100,000 members, each of whom pays a $100 annual fee. The fee for the calendar year is invoiced in late June.
- Collection schedule—July, 60 percent; August, 30 percent; September, 5 percent; and October, 5 percent.
- Capital expenditures—this program calls for a total of $510,000 in cash payments to be spread evenly over the first five months of 2011.
- Cash and temporary investments at January 1, 2011, are estimated at $750,000.
a. Prepare a budget of the annual cash receipts and disbursements for 2011.
b. Prepare a cash budget for CME for January 2011.
c. Using the information developed in parts (a) and (b) identify two important operating problems of CME.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash budget) Blackman Corp., a rapidly expanding crossbow distributor, is in the process of formulating plans for 2011. Cara Jordan, director of marketing, has completed her 2011 forecast and is confident that sales estimates will be met or exceeded. The following forecasted sales figures show the growth expected and will provide the planning basis for other corporate departments.
|
|
SALES
|
|
SALES
|
|
January
|
$3,600,000
|
July
|
$6,000,000
|
|
February
|
4,000,000
|
August
|
6,000,000
|
|
March
|
3,600,000
|
September
|
6,400,000
|
|
April
|
4,400,000
|
October
|
6,400,000
|
|
May
|
5,000,000
|
November
|
6,000,000
|
|
June
|
5,600,000
|
December
|
6,800,000
|
George Moore, assistant controller, has been given the responsibility for formulating the cash flow projection, a critical element during a period of rapid expansion. The following information will be used in preparing the cash analysis:
- Blackman has experienced an excellent record in accounts receivable collections and expects this trend to continue. The company collects 60 percent of its billings in the month after the sale and 40 percent in the second month after the sale. Uncollectible accounts are insignificant and should not be considered in the analysis.
- The purchase of crossbows is Blackman’s largest expenditure; the cost of these items equals 50 percent of sales. The company receives 60 percent of the crossbows one month prior to sale and 40 percent during the month of sale.
- Prior experience shows that 80 percent of accounts payable is paid by Blackman one month after receipt of the purchased crossbows, and the remaining 20 percent is paid the second month after receipt.
- Hourly wages, including fringe benefits, are a function of sales volume and are equal to 20 percent of the current month’s sales. These wages are paid in the month incurred.
- Administrative expenses are projected to be $5,280,000 for 2011. All of these expenses are incurred uniformly throughout the year except the property taxes. Property taxes are paid in four equal installments in the last month of each quarter. The composition of the expenses is:
|
Salaries
|
$ 960,000
|
|
Promotion
|
1,320,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
480,000
|
|
Insurance
|
720,000
|
|
Utilities
|
600,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,200,000
|
|
Total
|
$5,280,000
|
- Income tax payments are made by Blackman in the first month of each quarter based on income for the prior quarter. Blackman’s income tax rate is 40 percent. Blackman’s net income for the first quarter of 2011 is projected to be $1,224,000.
- Blackman has a corporate policy of maintaining an end of month cash balance of $200,000. Cash is invested or borrowed monthly, as necessary, to maintain this balance.
- Blackman uses a calendar year reporting period.
a. Prepare a budgeted schedule of cash receipts and disbursements for Blackman Corp., by month, for the second quarter of 2011. Ignore interest expense and/or interest income associated with the borrowing/investing activities.
b. Discuss why cash budgeting is particularly important for a rapidly expanding company such as Blackman Corp.
c. Do monthly cash budgets ignore the pattern of cash flows within the month? Explain.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash budget; budgeted income statement) Davide’s Arrangements purchases, wholesales, and retails fresh flowers. Company estimates reveal the following for the first three months of the company’s 2011 fiscal year:
|
|
PURCHASES
|
SALES
|
|
June
|
$132,000
|
$204,000
|
|
July
|
116,000
|
184,000
|
|
August
|
160,000
|
232,000
|
Davide’s pays 60 percent of any month’s purchases in the month of purchase, receiving a 2 percent discount on those payments. The remaining amount is paid in the following month, with no discount given. Other monthly payments for expenses are $48,000plus 12 percent of sales revenue. Depreciation is $8,000 per month. Davide’s maintains a minimum cash balance of $28,000. Borrowings and repayments must be made in $1,000amounts.
All retail sales are for cash and all wholesale transactions are on credit. Experience indicates the following expected collection pattern for credit sales: 25 percent in the month of sale, 60 percent in the month following the sale, and 15 percent in the second month following the sale. The company has no debt other than what is currently owed for purchases on account.
a. Calculate the July 31 balances for Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable.
b. Calculate the expected total cash collections in August.
c. Calculate the expected total cash disbursements in August.
d. Prepare a cash budget for August, assuming that the beginning balance of cash was $28,470.
e. Prepare a budgeted income statement for August. Assume an average gross profit rate of 45 percent and ignore income taxes.
f. Explain how and why inventory management must be different for perishable commodities than for nonperishable commodities.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Comprehensive) Clarenville Kitchen Products produces and sells upscale mixers and breadmakers. In October 2010, Clarenville’s budget department gathered the following data to meet budget requirements for 2011.
|
2011 PROJECTED SALES
|
|
|
|
Product
|
Units
|
Price
|
|
Mixers
|
60,000
|
$ 90
|
|
Breadmakers
|
40,000
|
140
|
|
2011 INVENTORIES (UNITS)
|
|
|
|
|
Expected
|
Desired
|
|
Product
|
1/1/11
|
12/31/11
|
|
Mixers
|
15,000
|
20,000
|
|
Breadmakers
|
4,000
|
5,000
|
To produce one unit of each product, the following major internal components are used (in addition to the plastic housing for products, which is subcontracted in a subsequent operation):
|
Component
|
Mixer
|
Breadmaker
|
|
Motor
|
1
|
1
|
|
Beater
|
2
|
4
|
|
Fuse
|
2
|
3
|
Projected data for 2011 with respect to components are as follows:
|
|
Anticipated
|
Expected Inventory
|
Desired Inventory
|
|
|
Purchase Price
|
1/1/11
|
12/31/11
|
|
Motor
|
$18.00
|
2,000
|
3,600 units
|
|
Beater
|
1.75
|
21,000
|
24,000 units
|
|
Fuse
|
2.40
|
6,000
|
7,500 units
|
Projected direct labor requirements for 2011 and rates are as follows:
|
Product
|
Hours per Unit
|
Rate per Hour
|
|
Mixers
|
2
|
$ 8
|
|
Breadmakers
|
3
|
10
|
Overhead is applied at a rate of $7.50 per direct labor hour.
Based on these projections and budget requirements for 2011 for mixers and bread makers, prepare the following budgets for 2011:
a. Sales budget (in dollars)
b. Production budget (in units)
c. Internal components purchases budget (in units and dollars)
d. Direct labor budget (in dollars)
e. The total production cost, excluding subsequent departments, per mixer and per breadmaker
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Master budget preparation) Kalogridis Corp. manufactures industrial dye. The company is preparing its 2011 master budget and has presented you with the following information:
a. The projected December 31, 2010, balance sheet for the company is as follows: KALOGRIDIS CORP. Balance Sheet December 31, 2010
|
|
KALOGRIDIS CORP.
|
|
|
|
Balance Sheet December 31, 2010
|
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
Cash
|
|
$ 5,080
|
Notes Payable
|
|
$ 25,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
26,500
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
2,148
|
|
Raw Material Inventory
|
|
800
|
Dividends Payable
|
|
10,000
|
|
Finished Goods Inventory
|
|
2,104
|
Total Liabilities
|
|
$ 37,148
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
1,200
|
Common Stock
|
$100,000
|
|
|
Building
|
$300,000
|
|
Paid in Capital
|
50,000
|
|
|
Accum. Depreciation
|
(20,000)
|
280,000
|
Retained Earnings
|
128,536
|
278,536
|
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities and
|
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
|
$315,684
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
$315,684
|
b. The Accounts Receivable balance at 12/31/10 represents the remaining balances of November and December credit sales. Sales were $70,000 and $65,000, respectively,in those two months.
c. Estimated sales in gallons of dye for January through May 2011 are as follows:
|
January
|
8,000
|
|
February
|
10,000
|
|
March
|
15,000
|
|
April
|
12,000
|
|
May
|
11,000
|
Each gallon of dye sells for $12.
d. The collection pattern for accounts receivable is as follows: 70 percent in the month of sale, 20 percent in the first month after the sale, and 10 percent in the second month after the sale. Kalogridis Corp. expects no bad debts and gives no cash discounts.
e. Each gallon of dye has the following standard quantities and costs for direct material and direct labor:
|
1.2 gallons of direct material (some evaporation occurs during
|
|
|
processing) X $0.80 per gallon
|
$0.96
|
|
0.5 hour of direct labor X $6 per hour
|
3.00
|
f. Variable overhead (VOH) is applied to the product on a machine hour basis. Processing 1 gallon of dye takes 5 hours of machine time. The variable overhead rate is $0.06 per machine hour; VOH consists entirely of utility costs. Total annual fixed overhead is $120,000; it is applied at $1 per gallon based on an expected annual capacity of 120,000 gallons. Fixed overhead per year is composed of the following costs:
|
Salaries
|
$78,000
|
|
Utilities
|
12,000
|
|
Insurance—factory
|
2,400
|
|
Depreciation—factory
|
27,600
|
Fixed overhead is incurred evenly throughout the year.
g. There is no beginning Work in Process Inventory. All work in process is completed in the period in which it is started. Raw Material Inventory at the beginning of the year consists of 1,000 gallons of direct material at a standard cost of $0.80 per gallon. There are 400 gallons of dye in Finished Goods Inventory at the beginning of the year carried at a standard cost of $5.26 per gallon: direct material, $0.96; direct labor, $3.00; variable overhead, $0.30; and fixed overhead, $1.00.
h. Accounts Payable relates solely to raw material and is paid 60 percent in the month of purchase and 40 percent in the month after purchase. No discounts are received for prompt payment.
i. The dividend will be paid in January 2011.
j. A new piece of equipment costing $9,000 will be purchased on March 1, 2011.Payment of 80 percent will be made in March and 20 percent in April. The equipment has a useful life of three years, will have no salvage value, and will be placed into service on March 1.
k. The note payable has a 12 percent interest rate; interest is paid at the end of each month. The principal of the note is repaid as cash is available to do so.
l. Kalogridis Corp.’s management has set a minimum cash balance at $5,000.Investments and borrowings are made in even $100 amounts. Interest on any borrowings is expected to be 12 percent per year and investments will earn 4 percent per year.
m. The ending Finished Goods Inventory should include 5 percent of the next month’s needs. This situation will not be true at the beginning of 2011 due to a miscalculation in sales for December. The ending inventory of raw materials also should be 5 percent of the next month’s needs.
n. Selling and administrative costs per month are as follows: salaries, $25,000; rent,$7,000; and utilities, $800. These costs are paid in cash as they are incurred.
o. The company’s tax rate is 35 percent. (Round to the nearest dollar.)
Prepare a master budget for each month of the first quarter of 2011 and pro forma financial statements as of the end of the first quarter of 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparing and analyzing a budget) Norton Weymer & Collins,LLP, a local accounting firm, has a formal budgeting system. The firm has five partners, two managers, four seniors, two secretaries, and two bookkeepers. The budgeting process has a bottom line focus; that is, the budget and planning process continues to iterate and evolve until an acceptable budgeted net income is obtained. The determination of an acceptable level of net income is based on two factors: (1) the amount of salary the partners could generate if they were employed elsewhere and (2) a reasonable return on the partners’ investment in the firm’s net assets.
For 2011, after careful consideration of alternative employment opportunities, the partners agreed that the best alternative employment would generate the following salaries:
|
Partner 1
|
$150,000
|
|
Partner 2
|
225,000
|
|
Partner 3
|
110,000
|
|
Partner 4
|
90,000
|
|
Partner 5
|
125,000
|
|
Total
|
$700,000
|
The second input to determining the desired net income level is more complex. This part of the desired net income is based on the value of the net assets owned by the accounting firm. The partners have identified two major categories of assets: tangible and intangible. The partners have agreed that the net tangible assets are worth $230,000. The intangible assets, consisting mostly of the accounting practice itself, are worth 1.1 times gross fees billed in 2010, which totaled $1,615,000. The partners have also agreed that a reasonable rate of return on the net assets of the accounting firm is 12 percent. Thus, the partners’ desired net income from return on investment is as follows:
|
Tangible assets
|
$ 230,000
|
|
Intangible assets ($1,615,000 X 110 percent)
|
1,776,500
|
|
Total investment
|
$2,006,500
|
|
Rate of return
|
_ 0.12
|
|
Required dollar return
|
$ 240,780
|
The experience of the accounting firm indicates that other operating costs are incurred as follows:
|
Fixed expenses (per year)
|
|
|
Salaries (other than partners)
|
$300,000
|
|
Overhead
|
125,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
|
|
Overhead
|
15 percent of gross billings
|
|
Client service
|
5 percent of gross billings
|
a. Determine the minimum level of gross billings that would allow the partners to realize their net income objective. Prepare a budget of costs and revenues at that level.
b. If the partners believe that the level of billings you have projected in part (a) is not feasible given the time constraints at the partner, manager, and senior levels, what changes can they make to the budget to preserve the desired level of net income?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Revising and analyzing an operating budget) Attala Co., a division of Jackson Industries ( JI), offers consulting services to clients for a fee. JI’s corporate management is pleased with the performance of Attala Co. for the first nine months of the current year and has recommended that Attala Co.’s division manager, Jason Newport, submit a revised forecast for the remaining quarter because the division has exceeded the annual year to date plan by 20 percent of operating income. An unexpected increase in billed hour volume over the original plan is the main reason for this gain in income. The original operating budget for the first three quarters for Attala Co. is as follows:
|
|
2011 OPERATING BUDGET
|
|
|
|
1st
|
2nd
|
3rd
|
Total
|
|
|
Quarter
|
Quarter
|
Quarter
|
9 Months
|
|
Consulting fees
|
|
|
|
|
|
Management consulting
|
$ 315,000
|
$ 315,000
|
$ 315,000
|
$945,000
|
|
EDP consulting
|
421,875
|
421,875
|
421,875
|
1,265,625
|
|
Total
|
$ 736,875
|
$ 736,875
|
$ 736,875
|
$ 2,210,625
|
|
Other revenue
|
10,000
|
10,000
|
10,000
|
30,000
|
|
Total
|
$ 746,875
|
$ 746,875
|
$ 746,875
|
$ 2,240,625
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
|
|
Consultant salaries
|
$(386,750)
|
$(386,750)
|
$(386,750)
|
$(1,160,250)
|
|
Travel and entertainment
|
(45,625)
|
(45,625)
|
(45,625)
|
(136,875)
|
|
Administrative
|
(100,000)
|
(100,000)
|
(100,000)
|
(300,000)
|
|
Depreciation
|
(40,000)
|
(40,000)
|
(40,000)
|
(120,000)
|
|
Corporate allocation
|
(50,000)
|
(50,000)
|
(50,000)
|
(150,000)
|
|
Total
|
$(622,375)
|
$(622,375)
|
$(622,375)
|
$(1,867,125)
|
|
Operating income
|
$ 124,500
|
$ 124,500
|
$ 124,500
|
$ 373,500
|
When comparing the actuals for the first three quarters to the original plan, Newport analyzed the variances and will reflect the following information in his revised forecast for the fourth quarter.
The division currently has 25 consultants on staff, 10 for management consulting and 15 for EDP consulting, and has hired 3 additional management consultants to start work at the beginning of the fourth quarter to meet the increased client demand.
The hourly billing rates for consulting revenues will remain at $90 for each management consultant and $75 for each EDP consultant. However, due to the favorable increase in billing hour volume when compared to the plan, the hours for each consultant will be increased by 50 hours per quarter. New employees are equally as capable as current employees and their time will be billed at the same rates.
The annual budgeted salaries and actual salaries, paid monthly, are $50,000 for a management consultant and 8 percent less for an EDP consultant. Corporate management has approved a merit increase of 10 percent at the beginning of the fourth quarter for all 25 existing consultants, but the new consultants will be compensated at the planned rate.
The planned salary expense includes a provision for employee fringe benefits amounting to 30 percent of the annual salaries; however, the improvement of some corporate wide employee programs will increase the fringe benefit allocation to 40 percent. The original plan assumes a fixed hourly rate for travel and other related expenses for each billing hour of consulting. These expenses are not reimbursed by the client, and the previously determined hourly rate has proven to be adequate to cover these costs.
Other revenues are derived from temporary rentals and interest income and remain unchanged for the fourth quarter.
Administrative expenses are 7 percent below the plan; this 7 percent savings on fourth quarter expenses will be reflected in the revised plan.
Depreciation for office equipment and computers will stay constant at the projected straight line rate.
Due to the favorable experience for the first three quarters and the division’s increased ability to absorb costs, JI corporate management has increased the corporate expense allocation by 50 percent.
a. Prepare a revised operating budget for the fourth quarter for Attala Co. that Jason Newport will present to Jackson Industries. Be sure to furnish supporting calculations for all revised revenue and expense amounts.
b. Discuss the reasons that an organization would prepare a revised forecast.
c. Discuss your feelings about the 50 percent increase in corporate expense allocations.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Green Thumb makes small plant stands that sell for $25 each. The company’s annual level of production and sales is 120,000 units. In addition to $430,500 of fixed manufacturing overhead and $159,050 of fixed administrative expenses, the following per unit costs have been determined for each plant stand:
|
Direct material
|
$ 6.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
3.00
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
0.80
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
2.20
|
|
Total variable cost
|
$12.00
|
Required:
a. Prepare a variable costing income statement at the current level of production and sales.
b. Calculate the unit contribution margin in dollars and the contribution margin ratio for a plant stand.
c. Determine the break even point in number of plant stands.
d. Calculate the dollar break even point using the contribution margin ratio.
e. Determine Green Thumb’s margin of safety in units, in sales dollars, and as a percentage.
f. Compute the company’s degree of operating leverage. If sales increase by 25 percent, by what percentage will before tax income increase?
g. How many plant stands must the company sell to earn $996,450 in before tax income?
h. If the company wants to earn $657,800 after tax and is subject to a 20 percent tax rate, how many units must be sold?
i. How many plant stands must be sold to break even if Green Thumb’s fixed manufacturing cost increases by $7,865? (Use the original data.)
j. The company has received an offer from a Brazilian company to buy 4,000 plant stands at $20 per unit. The per unit variable selling cost of the additional units will be $2.80 (rather than $2.20), and $18,000 of additional fixed administrative cost will be incurred. This sale would not affect domestic sales or their cost. Based on quantitative factors alone, should Green Thumb accept this offer?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Variable costing income statement) Tasty Beverages began business in 2010 selling bottles of a thirst quenching drink. Production for the first year was 104,000 bottles, and sales were 98,000 bottles. The selling price per bottle was $3.10. Costs incurred during the year were as follows:
|
Ingredients used
|
$ 56,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
26,000
|
|
Variable overhead
|
48,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
5,200
|
|
Variable selling expenses
|
10,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expenses
|
28,000
|
|
Total actual cost
|
$173,200
|
For 2010:
a. What was the production cost per bottle under variable costing?
b. What was variable cost of goods sold?
c. What was the contribution margin per bottle?
d. What was the contribution margin ratio?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Applying the lower of cost or market rule to inventories Rocky Bayou Golf Clubs, which uses the FIFO method, has the following account balances at July 31, 2012, prior to releasing the financial statements for the year:
| |
Inventory
|
Cost of goods sold
|
Sales revenue
|
|
Bal
|
13,500
|
Bal
|
68,000
|
Bal
|
119,000
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
Requirements
1. Prepare any adjusting journal entry required from the information given.
2. What value would Rocky Bayou report on the balance sheet at July 31, 2012, for inventory?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Correcting inventory errors over a three year period Peaceful Carpets’ books show the following data. In early 2013, auditors found that the ending inventory for 2010 was understated by $4,000 and that the ending inventory for 2012 was overstated by $5,000. The ending inventory at December 31, 2011, was correct.
|
|
2012
|
2011
|
2010
|
|
Net sales revenue
|
|
$201,000
|
|
$161,000
|
|
$176,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 22,000
|
|
$ 25,000
|
|
$ 38,000
|
|
|
Net purchases
|
130,000
|
|
104,000
|
|
92,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods available
|
$152,000
|
|
$129,000
|
|
$130,000
|
|
|
Ending inventory
|
(31,000)
|
|
(22,000)
|
|
(25,000)
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
121,000
|
|
107,000
|
|
105,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
$ 80,000
|
|
$ 54,000
|
|
$ 71,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
|
56,000
|
|
26,000
|
|
35,000
|
|
Net income
|
|
$ 24,000
|
|
$ 28,000
|
|
$ 36,000
|
Requirements
1. Prepare corrected income statements for the three years.
2. State whether each year’s net income—before your corrections—is understated or overstated and indicate the amount of the understatement or overstatement.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Estimating ending inventory by the gross profit method and preparing the income statement Kids Costumes estimates its inventory by the gross profit method. The gross profit has averaged 39% of net sales. The company’s inventory records reveal the following data:
|
Inventory, July 1
|
$ 268,000
|
|
Transactions during July:
|
|
|
Purchases
|
7,661,000
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
171,000
|
|
Purchase returns
|
32,000
|
|
Sales
|
8,788,000
|
|
Sales returns
|
35,000
|
Requirements
1. Estimate the July 31 inventory using the gross profit method.
2. Prepare the July income statement through gross profit for Kids Costumes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for inventory using the perpetual system—LIFO Consider the January transactions. (Cost data has been removed from the sale transactions.)
|
Jan 2
|
Completed a consulting engagement and received cash of $7,800.
|
|
2
|
Prepaid three months’ office rent, $1,650.
|
|
7
|
Purchased 80 units software inventory on account, $1,680, plus freight in, $80.
|
|
18
|
Sold 40 software units on account, $3,500.
|
|
19
|
Consulted with a client for a fee of $1,000 on account.
|
|
20
|
Paid employee salary, $2,055.
|
|
21
|
Paid on account, $1,760.
|
|
22
|
Purchased 240 units software inventory on account, $6,240.
|
|
24
|
Paid utilities, $250.
|
|
28
|
Sold 120 units of software for cash, $4,680.
|
|
31
|
Recorded the following adjusting entries: Accrued salary expense, $685. Depreciation, $100 (Equipment, $30; Furniture, $70). Expiration of prepaid rent, $550. Physical count of inventory, 145 units.
|
Requirements
1. Prepare perpetual inventory records for January for Draper using the LIFO perpetual method. (Note: You must figure cost on the 18th, 28th, and 31st.)
2. Journalize and post the January transactions using the perpetual inventory record created in requirement 1. Key all items by date. Compute each account balance, and denote the balance as Bal.
3. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Denote each adjusting amount as Adj. After posting all adjusting entries, prove the equality of debits and credits in the ledger.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
The July 31, 2010, balance sheet for World Windows Inc. includes the following information
|
Cash
|
$ 40,000 debit
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
270,000 debit
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
18,000 debit
|
The firm’s management has designated $35,000 as the firm’s monthly minimum cash balance. Other information about World Windows is as follows:
- Revenues of $650,000, $720,000, and $825,000 are expected for August, September, and October, respectively. All goods are sold on account.
- The collection pattern for accounts receivable is 55 percent in the month of sale, 44 percent in the month following the sale, and 1 percent uncollectible.
- Cost of Goods Sold (CGS) approximates 60 percent of sales revenues.
- Management wants to end each month with units costing the equivalent of 5 percent of the following month’s CGS. Unit costs are assumed to be stable.
- All accounts payable for inventory are paid in the month of purchase.
- Other monthly expenses are $78,000, which includes $12,000 of depreciation but does not include uncollectible accounts expense.
- Investments of excess cash are made in $5,000 increments.
Required:
a. Forecast the August cash collections.
b. Forecast the August and September cost of purchases.
c. Prepare the cash budget for August including the effects of financing (borrowing or investing).
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- How does budgeting provide important information to managers and operating personnel?
- How does the strategic plan influence preparation of the master budget?
- Distinguish between a strategic plan and a tactical plan. How are these plans related?
- After a master budget has been prepared, what is its role in managerial control?
- Differentiate between the operating and financial budgets that are contained in a master budget. Why are both types needed?
- Why is a firm’s production budget influenced by the finished goods inventory policy?
- Assume that in preparing the cash budget, the accountant discovers that a cash short age will likely occur in a specific month. What actions might the accountant recommend to management to deal with the cash shortage?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
- Discuss the sequence in which the major components of the master budget are pre pared. Why is it necessary to prepare the components in such a sequence?
- The cash budget and the budgeted statement of cash flows both provide information about cash. What information about cash is common to these two sources, and what information is unique to the two sources?
- Why is continuous (rolling) budgeting becoming more popular than it was in the past for organizational managers?
- If the majority of companies find that their forecasts are inaccurate, why should man agers engage in budgeting at all?
- What is budgetary slack, and what might top managers do to rid their firms’ budgets of slack?
- Why is it helpful for a company to prepare a budget manual?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Sales budget) Pataky Co.’s sales manager estimates that 2,000,000 units of product RI#698 will be sold in 2011. The product’s selling price is expected to decline as the result of technology changes during the year and estimates of the sales price are as follows:
|
1st Quarter
|
2nd Quarter
|
3rd Quarter
|
4th Quarter
|
|
$17
|
$16
|
$14
|
$12
|
In talking with customers, the sales department discovered that sales quantities per quarter could vary substantially. Thus, the sales manager has prepared the following three sets of quarterly sales projections:
|
|
1st Quarter
|
2nd Quarter
|
3rd Quarter
|
4th Quarter
|
Total
|
|
Scenario A
|
600,000
|
300,000
|
640,000
|
460,000
|
2,000,000
|
|
Scenario B
|
400,000
|
700,000
|
250,000
|
650,000
|
2,000,000
|
|
Scenario C
|
530,000
|
480,000
|
800,000
|
190,000
|
2,000,000
|
If Pataky’s sales department is able to influence customers, which of the potential sales scenarios would be most profitable for the company? Would that scenario possibly cause the company any difficulties?
(Production budget) Seguin Inc. has the following projected unit sales for the first four months of 2011:
|
January
|
102,400
|
|
February
|
96,000
|
|
March
|
128,000
|
|
April
|
153,600
|
Company policy is to have an ending monthly inventory equal to 5 percent of next month’s estimated sales; however, this criterion was not in effect at the end of 2010.Ending inventory at that time was 7,000 units. Determine the company’s production requirements for each month of the first quarter of 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Production, direct materials, and direct labor budgets) Gerrad Manufacturing has projected sales of its product for the next six months as follows:
|
January
|
300 units
|
|
February
|
700 units
|
|
March
|
1,000 units
|
|
April
|
900 units
|
|
May
|
400 units
|
|
June
|
300 units
|
The finished product requires 3 pounds of raw material and 10 hours of direct labor. Gerrad tries to maintain a Finished Goods ending inventory equal to the next two months of sales and a Raw Material ending inventory equal to one half of the current month’s production needs. January’s beginning inventories are expected to conform to company policy.
a. Prepare a production budget for February, March, and April.
b. Prepare a forecast of the units and cost of raw material that will be required for February, March, and April. The expected cost per pound of raw material is expected to be $2 in February, $2.30 in March, and $2.40 in April.
c. Prepare a direct labor budget (assuming a $12 per hour rate) for February, March, and April.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Budgeted purchases; budgeted cash payments) Grenfell Company is preparing a cash budge for 2010 for purchases of Calvos. Budgeted data are as follows:
|
Cost of goods sold for the year 2010
|
$600,000
|
|
Accounts payable, 1/1/10
|
40,000
|
|
Inventory, 1/1/10
|
60,000
|
|
Desired inventory, 12/31/10
|
84,000
|
Purchases will be made in 12 equal monthly amounts and paid for in the following month. Compute the budgeted cash payment for purchases of Calvos for 2010.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash collections) The treasurer of Homeyra Corp. needs to estimate cash col lections from accounts receivable for September, October, and November 2011. Forty percent of the company’s customers pay in cash and the rest are credit customers. The collection pattern for the credit customers is 20 percent in the month of sale and 80 percent in the following month. Because of Homeyra’s established client base, the company experiences almost zero uncollectible accounts. Estimated total sales for August, September, October, and November 2011 follow.
|
August
|
$78,000
|
|
September
|
80,000
|
|
October
|
95,000
|
|
November
|
91,000
|
Determine Homeyra Corp.’s cash collections for September, October, and November 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash collections) Ridenour Ltd. is preparing its first quarter monthly cash budget for 2011. The following information is available about actual 2010 sales and expected 2011 sales:
|
November
|
December
|
January
|
February
|
March
|
|
$83,000
|
$76,000
|
$79,000
|
$88,000
|
$59,000
|
Tracing collections from prior year monthly sales and discussions with the credit man ager helped develop a profile of collection behavior patterns.
Of a given month’s sales, 40 percent is typically collected in the month of sale. Because the company terms are 1 percent (end of month) net 30, all collections within the month of sale are net of the 1 percent discount. Of a given month’s sales, 30 percent is collected in the month following the sale. The remaining 30 percent is collected in the second month following the month of the sale. Bad debts are negligible and should be ignored.
a. Prepare a schedule of cash collections for Ridenour Ltd. for January, February, and March 2011.
b. Calculate the Accounts Receivable balance at March 31, 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash collections) Miriam Irby is president of MI Corp. Irby has decided to take a month’s vacation with her family to South Africa, Zimbabwe, and Angola. Irby has researched the trip and determined that the total cost of the trip for her family will be approximately $50,000—she wants to go first class on everything! Her travel agent says that a 10 percent discount can be obtained if Irby can write a check for the cost of the trip by the end of November. Irby says she sees no problem in doing that given that the company’s expected billings for October, November, and December, respectively, are $100,000, $65,000, and $15,000 (when Irby will be on vacation).
As of October 31, 2010, MI Corp.’s accountant has estimated cash collections from billings to be 15 percent in the month of sale, 55 percent in the month following sale, and 30 percent in the second month following sale. The September 30, 2010, Accounts Receivable balance is $11,000; that amount is expected to be collected in October. Average monthly business costs are $22,500.
a. What are MI Corp.’s expected cash collections for October, November, and December?
b. Can Irby pay for her trip in November and obtain the 10 percent discount? Explain.
c. What would you suggest that Irby do?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash collections, accounts receivable) Total June 2010 sales for Roy’s Catering are expected to be $450,000. Of each month’s sales, 80 percent is expected to be on credit. The Accounts Receivable balance at May 31 is $119,600, of which $90,000 represents the remainder of May credit sales. There are no receivables from months prior to April 2010. The collection pattern of Roy’s Catering credit sales is 70 percent in the month of sale, 20 percent in the month following the sale, and 10 percent in the second month following the sale. Roy’s Catering has no uncollectible accounts.
a. What were total sales for April 2010?
b. What were credit sales for May 2010?
c. What are projected cash collections for June 2010?
d. What is the expected balance of Accounts Receivable at June 30, 2010?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Direct material purchases and budgeted payments) Campbell Manufacturing intends to start business on January 1, 2011. Production plans for the first four months of operations are as follows:
|
January
|
20,000 units
|
|
February
|
50,000 units
|
|
March
|
70,000 units
|
|
April
|
70,000 units
|
Each unit requires 2 pounds of material. The firm would like to end each month with enough raw materials to cover 25 percent of the following month’s production needs. Raw material costs $7 per pound. Management pays for 40 percent of purchases in the month of purchase and receives a 10 percent discount for these payments. The remaining purchases are paid in the following month, with no discount available.
a. Prepare a purchases budget for the first quarter of 2011 in units, in total, and in dollars.
b. Determine the budgeted payments for purchases of raw materials for each of the first three months of operations and for the quarter in total.
c. Where in the budgeted financial statements do the purchase discounts appear?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash balance) The following budgeted May 2010 cash information is available for Salado Corp.:
|
Net after tax income
|
$336,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
56,200
|
|
Accrued income tax expense
|
82,000
|
|
Increase in Accounts Receivable for month
|
8,000
|
|
Decrease in Accounts Payable for month
|
7,000
|
|
Estimated bad debts expense
|
4,100
|
|
Dividends declared in May
|
35,000
|
|
Dividends paid in May
|
47,000
|
If Salado’s May 1, 2010, cash balance is $23,000, what is the company’s budgeted May31, 2010, cash balance?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash disbursements) The following budgeted information about Reeves Co. is available for September 2010:
|
Sales for September
|
$2,700,000
|
|
Gross profit on sales
|
40%
|
|
Decrease in Merchandise Inventory during September
|
$ 43,750
|
|
Wages expense for September
|
$ 325,500
|
|
Increase in Wages Payable for September
|
$ 42,000
|
|
Other cash expenses for September
|
$ 245,000
|
|
Decrease in Accounts Payable during September
|
$ 35,000
|
Reeves Co. only uses its Accounts Payable for inventory purchases.
a. How much does Reeves Co. expect to pay for inventory in September 2010?
b. What are total budgeted cash disbursements for September 2010?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Cash budget) The following cash budget is for the third quarter of 2011.Solve for the missing numbers on the cash budget, assuming that the accountant has requested a minimum cash balance of $7,000 at the start of each month. All borrowings, repayments, and investments are made in even $1,000 amounts. No borrowings or investments exist at the beginning of July.
|
|
July
|
August
|
September
|
Total
|
|
Beginning cash balance
|
$ 7,400
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Cash receipts
|
16,400
|
20,200
|
?
|
?
|
|
Total cash available
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$41,000
|
$ 77,800
|
|
Cash disbursements
|
|
|
|
|
|
Payments on account
|
$ ?
|
$ 7,800
|
$11,400
|
$ ?
|
|
Wages expense
|
10,000
|
?
|
12,400
|
34,600
|
|
Overhead costs
|
8,000
|
9,200
|
?
|
26,000
|
|
Total disbursements
|
$20,600
|
$ ?
|
$32,600
|
$ ?
|
|
Cash excess (deficiency)
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
|
Minimum cash balance
|
(7,000)
|
(7,000)
|
?
|
?
|
|
Cash available (needed)
|
$ ?
|
$ (8,800)
|
$ ?
|
$ (11,600)
|
|
Financing
|
|
|
|
|
|
Borrowings (repayments)
|
$ 4,000
|
$ ?
|
$ (1,000)
|
$ ?
|
|
Acquire (sell) investments
|
0
|
0
|
?
|
?
|
|
Receive (pay) interest
|
0
|
0
|
?
|
(20)
|
|
Ending cash balance
|
$ 7,200
|
$ ?
|
$ ?
|
$ 7,380
|
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Various budgets) Compute the required answer for each of the following independent situations.
a. For next year, Penny Suits projects $8,000,000 of sales and total fixed manufacturing costs of $2,000,000. Variable manufacturing costs are estimated at 65 percent of sales. Assuming no change in inventory, what is the company’s projected cost of goods sold?
b. Tommy’s Company has projected the following information for October:
|
Sales
|
$800,000
|
|
Gross profit (based on sales)
|
25%
|
|
Increase in Merchandise Inventory in October
|
$ 20,000
|
|
Decrease in Accounts Payable for October
|
$ 45,000
|
What are expected cash disbursements for inventory purchases for October?
a. Buda Corp. is attempting to budget its overhead costs for March 2011. Overhead is a mixed cost with the following flexible budget formula: y = $250,000 + $17.50X,where X represents machine hours. Fixed overhead includes $95,000 of depreciation. If Buda Corp. expects to utilize 7,500 machine hours in March, what is the company’s budgeted March overhead cost? How much cash will the company pay for budgeted overhead in March?
b. Elizabeth enterprises expects to begin 2011 with a cash balance of $15,000. Cash collections from sales and on account during the year are expected to be $470,500.Th e firm wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $5,000. Budgeted cash disbursements for the year are as follows:
|
Payoff of note payable
|
$ 52,500
|
|
Interest on note payable
|
4,700
|
|
Purchase of computer system
|
17,900
|
|
Payments for operating costs and inventory purchases
|
193,500
|
|
Direct labor payments
|
110,000
|
|
Cash overhead payments
|
106,400
|
|
Cash selling and administrative payments
|
94,800
|
The company can, if necessary, borrow in $1,000 amounts. Prepare a cash budget for 2011.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Budgeted income statement) Last year’s income statement for Cooper Company is as follows:
|
Sales (100,000 X $10)
|
|
$1,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
|
Direct material
|
$400,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
200,000
|
|
|
Overhead
|
100,000
|
(700,000)
|
|
Gross profit
|
|
$ 300,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
|
Selling
|
$104,000
|
|
|
Administrative
|
120,000
|
(224,000)
|
|
Income before taxes
|
|
$ 76,000
|
This year, unit sales are expected to increase by 25 percent; material and labor costs are expected to increase by 10 percent per unit. Overhead is applied to production based on a percentage of direct labor costs. Fixed selling expenses total $24,000; the remainder varies with sales dollars. All administrative costs are fixed.
Management desires to earn 10 percent on sales this year and will adjust the unit selling price if necessary. Develop a budgeted income statement for the year for Cooper Company that incorporates the indicated changes.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing periodic transactions Assume that the following transactions occurred between Springfield Medical Supply and a Brookston drug store during September of the current year.
|
Sep 6
|
Brookston purchased $6,300 of merchandise from Springfield Medical Supply on credit terms of 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. Separately, Brookston paid freight in of $500.
|
|
10
|
Brookston returned $700 of the merchandise to Springfield.
|
|
15
|
Brookston paid $3,150 of the invoice amount owed to Springfield for the September 6 purchase, less the discount.
|
|
27
|
Brookston paid the remaining amount owed to Springfield for the September 6 purchase.
|
Requirement
1. Journalize these transactions, first on the books of the Brookston drug store and second on the books of Springfield Medical Supply. Use the periodic inventory system.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Completing a Merchandiser’s Accounting Cycle The end of month trial balance of St. Paul Technology, Inc., at January 31, 2012, follows:
|
ST. PAUL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Trial Balance January 31, 2012
|
|
Account
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$16,260
|
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
18,930
|
|
|
Inventory
|
65,000
|
|
|
Supplies
|
2,580
|
|
|
Building
|
188,090
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—building
|
|
$35,300
|
|
Furniture
|
44,800
|
|
|
Accumulated depreciation—furniture
|
|
5,500
|
|
Accounts payable
|
|
27,900
|
|
Salary payable
|
|
|
|
Unearned sales revenue
|
|
6,480
|
|
Note payable, long term
|
|
85,000
|
|
Common stock
|
|
58,570
|
|
Retained earnings
|
|
93,620
|
|
Dividends
|
9,100
|
|
|
Sales revenue
|
|
179,930
|
|
Sales discounts
|
7,100
|
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
8,080
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
101,900
|
|
|
Selling expense
|
21,380
|
|
|
General expense
|
9,080
|
|
|
Total
|
$492,300
|
$492,300
|
Additional data at January 31, 2012:
|
a.
|
Supplies consumed during the month, $1,400. Half is selling expense, and the other half is general expense.
|
|
b.
|
Depreciation for the month: building, $3,800; furniture, $4,600. One fourth of depreciation is selling expense, and three fourths is general expense.
|
|
c.
|
Unearned sales revenue earned during January, $4,420.
|
|
d.
|
Accrued salaries, a general expense, $1,100.
|
|
e.
|
Inventory on hand, $63,460. St. Paul uses the perpetual inventory system.
|
Requirements
1. Using four column accounts, open the accounts listed on the trial balance, inserting their unadjusted balances. Date the balances of the following accounts January 1: Supplies; Building; Accumulated depreciation—building; Furniture; Accumulated depreciation— furniture; Unearned sales revenue; Common stock; and Retained earnings. Date the balance of Dividends, January 31. Also open the Income summary account.
2. Enter the trial balance on a worksheet, and complete the worksheet for the month ended January 31, 2012. St. Paul Technology groups all operating expenses under two accounts, Selling expense and General expense. Leave two blank lines under Selling expense and three blank lines under General expense.
3. Prepare the company’s multi step income statement and statement of retained earnings for the month ended January 31, 2012. Also prepare the balance sheet at that date in report form.
4. Journalize the adjusting and closing entries at January 31.
5. Post the adjusting and closing entries.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fossil specializes in designer watches and leather goods. Assume Fossil began June holding 10 wristwatches that cost $50 each. During June, Fossil bought and sold inventory as follows:
|
Jun 3
|
Sold 8 units for $100 each
|
|
16
|
Purchased 10 units @ $56 each
|
|
23
|
Sold 8 units for $100 each
|
Requirements
1. Prepare a perpetual inventory record for Fossil using FIFO, LIFO, and Average cost.
2. Journalize all of Fossil’s inventory transactions for June under all three costing methods.
3. Show the computation of gross profit for each method.
4. Which method maximizes net income? Which method minimizes income taxes?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Suppose Greg’s Tunes, Inc., has the following inventory records for July 2013: Operating expense for July was $1,900.
|
Date
|
Item
|
Quantity
|
Unit Cost
|
Sale Price
|
|
Jul
|
1
|
Beginning inventory
|
100 units
|
$ 8
|
|
|
|
10
|
Purchase
|
60 units
|
9
|
|
|
|
15
|
Sale
|
70 units
|
|
$20
|
|
|
21
|
Purchase
|
100 units
|
10
|
|
|
|
30
|
Sale
|
90 units
|
|
25
|
Requirement
1. Prepare the July income statement in multi step format. Show amounts for FIFO, LIFO, and Average cost. Label the bottom line “Operating income.” Show your computations using periodic inventory, using the income statement on page 326 as your guide to compute cost of goods sold.
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume Nile.com began April with 14 units of inventory that cost a total of $266. During April, Nile purchased and sold goods as follows:
|
Apr
|
8
|
Purchase
|
42 units @ $20
|
|
14
|
Sale
|
35 units @ $40
|
|
22
|
Purchase
|
28 units @ $22
|
|
27
|
Sale
|
42 units @ $40
|
Under the FIFO inventory method, how much is Nile’s cost of goods sold for the sale on April 14?
a. $1,106
b. $686
c. $1,400
d. $700
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. Suppose used the average cost method and the perpetual inventory system. Use the Nile.com data in question 3 to compute the average unit cost of the company’s inventory on hand at April 8. Round unit cost to the nearest cent.
a. $21.00
b. $19.75
c. $19.50
d. Cannot be determined from the data given
2. Which of the following is most closely linked to accounting conservatism?
a. Lower of cost or market rule
b. Materiality concept
c. Disclosure principle
d. Consistency principle
3. At December 31, 2012, Stevenson Company overstated ending inventory by $36,000. How does this error affect cost of goods sold and net income for 2012?
a. Overstates cost of goods sold and understates net income
b. Understates cost of goods sold and overstates net income
c. Leaves both cost of goods sold and net income correct because the errors cancel each other
d. Overstates both cost of goods sold and net income
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Applying the lower of cost or market rule At August 31, the accountant for Mountain Cycles determines that the current replacement cost of each bike is $40.
Requirements
1. Assuming inventory was calculated using the FIFO method, make any adjusting entry needed to apply the lower of cost or market rule. Inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value on August 31?
2. Assuming inventory was calculated using the LIFO method, make any adjusting entry needed to apply the lower of cost or market rule. Inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value on August 31?
3. Assuming inventory was calculated using the average cost method, make any adjusting entry needed to apply the lower of cost or market rule. Inventory would be reported on the balance sheet at what value on August 31?
Aug 30, 2021 | Uncategorized
Effect of an inventory error—one year only California Pool Supplies’ inventory data for the year ended December 31, 2012, follow:
|
Sales revenue
|
$ 60,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
$ 4,200
|
|
Net purchases
|
26,600
|
|
Cost of goods available
|
$ 30,800
|
|
Ending inventory
|
(6,200)
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$ 24,600
|
|
Gross profit
|
$ 35,400
|
Assume that the ending inventory was accidentally overstated by $2,400.
Requirement
1. What are the correct amounts for cost of goods sold and gross profit?